,,the ,,boy ,,mechanic ,,book #b ,illustration3 ,,four-,,passenger ,,coasting ,,bobsled ,see ,page #bd ,,the ,,boy ,,mechanic ,,book #b #ajjj ,,things ,,for ,,boys ,,to ,,do ,,how ,,to ,,construct ,,devices ,,for ,,winter ,,sports1 ,,motion-,,picture ,,camera1 ,,indoor ,,games1 ,,reed ,,furniture1 ,,electrical ,,novelties1 ,,boats1 ,,fishing ,,rods1 ,,camps ,,and ,,camp ,,appliances1 ,,kites ,,and ,,gliders1 ,,pushmobiles1 ,,roller ,,coaster1 ,,ferris ,,wheel ,,and ,,hundreds ,,of ,,other ,,things ,,which ,,delight ,,every ,,boy ,,with #iie ,,illustrations ,,copyrighted1 #aiae1 ,,by ,h4 ,h4 ,,windsor ,,chicago ,,popular ,,mechanics ,,co4 ,,publishers 99 99 99 99 99 ,transcriber's ,note3 ,this etext differs from the original as follows4 ,two minor typographical errors were found and corrected4 ,in the chapters on making fly-fishing rods 7pages #ei-ga71 several lists of materials or dimensions that were printed as running text have been reformatted as lists for clarity4 ,the text is unchanged4 99 99 99 99 99 ,illustration3 ,after the ,first ,station has been ,selected1 ,it is ,marked by a ,pile of ,stones1 a ,stake1 or1 ,if ,precise ,work is to be ,done1 a ,tack in the ,top of a ,stake4 ,the ,table is ,then ,set ,up over ,this ,station ,point and ,leveled ,so ,that the ,surface of the ,paper will ,be ,truly ,horizontal 7,inset3 ,,uncle ,,john',s ,,farm ,scale #a_/af #a' ,jimmy ,smith--,surveyor7 ,illustration3 ,the ,boy ,surveyor ,plane-,table ,surveying ,by ,harold ,g4 ,mc,gee ,in the training of a boy for a trade or profession there is none so profitable for outdoor work as that of a surveyor4 ,this article sets forth how to accomplish surveying and the making of simple maps with the use of commonplace tools that any boy can make4--,editor4 ,surveying and map making have always been two of the most interesting things a civil engineer has had to do4 ,and1 like ,george ,washington1 many of the men we look up to today as successes in different lines worked as surveyors in their younger days4 ,surveying takes one out of doors1 and is apt to lead him into the unknown and unexplored byways of the earth4 ,though modern surveyors often use precise and expensive instruments1 creditable surveys can be made with simple and inexpensive apparatus4 ,of such apparatus1 two of the simplest are the plane table and the camera4 ,since one must know the principles of plane-table surveying before he can do camera surveying1 this paper will describe the plane table alone1 leaving the camera for another chapter4 ,a plane table is simply a drawing board mounted on a tripod so that it can be set up and worked upon in the field4 ,one kind of plane table1 which is used in the army for reconnaissance1 does not even have a tripod2 it is simply strapped to the arm of the man who is using it4 ,plane-table maps vary greatly in scale and the area they represent4 ,landscape artists' plans may show only single city lots1 while some topographic maps cover hundreds of square miles on a single sheet4 ,for maps of a small farm1 a park1 or a residence block in the city1 a plane table is almost ideal1 since plane-table maps are made with rather simple apparatus and do not require much actual measuring on the ground4 ,most objects are located without ever going to them1 or even sending a rod-man to them4 ,illustration3 ,just a ,few ,weeks ,after ,george ,washington's ,sixteenth ,birthday1 in #agdh1 ,lord ,fairfax1 ,owner of a ,large ,estate in ,virginia1 ,took ,him into ,his ,employ as a ,surveyor ,besides the plane table itself and a sheet of paper1 only a small carpenter's level1 a tape to measure a few distances with1 and some spikes for markers1 a hard lead pencil1 a ruler1 and a few needles are absolutely necessary for this sort of a map4 ,illustration3 ,three ,stations are ,used for ,setting the ,plane ,table in ,succession to ,locate the ,various ,objects ,,table ,,at ,,sta4 ,a - ,,table ,,at ,,sta4 ,b - ,,table ,,at ,,sta4 ,c ,to start a plane-table map1 a station must first be selected from which as many as possible of the objects to be located on the finished map can be seen4 ,ordinarily1 the objects one would locate are corners of buildings1 fence corners1 intersections of roads1 corners of lots1 banks of streams1 possibly trees1 and section and quarter-section corners in the country4 ,a railroad1 a lake1 a mountain1 or anything which forms a noticeable landmark in any particular locality1 ought to be on the map4 ,in mapping a territory which has never been surveyed before1 the first surveyor may name the hills and streams4 ,after the first station has been selected1 it is marked by a pile of stones1 a stake1 or1 if precise work is to be done1 a tack in the top of a stake4 ,the table is then set up over this station point and leveled so that the surface of the paper will be truly horizontal4 ,generally1 too1 the board is oriented1 that is1 placed so that two of its edges point north and south and two east and west4 ,it is then clamped so that it will not move while working on it4 ,to begin the map1 a point on the table is chosen to represent the station on the ground over which the table is set4 ,this point is marked by sticking a fine needle into the paper1 vertically4 ,a small triangle should be drawn around the needle hole in the paper and labeled ,sta4 ,a1 so that it will not be lost in the maze of points which will soon cover the sheet4 ,by sighting past this needle toward some object which is wanted on the map1 like the corner of a house1 its direction can be marked by setting another needle on the far side of the table1 in line with the first and the given object4 ,then1 if a ruler or straightedge be placed against these two needles and a fine line drawn connecting them1 this line will show the exact direction of the object from ,sta4 ,a4 ,all the other objects which are wanted on the finished map and can be seen from ,sta4 ,a are located by direction in the same way4 ,the first points to have their direction thus marked ought to be the next stations to be occupied4 ,if all the objects to be located can be seen from three stations1 or even two of three stations1 three stations will be sufficient4 ,the distance to one of them from ,sta4 ,a should be carefully measured and laid off to scale along its direction line on the map4 ,its place on the map should be marked exactly as the first station was1 substituting ,b for ,a4 ,it is wise1 after every few sights at other objects1 to take a sight along the line ,,ab to make sure that the board has not turned4 ,a good map is impossible if the board twists4 ,to measure the distance between stations1 a #ej or #ajj-;ft4 tape1 or some accurate substitute1 is necessary4 ,an ordinary piece of iron telegraph wire1 #aje ft4 long1 is a good substitute4 ,a point1 about #b-a_/b ft4 from one end1 is marked with a little lump of solder4 ,a chisel dent in this solder will mark one end of the #ajj-;ft4 section4 ,then1 with a borrowed tape or a good rule1 measure off and mark every #aj ft41 just as the first point was marked1 until the entire #ajj ft4 have been laid off4 ,the last #aj ft4 should be divided into feet4 ,in all this measuring and marking1 the wire must be stretched out taut and straight4 ,the extra #b-a_/b ft4 at each end are used for making handles4 ,by estimating the tenths of a foot1 measurements can be made with such a tape1 or chain1 as an old-time surveyor might call it1 just as accurately as they can be laid off on the map4 ,illustration3 ,an ,alidade1 ,consisting of ,two ,sights and a ,straightedge1 ,takes the ,place of the ,two ,needles ,illustration ,two men are required for measuring1 or chaining1 a head and a rear chainman4 ,the rear chainman holds the #ajj-;ft4 end of the tape on the station point1 while the head chainman takes his end forward toward the station to which they are measuring4 ,when he has gone nearly the length of the tape1 the rear chainman calls halt4 ,the head chainman stops and draws the tape up tight1 while the rear chainman holds his division end on the starting point4 ,then the head chainman sticks a spike into the ground to mark the place where his division end comes1 calls out stuck1 and starts on toward the object point4 ,large spikes make good marking pins1 especially if they have little red or white strips of cloth tied to them4 ,surveyors use #aa markers4 ,one is stuck into the ground at the starting point and is carried forward by the rear chainman1 who also picks up the markers at each #ajj-;ft4 point as soon as the head chainman calls stuck4 ,in this way1 the number of markers which the rear chainman has in his hand is always the same as the number of hundreds of feet which the last set marker is from the starting point4 ,in measuring between two points1 care must be taken to draw the tape out taut and straight1 its two ends must be level with each other1 and it must be exactly in line with the two points between which the measurement is being made4 ,in measuring downhill1 one end may have to be held up high1 and the point on the ground where the end division would come1 found by dropping a stone from the place where it is in the air and watching for the spot where the rock strikes the ground4 ,a surer way to do this is to hold a plumb-bob string on the last division and carefully let the bob down until it touches the ground4 ,a rod with a red or white flag on it ought to be placed at or just beyond the point to which the measurement is to be made so that the rear chainman can easily line in the head chainman4 ,the latter1 before he places his marker1 looks back to the rear chainman to be told whether or not he is on line with the object point4 ,if he is not1 and ought to go to the rear chainman's right to get on1 the latter holds out his right arm and the head chainman moves accordingly4 ,when he reaches the right point1 the rear chainman signals all right by holding out both of his arms and then dropping them to his side2 the marker is stuck1 and both move up a hundred feet and repeat the process4 ,after all the points possible have been located from ,sta4 ,a1 and the direction lines labeled lightly in pencil so that they can be distinguished when the board has been removed from the station1 the plane table is picked up and carried to ,sta4 ,b4 ,here it is again set up1 leveled1 and oriented by making the direction of the line ,,ab on the paper exactly the same as that of the line from ,sta4 ,a to ,sta4 ,b on the ground4 ,this is done by placing needles at points ,a and ,b on the table and then turning the board until the two needles and ,sta4 ,a are in line4 ,sights are taken on the same objects which were shot at ,sta4 ,a1 and to objects which were not visible from ,sta4 ,a4 ,the intersection of the lines of sight toward a given object from ,a and from ,b marks the location on the paper of that object4 ,if the two ends of a straight fence have been located in this way1 a straight line joining the points will show the location of the fence on the map4 ,by exactly similar methods1 every other object is located on the paper4 ,in order to avoid errors1 it is an excellent scheme to locate three stations near the outside edges of the area to be mapped1 and locate all objects possible by sights from each of the three stations4 ,if1 instead of all three crossing each other at a point1 the lines of sight from the three stations form a triangle1 something is wrong4 ,if the triangle is very small1 it may be safe to use its center as the correct point2 if not1 the work must be repeated and checked4 ,locating even a few points by this method may prevent some bad blunders4 ,the three stations ought to form as nearly as possible1 an equilateral triangle2 and the distances between all of them should be measured and laid out accurately on the plane table4 ,illustration3 ,a ,rigid ,tripod is ,made of ,strips for ,legs1 ,which are ,fastened to a ,large ,top ,there are two ways in which the map may be finished1 inked1 or traced4 ,by drawing in the culture1 that is1 the things built by man1 like the houses1 the fences1 the roads1 and the railroads1 in black ink2 the topography1 that is1 the hills and valleys1 in brown2 the water1 in blue1 and then erasing all the construction lines1 a very neat map can be made4 ,another way is to get some onion-skin paper1 or some tracing cloth1 tack it over the penciled map1 and trace the lines right through1 using black ,india ink4 ,this tracing can be blueprinted1 just as a photographic film4 ,a plain1 neat title1 describing location of map2 who made it and when2 the scale used2 why it was made1 if it was made for a special purpose1 and the direction of the north point1 ought to be on every map4 ,the topographic sheets published by the ,united ,states ,geological ,survey are good samples to follow4 ,they have been published for a great many places all over the country1 and single copies can be obtained by sending #aj cents to the ,director1 ,united ,states ,geological ,survey1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,from an ,original ,drawing of a ,survey of ,mount ,vernon1 ,made by ,george ,washington at the ,age of #ad ,plane tables are almost as easily made as they are bought4 ,if there is no old drawing board around the house1 a new bread board from the ten-cent store will serve4 ,for ordinary work1 a table which is #ae or #bj in4 square will do very well4 ,the board must be mounted on a tripod so that it will be rigid while it is being worked upon and yet can be unclamped and oriented4 ,a brass plate1 with a hole in it and a nut soldered over the hole1 screwed to the bottom of the board will permit the board and tripod to be bolted together in good shape4 ,another method1 which is not nearly as good1 is to drill a hole clear through the board1 countersink it on top for a bolt head1 and bolt the board and tripod head directly together4 ,with the brass plate and nut1 the camera tripod can be pressed into service if a nut of the proper size has been used4 ,the camera tripod is1 however1 apt to be wabbly with a drawing board on top2 a much more satisfactory tripod can be built as shown in the accompanying drawings4 ,each leg is made of two strips of wood1 #c_/d by #c_/h in4 and #c ft4 long4 ,these strips are screwed together at their lower ends1 gripping a spike between them which will prevent the legs from slipping on the ground4 ,the tops of the strips are spread apart and screwed to the opposite ends of an oak or maple cleat4 ,this cleat is1 in turn1 screwed to the under side of the circular tripod head4 ,in place of the two needles and the ruler described for marking the line of sight1 most plane-table men use an alidade1 which is a combination of two sights and a straightedge4 ,a very simple alidade may be made by mounting two needles on a ruler4 ,the straight edge of the ruler is placed against the needle which marks the station at which the plane table is set up4 ,then1 by swinging the ruler around this needle until its two sighting needles come in line with some object1 the line of sight can be drawn directly on the paper along the edge of the ruler4 ,a surveyor in ,india once made an alidade out of a piece of straightedge and two sights made of native coins hammered out by a native blacksmith4 ,two pieces of cigar box1 one with a fine vertical saw slit in it1 and the other with a vertical slot and a piece of fine wire or silk thread stretched down the center1 glued to a well planed1 straight1 flat piece of wood1 make a fine alidade4 ,a careful worker may be able to put his sights on hinges so that they will fold down when not in use4 ,more than anything else1 map making rewards care and accuracy1 and shows up slipshod workmanship4 ,if the pencils are sharp1 the lines fine1 and if the work is checked often1 beautiful maps can be made with very simple apparatus4 99 99 99 99 99 ,white marks on waxed surfaces may be removed by rubbing lightly with a soft rag moistened in alcohol1 after which rub with raw linseed oil4 ,machine for ,sketching ,pictures ,an ordinary drawing board1 with the attachments shown1 provides an easy way to sketch pictures1 even if one is not proficient in this line of work4 ,it is only necessary to look through the sight and move the pencil about so that the knot in the thread follows the outline of the landscape or object being drawn4 ,illustration3 ,this ,machine ,aids a ,person in ,drawing the ,true ,outline of a ,picture ,the size of the machine depends on the one building it1 but a fair-sized drawing board is sufficient for the beginner4 ,a strip of wood is fastened to the board1 near one edge1 which has a metal piece on each end1 fastened to the under side and bent up over the end to form an extension for the rod to support the moving parts4 ,the strip of wood should be #c_/d in4 wide and #a_/d in4 thick1 and the sliding arm1 holding the pencil1 #a_/b in4 wide and #a_/d in4 thick4 ,a like strip1 but much shorter than the one fastened to the board1 is also fitted with metal pieces in an inverted position so the projections will be downward4 ,a #c_/af-;in4 rod is run through holes in the metal pieces of the strips at both ends1 and soldered to those on the strip fastened to the board4 ,this will make a hinged joint1 as well as one that will allow the upper strip to slide horizontally4 ,centrally located on the upper strip are two more strips1 fastened with screws at right angles to the former1 with a space between them of #a_/b in4 for the sliding center piece holding the pencil4 ,these pieces are further braced with a wire at the back1 and crosspieces are screwed both on top and under side1 to make a rigid guide for the sliding pencil holder4 ,an upright is fastened to the side of one of these pieces over the center of the upper horizontal sliding piece for a screw eye to hold the thread4 ,another screw eye is turned into the crosspiece just under the one on the support1 so that the thread will run perpendicularly between them4 ,two more screw eyes are fastened1 one into the upper surface of the rear crosspiece1 and the other in the end of the pencil holder1 near the pencil4 ,by connecting these screw eyes1 as shown1 with a thread1 having a rubber band fastened in the rear end and a knot tied in it near the screw eye in the upper end of the vertical stick1 a means for following the outlines of the picture is provided4 ,a vertical stick is fastened to the front edge of the board by means of a notch and wedge4 ,in the upper end of this stick a very small hole is bored for a sight1 similar to a peep sight on a rifle4 ,to use the machine1 set the board on a table1 or tripod1 and level it up in front of the object to be drawn4 ,look through the sight at the front of the board and move the pencil about to keep the knot of the thread on the outlines of the picture to be drawn4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,c4 ,coppess1 ,union ,city1 ,ind4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a walnut filler is made of #c lb4 burnt ,turkey umber1 #a lb4 of burnt ,italian sienna1 both ground in oil1 then mixed to a paste with #a qt4 of turpentine and #a pt4 of japan drier4 ,illustration3 ,,the ,,boy ,,surveyor ,camera ,surveying ,by ,harold ,g4 ,mc,gee ,this article explains the preparation of the camera for taking the pictures at each of the three stations1 after which the plates are developed1 printed and kept until a convenient time may be had for plotting the ground4 ,the succeeding article will give in detail the making of the map from the photographs4--,editor4 ,camera surveying is simply plane-table surveying in which the landscape has been photographically picked up and carried indoors4 ,it has the enormous advantage that one can obtain a record of the utmost fidelity in a small fraction of the time taken to do the field work of even a sketchy plane-table survey1 and that plotting can be done in the comfort and with the conveniences of a drafting room4 ,when the hours one can work are short or the periods of clear1 dry weather are few and far between1 a camera is an ideal surveying instrument4 ,it sees and records with the click of the shutter4 ,surveying by camera was proposed early in the infant days of photography2 but not until the eighties were photographic surveys commenced in earnest4 ,with the extensive surveys of the ,canadian ,rockies by the ,canadian government within the past decade and the topographic surveys of the ,alps1 the camera has very recently indeed achieved the dignity of being known as a sure-enough surveying instrument4 ,even today1 few surveyors have ever used photography for making surveys1 even though for mountain topography or any survey which includes a large number of distinctive1 inaccessible landmarks1 the camera asks no odds of either the plane table or the stadia transit4 ,a camera survey taken of the summer cottage or the camping ground will be a source of great delight while it is being plotted up of winter evenings4 ,there is something weird in watching each tent and dock slip into its place with naught but a pair of dividers and a few pictures to do the trick4 ,and when the map is done1 there are all the data to tell just where a tennis court can go or a walk ought to be built4 ,in making surveys1 a plate camera will do more accurate work than will a film camera2 and a fixed focus is a big help in plotting4 ,in spite of the special and expensive instruments which have been designed solely for surveying work1 a little ingenuity on the part of the owner of most any kind of a camera1 be it big or little1 film or plate1 box or folding1 will do wonders toward producing good results4 ,illustration3 ,a ,t-,shaped ,level with ,adjusting ,nuts is ,located on the ,camera ,box1 or on the ,bed of the ,folding ,camera ,to be used for surveying1 a camera must be fitted with a spirit level and some arrangement for cross hairs4 ,a ,t-shaped level on the bed or the box1 carefully adjusted1 will show when the plate is vertical and when the perpendicular line from the center of the plate to the center of the lens is horizontal4 ,actual cross hairs in the camera are not as good as four tiny points of ,v's1 one projecting from the middle of each side1 top1 and bottom of the camera box1 just in front of the plate holder4 ,how the level is to be adjusted so that a line between the upper and lower points will be truly vertical1 and one through the die-side points truly horizontal and on a level with the center of the lens when the bubbles are in the center of the spirit level1 will be described later4 ,illustration3 ,to ,prepare a ,camera for ,surveying1 ,it is ,necessary to ,arrange ,that the ,axial ,center ,line through ,lens to the ,plate ,shall be ,level 7,inset3 ,the ,camera is ,set ,up1 ,complete with ,thread or ,pencil-,line ,cross ,hairs and ,level1 ,then ,focused on a ,stake so ,that ,its ,top will ,just ,come to the ,horizontal ,cross ,hair at the ,center of the ,plate ,when the ,level ,tube ,parallel with the ,center ,line of ,lens ,reads ,level7 ,camera ,preparation ,to prepare a camera for surveying1 it is necessary to arrange that the axial center line through the lens to the plate shall be level1 and that the location of the horizontal and vertical center lines shall be indicated on the plate4 ,a spirit level is the best solution of the first problem1 and indicated center points of the second4 ,the spirit level preferably may be of the ,t-form1 with two level tubes1 or of the universal circular form1 with which some hand cameras are equipped4 ,however1 ordinary hand-camera levels are generally too rough and difficult of adjustment to insure accurate work4 ,on a view camera1 the level may be conveniently located on the bed which carries the lens board4 ,if it is screwed to the under side of the arms it will be convenient for use and out of the way4 ,the bed is likewise a good location for the level on a folding hand camera1 while the top of the box is about the only possible location with a box-type instrument4 ,the cross hairs or center-line indicators should be placed on the back of the camera1 just in front of the plate4 ,if indicators are used1 fine-thread cross hairs or pencil lines drawn on the ground glass must be used temporarily for making adjustments4 ,generally1 the two cross hairs will divide the plate vertically and horizontally into four equal parts and the hairs or indicators will join the center point of the sides and top and bottom of the opening immediately in front of the plate4 ,but it is essential that the cross hairs have their intersection in a line perpendicular to the plate and passing through the center of the lens4 ,thus in a camera in which the lens is not placed in the center of the plate1 or in which the rising and sliding front has placed the lens off center1 either or both of the cross hairs may be off center with regard to the plate4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ordinary ,round ,level may be ,used1 but ,it ,is ,not so ,good as the ,t-,level ,after the cross-hair indicators and the level have been attached to the camera1 adjustments are necessary4 ,surveyors distinguish between permanent and temporary adjustments1 permanent adjustments being those for which the instrument maker is responsible1 and temporary adjustments being those which can be and are made in the field4 ,the principal permanent or maker's adjustments of the surveying camera are those which insure the center line through the lens1 or axial center line1 or line of collimation1 being perpendicular to the plate1 the intersection of the cross hairs being on this line1 and that the cross hairs themselves are mutually perpendicular4 ,temporary or field adjustments must be so made that one tube of the spirit level shall be parallel with the axial center line through the lens and the other parallel with the horizontal cross hair4 ,illustration3 ,the ,cross ,hairs or ,center-,line ,indicators should be ,placed on the ,back of the ,camera ,the first field adjustment is made in the following manner4 ,the camera is set up1 complete with thread or pencil-line cross hairs and level1 and focused on a stake whose top shall just come to the horizontal cross hair at the center of the plate1 when the level tube parallel with the center line of the lens reads level4 ,this stake may be driven to the required elevation or a rod may be held on it and the point where1 in the image on the ground glass1 it is intersected by the cross hair marked with pencil on the rod as it is held vertically on the stake4 ,the distance to this stake is measured from the camera and another similar stake set at the same elevation by the same method1 but in an opposite direction and at the same distance from the camera4 ,the two stakes or the mark on the vertical rod which is held on these stakes in turn will be level with each other1 though they may not be level with the camera4 ,the camera is then moved to a point very much closer to one stake than to the other and again leveled4 ,the vertical distance from one stake-top or mark on the rod is measured and the camera then focused on the second stake4 ,if the level is actually in adjustment1 the distance from the second stake top or mark will be exactly the same as it was on the first4 ,if not1 the difference1 or error1 is found between the two vertical distances from the cross hair to the two stake tops4 ,half this error is corrected by raising or lowering one end of the level tube by means of the threaded nuts which are placed on it for the purpose4 ,the whole process is then repeated until the vertical distances from the horizontal cross hair at the center to the two level stakes1 one close to and one distant from the camera1 are identical4 ,the axial center line of the lens1 or the line of collimation1 is then in adjustment with the level4 ,all that remains is to make the horizontal cross hair parallel with the cross level4 ,illustration3 ,the ,maker's ,adjustments ,should ,insure the ,line of ,collimation being ,perpendicular to the ,plate ,this is done by using one marked stake4 ,the camera is leveled as far as the fore-and-aft level is concerned and the horizontal cross-hair point at the center marked on the stake4 ,the camera is then swung round until the stake just shows on one edge of the ground glass1 the fore-and-aft or longitudinal level being checked to make sure its bubble is still in the center4 ,then the bubble in the cross or transverse level tube is brought to the center by means of the threaded adjusting nuts1 and the camera is thrown hard over so that the stake appears along the opposite edge of the plate4 ,this time1 the bubble of the longitudinal level being kept in the center1 half the error introduced by turning from one edge to the other is corrected4 ,all of the adjustments are then rechecked1 and if they are found correct the instrument is ready for use4 ,if a circular level be used1 the method of adjustment is exactly the same1 the swing of the bubble along the axis of the camera and transverse to it being used to determine the longitudinal and transverse adjustments4 ,slips of paper may be used for lifting one side in place of the adjustment nuts of the ,t-level4 ,a leveling head or ball-and-socket joint on the top of the tripod will be found of material aid in leveling the instrument4 ,no great mechanical genius is necessary to prepare a camera for or to make a successful camera survey4 ,but if a boy have not patience and an infinite desire for accuracy1 camera surveying1 or indeed any sort of surveying1 will be a source of neither pleasure1 satisfaction1 nor profit4 ,to ,make ,transparent ,paper ,transparent paper of parchmentlike appearance and strength1 which can be dyed with almost all kinds of aniline dyes and assumes much more brilliant hues than ordinary colored glass1 can be made in the following manner3 ,procure a white paper1 made of cotton or linen rags1 and put it to soak in a saturated solution of camphor in alcohol4 ,when dry1 the paper so treated can be cut up into any forms suitable for parts of lamp shades1 etc4 ,toasting ,bread over an ,open ,fire ,having experienced some difficulty in obtaining good toast over a gas or open fire ,i tried the following plan with good results3 ,an old tin pan was placed over the flame and the ordinary wire bread toaster clasping the slice of bread was held about #a_/b in4 from the pan4 ,in a few minutes the toast was crisp and ready to serve4--,contributed by ,katy ,doherty1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,adjustable ,stilts ,the beginner with stilts always selects short sticks so that he will not be very far from the ground1 but as he becomes more experienced1 the longer the sticks the better4 ,then1 too1 the small boy and the large boy require different lengths of sticks4 ,the device shown makes a pair of sticks universal for use of beginners or a boy of any age or height4 ,illustration3 ,stilts ,having ,stirrups ,that can be ,set at ,any ,desired ,height ,to make the stilts1 procure two long sticks of even length1 and smooth up the edges2 then begin at a point #a ft4 from one end and bore #ab holes1 #c_/h in4 in diameter and #b in4 apart from center to center4 ,if there is no diestock at hand1 have a blacksmith1 or mechanic1 make a thread on both ends of a #c_/h-;in4 rod1 #ab in4 long4 ,bend the rod in the shape shown1 so that the two threaded ends will be just #b in4 apart from center to center4 ,the thread on the straight horizontal end should be so long that a nut can be placed on both sides of the stick4 ,a piece of a garden hose or small rubber hose1 slipped on the rod1 will keep the shoe sole from slipping4 ,the steps can be set in any two adjacent holes to give the desired height4--,contributed by ,walter ,veene1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,grape ,arbor ,built of ,poles ,in building outdoor structures1 such as grape arbors1 pergolas1 or arches1 it is not necessary to use sawed lumber1 as they can be built as substantial1 and frequently more artistic and cheap1 of poles4 ,these are easily obtained1 especially in the country or in the smaller cities where there usually are many trees and gardens4 ,illustration3 ,arbor ,made of ,poles ,which are ,supported by ,one ,row of ,uprights 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the illustrated grape arbor consists of but one row of uprights4 ,across the top of each is placed a horizontal support for the roof poles1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 which is carried near its outer end by an inclined brace4 ,the brace should be connected at each end with a toe joint1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the upper end of the upright is beveled off on both sides1 to form a double-splayed joint with the crosspiece4 ,in order to securely bind the roof of the arbor1 the long poles1 or roof beams1 should be notched near each end to fit over the supports4 ,similar notches in the poles forming the side of the arbor are to fit the uprights1 thereby binding them together and preventing toppling over4 ,each set of long poles connecting two uprights should have the end notches the same distance apart1 one pole being used as a gauge4 ,all the joints and notches may be cut with a sharp hatchet4 ,in setting the arbor1 the uprights should first be assembled complete with braces and roof supports1 and placed in the ground a distance apart corresponding to that of the notches on the long poles4 ,the uprights being set1 the long poles are placed and fastened with nails4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,ohio4 ,forcing ,fruit ,blossoms for ,decorations ,twigs trimmed from the fruit trees rather late in the season had quite large buds on them1 and we experimented with them in this way3 ,a large box was filled with wet sand1 and the twigs were stuck in it and the box set in the warmest corner of the yard4 ,the buds soon swelled and burst into bloom4 ,we then arranged a smaller box of sand and put the blooming twigs into it1 and took it into the house where they remained fresh for several days4--,contributed by ,a4 ,louise ,culver1 ,oakland1 ,cal4 ,corner ,cleaner ,attached to a ,scrubbing ,brush ,illustration ,dirt will accumulate and harden in the corners of a floor and the baseboard just because the end of the scrubbing brush will not enter them4 ,the water gets in with the dirt and leaves a hard crust4 ,this may be easily cleaned out if a metal point is attached to the end of the brush handle1 as shown in the illustration4 ,it is used as a scraper to break up the crust and clean it out where the bristles will not enter4--,contributed by ,l4 ,e4 ,turner1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,illustration3 ,the ,boy ,surveyor ,plotting a ,camera ,survey ,by ,harold ,g4 ,mc,gee ,the camera records pictures that can be taken in camp or on a vacation trip and kept until more leisure may be had in winter for plotting the ground4--,editor4 ,a previously measured base triangle with stations at each corner is necessary for making a camera survey1 just as it is for the plane-table survey4 ,it is preferable to have each of the three sides measured independently1 though if one side has been accurately chained1 the other two may be less satisfactorily determined by the use of the plane table4 ,if the camera has a fixed focus1 it is possible to make an entire survey from the two ends of a single base line2 but this method has no check and should be used only when and where the triangle method is impossible4 ,with an adjustable focus1 it will rarely give good results4 ,illustration3 ,two ,fine ,hair ,lines must be ,scratched on ,each ,plate ,before ,it is ,used to ,plot ,from1 or to ,make ,pictures from ,which the ,plotting is ,done ,once the triangle has been laid out1 the fieldwork is very simple4 ,the camera is set up at one station1 carefully leveled1 and then a series of pictures is taken1 each single plate overlapping the last so as to form a panorama of the area to be mapped4 ,the focus of the lens must not be changed during a series1 and plotting is facilitated by keeping the focus constant during all the exposures which make up a survey4 ,to secure good depth of focus1 a small stop is generally used1 since it is necessary to use a tripod to keep the camera level4 ,if contours are to be drawn1 the height of the lens above the ground at the station should be measured and recorded4 ,after a series has been taken at each station1 the fieldwork is complete4 ,it is an excellent plan to keep a record of the plate numbers1 and the order in which and the station from which the exposures were made1 so that the #aj or #ab plates which a small survey will comprise may not get hopelessly mixed up4 ,if the camera is turned each time to the right1 clockwise1 and the plates are numbered ,a-#a1 ,a-#b1 ,b-#d1 etc41 indicating by ,a-#a1 for example1 the leftmost plate taken at ,sta4 ,a2 by ,a-#b1 the plate just to the right of ,a-#a1 just as ,,ii is to the right of ,i on the clock dial1 and by ,b-#d1 the fourth to the right taken at ,sta4 ,b1 there ought to be no difficulty in identifying the plates after the exact details of the ground are forgotten4 ,illustration3 ,plot of the ,ground as ,it ,should ,appear ,after ,locating the ,objects as ,they are ,shown on the ,pictures from ,each ,point of the ,triangle ,while the pictures are being taken1 flags of white wood or with white-cloth streamers tied to them must be stuck in the ground or held at the other stations in order that their exact location can be readily and certainly found on the plates4 ,a few distinctive stakes1 some with one and some with two or three strips of cloth tied to them1 placed at important points on the ground will help immensely in the location of knolls and shore lines4 ,in plotting a camera survey1 either the original plates1 the prints1 or enlargements may be used4 ,the plates are the most accurate if a corrected lens has been used2 and the enlargements made back through the lens will be best if the images on the plates are distorted4 ,in any case1 two fine hair lines must be scratched on each plate before it is used to plot from1 or to make the prints from which the plotting is to be done4 ,one of these lines should connect the points at the top and bottom of the plate1 and the other1 the points at the sides4 ,the vertical line divides the objects which were on the right of the center of the camera from those that were on the left1 and the horizontal line connecting the points on the sides separates the objects that were above the camera from those that were below4 ,if the survey has been made with a lens that does not cover the plate fully or that has considerable uncorrected aberration1 causing distorted shapes near the edges and corners of the picture1 results can be materially improved by plotting from enlargements4 ,in making the enlargements1 the back of the camera should be removed and the light should be allowed to pass through the plate and the lens in the reverse order and direction of that in which it passed when the negative was made4 ,in this way1 the errors which were made by the lens originally will be straightened out1 and the resulting enlargements will be free from distortion4 ,to make successful enlargements for surveying work1 the easel on which the bromide paper is tacked must be square with the camera1 and the paper itself should be flat and smooth4 ,it is just as necessary to keep the easel at a constant distance from the camera during the enlarging as it was to keep the same focus while the original negatives were being made4 ,illustration3 ,in ,plotting a ,camera ,survey the ,base ,triangle is ,first ,carefully ,laid ,out on the ,paper to ,such a ,scale ,that the ,map will be of ,desirable ,size ,in plotting a camera survey the base triangle is first carefully laid out on the paper to such a scale that the map will be of a desirable size4 ,with the apex of the triangle representing ,sta4 ,a1 say1 as a center1 a circle is drawn with a radius as nearly equal as possible to the distance between the optical center of the lens and the plate when the picture was taken4 ,ordinarily this will be the focal length of the lens2 but if the camera was not focused most sharply on an object a great distance off1 the radius may be greater4 ,this radius is called the mapping constant4 ,when an approximate distance for the mapping constant has been determined by measurements on the camera or by knowing the focal length of the lens1 the circle1 or rather the arc1 ,,fg between the two lines to stations ,b and ,c1 is drawn4 ,the plates taken at ,sta4 ,a1 and ranged around this circle on the outside and just touching it1 will show the landscape exactly as seen from ,a4 ,in the accompanying diagram showing the method of determining the mapping constant and of locating the traces of the plates1 the letters ,f1 ,g1 ,h1 ,j1 ,p1 ,r and ,s designate points referring to the true mapping constant1 and the construction necessary to locate the traces of the plates4 ,the primed letters ,f'1 ,f''1 ,g'1 ,g''1 etc41 are used to show similar points where the trial mapping constant is either too long or too short4 ,the following description refers equally to the construction necessary with true or trial-mapping constants4 ,next1 a line ,,fh is drawn perpendicular to the line ,,ab of the triangle at the point ,f where the arc intersects it4 ,on this line is laid off1 in the proper direction1 a distance equal to the distance on the plate or print from ,sta4 ,b to the center vertical line4 ,from this point is drawn a light line1 ,,hj1 toward the center of the arc4 ,where this line crosses the arc1 at ,j1 a tangent1 ,,kjm1 is drawn1 which will show the location of the plate ,a-#a on the drawing4 ,this line is called the trace of the plate4 ,an object which appears both on plate ,a-#a and ,a-#b is next picked out and its location on the trace of plate ,a-#a determined by measuring the distance ,,jn equal to the distance on the plate from the image of the object to the center vertical line4 ,a light line1 ,,no1 joining this last-found point with ,sta4 ,a1 is then drawn4 ,where this last line crosses the arc1 at ,o1 a tangent1 ,,op1 to the arc is drawn1 and the trace of the plate ,a-#b is found with the aid of the point which appears on both plates just as plate ,a-#a was located from the picture of ,sta4 ,b4 ,the traces of plates ,a-#c and ,a-#d are found in exactly the same way as was that of ,a-#b4 ,if the radius of the arc has been estimated correctly1 ,sta4 ,c will be found to be exactly on the point where the trace of the plate showing the station crosses the line ,,ac on the paper4 ,if it does not fall on the line ,,ac1 which is generally the case1 everything must be erased except the original triangle4 ,first1 however1 a radial line ,s',g'1 or ,s'',g''1 is drawn from the location of ,sta4 ,c on the trace of the plate ,a-#b1 #c or #d1 as the case may be1 to the arc1 and the point of intersection of this line and the arc1 ,g' or ,g''1 is preserved4 ,if this point1 ,g' or ,g''1 is outside the base triangle1 the next trial arc should be drawn with a larger mapping constant as a radius1 or vice versa4 ,if the second mapping constant is off1 find again the point of intersection of the radial line through the new location of ,sta4 ,c on the newly located trace of the last plate and the new arc4 ,join this point and the one found previously1 in the same manner1 with a straight line1 ,g',g''4 ,the point ,g where this last drawn line intersects the line ,,ac of the base triangle1 will be the point through which the arc1 with the correct mapping constant as radius1 ought to pass1 provided the first two approximations were not too far in error4 ,this third trial ought to make the location of the traces of the plates exactly correct4 ,if1 however1 the focus of the camera was changed between exposures at one station1 the traces of the plates will not all be at an equal distance from the station point1 and their location will be an almost impossible task4 ,the traces of the plates taken at stations ,b and ,c are found in exactly the same manner as were those for ,sta4 ,a4 ,after the traces have all been located1 it is a good plan to ink them in lightly and erase the pencil construction lines which would otherwise form an impenetrable maze4 ,the traces located1 the difficult and tiresome part of the plotting is over2 the landscape1 brought indoors photographically1 is located as with the plane table2 all that remains to be done is to take the sights and find the points on the paper which show where the objects were on the ground4 ,illustration3 ,from ,each ,station the ,mapping ,constant is ,laid ,out by the ,focal ,distance of the ,camera or ,distance of the ,plate from the ,lens1 and the ,location of ,traces of the ,plates ,determined ,this taking the sights is a simple matter4 ,with a pair of dividers1 the distance from a given object from the center line of the plate is measured4 ,this distance is laid off on the proper side of the point marking the center line of the trace of the same plate2 a radial line is drawn through the trace at the given distance from the center-line point and the station at which the given plate is taken2 this is one line of sight to the object4 ,the same object is located from another station in the same way2 as on the plane table1 the intersection of the two lines to the same object marks the location of the point which represents the object on the map4 ,obtaining elevations for the drawing of contours is a slightly longer process4 ,contours are lines joining points of equal elevation2 they represent successive shore lines1 if the area mapped were inundated and the water should rise slowly foot by foot4 ,if the contours are close together1 the ground represented has a steep slope1 and vice versa4 ,if1 on a map1 a number of points are of known elevation1 it is simply a question of judgment and practice to tell where contour lines go4 ,before contours can be drawn the elevations of a considerable number of points must be known4 ,if the elevation of any one of them is known and the difference between that one and any other can be found1 determining the elevation of the second point is simply a problem in addition or subtraction4 ,if it be desired to find1 for instance1 the difference in elevation between ,sta4 ,c and the corner of the fence1 as shown in the sketch1 two solutions are possible1 as follows3 ,first3 ,perpendicular to the line of sight from ,sta4 ,c to the fence corner1 two lines are drawn1 one at the intersection of the trace of the plate by the line of sight1 and one at the point on the paper which shows the location of the fence corner4 ,on the first of these two lines is laid off the distance ,y'1 equal to the distance of the ground at the fence post above or below the horizontal center line on the plate4 ,through this point1 on the first perpendicular on the line of sight1 is drawn a line through the ,sta4 ,c and extended to an intersection with the second drawn perpendicular4 ,the distance from the corner of the fence1 on the paper1 to this intersection is the distance ,y1 the difference in elevation from the center of the camera at ,sta4 ,c to the ground at the fence post4 ,this solution is longer and less desirable than the second4 ,second3 ,in place of perpendicular lines to the line of sight1 the trace of the plate1 and a line1 through the point representing the object1 parallel with the trace1 may be used4 ,a datum plane1 or reference surface1 from which all elevations are measured up to the ground surface must be assumed4 ,the ,united ,states ,geological ,survey uses mean1 or average1 sea level for the datum in all its topographic sheets4 ,generally1 unless there is a ,united ,states ,geological ,survey bench mark1 a monument of carefully determined elevation referred to sea level1 within the limits of the survey1 it is better to assume the elevation of some point1 as ,sta4 ,c1 at #ajj ft41 or greater if necessary to place the datum plane below the ground level at all points within the area to be mapped4 ,other elevations are figured from the assumed elevation of ,sta4 ,c4 ,allowance must be made for the height of the center of the camera above the ground at ,sta4 ,c in computing elevations above ,sta4 ,c4 ,all elevations determined for the purpose of drawing contours are ground elevations and not the elevation of the top of objects located on the map4 ,the topographic sheets of the ,geological ,survey are good examples to follow1 in drawing contours4 ,for many purposes1 contours are not essential1 and the refinements necessary for their drawing may be omitted4 ,how to ,build a ,skiff ,the following is a description of an easily constructed #ab-;ft4 skiff1 suitable for rowing and paddling4 ,this is the type used by many duck hunters1 as it may be easily pushed through marshes4 ,it is constructed of #c_/d-;in4 dressed pine1 or cypress4 ,illustration3 ,the ,skiff is ,especially ,constructed for ,use in ,shallow ,water and ,marshes by ,duck ,hunters1 but with the ,addition of a ,keel ,it ,makes a ,good ,craft for ,almost ,any ,water as a ,rowboat 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the sides consist of planks1 #ad in4 wide1 but #ab-;in4 planks may be used1 the length being #ab ft4 #d in4 ,two stem pieces are constructed as shown in ,fig4 #a1 and the plank ends are fastened to them with screws4 ,nail a crosspiece on the plank edges in the exact center1 so as to space the planks #cd in4 apart1 as shown in ,fig4 #b2 then turn it over and nail another crosspiece in the center of the planks for width1 and make the spacing of the other edges #dj in4 ,plane the lower edges so that1 in placing a board across them1 the surfaces will be level4 ,the floor boards are #f in4 wide and fastened on crosswise1 being careful to apply plenty of red lead between all joints and using galvanized nails1 #b in4 long4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,a deck1 #ah in4 long1 is fastened on each end1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,it is made of strips fastened to a crosspiece4 ,the seats1 or thwarts1 consist of #aj-;in4 boards1 and are placed on short strips fastened to the side planks about #e in4 from the bottom4 ,the oarlocks are held in a wedge-shaped piece of wood1 having a piece of gas pipe in them for a bushing1 the whole being fastened at the upper edge of the side planks with screws1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the location of these must be determined by the builder4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,some calking may be required between the bottom1 or floor1 boards1 if they are not nailed tightly against one another4 ,the calking material may be loosely woven cotton cord1 which is well forced into the seams4 ,the first coat of paint should be of red lead mixed with raw linseed oil1 and when dry any color may be applied for the second coat4 ,while1 for use in shallow water1 these boats are not built with a keel1 one can be attached to prevent the boat from sliding off in a side wind or when turning around4 ,when one is attached1 it should be #c_/d in4 thick1 #c in4 wide1 and about #h ft4 long4--,contributed by ,b4 ,francis ,dashiell1 ,baltimore1 ,md4 99 99 99 99 99 ,an aniline color soluble in alcohol1 by adding a little carbolic acid1 will hold fast on celluloid4 ,double-,swing ,gate with ,common ,hinge ,illustration3 ,the ,post and ,gate are ,cut ,away ,back of the ,hinge to ,allow the ,latter to ,swing ,back ,ordinary hinges can be easily bent and so placed on posts that a gate can be swung in either direction4 ,as shown in the illustration1 hinges can be made to fit either round or square posts4 ,the gate half of the hinge is fastened in the usual way4 ,the post half is bent and so placed that the hinge pin will approximately be on a line between the centers of the posts4 ,the gate and post should be beveled off to permit a full-open gateway4--,contributed by ,r4 ,r4 ,schmitz1 ,birmingham1 ,ala4 ,testing ,out ,induction ,coils ,while winding an induction coil1 ,i found it necessary to test the sections for continuity4 ,having no galvanometer1 ,i connected a battery and low-resistance telephone receiver in series with the section and battery4 ,the battery and telephone receiver may also be used for testing out the secondary of an induction coil1 to determine if it is burnt out4--,contributed by ,john ,m4 ,wells1 ,moosomin1 ,can4 ,how to ,make a ,surveyor's ,transit ,by ,bennett ,blacklidge ,illustration3 ,detail of ,parts for the ,construction of a ,transit ,which can be ,used1 with ,fairly ,accurate ,results1 in ,doing ,amateur ,surveying for ,railroad ,work1 ,town ,sites and the ,laying ,out of ,maps ,a boy who likes to do the things that grown ups do can derive considerable pleasure from the making of a transit1 which will enable him to start in surveying railroads1 laying off town sites1 and doing lots of kindred work4 ,it is necessary to have a compass1 and one1 #a-c_/d in4 in diameter1 can be purchased at a reasonable price4 ,a hole is bored with an expansive bit into a board1 #g_/h in4 in thickness1 just deep enough to admit the compass snugly1 then a circle1 ,a1 #d-a_/b in4 in diameter1 is drawn1 having the same center as the compass hole1 and the disk is cut out with a compass or scroll saw4 ,a ring1 ,b1 is cut in the same manner from the same material1 its inside diameter being such that the ring just fits around the disk ,a1 and the outside diameter1 #f-c_/d in4 ,another block1 #e-a_/b in4 in diameter1 is glued to the bottom of the small disk ,a4 ,this will appear as shown at ,c4 ,a small hole is bored in the center of the bottom block on the under side to receive the threaded end of the screw on a camera tripod4 ,by careful adjustment the threads in the wood will hold the transit firmly4 ,a plumb bob must be attached exactly in the center of the tripod head4 ,this can be easily done if the head is wood1 but in case the top is of metal1 the line can be attached to the screw with a double loop1 as shown at ,d1 so that the bob will hang centrally4 ,two standards are made as shown at ,e1 each about #e in4 high1 and fastened to the ring ,b in the positions shown in the drawing of the complete instrument4 ,an arc of a circle is marked on one of the standards1 as shown1 to designate angles1 the markings being laid out with a bevel protractor4 ,the pointer is a hand from an old alarm clock4 ,the telescope arrangement consists of a piece of pasteboard tubing1 about #a-a_/d in4 in diameter1 one end being covered with a piece of black paper with a pinhole in the exact center1 and the other equipped with cross hairs4 ,four small notches are cut in the latter end of the tube1 exactly quartering it1 and two silk threads as fine as can be obtained1 are stretched across in these notches4 ,the tube is fastened to a block of wood1 #e in4 wide and #g in4 long1 with small tacks and two pieces of fine copper wire4 ,this block is pinioned between the standards with two nails4 ,the hand is secured to the nail in such a position that it will point straight down when the tube is level4 ,the instrument is adjusted in the following manner3 ,it is set up where a lone tree can be seen1 about one mile distant1 and the center of the cross hairs is carefully set on the tree4 ,then a very fine wire is stretched across the compass1 as shown at ,f1 and while keeping it directly over the center of the compass it is also placed on a direct line pointing to the tree4 ,very small brass nails1 driven in at ,g and ,h1 serve to fasten it in the position thus found4 ,when this adjustment has been made the telescope can be turned to sight any object1 after first placing the instrument so that the needle points to the ,n on the dial1 and a glance at the wire will show the exact direction in which the object is located4 ,the instrument is then taken to a level stretch of road and set up1 and a stick is placed on end and marked at the height of the telescope4 ,the stick is taken along the road about #bjj yd41 the telescope sighted on it1 and the hand set4 ,this makes the instrument level enough for all practical purposes4 ,the plumb bob is then dropped1 a distance of #bj ft4 measured from it on the road1 and a mark made4 ,the telescope is sighted on this mark1 and a mark is made on the standard at the point of the arc1 to which the hand points4 ,another #bj ft4 is measured1 or #dj ft4 from the bob1 and another mark made4 ,the telescope is sighted on it1 and the location of the hand again marked4 ,this works well up to about #cjj ft41 then the marks begin to come very close together4 ,this method is used for laying out town sites4 ,the instrument is set up directly over a stake from which to work1 and the telescope is turned down until the #bj-;ft4 mark is indicated1 when the operator looks through the telescope and tells his helper where to set the stake4 ,then another is driven at the next point1 and so on1 until the limit of the instrument is reached4 ,when doing railroad surveying several start out together1 one with an ax to cut away brush2 one to carry pegs2 two to measure1 or chain1 the distance between stakes1 and one to do the sighting4 ,in this manner a line can be run that comes very near being perfectly straight for three miles4 ,a concrete example of how the transit was used to lay out a map of a ranch will now be given4 ,the start was made on an east and west fence4 ,the instrument was set #e ft4 from the fence at one point1 and at the other end of the fence the stick was set at a point #e ft4 from the fence4 ,when the stick was sighted1 the wire cut the ,e and ,w on the compass1 thus showing that the fence was set on a line1 due east and west4 ,the distance was measured from the fence to the house1 which was #a_/d mile1 and this was noted in a book4 ,this operation was repeated on the rear1 and the distance found to be #ghj ft4 while the compass showed the direction to be #d deg4 west of south4 ,the next line ran #dbg ft4 and #a deg4 east of south4 ,this was kept up all the way around4 ,after these notes had been obtained1 it was an easy matter to take a piece of plain paper and strike a line representing north and south and lay off the directions4 ,a bevel protractor was used to find the degrees4 ,the transit was set on the posts of the corrals and this saved the measuring out from the inclosure4 ,the creek was surveyed in the same manner4 ,so many feet south-west1 so many feet west1 so many feet #e deg4 south of west1 and so on1 until its length was run4 ,the transit can also be used for finding distances without measuring4 ,a line from ,a to ,b is sighted1 and ,f represents a point #a_/b mile distant1 the line from ,f to ,g being #ajj ft4 ,a line is now sighted from ,a1 through ,g to ,c4 ,a person standing at ,d is directed to move toward the point ,e and he is stopped as soon as sighted in the telescope4 ,he then measures the distance from ,d to ,e4 ,suppose this distance is #bej ft4 ,as each #ajj ft4 means #a_/b mile1 and the #ej ft41 #a_/d mile1 the point ,e is #a-a_/d miles from the transit4 ,this method can be used quite extensively and distances obtained are fairly accurate4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a small whisk broom makes a handy cleaner to brush the caked grease and lint from pulleys and gear wheels where waste and rags are useless4 ,to ,enlarge or ,reduce ,plots ,sometimes it is necessary to enlarge or reduce a plot to a different scale4 ,this can be easily and quickly accomplished without resorting to the slow process of protracting the angles and scaling the individual lines4 ,illustration3 ,enlarging and ,reducing ,plots by ,radial ,lines from a ,common ,point ,located ,properly ,take any point1 ,p1 and from it draw light pencil lines through each of the corners of the plot4 ,on any one of these lines1 as ,,ap1 lay off with dividers ,,ac equal to ,,cp4 ,place a triangle on the line ,,ab and with a straightedge1 or another triangle1 laid on the line ,,ap1 slide the former to the point ,c1 then draw line ,,cd parallel with ,,ab until it intersects the radial line ,,pb4 ,in the same manner draw line ,,de parallel with ,,bf1 and so on1 all about the plot4 ,a test of accuracy will be in striking the point ,c with the last line4 ,if the original plot has a scale of #dj ft4 to the inch the reduced plot would be #hj ft4 to the inch4 ,if it is required to enlarge the plot to #bj ft4 to the inch1 make ,,ag equal to ,,ap1 and proceed as in the first case1 using ,g as the starting point4 ,the location of the point ,p is arbitrary and may be outside of the boundary of the plot or figure to be enlarged or reduced1 but should be so located1 if possible1 that the radial line to any corner does not parallel either of the plot lines to that corner4 ,if the point cannot be so located for all the lines1 it may be necessary to scale the lines4 ,a little practice in picking out the best location for the point will give gratifying results4--,contributed by ,junius ,d4 ,mc,cabe1 ,pittsburgh1 ,pa4 ,a ,lathe ,bench ,while working at a bench1 or foot-power lathe1 it is quite convenient to have some sort of a seat to sit on while at work1 or between operations4 ,in making such a seat1 ,i used a board1 #bg in4 long and #ab in4 wide1 for the top1 and two boards1 #ai in4 long and #ab in4 wide1 for the supports4 ,these boards were #c_/d in4 thick4 ,the supports were squared at the ends and securely fastened to the top with nails1 their positions being #c in4 in from the ends of the top board4 ,these were well braced1 as shown1 and a cross board was placed between them1 near the lower ends4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bench ,provides a ,seat for the ,worker in ,doing ,operations on a ,small ,foot ,lathe ,the projecting ends of the top were cut out1 and a box1 #e in4 deep1 constructed against the supports4 ,a covering was made to fit in each of the openings in the top board and hinged to the outer edge of the box4 ,the boxes made a convenient place for the tools used in the turning work4--,contributed by ,harold ,r4 ,harvey1 ,buhl1 ,idaho4 ,cleaning and ,polishing ,shoes ,in using the polishes now on the market for tan shoes1 ,i found that the leather cracked in an unreasonably short time4 ,the following was suggested and tried out with good results4 ,wash the shoes with castile soap and water by applying the mixture with a dauber4 ,work up a little lather and then rub dry with a cloth1 without rinsing4 ,the leather will be cleaned without becoming dark1 and it will not crack4 ,a higher polish may be obtained by using some paste polish in the usual manner4--,contributed by ,george ,bliss1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,shaving ,cabinet ,mounted on an ,adjustable ,pedestal ,the illustration represents a shaving cabinet mounted on an adjustable pedestal1 whose style and size are such that it may easily be moved about or set away without requiring much room4 ,the material required for its construction is as follows3 #a framed mirror1 #h by #aj in4 #a square-head bolt and wing nut1 #a_/b by #d in4 #b cabinet sides1 #a_/b by #g by #ae in4 #b partitions and shelf1 #a_/b by #f by #f in4 #a cabinet top1 #a_/b by #g by #aj-a_/b in4 #a cabinet bottom1 #a_/b by #f by #aj-a_/b in4 #b cabinet backs and doors1 #a_/b by #f-a_/b by #aj-a_/b in4 #d cabinet moldings1 #a by #d by #d in4 #a cabinet support1 #b by #b by #bf in4 #d pedestal moldings1 #a by #a by #f in4 #d pedestal frames1 #a by #c by #cf in4 #a base1 #b by #ab by #ab in4 ,screws1 nails1 and varnish4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mirror and ,cabinet are ,mounted on a ,pedestal ,that can be ,moved as ,desired ,the sidepieces of the cabinet are extended at one corner1 thereby forming the supports for the mirror4 ,the door fits in between the sides and may be attached either by hinges or two wood screws1 one on each side1 holes being bored in the sides forming a loose fit for the screw so they can freely turn with the door4 ,the pedestal consists of a #d-;in4 square box resting on the base block1 and secured in place by means of molding strips4 ,the sliding support for the cabinet consists of a #b-;in4 square piece secured to the bottom of the cabinet by means of molding1 and provided with a slot so the support can freely slide over the clamp bolt1 which fastens it in place by clamping it against the pedestal4 ,if it is desired to conceal the head of the bolt1 a recess should be made in the pedestal frame for it1 as shown1 so the support will freely slide over it4 ,before assembling the pedestal it will be necessary to drill a hole in the front side in line with the recess of the back side1 and insert the bolt4 ,if this precaution is not taken1 it will not be possible to insert the bolt1 unless a hole be made for the head either through the back side or front side4--,contributed by ,d4 ,toppan1 ,watervliet1 ,n4 ,y4 ,four-,passenger ,coasting ,bobsled ,by ,r4 ,h4 ,allen ,illustration3 ,coasting ,is ,one of the ,best ,sports a ,boy ,enjoys during ,winter1 and a ,sled of ,luxury ,is ,something to ,be ,proud of among ,others on a ,hill or ,toboggan ,slide ,coaster bobs usually have about the same form of construction1 and only slight changes from the ordinary are made to satisfy the builder4 ,the one shown has some distinctive features which make it a sled of luxury1 and the builder will pride himself in the making4 ,a list of the materials required is given on the opposite page4 ,any wood may be used for the sled1 except for the runners1 which should be made of ash4 ,shape the runners all alike by cutting one out and using it as a pattern to make the others4 ,after cutting them to the proper shape1 a groove is formed on the under edge to admit the curve of a #e_/h-;in4 round iron rod about #a_/d in4 deep4 ,the iron rods are then shaped to fit over the runner in the groove and extend up the back part of the runner and over the top at the front end4 ,the extensions should be flattened so that two holes can be drilled in them for two wood screws at each end4 ,if the builder does not have the necessary equipment for flattening these ends1 a local blacksmith can do it at a nominal price4 ,after the irons are fitted1 they are fastened in place4 ,the top edges of the runners are notched for the crosspieces so that the top surfaces of these pieces will come flush with the upper edges of the runners4 ,the location of these pieces is not essential1 but should be near the ends of the runners1 and the notches of each pair of runners should coincide4 ,when the notches are cut1 fit in the pieces snugly1 and fasten them with long1 slim wood screws4 ,small metal braces are then fastened to the runners and crosspiece on the inside1 to stiffen the joint4 ,illustration3 ,details ,showing the ,method of ,rear-,sled ,oscillation1 the ,bracing1 and the ,steering ,wheel ,as the rear sled must oscillate some1 means must be provided for this tilting motion while at the same time preventing sidewise turning4 ,the construction used for this purpose is a hinged joint4 ,the heavy #b by #e-;in4 crosspiece is cut sloping on the width so that it remains #b in4 thick at one edge and tapers down to a feather edge at the opposite side4 ,this makes a wedge-shaped piece1 to which surface the three large hinges are attached4 ,the piece is then solidly fastened to the upper edges of the runners that are to be used for the rear sled1 and so located that the center of the piece will be #h in4 from the front end of the runners4 ,the supporting crosspiece on the front sled is fastened on top of the runners1 at a place where its center will be #aa in4 from the front end of the runners4 ,the top board is prepared by making both ends rounding and planing the surfaces smooth4 ,on the under side1 the two crosspieces are placed1 which should have two #a_/b-;in4 holes bored through the width of each1 near the ends1 to receive the eyebolts4 ,they are placed1 one with its center #ab in4 from the end to be used for the rear1 and the other with its center #h in4 from the front end1 and securely fastened with screws4 ,the shore is placed in the center of the board1 and wires are run over it connecting the eyebolts4 ,the eyebolts are then drawn up tightly to make the wire taut over the shore4 ,this will prevent the long board from sagging4 ,,list ,,of ,,materials #a top4 #f-a_/b ft4 long1 #af in4 wide1 and #a-a_/d in4 thick4 #d runners4 #bb in1 long1 #d in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 #d crosspieces1 #af in4 long1 #c in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 #c pieces1 #af in1 long1 #e in4 wide1 and #b in4 thick4 #a piece1 #af in4 long1 #e in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 #a shore1 #af in4 long1 #c in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 #d seat backs4 #ab in4 long1 #af in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 #a dowel4 #c ft4 long1 and #a in4 in diameter4 #d rods4 #e_/h in4 in diameter1 and #cj in4 long4 #d eyebolts1 #a_/b in4 by #f in4 long4 #c hinges1 #e-;in4 strap4 #h hinges1 #c-;in4 strap4 ,on the upper side of the board and beginning at the rear end1 the backs are fastened at intervals of #ah in4 ,they are first prepared by rounding the corners on the ends used for the tops1 and the opposite ends are cut slightly on an angle to give the back a slant4 ,they are then fastened with the small hinges to the top board4 ,on the edges of the top board1 #a-;in4 holes are bored about #a in4 deep1 and pins driven for foot rests4 ,these are located #ah in4 apart1 beginning about #e in4 from the front end4 ,the dowel is used for the pins1 which are made #d in4 long4 ,illustration3 ,the ,top ,board is ,well ,braced on the ,under ,side and ,fitted with ,four ,backs on ,top to ,make ,it a ,luxurious ,riding ,sled1 and the ,runners are ,provided with ,metal ,shoes for ,speed ,the steering device consists of a broom handle1 cut to #ah in4 in length1 with one end fastened in a hole bored centrally in the #e-;in4 crosspiece of the front sled4 ,a hole is bored in the top board through the center of the crosspiece fastened to the under side for the steering post4 ,the broomstick is run through this hole after first placing two metal washers on it4 ,after running the stick through1 a collar is fastened to it just above the top board1 so that the top cannot be raised away from the sled4 ,at the upper end of the broomstick a steering wheel is attached1 made from a nail-keg hoop4 ,a piece of wood is fastened across its diameter1 and the hoop is covered with a piece of garden hose and wrapped with twine4 ,in the center of the crosspiece1 a hole is bored to snugly fit on the broom handle1 which is then fastened with screws4 ,the rear sled is fastened to the top board with screws through the extending wings of the hinges and into the crosspiece4 ,holes are bored in the front ends of all runners1 and a chain or rope is attached in them1 the loop end of the rear one being attached to the under side of the top board1 and the one in the front used for drawing the sled4 ,to ,prevent ,drill from ,catching ,as ,it ,passes through ,metal ,the regular slope of a drill will cause the cutting edge to catch as it breaks through the metal on the opposite side of the piece being drilled4 ,but if a twist drill is ground more flat like a flat drill1 it will not grab into the metal as it passes through4--,contributed by ,james ,h4 ,beebee1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration ,an ,ice ,boat and ,catamaran ,by ,robert ,k4 ,patterson ,this combination is produced by using the regular type of ice boat and substituting boats for the runners1 to make the catamaran4 ,in constructing the ice boat1 use two poles1 or timbers1 one #af ft4 and the other #aj-a_/b ft4 long1 crossed at a point #b-a_/b ft4 from one end of the longer timber4 ,the crossed pieces are firmly braced with wires1 as shown4 ,the mast1 which should be about #ab ft4 long1 is set into a mortise cut in the long timber1 #ae in4 from the front end1 and is further stabilized by wires1 as shown4 ,a jib boom1 about #f ft4 long1 as well as a main boom1 which is #aa-a_/b ft4 long1 are hung on the mast in the usual manner4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ice ,boat ,provides an ,ideal ,outing in ,winter ,where ,there ,is a ,body of ,water ,large ,enough for ,sailing ,the front runners consist of band-iron strips1 #ah in4 long1 #c in4 wide1 and #a_/h in4 thick1 with one edge ground like the edge of a skate1 and the ends rounding1 which are fastened with bolts to the sides of wood pieces1 #ah in4 long1 #f in4 wide1 and #b in4 thick1 allowing the ground edge to project about #a inch4 ,when the ice-boat frame is made of poles1 the runners are attached to a piece of wood1 #ab in4 long1 shaped as shown and fastened at right angles with bolts running through the shouldered part diagonally4 ,this makes a surface on which the pole end rests and where it is securely fastened with bolts4 ,if squared timbers are used1 the runners can be fastened directly to them4 ,the rear1 or guiding1 runner is fastened between two pieces of wood1 so that its edge projects2 then it is clamped in a bicycle fork1 which should be cut down so that about #c in4 of the forks remain4 ,a hole is bored through the rear end of the long pole to receive the fork head1 the upper end of which is supplied with a lever4 ,the lever is attached to the fork head by boring a hole through the lever end at a slight angle to fit the head1 allowing sufficient end to be slotted1 whereupon a hole is bored through the width of the handle1 and a bolt inserted1 to act as a clamp4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ice-,boat ,details1 ,showing ,construction with ,straight ,poles ,having ,detachable ,runners ,so the ,boats can be ,supplied in ,their ,stead to ,make a ,sailing ,catamaran for ,use in ,summer ,a board is fastened on two crosspieces mortised in the upper part of the pole1 for a place to sit on when driving the boat4 ,the sail can be constructed of any good material to the dimensions given4 ,to rig up the ice boat for use as a catamaran1 place a pole across the stern1 the length of the pole being equal to the one used on the front part of the ice boat4 ,two water-tight boats are constructed1 #af ft4 long1 #ab in4 wide1 and #aj in4 deep at the center4 ,to make these two boats procure six boards1 #af ft4 long1 #aj in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 ,three boards are used to make each boat4 ,bend one board so that it will be in an arc of a circle1 then nail on the two side boards1 after which the edges of the sides are cut away to the shape of the bent board4 ,the runners are removed from the ice boat1 and the boats fastened to the pole ends4 ,a rudder is attached in the place of the rear1 or guiding1 runner4 ,the tops of the boats1 or floats1 can be covered and made water-tight4 ,mind-,reading ,effect with ,cards ,five cards are shown1 and some one person is asked to think of two cards in the lot1 after which the performer places the cards behind his back and removes any two cards1 then shows the remaining three and asks if the two cards in mind have been removed4 ,the answer is always yes1 as it cannot be otherwise4 ,to prepare the cards1 take any #aj cards from the pack and paste the back of one card to another1 making five double cards4 ,removing any two cards behind the performer's back reduces the number of cards to three1 and when these are turned over they will not have the same faces so that the ones first seen cannot be shown the second time even though all five cards were turned over and shown4 ,an ,air ,pencil to ,make ,embossed ,letters ,the device illustrated is for making embossed letters on show cards1 signs1 post cards1 etc4 ,a small bulb1 such as used on cameras1 is procured1 also the spout from a small oilcan4 ,the bulb is fastened to the spout as shown4 ,the material for use in the pencil is quick-drying mucilage thickened with flake white4 ,if some special color is desired1 tint the mixture with aniline4 ,fill the spout with the mixture and attach the bulb4 ,squeeze the bulb gently while forming the letters1 then dust over with bronze1 and allow to dry4 ,illustration3 ,the ,oilcan ,spout ,is the ,reservoir to ,hold the ,paint1 and the ,bulb ,produces the ,air ,pressure ,an ,endless ,dish or ,floor ,mop ,a good way to use up cord that collects about the house1 is to make an endless dish or floor mop of it4 ,procure a thin board that will make a good length and wind the cord around it1 then remove it from the board and tie the bunch together in the center4 ,combination ,tie ,rack and ,collar ,holder ,an unusual though simple tie rack can be made by supporting the tie bar in the center4 ,by this arrangement the ties can be placed on it from either end1 thus avoiding the tedious threading through1 required on the ordinary rack supported at each end4 ,collars may be hung on a peg placed above the tie bar4 ,the pieces can be glued together and a good finish given in the usual way4 ,the rack can be hung up by two screw eyes4 ,the material required consists of four pieces1 dimensioned #e_/h by #e by #h in41 #c_/h by #g_/h by #g-a_/b in41 #c_/h by #e_/h by #c-a_/h in41 and #g_/h by #g_/h by #b in4 respectively4--,contributed by ,arthur ,c4 ,vener1 ,dallas1 ,texas4 ,illustration3 ,collar and ,tie ,rack with ,open-,end ,hangers ,so ,that the ,articles can be ,slipped ,on ,easily without being ,passed behind a ,bar as ,is ,usually the ,case ,illustration3 ,skates ,made of ,wood ,skates that will take the place of the usual steel-runner kind and which will prevent spraining of the ankles1 can be made of a few pieces of #a_/b-;in4 boards4 ,four runners are cut out1 #b in4 wide at the back and #a-a_/b in4 wide at the front1 the length to be #b in4 longer than the shoe4 ,the top edges of a pair of runners are then nailed to the under side of a board #d in4 wide1 at its edges4 ,a piece of board1 or block1 #b in4 wide is fastened between the runners at the rear1 and one #a in4 wide1 in front4 ,two bolts are run through holes bored in the runners1 one just back of the front board1 or block1 and the other in front of the rear one4 ,four triangular pieces are fastened1 one on each corner1 so that the heel and toe of the shoe will fit between them1 and1 if desired1 a crosspiece can be nailed in front of the heel4 ,straps are attached to the sides for attaching the skate to the shoe4 ,both skates are made alike4--,contributed by ,f4 ,e4 ,kennar1 ,hennessey1 ,okla4 ,illustration3 ,skates ,made of ,wood to ,take the ,place of the ,steel-,runner ,kind and ,prevent ,sprained ,ankles 99 99 99 99 99 ,the best paint for paper roofing is asphaltum varnish4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ice ,glider ,by ,mildred ,e4 ,thomas ,the enthusiastic pushmobilist need not put aside his hobby during the winter1 as an amusement device for use on ice1 which will surpass the very best pushmobile1 can be easily made as shown in the illustration4 ,illustration3 ,the ,glider is ,pushed over the ,ice ,similarly to a ,pushmobile1 and the ,speed ,that can be ,attained is ,much ,greater ,similar to an ice yacht1 only a great deal smaller1 the ice glider will require three ordinary skates1 two of which are fastened to the ends of the front crosspiece1 so that their blades will stand at an angle of about #cj deg4 with their edges outward4 ,to get this angle1 tapering blocks are fastened to the crosspiece ends1 as shown4 ,the skates are then fastened to these blocks4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts for the ,construction of the ,ice ,glider1 or ,pushmobile ,the crosspiece is #cj in4 long and about #h in4 wide4 ,in the center of this piece an upright is constructed1 #bf in4 high4 ,the edges of the front crosspiece are cut on a slant so that a piece nailed to its front and back edge will stand sloping toward the rear4 ,a handle1 #bd in4 long1 is fastened between the two uprights at the upper end4 ,the rear part is made of a board1 #h in4 wide and #dj in4 long4 ,the remaining skate is fastened in a perfectly straight position on the rear end4 ,the skates may be attached with screws run through holes drilled in the top plates1 or with straps4 ,the front end of the rear board has a hole for a bolt to attach it to the center of the front crosspiece1 so that the latter will turn to guide the glider4 ,a pusher is prepared from a block of wood1 into which nails are driven with their ends projecting on the under side4 ,the block is strapped to one shoe1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,the ,block of ,wood with ,projecting ,nails to ,fasten on the ,shoe ,that ,does the ,pushing ,the glider is used in the same manner as a pushmobile4 ,the pusher can be made in another way by using sole leather instead of the block4 ,small slots are cut in the sides for the straps4 ,nails are driven through the leather so that the points project4 ,either kind of pusher is especially adapted for the pushmobile to prevent wear on the shoe4 ,prony ,brake for ,testing ,small ,motors ,the ordinary prony brake is not1 as a rule1 sensitive enough to make an accurate test on small motors1 such as those used in driving sewing machines1 washing machines1 vacuum cleaners1 etc4 ,the arrangement shown in the accompanying sketch has been used for this purpose with good results and was very accurate4 ,the operation of the brake is exceedingly simple4 ,illustration3 ,prony ,brake ,used in ,connection with a ,small ,balance to ,find the ,horsepower ,a pulley without a crown face is attached to the shaft of the motor1 which is fastened to the top of a table or bench1 and a balance mounted directly over the pulley4 ,the support for the balance should be a narrow strip1 which in turn is supported on two upright pieces1 as shown4 ,a light rope is put under the pulley1 and the ends are looped over the platforms of the balance so that it does not interfere with the operation of the balance4 ,the ends of the rope should be vertical and parallel4 ,the piece upon which the balance rests is raised by inserting wedges1 thus increasing the tension in the rope4 ,the resulting friction of the rope on the pulley increases the load4 ,if the motor is running in the direction indicated by the arrow on the pulley1 the tension in the left-hand end of the rope will be greater than in the right-hand end and a weight must be placed on the right-hand platform of the balance4 ,when the weight ,w is adjusted so that the two pointers on the platforms are exactly opposite each other1 the value of the weight ,w1 in pounds1 will represent the difference in pull1 in pounds1 between ,a and ,b4 ,if the value of the weight ,w is known and also the speed of the machine when the weight was determined1 the horsepower output can be computed by means of the following equation3 #f4bhcb ,l ,w ,r4,p4,m4 ,hp4 ----------------------- #cc1jjj #ab ,in this equation1 ,l is the distance in inches from the center of the pulley to the center of the rope4 ,two ordinary spring balances may be substituted for the beam balance and the difference in their readings taken for the value ,w4 ,for best results1 the tension in the slack end of the rope should be as small as possible1 and it may be necessary to wrap the rope one or more times completely around the pulley4 ,a ,mystic ,fortune ,teller ,fortune telling by means of weights striking glasses or bottles is quite mysterious if controlled in a manner that cannot be seen by the audience4 ,the performer can arrange two strikes for no1 and three for yes to answer questions4 ,any kind of bottles1 glass1 or cups may be used4 ,in the bottles the pendulum can be suspended from the cork1 and in the glasses from small tripods set on the table4 ,illustration3 ,the ,rocking of the ,table is ,caused by the ,pressure of ,air in the ,bulb under the ,foot1 the ,movement ,causing the ,pendulum to ,swing and ,strike the ,glass ,the secret of the trick is as follows3 ,a rubber tube with a bulb attached to each end is placed under a rug1 one bulb being located under one table leg and the other near the chair of the performer set at some distance from the table where it can be pressed with the foot4 ,some one selects a pendulum2 the performer gazes intently at it1 and presses the bulb under his foot lightly at first2 then1 by watching the swaying of the pendulum selected1 he will know when to give the second impulse1 and continue until the weight strikes the glass4 ,as the pendulums are of different lengths they must necessarily swing at different rates per second4 ,the impulses must be given at the proper time or else the pendulum will be retarded instead of increased in amplitude4 ,a table with four legs is best to use1 and the leg diagonally opposite that with the bulb beneath it must not touch the carpet or floor4 ,this can be arranged by placing pieces of cardboard under the other two legs4--,contributed by ,james ,j4 ,mc,intyre4 ,holding ,prints in a ,liquid-,filled ,tray ,illustration3 ,push ,pins on the ,under ,side of the ,board ,raise ,it and ,provide a ,space for the ,prints in the ,liquid ,after having considerable trouble in keeping my paper prints in the hypo fixing bath from curling1 which would force the edges out of the liquid1 ,i found the plan here illustrated a success4 ,i procured a piece of wood1 the size of a postcard1 and stuck four glass push pins into one surface1 one at each corner1 and fastened a handle to the center of the upper side4 ,the papers are first placed in the bath1 then the board is set over them with the pins down4 ,this holds the prints under the liquid but does not press them tightly together4--,contributed by ,j4 ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a piece of an old gunny sack will polish brass work very nicely4 ,cellar-,door ,holder ,illustration ,a cellar door that opened up against a wall required a catch of some kind to keep it open at times4 ,as ,i did not want a catch to show on the wall1 ,i devised a holder as shown4 ,three pieces of wood were nailed to the under side of the door in such positions that they formed a recess in which a fourth piece1 #b in4 wide and #a in4 thick1 would slide endways4 ,a knob was attached to the upper end of the slide1 which served the double purpose of a handle and a stop for the slide4 ,the manner of using the holder is clearly shown4--,contributed by ,h4 ,t4 ,smith1 ,topeka1 ,kansas4 ,an ,emergency ,pencil ,compass ,illustration ,the need of a compass when none was at hand caused me to quickly devise a substitute for the work4 ,a piece of stiff wire1 about the length of the pencil1 was procured1 and several turns were made around the pencil1 as shown4 ,the lower straight end was filed to a point4 ,the wire can be bent to obtain the radius distance4--,contributed by ,preston ,ware1 ,rome1 ,ga4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a very effective dip for brass and copper articles1 that will leave a clean and bright finish1 is #b qt4 of aqua fortis1 #a gal4 of sulphuric acid1 #a pt4 of water and a pinch of salt4 ,renewing ,carbon ,paper ,when carbon paper has been used several times1 the preparation becomes almost worn off on some parts1 while other parts of the paper are as good as new4 ,the process of renewing is very simple and it can be done by anyone without special apparatus4 ,all that is necessary is to hold the paper in front of a fire or over a radiator a few seconds4 ,the heat will cause the preparation to dissolve and spread over the paper1 so that when it is dry the paper will have a new coating4 ,this can be repeated1 and in some cases will double the life of the carbon paper4--,contributed by ,chester ,m4 ,kearney1 ,danville1 ,quebec4 ,how to ,clinch a ,finishing ,nail ,illustration ,a wire or finishing nail may be clinched as nicely as a wrought nail1 if a nail punch or piece of iron is placed along the side of it1 as shown at ,a1 and the nail hammered into an arched form1 as at ,b4 ,the punch or rod is then withdrawn and the arch driven into the wood4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,to ,prevent ,washbasin ,bottom from ,wearing ,out ,the ears from some sirup buckets were removed and three of them soldered1 at equal distances apart1 on the bottom of the washbasin near the outside edge of the lower part4 ,these prevented the wear from coming on the bottom of the basin1 and it lasted several times as long as ordinarily4--,contributed by ,a4 ,a4 ,ashley1 ,blanket1 ,texas4 99 99 99 99 99 ,to curl feathers1 heat slightly before a fire1 then stroke with something like the back of a case knife4 ,illustration ,snowshoes3 ,how to ,make and ,use ,them ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,i--,shapes of ,snowshoes ,to the inventive mind of the ,north ,american ,indian we owe the snowshoe1 and its conception was doubtless brought about through that prolific source of invention--necessity4 ,the first models were crude web-footed affairs1 but improvements in model and manner of filling the frames were gradually added until the perfected and graceful shoe of the present was finally reached4 ,the first snowshoes were made by the ,indians1 and the ,indians of ,maine and ,canada continue to fashion the finest models today4 ,the snowshoe is a necessity for the sportsman and trapper whose pleasure or business leads him out in the open during the winter season1 when roads and trails are heavily blanketed by a deep fall of powdery snow4 ,but the use of the web shoe is by no means confined to the dweller in the wilderness1 since the charm of wintry wood and plain beckons many lovers of the outdoors to participate in this invigorating sport1 and snowshoe tramps are fast growing in popularity in and about our cities and towns4 ,all the modern snowshoes are constructed upon practically the same general lines1 although the types of frames differ considerably in size as well as in shape1 and the filling of hide is often woven in many varied and intricate patterns4 ,the frame or bow--usually made of ash in order to get strength with light weight--is bent in many shapes1 but the one shown in the diagram is a typical general-purpose shoe1 and may be called standard4 ,the frame is held in shape by means of two wooden cross braces1 neatly mortised into the frame4 ,these braces are spaced some #ae or #af in4 apart1 and so divide the shoe into three sections1 known as the toe1 center1 and heel4 ,the filling is woven into a lanyard1 which is a light strip of hide firmly laced to the frame through a double row of holes drilled in the wood4 ,the center filling is woven of heavy strands of rawhide1 in a fairly coarse mesh1 because this part of the shoe must bear the weight of the body and the brunt of wear4 ,the end fillers for toe and heel are woven of lighter strands of hide1 and the mesh is1 of course1 smaller4 ,illustration3 ,the ,frame of a ,snowshoe in ,its ,usual ,construction1 ,showing the ,crosspieces with ,their ,laced ,fillings of ,hide and the ,different ,parts ,named1 for a ,ready ,reference ,as may be noted by referring to the drawing1 a center opening or toe hole is provided1 and as the greater strain on the filling lies directly under the ball of the foot1 the shoe is reinforced at this point by the toe cord running across1 and the toe-cord stays1 which are tied in on each side of the toe hole--one end being fastened to the toe cord and the other lashed over the wooden cross bar of the frame4 ,these reinforcing cords are formed of several strands of hide1 the stays being again wound with finer strands4 ,to prevent slipping and to secure a good foothold while walking1 the manner of attaching the foot to the shoe is of importance1 and this is done by making use of a toe strap1 which will allow the toe to push down through the toe opening as the heel of the foot is lifted in the act of walking4 ,a second strap1 or thong1 leading from the top around the foot1 above the curve of the heel1 is needed to lend additional support in lifting the snowshoe1 to effect the easy shambling stride characteristic of the snowshoer4 ,there are1 of course1 a great number of models or styles1 some one style being popular in one locality1 while an altogether different style is preferred in another part of the country4 ,the most representative types are well shown in the illustrations1 and a brief description will point out their practical advantages1 because each model possesses certain merits--one model being designed for fast traveling in the open1 another better adapted for brush travel1 while others are more convenient for use in a hilly country where much climbing is done1 and so on4 ,illustration3 ,a3 ,snowshoe ,experts ,regard ,this as an ,extreme ,style1 for ,it is ,long and ,narrow ,style ,a is regarded by snowshoe experts as an extreme style1 for it is long and narrow4 ,it is designed for fast traveling over smooth and level country1 and over loose1 powdery snow4 ,this style is much used by the ,cree ,indians1 and is usually made #ab in4 wide by #fj in4 long1 with a deeply upcurved toe4 ,it is a good shoe for cross-country work1 but is somewhat difficult to manage on broken trails1 when the snow is packed1 and also affords rather slippery footing when crossing ice4 ,owing to the stout construction of the frame and reinforcement needed to retain the high1 curved toe1 style ,a is more difficult to manage than the more conservative models1 and its stiffness of frame makes it more fatiguing to wear1 while its use is a decided handicap in mountainous districts1 because a curved toe always makes hill climbing more difficult4 ,illustration3 ,b3 ,this ,snowshoe is ,considered the ,ordinary ,eastern ,model and ,one ,best ,adapted for ,all-,around ,use ,style ,b may be considered the ordinary eastern model1 and a common style best adapted for all-around use4 ,it is a neat and gracefully designed frame1 about #ab in4 wide and #db in4 long1 and is usually made with a slightly upcurving toe1 about #b in4 turn at the toe being correct4 ,when made by the ,indians of ,maine1 this model is fashioned with a rather heavy heel1 which is an advantage for fast walking1 while it increases the difficulty in quick turning4 ,illustration3 ,c3 ,the ,style ,illustrated ,here is ,splendid for ,general ,purposes and is a ,favorite among ,hunters and ,woodsmen ,style ,c is a favorite model among the hunters and woodsmen of ,new ,england4 ,this is a splendid style for general purposes in this section of the country1 since the full1 round toe keeps the toe up near the surface1 and lets the heel cut down more than the narrow-toe models4 ,style ,c is an easy shoe to wear1 and while not so fast as the long1 narrow frame1 its full shape is more convenient for use in the woods4 ,it is usually made with about #a to #a-a_/b-;in4 turn at the toe4 ,illustration3 ,d3 ,this is the ,familiar ,bear's-,paw ,model1 ,originated by the ,northeastern ,trapper for ,use on ,short ,tramps and in ,brush ,style ,d is the familiar bear's paw1 a model originating with the northeastern trapper4 ,this model is well adapted for short tramps in the brush1 and having a flat toe1 is likewise a good shoe for mountain climbing4 ,for tramping about in thick brush1 a short1 full shoe enables one to take a shorter stride and turn more quickly1 but it is a slow shoe for straight-ahead traveling4 ,when purchasing a pair of snowshoes1 some few important considerations should be kept in mind1 and the size and model will depend upon the man to some extent1 since a large1 heavy man will require a larger snowshoe than would suffice for a person of lighter weight4 ,height also enters into the choice1 and while a small person can travel faster and with less fatigue when equipped with a proportionately small shoe1 a tall man will naturally pick out a larger-sized snowshoe for his use4 ,for a country where deep snows prevail1 larger sizes are best1 but in localities where the snow packs solidly and there is considerable ice1 and in mountainous districts1 or for rough-country traveling1 the smaller sizes will give more satisfaction and prove more durable also4 ,for a wet-snow locality1 the center filling should be strung in rather coarse mesh1 while for soft1 powdery snow1 a finer mesh will be the logical choice4 ,there are snowshoes and snowshoes1 and while there are fine models regularly stocked by a few of the better sporting-goods firms1 there is likewise a deal of poorly made snowshoes on the market4 ,it is well to pay a fair price and secure a dependable handmade article1 for the cheaper snowshoes--often filled with seine twine and the cheapest hide 7commonly known in the trade as gut7--will warp and twist in the frame1 and the shoddy filling will soon become loosened up and bag after a little use4 ,the best snowshoes that the writer is acquainted with are made by the ,indians1 and the filling is ordinarily made of neat's hide2 cowhide for the center filling1 and calfskin for the toe and heel4 ,a first-class pair of snowshoes may be had for about #f to #g4ej1 and when possible to do so1 it is best to have them made to order4 ,this plan is1 of course1 necessary in case one wishes to incorporate any little wrinkles of his own into their making1 or desires a flatter toe1 lighter heel1 or a different mesh from the usual stock models4 ,where but one pair of snowshoes is purchased1 style ,b will probably prove the best selection1 and should be ordered with the flat toe1 or a turn not greater than #a in4 ,the frame may be in either one or two pieces1 depending upon the size of the shoe and the ideas of the ,indian maker1 but it is well to specify white ash for the frames in the order4 ,no ,indian maker would be guilty of using screws or other metal fastenings1 but many of the cheap and poorly fashioned snowshoes are fastened at the heel with screws1 thus making this a decidedly weak point1 since the wood is quite certain to split after a little rough service4 ,in contrast to the poor workmanship of these low-priced snowshoes1 the ,indian-made article is fashioned from sound and properly seasoned wood2 the cross bars are snugly fitted by mortising to the frame2 the filling is tightly woven1 and the heel is properly fastened by lacing with a rawhide it is a good idea to select a filling of good heavy weight and with a firmly woven and open mesh1 say1 about #c_/d in4 ,the toe and heel sections will1 of course1 be of finer-cut hide and smaller mesh1 and it is wise to avoid those shoes employing seine twine for the end filling4 ,some factory-made snowshoes are given a coat or two of varnish1 but this1 while serving to make them partly waterproof1 makes them rather slippery when crossing logs and ice4 ,most woodsmen prefer to leave both frame and filling in their natural condition4 ,the ,indian-made snowshoe is always thong4 ,however1 ,indian makers are likely to make the toe small and leave the wood to form a rather heavy heel4 ,some few woodsmen and sportsmen may prefer this model1 but the majority favor a fuller toe and a lighter heel for general use1 because the regulation ,indian model1 cutting down at toe and heel equally deep1 increases the difficulty of easy traveling over soft snow1 although it is a good shoe when used over broken trails4 ,when buying snowshoes at the store1 see that the frames are stoutly and well made1 and for all-around use1 provided with a generously large toe hole1 so that ample foot covering may be used4 ,this point is generally overlooked in the machine-made product1 and the toe cords are also frequently roughly formed1 thus chafing the feet and making them sore4 ,these details may or may not prove a handicap for short tramps near town1 but for long trips through the woods1 they are important considerations4 ,the ,indian manner of tying the snowshoe to the foot by means of a single twisted and knotted thong is a good method of attachment1 in that1 if the thong is properly adjusted to the requisite snugness in the first place1 the shoes may be quickly removed by a simple twist of the ankle4 ,a better fastening is secured by using a fairly wide 7#c_/d in47 toe strap and a long thong4 ,the toe strap is placed over the toes1 immediately over the ball of the foot1 and secured against slipping by weaving the ends in and out between the meshes of the filling until it reaches the frame on either side4 ,this grips the toe strap firmly and does away with the necessity of tying a knot4 ,a narrow thong1 about #d ft4 long1 is now doubled1 the center placed just above the heel of the foot1 and the ends passed under the toe cord1 just outside of the toe-cord stays on each side4 ,the thong is then brought up and across the toes1 one end passing over and the other under the toe strap4 ,each end of the thong is now looped around the crossed thong1 on either side1 and then carried back over the back of the heel and knotted with a common square or reef knot4 ,calfskin makes a good flexible foot binding1 or a suitable strip of folded cloth or canvas may be used4 ,the regulation snowshoe harness1 consisting of a leather stirrup for the toe and an instep and heel strap1 will be found more comfortable than the thong1 and when once adjusted snugly to the foot1 the shoes may be quickly taken off and put on again by pushing the heel strap down1 when the foot may be slipped out of the toe stirrup4 ,the use of heavy leather shoes is of course undesirable1 and the only correct footwear for snowshoeing is a pair of high-cut moccasins1 cut roomy enough to allow one or more pairs of heavy woolen stockings to be worn4 ,the heavy and long ,german socks1 extending halfway to the knee1 drawn on over the trouser legs1 are by far the most comfortable for cold-weather wear4 ,the feet1 thus shod1 will not only be warm in the coldest weather1 but the free use of the toes is not interfered with4 ,leather shoes are cold and stiff1 and the heavy soles and heels1 chafing against the snowshoes1 will soon ruin the filling4 ,soldering and ,riveting ,by ,john ,d4 ,adams ,there are two simple processes that every experimenter should master3 soldering and riveting4 ,the large soldering copper will find only a very restricted use with the amateur on account not only of its clumsiness1 but of the fact that it requires a fire1 which is often impracticable to obtain4 ,the experimenter should therefore construct a small alcohol lamp1 which1 after a little experience1 will reveal the following advantages3 ,it may be brought into instant use at any place2 it will make a more perfect connection2 with a small blowpipe places may be reached that are entirely inaccessible to the large iron2 several small pieces may be set in position and soldered without disturbing them1 which is quite impossible with the large iron4 ,to make such a lamp1 procure a small wide-mouthed bottle so that very little alcohol will be necessary and the lamp may be tipped at any desired angle4 ,a short piece of seamless brass tubing should be procured1 or1 preferably1 one of those capped brass cylinders for holding pencil leads1 the button of which should be sawn off and the cap used to keep the alcohol from evaporating4 ,a good1 sound cork is next in order1 and in cutting the central hole1 use the brass tube1 which should be sharpened around the lower end4 ,proceed with a rotary motion1 and a clean core will be removed4 ,if an ordinary lamp wick is not at hand1 soft cotton string may be bundled up as a substitute4 ,such a lamp is safe1 odorless and will not blacken the work in the least as in the case of kerosene or gasoline4 ,illustration3 7alcohol lamp7 ,there are many good soldering fluxes on the market1 but that obtained by dissolving as much scrap of zinc as possible in muriatic acid will solder practically everything that may be necessary1 provided1 of course1 the surfaces are filed or scraped bright4 ,wire solder is usually the most convenient1 as small pieces can be readily cut off and placed directly on the work where required4 ,a small blowpipe is often a valuable adjunct1 as it makes possible a long1 narrow flame that may be directed in almost any direction4 ,illustration3 ,a ,small ,torch ,made of a ,penholder is ,handy to ,use in ,soldering ,electrical ,apparatus ,where numerous small connections are to be made1 as is often the case with electrical apparatus1 the small torch illustrated will be found very convenient4 ,it is simply an old penholder with the wood portion shortened somewhat and the metal end filed off square and cleaned out4 ,this is then filled with wicking1 and it is only necessary to dip it in alcohol in order to soak up enough to solder an ordinary connection4 ,the second simple process1 of which many fail to appreciate the usefulness in experimental work1 is that of riveting--particularly when done on a small scale4 ,very often the material in hand is tempered steel and cannot1 therefore1 be soldered to advantage1 or it may be a case where subsequent heating makes a heat-proof connection imperative4 ,then1 again1 the joint may require the combined strength of both solder and rivet4 ,when properly set1 the strength of the ordinary brass pin1 when used as a rivet1 is quite great4 ,should the work require a particularly soft rivet1 it is only necessary to hold the pin for a moment in the flame of a match4 ,a somewhat larger and stronger rivet may be made by softening and cutting to the required length the small flat-headed nails used in making cigar boxes4 ,the ordinary shingle nail is also of a suitable shape after the burrs have been filed off under the head4 ,illustration ,in setting these small rivets1 it is absolutely necessary that they closely fit the holes1 as at ,a1 otherwise the result will be as indicated at ,b in the sketch4 ,be careful not to leave too great a length for rounding over on the metal4 ,this extra length should approximately equal the diameter of the rivet and must be filed flat on the top before riveting4 ,in case of pins1 it will be found easier to cut them off to the proper length after they are inserted4 ,use the smallest hammer available1 striking many light blows rather than a few heavy ones4 ,illustration3 ,a ,few ,joints ,where ,rivets are ,used to ,hold the ,parts ,solidly ,together ,a ,whistle ,cut a circular piece of tin any convenient size1 preferably #c in4 in diameter1 and bend it across the diameter so that it will be in a narrow ,u-shape4 ,then drill or punch a hole through both parts as shown4 ,place it in the mouth with the open edges out1 being sure to press the lips on the metal tightly on both upper and lower pieces outside of the holes and to rest the tongue against the edge of the tin1 even with the holes1 and blow4 ,illustration ,the result of the first attempt may not be a sound1 but with a little practice any familiar tune may be whistled4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,c4 ,bradley1 ,w4 ,toledo1 ,o4 ,card-and-,coin ,trick ,if a card is balanced on the finger and a coin placed on the card directly over the finger1 one would not think that the card could be flipped out leaving the coin on the finger end4 ,this is easily accomplished1 if care is taken to snap the card sharply and squarely4--,contributed by ,r4 ,neland1 ,minneapolis1 ,minn4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,costumer ,with but little skill1 and such tools as are ordinarily found around a home1 a plain but serviceable costumer can be made1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the necessary materials for it are3 ,one main post1 #a-a_/b in4 square and about #f-a_/b ft4 long2 four legs1 or foot brackets1 #c_/d by #f by #i in42 four brass clothes hooks1 and the necessary screws and varnish for assembling and finishing4 ,illustration ,the center post should be chamfered at the top to relieve the abruptness4 ,the four legs should all be made alike and in some shape that allows them to be fastened to the post in a simple manner4 ,in the sketch1 the legs are fastened to the post by one visible screw at the top and one put in on an incline through the bottom edge of the leg4 ,the clothes hooks are fastened to the post in pairs at different heights1 thereby preventing the screws of adjacent hooks from running into one another4 ,the finish of the costumer should be such as to match the woodwork of its surroundings4--,contributed by ,harry ,a4 ,packard1 ,norway1 ,maine4 ,window ,catch ,used for ,locking an ,extension ,table ,to prevent the two ends of an extension table from pulling apart when not desired1 an ordinary window catch can be fastened and locked in place to the under side of the table top with one part on each end of the table4 ,if but one catch is used and fastened in the center1 it is best to mark it off first1 and then pull the table ends apart to fasten the catch more easily4 ,it may be desired to use two catches for a very heavy table1 in which case it would be best to place one on either side of the center4--,contributed by ,f4 ,m4 ,griswold1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 ,relieving ,pressure on ,heated ,canned ,foods for ,opening ,in opening a can of food that has been heated1 the instant the cover is punctured the steam will force out a part of the contents1 which is very annoying4 ,to avoid this1 pour a little cold water on the cover and allow it to remain a few seconds1 then turn it off and immediately puncture the cover4 ,this will counteract the interior force1 and the can may be opened without trouble4--,contributed by ,joseph ,kohlbecher1 ,jr41 ,san ,francisco1 ,cal4 ,clothespin ,bag ,illustration ,clothespins are usually kept in a bag1 and the one our home possessed had a draw string which would always stick and hold the bag shut4 ,the remedy for this1 and a time saver also1 was to remove the draw string and insert instead a piece of wire1 which was afterward shaped to a circle with an eyelet at the joint4 ,the bag can be hung on a nail and the mouth is always open to its fullest extent1 yet lies flat against the wall4--,contributed by ,jas4 ,a4 ,hart1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,illustration ,snowshoes3 ,how to ,make and ,use ,them ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,,ii--,making the ,shoe ,in making the snowshoe it may be necessary to refer to the previous chapter to select the style1 or to locate the name of the parts used in the description4--,editor4 ,snowshoe making is an art1 and while few1 if any1 white men can equal the ,indian in weaving the intricate patterns which they prefer to employ for filling the frames1 it is not very difficult to fashion a good solid frame and then fill it by making use of a simple and open system of meshing4 ,for the frames1 white ash is much the best wood1 but hickory and white birch are dependable substitutes1 if the former cannot be obtained4 ,birch is perhaps the best wood to use when the sportsman wishes to cut and split up his own wood1 but as suitable material for the frames may be readily purchased for a small sum1 probably the majority of the readers will elect to buy the material4 ,any lumber dealer will be able to supply white ash1 and it is a simple matter to saw out the frames from the board4 ,the sawed-out frame is inferior to the hand-split bow1 but if good1 selected material can be obtained1 there will be little1 if any1 difference for ordinary use4 ,when dry and well-seasoned lumber is used1 the frame may be made to the proper dimensions1 but when green wood is selected1 the frame must be made somewhat heavier1 to allow for the usual shrinkage in seasoning4 ,for a stout snowshoe frame1 the width should be about #a-a_/af in42 thickness at toe1 #g_/af in41 and thickness at heel1 #i_/af in4 ,the frame should be cut #b in4 longer than the finished length desired1 and in working the wood1 remember that the toe of the finished frame will be the center of the stick2 the heel1 the end of the stick1 and the center of the shoe will lie halfway between the heel and toe4 ,illustration3 ,the ,design of the ,snowshoe is ,traced on a ,board1 and ,blocks are ,used to ,shape the ,frame or ,bow ,after the frames have been finished1 the dry wood must be steamed before it can be safely bent to the required shape1 and before doing this1 a wooden bending form must be made4 ,an easy way to make this form is to first draw a pattern of the model on a sheet of paper1 cut out the pencil mark1 and1 placing this pattern on a board1 carefully trace the design on the wooden form4 ,a number of cleats1 or blocks1 of wood will now be needed2 the inside blocks being nailed in position1 but the outside stay blocks being simply provided with nails in the holes1 so they may be quickly fastened in position when the steamed frame is ready for the form4 ,to make the frame soft for bending to shape1 steaming must be resorted to1 and perhaps the easiest way of doing this is to provide boiling water in a wash boiler1 place the wood over the top1 and soak well by mopping with the boiling water1 shifting the stick about until the fibers have become soft and pliable4 ,after #aj or #ae minutes of the hot-water treatment1 wrap the stick with cloth and bend it back and forth to render it more and more pliable1 then use the hot-water treatment1 and repeat the process until the wood is sufficiently soft to bend easily without splintering4 ,the toe being the greatest curve1 must be well softened before putting on the form1 otherwise the fibers are likely to splinter off at this point4 ,when the frame is well softened1 place it on the bending form while hot1 slowly bend it against the wooden inside blocks1 and nail on the outside blocks to hold it to the proper curve4 ,begin with the toe1 and after fastening the outside blocks to hold this end1 finish one side1 then bend the other half to shape4 ,the bent frame should be allowed to dry on the form for at least a week2 if removed before the wood has become thoroughly dry and has taken a permanent set1 the frame will not retain its shape4 ,the same bending form may be used for both frames1 but if one is in a hurry to finish the shoes1 two forms should be made1 and considerable pains must be taken to make them exactly alike in every way4 ,illustration3 ,locate the ,cross ,bars by ,balancing the ,frame1 ,then ,fit the ,ends in ,shallow ,mortises ,when the frames are dry1 secure the tail end of the frame by boring three holes about #d in4 from the end1 and fasten with rawhide4 ,the work of fitting the two cross bars may now be undertaken1 and the balance of the snowshoe depends upon fitting these bars in their proper places4 ,before cutting the mortise1 spring the two bars in the frame about #ae in4 apart1 and balance the shoe in the center by holding it in the hands4 ,when the frame exactly balances1 move the bars sufficiently to make the heel about #c oz4 heavier than the toe1 and mark the place where the mortises are to be cut4 ,the cross bars and mortise must be a good tight fit1 and a small1 sharp chisel will enable the builder to make a neat job4 ,it is not necessary to cut the mortise very deep2 #a_/d in4 is ample to afford a firm and snug mortised joint4 ,the lanyard to which the filling is woven is next put in1 by boring pairs of small holes in the toe and heel sections1 and lacing a narrow rawhide thong through the obliquely drilled holes4 ,three holes are then bored in the cross bar--one on each side about #a-a_/b in4 from the frame1 and the third in the center of the bar2 the lanyard being carried through these holes in the cross bar4 ,illustration3 ,begin ,weaving the ,toe ,filling at the ,corner of ,cross ,bar and ,frame1 ,carrying ,it ,around in a ,triangle until ,complete ,begin the toe filling first1 by making an eye in one end of the thong1 put the end through the lanyard loop and then through the eye1 thus making a slipknot4 ,start to weave at the corner where the bar and frame are mortised1 carry the strand up and twist it around the lanyards in the middle of the toe1 then carry it down and make a like twist around the lanyard loop in the opposite corner4 ,the thong is now looped around the next lanyard 7,no4 #b from the crossbar lanyard7 and fastened with the twisted loop knot illustrated4 ,continue the strand across the width of toe space and make a similar loop knot on ,no4 #b lanyard on the starting side1 twist it around the strand first made and loop it under the next cross-bar lanyard loop1 then carry it up and twist it around the lanyard loop in the toe of the frame1 continuing in the same manner until the last lanyard of the toe is reached1 when the space is finished by making the twisted loop knot until the space is entirely filled4 ,it is a difficult matter to describe by text1 but the illustrations will point out the correct way1 and show the manner of making an endless thong by eye-splicing1 as well as illustrating the wooden bodkin or needle used in pulling the woven strands taut4 ,this bodkin is easily made from a small piece of wood1 about #a_/d in4 thick1 and about #b in4 long4 ,to simplify matters1 the heel may be filled in the same manner as the toe4 ,illustration3 ,an ,endless ,thong is ,made with ,eyes ,cut in the ,ends of the ,leather1 and ,each ,part is ,run through the ,eye of the ,other ,for the center1 which must be woven strong and tight1 a heavier strand of hide must be used4 ,begin with the toe cord first1 and to make this amply strong1 carry the strand across the frame five or six times1 finishing with a half-hitch knot1 as shown1 then carry it up and twist it around the cross bar to form the first toe-cord stay4 ,illustration3 ,the ,heel ,filling is ,woven by ,making the ,connection with the ,lanyard in the ,same ,manner as for the ,toe ,filling ,as may be noted1 the center section is filled by looping back and twisting the strands as when filling the toe4 ,however1 the filling is looped around the frame instead of a lanyard1 and a clove hitch is used4 ,a toe hole1 #d in4 wide1 must be provided for1 and when enough of the filling has been woven in to make this opening1 the thong is no longer looped around the cross bar1 but woven through the toe cord4 ,as the filling ends in the toe cord1 it should be woven in and out at this point several times1 finishing the toe hole by looping a strand around the cross bar at the side of the toe hole1 then passing it down the toe-cord stay by twisting around it2 then twisted around the toe cord along the filling to the other side of the toe hole1 where it is twisted around the toe-cord stay on the opposite side1 looped around the frame and ended in a clove hitch4 ,illustration3 ,the ,center must be ,woven ,strong and ,tight1 and for ,this ,reason a ,heavier ,strand of ,hide must be ,used ,at the first reading1 it will doubtless appear difficult1 but a careful examination of the illustrations will soon show how the trick is done1 and indeed it is really a very simple matter1 being one of those things which are easier to do than it is to tell how to do them4 ,the method of filling has been purposely made simple1 but the majority of shoes are filled in practically the same manner1 which answers quite as well as the more intricate ,indian design4 ,the knack of using the snowshoe is quickly mastered1 providing the shoes are properly attached1 to allow the toe ample freedom to work down through the toe hole as each foot is lifted4 ,the shoe is1 of course1 not actually lifted in the air1 but rather slid along the surface1 half the width of one shoe covering the other when it is lifted in the act of walking4 ,at first the novice may be inclined to think snowshoes a bit cumbersome and unwieldy1 and doubt his ability to penetrate the brush4 ,however1 as the snowshoer becomes accustomed to their use1 he will experience little if any difficulty in traveling where he wills4 ,when making a trail in a more or less open country1 it is a good plan to blaze it thoroughly1 thus enabling one to return over the same trail1 in case a fall of snow should occur in the meantime1 or drifting snow fill up and obliterate the trail first made4 ,when the trail is first broken by traveling over it once by snowshoe1 the snow is packed well and forms a solid foundation1 and even should a heavy fall of snow cover it1 the blaze marks on tree and bush will point out the trail1 which will afford faster and easier traveling than breaking a new trail each time one journeys in the same direction4 ,a well-made pair of snowshoes will stand a couple of seasons' hard use1 or last for a year or two longer for general wear4 ,to keep them in good shape1 they should be dried out after use1 although it is never advisable to place them close to a hot fire1 or the hide filling will be injured4 ,jumping puts severe strain on the frame of the shoe1 and while damage may not occur when so used in deep1 soft snow1 it is well to avoid the possibility of breakage4 ,accidents will now and then happen1 to be sure1 and as a thong may snap at some unexpected moment1 keep a strand or two of rawhide on hand1 to meet this emergency4 ,combination ,settee ,rocker and ,cradle ,by fastening a frame with hinges to the front of a settee rocker1 a combination piece of furniture can be made1 which may be used either as a regular settee or as a cradle4 ,for this purpose1 a covered frame should be provided1 being sufficiently long to extend across the front between the arm supports and having such a width that it will easily fit under the arms when hinged to the seat1 as shown in the illustration4 ,to keep the frame in position while serving as a cradle front1 or when turned down for regular use1 screw hooks are placed at each end1 so that1 in the former case1 the frame1 when swung up1 can be secured in place by attaching the hooks to screw eyes fastened under the arm supports2 while1 for regular use1 the frame is secured in its swung-down position by fastening the hooks into screw eyes properly placed in the front legs4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,illustration3 ,a ,settee ,rocker with a ,front ,attachment to ,make ,it into a ,cradle ,when ,desired ,illustration ,a ,snowball ,thrower ,by ,albert ,bates1 ,jr4 ,the snow fort with its infantry is not complete without the artillery4 ,a set of mortars1 or cannon1 placed in the fort to hurl snowballs at the entrenched enemy makes the battle more real4 ,a device to substitute the cannon or a mortar can be easily constructed by any boy1 and a few of them set in a snow fort will add greatly to the interest of the conflict4 ,illustration3 ,the ,dimensioned ,parts and the ,detail of the ,completed ,snowball ,thrower ,the substitute1 which is called a snowball thrower1 consists of a base1 ,a1 with a standard1 ,b1 which stops the arm ,c1 controlled by the bar ,d1 when the trigger ,e is released4 ,the tripping of the trigger is accomplished by the sloping end of ,d on the slanting end of the upright ,f4 ,sides1 ,g1 are fastened on the piece ,f1 with their upper ends extending above the bar ,d1 to prevent the latter from jumping out when it is released by the trigger4 ,the trigger ,e is tripped with the handle ,h1 connected to the piece ,j1 on which all the working parts are mounted4 ,the upper end of the arm ,c has a piece1 ,k1 to which is attached a tin can1 ,l1 for holding the snowball to be thrown4 ,a set of door springs1 ,m1 furnishes the force to throw the snowball4 ,illustration3 ,cannonading a ,snow ,fort with the ,use of a ,snowball ,thrower ,all the parts are given dimensions1 and if cut properly1 they will fit together to make the thrower as illustrated4 ,springs on the ,chains of a ,porch ,swing ,two coil springs of medium strength placed in the chains of a porch swing will make it ride easier and also take up any unpleasant jars and rattles occasioned when a person sits heavily in the swing4 ,if the swing is provided with a four-chain suspension1 the springs should be used on the two rear chains to get the best results4--,contributed by ,e4 ,k4 ,marshall1 ,oak ,park1 ,illinois4 ,homemade ,water ,meter ,where it is necessary to measure water in large quantities the meter illustrated will serve the purpose as well as an expensive one1 and can be made cheaply4 ,the vessel1 or bucket1 for measuring the water is made diamond-shaped1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 with a partition in the center to make two pockets of a triangular shape1 each holding #b qt41 or any amount of sufficient size to take care of the flow of water4 ,illustration3 ,when a ,bucket is ,filled to the ,proper ,amount ,it is ,turned ,out by the ,weight 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the part forming the pockets is swung on an axis fastened to the lower part1 which engages into bearings fastened to the sides of the casing1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,stops1 ,a1 are placed in the casing at the right places for each pocket to spill when exactly #b qt4 of water has run into it4 ,it is obvious that when one pocket is filled1 the weight will tip it over and bring the other one up under the flow of water4 ,the registering device consists of one or more wheels worked with pawls and ratchets1 the first wheel being turned a notch at a time by the pawl ,b1 ,fig4 #c4 ,if each pocket holds #b qt41 the wheel is marked as shown1 as each pocket must discharge to cause the wheel to turn one notch4 ,the second wheel is worked by the lever and pawl ,c1 which is driven with a pin ,d located in the first wheel4 ,any number of wheels can be made to turn in a like manner4--,contributed by ,f4 ,a4 ,porter1 ,oderville1 ,utah4 ,a ,snowball ,maker ,snowball making is slow when carried on by hand1 and where a thrower is employed in a snow fort it becomes necessary to have a number of assistants in making the snowballs4 ,the time of making these balls can be greatly reduced by the use of the snowball maker shown in the illustration4 ,illustration3 ,a ,device for ,making ,snowballs ,quickly and ,perfectly ,spherical in ,shape ,the base consists of a board1 #bd in4 long1 #f-a_/b in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 ,a block of wood1 ,a1 is hollowed out in the center to make a depression in the shape of a hemisphere1 #b-a_/b in4 in diameter and #a-a_/d in4 deep4 ,this block is nailed to the base about #a in4 from one end4 ,to make the dimensions come out right1 fasten a block1 ,b1 #f in4 high1 made of one or more pieces1 at the other end of the base with its back edge #ad-a_/b in4 from the center of the hemispherical depression4 ,on top of this block a lever1 ,c1 #bj in4 long is hinged4 ,another block1 ,d1 is made with a hemispherical depression like the block ,a1 and fastened to the under side of the lever1 so that the depressions in both blocks will coincide4 ,the lever end is shaped into a handle4 ,two uprights1 ,e1 are fastened to the back side of the block ,a as guides for the lever ,c4 ,a piece is fastened across their tops1 and a spring is attached between it and the lever4 ,a curtain-roller spring will be suitable4 ,in making the balls a bunch of snow is thrown into the lower depression and the lever brought down with considerable force4--,contributed by ,abbott ,w4 ,france1 ,chester1 ,pa4 ,an ,inexpensive ,bobsled ,illustration3 ,a ,bobsled of ,simple ,construction ,using ,ordinary ,barrel ,staves for the ,runners ,any boy who can drive a nail and bore a hole can have a bobsled on short notice4 ,the materials necessary are four good1 solid barrel staves2 four blocks of wood1 #d in4 long1 #d in4 wide1 and #b in4 thick2 two pieces1 #ab in4 long1 #d in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick2 one piece1 #ab in4 long1 #b in4 wide1 and #a-c_/d in4 thick2 and a good board1 #d ft4 long1 #ab in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick4 ,the crosspieces and knees are made with the blocks and the #a-;in4 pieces1 #ab in4 long1 as shown2 to which the staves are nailed for runners4 ,one of these pieces with the runners is fastened to one end of the board1 the other is attached with a bolt in the center4 ,the #a-c_/d by #b-;in4 piece1 #ab in4 long1 is fastened across the top of the board at the front end4 ,a rope fastened to the knees of the front runners provides a means of steering the sled4 ,the sled can be quickly made1 and it will serve the purpose well when an expensive one cannot be had4--,contributed by ,h4 ,j4 ,blacklidge1 ,san ,rafael1 ,cal4 ,motor ,made of ,candles ,illustration3 ,tallow ,dripping from the ,ends ,alternately ,lessens the ,weight of the ,arms and ,causes the ,tube to ,tip ,a tube of tin1 or cardboard1 having an inside diameter to receive a candle snugly1 is hung on an axle in the center that turns in bearings made of wood4 ,the construction of the bearings is simple1 and they can be made from three pieces of wood as shown4 ,the tube should be well balanced4 ,pieces of candle are then inserted in the ends1 also well balanced4 ,if one is heavier than the other1 light it and allow the tallow to run off until it rises2 then light the other end4 ,the alternate dripping from the candles will cause the tube to tip back and forth like a walking beam4 ,it will keep going automatically until the candles are entirely consumed4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,jaques1 ,chicago4 ,kettle-,handle ,support ,illustration ,the handle of a kettle lying on the kettle rim will become so hot that it cannot be held in the bare hand4 ,to keep the handle fairly cool it must be supported in an upright position4 ,to do this1 form a piece of spring wire in the shape shown1 and slip it over the kettle rim4 ,the shape of the extending end will hold the handle upright and away from the heat4 ,how to ,make a ,monorail ,sled ,a monorail sled1 having a simple tandem arrangement of the runners1 is very easily constructed as follows3 ,the runners are cut from #a-;in4 plank of the size and shape given in the sketch1 and are shod with strap iron1 #a in4 wide and #a_/d in4 thick4 ,round iron or half-round iron should not be used1 as these are liable to skid4 ,the square1 sharp edges of the strap iron prevent this and grip the surface just as a skate4 ,illustration3 ,an ,exhilarating ,glide ,accompanied by a ,buoyant ,sense of ,freedom ,only ,obtained in the ,monorail ,type ,the top is a board #f ft4 long and #a in4 thick1 securely fastened to the runners as follows3 ,blocks are nailed1 or bolted1 on either side of the upper edge of the rear runner and the top is fastened to them with screws4 ,the runner is also braced with strap iron1 as shown4 ,the same method applies to the front runner1 except that only one pair of blocks are used at the center and a thin piece of wood fastened to their tops to serve as the fifth wheel4 ,illustration3 ,the ,construction is ,much ,more ,simple ,than ,making a ,double-,runner ,bobsled ,the hole for the steering post should be #f in4 from the front end and a little larger in diameter than the steering post4 ,the latter should be rounded where it passes through the hole1 but square on the upper end to receive the steering bar1 which must be tightly fitted in place4 ,in coasting1 the rider lies full length on the board with his hands on the steering bar4 ,this makes the center of gravity so low that there is no necessity for lateral steadying runners1 and aside from the exhilarating glide of the ordinary sled1 the rider experiences a buoyant sense of freedom and a zest peculiar to the monorail type4 ,then1 too1 the steering is effected much more easily4 ,instead of dragging the feet1 a slight turn of the front runner with a corresponding movement of the body is sufficient to change the direction or to restore the balance4 ,this latter is1 of course1 maintained quite mechanically1 as everyone who rides a bicycle well knows4--,contributed by ,harry ,hardy1 ,whitby1 ,ont4 ,binding ,magazines ,to bind magazines for rough service1 proceed as follows3 ,place the magazines carefully one on top of the other in order1 and space the upper one1 near the back edge1 for two rivets1 marking off three equal distances1 or1 perhaps1 the center space longer than the other two4 ,make two holes through all the magazines on the marks with an awl1 or drill1 then drive nails of the right length through them4 ,use small washers on both ends of the nails under the head and at the point1 which is cut off and riveted over4 ,this makes a good1 serviceable binding for rough use4--,contributed by ,carl ,w4 ,lindgreen1 ,los ,angeles1 ,cal4 ,illustration ,a ,shellac ,cement ,as shellac is the basis of almost all cements1 a good cement can be made by thickening shellac varnish with dry white lead4 ,the two may be worked together on a piece of glass with a putty knife4 ,illustration ,a ,blackboard for ,children ,take a wide window shade and attach it to a roller as if hanging it to a window4 ,cut it to about #c ft4 in length1 hem the lower edge and insert in the slot in the usual manner4 ,procure some black slate paint and cover the shade on one side1 giving it two coats4 ,allow sufficient time for the first coat to dry before applying the second coat4 ,a blackboard of this kind is strong1 and if attached to the wall with the shade fixtures1 it can be rolled out of the way when not in use4--,contributed by ,elizabeth ,motz ,rossoter1 ,colorado ,springs1 ,col4 ,how to ,make a ,ski ,staff ,a ski staff will greatly assist progress over level stretches and is an aid to the ski runner in preserving his balance4 ,a homemade staff that is easy to construct is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,at the upper end is a narrow leather loop for the wrist2 at the extreme lower end a spike is placed for use on icy ground1 and just above this spike is a disk1 or stop1 which1 in deep snow1 prevents the staff from sinking in too far and gives the necessary leverage for steering1 propelling or righting oneself as needed4 ,illustration3 ,the ,staff1 being ,made of a ,bamboo ,pole1 is ,strong as ,well as ,light 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the staff is made of a piece of bamboo pole1 #a-a_/d or #a-a_/b in4 in diameter1 and #d-a_/b ft4 long4 ,the leather for the loop can be made from an old strap1 shaved down thinner and cut to a width of about #a_/b in4 ,the stop is a disk of wood1 #a_/b in4 thick and #e in4 in diameter4 ,this material should be well-seasoned white pine or spruce and coated with shellac4 ,a hole is bored through the center of the disk to let it pass upward on the staff about #f in4 ,here it is fastened with two pieces of heavy wire1 ,a and ,b1 ,fig4 #b4 ,in this diagram1 ,c is the staff1 and ,d1 the stop or disk4 ,the wire ,a passes through the staff below the wire ,b and at right angles to it1 wherefore the wire ,b must be bent as shown4 ,both wires are fastened to the stop with staples4 ,the lower end of the staff1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 is plugged with hard wood1 which is bored part way through its center to admit a wire spike4 ,slight recesses are made in the sides of this hole to anchor the lead which is poured in around the spike4 ,the point of the latter is sharpened and then the bamboo wound with waxed twine1 or fine wire1 to prevent its splitting4 99 99 99 99 99 ,fine emery cloth1 glued to both sides of a piece of bristol board1 makes a handy tool for cleaning the platinum points of a vibrator4 ,a ,game ,played on the ,ice ,a novel and interesting winter game for young and old1 described as a novelty by a ,swedish paper1 is played as follows3 ,illustration3 ,a ,player in ,action ,ready to ,spear a ,ring that ,hangs on the ,line between the ,poles ,two poles of convenient height are erected on the ice2 if skating on a shallow pond they may be driven through the ice and into the ground1 but if the water is deep1 holes must be bored through the ice and the poles will soon freeze solidly in them4 ,a rope is stretched between the poles at such a height as is suited to the size of the players1 or as agreed on to make the game more or less difficult1 and on this are strung a number of pieces of board1 ,a1 each having a ring of spring steel1 ,b1 attached to its lower end4 ,the purpose of the game is to run at good speed between the poles and catch a ring on a spear1 each player being entitled to make a certain number of runs1 and the winner being the one who can catch the most rings4 ,the spears may be made of broom handles tapered toward one end1 and with a shield made of tin and attached at a suitable distance from the thicker end 7,pattern ,c74 ,the line is fastened at the top of one pole and run through a pulley1 ,d1 at the top of the other1 thence to a weight or line fastener4 ,each player should start from the same base line and pass between the poles at such a speed that he will glide at least #ajj ft4 on the other side of the poles without pushing himself forward by the aid of the skates4 ,twenty runs are usually allowed each player1 or #aj players may divide into two parties1 playing one against the other1 etc4 ,an umpire will be needed to see that fair play is maintained and settle any disputes that may arise4 ,an ,electric ,display for a ,show ,window ,a novel window display that is very attractive1 yet simple in construction and operation1 can be made in the following manner3 ,first1 make a small watertight chamber1 ,a1 as long as the focal length of the lens to be used1 and having a glass window1 ,b1 at one end1 and a small round opening1 ,c1 at the other4 ,in this opening is placed a cork through which a glass tube about #b in4 long is inserted4 ,the tube makes a smooth passage for the stream of water flowing out of the box4 ,water from any source of supply enters the chamber through the tube ,d1 which may be a pipe or hose1 whichever is most convenient4 ,the interior is painted a dull black4 ,a convenient and compact light is placed at the window end of the box4 ,a very good light can be made by placing an electric light with a reflector in a closed box and fastening a biconvex lens1 ,f1 in the side facing the window of the water box4 ,when the electric light and the water are turned on1 the light is focused at the point where the water is issuing from the box1 and follows the course of the stream of water1 illuminating it in a pleasing manner4 ,illustration3 ,the ,arrangement of the ,boxes ,showing the ,path of the ,light ,rays through the ,water ,a still better effect can be obtained by passing colored plates between the lens ,f and the window ,b4 ,a glass disk with sectors of different colors may be revolved by any source of power1 such as a small electric motor or even a waterwheel turned by the flowing water4 ,two or three streams of water flowing in different colors make a very pretty display and may be produced by using two or more boxes made up in the same manner4 ,the apparatus should be concealed and nothing but the box end or tube with the flowing water shown4--,contributed by ,grant ,linton1 ,whitby1 ,ont4 ,strainer for a ,milk ,pail ,illustration ,even though a milker may be careful1 small particles of dirt1 hairs1 etc41 will fall into the milk pail4 ,it is true that the milk is strained afterward1 but a large percentage of the dirt dissolves and passes through the strainer along with the milk4 ,the best plan to prevent this dirt from falling into the milk is to put a piece of cheesecloth over the pail opening1 securing it there by slipping an open wire ring1 ,a1 over the rim4 ,the milk will readily pass through the cloth without spattering4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,jaquythe1 ,richmond1 ,cal4 ,baking ,bread in ,hot ,sand ,a driving crew on the river wanted to move camp1 but the cook objected as he had started to bake4 ,one of the party suggested using a modified form of the method of baking in vogue more than a century ago1 which was to place the dough in the hot earth where a fire had been burning4 ,so1 to help the cook out1 a barrel was sawed in half and the bread1 after being properly protected1 was placed in each half barrel and covered with hot sand4 ,two of the men carried the half barrels on their backs4 ,when the new camp was reached the bread was done4--,contributed by ,f4 ,b4 ,ripley1 ,eau ,claire1 ,wis4 ,how to ,make ,small ,cams ,illustration3 ,channels of the ,cams ,formed with ,strips of ,brass ,soldered to the ,drum or ,disk ,in making models of machinery or toy machines1 cams are very often required4 ,a simple way of making these is to lay out the cam plate1 or drum1 and then bend pieces of brass to the correct shape and solder them in place1 whereupon they may be smoothed up with a file or scraper4 ,a cam of this sort on a drum is shown in the sketch at ,a1 and on a faceplate1 at ,b4 ,the method is not quite as accurate as milling1 but answers the purpose in most cases4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,hattenberger1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 ,display ,holder for ,coins ,illustration3 ,two ,pieces of ,glass ,inclosing between ,them ,coins of the ,same ,size and ,thickness ,if the luster of coins fresh from the mint is to be preserved1 they must be immediately placed so as to be protected against contact with the hands4 ,a good holder that will display both sides of a coin can be made of two pieces of glass1 ,,bb1 between which is placed a cardboard cut as shown at ,a4 ,the cardboard should be about the same thickness as the coins4 ,the glass may be framed by using strips of wood rabbeted to receive the edges of both pieces2 or their edges may be bound with passe-partout tape4 ,even when a frame is used1 it is best to bind the edges as this will prevent tarnish from the air4 ,old negative glass is suitable for making the holder4--,contributed by ,r4 ,b4 ,cole1 ,new ,haven1 ,conn4 ,holder for ,skates while ,sharpening ,the base of the holder is cut from a board and should be about #c in4 longer than the skate4 ,two clamps are cut as shown at ,a1 from metal of sufficient thickness to hold the skate firmly1 then bent to shape and attached to the baseboard with bolts having wing nuts1 as shown at ,b and ,c4 ,illustration3 ,the ,holder ,provides a ,way to ,grind a ,slight ,curve in the ,edge of a ,skate ,blade ,one edge of the board is provided with two pins1 ,d and ,e1 solidly fastened1 which are of sufficient height to bring the center of the blade on a level with the grinder axle4 ,an adjusting screw1 ,f1 is provided for the grinder base to adjust the skate blade accurately4 ,the support ,g is for use on baseboards where skates with strap heels1 ,h1 are to be sharpened4 ,the shape of the clamp for this support is shown at ,j4 ,when the skate is securely clamped to the base the blade can be easily hollow ground or given a slight curve on the edge4--,contributed by ,c4 ,g4 ,smith1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,homemade ,direct-,view ,finder for ,cameras ,every hand camera and most of the tripod cameras are equipped with finders of one type or another1 and usually one in which the image of the field is reflected upward on a small ground glass--being1 in fact1 a miniature camera obscura4 ,the later and generally more approved style of finder has a small concave lens conveniently set on the outer edge of the camera4 ,when this direct-vision type of finder is used1 the camera is held so that the finder is at the height of the eye1 a condition that is particularly desirable4 ,when in a crowd1 of course1 the professional and many amateurs are familiar with the method of holding the camera inverted over the head and looking up into the finder to determine the range of the field4 ,even this method is inconvenient1 often impractical4 ,the up-to-date newspaper photographer insists on having his camera equipped with direct finders1 as it saves him much trouble and many failures4 ,anyone with a little ingenuity can change one of the old-type finders into a combination device1 either direct or indirect4 ,the sketches are self-explanatory1 but it may be said that ,fig4 #a represents a box camera with a regulation finder set in one corner of the box4 ,to make it a direct finder1 a small brass hinge is used4 ,cut off part of one wing1 leaving a stub just long enough to be attached to the front of the camera directly above the lens of the finder and so as not to interfere with it1 and high enough to permit the other wing to be turned down on the ground glass1 with space allowed for the thin glass mirror ,a1 that is to be glued to the under side of the long wing4 ,the joint of the hinge should work quite stiffly in order to keep it from jarring out of any position in which it may be set4 ,illustration3 ,two ,types of ,ordinary ,view ,finders and ,methods of ,converting ,them into ,direct-,view ,finders ,if the wing is turned upward at an angle of #de deg41 the finder can be used as a direct-vision instrument when held at the height of the eyes4 ,the image reflected from the small mirror is inverted1 but this is no disadvantage to the photographer4 ,the small pocket mirror given out for advertising purposes serves very well for making the reflecting mirror4 ,the finder shown in ,fig4 #b is another very common kind1 and one that is readily converted into the direct type by inserting a close-fitting mirror1 ,b1 on the inside of the shield to be used as a reflector of the finder image4 ,if the mirror is too thick1 it may interfere with the closing of the shield1 though in many cases this is not essential1 but if it should be necessary to close down the shield in order to fold the camera1 it can usually be readjusted to accommodate the mirror4 ,a ,non-,rolling ,spool ,bend a piece of wire in the shape shown in the illustration and attach it to a spool of thread4 ,the ends of the wire should clamp the spool slightly and the loop in the wire will keep it from rolling4 ,place the end of the thread through the loop in the wire and it will not become tangled4--,contributed by ,j4 ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,cartridge ,belt ,procure a leather belt1 about #b-a_/b in4 wide and long enough to reach about the waist1 also a piece of leather1 #a in4 wide and twice as long as the belt4 ,attach a buckle to one end of the belt and rivet one end of the narrow piece to the belt near the buckle4 ,cut two slits in the belt1 a distance apart equal to the diameter of the cartridge4 ,pass the narrow leather piece through one slit and back through the other1 thus forming a loop on the belt to receive a cartridge4 ,about #a_/d in4 from the first loop form another by cutting two more slits and passing the leather through them as described1 and so on1 until the belt has loops along its whole length4 ,illustration3 ,two ,pieces of ,leather of ,different ,widths ,forming a ,belt for ,holding ,cartridges ,the end of the narrow leather can be riveted to the belt or used in the buckle as desired1 the latter way providing an adjustment for cartridges of different sizes4--,contributed by ,robert ,pound1 ,lavina1 ,mont4 ,removing ,iodine ,stains ,a good way to chemically remove iodine stains from the hands or linen is to wash the stains in a strong solution of hyposulphite of sodium1 known as hypo1 which is procurable at any photographic-supply dealer's or drug store4 ,there is no danger of using too strong a solution1 but the best results are obtained with a mixture of #a oz4 of hypo to #b oz4 of water4 ,bed-,cover ,fasteners ,the arrangement shown in the sketch is easily made and will keep the bed covers in place4 ,the covers are provided with eyelets1 either sewed1 ,a1 or brass eyelets1 ,b1 #f or #h in4 apart along the edge4 ,a wood strip1 ,c1 #c by #a-a_/b in41 is cut as long as the width of the bed and fastened to the frame with wire1 bolts1 or wedges4 ,screwhooks1 about #a-a_/d in4 long1 are turned into the strip so that they will match with the eyelets placed in the covers4 ,thus the covers will be kept in place when the bed is occupied1 and the bed is also easily made up4--,contributed by ,warren ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hooks ,prevent the ,covers from ,slipping ,off the ,sleeper and ,keep ,them ,straight on the ,bed ,collar ,fasteners ,illustration ,an excellent fastener to be used on soft collars can be assembled from an ordinary paper fastener and two shoe buttons of the desired color4 ,this device keeps the soft collar in good shape at the front1 and serves the purpose just as well as a more expensive collar fastener4 ,the illustration shows how it is used4--,contributed by ,b4 ,e4 ,ahlport1 ,oakland1 ,cal4 ,operating a ,bathroom ,light ,automatically ,a device for automatically turning an electric light on and off when entering and leaving the room is illustrated in the sketch4 ,a pull-chain lamp socket is placed upon the wall or ceiling1 and is connected to a screw hook in the door by a cord and several rubber bands1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,operating the ,electric ,lamp ,switch or ,key by the ,opening of the ,door ,when the door is opened1 the lamp is lit1 and when leaving the room the opening of the door again turns it out4 ,the hook should be placed quite close to the edge of the door1 to reduce the length of the movement1 and even then it is too much for the length of the pull required to operate the switch1 hence the need of the rubber bands4 ,the lamp chain pulls out just #a in41 and consequently the lamp is lit when the door is opened part way2 and swinging the door farther only stretches the rubber4 ,this is an advantage1 however1 because the lamp is sure to light regardless of the swing of the door4 ,if no rubber were used1 the door would have to open just a certain distance each time4 ,if the cord is connected to the hook with a loop or a ring1 it may be easily disconnected during the day when not needed4 ,a light coil spring may be used in place of the rubbers4--,contributed by ,c4 ,m4 ,rogers1 ,ann ,arbor1 ,michigan4 ,a ,finger-,ring ,trick ,illustration ,a coin soldered to some inexpensive ring1 or a piece of brass cut from tubing1 will make an interesting surprise coin for friends4 ,the ring when placed on the middle finger with the coin in the palm makes the trick complete4 ,ask some one if he has ever seen such a coin1 or say it is a very old one1 as the date is almost worn away4 ,he will try to pick it up1 but will find it fast to the finger4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,jenkins1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,preventing ,marks from ,basting ,threads on ,wool ,in making up woolen garments it is necessary to press portions of them before removing the basting threads4 ,sometimes the marks of the basting threads show after the pressing4 ,this can be avoided by using silk thread for basting instead of the usual cotton thread4 ,the silk thread will not leave any marks4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,gainesville1 ,ga4 99 99 99 99 99 ,cranberries will keep fresh for weeks if placed in water in a cool place4 ,skating ,merry-,go-,round ,by ,henry ,burich ,after once making and using the ice merry-go-round as illustrated1 no pond will be complete unless it has one or more of these devices4 ,to construct an amusement device of this kind1 select a good pole that will reach to the bottom of the pond4 ,the measurement can be obtained by cutting a hole in the ice at the desired place and dropping in a line weighted on one end4 ,a sufficient length of the pole should be driven into the bottom of the pond to make it solid and allow the upper end to project above the surface of the ice at least #d feet4 ,a turning crosspiece for the upper end of the pole is made as follows3 ,first prepare the end of the pole by sawing it off level1 then cutting off the bark and making it round for a metal ring which should be driven on tightly4 ,a pin1 about #c_/d in4 in diameter1 is then driven into a hole bored in the end of the pole4 ,the crosspiece is made of #b by #f-;in4 material1 at least #ah ft4 long4 ,a hole is bored in the center to receive the pin in the pole end4 ,illustration3 ,skaters ,holding the ,rope ,ends are ,drawn ,around in a ,circle ,rapidly by the ,revolving ,crosspiece1 ,turned near the ,center by ,other ,skaters ,the crosspiece is easily pushed around the pole and the faster it goes the closer to the center the pushers can travel4 ,ropes can be tied to the ends of the crosspiece for the skaters to hold on to as they are propelled around in a circle4 ,relieving ,air ,pressure ,when ,closing ,record ,boxes ,the ordinary pasteboard boxes for holding phonograph records are very hard to close1 due to the air pressure on the inside4 ,i overcome this difficulty by making three small holes in the cover with a pin4--,contributed by ,robert ,bandul1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,a ,steering ,sled ,illustration3 ,the ,extra ,runner in ,front is ,pivoted1 and ,when ,turned1 ,guides the ,sled ,an ordinary hand sled can be easily converted into a sled that can be guided like a bobsled by the addition of one extra runner4 ,to attach this runner1 a piece of wood is fastened to the under side and in the center at the front end of the sled top4 ,a runner with a crosspiece on top is pivoted to the extending wood piece1 which should be of a length to make the position comfortable when the coaster1 sitting on the sled top1 has his feet on the ends of the crosspiece4 ,careful measurements should be made to have the lower edge of the runner on a level with or a little lower than the sled runners4 ,to ,hold a ,straw ,hat on the ,head ,illustration3 ,the ,rubber ,bands are ,linked ,like a ,lock ,stitch and ,fastened in the ,band ,on windy days it is almost impossible to make a straw hat stay on the head4 ,to avoid this trouble1 place rubber bands through the sweatband4 ,before inserting1 make them into loops1 as shown1 and draw enough to be comfortable to the head4 ,this device will save a good many steps when the wind blows4--,contributed by ,t4 ,d4 ,hall1 ,fort ,worth1 ,texas4 ,carrying ,fishhooks in a ,cane ,pole ,the person using a cane pole for fishing can easily provide a place for the hooks and sinkers in the first large joint of the pole4 ,cut the cane off just above the first large joint1 and it will leave a space1 #d or #e in4 long1 which can be used for the hooks and sinkers4 ,a cork is fitted in the end1 to hold them in place4--,contributed by ,victor ,e4 ,carpenter1 ,south ,bend1 ,ind4 ,drying ,small ,laundered ,articles ,where mechanical drying is not in use it takes considerable time to hang out a number of handkerchiefs1 laces1 collars1 etc41 and very often the wind will blow away many of them4 ,the task of drying these articles is made light by using a bag of mosquito netting with the articles placed in it and hung on a line4 ,the air can pass through the netting and when the articles are dry it does not take long to take them out4--,contributed by ,edward ,p4 ,braun1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,decorative ,wood ,panels ,procure an unplaned board that is deeply scored by the teeth of the saw and mark an outline of the desired figure on its surface4 ,sandpaper the background lightly1 cut in a moon and smooth down the tree trunks4 ,the background can be smoothed with a sharp chisel1 or large portions planed1 but in all cases leave the foliage rough4 ,finish the surfaces with oils or stains1 applying colors to suit the parts2 a piece of dried red cedar1 oiled1 will produce a warm red1 and a green red cedar1 oiled1 becomes soft yellow1 each producing a very pretty effect4 ,these panels offer unlimited opportunity for originality in design and color finishing of different woods4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,wm4 ,donovan1 ,seattle1 ,wash4 ,illustration3 ,the ,designs are ,worked into the ,unfinished ,surface of ,boards with ,sandpaper1 ,sharp ,chisels and a ,plane1 and ,then ,colored with ,dyes to ,produce the ,desired ,effect ,fishing-,rod ,making and ,angling ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,i--,a ,one-,piece ,casting ,rod ,the pleasures of outdoor life are most keenly enjoyed by those sportsmen who are familiar with all the little tricks--the ins and outs--of the open4 ,it is the active participation in any chosen sport which makes the sport well worth while1 for the enjoyment gleaned from little journeys to forest and stream largely rests with the outer's own knowledge of his sport4 ,not all of the fun of fishing lies in the catching of the fish1 since the satisfaction which comes through handling a well-balanced rod and tackle must be reckoned the chief contributor to the outing4 ,in other words1 the pleasures of fishing do not depend so much upon the number of fish caught1 as the manner in which the person fishes for them4 ,the rod is naturally the first and important consideration in the angler's kit1 and it is the purpose of these articles to set forth1 at first1 a few hints which my own long experience leads me to think may be of some assistance to those anglers who enjoy making and repairing their own rods and tackle1 to be followed1 later1 by some suggestions on the art of angling generally4 ,the hints given are merely my own methods1 and while they may not be the best way of accomplishing the desired end1 a good fishing rod may be constructed4 ,like the majority of amateurs1 ,i have achieved the desired results with a few common tools1 namely1 a saw1 plane1 jackknife1 file1 and sandpaper4 ,these simple tools are really all that is needed to turn out a serviceable and well-finished rod of excellent action4 ,kind of ,material ,the great elasticity and durability of the split-cane or split-bamboo rod cannot be easily disputed4 ,the handmade split bamboo is unquestionably the best rod for every kind of fishing1 but it is also the most expensive and the most difficult material for the amateur to work4 ,in making the first rod or two1 the beginner will be better satisfied with the results in making a good solid-wood rod4 ,of course1 glued-up split-bamboo butts1 joints1 and tip stock may be purchased1 and if the angler is determined to have only bamboo1 it is advisable to purchase these built-up sections rather than to risk certain failure by attempting to glue the cane4 ,however1 there are several good woods particularly well adapted for rod making1 and while slightly inferior to the finest bamboo in elasticity and spring1 the carefully made solid-wood rod is good enough for any angler and will probably suit the average fisherman as well as any rod that can be purchased4 ,bethabara1 or washaba1 a native wood of ,british ,guinea1 makes a fine rod1 but it is a heavy wood1 very hard1 and for this reason is perhaps less desirable than all other woods4 ,with the single exception of snakewood it is the heaviest wood for rod making and is only used for short bait-casting rods4 ,possessing considerable strength ,bethabara can be worked quite slender1 and a #e-;ft4 casting tip can be safely made of #e oz4 weight4 ,greenheart1 a ,south ,american wood1 is popular alike with manufacturers and amateur rod makers1 and #ij per-cent of the better class of solid-wood rods are made of this material4 ,it resembles ,bethabara in color1 but is lighter in weight1 although it apparently possesses about the same strength and elasticity4 ,in point of fact1 there is little1 if any1 choice between these woods1 and providing sound and well-selected wood is used1 the merits of a rod made of ,bethabara or greenheart are more likely to be due to the careful workmanship of the maker than to the variety of the wood used4 ,dagame1 or dagama1 a native of the forests of ,cuba1 is in many respects the ideal material for rod making1 as it has strength and elasticity4 ,this wood is straight-grained and free from knots1 which makes it easily worked2 it polishes well and is durable4 ,while there is always more or less difficulty about procuring first-class ,bethabara and greenheart1 dagame of good quality is easily obtained4 ,lancewood is much used in turning out the cheaper grades of fishing rods1 but it is somewhat soft and has a marked tendency to take set under the strain of fishing and warp out of shape4 ,it is less expensive than the other woods1 and while it has a straight and even grain1 there are numerous small knots present which make this material less satisfactory to work than the other woods4 ,for heavy sea rods1 lancewood may serve the purpose fairly well1 but for the smaller fishing tools this material is inferior to ,bethabara1 greenheart1 and dagame4 ,other woods are often used1 and while a good rod may be frequently made from almost any of them1 the three mentioned are held in the highest esteem by the angling fraternity4 ,for the first rod1 the amateur will make no mistake in selecting dagame1 whether the slender fly rod or the more easily constructed short bait-casting tool is to be made4 ,the ,necessary ,tools ,the construction of a thoroughly well-made and nicely balanced rod is more a matter of careful work than outfit1 but a few suitable tools will greatly facilitate the labor4 ,a good firm workbench1 or table1 #d ft4 or more in length1 will be needed4 ,a regulation bench vise will come in handy1 but one of the small iron vises will do very well4 ,a couple of iron planes1 one of medium size for rough planing-up work1 and a small #d-;in4 block plane for finishing1 will be required4 ,as the cutters of the planes must be kept as sharp as possible to do good work1 a small oilstone--preferably one in a wood case with cover to keep out dust--will be needed2 a coarse single-cut mill file about #af in4 long2 a few sheets of ,no4 #a and ,no4 #j sandpaper2 a sheet or two of fine emery cloth2 a small thin back or other saw1 and a steel cabinet scraper4 ,illustration3 ,two ,tools for ,gauging the ,diameter of the ,rods1 and a ,homemade ,scraper 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a caliper of some kind is a necessity1 and while the best is a micrometer1 ,fig4 #a1 registering to a thousandth part of an inch1 as well as indicating #hths1 #afths1 #cb;ds1 and #fdths1 this tool is somewhat expensive1 but a very good caliper may be had in the sliding-arm type1 ,fig4 #b1 with the scale graduated to #fdths and taking work up to #b in4 in diameter4 ,cheaper measuring gauges are to be had in plenty1 but as the brass and boxwood scales are provided only with coarse graduations1 the better quality of mechanics' tools will give better satisfaction4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,the set of grooved planes used by the professional rod makers are rather expensive1 although they are most convenient for quickly rounding up the rod to the desired diameter4 ,however1 the beginner may dispense with the planes by making the tool illustrated in ,fig4 #c4 ,to make this handy little tool purchase a steel wood scraper1 such as cabinetmakers use1 and file a series of grooves along the edges with a round file4 ,file at right angles to the steel1 finishing up with a finer file to give a sharp cutting edge4 ,the tool thus made is very handy for scraping the rod after it has been roughly rounded with the plane4 ,its use will be mentioned later on in the description4 ,five-,foot ,bait-,casting ,rod ,the short one-piece bait-casting rod with but one ferrule is the easiest rod to make1 and for this reason the beginner will do well to select this popular type for the first attempt4 ,as the total length of the rod is to measure #e ft41 exclusive of the agate tip1 the wood should be #a or #b in4 longer to allow for cutting down to #fj inches4 ,having selected a good strip of dagame1 #e_/h in4 square1 run the plane along each side and from both ends4 ,this will determine the direction in which the grain runs4 ,drill two holes at the end decided upon for the butt1 spacing them about #a_/d in4 from the end1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,drive a stout brad in the corner of the bench top and hook the butt end over the nail4 ,by rigging the stick up in this manner it will be securely held1 and planing may be done with the grain with greater ease and accuracy than when the end of the stick is butted up against a cleat nailed to the bench top4 ,the wood should be planed straight and true from end to end and calipered until it is #a_/b in4 square4 ,it may appear crooked1 but this need not trouble one at this stage of the work1 since it may be made perfectly straight later on4 ,overlook any kinks1 and do not attempt to straighten the stick by planing more from one side than the other4 ,the chief thing to be done is to fashion a square stick1 and when the caliper shows the approximate diameter1 draw crosslines at the ends to find the center4 ,the length of the hand grasp should be marked out4 ,if a double grasp is wanted1 allow #ab in4 from the butt end4 ,this will afford an #aa-;in4 hand grasp after sawing off the end in which the holes were drilled4 ,for a single hand grasp make an allowance of #aa in4 ,however1 the double grasp--with cork above and below the reel seat--is preferred by most anglers because it affords a better grip for the hand when reeling in the line4 ,mark the hand-grasp distance by running a knife mark around the rod #ab in4 from the butt end4 ,illustration3 ,diagram or ,layout for a ,one-,piece ,bait-,casting ,rod1 ,showing ,calipered ,dimensions for ,each ,six ,inches of ,length4 ,a ,paper ,pattern of ,any ,rod may be ,drawn ,up1 ,providing the ,amateur ,rod ,maker ,has a ,rod to ,use for a ,pattern1 or ,possesses the ,exact ,diameter of the ,rod at ,intervals of ,six ,inches along ,its ,length 7,fig4 #e7 ,lay out a diagram showing the full length of the rod by placing a strip of paper--the unprinted back of a strip of wall paper is just the thing--on the bench and drawing two lines from the diameter of the butt to that of the tip4 ,while the caliber of casting rods differs somewhat1 the dimensions given will suit the average angler1 and ,i would advise the beginner to make the rod to these measurements4 ,for the butt1 draw a line1 exactly #a_/b in4 long1 across the paper and from the center of this line run a straight pencil mark at right angles to the tip end1 or #fj in4 distant1 at which point another crossline is drawn1 exactly #a_/h in4 long1 to represent the diameter4 ,connect the ends of these two crosslines to make a long tapering form4 ,divide this pattern into eight equal parts1 beginning at #ab in4 from the butt end1 marking a crossline at every #f in4 ,this layout is shown exaggerated in ,fig4 #e4 ,if it is desired to copy a certain rod1 find the diameter at the several #f-;in4 stations with the caliper and write them down at the corresponding sections of the paper diagram4 ,however1 if a splendid all-around casting rod is desired1 it is perfectly safe to follow the dimensions given in ,fig4 #e1 which show the manner of dividing the paper pattern into the equal parts and the final diameter of the rod at each #f-;in4 station1 or line4 ,illustration3 ,gauge ,made of ,sheet ,brass ,having ,slots ,corresponding in ,length and ,width with the ,caliper-,layout ,measurements 7,fig4 #f7 ,procure a small strip of thin brass1 or zinc1 and file nine slots on one edge to correspond in diameter with the width of the horizontal lines which indicate the diameter of the rod on the pattern4 ,this piece is shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,by making use of the pattern and the brass gauge1 the rod may be given the desired taper and the work will proceed more quickly than if the caliper is alone relied upon to repeatedly check up the work4 ,when a good layout of the work is thus made1 the next step is to carefully plane the stick so that it will be evenly tapered in the square4 ,plane with the grain and from the butt toward the tip end1 and make frequent tests with caliper and gauge1 noting the diameter every #f in4 ,mark all the thick spots with a pencil1 and plane lightly to reduce the wood to the proper diameter4 ,reduce the stick in this manner until all sides have an even taper from the butt to the tip4 ,the stick should now be perfectly square with a nice1 even taper4 ,test it by resting the tip end on the floor and bending it from the butt end4 ,note the arch it takes and see if it resumes its original shape when the pressure is released4 ,if it does1 the elasticity of the material is as it should be1 but if it remains bent or takes set1 the wood is very likely to be imperfectly seasoned and the rod should be hung up in a warm closet1 or near the kitchen stove1 for a few weeks1 to season4 ,to facilitate the work of planing the stick to shape1 a length of pine board with a groove in one edge will be found handy4 ,a #e-;ft4 length of the ordinary tongue-and-groove board1 about #a in4 thick1 will be just the thing4 ,as the tip of the rod is smaller than the butt1 plane the groove in the board to make it gradually shallower to correspond to the taper of the rod4 ,nail this board1 with the groove uppermost1 to the edge of the workbench1 and place the rod in the groove with one of the square corners up1 which can be easily taken off with the finely set plane4 ,plane off the other three corners in a like manner1 transforming the square stick into one of octagon form4 ,this part of the work should be carefully done1 and the stick frequently calipered at each #f-;in4 mark1 to obtain the proper taper4 ,it is important to make each of the eight sides as nearly uniform as the caliper and eye can do it4 ,set the cutter of the small plane very fine1 lay the strip in the groove and plane off the corner the full length of the stick1 then turn another corner uppermost and plane it off1 and so on1 until the stick is almost round and tapering gradually from the mark of the hand grasp to the tip4 ,to make the rod perfectly round1 use the steel scraper in which the grooves were filed and scrape the whole rod to remove any flat or uneven spots1 and finish up by sandpapering it down smooth4 ,the action of the rod differs with the material used1 and in trying out the action1 it is well to tie on the tip and guides and affix the reel by a string in order to try a few casts4 ,if the action seems about right1 give the rod a final smoothing down with ,no4 #j sandpaper4 ,illustration3 ,the ,four ,different ,types of ,hand ,grasps ,are a ,wood ,sleeve ,bored to ,fit the ,butt of the ,rod2 the ,built-,up ,cork over a ,wood ,sleeve2 a ,cane-,wound ,grasp1 and the ,double ,cord-,wound ,grasps with a ,reel ,seat between ,them 7,fig4 #g7 ,for the hand grasp nothing is so good as solid cork1 and while hand grasps may be purchased assembled1 it is a simple matter to make them4 ,in ,fig4 #g are shown four kinds of handles1 namely1 a wood sleeve1 or core1 ,a1 bored to fit the butt of the rod and shaped for winding the fishing cord2 a built-up cork grasp1 ,b1 made by cementing cork washers over a wood sleeve1 or directly to the butt of the rod2 a cane-wound grip1 ,c1 mostly used for salt-water fishing1 and the double-wound grip1 ,d1 made in one piece1 then sawed apart in the center1 the forward grip being glued in place after the reel seat is in position4 ,to make a grip1 select a number of cork washers1 which may be obtained from dealers in the wholesale drug trade1 or from any large fishing-tackle dealer4 ,make a tool for cutting a hole in their centers from a piece of tubing1 or an old ferrule of the required diameter1 by filing one edge sharp1 then covering the other end with several thicknesses of cloth4 ,turn this tube around in the cork like a wad cutter4 ,if the cutter is sharp1 a nice clean cut will result1 but the opposite will likely occur if an attempt is made to hammer the tube through the cork4 ,having cut the butt end of the rod off square1 about #a in4 from the end1 or enough to remove the holes1 smear a little hot glue on the end1 drop a cork washer over the tip of the rod and work it down to the butt4 ,cut another cork1 give the first one a coat of glue1 slip the former over the tip and press the two together1 and so on1 until about #aj corks have been glued together in position4 ,this will give a hand grasp a trifle over #e in4 long4 ,illustration3 ,the ,corks ,glued in ,place on the ,butt and the ,wood ,sleeve1 or ,reel-,seat ,core1 ,ready to ,slide ,down and ,glue in ,position 7,fig4 #h7 ,a sleeve will be needed for the reel seat to slip over1 and a soft-wood core of this sort can be purchased from any dealer in rod-making materials1 or it can be made at home4 ,for the material procure a piece of white pine1 about #c_/d in4 in diameter and #e in4 long4 ,a section sawed from a discarded curtain roller will serve the purpose well4 ,bore a #ae_/cb-;in4 hole through the piece and plane down the outside until it slips inside the reel seat4 ,it should be well made and a good fit1 and one end tapered to fit the taper of the reel seat1 while the opposite end should be about #a_/d in4 shorter than the reel seat4 ,slide this wood sleeve down the rod1 as shown in ,fig4 #h1 coat the rod and the upper part of the last cork with glue and force the sleeve tightly in place4 ,a day or two should be allowed for the glue to set and thoroughly dry1 before giving the hand grasp the final touches4 ,if a lathe is at hand1 the hand grasp may be turned to any desired shape1 but most anglers prefer a cylindrical-shaped grip1 leaving the top cork untrimmed to form a kind of shoulder when the metal reel seat is pressed into the cork4 ,if corks of #a-a_/d-;in4 diameter are purchased1 but little trimming will be necessary to work the hand grasp down to #a-a_/af in4 in diameter4 ,this size seems to fit the average hand about right4 ,the lower corks will need a little trimming to fit the taper of the butt cap so that it may fit snugly in place4 ,cement the butt cap in place by heating the cap moderately hot1 then rub a little of the melted ferrule cement inside the cap1 and force it over the cork butt4 ,when the cement has hardened1 drive a small brass pin or brad through the cap1 and file the ends off flush with the metal surface4 ,all the guides1 ferrules1 and reel seat are shown in ,fig4 #i4 ,the regulation metal reel seat is about #d-a_/b in4 long1 and in fitting it to the old type of bait rod1 the covered hood is affixed to the upper end of the reel seat4 ,this arrangement is satisfactory enough for the #i-;ft4 bait rod1 but it is rather awkward in fitting it to the short bait-casting rod1 as with the hood at the upper end the reel is pushed so far forward that it leaves #a in4 or more of the reel seat exposed1 and the hand must grip this smooth metal instead of the cork4 ,to avoid this1 it is best to cut the reel seat down to #c-g_/h in4 and affix the reel seat to the rod with the hood at the lower end near the hand4 ,for a single hand grasp1 a tapered winding check will be needed to make a neat finish and this should be ordered of the correct diameter to fit the reel seat at the lower end and the diameter of the rod at the other4 ,in the double hand grasp the winding check is used to finish off the upper end of the cork1 which is tapering to fit the rod at this point4 ,in assembling the reel seat1 push it with the hooded end well down and work it into the cork to make a tight waterproof joint4 ,push the reel seat up the rod1 coat the sleeve with cement and push the reel seat home4 ,drive a small pin through the hooded end and reel seat to make the whole rigid4 ,this pin should not be driven through the rod or it will weaken it at this point4 ,just let it enter the wood a short distance to prevent the reel seat from turning4 ,the upper or double grasp is fashioned after the reel seat is in position1 and the corks are cemented on and pushed tightly together in the same manner as used in forming the lower grasp4 ,the first cork should be pressed tightly against the upper end of the reel seat and turned about so that the metal may enter the cork and form a tight joint4 ,as many corks as are required to form a grip of proper length are in turn cemented to each other and the rod4 ,after the glue has become dry1 the cork may be worked down and tapered to make a smooth1 swelled grasp4 ,the winding check is now cemented on1 to make a neat finish between the upper grip and the rod4 ,before affixing the guides1 go over the rod with fine sandpaper1 then wet the wood to raise the grain1 and repeat this operation1 using old sandpaper4 ,if an extra-fine polish is wanted1 rub it down with powdered pumice and oil1 or rottenstone and oil1 and finish off with an oiled rag4 ,to fit the agate tip1 file down the end of the rod with a fine-cut file until it is a good fit in the metal tube4 ,melt a little of the ferrule cement and smear a little on the tip of the rod1 then push the agate down in place4 ,spar varnish is often used to protect the rod1 but extra-light coach varnish gives a better gloss1 and it is as durable and waterproof as any varnish4 ,it is only necessary to purchase a quarter pint of the varnish1 as a very small quantity is used4 ,the final varnishing is1 of course1 done after the rod has been wound and the guides are permanently whipped in position4 ,however1 it is an excellent idea to fill the pores of the wood by rubbing it over with a cloth saturated in the varnish before the silk whippings are put on4 ,merely fill the cells of the wood and wipe off all surplus1 leaving the rod clean and smooth4 ,the guides may now be fastened in place1 and for the #e-;ft4 rod1 but two of them are necessary4 ,the first guide should be placed #ai-a_/b in4 from the metal taper which finishes off the upper hand grasp1 and the second guide spaced #ae-a_/b in4 from the first4 ,by spacing the guides in this manner1 the line will run through them with the least possible friction4 ,winding1 or ,whipping1 the ,rod ,before whipping on the guides1 take a fine file and round off the sharp edges of the base to prevent the possibility of the silk being cut4 ,measure off the required distances at which the guides are to be affixed1 and fasten them in position by winding with a few turns of common thread4 ,ordinary silk of ,no4 ,a size may be used1 but ,no4 #jj is the best for small rods4 ,most anglers agree that the size of the silk to use for the whippings should be in proportion to the size of the rod--heavy silk for the heavy rod1 and fine silk for the small rod4 ,size ,a is the finest silk commonly stocked in the stores1 but one or more spools of ,no4 #jj and ,no4 #j may be ordered from any large dealer in fishing tackle4 ,as a rule1 size #j gives a more workmanlike finish to the butt and joints of fly and bait rods1 while ,no4 #jj is about right to use for winding the tips4 ,in fact1 all rods weighing up to #f oz4 may be whipped with ,no4 #jj size4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mountings ,used on a ,bait-,casting ,rod ,consist of a ,reel ,seat1 ,butt ,cap1 ,taper ,sleeve1 ,narrow ,agate ,guide1 ,agate ,offset ,top1 ,one ,ring ,guide1 and a ,welted1 ,shouldered ,ferrule 7,fig4 #i7 ,in whipping the rod1 the so-called invisible knot is used4 ,begin the whipping1 as shown at ,e1 ,fig4 #aj1 by tucking the end under the first coil and holding it with the left thumb4 ,the spool of silk is held in the right hand and the rod is turned to the left1 sufficient tension being kept on the silk so that it can be evenly coiled with each strand tightly against the other4 ,a loop of silk1 some #d in4 long1 is well waxed and placed so that its end will project a short distance beyond the last coil which finishes the whipping4 ,this detail is shown at ,f4 ,in whipping on guides1 begin the whipping at the base and work over the pointed end of the flange1 winding on sufficient silk to extend about #a_/h in4 beyond the pointed flange of the guide base4 ,when the last coil is made1 cut off the thread from the spool and tuck the end under the whipping by pulling on the ends of the waxed loop1 as shown at ,g4 ,cut off the ends neatly with a sharp knife4 ,illustration3 ,both ,ends of the ,silk ,thread are ,placed under the ,winding to ,form an ,invisible ,knot 7,fig4 #aj7 ,for colors1 bright red and a medium shade of apple green are the best1 since these colors keep their original tint after varnishing1 and are less likely to fade than the more delicate shades4 ,red finished off with a narrow circle of green always looks well1 and red with yellow is likewise a good combination4 ,narrow windings look much better than wide whippings1 and a dozen turns make about as wide a winding as the angler desires4 ,for edgings1 three or four turns of silk are about right1 and these should be put on after the wider windings have been whipped on and in the same manner1 although it is best to tuck the ends of the edging beneath the wider winding when pulling the end through to make the invisible knot4 ,varnishing the ,rod ,after winding the rod1 see that all fuzzy ends are neatly clipped off1 then go over the silk windings with a coat of shellac4 ,the shellac can be made by dissolving a little white shellac in grain alcohol4 ,warm the shellac and apply it with a small camel's-hair brush1 giving the silk only two light coats4 ,allow the rod to stand a couple of days for the shellac to become thoroughly dry4 ,a small camel's-hair brush will be required for the varnishing--one about #a_/b in4 wide will do4 ,if the varnishing is to be done out of doors1 a clear and warm day should be selected1 and the can of coach varnish should be placed in a pot of hot water for five minutes1 so that the varnish will spread evenly4 ,a temperature of about #ge deg4 is best for this work1 as the varnish will not spread if cold or in a cold place4 ,the varnish should be evenly brushed on1 and care taken that no spots are left untouched4 ,hang up by the tip to dry in a room free from dust4 ,while the varnish will set in four or five hours1 it is a good plan to allow three days for drying between coats4 ,two coats will suffice to protect the rod1 but as coach varnish1 properly applied1 is rather thin in body1 three coats will give complete protection to the wood4 ,the materials required for this rod are1 #a dagame or greenheart stick1 #e ft4 long and #e_/h in4 square2 #a reel seat with straight hood1 #c_/d in42 #a butt cap1 #a in42 #a taper1 small end #ae_/cb in42 #a offset1 or angle1 agate top1 #c_/cb in41 and #b narrow agate guides1 #a_/b in41 all in ,german silver2 #b doz4 corks1 #a-a_/d by #a-a_/h in41 and two #ej-yd4 spools of silk1 red and green1 #jj size4 ,automatic ,watering ,system for ,poultry ,yards ,where a large number of poultry is cared for1 the annoyance and attention necessary to furnish a constant water supply can be overcome by using the system shown in the illustration4 ,for this purpose a storage tank must be provided4 ,this may be some old toilet flush tank1 or any open reservoir that will hold sufficient water to keep all the drinking pans supplied4 ,a float is provided and connected with a stop valve1 so that when the float drops below a certain level1 the valve will be turned open1 and a fresh supply of water will enter the storage tank1 thereby again raising the float and closing the valve4 ,illustration3 ,simple ,arrangement of a ,flush ,tank in ,connection with a ,system of ,pipes to ,supply ,one or ,more ,pans of ,water for the ,poultry ,yard ,each drinking pan should be about #aj in4 in diameter by #d in4 deep1 and is drilled for a #g_/h-;in4 hole to fit a #a_/b-;in4 pipe4 ,at the pan end1 the pipe is threaded so that a lock nut and leather washer can be attached on each side of the pan bottom1 to provide a watertight joint2 at the other end1 the pipe is screwed into a tee in the #a_/b-;in4 main line which connects with the storage tank4 ,in using the system1 sufficient water is run into the tank to fill the pans about three-quarters full4 ,the float may then be adjusted to a shut-off position for the inlet valve4 ,all pans are automatically kept at one level1 even though several may be used considerably more than others4 ,when the general water level has dropped sufficiently1 the float1 dropping with it1 will open the stop valve1 and cause the water to enter the tank and pans until the original level is again restored4--,contributed by ,d4 ,e4 ,hall1 ,hadlyme1 ,connecticut4 ,changing ,pip on a ,card ,cut out the center pip on the five-spot of spades with a sharp knife4 ,cut a slot centrally in another card1 about #c_/h in4 wide and #a-a_/d in4 long4 ,glue the surfaces of both cards together near the edges to form a pocket for a slide1 which is cut from another card and has one-half of its surface colored black4 ,a drop of sealing wax attached to the back of the sliding part1 so that it projects through the slot1 provides a means of moving the slide in the pocket4 ,a lightning change can be made from a five-spot to a four-spot while swinging the card4 ,illustration ,to ,make a ,special ,envelope ,any size of envelope for mailing special papers or documents can be made as follows3 ,all envelopes are of the same shape as shown in ,fig4 #a2 the size for the papers to be inclosed is represented by the dotted lines in ,fig4 #b4 ,the projections ,a are coated with paste1 and the flap ,b is folded over them4 ,the envelope is then ready for the inclosure4 ,the flap ,c is pasted and folded over as with an ordinary envelope4--,contributed by ,l4 ,e4 ,turner1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,illustration3 ,various ,stages in the ,forming of an ,envelope to ,make ,any ,size for ,special ,papers 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,automatically ,extinguishing a ,candle ,candles can be easily fitted with attachments to extinguish the light at a set time4 ,to determine the length of time1 it is necessary to mark a candle of the size used and time how long a certain length of it will burn4 ,then it is sufficient to suspend a small metal dome1 or cap1 to which a string is attached1 directly over the flame1 and run the opposite end of the string over nails or through screw eyes1 so that it can be tied around the candle such a distance from the flame end1 that the part between the flame and the string will be consumed in the time desired for the light to burn4 ,when this point is reached1 the string slips off the candle1 and the cap drops on the flame4 ,illustration ,clothespin ,newspaper ,holder ,a simple newspaper holder can be made by cutting away a portion of one side of an ordinary clothespin1 drilling a hole through the thick end for a screw or nail1 and fastening it in place where desired4 ,another way is to split off one side of a clothespin and cut the bottom of the remaining part tapering as shown2 then drill a hole to avoid splitting the piece and fasten in a convenient place4--,contributed by ,j4 ,p4 ,rupp1 ,norwalk1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,shaping a ,clothespin ,head and ,fastening ,it to a ,wall ,provides a ,holder for ,newspapers ,holder for a ,dory ,rudder ,the rudder of a sailing dory or rowboat often comes off in rough water1 and in order to keep it in place and yet have it easily detachable at will1 the following method is useful3 ,procure a #aj-;in4 length of soft-iron rod and bend one end of it into a loop large enough to fit around the rudder pin after the latter is inserted in the eyelet4 ,insert screws at ,a1 ,b and ,c1 letting them project about #a_/b in4 from the surface4 ,bend the rod at ,d and ,a in the shape shown1 and with a little adjustment it will easily snap into position4 ,it will prevent the rudder from riding up out of the eyelets1 but can be detached instantly4 ,the device should be applied to the upper pin so as to be within easy reach4--,contributed by ,b4 ,a4 ,thresher1 ,lakeville1 ,connecticut4 ,illustration3 ,the ,loop on the ,iron ,rod ,holds the ,pin of the ,rudder in the ,eye ,trimming ,photographs ,in trimming small photograph prints ,i experienced some difficulty in getting them square1 and ,i did not care to invest in a trimming board4 ,by following a line drawn around the print with a triangle1 it was impossible to make a perfect rectangle4 ,in the place of a trimming board ,i now use a piece of glass cut a little smaller than the desired print4 ,the edges of the glass are smoothed by filing or grinding them4 ,in making a glass1 be sure to have the corners cut at perfect right angles and the edges ground straight4 ,the glass is easily located over the print1 and by holding the two tightly together the edges of the print can be trimmed with a pair of shears4--,contributed by ,e4 ,leslie ,mc,farlane1 ,nashwaaksis1 ,n4 ,b4 ,a ,metal ,polish ,a metal polish that is safe to use about the home is composed of #cj parts alcohol1 #c parts ammonia water1 #de parts water1 #f-a_/b parts carbon tetrachloride1 #h parts kieselguhr1 #d parts white bole1 and #h parts of chalk4 ,these substances can be purchased at a local drug store and should be mixed in the order named4 ,any grease on metal will be dissolved by this solution4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,fishing-,rod ,making and ,angling ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,,ii--,various ,two and ,three-,piece ,rods ,while the action of the one-piece rod is undeniably better than when the rod is made in two or three pieces1 it is less compact to carry4 ,to make a #e-;ft4 two-piece bait-casting rod1 the same dimensions as given for the one-piece rod will make a very fine fishing tool4 ,it is well to make two tips in view of a possible breakage4 ,the rod may consist of two pieces of equal length1 but a rod of better action is secured by making the butt section somewhat shorter with a relatively longer tip4 ,by making the butt section about #bc in4 long1 exclusive of ferrule and butt cap1 and the tip section #cb-a_/b in4 long1 a splendid little rod is obtained which will fit any of the regulation rod cases of #ce-;in4 length4 ,to make a #f-a_/b-oz4 rod of this kind with a cork hand grasp1 caliper it in the same manner as the one-piece rod1 making the butt section #cb-a_/b in4 long1 tapering from #ae_/cb in4 at the upper end of the hand grasp to #ai_/fd in4 at the ferrule4 ,the tip is made #cc in4 long1 tapering from #ag_/fd in4 to #g_/fd in4 ,by making the tip and butt to these lengths1 both parts will be of equal length when the ferrules and the tops are added4 ,the material list is as follows1 the attachments being made of german silver3 ,dagame or greenheart butt1 #e_/h in4 by #c ft4 long2 two tips #c_/h in4 by #c ft4 long2 one #c_/d-;in4 reel seat with straight hood2 one #a-;in4 butt cap2 one taper1 #ae_/cb in4 at the small end2 two #c_/cb-;in4 offset agate tops2 two #a_/b-;in4 narrow agate guides2 two ,no4 #a size one-ring casting guides2 one #ag_/fd-;in4 welted and shouldered ferrule1 with two closed-end centers1 one for each tip2 two dozen cork washers1 #a-a_/d in4 in diameter1 and two spools of winding silk4 ,illustration3 ,the ,making of a ,rod ,not ,only ,affords ,much ,pleasure1 but the ,rod can be ,constructed as ,desired ,the three-piece rod should be made up to #f ft4 in length to secure the best action1 but even if so made1 the use of the extra ferrules makes the rod less resilient and elastic than the rod of one or two-piece construction4 ,the best action is obtained only when the rod bends to a uniform curve1 and since the ferrules cannot conform to this curve1 or arc1 the more joints incorporated in a rod1 the less satisfactory it will be from an angling standpoint4 ,convenience in packing and carrying are the sole merits which the many-jointed rod possesses4 ,complete specifications for making a three-piece bait-casting rod1 together with a material list1 is as follows3 ,a rod1 about #e-a_/b ft4 long with a single or double hand grasp made of cork1 will weigh about #g oz4 ,caliper the butt so that it will taper from #ae_/cb in to #aa_/cb in at the cap of the ferrule1 making it #ba-a_/b in4 long4 ,the middle joint is tapered from #ba_/fd in4 to #ae_/fd in41 and is #ba-c_/d in4 long4 ,the tips are #ba in4 long and are tapered from #ac_/fd in4 to #g_/fd in4 ,dagame or greenheart is used for the butt1 joint1 and tips1 and german silver for the fittings4 ,all pieces are #b ft4 long1 the butt is #e_/h in41 the joint and tips1 #c_/h in4 ,one #c_/d-;in4 reel seat with straight hood2 one #a-;in4 butt cap2 one taper1 small end #ae_/cb in42 one #ba_/fd-;in4 welted and shouldered ferrule2 one #ae_/fd-;in4 welted and shouldered ferrule with two closed centers1 one for each tip2 two #c_/cb-;in4 offset agate tops2 two #a_/b-;in4 narrow agate guides2 two ,no4 #a size one-ring casting guides2 two dozen cork washers1 and winding silk1 size #jj or #j4 ,fly ,rods for ,trout and ,bass ,having made a good bait-casting rod1 the amateur will find little trouble in making a rod with a number of joints1 and no special instructions need be given1 since the work of planing and smoothing up the wood1 and finishing and mounting the rod1 is the same as has been described in detail before4 ,for fly fishing for trout1 accuracy and delicacy are of more importance than length of cast1 and the rod best suited to this phase of angling differs greatly from that used in bait casting4 ,a stiff1 heavy rod is entirely unsuited for fly casting1 and while it is1 of course1 possible to make a rod too willowy for the sport1 the amateur1 working by rule of thumb1 is more likely to err on the other side and make the fly rods of too stout a caliber4 ,the idea is simply to help the amateur over the hard part by giving a list of dimensions of a representative trout and a bass fly rod4 ,to make a #i-;ft4 trout fly rod1 with a cork grasp having a length of #i in4 above the reel seat1 caliper the material as follows3 ,the butt is tapered from #g_/af in4 to #be_/fd in4 at #a ft4 from the butt end2 #a-a_/b ft41 #aa_/cb in42 #b ft1 #ba_/fd in42 #b-a_/b ft41 #e_/af in41 and #c ft41 #ai_/fd in4 ,the first #f in4 of the middle joint is calipered to #i_/cb in42 #a ft1 #ag_/fd in42 #a-a_/b ft1 #ae_/fd in42 #b ft41 #g_/cb in42 #b-a_/b ft1 #ac_/fd in41 and #c ft41 #c_/af in4 ,the first #f in4 of the tips are calipered to #aa_/fd in42 #a ft1 #e_/cb in42 #a-a_/b ft41 #a_/h in42 #b ft41 #g_/fd in42 #b-a_/b ft1 #c_/cb in41 and #c ft41 #e_/fd in4 ,all joints are made #cf-a_/b in4 long4 ,the material used is dagame1 or greenheart1 the butt being #e_/h in4 by #d ft41 the joint #c_/h in4 by #d ft41 and the tips #c_/h in4 by #d ft4 ,the attachments1 of german silver1 are3 ,one #c_/d in4 reel seat1 fly-rod type with butt cap2 one taper1 #cc_/fd in4 at the small end2 one #i_/cb-;in4 welted and shouldered ferrule2 one #aa_/fd-;in4 welted and shouldered ferrule with two closed-end centers1 one for each tip2 two ,no4 #d snake guides for the butt joint2 three ,no4 #c snake guides for the middle joint1 and six ,no4 #b snake guides1 three for each tip section2 two ,no4 #g agate angle fly tops1 the kind to wind on2 one dozen cork washers1 and two #aj-yd4 spools of winding silk1 #jj size4 ,a bass fly rod #i-a_/b ft4 long1 weighing #g-a_/b oz41 with a cork grasp1 #i-a_/b in4 above the reel seat1 is calipered as follows3 ,the butt is tapered from #ac_/cb in4 to #be_/fd in4 #a ft4 from the end2 #a-a_/b ft4 from butt1 #bc_/fd in42 #b ft41 #aa_/cb in42 #b-a_/b ft41 #ba_/fd in41 and #c ft41 #ai_/fd in4 ,the first #f in4 of the middle joint is #ai_/fd in42 #a ft41 #i_/cb in42 #a-a_/b ft41 #ag_/fd in42 #b ft41 #ae_/fd in42 #b-a_/b ft41 #g_/cb in41 and #c ft41 #ac_/fd in4 ,the first #f in4 of the tips1 #aa_/fd in42 #a ft41 #e_/cb in42 #a-a_/b ft41 #i_/fd in42 #b ft1 #a_/h in42 #b-a_/b ft41 #g_/fd in41 and #c ft1 #e_/fd in4 ,the joints are #cf-a_/b in4 long4 ,the mountings are the same as for the trout fly rod4 ,dagame1 or greenheart1 wood is used1 the butt being #e_/h in4 by #d ft41 the joint #c_/h in4 by #d ft4 and the tips #c_/h in4 by #d feet4 ,the two-piece salt-water rod with an #ah-;in4 double cork hand grasp1 the whole being #f-a_/b ft4 long1 is made to weigh about #ac oz41 with the following caliperings3 ,a uniform taper of #ce_/fd in4 to #bi_/fd in41 from the cork grasp to the ferrule1 is given to the butt4 ,the first #f in4 of the tips is #ac_/cb in42 #a ft41 #be_/fd in42 #a-a_/b ft41 #aa_/cb in42 #b ft1 #ba_/fd in42 #b-a_/b ft41 #i_/cb in42 and to tip1 #ae_/fd in4 ,the joints are made #cf-c_/d in4 long4 ,dagame1 or greenheart1 is used with german-silver mountings4 ,both pieces of wood are #d ft4 long1 the butt being of #c_/d-;in4 and the tip of #a_/b-;in4 material4 ,one #g_/h-;in4 reel seat with straight hood1 one #a-;in4 butt cap1 one #g_/af-;in4 ferrule1 one taper with small end #ce_/fd-;in42 one #aj_/cb-;in4 stirrup-tube agate top2 two ,no4 #c bell guides2 two dozen cork washers1 and two spools1 size ,a1 winding silk4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mountings for a ,fly ,rod ,consist of a ,reel ,seat with a ,straight ,hood1 a ,taper1 ,snake ,guide1 ,agate ,angle ,top1 and ,serrated ,ferrule4 ,the ,toothed ,ends are ,wound with ,silk to ,afford ,additional ,strength ,the ,independent-,butt ,rod ,the independent-butt rod1 in which the hand grasp contains the ferrule and the tip is made in one piece1 is a favorite type with many of the best fishermen4 ,this mode of construction may be used with all classes of rods1 the light fly and bait-casting rods1 and the heavier caliber rods used in salt-water angling4 ,in rods of this type1 it is only necessary to use the same size ferrule to make as many tips as desired to fit the one butt4 ,tips of several calibers and weights may thus be fashioned to fit the one butt1 and if the single-piece tip is too long for some special use1 one tip may be made a jointed one for ease in carrying4 ,the independent butt1 or hand grasp1 is made by fitting the ferrule directly on a length of dagame1 or greenheart1 which has been rounded so that the seated ferrule will not touch the wood4 ,the ferrule is then cemented and riveted in place1 and a soft-pine sleeve is fitted over the wood core and the ferrule4 ,the forward end of the sleeve is1 of course1 tapered to fit the taper of the reel seat1 and when properly fitted1 its lower end will project about #a_/d in4 beyond the pine sleeve4 ,glue the sleeve on this wood core1 cement the reel seat to the sleeve1 and rivet the reel seat in place4 ,the cork washers are glued in position1 working the first one into the metal edge of the reel seat1 to make a nice1 tight joint at this point4 ,the other corks are then glued in place until the hand grasp is of the desired length4 ,the projecting end of the wood core is then cut off flush with the last cork1 and the rod is mounted in the usual manner4 ,in making a double hand grasp1 the forward grasp may be fitted over the wood core in the fashion already described in making the hand grasp for the one-piece bait-casting rod1 or the forward grasp may be fitted to the tip1 just above the ferrule1 as preferred4 ,both methods are commonly used1 the only difference being in the manner of finishing up the forward grasp4 ,if the forward grip is affixed to the ferruled end of the tip1 two tapered thimbles will be required to make a nice finish4 ,the heavy-surf1 or tarpon1 rod is made up of an independent1 detachable butt1 #bj in4 long1 having a solid-cork or cord-wound hand grasp1 and a one-piece tip1 #e-a_/b ft4 long1 altogether weighing #bc-a_/b oz4 ,it is uniformly calipered to taper from #bi_/cb in to #e_/af in4 ,one piece of dagame1 or greenheart1 #a in4 by #f-a_/b ft41 will be required4 ,one #a-;in4 reel seat for detachable butt1 including one #c_/d-;in4 male ferrule2 one #a-a_/h-;in4 butt cap2 two ,no4 #aa wide1 raised agate guides2 two ,no4 #a trumpet guides2 one #c_/h-;in4 agate stirrup top2 two spools of winding silk1 ,a-size1 and two dozen cork washers1 or sufficient fishline to cord the butt4 ,the guides are whipped on double1 the first set spaced #aj in4 from the top1 and the second1 #bf in4 from the reel4 ,the core of the independent1 or detachable1 butt is constructed of the same material as the rod1 which makes the hand grasp somewhat elastic and very much superior to a stiff and rigid butt4 ,homemade ,ball ,catch for ,cabinet ,doors ,to make a ball catch1 procure a piece of brass1 #a in4 long1 #a_/b in4 wide1 and about #a_/af in4 thick1 and an old gas burner having a diameter of #c_/h in4 ,as described by ,work1 ,london1 the threaded part of the burner is cut off1 which forms a contracted end that will hold a steel ball #e_/af in4 in diameter and allow it to project #a_/h in4 ,a hole is drilled in the center of the brass plate1 and the barrel soldered in place4 ,a piece of spiral spring is inserted behind the ball4 ,the stiffness of the spring will depend on the use of the catch4 ,the barrel is cut to length and plugged4 ,another plate of brass is fitted with screw holes and a hole in the center to receive the projecting ball part1 for the strike4 ,illustration ,combination ,needle and ,thread ,tray ,when any attempt is made to keep sewing material1 such as needles1 spools1 or buttons1 separate1 each of the articles is usually kept in some special drawer1 or by itself1 and when necessary to use one1 the others must be found1 frequently necessitating many extra steps or much lost time in hunting up the various articles4 ,the illustrated combination tray avoids this difficulty4 ,it consists of two round trays fastened together near one edge with a wood screw1 which is loosely fitted in the lower tray but screwed into the upper to permit them being swung apart4 ,extra thickness and weight should be given the bottom piece so no tipping will result when the top is swung out to expose the buttons in the lower section4 ,the thread spools are placed on pegs set in the upper tray1 and the cushion in the center is provided for the pins and needles4--,contributed by ,j4 ,harger1 ,honolulu1 ,hawaiian ,islands4 ,illustration ,repairing ,worn ,escapement ,wheel of a ,clock ,when the ordinary clock has served its usefulness and is apparently worn out1 the jeweler's price to overhaul it frequently amounts to almost as much as the original purchase price4 ,one weak place in the clock is the escapement wheel4 ,the points soon wear down1 thereby producing a greater escapement and pendulum movement1 resulting in an increased strain and wear of the clock4 ,if the tips of the teeth on the wheel are bent up slightly with a pair of pliers1 the swing of the pendulum will be reduced1 thereby increasing the life of the clock4 ,many of the grandfather's clocks can be put in order in this manner so as to serve as a timepiece as well as a cherished ornament4--,contributed by ,c4 ,f4 ,spaulding4 ,chicago1 ,ill4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a piece of work should never be fingered while filing it in a lathe4 ,illustration3 ,if ,he would ,take ,full ,advantage of ,any ,sport and ,reap the ,greatest ,pleasure from a ,day ,spent in the ,open1 the ,sportsman should ,get ,together a ,good ,outfit ,fishing-,rod ,making and ,angling ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,,iii--,trout ,fishing with ,fly and ,bait ,the art of angling is generally viewed as one of the world's greatest recreations1 and while each and every phase of fishing may be said to possess certain charms of its own1 fly fishing for trout is regarded by most well-informed sportsmen as the alpha and omega of the angler's art4 ,this is so because the trout family are uncommonly wary and game fish1 and the tackle used for their capture is of finer balance and less clumsy than any employed in angling for the coarser game fishes4 ,if he would take full advantage of any sport and reap the greatest pleasure from a day spent in the open1 it is really necessary for the sportsman to get together a good outfit4 ,it is not essential to have a very expensive one1 but it should be good of its kind1 well proportioned for the purpose for which it is to be used4 ,the beginner1 who buys without good knowledge of the articles required1 or fails to use careful discrimination1 is almost certain to accumulate a varied assortment of junk1 attractive enough in appearance1 perhaps1 but well-nigh useless when it is tested out on the stream4 ,a good representative outfit1 then1 is of the first importance2 it means making a good beginning by initiating the novice in the sport under the most favorable conditions4 ,let us then consider the selection of a good fishing kit1 a well-balanced rod1 the kind of a reel to use with it1 the right sort of a line1 flies1 and the other few items found in the kit of the practical and experienced trout fisherman4 ,selecting a ,good ,fly ,rod ,the ordinary fishing pole may be bought offhand at almost any hardware store1 but a well-balanced rod for fly fishing should be well tested out beforehand4 ,the requirements call for a rod of comparatively light weight1 a rod that is elastic and resilient1 and yet strong enough to prove durable under the continued strain of much fishing4 ,if the angler has made his own rod1 as suggested in former chapters1 he will have a good dependable fly rod1 but the large majority of anglers who are about to purchase their first fishing kit should carefully consider the selection of the rod4 ,at the outset it must be understood that good tackle is simply a matter of price1 the finest rods and reels are necessarily high in price1 and the same thing may be said of lines and flies4 ,providing the angler has no objection to paying #ae1 or more1 for a rod1 the choice will naturally fall upon the handmade split bamboo4 ,for this amount of money a fair quality fly rod may be purchased1 the finer split bamboos costing anywhere up to #ej1 but under #ae it is very doubtful whether the angler can procure a built-up rod that is in every way satisfactory4 ,the question may arise1 ,is a split-bamboo rod necessary8 ,the writer's own long experience says that it is not1 and that a finely made solid-wood rod1 of greenheart or dagame1 is quite as satisfactory in the hands of the average angler as the most expensive split bamboo4 ,a good rod of this sort may be had for #aj1 and with reasonable care ought to last a lifetime4 ,the points to look for in a fly rod1 whether the material is split bamboo or solid wood1 is an even taper from the butt to the tip2 that is1 the rod should register a uniform curve1 or arc1 the entire length4 ,for general fly casting #i ft4 is a handy length1 and a rod of #f-a_/b oz4 weight will prove more durable than a lighter tool4 ,a good elastic rod is wanted for fly casting1 but a too willowy or whippy action had best be avoided4 ,however1 for small-brook fishing1 where the overgrown banks prohibit long casts1 a somewhat shorter and stiffer rod will be more useful4 ,for casting in large northern streams1 where the current is swift and the trout run to a larger size1 a #i-a_/b or #aj-;ft4 rod of #h oz4 weight is often preferred4 ,of course1 the veteran angler can safely use a much lighter rod than the beginner1 and one occasionally meets a man on the stream that uses a #e-oz4 rod for pretty heavy fishing4 ,to be on the safe side1 the novice will make no mistake in choosing a rod of fair length and conservative weight4 ,when selecting a rod in the tackle shop1 do not rest content with a mere examination of the appearance1 but have the dealer affix a reel of the weight and size intended to be used with it4 ,by reeling on a short length of line and reeving it through the guides and then fastening the end to a weight lying upon the floor1 a very good idea of the rod's behavior may be gained1 since by reeling in the line and putting tension on the rod its elasticity and curve may be seen and felt as well as in actual fishing4 ,to give the utmost satisfaction1 the rod should fit its owner1 and several rods should be tried until one is found that most fully meets the angler's idea of what a rod should be4 ,if one happens to have a good fly reel1 by all means take it along and attach it to the rod while making the tests4 ,it is practically impossible to gauge the balance of a rod without affixing the reel1 and many a finely balanced tool will appear badly balanced until the proper-weight reel is affixed to it4 ,the ,proper ,kind of ,reel ,for fly fishing nothing is so good as the ,english style of click reel1 which is made with a one-piece revolving side plate and with the handle affixed directly to it4 ,any kind of a balanced-handle reel is an out-and-out nuisance on the fly rod1 because it has no advantage in quickly recovering the line1 and the projecting handle is forever catching the line while casting4 ,in fly casting1 the length of cast is regulated by the amount of line taken from the reel before the cast is made1 and it is while pumping this slack line through the guides1 in making the actual cast1 that the balanced or projecting handle is very apt to foul the line4 ,a good reel that is smooth-running like a watch will cost about #aj1 but a very good one may be had for #e1 and cheaper ones1 while not so durable1 may be used with fair satisfaction4 ,the heavier multiplying reels1 so essential for bait casting from a free reel1 are altogether unsuited for the fly rod1 being too heavy when placed below the hand1 which is the only proper position for the reel when fly casting4 ,the single-action click reel1 having a comparatively large diameter1 but being quite narrow between the plates1 is the one to use1 and hard rubber1 or vulcanite1 is a good material for the side plates1 while the trimmings may be of german silver or aluminum4 ,the all-metal reel is of about equal merit1 but whatever the material1 the most useful size is one holding about #dj yd4 of ,no4 ,e size waterproof line4 ,a reel of this capacity will measure about #c in4 in diameter and have a width of about #g_/h in4 between plates4 ,a narrow-spooled reel of this type enables the fisherman to reel in the line plenty fast enough4 ,owing to the fact that the reel is placed below the grip on fly rods1 a rather light-weight instrument is needed to balance the rod4 ,of the two extremes1 it is better to err on the side of lightness1 because a heavy reel makes a butt-heavy rod and1 throwing extra weight on the wrist and arm1 makes casting increasingly difficult after an hour's fishing4 ,an old hand at the game will appreciate this point better than the novice4 ,illustration3 ,the ,english ,pattern ,is the ,best ,type of ,reel for ,trout ,fishing1 and a ,gun-,metal1 or ,other ,dark ,finish1 ,is ,better than ,shiny ,nickelplate ,illustration3 ,fly ,book with ,clips for ,holding ,snelled ,flies1 ,so ,that the ,gut is ,kept ,straight between ,pads of ,felt ,illustration3 ,aluminum ,box with ,clips for ,holding ,flies ,tied on ,eyed ,hooks1 ,each ,clip ,having ,places for ,seven ,flies ,illustration3 ,a ,folding-,handle ,landing ,net may be ,left at ,home1 but ,most ,old ,anglers ,like to ,have ,it ,handy ,when ,needed ,illustration3 ,willow ,creel1 or ,basket1 ,leather-,bound with a ,metal ,fastening1 the ,number ,three ,size being ,about ,right ,illustration3 ,leader ,box of ,black-,finished ,aluminum with ,felt ,pads to ,keep the ,leaders ,moist and ,pliable ,illustration3 ,a ,three-,joint ,fly ,rod with ,cork ,hand ,grasp and ,extra ,tip1 and ,rod ,case ,made of ,aluminum ,tubing ,the ,kind of ,line to ,use ,the fly-casting line used by a veteran is generally of silk1 enameled and having a double taper2 that is1 the line is thickest in the center and gradually tapers to a smaller diameter at each end4 ,single-tapered lines are likewise extensively used1 and while they cost less1 they are tapered at one end only and cannot be reversed to equalize the wear caused by casting4 ,the level line1 which has the same diameter throughout its entire length1 is the line most generally used1 but the cast cannot be so delicately made with it4 ,for the beginner1 however1 the level line in size ,no4 ,e is a good choice4 ,for small-brook fishing1 ,no4 ,f is plenty large enough4 ,in choosing the size of line1 there is a common-sense rule among fly casters to select a line proportioned to the weight of the rod4 ,for a light rod a light line is the rule1 and for the heavier rod a stouter line is the logical choice4 ,if the rod is of a too stiff action1 use a comparatively heavy line1 and it will limber up considerably2 if the rod is extremely whippy1 use the lightest line that can be purchased1 and used with safety4 ,a ,fine ,leader ,marks the ,expert ,caster ,the leader for trout is preferably of single gut1 and as fine as the angler's skill will allow4 ,the fly caster's rule is to use a leader whose breaking strain is less than the line1 then1 when the tackle parts1 it is simply a question of putting on a new leader and the more expensive line is saved4 ,ready-made leaders may be purchased1 or the angler can tie them up as desired4 ,for length1 a #c or #c-a_/b-;ft4 leader is about right for average fishing4 ,longer leaders are used1 and while they sometimes are of advantage1 the #c-;ft4 length is more useful4 ,a longer leader is awkward to handle because the loop is apt to catch in the top of the rod when reeling in the line to bring the fish close to the landing net4 ,leaders may be had with a loop at each end1 or with loops tied in1 for using a cast of two or three flies4 ,for all average casting1 the two-fly cast is the best1 but the expert angler uses the single-fly very often4 ,for lake fishing1 the single large fly is generally preferred4 ,for using two flies1 the leader is provided with three loops1 one at the top1 another at the bottom1 and an extra loop tied in about #ae in4 from the lower loop4 ,in fly casting1 the first1 or upper1 fly is known as the dropper1 and the lower one as the tail fly4 ,for the single-fly cast but two loops are required4 ,gut used for leaders should be carefully selected1 and only those lengths which are of uniform diameter and well rounded chosen1 the lengths which show flat and rough spots being discarded4 ,dry gut that is very brittle should be handled very little1 and previous to a day's fishing the leaders must be soaked in water over night to make them pliable1 then coiled in between felt pads of the leader box to keep them in fishing shape4 ,after use1 put the frayed leaders aside and dry them out between the flannel leaves of the fly book4 ,gut is the product of the silkworm1 and the best quality is imported from ,spain4 ,it comes in bundles1 or hanks1 of #a1jjj strands1 #aj to #bj in4 long and in different thicknesses1 or strengths4 ,the heaviest are known as ,royal and ,imperial1 for salmon2 ,marana1 for extra-heavy bass2 ,padron1 for bass2 ,regular1 for heavy trout2 ,fina1 for light trout1 and ,refina1 for extra-light trout4 ,the grades ,fina and ,refina are well suited for all average fly fishing1 while the heavier sizes are useful for heavy large fishing4 ,to make the leaders1 soak the strands of gut in warm water over night until they are soft and pliable4 ,select the strands for each leader of the desired thickness and length so that the finished leader will have a slight taper to one end only4 ,by using the ,fina gut for the upper length and tying in two lengths of ,refina gut1 a nicely tapered leader of light weight is obtained4 ,begin the leader by uniting the strands together to make it the correct length1 three #ab-;in4 strands being about right for average casting4 ,the single water knot is the strongest and neatest to use4 ,make it by taking the thick end of the strand and doubling it back enough to tie in a common knot just large enough for the line to pass through and drawing it up tightly4 ,tie a single loose knot in the other end of the strand1 about #a_/h in4 in diameter and close to the end2 take the next thickest strand of gut1 thread the thicker end through the loose knot and tie a second square knot around the strand1 as shown at ,a4 ,by pulling on the two long ends the loops can be drawn up tightly1 and the two knots will slide together and make a neat and very strong knot4 ,repeat this operation until as many strands of gut are knotted together as required to make the leader of the desired length4 ,for making the loop at the ends1 a double-bighted knot1 tied as shown at ,b1 is used4 ,if a dropper fly is desired1 do not pull the water knot tightly1 but first insert a short length of gut with a common knot at the end and a loop in the other1 then draw the water knot up tightly1 and a short snell will be made for attaching the fly as usually4 ,illustration3 7,a7 ,the ,single ,water ,knot ,used in ,tying ,leaders2 7,b7 a ,good ,knot for ,making the ,loop at the ,end of the ,leaders2 7,c7 an ,angler's ,knot ,used for ,attaching the ,line to the ,leader1 and 7,d7 a ,jam ,knot for ,attaching ,eyed ,flies1 or ,hooks1 to the ,leader or ,snell ,flies for ,trout ,fishing ,the standard selection of artificial flies numbers about #fj1 but the average fisherman will find about #bd selected patterns to answer every need4 ,for making up the most killing flies for the trout season1 the following can be recommended3 ,use red ibis1 stone fly1 cinnamon1 red spinner1 and parchmenee belle1 for ,april2 turkey brown1 yellow dun1 iron blue1 spinner1 montreal and red fox1 for ,may2 spider1 black gnat1 silver doctor1 gray drake1 orange dun1 and green drake1 for ,june2 ,july dun1 grizzly king1 pale evening dun1 red ant1 and brown palmer1 for ,july2 ,seth green1 coachman1 shad1 governor1 ,august dun1 and royal coachman1 for ,august1 and black palmer1 willow1 whirling dun1 queen of the water1 and blue bottle1 for ,september4 ,to attach a line to the leader the well-known angler's knot is mostly used4 ,this knot is shown at ,c4 ,the snelled fly is attached by passing the loop over the loop of the leader and inserting the fly through the leader loop4 ,when eyed flies are used they are often attached direct to the leader1 or a looped snell may be used as in the ordinary ,american-tied fly4 ,to attach the eyed fly direct to the leader1 the common jam knot1 shown at ,d1 is mostly used1 and when the slipknot is drawn up tightly and the extra end cut off it makes a small1 neat knot1 not apt to slip4 ,catch to ,hold ,two ,joining ,doors ,open ,where two open doors meet1 a catch to keep them open can be made of a piece of wire1 shaped as shown4 ,the hooks at the ends of the wire are slipped over the shanks of the knobs4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,saul1 ,lexington1 ,mass4 ,illustration 99 99 99 99 99 ,strips cut from wood dishes used by grocers for butter1 thoroughly soaked in warm water1 will make excellent repair pieces for market baskets4 ,bicycle ,oil ,lamp ,changed to ,electric ,light ,the desire for an electric light for my bicycle caused me to change a fine oil lamp1 too good to be thrown away1 so that an electric globe could be used in it4 ,the oil cup of the lamp was removed1 and a wood push button fastened in its place with three screws4 ,before fastening the push button1 a porcelain socket was attached to its bottom1 and connections were made between socket and push button1 ends being left protruding for connection to the battery4 ,a small flash-light battery was fastened to the lamp bracket4 ,a small rubber washer was placed between the head of the push button on the switch and the cap1 so that in screwing the cap up1 a permanent connection was made4 ,the lamp can be used as a lantern when removed from the bicycle4--,contributed by ,lee ,baker1 ,chicago4 ,illustration3 ,a ,push ,button with ,socket and ,miniature ,globe ,used in an ,oil ,lamp for ,electric ,light ,lifter for ,removing ,eggs from ,hot ,water ,an improvement over the customary way of removing eggs from hot water with a tablespoon1 is to use an old-fashioned coffee strainer4 ,this brings up the eggs without carrying hot water with them4--,contributed by ,l4 ,e4 ,turner1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 99 99 99 99 99 ,genuine oxalic acid may be used for removing stains from all woods except mahogany4 ,double ,top for a ,table ,the need of two tables in a kitchen where there was space for only one1 was the cause of devising the arrangement shown in the illustration4 ,an ordinary kitchen table was mounted on trunk casters or domes so that it could be moved easily1 whereupon a zinc top was put on it with raised edges4 ,the table was then placed against the wall where it was to be used1 and an extra1 plain top fitted to it and hinged to the wall4 ,illustration3 ,an ,extra ,top ,covers the ,table ,when ,it is ,placed against the ,wall ,when it was desired to wash dishes on the zinc top1 the table was pulled out without disturbing the articles on the hinged top4 ,after drying the dishes1 they are removed from the zinc top to the hinged part1 and the table is pushed back against the wall4--,contributed by ,louis ,drummond1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,table ,when ,drawn ,out ,uncovers the ,zinc ,tray1 ,fastened on ,top ,illustration3 ,as a ,general ,thing1 the ,veteran ,fly ,fisherman ,prefers to ,wade with the ,current1 and ,fishes the ,water in ,front of ,him by ,making ,diagonal ,casts across the ,stream ,fishing-,rod ,making and ,angling ,by ,stillman ,taylor ,part ,,iv--,trout ,fishing with ,fly and ,bait ,how to ,cast the ,fly ,to be able to cast the artificial fly a distance of #ej ft41 or more1 and let the feathered lure alight upon the desired bit of water as lightly as a falling leaf is no small accomplishment1 for fly casting is an art1 and to become an expert1 much practice is necessary4 ,the personal assistance of a skillful caster is not often available1 but if the angler will follow the suggestions outlined1 a beginner will soon grasp the knack of handling the fly rod1 and the casting will steadily improve with practice4 ,as the knack of handling a gun is best gained--not in the field1 shooting live game1 but through shooting at targets--so may the art of fly casting be more quickly acquired by intelligent practice conducted away from the stream1 in the back yard1 or any other place roomy enough to swing the rod and a moderately long line4 ,by practicing in this way1 the angler's attention is focused upon the cast and is not partly occupied with the excitement of fishing4 ,to make a good beginning1 let the reel contain about #be yd4 of common1 braided1 linen line 7size ,e is about right7 and instead of a fly1 or hook1 affix a small split shot to the end of the line4 ,it is well to begin with a cheap rod and save a good outfit1 and if the angler learns how to make a fairly long and accurate cast with a common rod1 he may feel assured that he can even do better with a first-rate outfit4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a--,the ,proper ,way to ,take ,hold of the ,handle with the ,reel on the ,under ,side ,the first point to observe in making the cast is to grip the rod correctly1 and this is done by grasping the rod at the right point where it balances best4 ,by shifting the hand about this point of balance is quickly found1 for at no other point will the rod hang well in the hand4 ,in casting1 the reel is turned to the under side of the rod with the thumb extended along the top of the grip1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,taking up an easy casting position1 with the left foot slightly advanced1 pull from the reel about #be yd4 of line and let this slack line fall in coils upon the ground in front2 bring the rod up slightly above the horizontal1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 and with a quick snap of the wrist1 avoiding shoulder or body movement1 throw the tip upward1 checking it sharply as soon as the tip is carried over the shoulder about #be beyond the vertical plane as in ,fig4 #c4 ,this snappy upstroke of the rod makes the back cast1 by projecting the line high in the air1 and carries it well behind the angler4 ,before the line has fully straightened out behind1 and before it has an opportunity to fall much below the caster's shoulders1 the rod is snapped forward with a quick wrist-and-forearm movement1 which throws the line forward in front of the fisherman and in the direction he is facing1 which finishes the cast with the rod in the position shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--;,begin the ,cast with the ,rod in a ,position ,just above the ,horizontal ,plane ,long and accurate fly casting is much more a matter of skill than muscle1 and while some fly fishermen cast directly from the shoulder and upper arm1 and thus use a considerable amount of muscular force in making the cast1 this cannot be regarded as the best method of casting4 ,the great elasticity of the fly rod ought to be taken full advantage of by the caster1 and if this is done1 casting will be naturally accomplished by the wrist and forearm4 ,to make strenuous efforts to hurl the fly through the air1 using an arm or body movement1 is extremely tiring after an hour or so of fishing1 while if the cast is made from the wrist1 aided by the forearm1 the snap of the rod may be depended upon to project the fly to greater length of line and allow it to fall close to the desired spot1 lightly and without splashing4 ,timing the back cast is the most difficult detail of fly casting1 because the line is behind the angler and the eye cannot aid the hand4 ,the novice will soon acquire the knack of casting1 however1 if he will remember to keep the elbow close to the side1 and to keep the line well up in the air when making the back cast1 and to begin the forward movement before the line has fully straightened out behind him4 ,after a little practice1 the hand will feel the slight tension communicated to the rod as the line begins to straighten out1 and this should be taken advantage of to correctly time the forward movement4 ,counting one for the upstroke1 two and for the interval required for the line to straighten out in the rear1 and three for the forward movement1 is also a good way to time the cast4 ,at the beginning the caster should make no attempt to secure distance4 ,accuracy and delicacy in placing the fly on the water is of much more importance than length of cast in trout fishing1 and to attain this end1 it is a good plan to place a newspaper about #be ft4 distant and try to drop the end of the line on this mark4 ,when the caster can drop the line on the target lightly and with reasonable accuracy1 he may feel justified in lengthening his cast4 ,other casts than the overhead cast just described are occasionally used1 as the ,spey1 switch1 wind1 and flip casts1 but the overhead cast is mostly used1 although it is much more difficult to master4 ,to make the ,spey cast1 the angler requires a rapid stream which will carry the line downstream until it is straight and taut1 the tip of the rod being held as long as possible to accomplish this end4 ,the rod is then raised high in the air with a quick wrist movement1 which lifts the line from the water to the extreme end1 then without pausing the rod is carried upstream with just sufficient force to let the fly fall just above the angler4 ,the line is now on the reverse1 or upper1 side of the fisherman1 when with a sweep of the rod the line is projected over the water's surface--not along the surface--in the manner used in making the overhead cast4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #c--,the ,rod is ,quickly ,checked ,when ,it is ,carried over the ,shoulder ,about #be ,degrees ,the switch cast is sometimes useful when trees or rocks are immediately back of the fisherman1 thus preventing the line from extending far enough backward to make the overhead cast4 ,in making this cast the line is not lifted from the water1 but merely to the surface by raising the tip of the rod4 ,the line is dragged through the water by carrying the tip in the direction one is standing until it is as far in the rear as the obstructions will permit4 ,by a quick downward sweep of the rod the line is projected with sufficient force to roll it forward in a large coil or loop1 much as a wheel rolls on a track4 ,the wind cast is a modification of the switch cast1 but easier to make4 ,the caster brings his line almost to his feet1 and with a quick downward motion of the rod the line is thrown in a long loop against the wind4 ,the underhand and the flip casts are so simple that it seems almost unnecessary to describe them4 ,both are short casts and are only used when the angler is fishing in an overgrown stream4 ,the underhand cast is really a side cast1 inasmuch as the short line is lifted from the water in a loop and propelled in the desired direction by a side sweep of the rod4 ,the flip cast is made by holding the fly between the thumb and finger and with a few coils of line in the right hand4 ,bend the rod like a bow1 release the fly suddenly1 and the snap of the rod will project it in the desired direction and allow it to drop lightly like a fly4 ,handling the ,flies in the ,water ,as a general thing the veteran fly fisherman prefers to wade with the current and fishes the water in front of him by making diagonal casts across the stream4 ,a good fisherman will systematically cover every inch of good water and little will be left to chance4 ,the novice is inclined to fish his flies in a contrary manner1 he casts more or less at random1 and is as likely to splash the flies recklessly about in the most impossible places as he is to drop them in a favorable riffle or pool4 ,to be able to pick out fishable water1 the angler should know something about the habits of the trout1 their characteristics at the several seasons of the fishing year1 and their habits1 which differ greatly in different streams4 ,a fishing knowledge of the stream to be visited is of much value1 but if the angler knows how to make a fair cast and possesses average skill in handling flies on water1 there should be no question but that he will creel a fair number of trout even though he casts in strange waters4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d--,the ,cast is ,finished by ,throwing the ,line ,forward with a ,quick ,wrist-and-,forearm ,movement ,to imitate the action of the natural insect is the most successful manner of fishing the flies1 and as the natural fly will struggle more or less when borne down with the current1 the fisherman endeavors to duplicate this movement by making his artificial fly wriggle about4 ,this motion must not be overdone1 for if the flies are twitched and skipped about1 or pulled against the current1 the wary trout will refuse to fall for any such obvious deceit4 ,a gentle motion of the wrist will cause the fly to move somewhat as the natural insect will struggle4 ,in making the cast do not cast directly down or upstream1 but across the current at an angle4 ,let the flies fall upon the water as lightly as possible1 so that the water will carry them downstream over the likely places where the trout are hiding4 ,keep the line as taut as possible by drawing the slack in with the left hand4 ,the flies should not be allowed to soak in the water1 neither should they be retrieved in haste4 ,the experienced fly caster will invariably fish with a wet line1 that is to say1 with a slightly submerged fly1 and will let the flies drag over as much water as possible before making a second cast4 ,owing to the fact that trout lie with their noses pointing upstream awaiting their food carried down by the current1 the caster will naturally take pains to float his flies downstream with the leader fairly taut4 ,to neglect this detail and allow the leader to float in a wide loop near or before the flies is slovenly fishing1 and few trout will strike a fly presented in this amateurish fashion4 ,early in the fishing season1 and when the stream is flooded and discolored after a heavy rain1 it is a good plan to fish the flies below the surface4 ,fishing in this manner makes it more difficult to tell when to strike a fish1 and some little practice is needed to determine the opportune moment by feeling the slight tension on the line4 ,many fish will be pricked to be sure1 but some trout will be creeled1 and fishing with the submerged fly is sometimes the only way trout can be taken4 ,on fair days and in smooth water1 better luck may be expected when the fly is kept upon the surface1 and this is easily managed by keeping the tip of the rod well in the air4 ,often the fisherman can take advantage of a bit of floating foam1 and if the fly is cast upon it and allowed to float with it downstream1 the ruse will often prove effective4 ,the trout is a hard striker and it is not unusual to have a trout rush ahead of the fly in his attempt to mouth it4 ,in rapid water the savage rush of the fish is sufficient to hook it securely1 but when casting in quiet pools1 the hook is imbedded by a snap of the wrist4 ,at what exact moment to strike1 as well as the amount of force to use1 depends upon circumstances4 ,when fishing in small streams and brooks where the trout run small1 much less force is necessary to hook the fish1 but in quiet water and in larger streams where #b or #c-lb4 trout are not uncommon1 the fish may be struck with a smart upward jerk of the forearm and wrist4 ,so far as my experience goes1 the matter of striking is governed by the temperament as well as the judgment of the angler4 ,the deliberate thinking man is likely to strike too late1 while the nervous individual1 striking too early1 is apt to prick the trout and roll him over4 ,the best time to fish for trout is when they are feeding on the surface2 and in the early days of spring1 when there are few flies about1 the warmer part of the day1 say1 from #aj in the morning to #e in the afternoon1 will prove to be the most successful time4 ,later on1 when flies are numerous1 good luck may be expected at an early hour in the morning1 and in the hot summer months the cooler hours of the day may be chosen4 ,of course1 there are many exceptions1 since there are many cool days in summer1 as well as exceptionally warm days in spring1 and these changes of weather should be considered4 ,however1 extremes are not likely to make good fishing1 and the trout will not rise as freely on cold1 windy days1 nor will they fight as gamely4 ,on hot days1 too1 not so much luck can be expected during the hours of the greatest heat--#ab to #d--;but a good basket of trout may be creeled early in the morning or late in the afternoon of summer4 ,a bright1 clear day is usually the best for fly fishing1 because the sun brings out more flies1 but a warm rain1 or even a fog1 is also considered good fishing weather4 ,among the live baits available for trout fishing are the minnow1 white grub1 cricket1 grasshopper1 and other insects1 and last1 but by no means least1 the common angle or earthworm4 ,the minnow is beyond a doubt the most enticing morsel that can be offered to a hungry trout1 and a minnow may be reckoned to secure a rise when other baits fail4 ,the inconvenience of transporting this bait is a great drawback1 and as minnows are delicate fish1 a minnow bucket is necessary for their preservation4 ,this means a lot of trouble1 as the water must be frequently changed or aerated1 and this labor1 together with the difficulty of carrying a bulky pail through the brush1 makes this desirable bait almost impossible for stream and brook fishing4 ,the salt-water minnow1 known as a shiner or mummychug1 is a topnotch trout bait1 and being much tougher than the fresh-water minnow1 makes a bait often used by anglers residing near the seacoast4 ,the white grub1 or larvae of the so-called ,may beetle1 is a good bait available for early-season fishing1 and may be obtained in the early spring months by spading up grass land4 ,the grub is about #a in4 long1 and of a creamy yellow color with a darker head4 ,it may be kept a month1 or more1 by putting it in a box with a number of pieces of fresh turf4 ,crickets1 grasshoppers1 and many other insects1 make good baits1 while the earthworm is a good all-around bait for trout4 ,a supply dug some days before and kept by packing in fresh moss and slightly moistening with milk and water will prove more attractive in appearance and the worms will be tougher and cleaner to handle than when carried in earth4 ,other good baits include the fin of a trout1 and if this is used in combination with the eye of the same fish1 it forms an attractive lure4 ,in using this bait1 do not puncture the eyeball1 but hook through the thin flexible skin surrounding the eye4 ,a fat piece of salt pork1 cut into pieces #a in4 long and #a_/d in4 wide1 makes a fairly good bait4 ,spoons and other spinning baits are presumably attractive1 but few sportsmen use them when angling for so fine a fish as trout4 ,illustration3 ,houses ,made of ,poles ,by ,lola ,a4 ,pinchon ,in this article descriptions are given of several shelters suitable for a resort1 but the reader may select any one of them that answers his needs and build a camp house1 or fit up a more substantial one to make living quarters for the whole year4--,editor4 ,illustration3 ,houses ,made of ,poles ,being forced to take the open-air treatment to regain health1 a person adopted the plan of building a pole house in the woods1 and the scheme was so successful that it was decided to make a resort grounds1 to attract crowds during holidays1 by which an income could be realized for living expenses4 ,all the pavilions1 stands1 furniture1 and amusement devices were constructed of straight poles cut from young growth of timber with the bark remaining on them4 ,outside of boards for flooring and roofing material1 the entire construction of the buildings and fences consisted of poles4 ,illustration3 ,the ,frame ,construction of the ,house ,made ,entirely of ,rough ,poles1 the ,verticals being ,set in the ,ground1 ,plumbed1 and ,sighted to ,make a ,perfect ,rectangle of the ,desired ,proportions ,a level spot was selected and a house built having three rooms4 ,the location was in a grove of young timbers1 most of it being straight1 and #ac trees were easily found that would make posts #ab ft4 long1 required for the sides1 and two poles #af ft4 long1 for the center of the ends1 so that they would reach to the ridge4 ,the plot was laid out rectangular and marked for the poles1 which were set in the ground for a depth of #d ft41 at distances of #f ft4 apart4 ,this made the house #h ft4 high at the eaves with a square pitch roof2 that is1 the ridge was #c ft4 high in the center from the plate surfaces for this width of a house4 ,the rule for finding this height is to take one-quarter of the width of the house for the height in the center from the plate4 ,illustration3 ,the ,steps are ,supported on ,pairs of ,vertical ,poles ,set in the ,ground to ,make ,different ,levels ,the corner poles were carefully located to make the size #ab by #bd ft41 with a lean-to #h by #ab ft41 and then plumbed to get them straight vertically4 ,the plates for the sides1 consisting of five poles1 were selected as straight as possible and their ends and centers hewn down to about one-half their thickness1 as shown at ,a and ,b1 and nailed to the tops of the vertical poles1 the connection for center poles being as shown at ,c4 ,the next step was to secure the vertical poles with crosspieces between them which were used later for supporting the siding4 ,these poles were cut about #f ft4 long1 their ends being cut concave to fit the curve of the upright poles1 as shown at ,d4 ,these were spaced evenly1 about #b ft4 apart from center to center1 on the sides and ends1 as shown in the sketch1 and toenailed in place4 ,the doors and window openings were cut in the horizontal poles wherever wanted1 and casements set in and nailed4 ,the first row of horizontal poles was placed close to the ground and used both as support for the lower ends of the siding and to nail the ends of the flooring boards to1 which were fastened in the center to poles laid on stones1 or1 better still1 placed on top of short blocks1 #e ft4 long1 set in the ground4 ,these poles for the floor should be placed not over #b ft4 apart to make the flooring solid4 ,illustration3 ,gate ,openings were ,made in the ,fence ,where ,necessary1 and ,gates of ,poles ,hung in the ,ordinary ,manner ,a lean-to was built by setting three poles at a distance of #h ft4 from one side1 beginning at the center and extending to the end of the main building4 ,these poles were about #f ft4 long above the ground4 ,the rafter poles for this part were about #i-a_/b ft4 long1 notched at both ends for the plates1 the ends of the house rafters being sawed off even with the outside of the plate along this edge4 ,the rafter poles for the house were #aj in all1 #h ft4 long1 and were laid off and cut to fit a ridge made of a board4 ,these poles were notched about #ae in4 from their lower ends to fit over the rounding edge of the plate pole1 and were then placed directly over each vertical wall pole4 ,they were nailed both to the plate and to the ridge1 also further strengthened by a brace made of a piece of board or a small pole1 placed under the ridge and nailed to both rafters4 ,on top of the rafters boards were placed horizontally1 spaced about #a ft4 apart1 but this is optional with the builder1 as other roofing material can be used4 ,in this instance metal roofing was used1 and it only required fastening at intervals1 and to prevent rusting out1 it was well painted on the under side before laying it and coated on the outside when fastened in place4 ,if a more substantial shelter is wanted1 it is best to lay the roof solid with boards1 then cover it with the regular prepared roofing material4 ,some large trees were selected and felled1 then cut into #d-;ft4 lengths and the bark removed1 or if desired1 the bark removed in #d-;ft4 lengths1 and nailed on the outside of the poles1 beginning at the bottom in the same manner as laying shingles1 to form the siding of the house4 ,if a more substantial house is wanted1 boards can be nailed on the poles1 then the bark fastened to the boards2 also1 the interior can be finished in wall board4 ,the same general construction is used for the porch1 with horizontal poles latticed1 as shown1 to form the railing4 ,it is very easy to make ornamental parts1 such as shown1 on the eave of the porch1 by splitting sticks and nailing them on closely together to make a frieze4 ,floors are laid on the porch and in the house1 and doors hung and window sash fitted in the same manner as in an ordinary house4 ,illustration3 ,all ,furniture1 ,together with the ,large ,lawn ,swings1 ,took on the ,general ,appearance of the ,woodland1 and ,as the ,pieces were ,made ,up of the ,same ,material ,as the ,houses1 the ,cost ,was ,only the ,labor and a ,few ,nails ,a band stand was constructed on sloping ground1 and after setting the poles1 the floor horizontals were placed about #b ft4 above the ground1 on the upper side1 and #d ft4 on the lower side4 ,the poles used were about #ah ft4 long4 ,instead of having the horizontals #b ft4 apart1 the first was placed #a ft4 above the floor1 the next at about one-half the distance from the lower one to the plate at the top1 and the space between was ornamented with cross poles1 as shown4 ,a balcony or bay was constructed at one end1 and a fancy roof was made of poles whose ends rested on a curved pole attached to the vertical pieces4 ,steps were formed of several straight poles1 hewn down on their ends to make a level place to rest on horizontal pieces attached to stakes at the ends4 ,a pair of stakes were used at each end of a step1 and these were fastened to a slanting piece at the top1 their lower ends being set into the ground4 ,the manner of bracing and crossing with horizontals makes a rigid form of construction1 and if choice poles are selected for the step pieces1 they will be comparatively level and of sufficient strength to hold up all the load put on them4 ,the roof of this building was made for a sun shade only and consisted of boards nailed closely together on the rafters4 ,illustration3 ,the ,entrance to the ,grounds was ,given an ,inviting ,appearance with ,large ,posts and ,swinging ,gates ,an ice-cream parlor was built on the same plan1 but without any board floor2 the ground1 being level1 was used instead4 ,there were five vertical poles used for each end with a space left between the two poles at the center1 on both sides1 for an entrance4 ,this building was covered with prepared roofing1 so that the things kept for sale could be protected in case of a shower4 ,a peanut stand was also built without a floor1 and to make it with nine sides1 nine poles were set in the ground to form a perfect nonagon and joined at their tops with latticed horizontals4 ,then a rafter was run from the top of each post to the center1 and boards were fitted on each pair of rafters over the ,v-shaped openings4 ,the boards were then covered with prepared roofing4 ,a railing was formed of horizontals set in notches1 cut in the posts1 and then ornamented in the same manner as for the other buildings4 ,fences were constructed about the grounds1 made of pole posts with horizontals on top1 hewn down and fitted as the plates for the house2 and the lower pieces were set in the same as for making the house railing4 ,gates were made of two vertical pieces1 the height of the posts1 and two horizontals1 then braced with a piece running from the lower corner at the hinge side to the upper opposite corner1 the other cross brace being joined to the sides of the former1 whereupon two short horizontals were fitted in the center4 ,a blacksmith formed some hinges of rods and strap iron1 as shown1 and these were fastened in holes bored in the post and the gate vertical4 ,a latch was made by boring a hole through the gate vertical and into the end of the short piece4 ,then a slot was cut in the side to receive a pin inserted in a shaft made to fit the horizontal hole4 ,a keeper was made in the post by boring a hole to receive the end of the latch4 ,large posts were constructed at the entrance to the grounds1 and on these double swing gates1 made up in the same manner as the small one1 were attached4 ,these large posts were built up of four slender poles and were considerably higher than the fence poles4 ,the poles were set in a perfect square1 having sides about #ah in4 long1 and a square top put on by mitering the corners1 whereupon four small rafters were fitted on top4 ,the gates were swung on hinges made like those for the small gate4 ,among the best and most enjoyed amusement devices on the grounds were the swings4 ,several of these were built1 with and without tables4 ,four poles1 about #bj ft4 long1 were set in the ground at an angle1 and each pair of side poles was joined with two horizontals1 about #ab ft4 long1 spreaders being fastened between the two horizontals to keep the tops of the poles evenly spaced4 ,the distance apart of the poles will depend on the size of the swing and the number of persons to be seated4 ,each pair of side poles are further strengthened with crossed poles1 as shown4 ,if no table is to be used in the swing1 the poles may be set closer together1 so that the top horizontals will be about #h ft4 long4 ,the platform for the swinging part consists of two poles1 #ab ft4 long1 which are swung on six vertical poles1 about #ad ft4 long4 ,these poles are attached to the top horizontals with long bolts1 or rods1 running through both1 the bottom being attached in the same manner4 ,poles are nailed across the platform horizontals at the bottom for a floor1 and a table with seats at the ends is formed of poles4 ,the construction is obvious4 ,a short space between two trees can be made into a seat by fastening two horizontals1 one on each tree1 with the ends supported by braces4 ,poles are nailed on the upper surface for a seat4 ,other furniture for the house and grounds was made of poles in the manner illustrated4 ,tables were built for picnickers by setting four or six poles in the ground and making a top of poles or boards4 ,horizontals were placed across the legs with extending ends1 on which seats were made for the tables4 ,chairs and settees were built in the same manner1 poles being used for the entire construction4 ,an ,electric ,water ,heater ,procure the barrel and cap from a hand bicycle pump and prepare them as follows3 ,make a tube of paper1 about double the thickness of a postal card1 to fit snugly in the pump barrel and oil it slightly before slipping it into place4 ,procure some resistance wire of the proper length and size to heat quickly4 ,the wire can be tested out by coiling it on some nonconducting material1 such as an earthen jug or glazed tile1 and connecting one end to the current supply and running the other wire of the supply over the coil until it heats properly4 ,cut the resistance at this point and temporarily coil it to fit into the bottom of the pump barrel1 allowing one end to extend up through the space in the center with sufficient length to make a connection to supply wires4 ,mix some dental plaster to the consistency of thick cream and1 while keeping the wire in the center of the pump barrel1 pour in the mixture until it is filled to within #a-a_/b in4 of the top4 ,allow the plaster to set for about a day1 then remove it from the barrel and take off the paper roll4 ,the coil of wire at the bottom is now straightened out and wound in a coil over the outside of the plaster core1 allowing sufficient end for connecting to the supply wires4 ,illustration3 ,an ,electric ,heating ,coil ,made of ,resistance ,wire ,placed in a ,bicycle-,pump ,barrel for ,boiling ,water ,cut two or three disks of mica to fit snugly in the bottom of the pump barrel1 also cut a mica sheet to make a covering tube over the coil on the plaster core and insert the whole into the barrel4 ,the two terminals are connected to the ends of a flexible cord which has a plug attached to the opposite end4 ,be sure to insulate the ends of the wire where they connect to the flexible cord inside of the pump barrel under the cap4 ,in winding the resistance wire on the core1 be sure that one turn does not touch the other4 ,the heater when connected to a current supply and placed in #a qt4 of water will bring it to a boil quickly4--,contributed by ,a4 ,h4 ,waychoff1 ,lyons1 ,colo ,illustration ,camps ,by ,f4 ,s4 ,charles ,a good site1 pure water in abundance1 and a convenient fuel supply1 are the features of a temporary camp that should be given first consideration when starting out to enjoy a vacation in the woods4 ,the site should be high and dry1 level enough for the tent and camp fire1 and with surrounding ground sloping enough to insure proper drainage4 ,a sufficient fuel supply is an important factor1 and a spot should be chosen where great effort is not required to collect it and get it into proper shape for the fire4 ,illustration3 ,wall ,tent ,illustration3 ,lean-,to of ,boughs ,illustration3 ,log ,cabin ,when locating near streams of water be careful to select a spot above high water mark so the ground will not be overflowed by a sudden rise of the stream4 ,do not select the site of an old camp1 as the surroundings are usually stripped of all fuel1 and the grounds are unclean4 ,division of ,work ,clear the selected spot and lay out the lines for the tent1 camp fire1 etc4 ,if the camping party consists of more than two persons1 each one should do the part allotted to him1 and the work will be speedily accomplished4 ,remember that discipline brings efficiency1 and do not be slack about a camp just because it is pleasure4 ,one of the party should attend to the camp fire and prepare the meals while another secures the fuel and water4 ,the tent can be unpacked and the ground cleared by the other members of the party1 and when ready1 all should assist in raising the tent1 especially if it is a large one4 ,tents ,an ordinary ,a or wedge tent is sufficient for one or two campers4 ,where you do not wish to locate permanently1 this tent can be set up and taken down quickly4 ,it should have a ring fastened to the cloth in each peak through which to pass a rope or line to take the place of a ridge pole4 ,such a tent can be pitched between two trees or saplings1 and1 after tying the rope to the trees1 it can be tightened with a long forked stick1 placed under one end of the rope4 ,if two trees are not conveniently located1 then two poles crossed and tied together will make supports for one or both ends1 the ridge line running over them and staked to the ground4 ,illustration3 ,fire between ,two ,logs ,illustration3 ,fire ,built against a ,log ,on a chilly night1 the ,a tent is quite advantageous4 ,the stakes can be pulled on one side and the cloth doubled to make a lean-to1 open on the side away from the wind4 ,a fire can be built in front and the deflected heat on the sleeper will keep him comfortable and warm4 ,for larger parties1 the wall tent with a fly is recommended4 ,these tents can be purchased in various sizes4 ,the fly is an extra covering stretched over the top to make an open air space between the two roofs4 ,it keeps the interior of the tent delightfully cool in hot summer weather and provides a better protection from rain4 ,the fly can be made extra long1 to extend over the end of the tent1 making a shady retreat which can be used for lounging or a dining place4 ,protection from ,insects ,where mosquitoes and other insects are numerous1 it is well to make a second tent of cheesecloth with binding tape along the top to tie it to the ridge pole of the regular tent4 ,the sides should be made somewhat longer than the regular tent so that there will be plenty of cloth to weight it down at the bottom4 ,this second tent should be made without any opening whatever4 ,the occupant must crawl under the edge to enter4 ,the cheesecloth tent is used inside of the ordinary tent1 and when not in use it is pushed aside4 ,illustration3 ,forked ,sticks ,supporting ,cooking ,utensils ,two camps are illustrated showing the construction of a lean-to for a temporary one-season camp1 and a log cabin which makes a permanent place from year to year4 7,a more elaborate and more expensive camp was described in the ,may issue of this magazine47 ,the construction of these camps are very simple4 ,the first is made of poles cut in the woods4 ,a ridge pole is placed between two trees or held in place with poles of sufficient length1 set in the ground4 ,poles are placed on this at an angle of about #de deg41 forming a lean-to that will be entirely open in front when finished4 ,the poles are covered1 beginning at the bottom1 with pine boughs1 laid in layers so as to make a roof that will shed water4 ,a large fire1 built a short distance from the open front will make a warm place to sleep1 the heat being reflected down the same as described for the ,a tent4 ,a ,permanent ,camp ,a good permanent camp is a log cabin4 ,this can be constructed of materials found in the woods4 ,trees may be felled1 cut to length1 and notched to join the ends together at each corner so as to leave little or no space between the logs4 ,the roof is constructed of long clapboards1 split from blocks of wood4 ,the builder can finish such a camp as elaborately as he chooses1 and for this reason the site should be selected with great care4 ,camp ,fires ,there is no better way to make a camp fire than to have a large log or two against which to start a fire with small boughs4 ,larger sticks can be placed over the logs in such a way as to hold a pot of water or to set a frying pan4 ,forked sticks can be laid on the log and weighted on the lower end with a stone1 using the upper end to hang a cooking vessel over the flames4 ,two logs placed parallel1 with space enough between for the smaller sticks1 make one of the best camp cooking arrangements4 ,two forked sticks1 one at each end of the logs1 may be set in the ground and a pole placed in the forks lengthwise of the fire4 ,this makes a convenient place for hanging the cooking utensils with bent wires4 ,food ,supplies ,the conditions in various localities make a difference in the camper's appetite and in consequence no special list of food can be recommended1 but the amount needed by the average person in a vacation camp for two weeks1 is about as follows3 ,bacon #ae lb4 ,ham #e ,flour #bj ,corn ,meal #e ,rice #e ,baking ,powder #a_/b ,sugar #e ,beans #d ,salt #b ,lard #c ,coffee #c ,a number of small things must be added to this list1 such as pepper1 olive oil1 sage1 nutmeg and vinegar4 ,if the weight is not to be considered1 canned goods1 preserves1 jam and marmalade1 also vegetables and dried fruits may be added4 ,do not forget soap and matches4 ,food can be kept cool in a box or a box-like arrangement made of straight sticks over which burlap is hung and kept wet4 ,this is accomplished by setting a pan on top of the box and fixing wicks of cloth over the edges4 ,the wicks will siphon the water out evenly and keep the burlap wet4 ,a ,drinking ,tube ,when on a walking tour through the woods or country1 it might be well to provide a way to procure water for drinking purposes4 ,take with you several feet of small rubber tubing and a few inches of hollow cane of the size to fit the tube4 ,in one end insert the cane for a mouthpiece1 and allow the other end to reach into the water4 ,exhaust the air from the tube and the water will rush up to your lips4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,augusta1 ,ga4 ,washing ,photographic ,prints ,the usual way of washing photographic prints is to place them in a shallow tray in which they will become stuck together in bunches1 if they are not often separated4 ,a ,french magazine suggests that a deep tank be used instead1 and that each print be attached to a cork by means of a pin stuck through one corner1 the cork thus becoming a float which keeps the print suspended vertically1 and at the same time prevents contact with its nearest neighbor4 ,camp ,furnishings ,by ,chelsea ,curtis ,fraser ,when on a camping trip nothing should be carried but the necessities1 and the furnishings should be made up from materials found in the woods4 ,a good spring bed can be made up in the following manner3 ,cut two stringers from small1 straight trees1 about #d in4 in diameter1 and make them about #f ft4 long4 ,all branches are trimmed off smooth and a trench is dug in the ground for each piece1 the trenches being #bd in4 apart4 ,small saplings1 about #a in4 in diameter1 and as straight as can be found1 are cut and trimmed of all branches1 and nailed across the stringers for the springs4 ,knots1 bulges1 etc41 should be turned downward as far as possible4 ,the ends of each piece are flattened as shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #a1 to give it a good seat on the stringers4 ,a larger sapling is cut1 flattened1 and nailed at the head of the bed across the stringers1 and to it a number of head-stay saplings1 ,b1 are nailed4 ,these head-stay pieces are cut about #ab in4 long1 sharpened on one end and driven a little way into the ground1 after which they are nailed to the head crosspiece4 ,illustration3 ,a ,camp ,bed ,made of ,saplings with ,several ,layers of ,boughs for the ,mattress 7,fig4 #a7 ,in the absence of an empty mattress tick and pillow cover which can be filled with straw1 boughs of fir may be used4 ,these boughs should not be larger than a match and crooked stems should be turned down4 ,begin at the head of the bed and lay a row of boughs with the stems pointing toward the foot4 ,over this row1 and half-lapping it1 place another row so that the tops of the boughs lie on the line ,c and their stems on the line ,d4 ,this process is continued until the crosspiece springs are entirely covered1 and then another layer is laid in the same manner on top of these1 and so on1 until a depth of #f or #h in4 is obtained4 ,this will make a good substitute for a mattress4 ,a pillow can be made by filling a meal bag with boughs or leaves4 ,illustration3 ,a ,table ,made of ,packing-,box ,material and a ,wash ,basin ,stand of ,three ,stakes 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a good and serviceable table can be constructed from a few fence boards1 or boards taken from a packing box4 ,the table and chairs are made in one piece1 the construction being clearly shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the height of the ends should be about #bi in41 and the seats about #ag in4 from the ground4 ,the other dimensions will be governed by the material at hand and the number of campers4 ,a wash-basin support can be made of three stakes1 cut from saplings and driven in the ground1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the basin is hung by its rim between the ends of the stakes4 ,wherever a suitable tree is handy1 a seat can be constructed as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,bore two #a-;in4 holes1 #h in4 apart1 in the trunk1 #ae in4 above the ground1 and drive two pins1 about #ab in4 long1 cut from a sapling into them4 ,the extending ends are supported on legs of the same material4 ,the seat is made of a slab with the rounding side down4 ,a clothes hanger for the tent ridge pole can be made as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the hanger consists of a piece1 #g in4 long1 cut from a #b-;in4 sapling1 nails being driven into its sides for hooks4 ,the upper end is fitted with a rope which is tied over the ridge pole of the tent4 ,illustration3 ,a ,seat ,against the ,trunk of a ,tree1 and a ,clothes ,hanger for the ,tent ,ridge ,pole 7,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e7 ,a ,fruit ,stemmer ,in the berry season the stemmer shown in the sketch is a very handy article for the kitchen4 ,it is made of spring steel and tempered1 the length being about #b-a_/b in4 ,the end used for removing the stem is ground from the outside edge after tempering4 ,a ring large enough to admit the second finger is soldered at a convenient distance from the end on one leg4--,contributed by ,h4 ,f4 ,reams1 ,nashville1 ,tennessee4 ,illustration ,a ,homemade ,fountain ,pen ,a very serviceable fountain pen can be made from two #ch-gb rifle cartridges and a steel pen4 ,clean out the cartridges1 fit a plug tightly in the end of one shell1 and cut it off smooth with the end of the metal4 ,drill a #c_/af in4 hole in the center of the wood plug and fit another plug into this hole with sufficient end projecting to be shaped for the length of the steel pen to be used4 ,the shank of the pen and the plug must enter the hole together4 ,one side of the projecting end of the plug should be shaped to fit the inside surface of the pen and then cut off at a point a little farther out than the eye in the pen4 ,on the surface that is to lie against the pen a groove is cut in the plug extending from near the point to the back end where it is to enter the hole in the first plug4 ,the under side of the plug is shaped about as shown4 ,illustration3 ,one ,cartridge ,shell ,makes the ,fountain ,part of the ,pen1 and the ,other the ,cap ,the other cartridge is cut off at such a point that it will fit on the tapering end of the first one1 and is used for a cap4 ,the cartridge being filled with ink and the plug inserted1 the ink will flow down the small groove in the feeder plug and supply the pen with ink4 ,care must be taken that the surface of the smaller plug fits the pen snugly and that the groove is not cut through to the point end4 ,this will keep the ink from flooding1 and only that which is used for writing will be able to get through or leak out4--,contributed by ,edwin ,n4 ,harnish1 ,ceylon1 ,canada4 ,destroying ,caterpillars on ,grapevines ,the grapes in my back yard were being destroyed by caterpillars which could be found under all the large leaves4 ,the vine was almost dead when ,i began to cut off all the large leaves and those eaten by the caterpillars1 which allowed the sun's rays to reach the grapes4 ,this destroyed all the caterpillars and the light and heat ripened the grapes4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,singer1 ,rahway1 ,n4 ,j4 99 99 99 99 99 ,it will require #a gal4 of ordinary mixed calcimine to cover #bgj sq4 ft4 of plastered surface1 #ahj sq4 ft4 of brickwork and #bbe sq4 ft4 of average woodwork4 ,a ,camp ,provision ,box ,while on a camping-and canoeing trip recently1 ,i used a device which added a touch of completeness to our outfit and made camp life really enjoyable4 ,this useful device is none other than a provision or grub box4 ,illustration3 ,the ,provision ,box ,ready for ,use in ,camp1 the ,cover ,turned ,back on the ,brackets and the ,legs ,extended ,from experience campers know that the first important factor in having a successful trip is compactness of outfit4 ,when undertaking an outing of this kind it is most desirable to have as few bundles to carry as possible1 especially if one is going to be on the move part of the time4 ,this device eliminates an unnecessary amount of bundles1 thus making the trip easier for the campers1 and doubly so if they intend canoeing part of the time2 and1 apart from its usefulness as a provision container1 it affords a general repository for the small articles which mean so much to the camper's welfare4 ,the box proper may be made of any convenient size1 so long as it is not too cumbersome for two people to handle4 ,the dimensions given are for a box ,i used on a canoe trip of several hundred miles2 and from experience ,i know it to be of a suitable size for canoeists4 ,if the camper is going to have a fixed camp and have his luggage hauled1 a larger box is much to be preferred4 ,a glance at the figures will show the general proportions of the box4 ,it may be possible1 in some cases1 to secure a strong packing box near the required dimensions1 thus doing away with the trouble of constructing it4 ,the distinguishing features of this box are the hinged cover1 the folding legs1 and the folding brackets4 ,the brackets1 upon which the top rests when open1 fold in against the back of the box when not in use4 ,the same may be said of the legs4 ,they fold up alongside the box and are held there by spring-brass clips4 ,illustration3 ,the ,brackets for the ,cover as ,well as ,each of the ,four ,legs ,fold ,against the ,sides of the ,box in ,such a ,manner as to be ,out of the ,way1 ,making the ,box ,easy to ,carry and ,store ,away in a ,small ,space ,on our trips we carry an alcohol stove on which we do all of our cooking4 ,the inner side of the top is covered with a sheet of asbestos1 this side being uppermost when the hinged top is opened and resting on the folding brackets4 ,the stove rested on this asbestos1 thus making everything safe4 ,the cover is large enough to do all the cooking on1 and the box is so high that the cooking can be attended to without stooping over1 which is much more pleasant than squatting before a camp fire getting the eyes full of smoke4 ,the legs are hinged to the box in such a manner that all of the weight of the box rests on the legs rather than on the hinges1 and are kept from spreading apart by wire turnbuckles4 ,these1 being just bolts and wire1 may be tucked inside the box when on the move4 ,the top is fitted with unexposed hinges and with a lock to make it a safe place for storing valuables4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,turnbuckle1 ,button to ,hold the ,brackets1 and the ,spring ,clip for ,holding the ,legs on the ,side of the ,box ,in constructing the cover it is well to make it so that it covers the joints of the sides1 thus making the box waterproof from the top1 if rain should fall on it4 ,a partition can be made in one end to hold odds and ends4 ,a tray could be installed1 like the tray in a trunk1 to hold knives1 forks1 spoons1 etc41 while the perishable supplies are kept underneath the tray4 ,give the box two coats of lead paint1 and shellac the inside4 ,the wire braces for the legs are made as follows4 ,procure four machine bolts1 about #a_/d in4 in diameter and #b in4 long--any thread will do--with wing nuts and washers to fit4 ,saw or file off the heads and drill a small hole in one end of each bolt1 large enough to receive a ,no4 #af galvanized iron wire4 ,two inches from the bottom of each leg drill a hole to take the bolt loosely4 ,determine the exact distance between the outside edges of the legs when the box is resting on them4 ,make the wire braces #a in4 longer than this distance so that the bolts will protrude through the holes in the legs and allow for putting on the nuts and washers4 ,screwing up on the nuts draws the wire taut1 thus holding the legs firm4 ,the size of the top determines the dimensions of the folding brackets which support it when open4 ,these brackets may be solid blocks of wood1 but a lighter and more serviceable bracket is constructed as follows4 ,if the top is #bj in4 wide and #cj in4 long1 make the brackets #aj by #ac in4 ,constructing the brackets so that their combined length is #d in4 shorter than the total length of the box1 facilitates their folding against the back of the box when not in use4 ,this point is clearly shown in the drawing4 ,our brackets were made of #a_/b-;in4 oak1 #a-a_/b in4 wide1 and the joints halved together4 ,they are hinged to the back of the box as shown2 and when folded are held in place by a simple catch4 ,the weight of the lid is sufficient to hold the brackets in place when open1 but to make sure they will not creep when in use insert a #a_/d-;in4 dowel in the end of each so that it protrudes #a_/d in4 ,drill two holes in the top to the depth of #a_/d in41 so that when the top rests on the brackets1 these holes engage with the dowels4 ,in hinging the brackets to the back see that they are high enough to support the lid at right angles to the box4 ,the box here shown is made of #g_/h in4 white pine throughout4 ,the legs are #g_/h by #b-a_/b by #ah in4 ,they are fastened to the box with ordinary strap hinges4 ,when folded up against the box they do not come quite to the top so that the box should be at least #ai in4 high for #ah-;in4 legs4 ,about #b in4 from the bottom of the legs drive in a brad so it protrudes #a_/h in4 as shown4 ,this brad engages in a hole in the spring-brass clip when folded up as shown in the illustration4 ,if in a fixed camp1 it is a good idea to stand the legs in tomato cans partly full of water4 ,this prevents ants from crawling up the legs into the box1 but it necessitates placing the wire braces higher on the legs4 ,our box cost us nothing but the hardware1 as we knocked some old packing boxes to pieces and planed up enough boards to make the sides4 ,of course1 the builder need not adhere to these dimensions1 for he can make the size to suit his requirements1 while the finish is a matter of personal taste4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a blue writing ink is easily made of #a oz4 ,prussian blue1 #a-a_/b oz4 oxalic acid and #a pt4 of soft water4 ,shake and allow it to stand until dissolved4 ,wall ,pockets in a ,tent ,when camping ,i find a few wall pockets sewed to the tent walls at the back end provide a convenient means to hold the soap1 mirror1 razor and other small articles liable to be lost4 ,the pockets can be made of the same material as the tent and sewed on as a patch pocket4--,contributed by ,a4 ,m4 ,barnes1 ,atlanta1 ,ga4 ,camp ,stoves ,the camp stoves illustrated are different forms of the same idea4 ,both can be taken apart and laid flat for packing4 ,iron rods1 #a_/b in4 in diameter1 are used for the legs4 ,they are sharpened at the lower end so that they may be easily driven into the ground4 ,the rods of the one shown in the first illustration are bent in the form of a hook at the upper end1 and two pieces of light tire iron1 with holes in either end1 are hung on these hooks4 ,across these supports are laid other pieces of the tire iron4 ,in the other stove1 the rods have a large head and are slipped through holes in the four corners of the piece of heavy sheet iron used for the top4 ,a cotter is slipped through a hole in each rod just below the top1 to hold the latter in place4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,lelia ,munsell1 ,herington1 ,kansas4 ,illustration3 ,camp-,stove ,top1 ,either ,solid or ,pieced1 ,supported on ,rods at the ,corners ,attractor for ,game ,fish ,a piece of light wood1 shaped as shown and with four small screweyes attached1 makes a practical attractor for game fish1 such as bass1 etc41 by its action when drawn through the water or carried by the flow of a stream4 ,hooks are attached to three of the screweyes and the fourth one1 on the sloping surface1 is used for the line4--,contributed by ,arthur ,vogel1 ,indianapolis1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,a ,device for ,attracting ,game ,fish ,which is ,used in ,place of ,bait ,simple ,photographic-,print ,washer ,the ordinary washbowl supplied with a faucet may be easily converted into a washing tray for photographic prints or film negatives4 ,procure a medicine dropper from a druggist1 and attach it to the faucet end with a short piece of rubber tubing4 ,be sure to procure a dropper that has the point turned at right angles to the body4 ,illustration3 ,the ,whirling ,motion ,set ,up by the ,forced ,stream at an ,angle ,thoroughly ,washes ,prints ,when the water is turned on it is forced through the small opening in the dropper in such a manner that the water in the bowl is kept in a constant whirling motion4 ,this will keep the prints on the move1 which is necessary for a thorough washing4 ,how to ,make an ,electric ,fishing ,signal ,a unique electric fishing signal1 which may be rigged up on a wharf or pier1 and the electric circuit so arranged as to operate an electric bell or buzzer1 located in the fisherman's cottage1 or any other convenient place1 may be constructed as follows3 ,obtain two pieces of #a_/af-;in4 spring brass1 one #f in4 long and #c_/d in4 wide1 and the other #g in4 long and #a_/b in4 wide4 ,mount a #b-;in4 brass wood screw1 ,a1 in one end of the #f-;in4 piece as shown4 ,illustration3 ,construction of the ,parts to ,make the ,contact ,points and the ,electric ,connections ,place over the end of the #f-;in4 piece a thin sheet of insulating fiber1 ,b1 allowing it to extend down on each side about #a in4 ,then bend a piece of #a_/af-;in4 brass1 ,c1 over the insulating fiber1 allowing it to extend down on each side the same distance as the insulating fiber4 ,drill a small hole through the lower ends of the ,u-shaped piece of brass1 ,c1 the insulation1 ,b1 and the #f-;in4 piece1 while they are all in place4 ,remove the insulation and the ,u-shaped brass piece1 and tap the holes in the brass for a machine screw1 ,d4 ,enlarge the hole in the #f-;in piece1 and provide an insulating bushing for it with an opening of the same diameter as the brass machine screw4 ,mount a small binding post1 ,e1 on one side of the ,u-shaped piece of brass1 and the parts may then be put together and held in place by means of the brass screw4 ,drill two holes in the other end of the #f-;in piece1 also two holes in one end of the #g-;in piece1 and rivet them together with two small rivets4 ,the #g-;in4 piece should project beyond the end of the #f-;in4 piece4 ,a piece of thin spring brass should be made into the form of a spiral1 ,f1 and fastened to the upper end of the #g-;in4 piece4 ,provision should be made for attaching the fishline to the inside end of the brass spiral4 ,a small binding post should be soldered to either the #f-;in4 or #g-;in4 piece1 at the bottom4 ,if the device is set up with the head of the brass adjusting screw in the top of the #f-;in4 piece1 pointing in the direction the line to the fishing hook is to run1 and if a fish pulls upon the line1 the #g-;in4 piece is pulled over and touches the point of the adjusting screw4 ,if a battery and bell1 or buzzer1 is connected as shown1 the circuit will be completed when the #g-;in4 piece comes in contact with the adjusting screw1 and the bell will ring4 ,a ,chair ,swing ,a comfortable porch or lawn swing can be easily and quickly made with a chair as a seat1 as follows4 ,procure some rope of sufficient strength to bear the weight of the person1 and fasten one end securely to one of the front legs of the chair and the other end to the same side of the back as shown in the illustration1 allowing enough slack to form a right angle4 ,another piece of rope1 of the same length1 is then attached to the other side of the chair4 ,the supporting ropes are tied to these ropes and to the joist or holding piece overhead4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,a4 ,robinson1 ,waynesboro1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ropes are ,tied to the ,chair so ,that ,it will be ,held in a ,reclining ,position ,another ,broom ,holder ,of the many homemade devices for holding a broom this is one of the simplest1 and one that any handy boy can make4 ,illustration ,it consists of a string1 about #a ft4 long1 with a knot at one end and the other tied to a nail or staple driven into the wall4 ,to hang up the broom simply turn the string around the handle as shown1 and the broom will be held securely1 because its weight will pull the string taut and the knot at the end will prevent the string from running off the handle4--,contributed by ,jef ,de ,vries1 ,antwerp1 ,belgium4 ,squaring ,wood ,stock ,the device shown in the sketch is a great help to the maker of mission furniture as a guide on short cuts4 ,it consists of two pieces of wood1 ,a and ,b1 preferably of oak1 fastened together at right angles by two large flat-head screws4 ,the pieces should be placed exactly at right angles4 ,illustration3 ,the ,saw ,teeth ,edge can be ,run through ,both ,pieces1 the ,stock being in the ,corner ,a cut is then made through both pieces4 ,the cut on ,b should be exactly at right angles to the surface of piece ,a4 ,this device can be either clamped on a board or merely held by hand1 and will insure a true cut4--,contributed by ,f4 ,w4 ,pumphrey1 ,owensboro1 ,ky4 ,a ,wind ,vane ,a novelty in wind vanes is shown in the accompanying sketch4 ,the vane can be made of sheet metal or carved from light wood4 ,the wings are so set on the body as to cause the dragon to rise when the wind strikes them4 ,the dragon is pivoted on a shaft running through its center of gravity1 so it will readily turn with the wind4 ,the tail part may also be made to revolve as the propeller of an aeroplane4 ,illustration ,the length and size of the shaft will depend on the dimensions of the dragon1 and similarly1 the location of the weights on the chains will be determined by its size and weight4 ,upon these circumstances and the varying velocities of the wind will depend how high the dragon will rise on its shaft1 and the height reached by it will thus serve to indicate--in a relative manner only--the velocity of the wind1 but it is also possible to arrange the weights at such distances apart that the dragon will rise to ,a in a #bj-mile wind1 to ,b in a #cj-mile wind1 to ,c in a #dj-mile gale1 and so on1 with as many weights as desired4 ,this can be done with the aid of an anemometer1 if one can be borrowed for some time1 or the device may be taken to the nearest weather bureau to be set4--,contributed by ,h4 ,j4 ,holden1 ,ontario1 ,cal4 99 99 99 99 99 ,never rock a file--push it straight on filing work4 ,how to ,make a ,flutter ,ring ,the flutter ring is for inclosing in an envelope and to surprise the person opening it by the revolving of the ring4 ,the main part is made of a piece of wire1 ,a1 bent so that the depth will be about #b in4 and the length #d in4 ,procure or make a ring1 #b in4 in diameter4 ,the ring should be open like a key ring4 ,use two rubber bands1 ,,bb1 in connecting the ring to the wire4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,wire and ,manner of ,attaching the ,rubber ,bands to the ,ring ,to use it1 turn the ring over repeatedly1 until the rubber bands are twisted tightly1 then lay it flat in a paper folded like a letter4 ,hand it to someone in this shape or after first putting it into an envelope4 ,when the paper is opened up1 the ring will do the rest4--,contributed by ,d4 ,andrew ,mc,comb1 ,toledo1 ,o4 ,a ,kitchen ,utensil ,hanger ,every cook knows how troublesome it is to have several things hanging on one nail4 ,when one of the articles is wanted it is usually at the back1 and the others must be removed to secure it4 ,a revolving rack for hanging a can opener1 egg beater and cooking spoons1 etc41 takes up less space than several nails1 and places every article within easy reach as well as providing individual hooks for all the pieces4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hook ,support ,revolves so as to ,make ,each ,one ,readily ,accessible for ,hanging ,utensils ,the rack is easily made of a block of wood1 #b-a_/b in4 in diameter and #a in4 thick2 an arm1 #c_/d in4 wide1 #a_/d in4 thick and #f in4 long1 and a metal bracket4 ,the arm is fastened to the bracket and the bracket to the wall4 ,a screw is turned through a loose-fitting hole bored in the end of the arm and into the disk4 ,screw hooks are placed around the edge of the disk as hangers4--,contributed by ,a4 ,r4 ,moore1 ,toronto1 ,can4 ,homemade ,hinges for ,boxes ,a very simple form of hinge can be made as shown in the sketch4 ,it is merely a matter of cutting out two pieces of flat steel1 ,a1 punching holes in them for screws or nails1 and fastening them to the box corners1 one on each side4 ,when the box is open1 the lid swings back clear and is out of the way4 ,a hinge of this kind is very strong4 ,for a light box1 the parts can be cut from tin4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,homewood1 ,waterloo1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,hinge ,parts ,made of ,sheet ,metal and ,their ,use on a ,box ,cover ,to ,remove ,odors from ,ice ,boxes ,an easy way to prevent odors in an ice box is to place a can of coke in the box4 ,this will take up all gases and prevent milk from tasting of onions or vegetables which may be kept in the box4 ,in factories where bad odors are apt to spoil the men's lunches put up in pails or baskets1 a box can be constructed to hold these receptacles and a large pail of coke placed in it4 ,anything placed in this box will remain free from odors1 and fresh4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,preventing ,window ,sash from ,freezing to the ,sill ,when it is cold enough to cause the window sash to freeze fast in the bathroom and bedrooms not having double sash1 much discomfort will be experienced and the health may even be menaced4 ,i have discovered a simple method to overcome this difficulty4 ,lay on the outside sill1 close up against the window frame1 a thin1 narrow strip of wood1 on which the window can rest when down4 ,this gives a continual current of fresh air between the sashes at the center1 but no unpleasant draft below1 and no amount of dripping and freezing will fasten the window sash upon it4--,contributed by ,mary ,murry1 ,amherst1 ,nova ,scotia4 ,a ,hanger for the ,camp ,illustration ,a garment1 or utensil1 hanger can be easily made for the camp in the following manner3 ,procure a long strap1 about #a-a_/d in4 wide1 and attach hooks made of wire to it4 ,each hook should be about #d in4 long and of about ,no4 #i gauge wire4 ,bend a ring on one end of the wire and stick the other end through a hole punched in the center of the belt4 ,the ring will prevent the wire from passing through the leather1 and it should be bent in such a manner that the hook end of the wire will hang downward when the width of the belt is vertical4 ,these hooks are placed about #b in4 apart for the length of the belt1 allowing sufficient ends for a buckle and holes4 ,the strap can be buckled around a tree or tent pole4--,contributed by ,w4 ,c4 ,loy1 ,rochester1 ,ind4 99 99 99 99 99 ,never stand in a direct line of a swiftly revolving object1 such as an emery wheel4 ,locking ,several ,drawers with ,one ,lock ,illustration ,a lock for a number of drawers in a bench or cabinet may be applied with a strip of wood hinged to the cabinet edge so that it will overlap the drawer fronts1 as shown4 ,a hasp and staple complete the arrangement for use with a padlock4--,contributed by ,h4 ,w4 ,hahn1 ,chicago4 ,a ,lightning-,calculation ,trick ,by means of a simple arrangement of numbers1 a calculation can be made which will easily puzzle any unsuspecting person4 ,if the two numbers #da1jif and #hc be written out in multiplication form1 very few will endeavor to write down the answer directly without first going through the regular work4 ,by placing the #c in front of the #d and the #h back of the #f1 the answer is obtained at once1 thus3 #da1jif #hc #c1daj1ifh4 ,a larger number which can be treated in the same way is the following3 #d1aji1ehi1jda1jif #hc #cda1jie1hij1daj1ifh4 ,an ,adjustable ,nutcracker ,illustration ,the advantage of the nutcracker shown in the illustration is that it can be adjusted to various-sized nuts4 ,the handles are similar to those usually found on nutcrackers except that they are slotted at the cracking end to receive a special bar4 ,this bar is #b in4 long1 #a_/b in4 wide1 and #a_/h in4 thick1 with #a_/h-;in4 holes drilled in it at intervals to allow for adjustment4 ,cotters are used in the holes as pins4 ,substitute for a ,rubber ,stamp ,a large number of coupons had to be marked1 and having no suitable rubber stamp at hand1 ,i selected a cork with a smooth end and cut the initials in it4 ,i found that it worked as well1 not to say better1 than a rubber stamp4 ,an ordinary rubber-stamp pad was used for inking4 ,angular letters will cut better than curved ones1 as the cork quickly dulls the edge of any cutting tool4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,initials ,cut in a ,cork ,served the ,purpose in the ,absence of a ,rubber ,stamp ,a ,furniture ,polish ,a good pastelike furniture polish1 which is very cheap and keeps indefinitely1 can be made as follows3 ,mix #c oz4 of white wax1 #b oz4 of pearlash1 commonly known as potassium carbonate1 and #f oz4 of water4 ,heat the mixture until it becomes dissolved1 then add #d oz4 of boiled linseed oil and #e oz4 of turpentine4 ,stir well and pour into cans to cool4 ,apply with a cloth and rub to a polish4 ,the paste is nonpoisonous4 ,a ,hanging ,vase ,illustration ,a very neat and attractive hanging corner vase can be made of a colored bottle4 ,the bottom is broken out or cut off as desired and a wire hanger attached as shown4 ,the opening in the neck of the bottle is well corked4 ,rectangular shaped bottles fitted with hangers can be used on walls4--,contributed by ,a4 ,d4 ,tanaka1 ,jujiya1 ,kioto1 ,japan4 ,filing ,soft ,metals ,it is well known to mechanics that when lead1 tin1 soft solder or aluminum are filed1 the file is soon filled with the metal and it will not cut4 ,it cannot be cleaned like the wood rasp by dipping it into hot water or pouring boiling water over it1 but if the file and the work are kept wet with water1 there will be no trouble whatever4 ,both file and work must be kept thoroughly wet at all times4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,beebee1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,locking ,screws in ,door ,hinges ,when screws once work loose in hinges of doors they will never again hold firmly in the same hole4 ,this trouble can be avoided if the screws are securely locked when they are first put on the door4 ,the sketch shows a very successful way to lock the screws4 ,the hole in the hinge for the screw is filed to produce a notch1 as shown at ,a1 deep enough to receive a small wire nail or brad1 which is driven through the slot in the screw head at one side1 as shown at ,b4 ,illustration3 ,the ,screw is ,permanently ,locked with a ,small ,nail ,driven into the ,slot ,prepared for ,it ,to ,remove ,grease from ,clothing ,equal parts of ether1 ammonia and alcohol make a solution that will readily remove grease from clothing4 ,the solution must be kept away from fire1 and should be contained in corked bottles as it evaporates quickly1 but can be used without danger4 ,it removes grease spots from the finest fabrics and is harmless to the texture4 99 99 99 99 99 ,jeweler's rouge rubbed well into chamois skin is handy to polish gold and silver articles with4 ,illustration3 ,stove ,made of an ,old ,oilcan with ,extending ,sides and ,weighted with ,sand for ,use on a ,fishing ,boat ,holds the ,cooking ,vessel ,safely in a ,sea ,a ,canoe ,stove ,by ,f4 ,v4 ,williams ,limited space and the rocking motion of salmon-fishing boats in a heavy sea on the ,pacific coast brought about the construction of the canoe stove shown in the illustration4 ,it is made of a discarded kerosene can whose form is square4 ,a draft hole is cut in one side of the can1 #d or #e in4 from the bottom1 and a layer of sand placed on the bottom4 ,two holes are punched through opposite sides1 parallel with the draft hole and about #c in4 from the top edge4 ,rods are run through these holes to provide a support for the cooking utensil4 ,the smoke from the fire passes out at the corners around the vessel4 ,illustration ,the main reason for making the stove in this manner is to hold the cooking vessel within the sides extending above the rods4 ,no amount of rocking can cause the vessel to slide from the stove top1 and as the stove is weighted with the sand1 it cannot be easily moved from the place where it is set in the canoe4 ,the use of such a stove in a canoe has the advantage that the stove can be cleaned quickly1 as the ashes and fire can be dumped into the water and the stove used for a storage box4 ,the whole thing may be tossed overboard and a new one made for another trip4 ,to ,prevent ,washboard from ,slipping in ,tub ,the modern stationary washtubs are box-shaped1 with one side set at an outward angle or slope4 ,the washboard1 when used in these tubs1 will slide up and down against the sloping part of the tub while the clothes are rubbed against them4 ,this annoying trouble can be avoided by tacking1 on the top edge of the board1 strips of rubber cut from a discarded bicycle tire1 placing the rubber side out4 ,the friction of the rubber prevents any motion of the board4--,contributed by ,jas4 ,a4 ,hart1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 99 99 99 99 99 ,to print on celluloid1 use a good gloss ink and old rollers4 ,clips to ,hold ,magazine ,pages ,together ,illustration ,when a magazine is placed in a bookcase the outer pages are liable to turn back if it is inserted with the back on the outside4 ,to overcome this difficulty ,i made clips for each magazine to hold the open pages together4 ,each clip was made of wire1 about #h in4 long1 shaped as shown4 ,the width of the clip is made equal to the thickness of the magazine and the extending ends are slightly pressed together so that they will spring and grip the pages4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,saul1 ,e4 ,lexington1 ,massachusetts4 ,slide-,opening ,cover for a ,plate ,holder ,the length of time required for the slide of a plate holder to be removed on a reflecting camera spoiled many of my plates1 because strong light would enter the unprotected slot when the camera was in certain positions4 ,to protect this slot so that the slide could be left out indefinitely1 ,i made a cover of a piece of sheet metal having three slots1 to admit screws turned into the camera4 ,a knob was attached at the center4 ,the illustration shows the application of this cover4 ,in ,fig4 #a the plate holder is shown slipped in with the cover back1 and ,fig4 #b shows the slide drawn and the cover over the slot opening4--,contributed by ,b4 ,j4 ,weeber1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,illustration3 ,the ,two ,positions ,occupied by the ,slide-,opening ,cover as ,it is ,used on a ,camera 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,magnetic-,suspension ,pendulum ,when a pendulum is not periodically supplied with energy its amplitude grows smaller and finally the motion ceases1 due to the resistance of the air and the friction at the point of suspension4 ,usually the suspension is in the form of a knife edge bearing against plates of agate2 sometimes the pendulum rod is simply attached to a very slender and flexible spring without any bearings4 ,but the minimum of friction is obtained by means of magnetic suspension1 as the following experiment will prove4 ,if the rod of a pendulum about #ab in4 long1 beating half seconds1 is sharpened to a needle point and suspended from one of the poles of a magnet1 it will be found that1 if set into motion1 it will continue to swing #ae times as long as the ordinary knife-edge suspended pendulum1 and it will not stop until after about #af hours1 while one working on agate plates will stop in from #ej to #fj minutes4 ,similarly a top1 provided with a fine-pointed axis of iron1 will spin much longer when suspended from a magnet4 ,magnetic suspension is used in precision instruments2 for example1 the minute mirrors which are used in certain telegraph systems to register writing photographically at the receiving end4 ,use for ,pencil ,stubs ,illustration ,in mechanical drawings cast iron is indicated by a series of straight lines across the parts made of this material4 ,these lines can be quickly made with the usually discarded pencil stubs1 if these are saved and sharpened in the following manner3 ,the point is filed flat1 as shown at ,a2 then a slot is filed in the center of the lead with a knife file1 as shown at ,b1 and the points sharpened as in ,c4 ,in this way two lines are drawn at one stroke neatly and in half the time4--,contributed by ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 99 99 99 99 99 ,to sharpen a carving knife draw the edge through and against the open edge of a pair of shears4 ,illustration ,how to ,build a ,paddle-,wheel ,boat ,by ,p4 ,a4 ,baumeister ,the paddle-wheel boat1 illustrated herewith1 was built in the spare time ,i had on rainy afternoons and ,saturdays1 and the enjoyment ,i derived from it at my summer camp more than repaid me for the time spent in the building4 ,the materials used in its construction were3 #b side boards1 #ad ft4 long1 #aj in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick4 #b side boards1 #ad ft4 long1 #e in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick4 #a outside keel board1 #ad ft4 long1 #h in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick4 #a inside keel board1 #ad ft4 long4 #aj in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick4 #abj sq4 ft4 of tongue-and-groove boards1 #c_/d in4 thick1 for bottom and wheel boxes4 #a piece1 #b in4 square and #ah in4 long4 #d washers4 #b iron cranks4 #aj screweyes4 #cj ft4 of rope4 ,nails4 ,the dimensions given in the drawing will be found satisfactory1 but these may be altered to suit the conditions4 ,the first step will be to cut and make the sides4 ,nail the two pieces forming each side together and then cut the end boards and nail them to the sides4 ,lay this framework1 bottom side up1 on a level surface and proceed to nail on the bottom boards across the sides4 ,the ends of these boards are sawed off flush with the outside surface of the sides after they are nailed in place4 ,the material list calls for tongue-and-groove boards for the bottom1 but plain boards can be used1 although it is then difficult to make the joint water-tight4 ,when the tongue-and-groove boards are used a piece of string1 well soaked in white lead or paint and placed in the groove of each board1 will be sufficient to make a tight joint4 ,having finished the sides and bottom1 the next step will be to fasten on the bottom keel4 ,adjust the board to its position and nail it in the center part where it lies flat on the bottom boards1 then work toward the ends1 gradually drawing it down over the turn and nailing it down4 ,if the keel board cannot be bent easily1 it is best to soak it in hot water where the bend takes place and the wood can then be nailed down without the fibers breaking4 ,the inside keel is put on in the same manner1 but reversed4 ,illustration3 ,the ,boat ,as ,it ,appears without the ,spring and ,running ,board and ,used as a ,pleasure ,craft or for ,carrying ,freight1 the ,operator ,facing in the ,direction of the ,boat's ,travel ,the next procedure is to make the paddle wheels4 ,the hub for each wheel is made of a #b-;in4 square piece of timber1 #i in4 long4 ,trim off the corners to make #h sides to the piece1 then bore a #c_/d-;in4 hole through its center4 ,the #h blades of each wheel1 #af in all1 are #ag in4 long1 #f in4 wide and #c_/d in4 thick4 ,one end of each blade is nailed to one side of the hub1 then it is braced as shown to strengthen the wheel4 ,illustration3 ,detail ,drawing of the ,boat and ,one of the ,paddle ,wheels4 ,all the ,material ,required for the ,construction is ,such ,that can be ,cut and ,shaped with ,ordinary ,tools ,found in the ,home ,workshop ,the cranks are made of round iron1 #c_/d in4 in diameter1 and they are keyed to the wheels with large nails in the manner shown4 ,i had a blacksmith shape the cranks for me1 but if one has a forge1 the work can be done at home without that expense4 ,the bearings for the crankshafts consist of wood1 although it is preferable to use for this purpose two large iron washers1 having a hole slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft1 and drill holes in their rims so that they can be screwed to the wheel-box upright as shown4 ,the bearings thus made are lubricated with a little lard or grease4 ,illustration3 ,detail of ,paddle-,wheel ,fastening1 the ,springboard ,construction and the ,fastening for the ,rudder ,control ,the paddle-wheel boxes are built over the wheels with the dimensions given in the drawing1 to prevent the splashing of water on the occupants of the boat4 ,the trimmings for the boat consist of three seats1 a running board and a springboard4 ,the drawings show the location of the seats4 ,the springboard is built up of #d boards1 #c_/d in4 thick1 as shown1 only nailing them together at the back end4 ,this construction allows the boards to slide over each other when a person's weight is on the outer end4 ,the action of the boards is the same as of a spring on a vehicle4 ,it is necessary to have a good brace across the boat for the back end of the springboard to catch on--a #b by #d-;in4 timber being none too large4 ,at the point where the springboard rests on the front seat there should be another good-sized crosspiece4 ,the board can be held in place by a cleat and a few short pieces of rope1 the cleat being placed across the board back of the brace4 ,a little diving platform is attached on the outer end of the springboard and a strip of old carpet or gunny sack placed on it to prevent slivers from running into the flesh4 ,in making the spring and running board1 it is advisable to make them removable so that the boat can be used for other purposes4 ,the boat is steered with a foot-operated lever1 the construction of which is clearly shown4 ,for the tiller-rope guides1 large screweyes are used and also for the rudder hinges1 the pin of the hinge being a large nail4 ,the hull can be further strengthened by putting a few angle-iron braces either on the in or outside4 ,to make the boat water-tight will require calking by filling the cracks with twine and white lead or thick paint4 ,the necessary tools are a broad1 dull chisel and a mallet4 ,a couple of coats of good paint1 well brushed into the cracks1 will help to make it watertight as well as shipshape4 ,the boat may leak a little when it is first put into the water1 but after a few hours of soaking1 the boards will swell and close the openings4 ,this boat was used for carrying trunks1 firewood1 rocks1 sand1 and for fishing1 and last1 but not least1 for swimming4 ,the boat is capable of carrying a load of three-quarters of a ton4 ,it draws very little water1 thereby allowing its use in shallow water4 ,it has the further advantage that the operator faces in the direction the boat is going1 furnishing the power with his hands and steering with his feet4 ,a ,camp ,loom ,illustration3 ,loom ,constructed of ,sticks for ,weaving ,grass or ,moss into a ,camp ,mattress ,the camper who desires to rough it as much as possible and to carry only the necessities will find it quite a comfort to construct the bedding from grass or moss by weaving it in the manner of making a rag carpet1 using heavy twine or small rope as the warp4 ,two stakes are set the width of the bed or mattress to be made1 and a cross stick is attached to their tops4 ,several stakes are set parallel with the cross stick and at a distance to make the length of the mattress4 ,the warp is tied between the tops of the stakes and the cross stick4 ,an equal number of cords are then attached to the cross stick and to another loose cross stick which is used to move the cords up and down while the grass or moss is placed in for the woof4 ,the ends of the warp are then tied to hold it together4 ,when breaking up camp the cords can be removed and carried to the next camp4--,contributed by ,w4 ,p4 ,shaw1 ,bloor ,west1 ,can4 ,a ,milk-,bottle ,carrier ,carrying a milk bottle by the rim is tiresome work for the fingers1 so ,i constructed a handle1 as shown in the sketch1 from a piece of wire4 ,the carrier can be easily placed in the pocket4 ,illustration3 ,a ,carrier ,made of ,wire to ,quickly ,attach on a ,milk-,bottle ,neck ,the part fitting under the rim of the bottle neck is bent to form two semicircles1 one hooking permanently at ,a1 while the other is hooked at ,b after it is sprung around the neck of the bottle4--,contributed by ,lawrence ,b4 ,robbins1 ,harwich1 ,mass4 ,how to ,make a ,war ,kite ,by ,park ,snyder ,the material required for the making of a war kite is three pine sticks1 each #fj in4 long1 one stick #ed in4 long1 one stick #ah in4 long1 all #a_/b in4 square2 #d yd4 of cambric2 a box of tacks2 some linen thread1 and #af ft4 of stout twine4 ,place two #fj-;in4 sticks parallel with each other and #ah in4 apart1 then lay the #ed-;in4 piece across at right angles to them #ah in4 from the upper ends1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 and fasten the joints with brads4 ,at a point #ba in4 below this crosspiece1 attach the #ah-;in4 crosspiece4 ,illustration3 ,the ,line should be a ,very ,strong ,one1 ,then ,banners can be ,flown on ,it ,the extending ends of all the three long pieces are notched1 ,fig4 #b1 and the line is stretched taut around them1 as shown by the dotted lines4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sticks are ,fastened ,solidly with ,brads1 and the ,cloth ,sewed to the ,string around ,their ,ends 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,if the cambric is not of sufficient size to cover the frame1 two pieces must be sewed together1 then a piece cut out to the shape of the string1 allowing #a in4 to project all around for a lap4 ,the cambric is sewn fast to the string with the linen thread4 ,fasten the cloth to the frame part with the tacks1 spacing them #a in4 apart4 ,the space in the center1 between the sticks1 is cut out4 ,make two pieces of the remaining goods1 one #cf in4 by #ah in41 and the other #cf in4 by #ba in4 ,the remaining #fj-;in4 stick is fastened to these pieces of cambric1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 and the whole is fastened to the main frame so as to make a ,v-shaped projection4 ,the bridle strings1 for giving the proper distribution of pull on the line to the kite1 are fastened1 one to the upper end of the long stick in the ,v-shaped piece attached to the kite1 and the other to the lower end1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the inclination can be varied to suit the builder by changing the point of attachment of the kite line to the bridle4 ,if it is desired to fly the kite directly overhead1 attach the line above the regular point and for low flying make the connection below this point4 ,the regular point is found by trial flights with the line fastened temporarily to the bridle1 after which the fastening is made permanent4 ,paper ,glider ,that ,loops the ,loop ,by ,c4 ,a4 ,thompson ,the usual paper glider shaped as shown in ,fig4 #a can be made to loop the loop and make corkscrew flights if prepared according to sketches herewith4 ,it should be carefully made in the first place so that in its regular form it flies perfectly straight4 ,illustration3 ,ordinary ,paper ,glider and the ,manner of ,throwing ,it to ,make the ,different ,flights 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f1 ,fig4 #g1 ,fig4 #h7 ,to make the glider loop1 the rear corners of the wings should be turned up at right angles1 as in ,fig4 #b1 and the glider launched with a great deal of force with the nose pointed slightly upward4 ,this will require some practice1 but one soon learns the trick4 ,after looping once1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 the glider descends in volplane4 ,this form of glider will also right itself1 if dropped from a height1 nose downward1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,for a corkscrew flight the glider is prepared as in ,fig4 #e2 one rear corner being bent up and the other down4 ,in this form it flies horizontally1 or downward1 while rapidly rotating around its longitudinal axis1 as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,to make a spiral descent1 the rear corners of the wings are bent up as in ,fig4 #b1 and1 further1 the rear corner of the keel is bent at right angles1 ,fig4 #g1 whereupon it is thrown in the ordinary manner4 ,it then takes the course shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,a ,water ,filter ,a cheap and very effective water filter can be made of a flower pot by plugging the hole in the bottom with a piece of sponge and fitting it as follows3 ,place powdered charcoal on top of the sponge to a depth of #a in41 then #a in4 of clean silver sand1 and lastly #b in4 of small stones and gravel4 ,it is hung with a bail at the top4 ,a ,combination ,electrically ,operated ,door ,lock ,the illustration shows a very useful application of an ordinary electric door lock in the construction of a combination lock and alarm to be operated from the outside of the building4 ,illustration3 ,the ,brass-,tack ,heads ,holding the ,numerals in ,place ,constitute the ,combination ,points ,the three numerals1 #a1 #b1 and #d1 or any other combination of numbers constituting the house number on a door1 are made of some kind of insulating material and fastened in place on a base of insulating fiber1 or wood1 about #a_/d in4 thick1 by means of ordinary brass-headed tacks1 as indicated by the black dots4 ,the tacks will extend through the base a short distance so the electrical connections may be made by soldering wires to them1 as shown by the diagram1 alternate tacks being connected together with the exception of three2 for instance1 ,a1 ,b1 and ,c4 ,the terminals of the leads that are connected to alternate tacks are in turn connected to the terminals of a circuit composed of an ordinary vibrating bell1 ,d1 and battery1 ,e4 ,if any two adjacent tack heads be connected together1 except tacks ,a1 ,b1 and ,c1 the bell circuit will be completed and the bell ring1 which will serve as an indication that some one is tampering with the circuit4 ,the person knowing the combination1 connects the tack heads ,a and ,b1 and at the same time connects the tack head ,c with ,f or ,g1 or any other tack head that is connected to the plus side of the battery1 whereby a circuit will be completed through the lock ,h and the door is opened4 ,any metallic substance1 such as a knife1 key1 or finger ring1 may be used in making the above indicated connection1 and there will be no need of carrying a key for this particular door so long as the combination is known4 ,the base upon which the numbers are mounted and through which the points of the tacks protrude1 should be mounted on a second base that has a recess cut in its surface to accommodate the wires and points of the tacks4 ,the combination may be made more or less complicated1 as desired1 by connecting the tacks in different ways1 and by using a separate battery for the bell and lock4 ,the circuit leading to the door lock1 if there is one already installed1 may be used and then no extra circuit is needed4 ,such a device has been used on a private-desk drawer with entire satisfaction4 ,the battery was placed in the back end of the drawer1 and if it happened to fail1 a new one could be connected to the points ,b and ,j so that the drawer could be opened and a new battery put in4 ,lock for a ,fancy ,hairpin ,illustration3 ,the ,bend in the ,pin will ,hold in the ,hair and ,prevent the ,loss of the ,pin ,to avoid losing a fancy hairpin1 bend one leg of the pin as shown in the illustration4 ,the hair caught in the notch formed by the bend will prevent the pin from dropping out4--,contributed by ,w4 ,c4 ,loy1 ,rochester1 ,ind4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a metal surface polished with oil will keep clean longer than when polished dry4 ,illustration ,an ,aeroplane ,kite ,by ,w4 ,a4 ,reich ,after building a number of kites from a recent description in ,amateur ,mechanics ,i branched out and constructed the aeroplane kite shown in the illustration1 which has excited considerable comment in the neighborhood on account of its appearance and behavior in the air4 ,illustration ,the main frame consists of a center-stick1 ,a1 #ca in4 long1 and two cross-sticks1 of which one1 ,b1 is #ca in4 long and the other1 ,c1 #ae-a_/b in4 long4 ,the location of the crosspieces on the centerpiece ,a is shown in the sketch1 the front piece ,b being #a-c_/d in4 from the end1 and the rear piece ,c1 #b-a_/d in4 from the other end4 ,the ends of the sticks have small notches cut to receive a string1 ,d1 which is run around the outside to make the outline of the frame and to brace the parts4 ,two cross-strings are placed at ,e and ,f1 #g in4 from either end of the centerpiece ,a1 other brace strings being crossed1 as shown at ,g1 and then tied to the cross-string ,f on both sides1 as at ,h4 ,illustration3 ,the ,kite ,being ,tailless ,rides the ,air ,waves ,like an ,aeroplane in a ,steady ,breeze ,the long crosspiece ,b is curved upward to form a bow1 the center of which should be #c-a_/d in4 above the string by which its ends are tied together4 ,the shorter crosspiece is bent and tied in the same manner to make the curve #b-a_/b in41 and the centerpiece to curve #a-c_/d in41 both upward4 ,the front and rear parts1 between the end and the cross-strings ,e and ,f1 are covered with yellow tissue paper1 which is pasted to the crosspieces and strings4 ,the small wings ,l are purple tissue paper1 #d in4 wide at ,m and tapering to a point at ,n4 ,the bridle string is attached on the centerpiece ,a at the junction of the crosspieces ,b and ,c1 and must be adjusted for the size and weight of the kite4 ,the kite is tailless and requires a steady breeze to make it float in the air currents like an aeroplane4 ,the bridle string and the bending of the sticks must be adjusted until the desired results are obtained4 ,the bridle string should be tied so that it will about center under the cross-stick ,b for the best results1 but a slight change from this location may be necessary to make the kite ride the air currents properly4 ,the center of gravity will not be the same in the construction of each kite and the string can be located only by trial1 after which it is permanently fastened4 ,illustration3 ,general ,plan and ,outline of the ,kite1 ,which may be ,built in ,any ,size1 ,if the ,proportions are ,kept1 and ,its ,appearance in the ,air on a ,steady ,breeze ,distilling ,apparatus for ,water ,illustration3 ,homemade ,still for ,removing the ,impurities in ,water ,that is ,used in ,mixing ,chemicals ,pure water1 free from all foreign substances1 is frequently wanted for making up photographic solutions and many other purposes4 ,an apparatus for distilling water can be very easily made from galvanized pipe fittings4 ,the outer cooling jacket ,a is a piece of #a-;in4 pipe1 #b ft4 long1 threaded on both ends1 and bored and tapped for #a_/b-;in4 pipe at ,b and ,c4 ,a hole is bored and tapped for #a_/b-;in4 pipe in each of the two caps used on the ends of the pipe ,a1 and a piece of #a_/b-;in4 pipe1 ,d1 #b ft4 #h in4 long1 is run through the holes as shown4 ,the joints are soldered to make them water-tight4 ,two #a_/b-;in4 nipples1 #d in4 long1 are screwed in at ,b and ,c4 ,the retort1 or boiler1 ,e1 in which the impure water is boiled may be made of any suitable vessel and heated with a ,bunsen or gas burner4 ,a beaker1 or other vessel1 ,f1 is placed below the lower end of the small pipe4 ,the cold water from the faucet1 which flows into the outer jacket at ,c and out at ,b1 condenses the steam in the small pipe ,d1 turning it into water which falls into the beaker in large drops4 ,the water is often distilled a second time to remove any impurities which it might still contain4--,contributed by ,o4 ,e4 ,tronnes1 ,evanston1 ,ill4 ,telephone ,stand for a ,sloping ,desk ,having a sloping-top desk and being compelled to use the telephone quite frequently1 ,i devised a support for the telephone so that it might stand level and not fall off4 ,the sides of the stand were cut on the same slope as the desk top1 and their under edges were provided with rubber strips to prevent slipping4--,contributed by ,j4 ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,stand with a ,level ,surface for a ,desk ,telephone to be ,used on a ,sloping ,desk ,top ,illustration ,tandem ,monoplane ,glider ,by ,george ,f4 ,mace ,the monoplane glider illustrated has better fore-and-aft stability than the biplane1 is lighter in proportion to the supporting surface1 simpler to build1 and requires very little time to assemble or take apart4 ,the material list is as follows3 ,,frame #d pieces of bamboo1 #ad ft4 long1 tapering from #a-a_/b to #a in4 #h pieces of spruce1 #a_/b in4 thick1 #a in4 wide1 and #c ft4 long4 #h pieces of spruce1 #a_/b in4 thick1 #a in4 wide1 and #b ft4 long4 ,,wings #d main-wing bars1 spruce1 #c_/d in4 thick1 #a-a_/d in4 wide1 and #ah ft4 long4 #h wing crosspieces1 spruce1 #c_/d in4 square1 and #d ft4 long4 #ch wing ribs1 poplar or spruce1 #a_/d in4 thick1 #c_/d in4 wide1 and #fd in4 long4 ,the first thing to do is to make the main frame which is composed of the four bamboo poles4 ,the poles take the corners of a #b-;ft4 square space and are supported with the pieces of spruce that are #b ft4 and #c ft4 long1 the shorter lengths running horizontally and the longer upright1 so that each upright piece extends #a ft4 above the two upper poles4 ,all joints should be fastened with #c_/af-;in4 stove bolts4 ,the wire used to truss the glider is ,no4 #af gauge piano wire4 ,the trussing is done in all directions1 crossing the wires between the frame parts1 except in the center or space between the four poles4 ,illustration3 ,the ,start of the ,glide should be ,made from the ,top of a ,hill1 ,then a ,little ,run will ,carry the ,airman ,several ,hundred ,feet through the ,air ,the framework of the main wings is put together by bolting one of the crosspieces at each end of two wing bars1 then another #d ft4 from each end1 whereupon the wing bars are bolted to the main frame4 ,the frame is then braced diagonally between these pieces4 ,the ribs1 spaced #a ft4 apart1 are fastened to this frame with #a-;in4 brads4 ,the ribs are so bent that the highest part will be #e or #f in4 above the horizontal4 ,the bending must be uniform and is done when fastening them in place4 ,the material used to cover the wings and rudders is strong muslin4 ,the cloth is first tacked to the front wing bar1 then to the ribs1 and sewed to a wire which is fastened between the ends of the ribs4 ,large brass-head tacks should be used through a strip of tape to fasten the cloth to the ribs4 ,the rear wings are constructed in a similar manner4 ,after the cloth is in place it is coated with starch or varnish4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,tandem ,monoplane ,glider1 ,showing the ,main ,frame and ,wing ,construction1 and the ,manner of ,placing the ,crossed ,bracing ,wires ,between the ,parts and to the ,wing ,ends ,illustration ,the two vertical rectangular spaces in the main frame1 just under the rear wings1 are covered with cloth to act as a rudder4 ,the upper and lower bracing wires for the wings are attached with snaps and rings so that the glider can be easily taken apart4 ,it is best not to use the glider in a wind greater than #cj miles an hour4 ,it is started from the top of a hill in the usual manner4 ,glides can be made running from #fj to several hundred feet4 ,carrier for a ,suitcase ,where it is necessary to carry a well filled and heavy suitcase the light truck shown in the sketch will be a great assistance4 ,the truck is constructed on the folding plan1 similar to a go-cart1 and can be carried on the side of the case4 ,the wheels are those used on a go-cart1 with rubber tires and about #f in4 in diameter4 ,these are fitted to standards carrying a hinged top piece1 the upper ends of the standards being hinged in a like manner4 ,the standards should be cut to the proper length for the person carrying the suitcase4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,harriet ,m4 ,s4 ,kerbaugh1 ,allentown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,small ,truck will ,greatly ,assist the ,carrying of a ,heavily ,loaded ,suitcase ,light in a ,keyhole ,remove the lock and cut the mortise deep enough to admit a #c-volt battery lamp with a suitable socket attached4 ,the lamp is then connected to wires which are concealed and run to a battery of three dry cells in the basement or other convenient place4 ,a small push button is attached in the line and placed near the knob on the door4 ,a small recess must be cut in the mortise so that the light from the lamp will shine directly on the inside of the plate over the keyhole4--,contributed by ,armand ,f4 ,lamarre1 ,st4 ,remi1 ,can4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,monoplane ,glider ,by ,william ,grotzinger ,a simple glider of the monoplane type can be easily constructed in a small workshop2 the cost of materials is not great and the building does not require skilled workmen4 ,select the material with care and see that the wood is straight-grained and free from knots4 ,the following list of spruce pieces is required3 #d main wing spars1 #c_/d by #a-a_/d in4 by #ag ft4 #b rudder spars1 #c_/d by #a in4 by #h ft4 #h wing crosspieces1 #c_/d by #c_/d in4 by #d ft4 #d rudder crosspieces1 #a_/b by #a_/b in4 by #b ft4 #a piece for main-frame crosspieces1 #a_/b by #a in4 by #ab ft4 #b arm pieces1 #a-a_/b by #b in4 by #c-a_/b ft4 ,the following list of poplar pieces is required in making the supports for the cloth covering on the wings and rudders4 #cd main-wing ribs1 #a_/d by #c_/d by #fd in4 #h rudder ribs1 #a_/d by #a_/b by #cf in4 #e rudder ribs1 #a_/d by #c_/d by #dh in4 ,the following list of oak pieces is needed3 #a piece1 #e_/h by #a-a_/d in4 by #ab ft4 #a piece1 #e_/h by #a-a_/d in4 by #f ft4 #a piece1 #c_/d by #c_/d in4 by #c-a_/b ft4 #b pieces1 #e_/h by #a-a_/b in4 by #e ft4 #d pieces1 #c_/d by #a by #bh in4 ,in addition to the lists given1 four pieces of bamboo1 #af ft4 long1 tapering from #a or #a-a_/d in4 at the large end to #c_/d in4 at the small end1 are used for the main frame4 ,illustration3 ,monoplane ,glider in ,flight ,construction ,the first part to make is the main frame ,a which is constructed of the four bamboo poles4 ,they are made into a rectangular frame with crossbars marked ,b cut to the right length from the #ab-;ft4 piece of spruce1 #a_/b in4 by #a in4 ,the bars ,c and ,d are of oak cut from the #f-;ft4 piece1 #e_/h in4 by #a-a_/d in4 ,all of these crossbars are fastened together in rectangular form by means of stove bolts4 ,the bamboo poles are then bolted to the inner corners of the frames with #c_/af-;in4 bolts4 ,place the bolts through the bamboo close to a joint to prevent splitting4 ,the frame is then rigidly trussed by diagonal wires marked ,e crossing all rectangles4 ,the wire used for trussing all the parts throughout the glider is piano wire1 #af gauge4 ,the arm pieces are bolted to the sides of the rectangular frames beneath the wings4 ,illustration3 ,plan ,view ,illustration3 ,side ,elevation ,illustration3 ,front ,elevation ,illustration3 ,wing ,bar ,the framework of the main wings or planes should be put together by bolting the cross struts ,f at regular intervals on the under side of the main spars ,g4 ,brace the frame diagonally with the piano wire4 ,the ribs are nailed to the main spars by using #a-;in4 brads4 ,the ribs are spaced #a ft4 apart1 and curved so that the highest part will be #e in4 from the horizontal4 ,each rib extends #ae in4 back of the rear spar4 ,the rudder is made in the same manner4 ,the vertical rudder is made to fold4 ,a small pocket arrangement ,h is made from which the rigs of the vertical rudder diverge4 ,the covering of the wings and rudders should be a good quality of muslin or some light aeronautical goods4 ,the cloth should be tacked to the front spar1 to the ribs1 and then sewn to a wire which connects the ends of the ribs4 ,construct the triangular arrangement marked ,j to which the wings are braced4 ,the wing bar supports are shown in the illustration4 ,the bottom wires are braced to the crossbar ,k shown in the front elevation4 ,the bracing wires are all fastened to a snaphook which can be snapped into the rings at the places marked ,l4 ,this method will allow one quickly to assemble or take apart the plane and store it in a small place4 ,the vertical rudder should be braced from each rib to the front spar of the horizontal rudder and then braced by the wires ,m to hold the rudder from falling back4 ,the rudder is then braced to the main frame and the main frame is braced by the wires ,n to the wings4 ,this will hold the plane rigid4 ,use snaphooks and eyebolts wherever possible so that the plane can be quickly assembled4 ,assembling ,the triangular arrangement ,j is bolted to the wings and the top wires put in place4 ,the wings are then put on the main frame and bolted to the bars marked ,c and ,d1 after which the bottom wires are fixed in place4 ,gliding ,take the glider to the top of a hill1 step into the center of the main frame just a little back of the center of the wings4 ,put your arms around the arm pieces1 face the wind and run a few steps4 ,you will be lifted off the ground and carried down the slope4 ,the balancing is done by shifting the legs4 ,the glides should be short at first1 but by daily practice1 and1 as the operator gains skill1 glides can be made up to a length of several hundred feet4 ,do not attempt to fly in a wind having a velocity of more than #ae miles an hour4 ,exerciser for a ,chained ,dog ,the exerciser consists of a disk1 #e ft4 in diameter1 pivoted in the ground near the kennel4 ,the disk revolves on a #e_/h-;in4 pin set in a post made of a #d by #d-;in4 piece of timber4 ,the disk is made of common lumber fastened together with battens on the under side4 ,our dog seems to enjoy this kind of exercise4--,contributed by ,hazel ,duncan1 ,denver1 ,colo4 ,illustration3 ,revolving ,disk ,exerciser ,a ,laboratory ,gas ,generator ,the sketch illustrates a gas generator designed for laboratories where gases are needed in large quantities and frequently4 ,the shelf holding the large inverted bottle is of thick wood1 and to reinforce the whole apparatus1 a #a-;in4 copper strip is placed around the bottle tightly and fastened with screws turned into the woodwork4 ,the shelf above is attached last1 and upon it rests the bottle of commercial acid required in the gas generation4 ,the pump shown is for use in starting the siphon4 ,illustration3 ,gas ,generator of ,large ,capacity ,that will ,work ,automatically as the ,gas is ,removed ,the large bottle used as a generator may be either a #c or #e-;gal4 size1 and after it is placed in the position shown1 a sufficient amount of the solid reagent needed in gas generating is placed in the mouth before the exit tube1 leading away below1 is fixed in position4 ,if sulphureted hydrogen is required1 ferrous sulphide is used2 if hydrogen is required1 zinc is placed within2 and to make a carbon dioxide1 marble1 or its equivalent1 is inserted4 ,whatever gas is required1 a sufficient quantity of the solid material is put in to last for some time in order not to disturb the fastenings4 ,when all is ready1 the pump is used gently to start the acid over the siphon and into the generator from below4 ,the gas generated by the action of the acid on the solid soon fills the bottle4 ,the screw clamp on the exit tube is loosened and the gas passes into the bottle of water and charges it1 in the case when sulphureted hydrogen is required4 ,in the other cases1 when sufficient gas has been generated1 the screw clamp is tightened1 and the gas soon attains considerable pressure which forces the acid back out of the generator and into the acid bottle above4 ,the whole apparatus now comes to an equilibrium1 and the gas in the generator is ready for another use4--,contributed by ,w4 ,m4 ,mills1 ,bakersfield1 ,cal4 ,holding ,small ,armatures for ,winding ,procure a strip of sheet metal1 #f in4 long1 #a in4 wide1 or as wide as the armature core is long1 and #c_/cb in4 thick4 ,bend this into a ,u-shape1 as shown1 and file each end similar to the barb on a fishhook4 ,drill two holes for a bolt to pass through the sheet-metal ends4 ,fasten a screw or bolt in the center of the bend1 to be used for gripping in a chuck or polishing head4 ,core segments can be quickly wound with this device4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,b4 ,schulz1 ,austin1 ,illinois4 ,illustration3 ,armature ,cores are ,easily ,revolved to ,fill the ,core ,openings with ,insulated ,wire ,illustration ,footstool for ,cement ,floors ,a clerk finding the cement floor of the office uncomfortably cold to the feet1 devised a footstool in the following manner3 ,a shallow box was procured1 and four small truck casters were fastened to the bottom4 ,a piece of carpet was laid on the inside of the bottom and some old newspapers placed on top of it4 ,when seated at the desk1 he placed his feet inside the box on the papers4 ,the casters elevated the box from the cement1 just high enough to avoid dampness and cold1 and permitted an easy change of position4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,gainesville1 ,ga4 ,homemade ,telegraph ,sounder ,the material required to construct a telegraph sounder1 like the one shown in the sketch1 consists of two binding posts1 magnets1 a piece of sheet metal1 and a rubber band4 ,these are arranged as shown1 on a wood base or1 better still1 on a metal box4 ,in using a metal-box base1 be sure to insulate the connections at the magnet coils and binding posts4 ,illustration3 ,an ,inexpensive and ,homemade ,sounder for ,use in ,learning the ,telegraph ,codes ,this instrument will be found by those studying the telegraph codes to give good results1 equal to any of the expensive outfits sold for this purpose4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,j4 ,la ,prille1 ,flushing1 ,n4 ,y4 ,laboratory ,force ,filter ,the sketch represents a force filter which is well adapted for use in small laboratories4 ,the water is turned on at the faucet and draws the air through the side tube by suction1 which in turn draws the air in a steady stream through the ,wolff bottles4 ,the tubes may be attached to a filter inserted in a filter bottle and filtering thus greatly facilitated4 ,the connection to the faucet can be made1 as shown in the detailed sketch1 out of a long cork1 by boring a hole large enough to fit the faucet through the cork and another slanting hole1 joining the central hole1 on the side for a pipe or tube4 ,at the lower end of the cork a tube is also fitted1 which may be drawn out to increase the suction4 ,the inclined tube should be slightly bent at the lower end4--,contributed by ,w4 ,m4 ,mills1 ,bakersfield1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,a ,slight ,vacuum is ,formed by the ,water ,flowing through the ,cork1 ,which ,forces the ,filter ,beginner's ,helper for ,roller ,skating ,one of the most amusing as well as useful devices for a beginner on roller skates is shown in the sketch4 ,the device is made of #c_/d-;in4 pipe and pipe fittings1 with a strip of sheet metal #a in4 wide fastened about half way down on the legs4 ,on the bottom of each leg is fastened an ordinary furniture caster which allows the machine to roll easily on the floor4 ,the rear is left open to allow the beginner to enter1 then by grasping the top rail he is able to move about on the floor at ease1 without fear of falling4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,harris1 ,berkeley1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,beginner ,cannot ,fall ,atmospheric ,thermo-,engine ,the device illustrated has for its object the production of power in small quantities with little attention and no expense4 ,all that is needed to produce the power is common ordinary water1 and the device will continue to operate until the amount of water placed in the receptacle has evaporated4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,engine ,the device consists of a rectangular vessel provided with legs and a cover4 ,each end of the vessel is provided with an opening1 ,a1 adapted to receive and hold in place plaster-of-paris cups1 ,b4 ,the part extending into the tank is provided with a wick1 ,c1 which reaches to the bottom of the vessel4 ,a glass tube1 ,d1 is provided with a bulb on each end and partly filled with alcohol1 the remaining space being exhausted of air4 ,the glass tube is secured to a hanger which is pivoted to the bottom of the vessel4 ,after a quantity of water has been poured into the vessel and the device allowed to stand undisturbed for a few minutes1 the tube will begin to move with an oscillating motion4 ,some of the water in the vessel has been conducted by means of the wicks ,c to the bent plaster cups1 from the surface of which it evaporates1 thus absorbing latent heat and producing a lower temperature in the cups than that of the surrounding atmosphere4 ,the bulb in contact with the cup thus acquires a lower temperature than the one at the end ,d1 which will result in condensation of the alcohol vapor within the former4 ,the pressure of the vapor in the lower bulb will then force the alcohol up the inclined tube into the higher bulb1 the evaporation in the lower bulb maintaining the pressure therein4 ,when a sufficient quantity of alcohol has been forced into the upper bulb1 it will descend1 and thus elevate the other bulb into its cup4 ,the phenomena just described will be repeated in this bulb and the oscillation will continue until the water in the vessel has been absorbed and evaporated4--,contributed by ,e4 ,w4 ,davis1 ,chicago4 ,a ,mirror an ,aid in ,rowing a ,boat ,the young oarsman is apt to experience difficulty in keeping a straight course until he has had some practice4 ,rowing a boat in a narrow channel calls for considerable skill to hold a course in mid-stream4 ,a variation of force in pulling the oars almost instantly results in the rowboat making a landfall on one or the other of the banks4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mirror ,attached to a ,boat ,the skilled oarsman does not need an appliance that the beginner might welcome4 ,with the aid of a mirror conveniently supported at a suitable angle and height before the oarsman's face1 the water1 the shores and approaching boats may be seen with distinctness4 ,the mirror may be set directly in front or a little distance to one side as shown in the sketch4--,contributed by ,thaleon ,blake1 ,sidney1 ,o4 ,developing ,tray ,made of a ,tin ,can ,obtain a tomato or other can1 #e or #f in4 long and #d in4 in diameter1 which should be secured before it has been opened1 says ,camera ,craft4 ,cut both ends exactly half way around1 keeping close to the edge1 as shown in the first sketch1 and slit it lengthwise to open the side4 ,trim off the end pieces to within #a in4 of the center and cut off the surplus tin of the sides of the can1 leaving enough to bend over and form the ends of the tank as shown in the second sketch4 ,illustration3 ,for ,developing ,roll ,films ,the support1 as shown in the last sketch1 is made by screwing together three pieces of wood1 the base piece being #f-a_/b in4 square and thick enough to make the tank solid and heavy4 ,bend the sides of the can over the edges of the two uprights and tack them firmly to the sides1 bending the tin so as to have a rounded surface that will not scratch the films4 ,the ends of the can are bent over sharply to form the sides of the tank4 ,procure a round wood stick1 the length of the tank1 place in position1 and fasten with a screw through the tin at both ends4 ,give the whole tank two coats of black asphaltum varnish to protect it from the action of the developer4 ,white ,rubber on ,croquet ,arches ,illustration ,a white cloth is usually tied to croquet arches when the game is played late in the evening4 ,a much better plan is to slip a piece of white rubber tubing about #a ft4 long on the arch4 ,this tubing can be purchased at any local drug store4 ,this makes the top part of the arch conspicuous so that it may be plainly seen in the dark1 and1 when the tubing becomes soiled it can be cleaned off with a damp cloth4--,contributed by ,john ,blake1 ,franklyn1 ,mass4 ,illuminating an ,outside ,thermometer ,during the season of furnace fires the thermometer outside the north window becomes of added interest and usefulness in helping one to judge the proper draft adjustments of the furnace for the night4 ,a pocket electric flashlamp is convenient for examining the thermometer after dark1 but it is not always at hand1 matches are dangerous when lace curtains are at the window1 and besides1 the reflection from the glass of both matches and flashlamp on the inside makes it very difficult to read the thermometer4 ,illustration ,to avoid these difficulties ,i attached to my thermometer the device shown herewith1 which consists of a miniature battery lamp placed at the back of the translucent-glass thermometer and operated by a battery within the house1 the light being turned on by an ordinary push button placed conveniently inside of the window4 ,a strip of brass1 ,a1 #c_/h in4 wide by #a_/af in4 thick1 was riveted 7soldering will do7 to the lower support of the thermometer4 ,the free end of this brass strip was bent around a disk of hardwood1 ,b1 and fastened to it by three or four small screws in such a manner that the disk made a circular platform just behind the thermometer scale4 ,this disk was slightly larger than the mouth of a small1 thin tumbler4 ,on the upper surface of this disk was fastened with shellac and small nails close to the periphery1 a disk of cork1 #a_/d in4 thick1 this cork disk being a close fit for the mouth of the tumbler4 ,a miniature porcelain electric-lamp socket was fastened with screws on the cork of the base4 ,wires were then run from the lamp socket through the cork and wood disks and the whole painted with melted paraffin to close all apertures and keep out moisture4 ,good rubber-covered electric-light wire will do nicely for the wiring outside the house1 although1 if it can be obtained1 a piece of lead-covered paired wire is preferable4 ,these wires must be only long enough to reach inside the house1 where they may be joined to the ordinary sort of wire used in electric-bell work for connecting with push button and battery4 ,a #d-volt lamp of about #b cp4 will be sufficient to illuminate the thermometer and allow the scale and mercury column to be distinctly seen4 ,it may be found necessary to make some adjustment by bending the brass strip in order to bring the lamp centrally behind the scale and at the proper height to give the best lighting on the range of from #aj to #dj deg4 ,over the lamp is placed the tumbler for protection from the weather1 and1 if desired1 half of the tumbler may be painted as a reflector on the inside with white enamel paint1 although1 in practice1 ,i have not found this necessary4 ,within the house the push button should be placed at the window where it can be most conveniently reached when viewing the thermometer1 and connections may be made to the battery regularly used for ringing the house bells1 or to a separate battery of1 say1 #d dry cells1 placed in some location1 as a closet1 near the thermometer4--,contributed by ,c4 ,f4 ,a4 ,siedhof1 ,winchester1 ,mass4 ,how to ,make an ,automobile ,robe ,when driving an automobile in cold weather1 it is impossible to have a robe come down over the feet without being in the way so that it is inconvenient in working the pedals4 ,procure a common heavy robe and cut two holes in it about #e in4 from the bottom just large enough for the toe of the shoes to slip through and bind the edges with cloth or fur4 ,the #e in4 of robe below the holes should come back under the feet so that no wind can enter4 ,make the holes far enough apart so that both outside pedals can be reached easily and you will have no trouble with your feet4 ,this robe1 with the use of overshoes1 will insure comfort in driving a car4--,contributed by ,earl ,r4 ,hastings1 ,corinth1 ,vt4 ,locating a ,droplight in the ,dark ,it is very hard to locate an electric-light globe in a dark room4 ,anyone trying to find one by striking the air in its vicinity with one hand1 usually finds that the globe is not there1 although the hand may have passed within #a_/b in4 of the globe4 ,illustration3 ,covering a ,wide ,range ,the best way to locate a globe is to approach the proximity of the drop with thumbs touching and fingers extended as shown in the sketch1 in which manner the hands will cover a radius of about #ad in4 and offer a better chance of locating the light quickly than if one groped about with one hand extended4--,contributed by ,victor ,labadie1 ,dallas1 ,tex4 ,lighting a ,room for ,making ,photographs ,when it becomes too cold for the amateur photographer to take pictures outdoors1 he generally lays aside his camera and thinks no more about it until the coming of another spring or summer4 ,while some winter scenes would make up an interesting part of anyone's collection1 it is not always pleasant to go out to take them4 ,some derive pleasure from making groups and portraits1 but this is very difficult1 if the room is not well lighted4 ,overhead light is the best for this work and few residences are constructed to furnish this kind of light4 ,illustration3 ,light ,reflected on ,ceiling ,i find a very good way to get a light overhead is to take a large mirror--one from an ordinary dresser will do--and place it in the window in such a position that the reflection will strike the ceiling just above the subject4 ,the result will be a soft but very strong light1 almost equal to a north skylight4 ,splendid portraits can be made in this way4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,piper1 ,kokomo1 ,ind4 ,detachable ,hinged ,cover for ,kettles ,a kettle cover equipped with the hinge shown in ,fig4 #a will not fall off when in place1 and can be raised or removed entirely when desired4 ,illustration3 ,wire ,clasps on ,hinge 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,one wing of an ordinary hinge is soldered or riveted to the cover and wire clasps soldered to the other wing4 ,it is slipped on the kettle as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the cover is interchangeable and can be placed on almost any kettle4 ,a ,use for ,discarded ,wafer ,razor ,blades ,a paper trimmer and mat cutter can be made from a wafer razor blade4 ,as a paper trimmer1 place the blade ,c over the part ,a of the razor1 as shown1 with only two of the holes engaging in one post and the center screw4 ,then place the part ,b in position and clamp with the handle4 ,this will allow about #a_/b in4 of the blade to project at one end4 ,if a part of the extending blade is cut or broken off1 it will be more easily handled4 ,the cutter is guided along the straightedge as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #a7 ,if it is desired to make a more permanent form of instrument1 or if no holder is at hand and only a castoff wafer blade1 a handle1 ,c1 may be cut from a piece of wood and fitted with two or three binding-posts1 ,a1 taken from an old battery1 to hold the blade ,b in place1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,blade ,attached to ,handle 7,fig4 #b7 ,armatures for ,small ,motors ,without the proper tools and material1 the amateur electrician will find it quite difficult to construct a small armature for a battery motor that will run true1 without vibration and have a neat appearance4 ,ordinary cast-iron gears or pinions1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 make excellent cores for armatures on small motors4 ,a gear of any number of teeth can be used for an armature with a smaller number of coils by cutting out a certain number of teeth4 ,for example1 a gear with #ab teeth will take #ab coils1 but if every other tooth is cut out1 it will take only #f coils1 etc4 ,the teeth can be easily chipped out with a cold chisel4 ,illustration3 ,gear ,used as a ,core 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,larger armatures can be made from gears with spokes1 the spokes being cut out1 if a ring armature is desired4 ,the gear1 when wound1 can be mounted on a hub made of empty thread spools4 ,the spool can be turned at one end to insert it in the armature1 and if too long1 one end will serve for the core of the commutator1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,this combination will make a neat1 efficient little armature1 which will run quite free from vibration4 ,only simple tools1 such as a hammer1 cold chisel1 file1 jackknife and a vise1 are required4--,contributed by ,r4 ,j4 ,nault1 ,hartford1 ,conn4 ,ice ,creeper for ,shoe ,heels ,many persons1 young and old1 have falls every winter on the ice or snow which can be avoided if their shoes are fitted with ice creepers4 ,a very efficient device of this kind1 which any boy can make at home in a short time1 is shown in the sketch4 ,these ice creepers need not be removed from the shoes or boots until the winter is past1 for they may be worn indoors without injuring the finest floor4 ,the two plates ,a may be made from either iron or steel--preferably the latter4 ,an all-steel scraper1 or a piece of a saw blade1 makes good creepers4 ,draw the temper by heating the steel to a cherry red and then letting it cool slowly4 ,it may then be sawn with a hacksaw1 cut with a cold chisel1 or filed into plates of the proper shape1 as shown4 ,the teeth are filed to points4 ,the two ,l-shaped slots are made by drilling #c_/af-;in4 holes through the plates1 and then sawing1 filing or chiseling out the metal between the holes4 ,the projections at the ends are then bent out at right angles with heavy pliers or the claws of a hammer1 and finally the plates bent to fit the curve of the heel4 ,illustration3 ,creeper ,attached to ,heel ,the creepers are attached by means of round-head wood screws turned into the leather4 ,in this operation place the teeth of the plates just below the bottom of the heel and turn the screws into the ends of the upright slots until the heads just bind4 ,the plate as set when indoors or else not needed is shown at ,b4 ,to place the plate so it will grip the ice1 slide it to the right1 which will bring the screws into the horizontal slots1 as shown at ,c4--,contributed by ,chelsea ,c4 ,fraser1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,opening ,screw-,top ,fruit ,jars ,illustration ,screw-top fruit jars may be easily opened in the following manner3 ,secure a strap with a buckle and place it around the top as if it were to be buckled1 but instead draw the loose end back and hold it with the thumb as shown4 ,turn cover and strap while held in this position and it will easily turn from the jar4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,a4 ,bickert1 ,clinton1 ,iowa4 ,lamp-,chimney ,cleaner ,lamp chimneys of various makes are very difficult to clean quickly and thoroughly4 ,the simple device shown in the sketch makes the cleaning process a simple matter4 ,the cleaner is made of a round rubber ball with slits cut in it as shown and then fastened to the end of a stick4 ,when a cloth is placed over the ball it presses evenly against the curved surfaces of the glass4 ,there is no danger of breaking a chimney with this cleaner4 ,illustration3 ,rubber ,ball on ,stick ,a ,pop-,corn ,popper ,illustration ,the accompanying sketch shows the construction of a pop-corn popper for thoroughly flavoring the corn with the hot butter or lard1 and at the same time mixing it with the necessary amount of salt4 ,procure a metal bucket that just fits the bottom of the frying pan4 ,the stirring device is made of heavy wire bent as shown and provided with an empty spool for a handle4 ,a brace is made of tin bent in the shape shown and riveted to the bottom of the bucket4--,contributed by ,f4 ,a4 ,wirth1 ,farwell1 ,texas4 ,a ,homemade ,floor ,polisher ,an efficient and cheap floor polisher may be readily constructed in the following manner3 ,make a box about #d by #f by #ab in41 or the exact size may be determined by building it around the household flatirons as these are used to give weight and pressure4 ,the handle1 which is attached as shown1 should be at least #b-a_/b in wide at the hinged end and should be sandpapered where it is grasped by the hands4 ,a half-strap hinge is preferable1 with the strap part fastened to the handle4 ,the bottom of the polisher is covered with a piece of ,brussels carpet4 ,illustration3 ,flatirons in the ,box ,in use1 it is well to set the polisher on a soft piece of cotton or flannel cloth1 which may be readily renewed when badly soiled4 ,a more sightly polisher may be made by filling the box with pieces of old iron or lead1 tightly packed with paper to prevent rattling1 and attaching a cover over the top4 ,the handle may be hinged directly to this cover by means of a full-strap hinge4--,contributed by ,b4 ,o4 ,longyear1 ,ft4 ,collins1 ,colo4 ,simple ,way to ,mark ,poison ,bottles ,illustration ,a way to prevent any possible mistake of taking bottles containing poisons is to mark them as shown in the sketch4 ,this method provides a way to designate a poison bottle in the dark4 ,the marker is made of a circle of heavy cardboard with a hole in the center so as to fit tightly over the neck of the bottle4 ,no matter how dark it may be or how much of a hurry a person may be in1 one cannot fail to note the character of the contents of the bottle as soon as the hand touches the cardboard marker4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,removing ,varnish ,a good and easy way to remove varnish from old furniture is to wash the surface thoroughly with #ie-per-cent alcohol4 ,this dissolves the varnish and the wood can then be cleaned with a strong solution of soap1 or weak lye4 ,if lye is used1 it should be washed off quickly and the wood dried with flannel cloth4 ,when the wood is thoroughly dry it will take a fine finish4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,curling-,iron ,heater ,the curling-iron holder shown in the sketch can be made of metal tubing having the size to fit both iron and gas jet4 ,one-half of the tubing for a portion of its length is removed1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the remaining part is bent as in ,fig4 #b and set on the burner of the gas jet4 ,illustration3 ,heater on ,gas ,jet 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the tube prevents the curling iron from becoming black with soot4 ,the position on the jet may be changed4 ,the tube can be placed on the jet and removed with the curling iron4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,jaquythe1 ,richmond1 ,cal4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a whisk broom is the best cleaner for a gas stove4 ,it will clean dirt from nickel parts as well as from the burner1 grates1 ovens and sheet-metal bottoms4 ,preserving ,flowers in ,color and ,form ,one of the most distressing sides of botanical study is the short life of the colors in flowers4 ,those who have found the usual method of preserving plants by pressure between paper unsatisfactory will be interested to learn of a treatment whereby many kinds of flowers may be dried so that they retain a great deal of their natural form and color4 ,the flowers should be gathered as soon as the blossoms have fully opened4 ,it is important that they should be quite dry1 and in order to free them of drops of rain or dew1 they may be suspended with heads downward for a few hours in a warm place4 ,it is well to begin with some simple form of flower4 ,illustration3 ,placing the ,flowers on the ,steel ,pins444 ,a large1 strongly made wooden box--one of tin is better--will be necessary1 together with a sufficient amount of sand to fill it4 ,if possible1 the sand should be of the kind known as silver sand1 which is very fine4 ,the best that can be procured will be found far from clean1 and it must1 therefore1 be thoroughly washed4 ,the sand should be poured into a bowl of clean water4 ,much of the dirt will float on the surface4 ,this is skimmed off and thrown away1 and clean water added4 ,the sand should be washed in this manner at least a dozen times1 or until nothing remains but pure white grains of sand4 ,the clean sand is spread out to dry on a cloth in a thin layer4 ,when thoroughly dry1 it should be placed in a heavy earthenware vessel and further dried in a hot oven4 ,allow it to remain in the oven for some time until it is completely warmed through so that one can scarcely hold the bare hands in it4 ,illustration3 444and ,pouring the ,dry ,sand around ,them ,obtain a piece of heavy cardboard and cut it to fit easily in the bottom of the box4 ,through the bottom of the cardboard insert a number of steel pins1 one for each of the flowers to be preserved4 ,take the dry blossoms and press the stalk of each on a steel pin so that it is held in an upright position4 ,when the cardboard is thus filled1 place it in the box4 ,illustration3 ,the ,dried ,flowers ,the warm sand is put in a bag or some other receptacle from which it can be easily poured4 ,pour the sand into the box gently1 allowing it to trickle slowly in so that it spreads evenly4 ,keep on pouring sand until the heads of the flowers are reached1 taking care that all of them stand in a vertical position4 ,the utmost care must be taken1 when the heads are reached1 to see that all the petals are in their right order4 ,remember that any crumpled flowers will be pressed into any position they may assume by the weight of the sand4 ,when the box is filled it should be covered and set aside in a dry place4 ,the box should be allowed to stand at least #dh hours4 ,after the first day1 if only a small amount of sand has been used1 the material may have cooled off to some extent1 and the box must be set in a moderately heated oven for a short time1 but no great amount of warmth is advisable4 ,after #dh hours the box may be uncovered and the sand carefully poured off4 ,as the flowers are now in a very brittle condition1 any rough handling will cause serious damage4 ,when all the sand has been emptied1 the cardboard should be removed from the box and each blossom taken from its pin4 ,in the case of succulent specimens1 the stems will have shrunk considerably1 but the thinner petals will be in an almost natural condition4 ,the colors will be bright and attractive4 ,some tints will have kept better than others1 but most of the results will be surprisingly good4 ,whatever state the flowers are in when they are taken from the box1 if the drying process has been thorough1 they will keep almost indefinitely4 ,flowers preserved in this manner are admirable for the decoration of homes4 ,if they are exposed to light1 care should be taken to see that the direct sunshine does not strike them1 as it will fade the colors4 ,sprigs with leaves attached may be dried in this way1 but it has been found that much of the intensity of the green is lost in the process4 ,reading ,pulse ,beats with the ,sun's ,rays ,the pulse beats may be counted by this unusual method4 ,on a clear day1 when the sun is shining brightly1 darken a room and select one window toward the sunlight1 which should be prepared as follows3 ,draw the curtain part way down and cover the rest of the window with a heavy cardboard4 ,cut a small hole in the cardboard to admit a beam of light4 ,set a bowl of water on a table in the path of the beam so as to deflect it to the ceiling as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch4 ,illustration3 ,sun's ,rays ,deflected to the ,ceiling ,it is now a simple matter to show the pulse beats4 ,place the wrist against the edge of the bowl as shown1 and the beam of light directed to the ceiling will record every beat of the pulse by short1 abrupt movements4 ,artistic ,wood ,turning ,some very odd and beautiful effects can be obtained in lathe work by making up the stock from several pieces of various kinds of wood glued together4 ,the pieces can be arranged in many pleasing combinations1 and if good joints are made and a good quality of glue used1 the built-up stock is just as durable as a solid piece4 ,candlesticks turned from built-up stock are especially attractive1 parts of the various light and dark woods appearing here and there in all manner of odd shapes and proportions4 ,if the stock is placed off center in the lathe1 a still greater variety of effects will be produced4 ,the application of a potassium-bichromate solution to the finished work turns each piece a different color4 ,this solution can be made in any depth of color by varying the amounts of potassium salt and water4 ,maple or birch treated with this solution are colored to a rich ,osage orange which cannot be surpassed in beauty4 ,mahogany is turned a deep reddish brown1 and walnut is darkened a great deal4 ,the solution is applied as evenly as possible with a camel's-hair brush while the wood is turning in the lathe4 ,the grain of the wood is somewhat roughened by this process1 but it can be dressed down again with very fine sandpaper4 ,illustration3 ,vase ,made of ,different ,woods ,in polishing the work1 only the best shellac should be used1 and several thin coats applied rather than one or two heavy ones4 ,each coat1 with the exception of the last1 should be sandpapered slightly4 ,powdered pumice stone on a cloth held in the palm of the hand can be used to apply a beautiful luster4 ,some suggestions as to the manner of combining various woods1 and a simple candlestick of mahogany and maple are shown in the sketch4--,contributed by ,olaf ,tronnes1 ,wilmette1 ,ill4 ,a ,variable ,condenser ,a simple variable condenser for receiving in wireless1 which will give good results1 was made by a correspondent of ,modern ,electrics as follows3 ,each clip on the switch was made of ribbon brass or copper in the shape shown at ,a1 the first one from the joint of the knife switch being the longest and each succeeding one shorter4 ,the handle was taken from a single-pole switch4 ,the case was made of oak and varnished and the condenser was made of tinfoil and thin sheets of mica1 #b by #c in4 in size4 ,after placing the condenser in the case1 hot paraffin was poured around it4 ,illustration3 ,lever and ,clips ,adjustable ,baking-,pan ,shoes ,at times bread1 meat1 or other food1 placed in ordinary baking pans in the oven becomes burned on the bottom4 ,if the detachable metal strips shown in the sketch are placed on the pan1 this will not happen1 as the pan does not come in direct contact with the oven floor4 ,illustration3 ,shoe and ,how ,it is ,attached to the ,pan ,the attachment can be placed on agate ware or sheet-iron pans of any length4 ,the shoes are made from light ,v-shaped metal strips and in two parts1 as shown1 with the edges of one part lapped over so that the other strip will slide in it4 ,illustration3 ,cars ,lined ,up ,ready for the ,start and the ,course ,patrolled by the ,boy ,scouts1 ,all ,traffic being ,halted for the ,race and the ,roadway ,made ,clear for the ,entire ,half ,mile of ,track ,a ,pushmobile ,race ,pending the time set for a #ejj-mile international automobile race that was scheduled to take place several weeks later1 a number of boys in the sixth and seventh grades of a public school were enthusiastic over the idea of building for themselves1 in the school shops1 pushmobiles and having a race meet similar to the large one advertised4 ,illustration ,illustration ,illustration3 ,the ,cars ,winning the ,first1 ,second and ,third ,prizes ,respectively1 the ,hoosier being ,penalized #aj ,yards at the ,starting ,tape for ,having ,larger and ,better-,grade ,wheels ,the pushmobiles were made and the race run as an opening feature of a field meet held in the city4 ,the course was about a half mile long1 and was chosen to give the contestants plenty of curves1 a part of the run being over brick streets and the final quarter on the regular track where the field meet was held4 ,interest was added to the event by petitioning the mayor of the city for a permit to run the race1 and the ,boy ,scouts patrolled the route1 while the city policemen cleared the streets1 and during the race all traffic was halted4 ,two of the requirements for entering the race were that the car had to be made in the school shops and that it must have a certain kind of a wheel1 which in this case was one condemned by a local factory1 thus making the wheels and wheel base of all cars alike4 ,two boys to a car constituted a racing team1 and during the race they could exchange positions at their pleasure4 ,the necessity of nursing their cars down the steep grades and around difficult corners developed into an important factor4 ,all cars were named and numbered4 ,the car that finished first was disqualified for the reason that it took on a fresh pusher along the course4 ,the cars were constructed under the supervision of the regular shop instructor1 and a drawing was furnished each boy making a car4 ,the design of the hood and the arrangement of the seat and steering gear was left for each boy to settle as he desired4 ,the matter of expense was watched closely by each one4 ,most of the hoods and seats were constructed of empty dry-goods boxes4 ,illustration3 ,the ,entire ,chassis was ,made of ,cypress ,wood1 ,all ,cars of the ,same ,length and ,width1 the ,hoods and ,seats ,being the ,only ,parts ,optional in ,size and ,shape for the ,builder ,with the aid of the sketch any boy can make a car as strong as the ,peugeot that won the race4 ,the side rails of the main frame were made of cypress1 #eh in4 long and #b in4 square4 ,the location of the crossbars ,a and ,b is very important1 as they give rigidity to the frame and reinforce the two bolsters ,c and ,d4 ,the size of the hood and the location of the seat determine where they should be set into the rail1 after which they are fastened with large wood screws4 ,the three bolsters ,c1 ,d1 and ,e are cut from regular #b by #d-;in4 stock4 ,be careful to get a uniform distance between the rails when they are framed together4 ,if desired1 the dimensions can be increased1 but do not reduce them1 as this will narrow the tread too much4 ,the bolt connecting the bolsters ,c and ,e is a common carriage bolt1 #e in4 long and #a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,a washer is placed between the pieces ,c and ,e1 to make the turning easy4 ,two pieces of #a_/b-;in4 soft-steel rod were used for the axles1 a hole being drilled near each end for a cotter1 to hold the wheels in place1 and also holes through the diameter between the wheels1 for #a-a_/b-;in4 screws to fasten the axles to the bolsters4 ,the steering wheel is constructed of a broom handle with a small wheel fastened to its upper end1 and the lower end supported by a crossbar1 ,f1 and the back end of the hood4 ,before fastening the crossbar ,f in place1 adjust the steering wheel to the proper height for the seat2 then it is fastened with nails driven through the sides of the hood4 ,the construction of the steering device is very simple4 ,the crossarm ,g is a piece of timber1 #g in4 long1 #b in4 wide and #a in4 thick1 rounded on the ends and provided with a large screw eye near each end on the under side to which are fastened the ends of two small-linked chains4 ,the chains are then crossed and fastened to the bottom bolster in front and as near the wheels as practical4 ,the connection is made with a screw eye similar to the one used in the crossarm4 ,another type of steering device may be made by building on the rod a #e-;in4 drum which takes the place of the steering arm4 ,it is a more positive appliance1 but is somewhat harder to make and adjust4 ,the making of the hood and the seat completes the car4 ,decide upon the shape and size of the hood1 but1 in any case and irrespective of the size1 it will require a front and back end4 ,these are made first and then secured at the proper distance apart with two side rails4 ,these two ends are nailed on the ends of the connecting rails4 ,it is then well to fasten the hood skeleton to the car frame and cover it after the steering device is in place4 ,the seat bottom is cut the shape desired1 and fastened to the rear bolster and crosspiece1 first placing a piece of the proper thickness under the front edge1 to give it the desired slant backward4 ,the back curved part can be formed of a piece of sheet metal and lined on the inside with wood pieces1 or with cloth or leather1 padded to resemble the regular cushion4 ,pencil ,rack ,the simple pencil rack shown in the sketch can be easily made from any suitable strip of metal1 preferably brass of about ,no4 #ae gauge4 ,mark off a number of rectangles corresponding to the number of pencil holders desired4 ,with a sharp chisel1 cut through the metal on three sides of each rectangle1 leaving one of the short sides untouched4 ,the loose laps can then be bent to a shape suited to hold a pencil4 ,the rack can be fastened in place with nails or screws through holes pierced at each end4--,contributed by ,mark ,gluckman1 ,jersey ,city1 ,n4 ,j4 ,illustration3 ,a ,strip of ,sheet ,metal ,cut and ,clips ,formed to ,make a ,pencil ,rack 99 99 99 99 99 ,indistinct but not entirely worn-off dates on coins may be read by heating slightly4 ,reducing ,size of a ,hat ,sweatband ,very often a hat has been worn for some time and it becomes too loose on the head1 then paper is used in the sweatband to reduce the size4 ,a better1 easier1 and neater method1 as well as one that will be cooler for the head1 is to insert a flat lamp wick inside of the sweatband4 ,wicks of all thicknesses and widths are easily obtained4--,contributed by ,maurice ,bandier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,a ,catapult ,the catapult shown in the sketch is one ,i constructed some time ago and found to be amusing and very inexpensive4 ,the catapult consists of a small piece of dowel or pine1 whittled into the shape of a handle1 a screweye1 an elastic band and an arrow4 ,it is surprising how a well-balanced arrow will fly into the sky until lost to sight when propelled through the eye of the screw with a medium-strong elastic4 ,a number of forms of this simple gun were made1 but the one shown is the simplest and most effective4--,contributed by ,c4 ,a4 ,needham1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,eye of the ,screw ,serves as a ,guide for the ,arrow ,growing ,clean ,strawberries ,a very good method of growing individual strawberry plants that will produce large clean berries is to provide a covering constructed from a board #aj in4 square with a #c-;in4 hole bored in the center4 ,this covering is placed over the plant1 as shown in the sketch1 to keep down weeds1 retain moisture1 and to make a base for the ripening berries4 ,a shower cannot spatter dirt and sand on the growing fruit4 ,the rays of the sun beating on the surface of the board will aid in the ripening4 ,illustration3 ,growing ,strawberries on the ,surface of a ,board ,where ,they will ,ripen ,fast and ,keep ,clean ,if a log can be obtained1 the boards can be made better and more quickly4 ,disks about #a in4 thick are sawed from the log and holes in their centers either cut with a chisel or bored1 as desired4 ,the grain of the wood will be vertical and no warping will take place--,contributed by ,johnny ,banholster1 ,gresham1 ,oregon ,a ,magic ,change ,card ,procure two cards1 the #e of diamonds and the #e of spades1 for example4 ,bend each exactly in the center1 with the face of the cards in1 and then paste any card on the back1 with its face against the two ends of the bent cards4 ,the two opposite ends will then have their backs together1 and these are also pasted4 ,the illustration clearly shows this arrangement4 ,illustration3 ,a ,card ,having ,two ,faces1 ,either of ,which can be ,shown to the ,audience ,instantly ,to perform the trick pick up this card1 which is placed in the pack beforehand1 and show to the audience both the front and back of the card1 being sure to keep the center part flat against one end or the other1 then pass the hand over the card1 and in doing so catch the center part and turn it over4 ,the card can be changed back again in the same manner4--,contributed by ,r4 ,bennett1 ,pittsburgh1 ,pa4 ,cleaning ,pearl ,articles ,a good way to clean pearl articles or ornaments is to moisten them with alcohol and then dry in magnesia powder or ,french chalk4 ,these last two articles may be purchased at any drug store and the process of cleaning is absolutely harmless4 ,it also polishes the pearl and will not bleach delicate colors4 ,bed for a ,camp ,a quickly made bed for a camp is shown in the illustration4 ,the corner posts consist of four forked stakes driven in the earth so that the crotches are on a level and about #a ft4 from the ground4 ,poles are laid in the crotches1 lengthwise of the bed1 and canvas covering double-lapped over them4 ,if desired1 the canvas can be stitched along the inside of the poles4--,contributed by ,thomas ,simpson1 ,pawtucket1 ,r4 ,i4 ,illustration3 ,canvas ,bed ,made on ,two ,poles ,laid in the ,crotches of ,forked ,stakes ,sail for a ,boy's ,wagon ,every boy1 who loves a boat and has only a wagon1 can make a combination affair in which he can sail even though there is no water for miles around4 ,one boy accomplished this as shown in the illustration1 and the only assistance he had was in making the sails4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sail ,wagon will ,travel at a ,good ,speed in a ,stiff ,breeze ,the box of the wagon is removed and the boat deck bolted in its place4 ,the deck is #ad in4 wide and #e ft4 long4 ,the mast consists of an old rake handle1 #f ft4 long2 the boom and gaff are broomsticks1 and the tiller is connected with wire to the front axle1 which gives perfect control of the steering4 ,the sails are made of drilling4 ,on a brick pavement the sail wagon can draw two other wagons with two boys in each1 making in all five boys4 ,of course a good wind must be blowing4 ,with two boys it has made a mile in five minutes on pavement4--,contributed by ,arthur ,carruthers1 ,oberlin1 ,ohio4 ,extracting a ,broken ,screw ,a screw will often break off in a piece of work in such a manner that it is quite impossible to remove it by using a pair of pliers or a wrench4 ,in this case the following method is very efficient and expedient4 ,drill a small hole in the screw as near the center as possible4 ,roughen the edges on the tang of a file with a cold chisel1 and drive the tang into the hole with a mallet4 ,the roughened edges of the tang exert enough friction on the metal to remove the screw by turning the file in the proper direction4 ,keeping ,out ,dampness ,a good way to keep a bed from becoming damp1 if left for any length of time1 is to place a blanket on the top after it is made up4 ,take the blanket off before using and the bed covers will be quite dry1 as the blanket absorbs the moisture4--,contributed by ,g4 ,nordyke1 ,lexington1 ,ore4 ,a ,double-,claw ,hammer for ,pulling ,nails ,straight ,a nail pulled with an ordinary claw hammer will be bent in the operation1 and for this reason the double claw is used to draw the nail straight out of the wood4 ,an ordinary claw hammer can be easily converted into a double-claw by filing out one of the claws as shown4 ,the notch is filed only large enough to slip under the head of an average-size nail4 ,after drawing the nail a short distance in the usual manner the small notch is set under the head of the nail which is then pulled out straight4--,contributed by ,j4 ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,the ,small ,notch on the ,end of the ,claw ,makes ,it ,easy to ,pull a ,nail ,straight ,illustration ,a ,cyclemobile ,by ,frank ,pfefferle ,the cyclemobile is of the three-wheeled type and can be easily constructed in the home workshop with ordinary tools4 ,the main frame is built up of two sidepieces1 ,,aa1 ,fig4 #a1 each #b in4 thick1 #d in4 wide1 and #g ft4 long1 joined together at the front end with a crosspiece1 ,b1 of the same material1 #ag in4 long4 ,the sides are placed slightly tapering so that the rear ends are #aa in4 apart at the point where they are joined together with the blocks and rear-wheel attachments4 ,a crosspiece1 ,c1 #ac in4 long1 is fastened in the center of the frame4 ,illustration3 ,three-,wheeled ,cyclemobile ,propelled ,like a ,bicycle and ,steered as an ,automobile ,the place for the seat is cut out of each sidepiece1 as shown by the notches at ,d1 which are #b ft4 from the rear ends4 ,two strips of wood1 ,e1 #a_/b in4 thick1 #d in4 wide1 and #bb in4 long1 are fastened with nails to the rear ends of the sides1 as shown4 ,the rear wheel is a bicycle wheel1 which can be taken from an old bicycle1 or a wheel may be purchased cheaply at a bicycle store4 ,it is held in place with two pieces of strap iron1 ,f1 shaped similar to the rear forks on a bicycle1 and each piece is bolted to a block of wood #c in4 thick1 #d in4 wide1 and #f in4 long1 which is fastened to the sidepiece with the same bolts that hold the strap iron in place4 ,the blocks are located #bj in4 from the rear ends of the sidepieces4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts for ,constructing an ,automobile-,type ,foot-,power ,car 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the pedal arrangement1 ,fig4 #b1 consists of an ordinary bicycle hanger1 with cranks and sprocket wheel set into the end of a piece of wood1 #b in4 thick1 #d in4 wide and #cc in4 long1 at a point #d in4 from one end4 ,the pieces ,,gg are nailed on across the frame at the front end of the car1 to hold the hanger piece in the center between the sidepieces1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,a small pulley1 ,h1 is made to run loosely on a shaft fastened between the sidepieces4 ,this is used as an idler to keep the upper part of the chain below the seat4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the front axle is #cj in4 long1 pivoted as shown at ,j1 ,fig4 #c1 #f in4 from the front end of the main frame4 ,two small brass plates1 ,,kk1 are fastened with screws on the under edge of each sidepiece1 as shown1 to provide a bearing for the axle4 ,the front wheels are taken from a discarded baby carriage and are about #ba in4 in diameter4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,a good imitation radiator can be made by cutting a board to the dimensions given in ,fig4 #d4 ,a large-mesh screen is fastened to the rear side to imitate the water cells4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,the steering gear ,l1 ,fig4 #e1 is made of a broom handle1 one end of which passes through the support ,m and fits into a hole bored into the lower part of the imitation radiator board4 ,a steering wheel1 ,n1 is attached to the upper end of the broom handle4 ,the center part of a rope1 ,o1 is given a few turns around the broom handle1 and the ends are passed through the openings in screweyes1 ,,pp1 turned into the inner surfaces of the sidepieces ,,aa1 and tied to the front axle4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #f7 ,the seat is constructed of #a_/b-;in4 lumber and is built in the notches cut in the main frame shown at ,d1 ,fig4 #a4 ,the body frame is made of lath1 or other thin strips of wood1 that can be bent in the shape of the radiator and nailed to the sidepieces1 as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,these are braced at the top with a longitudinal strip4 ,the frame is then covered with canvas and painted as desired4 ,how to ,make a ,humidor ,the humidor is an ideal gift for any person who smokes4 ,the wood for making one1 as shown in the illustration1 may be of ,spanish cedar1 mahogany1 or quartered oak1 as the builder desires4 ,the box and cover are made and glued together in one piece1 then the cover is sawed off to insure a perfect fit4 ,a strong corner connection is shown at ,a4 ,a piece of a strawberry box or peach basket makes a good key to glue in the grooves4 ,care must be taken to run the grain with the width and not with the length of the strip4 ,illustration3 ,the ,amount of ,moisture within the ,box is ,shown on the ,dial in the ,cover ,finish the outside of the box with two coats of the desired stain1 then cover with a coat of wax1 shellac1 or varnish4 ,the inside should be finished with one coat of white lead and two or three coats of white enamel1 to make the wood impervious to moisture4 ,in the center of the cover top is set a piece of glass and to the under side of the latter a hygrometer is attached with a little glue4 ,this instrument tells the relative humidity1 or the amount of moisture1 in the air within4 ,the moisture may be regulated by adding a few drops of water1 as needed1 to a piece of ordinary blotting paper placed on the inside4--,contributed by ,james ,t4 ,gaffney1 ,chicago4 ,telephoto ,attachment for a ,hand ,camera ,it is not necessary to purchase an expensive telephoto lens for a box or hand camera if the owner has a pair of opera or field glasses4 ,first focus the glasses on the distant object to be photographed and then set the camera4 ,one of the glasses is placed directly in line with and in front of the camera lens1 as shown in the sketch4 ,if the camera is of the focusing type1 it is focused in the ordinary manner4 ,box and other cameras are set as usual4 ,illustration3 ,a ,field ,glass ,placed in ,front of a ,camera ,lens will ,increase the ,diameter of the ,photograph ,the glasses should be well supported in front of the camera lens1 as any slight move will be quite perceptible on the ground glass4 ,as the light rays are largely reduced in passing through the field glass and camera lens1 it is necessary to give a much longer exposure4 ,this can only be determined by trying it out1 as lenses have different speeds4--,contributed by ,charles ,leonard1 ,st4 ,john1 ,can4 ,a ,turn ,feeding ,table for ,birds ,never in the past has the public at large taken so great an interest in protecting and furthering the well-being of birds as at present4 ,in addition to protective legislation1 clubs everywhere are organizing to promote bird life and many citizens1 old and young1 are making bird houses and feeding tables4 ,one of the best forms of feeding tables which ,i have ever seen is shown in the sketch4 ,it possesses a great advantage over the average table in being turned automatically1 whirling about by the action of the winds and always keeping its open front on the lee or protected quarter4 ,this is a good feature especially in the fall and winter1 the very time when birds need and seek protection from storms and cold winds4 ,to make such a feed table almost any kind of boards can be utilized4 ,the shelter may be of any shape or size to suit the tastes of the maker1 but one constructed to the dimensions given will be found to work well in most localities4 ,along the center of the roof is attached a wing1 ,a1 which is an active aid in causing the wind to keep the open front turned away4 ,the shelter turns upon a wood or iron rod which passes from the end of a post up through the central bottom and central roof of the structure4 ,if wood is used for the rod1 it should be about #a in4 in diameter and of hard stock4 ,an iron rod may be somewhat smaller4 ,keep the holes well greased4 ,illustration3 ,a ,feeding ,table for ,birds ,that will ,keep ,its ,open ,side ,protected from the ,storms ,the house should be given a couple of coats of white1 red1 or green paint1 and the post painted to correspond4 ,feed and water are placed in shallow dishes on the floor and they should be blocked to keep them from sliding out4--,contributed by ,c4 ,c4 ,fraser1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,a ,sack ,holder ,an old granite kettle or tin pail with the bottom cut out and three #h-penny wire nails bent and fastened on with rivets1 as shown at ,a1 makes as good a sack holder as one could desire4 ,a chain attached to the handle makes it conveniently adjustable to the proper height for the sack4 ,illustration3 ,a ,granite ,kettle ,forms a ,holder ,that ,makes ,it ,easy to ,fill the ,sack ,time ,indicator for ,medicine ,bottles ,illustration ,the time to give a patient the next dose of medicine can be set on the indicator1 as shown in the sketch1 and retained without fear of its being changed until the dose is again given4 ,the indicator consists of a strip of paper which will reach around the bottle neck and is divided into #bd equal parts representing hours and half hours4 ,the paper is then pasted to the bottle neck4 ,an ordinary pin is then pushed into the cork as shown4 ,after a dose of medicine is given to the patient the cork is replaced so that the head of the pin will indicate the time for the next dose4 ,by this method1 an accidental shifting of the indicator is almost impossible4 ,a ,washtub ,stand ,usually two old chairs or an old box makes the stand for the washtub1 and these are not always the right height4 ,a stand1 like that shown in the illustration and having the proper height for the one who does the washing1 can be easily made of #b by #d-;in4 material and a few boards4 ,as it is shown1 the wringer is fastened on top of the back and may remain there all the time1 it being out of the way1 always in its proper place1 and held very firmly4 ,illustration3 ,stand ,provides a ,place for the ,washing ,utensils and ,it is ,always the ,proper ,height ,a light bracket1 on which to set the clothes basket1 can be made and fastened on the back of the stand1 connected with two hinges and supported by a leg hinged to the bracket1 the lower end of the leg resting on the floor back of the stand4 ,a small drawer may also be provided in the front1 in which to put away the soap and brushes1 and the wash boiler can be set underneath4 ,when one is through washing1 the bracket at the back is let down1 the washstand set up against the wall out of the way1 and everything is then in its place1 ready for the next wash day4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,homewood1 ,waterloo1 ,ia4 ,pipe ,used as a ,leather ,punch ,illustration ,the sketch shows how a very cheap and serviceable leather punch can be made of an old pipe nipple4 ,pieces of pipe of almost any size can be found around a shop1 and it is1 therefore1 usually possible to quickly make a punch of the required size4 ,the cutter end can be ground very thin to prevent an over-cut1 while a small slot cut a little above it will allow the removal of the leather slugs4 ,for its purpose1 this homemade tool is all that can be desired in cheapness and utility4 ,to ,prevent ,oilcloth from ,cracking ,a good method to prevent oilcloth from cracking1 when it is used on shop tables or counters1 is to first cut a paper cover for the table on which to place the oilcloth and prepare it as follows3 ,the paper should be well oiled with common machine oil and placed smoothly on the table to be covered4 ,the oilcloth is then smoothed out on top of the paper and stretched tightly4 ,the oiled paper tends to keep the under side of the cloth moist1 which prevents cracking4 ,the cloth wears much longer because the paper acts as a pad4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,flymobile ,by ,edward ,sieja ,the boy owning a pushmobile1 or even a power-driven auto car1 is often very much disappointed because motion soon stops when the power is not applied4 ,the car illustrated is of a little different type1 being equipped with a flywheel that will propel the car and carry the rider a considerable distance after stopping the pedaling4 ,the flywheel also aids the operator1 as it will steady the motion and help him over a rough place or a bump in the road4 ,illustration3 ,the ,flymobile is a ,miniature ,automobile in ,appearance and is ,propelled by ,foot ,power ,the main frame of the flymobile is made up of a few pieces of #b by #d-;in4 timbers4 ,the pieces ,a are #f ft4 #d in4 long1 and the end crosspieces ,b1 #bd in4 long4 ,these are jointed1 glued and screwed together1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the frame that supports the driving parts consists of a piece1 ,c1 #f ft4 #b in4 long1 and a piece ,d1 #b ft4 #aa in4 long4 ,these are fitted in the main frame and securely fastened to the end crosspieces ,b4 ,two other crosspieces1 ,e and ,f1 are used to strengthen the driving-parts frame4 ,illustration3 ,plan and ,elevation of the ,flymobile1 ,showing the ,location of the ,working ,parts1 to ,which1 with a ,few ,changes1 a ,motorcycle ,engine can be ,attached to ,make ,it a ,cyclecar2 also ,details of the ,brakes1 ,belt ,tightener and ,coaster-,brake ,hub 7,fig4 #a7 ,the entire hanger ,g1 with its bearings1 cranks and pedals1 can be procured from a discarded bicycle and fastened to the piece ,c2 the barrel holding the bearings being snugly fitted into a hole bored in the piece with an expansive bit4 ,the location will depend on the builder and should be marked as follows3 ,place the hanger on top of the piece ,c1 then put a box or board on the frame where the seat is to be and set the hanger where it will be in a comfortable position for pedaling4 ,mark this location and bore the hole4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the transmission ,h consists of a bicycle coaster-brake hub1 shown in detail in ,fig4 #b4 ,a split pulley1 ,j1 #f in4 in diameter1 is bored out to fit over the center of the hub between the spoke flanges4 ,the halves of the pulley are then clamped on the hub with two bolts1 run through the holes in opposite directions4 ,their heads and nuts are let into countersunk holes so that no part will extend above the surface of the pulley4 ,the supports for the hub axle consist of two pieces of bar iron1 #d in4 long1 drilled to admit the axle ends1 and screws for fastening them to the frame pieces ,c and ,d4 ,this construction is clearly shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the arrangement of the coaster-brake hub produces the same effect as a coaster brake on a bicycle4 ,the one propelling the flymobile may stop the foot-power work without interfering with the travel of the machine1 and1 besides1 a little back pressure on the pedals will apply the brake in the same manner4 ,the flywheel ,k should be about #ah in4 in diameter with a #b-;in4 rim1 or face4 ,such a wheel can be purchased cheaply from any junk dealer4 ,the flywheel is set on a shaft1 turning between the pieces ,c and ,d and back of the coaster-brake wheel ,h4 ,two pulleys1 ,l1 about #c in4 in diameter1 are fastened to turn with the flywheel on the shaft and are fitted with flanges to separate the belts4 ,the ends of the shaft should run in good bearings1 well oiled4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,another pulley1 ,m1 #f in4 in diameter1 is made of wood and fastened to the rear axle4 ,an idler wheel1 shown in ,fig4 #c1 is constructed of a small pulley1 or a large spool1 attached to an ,l-shaped piece of metal1 which in turn is fastened on the end of a shaft controlled by the lever ,n4 ,the function of this idler is to tighten up the belt or release it1 thus changing the speed in the same manner as on a motorcycle4 ,the elevation of the flymobile is given in ,fig4 #d1 which shows the arrangement of the belting4 ,the size of the pulleys on the flywheel shaft causes it to turn rapidly1 and1 for this reason1 the weight of the wheel will run the car a considerable distance when the coaster hub is released4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,the rear axle revolves in bearings1 half of which is recessed in the under edges of the pieces ,a while the other half is fastened to a block1 screwed on over the axle4 ,a simple brake is made as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,two metal pieces1 ,o1 preferably brass1 are shaped to fit over the shaft with extending ends for fastening them to the pieces ,p and ,q1 as shown4 ,these pieces are hinged with strap iron1 ,r1 at one end1 the other end of the piece ,p being fastened to the crosspiece ,f1 ,fig4 #a1 of the main frame4 ,the lower piece ,q is worked by the lever ,s and side bars1 ,t4 ,a small spring1 ,u1 keeps the ends of the pieces apart and allows the free turning of the axle until the brake lever is drawn4 ,the lever ,s is connected by a long bar to the hand lever ,v4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,the steering apparatus ,w1 ,figs4 #a and #d1 is constructed of a piece of gas pipe1 #c ft4 #d in4 long1 with a wheel at one end and a cord1 ,x1 at the other4 ,the center part of the cord is wound several times around the pipe and the ends are passed through screweyes in the main frame pieces ,a and attached to the front axle1 which is pivoted in the center under the block ,y4 ,the lower end of the pipe turns in a hole bored slanting in the block4 ,a turn of the steering wheel causes one end of the cord to wind and the other to unwind1 which turns the axle on the center pivot4 ,the wheels are bicycle wheels1 and the ends of the front axle are turned to receive the cones and nuts1 instead of using the regular hub axles4 ,the ends of the rear axle are turned to closely fit the hubs after the ball cups have been removed4 ,a large washer and nut clamp each wheel to the axle so that it will turn with it4 ,the body can be made up as desired1 from sheet metal1 wood1 or cloth stretched over ribs of wood1 and painted in the manner of an automobile4 ,a tank and tires can be placed on the back to add to the appearance4 ,fenders and a running board can be attached to the main frame4 ,with the addition of some crosspieces in the main frame at the front and a motorcycle engine fastened to them so that the driving sprocket will be in line with the sprocket on the coaster hub1 the builder will have a real cyclecar4 ,the ,die-and-,box ,trick ,the die-and-box trick1 so often performed on the stage1 is a very interesting and mystifying one4 ,the apparatus1 however1 is simple1 consisting of a box1 die1 a piece of tin in the form of three adjacent sides of the die1 and a hat4 ,the die and box are constructed entirely of wood1 #a_/h in4 thick1 and the piece of tin can be cut from any large coffee can4 ,the box is closed by four doors1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 two of which are #b-c_/d in4 square1 and the others1 #c-a_/h in4 by #c-a_/d in4 ,the first two are the front doors and are preferably hinged with cloth to the two uprights ,a and ,b4 ,small pieces of tin are fastened on the doors at ,c and ,d1 to provide a means to open them4 ,the other doors are placed on top and are hinged to the back1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,with the ,false ,die in ,place ,it ,appears as ,if the ,box ,were ,empty ,the die is #c in4 square on all sides1 and is constructed of two pieces1 #c in4 square2 two pieces1 #b-c_/d in4 by #c in41 and two pieces1 #b-c_/d in4 square4 ,these are fastened together with #a_/b-;in4 brads4 ,the tin1 forming the false die1 is cut out as shown in ,fig4 #b1 and is then bent on the dotted lines and soldered together on the joint formed by the two edges ,e and ,f4 ,all parts should be painted a dull black with white spots on the die and false die4 ,illustration3 ,the ,box with ,doors on ,one ,side and the ,top1 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 444and the ,false-,die pattern 7,fig4 #b7 ,the trick is performed as follows3 ,procure a hat from some one in the audience and place in it the die with the tin false die covering three sides of the block1 at the same time telling the audience that the block will be caused to pass from the hat into the box1 the latter being placed some distance away4 ,inform the audience that it would be more difficult for the die to pass from the box into the hat4 ,remove the tin piece from the hat and leave the die1 holding the surfaces of the false die toward the audience4 ,this will give the impression that the die has been removed4 ,set the hat on the table above the level of the eyes of the audience4 ,with the back of the box toward the audience1 open one top door and insert the tin piece in the right-hand compartment so that one side touches the back1 another the side and the other the bottom of the box4 ,close the door and open the two doors of the opposite compartment which1 when shown1 will appear to be empty4 ,tilt the box to this side and open the doors of the side opposite to the one just opened1 which1 of course1 will be empty4 ,this should be done several times until some one asks that all doors be opened at the same time4 ,after a few more reversals and openings as given1 open all doors and show it empty1 then take the die from the hat4--,contributed by ,harold ,l4 ,groesbeck1 ,salt ,lake ,city1 ,utah4 ,homemade ,pantograph ,the pantograph consists of four pieces of wood1 the dimensions depending somewhat on the size of the work to be drawn4 ,a convenient size for ordinary drawing and enlarging is constructed of four pieces of hardwood1 preferably maple1 #c_/af in4 thick and #e_/h in4 wide1 two of them #bj-c_/d in4 in length and the other two1 #ah-c_/d in4 long4 ,these are planed and sandpapered and the ends cut round4 ,illustration3 ,a ,picture can be ,enlarged or ,reduced by ,setting the ,screweyes in the ,holes ,designated ,all four pieces are laid flat on a level board or bench top with their edges together so that the edges of the two longer pieces make right angles with a line drawn tangent to their ends4 ,one end of one short piece is placed flush with the lower ends of the two long pieces1 and one end of the other short piece flush with the upper ends1 as shown4 ,they should be clamped down solidly to keep them from moving while laying off the divisions4 ,light lines are drawn across their faces as designated by the dimensions4 ,on these lines and exactly in the center of the pieces make small marks with a pencil point4 ,through the pieces ,a and ,b holes are drilled to snugly receive the body of a small screweye4 ,the other two pieces are drilled with a smaller drill so that the threads of the screweye will take hold in the wood4 ,the end ,c of the piece ,a has a metal stand made of brass as shown at ,d4 ,this is fastened to the end of the wood with a small bolt4 ,the hole should be a snug fit over the body of the bolt4 ,the lower ends of the brass are drilled to admit thumb tacks for holding it to the drawing board4 ,the joint at ,e is made of a suitable binding post that can be procured at an electrical shop1 the shank below the two joined pieces to be the same length as the height of the metal stand ,d4 ,the end should be filed round and polished so that it will slip over the board or paper easily4 ,the stylus or tracing point ,f is made of another binding post1 in the same manner1 but instead of a rounding end a slightly blunt1 pointed end is filed on it4 ,the end of the piece ,g is strengthened by gluing a small block of the same material on both upper and under side4 ,a hole is then made through them to receive a pencil rather tightly4 ,the holes1 as will be seen1 are numbered from #a to #cd4 ,at the crossing of each pair1 ,h and ,j1 the screweyes must be set in the holes numbered alike on both pieces of each pair4 ,this will insure the proper working of the parts4 ,the other numbers designate how much the instrument will enlarge a picture or reduce it4 ,on the pair not numbered in the sketch the numbers run in the opposite direction4 ,the end ,c is fastened to the left side of the drawing board1 the picture to be enlarged is placed under the stylus or tracer point1 and the paper under the pencil point ,g4 ,move the tracing point over the general outline of the picture without making any line before starting1 so as to make sure that the paper and picture are located right4 ,it is then only necessary to take hold of the pencil and move it over the paper while watching the tracer point to keep it following the lines of the picture4 ,to make a reduced picture1 the original is placed under ,g1 the tracer point changed to ,g and the pencil to ,f4 ,trapping ,mosquitoes ,illustration ,mosquitoes that light on the ceiling may be easily destroyed with the instrument shown in the sketch4 ,it consists of a cover1 such as used on jelly glasses1 nailed to the end of an old broom handle4 ,a little kerosene oil is placed in the cover and the device is passed closely beneath the location of the mosquitoes4 ,they will be overcome by the fumes and drop into the fluid as soon as it comes under them4--,contributed by ,j4 ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 ,pen ,rack on an ,ink ,bottle ,illustration ,a piece of wire1 about #a ft4 long1 is bent into the shape shown and slipped over the neck of the ink bottle4 ,the ends forming the loop around the neck should fit tightly4 ,the upper part of the wire is shaped to hold the penholder4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,saul1 ,e4 ,lexington1 ,mass4 ,substitute for a ,broken ,bench-,vise ,nut ,illustration3 ,two ,pieces of ,strap ,iron ,shaped to ,fit the ,square ,thread ,make a ,good ,substitute ,nut ,it is frequently the case that the nut on a bench-vise screw breaks from being subjected to a too violent strain4 ,if one is working in a place where a new nut cannot be obtained1 the broken part may be replaced by the substitute shown in the sketch4 ,any piece of strap iron may be used1 and with a round file and a drill the two pieces can soon be made and attached to the bench with screws or bolts4 ,a slight twist of the shaped ends is necessary to make them fit the angle of the thread4--,contributed by ,oscar ,m4 ,waddell1 ,lamedeer1 ,mont4 ,scissors ,sharpener ,illustration3 ,in ,attempting to ,cut the ,hardened ,steel ,pin the ,edge is ,drawn ,sharp ,procure an ordinary wood clothespin and drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole through its blades1 then insert a piece of hardened #a_/h-;in4 drill rod1 which should be a driving fit4 ,in using this device1 take the scissors and attempt to cut the steel rod4 ,do this three or four times and a good cutting edge will be obtained4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,j4 ,tolson1 ,lyons1 ,iowa4 99 99 99 99 99 ,an imitation-gold color may be made with flake white1 ground in varnish and tinted with a touch of vermilion4 ,when striping or lettering is done with this1 it will have the appearance of real gilding work4 ,floor ,push ,button ,an ordinary electric push button can be used for a floor push button by placing it on a bracket or shelf attached to a joist1 as shown1 and using a nail for the extension push4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 hole is bored through the floor1 also through a small piece of wood fastened beneath the floor1 at the right place to direct the nail so that it will strike directly upon the small black knob of the push button4 ,the nail should be just long enough to rest lightly on the knob4--,contributed by ,reginald ,r4 ,insole1 ,hamilton1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,push ,button on ,joist ,a ,wrist ,brace ,to strengthen a weak wrist1 take a piece of leather1 preferably white oak tanned1 #b in4 wide and #ad in4 long1 and carefully shave it down with a sharp knife1 until it is #a_/af in4 thick4 ,then cut it as shown in ,fig4 #a1 the wide part or body being #g in4 long1 and the narrow part or neck1 #f in4 long and #a in4 wide4 ,cut a semicircular hole1 #a in4 from the extreme end of the body1 #a_/b in4 wide and #a-a_/d in4 long1 to allow the neck to slip through1 then punch three holes in each end and lace with rawhide or shoestring1 or1 better still1 if you happen to have a small buckle1 sew it neatly to the body4 ,it looks better and saves time in adjusting4 ,when complete and on the wrist1 it will appear as in ,fig4 #b4--;,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,harris1 ,berkeley1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,brace ,made of ,leather ,protecting a ,kettle ,handle from ,heat ,illustration ,the wood handle of a kettle or cooking utensil when not in use usually comes in contact with the side of the vessel and it will absorb enough heat each time to finally char and crack the wood4 ,the heat of the handle at times is so intense that it often results in a burned hand4 ,the spiral metal handle provides a way for cooling by exposing a considerable surface to the air1 yet the metal retains the heat so that many times it is too hot to handle4 ,if a wood handle is provided with a coil of wire as shown in the accompanying sketch1 the wood cannot come in contact with the side of the heated vessel and the air encircling the wood prevents it from getting too hot to handle4 ,the spiral can be attached to a metal handle with solder4 ,tin ,can ,used for ,watering ,chickens ,illustration ,an ordinary discarded tomato can makes a good watering vessel for young chickens4 ,care must be taken in opening the can to cut the tin so the cover will hinge4 ,cut the tin about #a-a_/b in4 from the bottom so that it will form a ,u-shaped piece as shown in the sketch and push the hanging portion in the can4 ,fill the can up to the opening with water1 close the cover and set it in the coop4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,augusta1 ,ga4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,hurdle ,the hurdle consists of two standards1 a reach1 and a swing4 ,the swing is first made in the shape of a rectangle of four pieces of wood1 about #g_/h in4 thick and #a-a_/b in4 wide1 of which two are #cf in4 and the others #ah in4 long4 ,these pieces are nailed together in the manner shown4 ,illustration3 ,the ,swing of the ,hurdle will ,turn ,when ,slightly ,touched and ,right ,itself ,again ,each standard is made of three pieces of wood1 #g_/h in4 thick1 #c in4 wide1 and #ah in4 long4 ,nail the pieces firmly together1 as shown1 and connect their bases with another piece of the same material1 #cf in4 long4 ,when this is finished1 connect the swing to the standards with long nails1 ,a1 at the ends slightly off center4 ,before inserting the nails1 make the holes in each standard to receive them large enough to permit the nails to turn freely without allowing the heads to pass through4 ,thus the frame will swing freely at the slightest touch of the jumper's foot1 and right itself immediately4--,contributed by ,c4 ,c4 ,fraser1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,oil ,burner for a ,cook ,stove ,the parts of the burner consist of ordinary gas pipe and fittings4 ,the pipe in which the kerosene oil is converted into gas is #a_/b in4 in diameter and is connected to a supply tank of oil with #a_/d-;in4 pipe4 ,the burner part is also constructed of #a_/d-;in4 pipe having three #a_/af-;in4 holes drilled in each end for the gas to escape where it burns4 ,these burners are located just beneath the large pipe so that the flames will heat it and convert the oil into gas4 ,a needle valve1 ,a1 is used to control the flow of oil4 ,the burner is placed in the fire box of the stove1 and the pipes connected through a hole drilled in the stove door1 at ,b4 ,illustration3 ,a ,very ,cheap ,grade of ,kerosene ,oil can be ,used in ,this ,burner with ,success ,the tank may be rectangular or round and should be of sufficient strength to withstand #e or #aj lb4 of pressure4 ,the top of the tank has a pet cock where a connecting hose from an air pump may be attached4 ,the tank is filled about half full and just a little pressure of air is put on the oil4 ,to start the burner1 run a little oil in a pan or fire shovel and light it so that the flames will convert the oil into gas in the large pipe1 then turn the valve ,a and regulate the flame4--,contributed by ,robert ,hays1 ,siloam ,springs1 ,ark4 ,a ,fish ,stringer ,the illustration shows a very simple and inexpensive device for the angler to string and carry fish4 ,it is made of a pail handle through which is passed a piece of soft wire1 having sufficient length for bends or loops at each end1 and a piece of chain4 ,a chain #ah in4 long is sufficient4 ,one end of the chain is fastened in the loop at one end of the handle1 and the other has a piece of wire attached for pushing through the gills of the fish4 ,the other end of the wire through the handle is arranged in a hook to catch into the links of the chain4--,contributed by ,g4 ,o4 ,reed1 ,stratford1 ,canada4 ,illustration3 ,inexpensive ,stringer ,made of a ,pail ,handle and ,small ,chain ,substitutes for ,drawing ,instruments ,three of the most used draftsman's instruments are the compass1 ruler and square or triangle4 ,when it is necessary to make a rough drawing and no instruments are at hand1 common and easily obtainable things can be used as substitutes4 ,illustration3 ,a ,compass1 ,ruler and ,square ,made of ,ordinary ,things at ,hand ,a sheet of heavy paper folded as shown at ,a will serve as a ruler1 and the same sheet given another fold will make the square ,b4 ,if given another fold diagonally1 a #de-;deg4 triangle is formed4 ,a substitute compass is readily made of a short pencil and a pocket knife1 as shown at ,c4--,contributed by ,jas4 ,j4 ,joyce1 ,olongopo1 ,philippine ,islands4 ,how to ,make an ,aspirator ,a simple aspirator that may be used for a number of different purposes1 such as accelerating the process of filtering1 emptying water from tubs1 producing a partial vacuum in vessels in which coils are being boiled in paraffin1 etc41 may be constructed as follows3 ,obtain two pieces of brass tubing of the following dimensions3 one #g in4 long and #c_/d in4 outside diameter1 and the other1 #c in4 long and #a_/d in4 outside diameter4 ,drill a hole in one side of the large tube1 about #c in4 from one end1 of such a diameter that the small brass tube will fit it very tightly4 ,take an ordinary hacksaw and cut a slot in the side of the large piece1 as shown at ,a4 ,this slot is sawed diagonally across the tube and extends from one side to the center4 ,obtain a piece of sheet brass that will fit into this slot tightly1 and then solder it and the small tube into the large tube4 ,the slot and hole for the small tube should be so located with respect to each other that the small tube will empty into the larger one directly against the piece of sheet brass soldered in the slot4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,aspirator and ,its ,connections to a ,faucet1 for ,increasing the ,speed of ,filtration ,the upper end of the large tube should be threaded inside to fit over the threads on the faucet1 or an attachment soldered to it similar to those on the end of an ordinary garden hose4 ,a rubber hose should be attached to the small tube and connected1 as shown1 to a piece of glass tubing that is sealed in the cork in the top of the large bottle4 ,the funnel holding the filter paper is also sealed into the cork4 ,melted paraffin may be used in sealing the glass tube1 funnel and cork in place1 the object being to make them airtight4 ,the filter paper should be folded so that it sticks tightly against the sides of the funnel when the liquid is poured in1 thus preventing any air from entering the bottle between the paper and the funnel4 ,turn on the faucet1 and it will be found that the time required to filter any liquid will be greatly reduced4 ,be careful1 however1 not to turn on too much water1 as the suction may then be too strong and the filter paper become punctured4 ,a ,key-,holder ,hook ,illustration ,a good hook for hanging keys1 toothbrushes and other small articles can be made from ordinary wire staples1 as shown at ,a4 ,one leg of the staple is cut away as shown at ,b and the other leg driven into the board as shown at ,c4 ,these will answer the purpose as well as screwhooks4--,contributed by ,w4 ,c4 ,heidt1 ,chicago4 ,a ,hand ,hoe ,a hand hoe1 especially adapted for weeding or cultivating small truck1 particularly onions1 can be made of a piece of hard wood1 #g_/h by #a-c_/d in4 by #d ft4 long1 and a piece of old bucksaw blade4 ,a blade1 #ah in4 long and #b in4 wide1 bent into a loop is attached with bolts to the handle4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,h4 ,miller1 ,iowa ,city1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,bucksaw ,blade ,attached to a ,hardwood ,handle ,seed ,receptacle for ,bird-,cages ,a handy seed and water container for a bird-cage can be made of a common spice tin4 ,the receptacle can be filled without removal by simply taking off the cover4 ,thus the seed will not be scattered4 ,illustration3 ,spice ,tin ,attached to the ,wires of a ,bird-,cage for a ,water or ,seed ,receptacle ,the tin is attached by cutting a hole in the back as shown1 and bending the side edges to fit over the wires to hold it in place4 ,the bottom strip is a support which rests on the floor of the cage and prevents the tin from slipping down on the wires4 ,kitchen-,utensil ,scraper ,a flexible utensil scraper is one of the most useful articles ,i have in my kitchen4 ,it covers such a large surface in scraping pans1 kettles1 etc41 that this most disagreeable part of the kitchen work is quickly and easily accomplished4 ,illustration3 ,the ,blade is ,flexible so ,it can ,readily ,shape ,itself to the ,curves of a ,kettle ,the flexible blade is attached to the tin handles with small rivets4 ,the blade should be thin and narrow enough to allow it to bend4 ,when the handles are pressed together1 the blade curves to the shape of the utensil's surface4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,della ,schempp1 ,brodhead1 ,wis4 ,anchor ,posts for a ,lawn ,swing ,a very substantial and convenient base for a lawn swing can be made by using four anchor posts of cement1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the posts are made with a recess1 ,a1 to receive the legs of the swing1 and of any suitable size4 ,they may be placed with the upper face on a level with the lawn1 or higher if desired4 ,illustration3 ,ar4 ,anchor ,post of ,cement and a ,mold ,box for ,shaping ,four ,posts at a ,time 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a rough mold box1 ,fig4 #b1 lined with paper1 will do for making the posts4 ,the box does not require any top or bottom2 it is simply placed on a board and lifted away when the blocks are thoroughly dried4 ,if the blocks are leveled when placed in the earth1 the swing may be taken down and erected again without the usual leveling and bracing4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,automatic ,filter ,illustration ,this funnel-filling filter automatically prevents the solution from running over if the filtering is slow or the filter substance becomes clogged4 ,the upper inverted bottle holds the solution to be filtered1 the cork being fitted with a glass tube as shown1 and when in use the cork is forced into the neck of the bottle so that no air can enter between it and the glass4 ,the support for holding the bottles has two brackets1 one to fit the neck of the upper bottle and the other used as a shelf for the receiving bottle4 ,in operation1 the solution runs from the upper bottle into the funnel1 holding the filter paper1 but it cannot fill the funnel completely1 because the end of the glass tube is lower than the edge of the funnel1 and as soon as the liquid in the funnel covers the end of the tube1 all inflow of air into the upper bottle is stopped1 and1 thereby1 further flow of the solution into the funnel prevented1 until enough has filtered through to uncover the end of the tube and thus permit air to again enter the upper bottle4--,contributed by ,g4 ,simons1 ,chicago4 ,grinding ,scissors ,whether a pair of scissors be ground or filed1 the marks or scratches left from the contact with the abrasive should all extend across the bevel in the direction of the line ,,ed1 ,fig4 #a1 and never in the direction of the line ,,gf4 ,if the cutting edge be examined under a magnifying glass1 the tool marks or scratches left by the sharpening process will be very plainly seen1 and where these scratches intersect with the face ,,hi1 ,fig4 #b1 of the blade1 they will appear as teeth along the cutting edge ,,ik4 ,illustration3 ,the ,direction of the ,grinding ,tool should be ,slightly ,sloping ,toward the ,handles ,as a pair of scissors close1 the natural tendency is to thrust the material to be cut out of the angle ,,abc1 ,fig4 #a1 but if these small teeth formed on the cutting edge point in the direction of the line ,,ed1 this slipping action is prevented or retarded because the fibrous material adheres to the fine teeth on the cutting edge of the blades4 ,wet paper1 silks1 mohair cloths1 etc41 can be sheared with perfect ease and dispatch1 when scissors are sharpened in this manner4 ,the same principle holds good for metal snips4 ,the angle ,,hij1 ,fig4 #b1 varies according to the material to be cut1 and the type of shear4 ,a greater angle is required on metal shears than on shears for domestic uses4--,contributed by ,a4 ,clifton1 ,chicago4 ,to ,repair a ,leak in a ,canoe ,after striking some rocks with our canoe1 it sprung three very bad leaks4 ,these were effectively patched with pieces of cheesecloth1 well soaked in liquid shellac1 which were pasted on the outside of the leak4 ,after allowing this to set for a few hours1 it will be almost impossible to remove the patch4 ,this is an inexpensive and almost invariably a sure remedy for leaks4 ,when the cloth is dry1 paint it over with the same color as the boat1 and the repair can scarcely be seen4--,contributed by ,william ,b4 ,smith1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,holder for ,loose ,window ,glass ,illustration ,when the putty becomes loose and the glazing points work out on window glass1 temporary repairs may be made by using a small piece of tin or sheet iron bent as shown in the sketch4 ,the clip is inserted under the edge of the glass and hooked over the back of the sash parts4 ,this will hold the glass firmly in place and also prevent rattling4 ,a ,homemade ,bench ,vise ,a form of a bench vise that can be easily made and attached to a workbench is shown in the illustration4 ,this vise requires no screw1 and the parts can be made from scrap material4 ,illustration3 ,the ,vise ,jaw as ,it is ,attached to the ,bench and the ,substitute ,screw ,arrangement ,the substitute ,a for the screw is a rectangular piece of wood and is fastened with a tenon in a mortise cut in the vise jaw ,b4 ,the clamping arrangement consists of a strap1 ,c1 attached to the piece ,a1 then run over a pulley1 ,d1 and fastened to a foot pedal1 ,e4 ,the foot pedal is fulcrumed on a crosspiece of the bench and has a ratchet so as to hold it when the vise is set4 ,the lower end of the vise is fitted with the usual form of device for parallel adjustment4 ,a coil spring is located in the center for use in quickly opening the vise when the foot pedal is released4--,contributed by ,a4 ,c4 ,westby1 ,porter1 ,minn4 ,a ,cover ,strainer ,quite frequently the cook or housewife wishes to pour the hot water or liquid from boiling vegetables or other foods without removing the solids from the kettle4 ,this is easily accomplished1 if small holes are drilled in the cover as shown in the sketch4 ,the saucepan or kettle can be tilted and the liquid drains through the holes4 ,further1 the steam from cooking food can readily escape through the holes1 thus preventing the cover from vibrating1 or the liquids from boiling over4 ,illustration3 ,a ,sufficient ,number of ,holes are ,drilled in the ,edge of the ,cover to ,make a ,strainer ,homemade ,corn ,sheller ,where there is but a small quantity of corn to be shelled a sheller can be made of a few scraps of wood usually found on a farm4 ,a block of wood having a sloping notch cut from one end is mounted on three legs as shown4 ,the notched part as well as the lever is thickly filled with spikes driven in so that their heads protrude about #a_/b in4 ,illustration3 ,the ,projecting ,nail ,heads in the ,block and ,lever1 as ,they ,pass1 ,shell the ,corn ,the ear of corn is placed in the notched part and the lever pressed down4 ,two or three strokes of the lever will remove all the kernels from the cob4 ,a box is provided and conveniently located on one leg to catch the shelled corn4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,ont4 ,an ,ornamental ,metal ,flatiron ,holder ,this antique iron holder or stand can be easily constructed by the amateur bent-iron worker4 ,a strip of iron is bent over at the ends to form the side legs1 and the front leg is formed of another piece1 welded in the center4 ,illustration3 ,ornamental ,stand ,made of ,either ,strap ,iron or ,sheet ,metal to ,hold a ,flatiron ,openings for the crosspieces are then cut1 the legs bent into a scroll shape1 and the crosspieces inserted and fastened by spreading or upsetting the ends4 ,instead of using strap iron1 the stand can be cut from good sheet metal4 ,this would save the trouble of welding on the front leg4 ,how to ,make a ,watch ,demagnetizer ,a watch demagnetizer that will give excellent satisfaction may be made as follows3 ,illustration3 ,dimensioned ,parts for the ,construction of the ,core over ,which the ,insulated ,wire is ,wound ,procure a sheet of #a_/af in4 brass1 #c-a_/d in4 by #g in4 ,bend this piece of brass around a piece of hard wood having a rectangular cross section of #b-a_/b in4 by #a in4 ,the joint between the two ends should be made on one side1 and the edges should lack about #a_/h in4 of touching4 ,next obtain two pieces of #a_/h in4 brass1 #c-c_/d in4 by #c in41 and cut an opening in each of these1 #b-e_/h in4 by #a-a_/h in41 as shown in the sketch4 ,bend one edge of each of these pieces over at right angles to the main portion of the piece4 ,solder these two pieces on the ends of the rectangular tube of brass and cut a slot in each of them to correspond to the one in the rectangular tube4 ,place the rectangular piece of wood back in the tube and you are ready for the winding4 ,use ,no4 #ah gauge single cotton-covered copper wire and fill the winding space4 ,several layers of paper should be placed on the brass tube and between the layers of wire1 to serve as an insulation4 ,holes may be drilled in the projecting portions on the ends and the coil can then be mounted on a wooden base4 ,mount two binding posts on this base and connect the terminals of the winding to them4 ,to use the demagnetizer1 connect it to a #aaj-volt alternating-current circuit with a rheostat in circuit of such a form that the current will not exceed three amperes and that it may be reduced to practically zero in value by increasing the resistance of the rheostat4 ,the magnetic field inside the coil is rapidly changing in direction and will tend to destroy any permanent magnetism that may be possessed by an object placed inside of it4 ,the full current of three amperes should be allowed to pass through the winding for a few minutes after the object to be demagnetized is inserted1 and then gradually reduced1 and the object removed4 ,remodeling a ,talking ,machine ,having a talking machine of an old model with a tapered horn ,i decided to change it into a more modern type1 and this was accomplished as follows3 ,an auxiliary base was constructed of #a_/b in4 wood on which to set the part which revolves the disks4 ,the inside of this base is so constructed as to form a horn or sounding box4 ,the two sides and sloping bottom of the horn-part are made of #a_/d in4 wood4 ,the form of this box is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the dimensions should be determined according to the size of the talking machine4 ,illustration3 ,the ,horn or ,sounding ,box ,is ,constructed in the ,auxiliary ,base444 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 444and the ,part for ,connecting the ,sounding ,tube to the ,box ,consists of ,ordinary ,gas ,pipe ,fastened with a ,clip at the ,back 7,fig4 #b7 ,the connecting parts to the original horn were turned downward1 as shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #b1 with the opening entering a piece of ordinary gas pipe of sufficient length to allow an elbow with a nipple to enter the auxiliary base4 ,the pivot-holding device for connection ,a is shown at ,d4 ,the parts are attached to the box with a clasp1 ,e1 and with three screws in the nipple ,c1 the end view of which is shown at ,f4 ,the talking machine is placed on the auxiliary base as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,this construction produces a talking machine on the order of a cabinet machine without the tapering horn4--,contributed by ,h4 ,w4 ,j4 ,lomglatz1 ,harrisburg1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,needle for ,sewing ,burlap ,a needle for sewing burlap can be easily made of the ordinary opener that comes with sardine cans4 ,all that is necessary to convert this tool into a needle is to grind the blunt end to a sharp point1 as shown in the sketch4--,contributed by ,g4 ,c4 ,beven1 ,sault ,ste4 ,marie1 ,ont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,can ,opener is ,provided with an ,eye and to ,make a ,needle the ,end is ,sharpened ,a ,mysterious ,revolving ,wheel ,the mystery of this wheel is that it seems to revolve automatically without any visible external power4 ,it is at the same time an amusing trick and an instructive experiment4 ,the apparatus required is very simple and can be made at home4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wheel as ,it is ,mounted on a ,needle1 and ,lamp and ,box ,containing ,magnet to ,make ,it ,turn ,a glass bottle is half filled with sand and water1 so that it will stand securely1 and a cork placed in the neck4 ,into this cork a needle should be inserted so that it projects perpendicularly1 which is most easily done by heating one end of the needle to a red heat and then pushing it into the cork as deeply as possible4 ,into a disk of cork of suitable thickness and at four points on its side1 at equal distances apart1 are inserted four pieces of copper wire of the same length1 each bent at the outer end to form a hook--these copper wires thus forming the spokes of the wheel4 ,the rim is made of a small iron wire bent in a circular shape and held in the hooks on the ends of the copper wires4 ,the now completed wheel is balanced on the free point on the needle1 so that it can turn easily4 ,place an alcohol lamp in such a position that when it is lighted the tip of the flame will just reach the rim of the wheel4 7,any other flame that will not soot the rim may be used47 ,in the box ,a1 placed with its bottom level with the wheel1 put a horseshoe magnet so that the flame is opposite one of its poles4 ,after the lamp has been lighted for a few seconds1 the wheel will begin to revolve1 seemingly without cause4 ,why does it do so8 ,because the magnet magnetizes or attracts the part of the ring nearest it while cold1 but not when it is glowing4 ,instead1 it will attract the cooler part of the ring nearest behind the flame and so on1 the wheel thus spinning round1 faster in the same proportion as the magnet is stronger and the iron rim smaller4 ,if this experiment is shown before spectators as a trick1 the performer may say to the audience that he alone can make the wheel spin around without touching it4 ,should some one accept his challenge1 he may1 in a careless way1 move the box containing the magnet away or turn it around so that it will not influence the iron ring and then1 of course1 the wheel will remain immovable4 ,how to ,make a ,rabbet ,plane ,a rabbet plane is very little used by mechanics1 but when it is wanted for a piece of work1 it is wanted badly4 ,while doing an unusual piece of work ,i needed a rabbet plane1 and having none1 ,i made a plane as shown in the sketch in less time than it would have taken to go out and borrow one4 ,illustration3 ,a ,plane ,made of a ,piece of #b by #d-;,in4 ,pine1 a ,chisel and a ,large ,wood ,screw ,the body of the plane was made of a piece of #b by #d-;in4 pine1 #a ft4 long4 ,a #a-;in4 chisel was used for the bit4 ,a place was marked on one side of the wood to be cut out for the chisel1 and a #a-;in4 hole bored through1 the narrow way1 so that one edge of the bit cut through the bottom1 forming a slit for the edge of the chisel4 ,after cutting a groove for the chisel blade and turning in a long wood screw as shown1 to hold the chisel in place1 ,i had as good a rabbet plane as could be purchased4--,contributed by ,w4 ,h4 ,young1 ,thompson1 ,ga4 ,eye ,shield for a ,microscope ,the difficulty and discomfort amateurs experience in learning to use a microscope with both eyes open1 or in trying to keep one eye shut1 can be easily overcome by attaching a piece of cardboard1 similar in shape to the one shown in the sketch1 to the barrel of the microscope4 ,the hole ,a should be of sufficient diameter to allow the cardboard to slide freely up and down on the barrel to the proper adjustment4 ,this simple arrangement will relieve a great deal of the eye strain and will be of assistance to the most experienced users of microscopes4--,contributed by ,g4 ,b4 ,fenton1 ,charleston1 ,w4 ,virginia4 ,illustration3 ,shield to ,cover the ,eye ,that is ,not ,used ,when ,looking into a ,microscope ,transferring ,magazine ,pictures ,select pictures from newly printed papers and magazines4 ,rub wax from a paraffin candle over a sheet of clean white paper1 covering a space as large as the picture to be copied4 ,place the paper1 waxed side down1 on the picture and while holding it firmly with the fingers of one hand1 rub the back thoroughly with some hard substance until all parts of the picture have been gone over4 ,remove the paper and a perfect copy of the picture will be found upon the waxed side4--,contributed by ,kenneth ,g4 ,merlin1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,homemade ,egg ,separator ,secure some small wire and a very large can4 ,cut the wire into several pieces and bend them as shown at ,a1 cut the can and bend the side down as shown and punch holes to receive the upper ends of the wires4 ,make the holes so that the wires will be about #e_/af in4 apart4 ,illustration3 ,the ,contents of the ,egg is ,placed on the ,wires ,which will ,separate the ,yolk from the ,white ,a ,glue-,spreader ,holder ,illustration ,the spreader that is supplied with bottles of liquid glue should not be placed on any surface1 as it will soon stick to it4 ,a holder that will keep the spreader in a safe place can be made of a piece of wire which is twisted about the neck of the bottle1 as shown in the sketch1 and the ends bent up to receive the spreader4 ,stop on a ,chair ,rocker for a ,baby ,for a baby1 too small to rock without tipping the chair over1 a small willow or other suitable rocking chair may be made safe in the following manner3 ,illustration3 ,the ,strip on the ,rocker ,prevents the ,child ,tipping the ,chair ,too ,far ,either ,way ,a strip1 ,a1 is fastened on the outside of the rocker with small screws so that it may be removed without injuring the chair4 ,a rubber-covered tack driven in on the under side at each end of the strip modifies the shock and the baby can rock to its heart's content without danger of turning over4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,g4 ,w4 ,coplin1 ,bay ,city1 ,mich4 ,homemade ,countersink for ,wood ,a round or flat-head bolt can be made into a good rosebit or reamer for countersinking holes for screw heads4 ,in the illustration1 ,fig4 #a shows a reamer made of a round-head bolt1 and ,fig4 #b1 one made of a square-head bolt4 ,the round-head makes the best reamer as more cutters can be filed in the surface and less work is required to file it into shape4 ,illustration3 ,round and ,square ,heads of ,bolts ,shaped and ,notched to ,make ,countersinks 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,to ,maintain a ,constant ,level of ,liquids in ,vessels ,it is frequently desirable in laboratory experiments1 and in practical work as well1 to maintain a constant level in a tank without allowing it to become full4 ,in many cases an outlet pipe at a certain height in the side of the tank is not desirable1 and in laboratory experiments with beakers or crocks is1 of course1 impossible4 ,illustration ,the diagram shows a simple but effective constant-level device4 ,the outer end of the inverted ,u-tube is curved upward so that it never empties4 ,if desired1 the upward curve may be omitted and the straight end immersed in a small vessel of water4 ,all that is necessary now for the successful working of the device is that the inner or tank end1 ,a1 of the tube be lower than the outer end--in other words1 below the level of the end ,b--and the inner end below the level of the fluid4 ,of course1 the ,u-tube must be first filled with liquid and will then act as an intermittent1 never-breaking siphon4 ,should the tank fill above the end ,b1 the siphon drains the fluid down to that level and no lower1 even if the inner leg of the tube reach the bottom4 ,to maintain this level against loss by evaporation some slight inflow is necessary4 ,it will be noted that if the inner end of the siphon were above the outer end1 the siphon would break as soon as the liquid in the tank fell to the inner mouth4--,contributed by ,harry ,n4 ,holmes1 ,richmond1 ,ind4 ,homemade ,electric ,bed ,warmer ,the heat developed by a carbon-filament lamp is sufficiently high to allow its use as a heating element of1 for instance1 a bed warmer4 ,there are a number of other small heaters which can be easily made and for which lamps form very suitable heating elements1 but the bed warmer is probably the best example4 ,all that is required is a tin covering which can be made of an old can about #c-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,the top is cut out and the edge filed smooth4 ,the lamp-socket end of the flexible cord is inserted in the can and the shade holder gripped over the opening4 ,a small lamp of about five candlepower will do the heating4 ,a flannel bag1 large enough to slip over the tin can and provided with a neck that can be drawn together by means of a cord1 gives the heater a more finished appearance1 as well as making it more pleasant to the touch4 ,illustration ,a ,flash-,light ,telegraph on a ,kite ,line ,illustration3 ,the ,flash of the ,light on the ,string may be ,read as ,far as ,it can be ,seen ,an ordinary pocket flash lamp is prepared in the following manner3 ,a brass spring1 as shown in the sketch1 is bound tightly to the flash lamp with a cord1 and two wires1 one at each end1 are twisted around the lamp's body1 forming two loops at the top4 ,the kite string is run through the loops and over the spring4 ,the lamp is then placed near the kite4 ,the ordinary pull on the kite string does not close the spring1 but a sharp jerk will pull the string in contact with the push button and its slight pressure causes an instant flash of the light4 ,by this method words may be spelled out in the telegraph code4--,contributed by ,joe ,v4 ,romig1 ,allentown1 ,pa4 ,hangers for ,barn ,tools ,means should be provided to have a place for all the tools used in and about a barn4 ,the forks and shovels are usually stood up in a corner1 but they can be more conveniently taken care of by making a hanger for them4 ,the illustration shows how a hanger can be easily made and screwed to the wall of a barn4 ,the hanger is cut from a piece of board and has a hole bored into it the size of the handle on the fork or shovel1 then a notch is sawn into the hole to pass the handle through4 ,the board may contain one or as many notches as there are forks and shovels to be hung on it4 ,the implements are hung with the fork or shovel end upward4--,contributed by ,r4 ,snyder1 ,glidden1 ,ia4 ,illustration3 ,a ,notched ,board ,provides a ,way to ,hang ,all the ,tools ,used about a ,barn ,guide ,ropes on a ,bobsled ,the sketch shows the front end of a bobsled or double runner made of a plank bolted upon two sleds4 ,the front sled is so pivoted on the bolt ,a that it may be turned to steer the bob1 and to accomplish this result the steersman ordinarily sits with his feet braced against the projecting ends of the crosspiece and passes the steering ropes outside of his feet1 with the ropes crossed as shown4 ,the crossing of the ropes is supposed to add leverage1 but that is quite wrong4 ,illustration3 ,the ,most ,efficient ,way of ,attaching ,ropes to the ,guiding ,runners of a ,bobsled ,the rope1 running from ,b to ,c1 has a lever arm from ,a to ,e4 ,if the ropes were not crossed1 the rope would lie along the dotted line ,,bd1 whose lever arm is the distance ,,af1 which is always greater than ,,ae1 therefore the uncrossed ropes have more leverage4 ,observe what takes place when the sled is steered to the left3 ,the distance ,,ae decreases much more rapidly than ,,af1 and when the crossed ropes have lost all their power1 the uncrossed ropes are still useful4 ,many a spill has been caused by turning the sled to a position from which the crossed ropes were unable to restore it to a central position1 and most of such spills would have been avoided if the ropes had not been crossed4--,contributed by ,r4 ,r4 ,raymond1 ,wilmington1 ,del4 ,brush ,hanger for a ,dark ,room ,illustration ,necessity may be the mother of invention1 but it is also the grandmother of application1 and application is the practical side of invention4 ,both the amateur and the professional photographer have been bothered by spotting and unequal development of negatives and prints in tray development1 due to various causes1 and sometimes by the presence of dirt particles or the unequal or incomplete flowing of the developer over the surface of the sensitive emulsion4 ,most professionals and many amateurs are familiar with the use of the camel's-hair brush to avoid failures of this character1 and many of them use a brush for local development in certain cases where it is necessary or desirable4 ,usually the brush is kept in a small glass cup1 somewhere close at hand1 but it is often in the way when not wanted and misplaced when most needed4 ,the brush can be kept within reach and handy for the operator by arranging a light counterweight and pulley with a string attached to the brush1 so that1 normally1 the brush will hang from the ceiling directly over the developing tray and can be obtained for use when desired4 ,the detail of this brush-string and counterweight combination was deliberately appropriated from the old plan of suspending the piece of chalk over a billiard table1 so that the players could easily reach it1 when needed1 while1 when released1 it would be pulled out of the way by the counterweight4 ,the developing brush thus suspended is always ready1 never misplaced1 nor in the way for other operations4 ,this arrangement is particularly convenient where a bathroom is used as a dark room1 and the shelf space is limited4 ,this same manner of counterweighting chalk on the billiard table may be applied to a stove-lid lifter1 to keep it within easy reach and always cool enough to handle4 ,the simplest and most inexpensive way of making this apparatus is to cut off a small piece of lead pipe for a counterweight1 and1 in the absence of a suitable pulley1 use an ordinary screweye fastened in the ceiling4 ,the latter is really better than a pulley because the string cannot run off the screweye4 ,the arrangement is better understood by referring to the sketch4 ,lighting a ,basement ,light ,there was no switch at the basement door and it was difficult to find the droplight in the dark4 ,instead of going to the expense of placing a switch1 the contrivance illustrated and described was rigged up and proved equal to the requirements4 ,a #g_/h-;in4 piece of wood was cut about #f in4 long by #b in4 wide and a recess made at one end for the socket1 as shown4 ,a #a_/h-;in4 hole was drilled in the center1 about #b in4 from one end1 and another1 large enough to receive the projection from a pull socket1 about #b in4 from the other end1 or the end to be used as the bottom of the block4 ,a clamp made of spring brass1 as shown1 was screwed securely to the board1 to clamp the socket firmly4 ,a wire was passed through the small hole and stretched across the room from the door at a height to bring the light about #f ft4 from the floor4 ,then the socket was clamped to the strip with the chain passed through the hole cut for it4 ,the cord attached to the chain was run to the door casing1 passed through a screweye and weighted with a nut or some light object1 to keep it taut4 ,to light the lamp or put it out only a pull on the string was necessary4 ,illustration3 ,socket ,attachment to ,turn a ,basement ,light ,on or ,off from a ,distance ,the light can be slid along on the wire from one end of the room to the other1 or can be detached from the strip when desired by unhooking the cord from the chain and taking the socket from the clamp4 ,if more desirable1 the block can be fastened permanently to some object instead of being on the wire4--,contributed by ,l4 ,m4 ,eifel1 ,chicago4 ,projecting ,protractor ,readings ,a simple and efficient means of projecting protractor readings to a larger size is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,one point of the compass is placed at the center of the protractor and an elastic band is looped between the points4 ,then the points are spread to the radius desired1 and the protractor is read where the elastic band crosses its scale4 ,a light band should be used1 and looped as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,in this way a circle of any size may be quickly divided1 if a pencil mark is made each time the band comes over the proper figure4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,mont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,extension ,marks can be ,easily ,read on the ,protractor under the ,elastic ,band 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,removing ,grease from ,paint ,when removing grease from paint by using ordinary cleaners1 the paint is liable to come off in the washing4 ,a good and cheaply applied method is to rub the painted surface with a paste of ordinary whiting4 ,this is allowed to dry and when it is rubbed off with a cloth the dirt and grease is taken away with it4 ,the whiting is cheap and can be purchased at any drug store4 ,a ,door ,stop ,illustration ,a very good door stop can be easily made of a piece of metal as shown in the sketch4 ,the metal is bent and fastened with screws to the wall against which the door swings4 ,the extending end fits under the door knob and prevents it from striking the wall4--,contributed by ,c4 ,r4 ,poole1 ,los ,angeles1 ,california4 ,stretching a ,curtain without a ,frame ,a good way to avoid using the ordinary four-pole curtain stretcher is to make use of the following method4 ,take the lace curtain and fold it once lengthwise2 then pin it up on a tightly stretched line with a large number of clothespins1 and slip a clean pole between the two sides to keep it taut4 ,this method not only stretches the curtain satisfactorily1 but saves considerable time otherwise required in pinning the curtain to the four-sided frame4--,contributed by ,h4 ,wynning1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,a ,lace ,curtain ,hung ,double on a ,line with a ,pole ,inserted in the ,fold ,welding ,small ,resistance-,wire ,connections ,in making connections1 especially in electrical heating devices subject to high temperatures1 it is out of the question to use solder1 since the temperature reached in the device would cause the solder to melt and run out4 ,a convenient arrangement for welding the connections of flatirons1 or any other fine wires1 is shown in the illustration4 ,the ends of the wires to be welded are twisted together1 and the weld is completed by forming an arc1 one electrode of which is the twisted connection and the other a piece of carbon4 ,the resistance of the heating unit in the iron is sufficient to limit the amount of the current flow so that a short circuit does not result4--,contributed by ,g4 ,irving ,davis1 ,albany1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,an ,arc is ,formed with a ,piece of ,carbon1 to ,weld the ,twisted ,ends of ,wire ,together ,bench with ,folding ,seats ,to provide a bench with seats1 or shelves1 which cannot easily be taken away unless the table is brought along1 hinged brackets are attached to stationary crosspieces1 which are fastened on the extended end braces of the table4 ,when in use1 the brackets are turned down1 thereby providing a rigid support for anything that may be put on them4 ,if it is desirable to have the brackets out of the way1 as when carrying the bench1 it is only necessary to fold them up4--,contributed by ,j4 ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,bench1 or ,table1 with a ,seat on ,each ,side ,that can be ,folded for ,carrying ,purposes ,rim of ,wire ,wastebasket ,wrapped with ,felt ,in offices where wire wastebaskets are used1 the finish of the desks is often marred by the top rim of the baskets rubbing against them4 ,this can be overcome by wrapping strips of felt around the rim to form a buffer4--,contributed by ,miss ,f4 ,d4 ,schweiger1 ,kansas ,city1 ,mo4 ,illustration ,a ,homemade ,roller ,coaster ,by ,j4 ,h4 ,sanford ,the popular roller coaster that furnishes untold amusement for the multitudes that patronize amusement parks during the summer can be easily duplicated in a smaller way on a vacant lot or back yard for the children of the home2 or the boys of a neighborhood could contribute to a fund and construct quite an elaborate affair1 on the same lines as described1 for the combined use of the owners4 ,the one described was built with a track1 #ij ft4 long1 #e ft4 high at one end and #c ft4 at the other1 the track between being placed on the ground4 ,in coasting from the high end to the low one1 the coaster will run up on the incline1 then drift back to within #bd ft4 of the starting end4 ,the car was built to seat four children or two adults4 ,the cost of all the materials for building this roller coaster did not exceed #aj4 ,illustration3 ,inexpensive ,back-,yard ,roller ,coaster1 ,suitable for the ,enjoyment of the ,young as ,well as the ,older ,persons ,the track is of simple construction and requires but little description4 ,it is necessary to have it straight and nailed firmly to the crossties on the ground and to the trestles where it is elevated4 ,the ties and trestles are placed about #f ft4 apart4 ,the two trestles for the starting platform should be set so that there is a slant to the track of about #f in4 for starting the car without pushing it4 ,the car can be carried back for starting by adults1 but for children a small rope can be used over the platform to draw it back on the track1 or a small windlass may be arranged for the purpose4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,car1 ,wheels and the ,trestle1 ,which is ,attached to a ,tie ,the main frame of the car is #c ft4 long and about #ac in4 wide1 firmly fastened at the corners4 ,the axles for the wheels are machine steel1 #ai in4 long1 turned up on the ends and threaded in the manner of a bicycle axle to fit parts of bicycle hubs1 attached to the main frame as shown at ,a4 ,the wheels are solid1 #d in4 in diameter and #a in4 thick1 and are set on the bicycle cone of the ball cup1 after they are properly adjusted1 and securely fastened between washers with a nut on the end of the axle4 ,guide wheels1 ,b1 are placed on the sides in the manner shown4 ,these wheels are ordinary truck casters1 not the revolving kind1 #b in4 in diameter4 ,about #a_/b-;in4 clearance should be provided between the guide wheels ,b and the guard rail ,c1 on the track4 ,when the car is made in this manner it runs close to the track and there is no place where a child can get a foot or hand injured under or at the sides of the car4 ,the one described has been used by all the children1 large and small1 for a year without accident4 ,door-,bell ,alarm ,a simple door-bell alarm for informing one when the door of a shop or dwelling is opened is shown in the accompanying sketch4 ,it consists of a piece of spring brass1 ,a1 bent into a circle in the center so that it may be clamped on the doorknob bar by means of a small bolt or screw4 ,the two ends of this piece should be separated as shown and a second piece1 ,b1 mounted on the door so that its outwardly projecting end is between the ends of the piece ,a4 ,one terminal of an ordinary vibrating bell circuit is then connected under the head of the clamp screw1 and the other terminal under one of the screws holding the piece ,b in place on the door4 ,it is now obvious that the bell circuit will be completed and the alarm sounded when the knob is turned4 ,make sure that the piece ,a is bent so that the circuit is completed before the latch has moved a sufficient amount to allow the door to open4 ,illustration3 ,wiring ,diagram and ,connections to an ,electric ,bell ,that ,rings ,when a ,door ,knob is ,turned ,the circuit leading to and from the switch may be completed through the hinges of the door1 but it would be better to use small coil springs as shown4 ,there would then be no likelihood of the circuit being open at any time1 which might occur if the hinges were used4 99 99 99 99 99 ,discolored coffee and teapots may be restored to their original brightness by boiling them a few minutes in a solution of borax water4 ,illustration ,a ,playground ,ferris ,wheel ,the whole wheel is carried on two uprights1 each #c by #d in41 by #aj ft4 long4 ,in the upper ends of these pieces1 ,a1 a half circle is cut out to receive the main shaft ,b4 ,the end of the uprights are sunk #c ft4 into the earth and about #d ft4 apart1 then braced as shown4 ,they are further braced by wires attached to rings which are secured with staples near the top4 ,the bearings should each have a cap to keep the shaft in place4 ,these can be made of blocks of wood with a semicircle cut out1 the blocks being nailed over the shaft1 while it is in place1 the nails entering the ends of the uprights4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,uprights1 ,axle and ,spokes1 and the ,end and ,side ,elevations of the ,completed ,wheel1 ,showing ,braces and ,cars ,attached ,the main shaft ,c is made of a #b-a_/b-;in4 square piece of good material1 #d ft4 long4 ,the ends are made round to serve as bearings1 and the square part is fitted with the spokes or car carriers4 ,these consist of #d pieces1 each #a in4 thick1 #d in4 wide and #ac ft4 long4 ,in the center of each piece cut a notch one-half the thickness so that when each pair of pieces is crossed they will fit together with the surfaces smooth1 as shown at ,d4 ,a square hole is cut through the pieces as shown to fit on the square part of the main axle4 ,while it is not shown in the illustration1 it is best to strengthen this joint with another piece of wood1 cut to fit on the axle and securely attached to the spokes4 ,the cars or carriers are made of two sugar barrels cut in half4 ,the hoops are then securely nailed1 both inside and outside2 a block of wood1 ,e1 securely attached to the half barrel on the outside1 and another block on the inside opposite the outside block4 ,holes are bored #b-a_/b ft4 from the ends of the spokes and a bolt run through them and through the blocks on the edges of the half barrels4 ,the extending ends of the spokes are used to propel the wheel4 ,four children can ride in the wheel at one time4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,a ,merry-,go-,round ,pole ,an inexpensive merry-go-round can be made of a single pole set in the ground where there is sufficient vacant space for the turning of the ropes4 ,the pole may be of gas pipe or wood1 long enough to extend about #ab ft4 above the ground4 ,an iron wheel is attached on the upper end so that it will revolve easily on an axle1 which may be an iron pin driven into the post4 ,a few iron washers placed on the pin under the wheel will reduce the friction4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ropes being ,tied to the ,wheel ,rim will ,easily ,turn around the ,pole ,ropes of varying lengths are tied to the rim of the wheel4 ,the rider takes hold of a rope and runs around the pole to start the wheel in motion1 then he swings clear of the ground4 ,streamers of different colors and flowers for special occasions may be attached to make a pretty display4--,contributed by ,j4 ,bert ,mitchell1 ,wichita1 ,kans4 ,a ,theatrical ,night ,scene with the ,appearance of ,fireflies ,use small shining ,christmas-tree balls1 about the size of a hickory nut1 strung on strong black linen threads4 ,the thread is put loosely over a hook at the back of the stage among the evergreens that are used for the background4 ,the ends of the threads are brought1 like a pair of reins1 to the front of the stage1 diagonally1 and there manipulated by some one in a wing near the front1 standing high enough to prevent the threads from touching the heads of the actors4 ,these bright little particles darting back and forth among the trees appear very lifelike1 and with the addition of a crescent moon just peeping through the trees1 the likeness to a summer night is quite striking4 ,the moon effect is made by using a piece of dark cardboard1 about #b ft4 square1 covered thickly with small green boughs1 and by cutting a crescent-shaped opening in the center1 covering it with yellow tissue paper4 ,this cardboard is placed well back in the trees and a lantern hung behind it4--,contributed by ,miss ,s4 ,e4 ,jocelyn1 ,new ,haven1 ,conn4 ,hulling ,walnuts ,procure a barrel that is water-tight and mount it on a shaft so that it runs between standards like a barrel churn4 ,fill the barrel about half full of walnuts1 cover them with water and throw in a small quantity of gravel as grinding material4 ,close the opening tightly and turn the barrel for about #bj minutes4 ,the walnuts will come out clean and smooth as glass4--,contributed by ,arthur ,seufert1 ,the ,dalles1 ,oregon4 ,stick for ,lowering ,top ,sash of a ,window ,to make it easy to raise and lower the upper sash of a bathroom window which is behind the bathtub ,i devised the following3 ,procuring two screweyes ,i opened one sufficiently to slip it into the other as shown at ,a4 ,then one was screwed into the top rail of the sash and the other into the end of a light stick a little longer than the length of upper sash4 ,illustration3 ,the ,stick is ,fastened to the ,window ,sash with ,screweyes and is ,always ,ready for ,use ,the device is left on the window permanently and affords a ready means of handling the sash without stepping into the bathtub1 which would otherwise be necessary4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,morey1 ,chicago4 ,an ,adjustable ,hacksaw ,frame ,the frame is constructed of cold-rolled steel1 #a_/d in4 in diameter and #ag-a_/b in4 long1 bent into the shape shown and then cut in two parts at ,a4 ,starting at a point about #e_/af in4 from the ends made by the cut1 drill #a_/h-;in4 holes1 then space three other holes #a in4 between centers and drill them #a_/h in4 in diameter4 ,illustration3 ,the ,frame is ,shaped of ,cold-,rolled ,steel and ,made ,adjustable with a ,piece of ,steel ,tubing ,a piece of steel tubing1 #a_/d in4 in inside diameter and #f-c_/d in4 long1 is notched on the ends to receive the pins ,b and ,c4 ,slots are cut in the ends ,d and ,e1 to admit the blade of a saw1 and half-round notches filed on the outside surface for holding pins used in the hole of the saw blade4 ,the spring of the steel will be sufficient to keep the saw blade in place4 ,the #a_/h-;in4 holes in the frame will permit adjustment for different lengths of blades4--,contributed by ,clarence ,b4 ,hanson1 ,fitchburg1 ,mass4 ,a ,bedroom ,cabinet ,the cabinet shown in the illustration can be made an ornament with a little care in workmanship and a choice selection of materials4 ,the cabinet may be either fastened to the head or foot of the bed1 facing in either of two directions4 ,illustration3 ,the ,cabinet ,makes a ,handy ,place to ,keep ,necessary ,articles for a ,sick ,person ,the size of the cabinet will depend on the choice of the maker1 and if the bed is brass1 the wood can be finished natural and fitted with brass bands for brackets and holding clips4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,a ,dull ,black for ,cameras ,such parts of a camera that are apt to reflect light must be covered with a dull black4 ,a mixture for this purpose is made of lampblack1 about a teaspoonful1 and enough gold size to make a paste as thick as putty4 ,add about twice the volume of turpentine and apply to the parts with a camel's-hair brush4 ,as the turpentine fumes are detrimental to the sensitive plate1 the camera should be left open until these fumes have entirely disappeared4 ,a ,door ,fastener ,illustration ,sometimes it is necessary to fasten a door in a manner to prevent children from opening it1 yet so that it is easily opened from either side4 ,this can be done by putting a screw or curtain hook on the inside of the door frame and using a piece of cord long enough to loop over both hooks4 ,a person coming in or out can remove the loop from either side4--,contributed by ,john ,a4 ,cohalan1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a floor wax can be made by melting #a lb4 of yellow beeswax in #a_/b pt4 of hot1 raw linseed oil2 then adding #a pt4 of turpentine4 ,umbrella ,used as a ,flower ,trellis ,procure a discarded umbrella and remove the cloth1 leaving only the steel frame4 ,join the ends of the ribs by running a fine wire through the tip of each rib and giving it one turn around to hold them at equal distances apart4 ,the handle is then inserted in the ground and some climbing vine planted beneath it4 ,the plant will climb all over the steel frame and make a very attractive lawn piece4--,contributed by ,john ,f4 ,campbell1 ,n4 ,somerville1 ,massachusetts4 ,illustration3 ,frame ,supporting a ,vine ,combined ,shade and ,awning ,an ordinary window shade makes a good awning as well as a shade1 if it is attached to the outside of the window with the device shown in the illustration4 ,the shade and spring roller are put into a box for protection from the weather and the box is fastened in the window casing at the top4 ,a narrow slit on the under side of the box permits the shade to be drawn out4 ,the stick at the end is removed and a ,u-shaped wire inserted in the hem in its stead4 ,the wire is bent so the ends may be inserted in holes in the window casing4 ,as the shade is drawn out1 it is extended outward by the wire in the position of an awning4--,contributed by ,arthur ,kesl1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,shade ,attachments ,vaulting-,pole ,attachments ,some means must be provided on vaulting-pole standards to allow for the free release of the pole should the vaulter strike it in going over4 ,one of the simplest of the many devices that can be used for this purpose is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,it is made of heavy wire1 bent and slipped over the standard as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the projection on the inside of the link is used similar to the tongue of a buckle in adjusting the height of the pole on the standards4 ,illustration3 ,pole ,adjuster on ,standard 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,each standard has a series of holes on its front side4 ,these holes may be numbered for convenience4 ,the pole in place is shown in ,fig4 #c4--;,contributed by ,john ,dunlap1 ,craghead1 ,tollcross1 ,england4 ,separating ,drinking ,glasses ,when two thin glasses are put one into the other they often become stuck and cannot be removed4 ,to separate them with ease1 set the lower glass in warm 7not hot7 water and pour cold water in the upper one4 ,the expansion of the lower and the contraction of the upper will make release an easy matter4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 99 99 99 99 99 ,bronze striping1 when thoroughly dry1 should be covered with a thin coat of white shellac to keep it from tarnishing4 ,a ,magic ,string ,procure a few pieces of cotton string1 each about #a-a_/b ft4 long1 and fill them well with soap4 ,prepare a brine by dissolving three tablespoonfuls of salt in a cup of water4 ,place the strings in the brine and allow them to soak for two hours1 or longer4 ,it is necessary that they be thoroughly saturated with the brine4 ,when taken out of the brine and thoroughly dried1 suspend one of them from a nail on a ledge1 and hang a finger ring on its lower end4 ,apply a lighted match to the string and allow it to burn4 ,the ring will not fall1 but will hang by the ash4--,contributed by ,c4 ,frank ,carber1 ,dorchester1 ,mass4 ,edging ,flower ,beds ,to improve the appearance of a flower bed1 it must be edged evenly and quite often4 ,as this became a tiresome task1 ,i constructed an edger1 as shown in the sketch4 ,it consists of a wheel on a #d-;ft4 length of material1 #b by #d in4 in size1 made tapering and having a cross handle1 #ah in4 long1 attached to its end4 ,the wheel is #h in4 in diameter1 and the cutter is attached1 as shown1 across the center of the wheel axle1 to make the edger turn easily on curves and corners4 ,the cutter is #ab in4 long and turned under #a-a_/b in4 ,it is pushed along in the same manner as a garden cultivator4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,amherstburg1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,an ,edger1 ,similar to a ,garden ,plow1 for ,quickly ,trimming the ,sod around a ,flower ,bed ,an ,electric ,stirring ,machine ,desiring a stirring machine for mixing photographic chemicals1 ,i set about to design the one shown in the illustration4 ,the base and upright are made of pine1 #a in4 thick1 the former #h in4 wide and #aj in4 long1 the latter #h in4 wide and #af in4 long4 ,a #c_/h in4 slot1 #ab in4 long1 is cut in the center of the upright1 and two pieces of sheet metal or tin1 #b in4 wide and #ab in4 long1 bent at right angles along the center of their length1 are placed at equal distances1 on each side of the slot1 and fastened with screws4 ,the distance between these pieces depends on the motor used1 as its base should fit snugly between them4 ,illustration3 ,a ,self-,contained ,electric ,stirring ,machine for ,use in ,mixing ,photographic ,chemicals ,a small battery motor is purchased1 and its shaft is removed and replaced with one measuring #aj in4 in length4 ,to the end of the shaft is soldered a piece of wire1 bent as shown in the sketch4 ,a bolt is attached to the center of the motor base1 so that its threaded end will pass through the slot in the upright1 where it is held with a wing nut4 ,the battery cells may be placed on the back of the upright and a small switch mounted at the top and in front4--,contributed by ,ray ,f4 ,yates1 ,niagara ,falls1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,clothes ,rack ,the rack is constructed of hard wood throughout1 and as each piece is made1 it should be sandpapered and varnished or otherwise finished4 ,the plan view is shown in ,fig4 #a2 the construction of an arm1 in ,fig4 #b2 and the pin1 in ,fig4 #c4 ,illustration3 ,any ,number of ,arms ,up to ,its ,limit may be ,used at a ,time 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,the base is #g_/h in4 thick and of the dimensions shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the projection on each side1 measuring #f-a_/b in4 long and #a in4 wide1 is made separately and glued to the main part after dressing and beveling the edges4 ,the shelf consists of material #b in4 thick and made in a semicircular form on a radius of #e-c_/d in4 ,on this arc1 lay off chords1 as shown in ,fig4 #a2 the first ones on each side being one-half the length of the others4 ,carefully square up the edges for appearance4 ,to lay off the post holes1 scribe an arc of a circle on a #d-g_/h-;in4 radius4 ,start at the edge on this arc and lay off eight chords of equal lengths1 and bore #a_/b-;in4 holes on the marks4 ,the posts are turned up1 as shown by the detail1 ,fig4 #c4 ,this will require seven posts and two half posts4 ,the half posts are secured to the base with small brads4 ,the round part at the end is turned slightly tapering1 so as to make a tight fit in the hole of the shelf4 ,after stringing the posts on a piece of brass wire1 #a_/h in4 in diameter1 and bending it in the proper shape1 the posts are glued in the holes4 ,a ,t-shaped slot with a long top and a short leg is cut out with a scroll saw in one end of each arm4 ,make sure to have each slot exactly #a_/b in4 from the upper side of each arm4 ,all edges should be well rounded to prevent tearing of the clothes4 ,make a semicircular platform for the arms to bear upon when extended4 ,this may be either half of a turned disk or built up in the three segments1 each fastened with screws to the base4 ,if the brass wire is exactly #a in4 from the shelf and the thickness of the wood between the ,t-slot and the upper edge of the arm #a_/b in41 the thickness of the platform should be slightly under #a_/b in4 to make the arms rest horizontally when they are extended4 ,the shelf is fastened to the base with three or four #b-;in4 screws1 and the ends of the brass wire are run through holes in the base and clinched on the back side4 ,the rack may be fastened in place on the kitchen wall with two large wood screws1 or1 if the wall is brick1 with expansion bolts4 ,the fastening in either case must be secure to hold the heavy weight of wet clothes4--,contributed by ,d4 ,a4 ,price1 ,wilmington1 ,del4 ,how to ,make a ,pair of ,foot ,boats ,on ponds or small lakes not deep enough for a boat one can use the foot boats1 as illustrated1 for walking on the water4 ,the boats are made of white wood1 known as basswood1 as this wood is easily bent when steamed1 and the curved part should be shaped neatly4 ,illustration3 ,foot ,boats for ,walking on ,shallow ,water ,where a ,boat cannot be ,used ,two sides are cut out1 as shown1 and the boards are nailed or1 better still1 screwed to them4 ,each straight part may consist of one piece1 in which case there will be no joints to make waterproof1 but if boards of sufficient size cannot be had1 pieces can be used4 ,in this instance the edges should be planed smooth1 so that a good joint may be had1 which can be made watertight with white lead4 ,it is best to make the bottom of one piece if possible1 at least for the length of the curve4 ,the wood is thoroughly steamed1 then fastened in place on the curved part4 ,a strap of suitable length is fastened on the top for the toe1 so that the boats can be controlled with the feet4 ,to propel the boats along easily1 a web or wing should be attached to the under side1 so that it will catch the water on the back thrust while it will fold up when the boat is slid forward4--,contributed by ,waldo ,saul1 ,lexington1 ,mass4 ,a ,green-,corn ,holder ,neat and attractive green-corn holders for table use can be made of small-sized glass drawer knobs1 having a bolt #a in4 in length4 ,the bolt head is cut off with a hacksaw1 and its body is filed to make four sides running to a taper1 leaving enough threads to secure it in the knob4 ,the threads are smeared with white lead1 then it is screwed into the knob and sufficient time allowed for the lead to set before using it4 ,illustration3 ,the ,glass ,knobs ,make a ,clean and ,sanitary ,holder for the ,ear of ,corn ,a pair of knobs are required for each ear of corn served4 ,the square bolt end will hold the ear securely while the kernels are eaten from the cob4--,contributed by ,victor ,labadie1 ,dallas1 ,texas4 ,inflating ,toy ,balloons ,the inflation of rubber balloons may be accomplished with manufactured gas by using the simple pipe arrangement shown in the sketch4 ,the connection ,a is for the gas hose1 which is similar to those used for a table lamp4 ,the gas bag ,b is a football or punching bag connected to the pipe as shown4 ,this receives the gas as it is let in by the valve ,a4 ,the toy balloon ,c is connected to the pipe in the same manner and the valve ,d used to regulate the flow of gas4 ,the gas is easily pressed out of the ball into the balloon4 ,illustration3 ,pipe ,arrangement1 ,punching ,bag and ,valves to ,admit ,gas to a ,toy ,rubber ,balloon ,as hydrogen gas is much better than the manufactured gas1 it is best to use and can be put in the balloon in the same manner4 ,electric-,light ,mystery ,a novel attraction for a window display can be made of a piece of plate glass neatly mounted on a wood base1 and an electric light which is placed on the top edge and may be lighted apparently without any wire connections4 ,illustration3 ,electric ,light ,mounted on ,top of a ,plate ,glass with ,hidden ,connections on the ,glass ,edge ,the method of concealing the connections is to paint the edges of the glass green1 then1 before the paint is quite dry1 lay on a thin strip of copper1 making the connections at the base on both sides1 and to the lamp in the same manner4 ,another coat of paint is applied to cover the strip4 ,the color should be an imitation of the greenish tint of glass edges4 ,any desired lettering can be put on the glass4--,contributed by ,o4 ,simonson1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,an ,oar ,holder ,persons rowing boats1 particularly beginners1 find that the oars will slip out of the oarlocks1 turn or fall into the water4 ,this may be avoided by turning a screweye of sufficient size to prevent binding on the lock into the oar and placing it over the lock as shown at ,a1 so that the pull will be against the metal4 ,the oars will never slip or jump out1 will always be in the right position1 and it is not necessary to pull them into the boat to prevent loss when not rowing4 ,the locks will not wear the oars1 as the pull is on the metal eye4 ,place the eye so it will have a horizontal position on the side of the oar when the blade is in its right position4 ,illustration3 ,the ,screweye in ,position on the ,oar and over ,one ,prong of the ,oarlock ,cooking ,food in ,paper ,a flat piece of paper is much more convenient to use than a paper sack in cooking1 as it can be better fitted to the size of the article to be cooked4 ,wrap the article as a grocer wraps sugar1 folding and refolding the two edges together until the package is of the proper size1 then fasten with clips and proceed to close the ends in the same way4 ,this avoids all pasted seams and makes the package airtight4--,contributed by ,j4 ,j4 ,a4 ,parker1 ,metamora1 ,o4 ,washing ,photograph ,prints ,photographic prints may be washed in a stationary washbowl with just as good results as if washed in a high-priced wash box1 by cutting off the upper end of the rubber nipple on a bent glass medicine dropper and placing it on the faucet as shown in the illustration4 ,this arrangement causes the water to whirl around in the bowl1 which keeps the prints in constant motion1 thus insuring a thorough washing4--,contributed by ,l4 ,o4 ,d4 ,sturgess1 ,arlington1 ,oregon4 ,illustration3 ,a ,medicine ,dropper on a ,faucet ,produces a ,whirling ,motion of the ,water in the ,bowl ,combination ,lock for a ,drawer ,the principal parts of the combination lock are the five disks shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,these are best made of sheet brass1 about #a_/af in4 thick and #a-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,the pins for turning the disks are each made a driving fit for a hole drilled through the metal at a point #ae_/cb in4 from the center4 ,notches are cut in the disks ,c1 ,d and ,e1 ,fig4 #a1 to receive the latch end1 and the disk ,b is made like a cam1 its use being to raise the latch into its keeper when the handle is turned backward4 ,the disk ,a is without a notch and has only a pin for turning the other disks4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts as ,they are ,attached to a ,drawer ,front to ,make a ,combination ,lock 7,fig4 #a7 ,the disks are mounted on the inside of the drawer front in a ,u-shaped piece of metal1 ,f1 ,fig4 #b1 which carries a #a_/d-;in4 pin1 ,g1 as their bearing4 ,the disks are placed on this pin with rubber washers1 ,h1 ,j1 ,k1 ,l and ,m1 between them4 ,these serve the purpose of preventing the disks from turning too freely4 ,the disk ,a is fastened tightly to the end of the rod ,n1 which is #a_/d in4 in diameter4 ,the outer end of this rod is fitted with a handle or turning head as desired4 ,that shown at ,o is made of two pieces of wood screwed together1 with a pointer1 ,p1 placed between them4 ,a washer1 ,r1 is placed between the drawer end and the handle to take up any looseness and to allow the free turning of the rod4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,a dial1 ,s1 is made of paper and the division marks and numbers placed upon it4 ,the latch ,t is fitted in a ,u-shaped piece of metal1 ,u1 which is fastened to the inside of the drawer end where its heel will rest on the edges of the disks4 ,when the right combination is made by turning the handle first one way and then the other1 the latch will drop into the notches of the disks as they will be all in one place4 ,when the drawer is to be locked1 turn the handle back from the last turn made for the combination and the latch will be driven upward into its keeper and the notches scattered so that the latch will not drop until the combination is again set4 ,the numbers for the combination can be found after the disks are in place and by turning the handle until the notch comes up to the place for the heel of the latch4 ,the number beneath the pointer is noted2 then the next turned up in a like manner1 all being done while the drawer is open and the disks in plain sight4 ,the combination can be changed only by changing the location of the pins in the disks4--,contributed by ,c4 ,b4 ,hanson1 ,fitchburg1 ,massachusetts4 ,how to ,start ,small ,machine ,screws ,illustration ,small machine screws are sometimes very difficult to start1 especially when used in parts of a machine that cannot be easily reached with the fingers4 ,a good way to start them is by means of a piece of fine wire wound snugly around the screw under its head4 ,they can be placed and started by means of the wire and when the first threads have caught the screw it can be held by the screwdriver while the wire is withdrawn4--,contributed by ,f4 ,w4 ,bently1 ,huron1 ,s4 ,d4 ,an ,umbrella ,holder for ,display ,purposes ,illustration ,a holder that is especially adapted for use in hanging umbrellas for display in a store can be easily made of a piece of wire wound in a coil1 as shown in the sketch1 to fit over the end on the umbrella stick4 ,the coil at one end of the spring is formed into a hook so that the umbrellas may be hung in screweyes or on a line1 as the case may be4 ,the end of the umbrella is stuck into the spring1 as shown1 which grips it tightly4--,contributed by ,abner ,b4 ,shaw1 ,n4 ,dartmouth1 ,mass4 ,holder for a ,milk ,card ,illustration ,it is the general practice of milkmen to furnish a monthly card on which the housewife marks the needs of the day and then hangs it outside of the door for the information of the driver4 ,this card also serves as a record for checking the accounts of the milk delivered during the month1 and therefore it is desirable to protect it from snow and sleet4 ,in order to furnish this protection and at the same time make it unnecessary for any one to go outside of the door to hang up the card on stormy days1 one of our readers has submitted the following plan which he has used for some time4 ,on the outside of the kitchen door1 where the milkman is to deliver his bottles1 this man has fastened an ordinary picture frame with glass but no backing except the door4 ,through the door and just below the upper edge of the glass is cut a thin slot inclining downward and outward so that the milk card can be easily pushed through the slot and thus be displayed behind the glass in the frame4 ,by this protection it is kept free from mud1 snow and ice4 ,it is not necessary to step outside to place the card in the frame4 ,frame for ,printing ,post ,cards from ,negatives ,as ,i desired to print only a portion of some of my #e by #g-;in4 plates on post cards and the part wanted was near the edge of the plate1 ,i cut out the printing frame1 as shown at ,a in the sketch1 to accommodate that part of the card ,i reserved for a margin4 ,this permitted the card to be placed in the frame without making a bend4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,maysilles1 ,rochelle1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,slots ,cut in the ,frame to ,receive the ,post ,cards without ,bending ,them ,finger ,protection on ,laboratory ,vessels ,a simple way of protecting the fingers against being burned by laboratory vessels in which liquids are boiling or chemical reactions producing great heat are going on1 is shown in the sketch4 ,a rather thick cord or yarn is wrapped around the neck of the vessel in the manner shown1 the upper end being drawn through the loop at the top and cut off1 and the lower end then pulled out and a knot tied in it close to the windings of the yarn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ends of the ,cord are ,held ,tightly and the ,winding ,protects the ,hands ,inlaying ,metals by ,electroplating ,very pretty and artistic effects of silver or nickel inlay on bronze1 copper1 etc41 or copper on dark oxidized metals1 may be obtained by means of etching and electroplating4 ,the metal on which the inlay is to be used is first covered with a thin coating of wax and the design scratched through to the metal with a sharp1 hard point of some kind4 ,the design is then etched in slowly with well diluted nitric acid1 allowing the etching to penetrate quite deeply4 ,the metal is then taken out and after a thorough rinsing in water is hung in the plating bath4 ,as the wax has been left on1 the plating will fill the lines of the design only1 and will not touch the covered surface4 ,when the etched lines are filled1 the object is taken out of the bath and the wax removed4--,contributed by ,s4 ,v4 ,cooke1 ,hamilton1 ,can4 ,a ,novel ,show-,window ,attraction ,this moving show-window attraction can be simply and cheaply made4 ,the things necessary are a small battery motor1 a large horseshoe magnet and a large polished steel ball1 perfectly true and round1 such as used in bearings4 ,the other materials usually can be found in any store4 ,procure some thick cardboard and cut two disks1 #h in4 in diameter1 and two disks1 #g-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,glue these together to make the wheel ,a1 the larger disks forming the flanges4 ,make a smaller wheel1 ,b1 the size of which will be governed by the speed of the motor used4 ,the wheel ,a is mounted in a box to run with its surface close to the under side of the cover1 which should be of a thin1 stiff cardboard4 ,the wheel ,b is mounted on an axle that runs in metal bearings4 ,the magnet ,d is placed on the wheel ,a4 ,the steel ball ,e is put on the thin cover of the box1 and the magnet causes it to roll around as the wheel turns4 ,the box inclosing the mechanical parts should be placed out of sight when used in a window4--,contributed by ,clarence ,guse1 ,spokane1 ,wash4 ,illustration3 ,the ,steel ,ball is ,caused to ,roll ,around on the ,cover by the ,moving ,magnet ,how to ,make a ,mop ,wringer ,a mop wringer may be made and attached to an ordinary pail in the following manner3 ,two pieces of metal1 ,a1 are attached securely at opposite sides of the edge of the pail1 holes being drilled in their upper ends to serve as bearings for the roller ,b4 ,the piece of metal ,c1 which is duplicated at the opposite side of the pail1 is pivoted on a bolt4 ,these pieces also carry a roller1 ,e1 at their upper ends1 and have a crosspiece1 ,f1 at their lower ends4 ,discarded wringer rollers can be used for ,b and ,e4 ,a coil spring is attached as shown1 to keep the rollers separate and in a position to receive the mop4 ,when the mop is placed between the rollers they are brought together by a pressure of the foot on the crosspiece ,f4--,contributed by ,j4 ,dennis ,mc,kennon1 ,new ,britain1 ,conn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts may be ,either ,attached to a ,metal or ,wood ,pail with ,bolts or ,screws ,a ,vise ,used as a ,caliper ,gauge ,not infrequently it is desired to know the distance from one side to another of some part that cannot be directly measured with a rule1 and when no calipers are at hand4 ,but with a vise handy1 the measurement can be made with ease and with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes if the vise is not too worn4 ,this trick is particularly adapted for calipering threaded parts1 as threads cannot be measured readily with ordinary calipers4 ,how this may be done is shown in the sketch1 which illustrates the method as applied to a screw4 ,the work is gripped between the jaws of the vise and the opening then measured with a rule4--,contributed by ,donald ,a4 ,hampson1 ,middletown1 ,new ,york4 ,illustration3 ,the ,jaws of a ,vise1 ,if ,they ,are ,true1 ,will ,make a ,caliper ,gauge ,giving a ,perfect ,measurement ,homemade ,tack ,puller ,a very handy tack puller can be made of a round-head bolt4 ,on one side of the head file a ,v-shaped notch and screw a wood handle on the threads4 ,this makes a very powerful puller that will remove large tacks from hardwood easily4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,head ,permits a ,leverage ,action ,that ,lifts the ,tack ,easily ,how to ,make a ,radium ,photograph ,the radium rays1 like the ,x-rays1 affect the photographic plate1 as is well known1 but it would naturally be supposed that the enormous cost of radium would prevent the making of such a photograph by the amateur4 ,it is a fact1 however1 that a radium photograph can be made at home at practically no cost at all1 provided the amateur has patience enough to gather the necessary material1 which is nothing else but broken incandescent gas mantles4 ,these 7especially ,welsbach mantles7 contain a salt of the rare metal thorium1 which is slightly radioactive4 ,the thing to do1 then1 is to collect a sufficient quantity of broken mantles to cover the bottom of a small cardboard box--a dryplate box1 for instance--with a layer of powdered mantle substance4 ,upon this layer and pressed tightly against it is placed a piece of cardboard2 then some metal objects1 a button1 hairpin1 a buckle1 or the like1 are laid on the cardboard and covered with a sensitized paper4 ,this is again covered with a piece of cardboard and the box filled with crumpled paper to the top4 ,the cover is then put on1 the box tied up with a piece of string and set in some place where it is sure to be left undisturbed4 ,the radium rays from the powdered mantles readily penetrate the cardboard and paper1 but not the metal articles4 ,being very weak1 the rays must be given four weeks to accomplish their work4 ,after that time1 however1 if the sensitive paper is taken out1 pictures of the metal objects in white on a dark background will be found on it4 ,these pictures will not be so sharp as ordinary photographs1 because the rays are not focused1 but they fairly represent the originals and the experiment is an interesting one4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a good imitation mahogany stain consists of #a part ,venetian red and #b parts yellow lead1 mixed with thin glue size1 and is laid on with a woolen cloth4 ,fountain for an ,ordinary ,pen ,fill the hollow end of an ordinary penholder with cotton--not too tightly--and one dip of the pen will hold enough ink to write a full page4 ,the cotton should be changed each day4 ,a small piece of sponge will answer the same purpose4 ,it is necessary to dip the pen deeply into the ink4--,contributed by ,j4 ,e4 ,noble1 ,london ,junction1 ,ontario4 ,pulling ,wire through ,curved ,electric ,fixtures ,to facilitate the running of electric wires through curved fixtures1 nick a heavy shot1 ,a1 and fasten it on a cord1 ,b1 in the same manner as a fishline is weighted4 ,the shot will roll through the fixture tube1 carrying the cord with it4 ,a cord strong enough to pull the wires through can be easily drawn through the opening in this manner4 ,the shot should1 of course1 not be so large that it can possibly bind in the tube4 ,illustration3 ,a ,shot ,that will ,pass through the ,fixture ,arm will ,carry a ,cord for ,pulling in the ,wires ,an ,automatically ,closing ,drawer ,a very ingenious way to have a drawer close automatically is to attach a weight so that the rope or cord will pull on the rear end of the drawer4 ,the sketch clearly shows the device which is an attachment similar to that used for closing gates4 ,this can be applied to drawers that are frequently drawn out and in places where a person is liable to have the hands full4 ,illustration3 ,the ,rope and ,weight ,attached to the ,back ,end of the ,drawer ,pulls ,it ,closed ,a ,cork ,puller ,illustration ,the stopper of any ordinary bottle can be easily removed with a puller such as shown in the sketch4 ,the puller is inserted between the stopper and the neck of the bottle until the hook end will pass under the bottom of the stopper1 then given a quarter turn and pulled upward4 ,the construction of the puller vents the cork as it enters and thus no vacuum is created4 ,the cork is pulled more easily than with an ordinary corkscrew1 and there is no danger of tearing the cork to pieces4 ,uses for a ,bamboo ,pole ,select a good bamboo pole1 about #ah ft4 long1 and cut it into three lengths as follows3 ,a piece from the top1 #b-a_/b ft4 long2 the next length1 #e-a_/b ft4 long1 and the remaining end of the pole1 about #aj ft4 long4 ,the #b-a_/b-;ft4 length is equipped with a screw hook in the smaller end1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,this stick is useful in lowering window shades that have a ring or screw eye attached to the lower part of the shade4 ,when the stick is not in use1 it is hung on the edge of the window casing4 ,illustration3 ,a ,bamboo ,pole ,cut in ,three ,pieces ,makes a ,window-,shade ,stick1 ,duster ,holder and ,clothesline ,pole 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the #e-a_/b-;ft4 length makes the long handle for a duster4 ,procure an old-style lamp-chimney cleaner1 wind a cord around the wires a few inches below the point where they begin to spread to keep them from coming apart1 then cut or file the wires off #b in4 below the winding4 ,this leaves a straight shank1 over which a ferrule is slipped before it is inserted into the small end of the pole4 ,fill the remaining space in the pole end with plaster of ,paris1 and when it has set1 slip the ferrule into place on the pole end4 ,if a ferrule is not at hand1 a fine wire can be wound around the end to prevent the pole from splitting4 ,when using this pole to dust hardwood floors1 tops of doors1 window casings and picture frames1 put a dusting cloth into the claws and slide the ring into place1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the longer and larger end of the pole is used as a clothesline pole4 ,one end of this pole is fitted with a yoke made of ,no4 #f gauge galvanized wire1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the wire for the yoke is #aj in4 long1 and after bending it in shape1 the two upper ends should be #b in4 wide at the top and #b in4 deep4 ,insert the straight end of the wire into the smaller end of the pole and set it in firmly with plaster of ,paris4 ,the end of the pole should be securely wound with wire to keep the bamboo from splitting4--,contributed by ,gertrude ,m4 ,bender1 ,utica1 ,n4 ,y4 ,making ,common ,lock ,less ,pickable ,the ordinary lock can be readily changed so that it will be quite impossible to pick it with a common key4 ,the way to do this is to cut off the small hollow portion of the key that fits over the pin4 ,this part is placed on the pin of the lock and soldered1 or fastened by any other means1 so it cannot come out of the lock4 ,this will prevent any ordinary key from entering the keyhole4--,contributed by ,a4 ,j4 ,hamilton1 ,benton1 ,ark4 ,illustration3 ,the ,small ,end ,cut from the ,key is ,fastened on the ,pin of the ,lock ,to ,color ,tan ,leather ,black ,an inexpensive and effective way to blacken tan leather is as follows3 ,the leather is first rubbed with a #aj-per-cent solution of tannic acid1 which may be purchased at any drug store4 ,this treatment should be applied and the leather well dried4 ,it should be rubbed with a cloth hard enough to produce a polish1 then apply a #aj-per-cent solution of iron sulphate4 ,a chemical reaction takes place as the last solution is rubbed into the leather1 making it black4 ,after this is dry1 the leather can be polished in the usual way4 ,to ,prevent ,corks ,sticking in ,bottle ,necks ,illustration ,corks will always adhere to the necks of bottles containing glue or other sticky liquids1 with the result that it becomes necessary to cut or dig the cork into small pieces in order to remove the contents from the bottle4 ,a simple and effective way to prevent a cork from sticking is to place a small piece of waxed paper on the bottle opening so that when the cork is pressed in1 the paper will be between the cork and glass1 as shown4 ,to ,remove ,rust ,stains from ,clothing ,many times when working around machinery1 the clothes will come in contact with iron and get rust stains4 ,these may be removed by using a weak solution of oxalic acid which must be applied carefully as it is highly poisonous4 ,sometimes the stain can be removed by washing the spot in buttermilk1 in which case rubbing is necessary4 99 99 99 99 99 ,small bits of onion placed in a room will absorb the disagreeable odors of paint and turpentine4 ,eraser ,holder ,any small piece of steel with a point1 similar to that shown in the sketch1 will make a good eraser holder4 ,the saving of erasers is nothing compared to the convenience of having a small eraser with a chisel edge or point when delicate erasing is required4 ,it is not clumsy as the usual chunk of rubber with a blunt point1 for the person erasing can see what he is doing4 ,i use a leg of an old pair of dividers and cut my erasers in four parts in shapes similar to that shown in the sketch by the dotted lines1 and can use them easily until they are about the size of a pea4 ,the friction between the rubber and steel1 after the point has been inserted into the rubber1 holds the two together nicely4--,contributed by ,james ,f4 ,burke1 ,lakewood1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,a ,very ,small ,eraser can be ,held on the ,point and ,used for ,delicate ,erasures ,bleaching ,ivory ,a good method to bleach ivory ornaments is to rub on a solution made of a small quantity of unslaked lime1 bran and water4 ,the mixture should be wiped off after the ivory has become sufficiently bleached1 and the surface then rubbed with sawdust or magnesia1 which gives it a brilliant polish4 ,a ,soap ,shake ,illustration ,to utilize scraps of soap1 make a soap shake of a medium-size baking-powder can1 as shown in the sketch4 ,punch holes in the can with an ice pick or some other sharp-pointed instrument1 and attach a large wire to the center1 twisting the ends to form a handle4--,contributed by ,elizabeth ,p4 ,grant1 ,winchester1 ,virginia4 ,ear ,repair on a ,bucket ,illustration ,a broken ear for a bail on a metal pail or bucket can be replaced with a window-shade fastener1 such as shown at ,a in the sketch4 ,the base of the fastener is turned down flat and attached with screw bolts or rivets1 as shown at ,b4--,contributed by ,harold ,robinson1 ,suffern1 ,n4 ,y4 ,cleaning ,dirt from ,tufts in ,upholstering ,illustration3 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a handy device for cleaning furniture upholstering and vehicle-seat tuftings may be easily made as follows3 ,take an ordinary round paintbrush and cut the handle off1 leaving it about #a-a_/b in4 long1 then saw a ,v-shaped notch in it1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,attach the brush to the ratchet screwdriver1 ,fig4 #b1 by inserting the screwdriver blade in the notch of the brush handle1 and secure it by wrapping a strong cord around the handle4 ,place the brush in the tuft and work the screwdriver handle1 as in turning a screw4 ,a few quick turns of the brush will throw out the dirt which is impossible to remove with a straight brush4 ,painting ,lead ,pipe ,the paint applied to lead pipes will chip and peel off1 and to prevent this ,i first cover the lead surface with a thin coat of varnish1 then apply the paint on the varnish4 ,a lead pipe painted in this way will retain its coating4--,contributed by ,f4 ,schumacher1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,attaching a ,vise ,jaw to a ,bench ,procure a toothed metal rail or rack1 ,a1 such as is used for small ladder tracks1 and mount it on the lower edge of the guide rail for the lower end of the vise jaw4 ,provide a slot1 ,b1 in the leg of the bench1 through which the rail can run with plenty of play room4 ,a beveled plate1 ,c1 is attached to the face of the bench leg at the bottom of the slot1 so that it will engage the teeth of the rack4 ,illustration3 ,the ,rack on the ,lower ,guide ,rail ,provides a ,means to ,keep the ,vise ,jaws ,parallel ,in use1 when opening the vise by means of the screw1 the rack will drag along the plate1 and stop and engage a notch when the opening operation ceases4 ,when it is desired to reduce the opening1 it is only necessary to lift the rail by means of the string ,d4 ,a button is tied to the upper end of the string on top of the bench1 to keep it handy for changing the jaw4--,contributed by ,harry ,f4 ,lowe1 ,washington1 ,district of ,columbia4 ,removing ,vegetable ,stains ,to remove stains of vegetables or fruits of any kind from cloth or wood1 the following method is very good3 ,the stained piece is first moistened with water and then placed in a jar or pail that can be covered4 ,a lump of sulphur is ignited and dropped into the jar4 ,place the sulphur on a fire shovel when lighting it to avoid burns4 ,the burning sulphur should be placed in the receptacle on the side where the stain will be exposed to the fumes4 ,the sulphur burns slowly so that the articles will not be harmed4 ,after the sulphur has burned away1 the jar should be kept closed for a few minutes and when the articles are removed1 the stains will be gone4 ,this is harmless to try1 and the cloth will not be injured if it is in a dry condition4 ,the articles should be washed and dried as soon as they are taken out of the jar4 ,picture-,frame ,corner ,joints ,very often the amateur craftsman comes across a picture which he would like to have framed1 but the difficulty and insecurity of the ordinary miter joint for the corners discourage him from trying to make the frame4 ,a very easy way to construct a rigid frame is shown in the illustration4 ,the size of the frame must be determined by the picture to be framed4 ,the width1 ,a1 of the pieces depends upon one's own taste4 ,four pieces1 the desired length and width and #a_/b in4 thick1 should be dressed out of the material intended for the frame4 ,four other pieces1 #c_/h in4 thick and #a_/b in4 narrower than the first four pieces1 are next made ready and fastened with glue and flat-head screws to the back of the first pieces1 as shown4 ,this allows #c_/h in4 for glass1 picture and backing1 and #a_/b in4 to lap over the front of the picture on all edges4 ,illustration3 ,square and ,mitered ,lap ,joints for ,making ,rigid ,picture ,frames in ,natural or ,stained ,woods 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,by arranging the pieces as shown in ,fig4 #a1 a strong corner lap is secured4 ,a miter lap joint which is not so strong is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the latter gives a mitered-joint effect4 ,this method does away with the use of the rabbeting plane and miter box1 both of which are difficult to use with accuracy4 ,two screws should be used in each joint to reinforce the glue4--,contributed by ,james ,gaffney1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,hunting-,knife ,handles ,very artistic handles for hunting knives and carving sets can be made by using disks of horn4 ,procure some cowhorns from a slaughter house and split them with a saw1 using only the large portion of the horn4 ,the split horn is then heated by dry heat--an oven is best--then pressed between two cold plates to a flat piece4 ,if well heated1 it is surprising how easily this can be done4 ,the piece is then cut into squares of suitable size which are marked and perforated in the center1 the hole being a trifle smaller than the tang of the blade4 ,the tang should be flat and a little longer than the desired handle1 with the end made round and threaded for a nut4 ,illustration3 ,the ,finished ,handle1 ,if the ,work is ,well ,done1 is ,easily ,mistaken for ,agate ,a suitable washer is placed on the tang1 which is then heated sufficiently to burn its way through the pieces of horn as they are put on the metal4 ,when a sufficient number of disks are on the tang a washer should be slipped on and followed by a round nut4 ,pressure is applied by turning the nut and repeated heatings of the disks will force them together to make perfect joints4 ,only a moderate pressure should be applied at a time4 ,the handle is now to be finished to the shape desired4 ,if black and colored pieces of horn are interspersed1 the finished handle will have the appearance of agate4 ,the blade and handle can be lacquered and the ferrules nickelplated4--,contributed by ,james ,h4 ,beebee1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,holding ,wood in a ,sawbuck ,anyone who has used a sawbuck knows how inconvenient it is to have a stick roll or lift up as the saw blade is pulled back for the next cut4 ,with the supplementary device1 shown in the sketch1 which can be easily attached to the sawbuck1 these troubles will be eliminated4 ,it consists of two crosspieces hinged to the back uprights of the sawbuck and a foot-pressure stirrup fastened to their front ends as shown4 ,spikes are driven through the crosspieces so that their protruding ends will gouge into the stick of wood being sawed4 ,the stirrup is easily thrown back for laying a piece of wood in the crotch4 ,illustration3 ,the ,holding ,attachment ,easily ,adjusts ,itself to the ,stick of ,wood ,placed in the ,crotch ,a ,new ,pail-,cover ,handle ,the handle of the cover1 instead of being attached to the center1 is placed near the edge and bail of the pail4 ,on the bail and just above the handle of the cover there is formed a loop large enough to accommodate the thumb4 ,with this arrangement1 the cover may be removed with the use of but one hand4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bail ,loop and the ,handle ,make ,it ,easy to ,remove the ,cover with ,one ,hand ,drip-,pan ,alarm ,the trouble caused by overflowing of the drip pan for an ice box or refrigerator can be overcome by attaching a device that will sound an alarm when the water reaches a level safely below the overflow point4 ,a device of this kind may be attached to the back of the refrigerator as shown in the sketch4 ,a float1 ,a1 is attached to the lower end of a rod1 ,b1 which slides through staples ,,cc4 ,at the upper end of the rod1 a ,v-shaped copper sheet1 ,d1 is soldered4 ,this makes the contact points in the electric wiring4 ,the battery ,e can be placed under or back of the refrigerator as desired4 ,the method of wiring is clearly shown4 ,illustration3 ,the ,float in the ,pan1 and ,contacts for ,closing the ,circuit to ,ring the ,bell ,a ,live-,bait ,pail ,illustration ,every fisherman knows that live bait will soon die if they do not receive sufficient air4 ,i have succeeded in keeping bait alive and healthy by using a pail of my own construction1 which is provided with a compressed-air space to force air to the surface of the water4 ,the air space ,a takes up one-fifth of the interior at the bottom of the pail1 and an ordinary hand bicycle pump is used to fill it through a bicycle-tire valve1 ,b4 ,the pipe ,c from the air space extends up along the side of the pail and the upper end is bent so that it just touches the surface of the water4 ,the pipe contains a valve to regulate the flow of air4 ,after the pail has been standing for an hour or more1 the bait will rise to the top4 ,the valve is then opened for a few minutes1 and the minnows will soon swim around in the water as when this was fresh4--,contributed by ,t4 ,whelan1 ,paterson1 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,mouse ,trap ,illustration ,after using various means to catch the mice in my pantry1 ,i finally decided ,i could not catch them in the ordinary manner4 ,knowing that mice are not afraid of dishes but will run all over them1 while they will stay away from other things1 ,i took a dinner plate1 a bowl that held about #a qt41 a thimble1 filled with toasted cheese1 and arranged the articles as shown in the sketch1 balancing the bowl on the thimble4 ,when the mouse nibbled the cheese1 the bowl came down on it1 making it a prisoner4 ,the whole was then dropped in a pail of water4 ,scald the dish and bowl before using them again to remove all traces of the mouse4 ,quickly ,made ,rheostat ,a short time ago ,i found it necessary to melt some silver1 and in setting up an arc light to obtain the heat ,i made a rheostat by winding wire around a large earthenware jar4 ,as the jar is a conductor and would not burn1 it served the purpose perfectly4 ,in winding the wire1 be careful to keep the coils from touching each other4--,contributed by ,p4 ,d4 ,merrill1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,illustration ,sunlight ,flasher for the ,garden ,by ,claude ,l4 ,woolley ,the following apparatus is likely to be novel1 and certainly very striking when erected on country estates1 particularly on high lands1 hillsides1 and along the seashore1 where the flashes may be seen for many miles out at sea4 ,it is not unusual in country gardens to see a large hollow glass globe silvered on the inside1 mounted on a pedestal1 brilliantly reflecting the sunlight4 ,the apparatus described is an elaboration of the idea4 ,the drawing shows in diagram the general construction1 exact measurements not being given4 ,however1 a convenient height is #c-a_/b to #d ft41 and the circular frame1 carrying the mirrors1 may be #aj to #ad in4 in diameter4 ,illustration3 ,the ,flasher as ,it ,appears on the ,stand and the ,details of ,its ,construction ,the supporting frame1 of galvanized sheet iron or sheet copper1 may be either circular or hexagonal in shape4 ,mounted upon a vertical shaft is a skeleton circular frame1 carrying a double row of small mirrors1 or ordinary flat mirror glass1 mounted in grooves provided for them2 the upper row inclined slightly upward1 and the lower row slightly downward4 ,if a greater number of angles of reflection are desired1 the mirrors may be smaller1 and arranged in four circular rows instead of two1 each row being inclined at a slightly different angle4 ,the shaft is pointed at the lower end and rests in a bearing drilled with a ,v-shaped depression1 the bearing being supported by soldering or riveting at each end to the inner sides of the pedestal shell4 ,the upper portion of the shaft passes through a bearing which is also soldered or riveted at the ends1 to the inner surfaces of the pedestal shell4 ,the mirrors1 mounted on the shaft1 thus are free to revolve vertically with very little friction4 ,upon the lower end of the shaft is fastened a light gear wheel of rather large diameter1 and this in turn is geared to a smaller gear mounted on the end of the armature shaft of a small electric motor of the type that may be driven with a few dry cells2 the relation of the sizes of the gears being such as will cause the mirrors to revolve slowly1 when the motor is running at normal speed4 ,connected to the motor are two or more dry1 or other suitable batteries1 a small door being provided on the side of the lower part of the pedestal to enable the batteries to be replaced1 or turned off1 and to give access to the motor4 ,a circular shield is erected over the mirror carrier1 surmounted by an ornamental ball1 to protect from the weather and to provide a more finished appearance4 ,a waterproof canvas cover may be slipped over the whole in rainy weather4 ,as new mirror faces at varying angles are constantly being presented to the sun1 vivid flashes are constantly occurring when viewed from almost any angle or position on the side where the sun is shining4 ,the circular shield on top is supported in position by four metal strips secured by soldering to the shield and the supporting pedestal4 ,such a device may be constructed without much expense1 producing a most brilliant effect over miles of territory4 ,the small driving motor may be replaced with a suitable spring or weight-driven clockwork2 or four hollow hemispherical metal cups may be mounted on arms1 or placed at right angles1 and the arms in turn mounted upon a vertical shaft and arranged above the mirror carrier and geared in such manner that the mirrors will revolve slowly1 while the cups are revolving with comparatively high speed by the force of the wind4 ,the mounted revolving cups are similar in form to the apparatus used by the ,u4 ,s4 ,weather ,bureau for measuring the speed of the wind4 ,they will respond to a good breeze from any point of the compass4 ,an ,automatic ,blowpipe ,a fine-pointed flame can be used to advantage for certain work1 and the alcohol flame and blowpipe have become a necessity1 but these may be improved upon so as to make the apparatus automatic in action and more efficient in its work4 ,a bottle or receptacle1 ,a1 having a large bottom to provide a sufficient heating surface1 is supplied with a cork and a tube1 ,b1 bent at right angles4 ,the receptacle1 ,a1 is supported on a stand so that it may be heated with a small lamp1 ,c4 ,the light ,d may be a candle1 alcohol lamp1 or any flame set at the right distance from the end of the tube ,b4 ,illustration ,the receptacle ,a is partly filled with alcohol1 and the heating lamp lit4 ,the heat will turn the alcohol into gas and cause a pressure1 driving it through the tube ,b1 so that it is ignited by the flame from ,d4 ,the flame will have a fine point with sufficient heat to melt glass4--,contributed by ,w4 ,r4 ,sears1 ,st4 ,paul1 ,minn4 ,homemade ,steam-,turbine ,engine ,select a tomato can1 or any can in which vegetables or fruit is sold1 and carefully unsolder the small cap on the end when removing the contents4 ,when the can is empty1 clean it well and solder the cap in place again4 ,procure a strip of brass1 bend it as shown at ,a and solder it to the can top in the center4 ,cut a piece of about ,no4 #ad gauge wire1 the length equal to the opening between the uprights of the ,u-shaped piece of brass1 with about #a_/b in4 added for a small pulley wheel4 ,the uprights are punched or drilled at their upper ends to admit the wire which is then adjusted in place4 ,illustration3 ,the ,boiler is ,made of a ,fruit or ,vegetable ,can and the ,turbine of ,thin ,metal ,strips ,two strips of tin are cut to fit in between the standards and are notched in the center1 as shown at ,b1 and slightly bent to fit over the wire shaft4 ,these are soldered to the wire between the uprights4 ,a small hole is punched on one side in the top of the can so that it will center the paddle of the wheel4 ,on the opposite side of the top another larger hole is punched and tightly fitted with a wood plug4 ,this is the opening for filling the boiler with water4 ,the can should be filled about two-thirds full and set on a stove4 ,the steam1 coming under pressure from the small hole1 strikes the paddles of the wheel with considerable force and causes it to revolve rapidly4 ,be careful not to set the boiler on too hot a fire4 ,electric ,switch for ,exposing ,photographic ,printing ,papers ,the proper time to expose a printing paper under a negative should be determined and the negative marked for future printing4 ,when this time has been found some means should be provided for making the exposure exactly the same1 then the prints will be perfect and of a good tone at all times4 ,for this purpose the instrument shown in the illustration was designed and used with entire satisfaction4 ,illustration3 ,time ,switch for ,operating an ,electric ,light in ,printing ,photographic ,developing ,papers ,the device consists of an ordinary cheap watch1 a standard1 or support1 for an adjusting screw1 a small coil1 a movable armature1 a knife switch1 and a trip arrangement4 ,a neat box or case1 about #e in4 square and #c in4 high1 is first constructed4 ,a round recess1 #a_/h in4 deep1 is cut in the center of the top1 to admit the watch4 ,the standard ,a is made of brass1 #a_/h in4 thick and #a_/b in4 wide1 bent as shown1 and a #c_/af-;in4 hole is drilled in the end of the long arm where it will exactly center over the pivot holding the watch hands4 ,a #c_/af-;in4 rod1 ,b1 is closely fitted in the hole and supplied with a knurled wheel1 ,c1 on the upper end1 and an ,l-shaped arm1 ,d1 is fastened to the lower end4 ,the end of this arm should be filed to a point1 or a very thin piece of brass soldered to it1 so that the end will just touch the minute hand of the watch4 ,the tip end of the point should be bent slightly from the perpendicular toward the direction in which the watch hands are moving1 so that1 when it is set1 the moving hand will easily break the contact4 ,the magnetic arrangement consists of a #c-ohm coil1 ,e1 mounted1 as shown1 to one side of the case1 where it operates the trip levers4 ,the armature parts consist of an ,l-shaped piece of brass1 ,f1 pivoted at ,g1 to which a square piece of soft iron1 ,h1 is attached4 ,two small parts1 ,k1 are bent and attached as shown1 to furnish a limit stop for the piece ,f and a support for a spiral spring which holds the armature ,h away from the coil4 ,the knife switch ,l is fastened to the bottom of the case so that the handle will project through a slot in one side of the box4 ,a trip piece1 ,m1 and a small eye for attaching a spiral spring1 ,n1 are soldered to the knife switch4 ,these two attachments for the switch are insulated from the other parts4 ,two binding posts are mounted on top1 one being connected to one terminal of the coil ,e and the other to the watch case4 ,the other terminal of the coil is connected to the standard ,a4 ,the two binding posts are connected in series with one or two dry cells1 and the switch ,l is connected in series with the lamp used for printing4 ,the operation is as follows3 ,the arm ,d1 being set for a certain time1 the lever of the switch ,l is set and the light remains lit until the minute hand strikes the point on the arm ,d1 when the battery circuit is closed causing the coil to draw the armature ,h and allowing the spring ,n to open the switch ,l4 ,the lamp is then extinguished4--,contributed by ,james ,p4 ,lewis1 ,golden1 ,colorado4 ,how to ,make a ,wing ,nut ,illustration ,finding that ,i needed some wing nuts and not being able to purchase them in the size ,i wanted1 ,i made them from the ordinary nuts4 ,a hole was drilled through opposite corners of each nut and a staple made of wire riveted in the holes as shown in the sketch4 ,the staple should be long enough to admit the end of the bolt4--,contributed by ,clarence ,l4 ,orcutt1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 ,cork-,covered ,clothes ,peg ,illustration ,when screws or nails are used to hang clothes or other articles on1 run the nail or screw through a bottle cork as shown4 ,the cork will prevent the nail or screw from tearing the article and also insure the cloth against rust marks1 should the article be wet4 ,shaping an ,old ,broom ,a broom1 having the straws bent and out of shape1 yet not worn out1 can be fixed up like new in the following manner3 ,slightly dampen the straw with water and wrap with heavy paper1 then place a weight on it4 ,after standing under pressure for several days the straw will be restored to the shape of a new broom4 ,paint brushes can be treated in the same manner1 but in that case linseed oil should be used instead of water4 ,illustration3 ,method of ,straightening the ,straws ,how to ,make a ,bolster ,illustration ,the sketch shows a simple bed bolster which ,i have made and which can be constructed at very little cost4 ,three circular pieces of poplar or pine1 #aj-a_/b in4 in diameter1 are required4 ,these may be made in one cut by nailing the pieces together4 ,then nail on ten #c_/h by #b-;in4 strips1 #eb in4 long1 or as long as the width of the bed1 leaving about #a_/b in4 space between the strips4 ,these strips will thus go about two-thirds of the way around the circle1 leaving room to insert the pillows when the bed is not in use4 ,cover the bolster with building paper or any other suitable material1 and it is ready for the pillow shams4--,contributed by ,c4 ,martin1 ,jr41 ,chicago4 ,a ,fish-,scaling ,knife ,a useful fish-scaling and skinning knife can be made of an old broken hacksaw blade4 ,this must be at least #f in4 long and will make a knife with a #c-;in4 blade4 ,grind the blade to the shape shown and make a handle for it by using two strips of maple1 #a_/d in4 thick and #d in4 long4 ,these are riveted together with #c in4 of the blade between them4--,contributed by ,john ,l4 ,waite1 ,cambridge1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,scaling ,knife ,to ,prevent ,moles from ,damaging ,growing ,seeds ,the food most liked by the ground mole is the sprouts of peas and corn4 ,a way to protect these growing seeds is to dip them in kerosene just before planting4 ,the mole will not touch the oil-covered seed1 and the seeds are not injured in the least4--,contributed by ,j4 ,w4 ,bauholster1 ,gresham1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,the ,heliograph as ,it is ,used by ,neighboring ,boys to ,send ,messages on a ,clear ,day by ,flashing the ,sun's ,rays from ,one to the ,other1 ,which can be ,read as ,far as the ,eye can ,see the ,light ,how to ,make a ,heliograph ,by ,r4 ,b4 ,huey ,the heliograph which is used in the army provides a good method of sending messages by the reflection of the sun's rays4 ,in the mountains there are stations from which messages are sent by the heliograph for great distances1 and guides carry them for use in case of trouble or accident4 ,the wireless telegraph delivers messages by electricity through the air1 but the heliograph sends them by flashes of light4 ,the main part of the instrument is the mirror1 which should be about #d in4 square1 set in a wood frame and swung on trunnions made of two square-head bolts1 each #a_/d in4 in diameter1 and #a in4 long1 which are firmly held to the frame with brass strips1 #a_/b in4 wide1 and #c in4 long4 ,the strips are drilled centrally to admit the bolts1 and then drilled at each end for a screw to fasten them to the frame4 ,this construction is clearly shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts for ,making the ,mirror and ,sight ,rod ,which are ,placed on a ,base ,set on a ,tripod ,top1 the ,whole being ,adjusted to ,reflect the ,sun's ,rays in ,any ,direction ,desired 7,fig4 #a7 ,a hole is cut centrally through the backing of the frame and a small hole1 not over #a_/h in4 in diameter1 is scratched through the silvering on the glass4 ,if the trunnions are centered properly1 the small hole should be exactly in line with them and in the center4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,a ,u-shaped support is made of wood strips1 #c_/h in4 thick and #a in4 wide1 the length of the uprights being #c-a_/b in4 and the crosspiece connecting their lower ends a trifle longer than the width of the frame4 ,these are put together1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 with small brackets at the corners4 ,a slot1 #a_/b in4 deep and #a_/d in4 wide1 is cut into the upper end of each upright to receive the trunnions on the mirror frame4 ,nuts are turned on the bolt ends tightly1 to clamp the standard tops against the brass strips on the mirror frame4 ,the cross strip at the bottom is clamped to the base by means of a bolt1 #a-a_/b in4 long4 ,the hole for this bolt should be exactly below the peephole in the mirror and run through one end of the baseboard1 which is #c_/d in4 thick1 #b in4 wide and #aj in4 long4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,at the opposite end of the base1 place a sighting rod1 which is made as follows3 ,the rod is #a_/b in4 in diameter and #h in4 long4 ,the upper end is fitted with a piece of thick1 white cardboard1 cut #a_/d in4 in diameter and having a projecting shank #a in4 long1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the rod is placed in a #a_/b-;in4 hole bored in the end of the baseboard1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,to keep the rod from slipping through the hole a setscrew is made of a small bolt with the nut set in the edge of the baseboard1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts in ,detail for ,making the ,tripods444 7,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f7 ,the tripod head is formed of a wood disk1 #e in4 in diameter1 with a hole in the center1 and three small blocks of wood1 #a in4 square and #b in4 long1 nailed to the under side1 as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the tripod legs are made of light strips of wood1 #c_/h in4 thick1 #a in4 wide and #e ft4 long4 ,two of these strips1 nailed securely together to within #bj in4 of the top1 constitute one leg4 ,the upper unnailed ends are spread to slip over the blocks on the tripod top4 ,these ends are bored to loosely fit over the headless nails driven part way into the block ends4 ,one tripod leg is shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,illustration3 444and the ,shutter for ,flashing the ,light1444 7,fig4 #g1 ,fig4 #h7 ,the screen1 or shutter1 is mounted on a separate tripod and is shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,cut out two slats1 #c_/h in4 thick1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #f in4 long1 from hard wood1 and taper both edges of these slats down to #c_/af in4 ,small nails are driven into the ends of the slats and the heads are filed off so that the projecting ends will form trunnions for the slats to turn on4 ,make a frame of wood pieces1 #c_/d in4 thick and #b-a_/b in4 wide1 the opening in the frame being #f in4 square4 ,before nailing the frame together bore holes in the side uprights for the trunnions of the slats to turn in4 ,these holes are #a-c_/d in4 apart4 ,the frame is then nailed together and also nailed to the tripod top4 ,the shutter is operated with a key very similar to a telegraph key4 ,the construction of this key is shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,a part of a spool is fastened to a stick that is pivoted on the opposite side of the frame4 ,the key is connected to the slats in the frame with a bar and rod1 to which a coil spring is attached1 as shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,figure #i shows the positions of the tripods when the instrument is set to flash the sunlight through the shutter4 ,the regular telegraph code is used in flashing the light4 ,illustration3 444and ,diagram ,showing the ,location of the ,tripods to ,direct the ,light through the ,shutter 7,fig4 #i7 ,to set the instrument1 first turn the cardboard disk down to uncover the point of the sight rod1 then sight through the hole in the mirror and adjust the sight rod so that the tip end comes squarely in line with the receiving station4 ,when the instrument is properly sighted1 the shutter is set up directly in front of it and the cardboard disk is turned up to cover the end of the sight rod4 ,the mirror is then turned so that it reflects a beam of light with a small shadow spot showing in the center made by the peephole in the mirror1 which is directed to fall on the center of the cardboard sighting disk4 ,it will be quite easy to direct this shadow spot to the disk by holding a sheet of paper #f or #h in4 in front of the mirror and following the spot on the paper until it reaches the disk4 ,the flashes are made by manipulating the key operating the shutter in the same manner as a telegraph key4 ,twine ,cutter for ,use at a ,wrapping ,counter ,illustration ,a cutter for use at the wrapping counter in a drug or confectionery store may be easily made from a double-edged razor blade and a piece of thin board--a piece of cigar box will do4 ,cut the wood in the shape shown1 with a protecting piece over the edge of the razor4 ,screws are turned through the holes in the blade and into a support on the paper holder or any other convenient place4--,contributed by ,t4 ,f4 ,managhan1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,frosting ,brass ,a very fine ornamental finish1 resembling brushed work1 may be applied to brass articles by boiling them in a caustic-potash solution1 then rinsing in clear water1 whereupon they are dipped into dilute nitric acid until the oxide is removed1 then rinsed quickly and dried in sawdust4 ,the surface should be lacquered while the metal is hot4 ,a ,cupboard-,door ,spice-,box ,shelf ,to keep the spice boxes in a handy place where they would be together and not behind larger articles on the cupboard shelves1 ,i made a special spice-box shelf1 as shown1 to hang on the inside of the cupboard door4 ,the shelf swings out with the door as it opens1 and is made of two bracket ends to which a bottom board and front crosspiece is nailed4 ,the size of the shelf and its capacity are only limited by the space on the door4--,contributed by ,austin ,miller1 ,santa ,barbara1 ,california4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shelf will ,hold ,all the ,spice ,boxes and ,keep ,them ,handy ,starting a ,siphon ,illustration ,it is often necessary in a laboratory to siphon acids and poisonous liquids4 ,if a pump is used there is always danger of the liquid entering the pump and damaging it1 and1 besides1 a pump is not handy for this purpose4 ,to fill a siphon by suction from the mouth1 great care must be taken to keep from drawing the liquid into the mouth4 ,one of the best ways to fill a siphon is to procure a large dropper and having pressed all the air out of the bulb insert the end in the siphon4 ,releasing the pressure on the bulb will cause it to draw the liquid into the siphon4--,contributed by ,bedell ,m4 ,neubert1 ,newtown1 ,conn4 ,a ,window-,seat ,sewing ,box ,the combined window seat and sewing box shown was made by using a shoe-packing box for the foundation4 ,this was covered with matting and the edges and corners finished with wood strips1 #a_/b in4 thick and stained a dark red4 ,three trays were provided on the inside at the top part of the box1 each of the two upper ones occupying one-fourth of the box opening and sliding on a pair of guides fastened to the sides of the box while the lower tray is one-half the length of the box and slides on guides placed far enough below the upper trays to allow it to pass beneath these4 ,the three trays were used for keeping sewing materials1 such as buttons1 hooks and eyes1 etc4 ,when the trays are all moved to one end it gives access to the lower part of the box where the work or mending is kept out of sight4 ,illustration3 ,a ,window-,seat ,workbox for ,sewing ,materials1 ,made of an ,ordinary ,shoe-,packing ,box ,the inside of the cover is #a-a_/b in4 deep and shelves are arranged for thread and silk spools on either side1 the center space being used for the shears1 thimbles and scissors4 ,the little shelves are made of two pieces each half as wide as the depth of the box cover4 ,the first half of the shelf is fastened in place1 then a row of cotters attached with wood screws whereupon the other half of the shelf is put in place4 ,the edges of the cover are rounded on the outside to make an attractive seat4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spindles for the ,spools are ,made of ,cotters ,fastened with ,screws in the ,shelves ,while no dimensions are necessary1 as the box can be of any size to suit the maker it may be mentioned that the one shown is #bh in4 long1 #ab in wide and #af in4 deep4--,contributed by ,r4 ,b4 ,thomas1 ,lowell1 ,mass4 ,cutting a ,glass ,bottle ,illustration ,it is sometimes necessary to cut a heavy glass bottle or cylinder4 ,four methods are in use4 ,a carborundum disk having a thin edge1 if kept wet and rotated at a high speed1 will cut heavy glass1 but the cylinder must be fed against the wheel very gently4 ,a better way is to make a file mark--clean1 but not very deep--around the cylinder and heat it with a long slender flame while slowly rotating the cylinder all the time4 ,it is very important that the gas flame should not spread over the surface of the glass1 for it is only the file mark that should be heated4 ,a mere glancing touch is sufficient4 ,usually the glass will crack off in a very clean cut4 ,sometimes a fine platinum wire is wound around in the file mark and heated by an electric current4 ,less common is the trick of wrapping a strand of yarn soaked in turpentine around the mark and burning it4 ,the principle is the same in each case4 ,the unequal heating of the glass causes it to break4--,contributed by ,harry ,h4 ,holmes1 ,richmond1 ,ind4 ,to ,clean ,painted or ,frescoed ,walls ,use a paste made of vinegar and baking soda with a small amount of salt added4 ,the ingredients should be mixed in a large dish and applied to the wall with a cloth4 ,the grease and fly specks as well as the carbon deposits from kitchen smoke are quickly removed4 ,the mixture is harmless4 ,after the wall is thoroughly cleaned1 it should be washed with warm water and soap1 then dried with a cloth4 ,the mixture works equally well on enameled baths and glass or white porcelain4 ,securing ,papers in a ,mailing ,tube ,the illustrations show two methods of securing papers or photographs in a mailing tube4 ,in ,fig4 #a the mailing tube ,a is shown in cross section and the manner of running the string through the pasteboard walls illustrated4 ,the ends of the string are drawn up and tied over or under the label4 ,if the label is pasted over the string or string ends as they are tied1 it makes a sealed package which is rated as first-class matter4 ,illustration3 ,the ,string in ,either ,case ,prevents the ,papers from ,slipping ,out of the ,mailing ,tube 7,fig4 #a7 ,the second way is to run the cords in a cross form through holes near the ends1 as in ,fig4 #b1 then tie the knots as at ,,bb4 ,in each instance even if the papers fit the tube loosely1 they will be held securely and can be easily extracted when the knots are untied4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,cooling ,tube for a ,laboratory ,still ,a simple and very effective device to replace the cumbersome cooling or condensation coil of a still for the amateur's laboratory can be easily made as follows3 ,procure an ordinary straight glass tube of fairly large diameter and heat it in the flame of an alcohol lamp with the use of a blowpipe or in a ,bunsen burner with a very reduced flame so that only a small spot of the tube is brought to a red heat at one time ,then1 with a previously pointed and charred stick of wood--a penholder for instance--produce a small recess in the wall by pushing the charred end gently into the glowing part of the tube4 ,this procedure is repeated until the whole tube is thus provided with small recesses4 ,the indentations should be made in spiral lines around the tube1 thus increasing the surface that is in contact with the cooling water4 ,the operation of making the recesses is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the walls of the recesses should have a regular and uniform slant4 ,illustration3 ,method of ,indenting the ,walls of the ,glass ,tube and ,its ,application as a ,still 7,fig4 #a7 ,the tube thus produced can either be used as a rectifier 7,fig4 #b7 above a vessel1 for fractional distillation because it will allow the most volatile parts to pass out first1 or as a condenser 7,fig4 #c71 the arrangement of which needs no explanation4 ,the amateur will find it much easier to make this tube than to coil a very long one4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a ,comb ,cleaner ,illustration ,a good comb cleaner that does the work easily and quickly can be made from a worn-out varnish brush4 ,the brush selected should not be over #b in4 wide2 it should be thoroughly cleaned with benzine and the bristles cut to a bevel1 as shown in the sketch4 ,in use1 brush across the comb parallel with the teeth1 and the dirt between them will be easily removed4--,contributed by ,john ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,scraping ,off ,surplus ,water on a ,grindstone ,when using a grindstone1 an ample flow of water is desirable in order to insure good cutting1 and the objectionable spattering may be overcome by fastening a piece of leather to the grindstone frame so that its edge will bear lightly upon the stone just below the point where the work is held4 ,this will scrape off all surplus water from the grinding surface and prevent spattering4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,mont4 ,a ,paper ,drinking ,cup ,the cup is readily made of a piece of paper #h in4 square4 ,lay the paper on a flat surface1 turn the point ,a over to meet the point ,b and crease on the dotted line ,,cd1 ,fig4 #a1 then turn the corner ,d up to meet the line ,,bc1 ,fig4 #b1 making sure that the new edge ,,de is parallel with the lower edge and crease4 ,turn the corner ,c in the same manner1 that is1 fold it over to the point ,e and crease4 ,fold the two corners at ,b outward and down1 and crease1 and the cup is complete as shown in ,fig4 #c4--;,contributed by ,w4 ,douglas ,matthews1 ,chappaqua1 ,new ,york4 ,illustration3 ,several ,cups can be ,nested ,together and ,carried in the ,pocket or ,hand ,bag 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,homemade ,brush for ,cleaning ,upholstered ,furniture ,a durable brush for cleaning upholstered furniture can be made in the following manner3 ,procure a piece of haircloth1 which is made of horsehair woof and linen warp4 ,strips of haircloth1 cut lengthwise and #a-c_/d in4 wide1 are laid out smooth on a table and a strip of wrapping paper1 #a_/b in4 wide1 is firmly glued to one edge4 ,when this has dried1 take out the warp that is not covered by the paper4 ,brush the fringe of horsehair until it is straight and even1 and before commencing to wind1 measure #f in4 from one end and glue this portion to the side of a strip of soft wood1 #f in4 long1 #e_/h in4 wide and #a_/af in4 thick4 ,when dry1 wind the glued length of haircloth and paper around the wood strip1 applying glue to each separate turn of winding4 ,the turns should be kept flush on the side that has been glued and the fringed part brushed and straight4 ,illustration3 ,brush ,made of ,strip of ,upholsterers' ,haircloth with the ,warp ,removed and ,fastened to a ,handle ,the part to be glued to the handle must be perfectly even in its windings and held firmly in place while the glue is hardening4 ,the winding should be continued until the brush is #a-a_/b in4 thick4 ,the handle is made of a piece of wood1 #ad in4 long1 #a-c_/d in4 wide and #a_/b in4 thick4 ,wood that takes a cherry or mahogany stain is preferable4 ,shape it about as shown in the sketch and round off the edges4 ,the part to which the brush is to be attached must be given a light coat of glue4 ,when that has dried1 glue the back of the brush to it1 and after the glue has hardened1 glue a piece of gimp around the brush part1 then drive upholsterers' tacks into the gimp and wood1 #c_/d in4 apart4 ,stain and varnish the handle4 ,the back of the handle can be used as a beater1 and the brush for removing the dust4--,contributed by ,gertrude ,m4 ,bender1 ,utica1 ,n4 ,y4 ,removing ,calcium ,deposits on ,glass ,a good way to clean glass vessels in which hard water is boiled is to use the following mixture to remove not only the calcium deposits1 but also rust or sulphur stains that may be present4 ,the solution is a mixture of ammonia water and a few ounces of salt4 ,this should be placed in the glass vessel and boiled until the deposits disappear4 ,the ammonia water may be made of any strength by diluting if necessary4 ,a ,cold-,chisel ,guide ,when making long cuts with a cold chisel1 it is almost impossible to guide the chisel edge along a line made with a scriber or pencil and have a straight cut4 ,i find that it is much easier to use a guide1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the guide is made of a piece of wood1 about #a ft4 long and #a-a_/b in4 wide4 ,a slot is cut in the center1 wide enough to receive the chisel edge snugly1 and about #i in4 long4 ,the guide is clamped to the work1 and the cold chisel slipped along in the slot as it is successively hit with a hammer4--,contributed by ,g4 ,h4 ,holter1 ,jasper1 ,minn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,guide ,makes ,it ,easy to ,follow along a ,straight ,line ,when ,cutting with a ,cold ,chisel ,care of ,paintbrushes ,illustration ,when laying aside paintbrushes1 the usual custom is to place them in water and then forget all about them until needed again1 with the result that the water usually is found more or less evaporated and the brushes hardened4 ,if a quantity of oil1 ,a1 is poured on the water ,b1 it will prevent this evaporation and keep the brushes in good shape4 ,filter in a ,pump ,spout ,illustration ,the sketch shows how to place an ordinary sponge in a pump spout1 to filter out sand and dirt particles that may come up with the water as it is pumped4 ,a wire is fastened in the sponge so that it can be easily taken out for washing4 ,when washing the sponge give the pump handle a few strokes so that the dirt collected in the spout will be washed out4 ,do not press the sponge too tightly into the spout1 as this will stop the flow of water4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,homewood1 ,waterloo1 ,iowa4 ,brown ,stain for ,wood ,bichromate of potassium gives a lustrous1 rich1 light to dark brown stain on woods4 ,the crystals are first dissolved into a saturated solution1 which is then diluted with water4 ,the stained surface needs no rubbing1 as the stain leaves the wood perfectly clear for any desired finish4 ,the satinlike appearance of wood treated by this stain cannot be produced with any of the pigment stains4--,contributed by ,august ,meyer4 ,an ,egg ,boiler ,in boiling eggs the usual method of dropping the eggs from a spoon into the boiling water often results in a burn1 as well as in cracking of the eggs by the fall4 ,in removing the eggs from the hot water and taking one out at a time1 no two will be cooked alike4 ,to overcome these difficulties ,i constructed an egg boiler as illustrated4 ,illustration3 ,the ,eggs are ,prevented from ,becoming ,cracked and ,all are ,easily ,handled in ,one ,operation ,a pan was procured--tin or aluminum as desired--about #a in4 deep and #e-a_/b in4 in diameter1 and holes were drilled in the bottom having dimensions as shown4 ,a handle was attached to the center with washers and nuts4 ,the small ends of the eggs are set in the #a-c_/h-;in4 holes and the whole pan set in a vessel of boiling water4 ,when the boiling is completed1 the entire lot of eggs are removed at the same time4 ,as the device with its load of cooked eggs is quite pleasing in appearance1 it may be set on a plate and the eggs served from it on the table4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,removing ,black ,deposit an ,bathtubs ,a good way to remove the black deposit left on bathtubs by the water is to use a strong solution of sulphuric acid4 ,the acid should be poured on the discolored enameled surface and washed around with a cloth4 ,the acid should not touch the hands so it is best to use a stick to move the cloth4 ,neither should it be allowed to touch the metal parts1 but if this happens1 no harm will result if it is quickly rubbed off with a cloth and water then applied4 ,in using this acid never pour water into the acid1 but always pour the acid into the water4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,a ,stocking-,stretcher ,form ,a simple as well as inexpensive device for preventing the shrinking of stockings1 more particularly those of children1 after they have been washed1 thus saving great wear and tear on the fabrics and increasing their length of life1 is shown in the illustration4 ,the stretcher can be made by anyone1 a knowledge of woodcraft or art being unnecessary4 ,if used1 the device will prove to effect quite a saving in money1 labor and worry in the course of a year4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spring of the ,two ,parts ,tends to ,hold the ,yarn and ,keep ,it from ,shrinking ,place a new and unused stocking1 that properly fits the foot1 flat on a heavy piece of cardboard or a wood board1 if desired1 and mark an outline of the stocking on the board with a pencil4 ,cut out the design with a penknife or heavy pair of scissors and smooth the edges4 ,a design having the same shape and size as the stocking results4 ,duplicate boards can be easily made4 ,place a spool1 such as used to hold the finest silk thread1 near the upper end of the first form and on top of this place the second4 ,then drive a nail through the boards and spool and clinch it1 or better still1 use a small bolt4 ,when the stockings are washed and the dampness wrung out as well as possible1 stretch them over the boards and hang them up to dry4 ,they will retain their shape and are easily ironed4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,p4 ,kennedy1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,stick ,holder for a ,chopping ,block ,having a lot of branch wood1 from #a_/b in4 to #a in4 in diameter1 to saw1 and not wishing to bother with a sawbuck1 ,i rigged up a chopping block1 as shown in the sketch1 by fastening a piece of board to one side of the block with small lag screws4 ,the piece to be sawed was laid across the block in the notch4 ,if the piece is held down on the block with one foot1 the wood is very easily sawn4--,contributed by ,wilfred ,b4 ,sylvester1 ,reading1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,notched ,board ,fastened to the ,chopping ,block ,turns ,it into a ,sawbuck ,cleaning ,gold and ,platinum ,a good way to clean gold or platinum jewelry is to first brush with soapsuds1 then dust magnesia powder over the article and allow it to dry4 ,a few rubs with a cloth makes the article shine with great luster4 ,as magnesia powder is highly inflammable1 it must be kept away from fire4 ,a ,twine ,spool ,the pieces of twine used in tying parcels delivered to a residence are either thrown away or tied together and wound into a ball for future use4 ,the method ,i use for keeping the pieces of twine is to wind them over a discarded photographic-film spool4 ,the spool was slipped on a finishing nail driven into the wall4 ,the crank for turning the spool was made of a piece of wire1 bent as shown and slipped into the slot end of the spool4 ,one end of the first piece of string was tied to the core and then wound around it1 the next piece tied to the first and wound up1 and so on1 as the strings were taken from the packages from time to time4 ,when a string is needed for any purpose ,i always know where to find it1 and it is easier to take it from the spool than from a ball4--,contributed by ,w4 ,resseguie1 ,susquehanna1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,film ,spool as ,it is ,attached to a ,wall1 and the ,crank for ,turning ,it ,reinforcing ,chair ,bottoms ,embossed-leather-board chair bottoms can be made as serviceable as leather in the following manner3 ,turn the chair upside down and fill the hollow beneath the seat with excelsior1 soft rags or fine shavings1 then nail a #a_/d-;in4 wood bottom over the filling with brads4 ,make the wood bottom #a_/b or #c_/d in4 larger than the opening4 ,it will thus not be seen1 and the seat will last as long as the chair4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,sanford1 ,pasadena1 ,california4 ,a ,novelty ,chain ,an inexpensive chain for hanging painted glass panels1 transparencies or photographs can be made by joining paper clips together to form the links4 ,a box of #ajj clips will make a chain about #aj ft4 long4 ,such a chain can be made in a few minutes and a length of #aj ft4 will hold about #d lb4 ,illustration3 ,the ,paper-,clip ,links may be ,joined to ,make a ,chain of ,any ,desired ,length ,if the chain is to be used for holding photographs1 each inner loop end is bent out slightly4 ,closet ,holders for ,linen ,a combination drawer and shelf for a linen closet is much better than a shelf or a drawer4 ,it is constructed in the manner of a drawer with sides and a back1 the front being open and the ends of the sides cut rounding4 ,a clip is attached to the under side of the bottom1 near the front edge1 to provide a means for pulling out the holder4 ,illustration3 ,the ,holder can be ,pulled ,out ,like a ,drawer and is as ,accessible as a ,shelf ,sheets1 towels1 table cloths1 napkins1 etc41 can be neatly piled on the holder and can be seen without digging down to the bottom4 ,it has the advantage over the shelf that it can be pulled out without anything falling off1 and the linen on the back part can be easily reached as well as that in front4 ,the closet may contain as many holders as is necessary and should be provided with a door for keeping out dust4--,contributed by ,h4 ,a4 ,sullwold1 ,st4 ,paul1 ,minn4 ,preserving ,dry ,batteries ,the life of dry batteries1 which are to be used in wet or damp places1 may be considerably lengthened by being treated in the following manner3 ,the batteries are placed in glass jars a little wider and higher than themselves4 ,a layer of dry sawdust is placed in the bottom1 for the battery to rest on1 and the sides are packed with sawdust to within #a_/b in4 of the top4 ,waterproof wires are connected to the binding posts and melted paraffin poured over the battery to the top of the jar4 ,the carbon and zinc terminals should be marked to avoid trouble when connecting several cells together4 ,batteries treated in this manner are waterproof and can be submerged in water if necessary4--,contributed by ,olaf ,tronnes1 ,evanston1 ,ill4 ,a ,cleaner for ,brass ,in some recent laboratory experiments the following solution was found to cleanse brass very quickly without harm to the hands or the metal4 ,an ounce of alum was put into a pint of boiling water and the solution rubbed on the brass with a cloth4 ,stains as well as tarnish were quickly removed4 ,the solution is inexpensive and easily prepared4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,homemade ,graduate ,illustration ,if a certain quantity of liquid is to be frequently measured out1 it is best to have a graduate marked for this amount without any other markings upon it4 ,to make a graduate for this purpose1 procure a pickle or olive bottle of the type shown in the drawing and file a vertical line1 ,a1 on each side4 ,these lines should be at least #a_/h in4 wide4 ,place the bottle on a level surface and pour in the amount desired to be measured4 ,mark on each vertical line with a lead pencil and connect this mark or marks with lines1 filed as shown at ,,bb4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,mending a ,break in ,felt ,a good way to mend partially broken felt or a felt hat is to hold a lighted match under the break and smooth out the crevice with the hand4 ,the shellac in the felt is melted by the heat and runs together1 mending the felt in such a way that the break is hardly noticeable4 ,this method may also be used to mend felt articles in the laboratory4 ,imitating ,ebony on ,oak ,the wood is immersed for #dh hours in a warm solution of alum and sprinkled several times with the following mixture3 ,one part of logwood of the best quality is boiled with #aj parts of water1 then it is filtered through linen and the liquid evaporated at a low temperature until its volume is reduced by one-half4 ,to every quart of this bath are added #aj to #ae drops of a saturate of soluble indigo entirely neutral in reaction4 ,smaller pieces may be steeped for a time in this solution1 then the wood is rubbed with a saturated and filtered solution of verdigris in warm1 concentrated acetic acid1 and this operation continued until a black color of the desired intensity is obtained4 ,the oak wood dyed in this manner is very similar to real ebony4 ,tongue ,holder for a ,boy's ,wagon ,to prevent any mishap when coasting in a boy's play wagon fasten the tongue with a coil spring so that it will be kept in a vertical position4 ,the tongue is always out of the way when it is not used for drawing the wagon4 ,the spring is only strong enough to hold the tongue1 so that when this is used for pulling there is little or no tendency of the spring to draw the tongue upward4 ,the coil spring is fastened with one screweye in the tongue and one in the front axle4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,f4 ,benson1 ,brockton1 ,massachusetts4 ,illustration3 ,holder for the ,wagon ,tongue to ,keep ,it in a ,vertical ,position ,when ,not in ,use ,gluing ,small ,mitered ,frames ,the mechanic who attempts to fasten a mitered frame in the home workshop usually comes to grief4 ,this is due to lack of proper facilities for holding the frame straight and out of wind1 and for clamping or drawing the miter joint together after the glue has been applied4 ,the little device shown in the sketch1 if properly made and used1 does away with the usual difficulties and annoyances4 ,it consists of a triangular block of wood with raised strips on the two edges that make the right angle1 and the clamping piece with the wood screw through the center on the long side4 ,the raised strips are made somewhat thinner than the frame to be fastened1 as the clamping piece should bear on the frame and not on the strips2 the function of the strips being to hold the frame square4 ,the triangular block should be large enough to take the corner of the frame and leave room enough for the wood screw that holds it in place on the block4 ,four of these blocks will be necessary and they should be used in conjunction with pinch dogs4 ,these dogs come in different sizes and may be purchased at supply stores or made as shown4 ,the outside of the legs should be straight and parallel and the inside tapered so as to draw the joint together4 ,illustration3 ,clamp for ,holding the ,corner of a ,frame ,while ,gluing and ,fastening the ,mitered ,joint ,when a joint is ready to be glued1 a piece of paper is placed on the block under the joint to keep it from sticking4 ,apply the glue and push the two sides into the corner formed by the raised strips1 the dog is then driven in lightly and the clamping piece screwed down tightly1 and if the miter has been properly cut1 a nice close-jointed and square corner will be the result4--,contributed by ,j4 ,shelly1 ,brooklyn1 ,new ,york4 ,handle ,attachment for a ,sickle ,for cutting around flower beds or bushes and in close places ,i find that an extension handle for a sickle is quite an assistance4 ,the auxiliary handle is bound to the sickle handle with wire at the ends and is further fastened with a screw in the center4 ,the arrows show the directions in which the hands should be moved in working the sickle4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,the ,extension ,handle ,makes ,it ,much ,easier to ,control the ,sickle in ,cutting around ,obstacles ,a ,clothesline for ,small ,goods ,handkerchiefs and small pieces included in the week's laundry are usually quite troublesome to hang with the larger pieces1 and for this reason ,i constructed a special line for the small goods4 ,a line was cut to fit between two porch posts and a hook made of galvanized wire tied to each end1 staples being driven into the posts to receive them4 ,three or four wire grips were formed and attached to the line4 ,it was only necessary to draw the corner of a handkerchief into the grip as it was wrung out1 placing several in each grip4 ,the line with its load was then carried out and attached between the porch posts4 ,this made it unnecessary to look through the clothes for the small articles4 ,it also prevented chilling the fingers and no pins were needed4--,contributed by ,r4 ,d4 ,livingston1 ,hopkinton1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,line and ,holders are ,always ,together and can be ,washed as the ,clothes ,automatically ,controlled ,ice-,box ,lights ,often the ice box is placed in a dark closet or some out-of-the-way place1 and it is almost impossible to locate articles already in the box or put others away without considerable inconvenience on account of the lack of proper light4 ,this difficulty can be easily overcome by mounting a small electric lamp in each of the different compartments of the box1 which will be automatically lighted when the lid of the box is raised or the door opened4 ,the circuit through the lamp is controlled by a special switch mounted in such a way that its contacts are open when the doors and lid of the box are closed4 ,a diagram of the circuit is given in ,fig4 #a1 which shows three lamps1 each controlled by a separate switch1 connected in parallel to a battery of several dry cells4 ,the lamps should be of low voltage and need not be very high in candlepower4 ,the number of cells needed in the battery will depend upon the voltage of the lamps4 ,the voltage of the battery and the rated voltage of the lamps should be approximately the same4 ,illustration3 ,the ,lamps will be ,automatically ,lighted ,when the ,door of the ,ice ,box is ,opened 7,fig4 #a7 ,a special switch that will serve the above purpose is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,it consists of two pieces of spring brass1 ,a and ,b1 about #c_/h in4 wide1 bent into the forms shown4 ,these pieces are mounted in a recess cut in the jamb of the door or lid in such a way that the free end of the piece ,a is held away from the piece ,b when the door or lid is closed4 ,when the lid of the box or the door is open the two springs come in contact and the lamp lights2 upon closing the lid or door the contact is broken and the lamp goes out4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,a good quality of rubber-insulated copper wire should be used in making the connections1 and all parts should be as well protected from moisture and the possibilities of mechanical abuse as possible4 ,it would be best to tape the lamps in the sockets with a piece of friction tape so as to prevent moisture getting into the socket and1 perhaps1 shortening the lamp4 ,a short piece of brass tubing can be mounted around the lamp to protect it mechanically4 ,be sure to place the batteries where they will be kept dry4 ,a ,bottle-,cap ,lifter ,illustration ,to remove the crimped bottle cover so extensively used requires a special lifter1 the corkscrew being of little use for this purpose4 ,when a cap-cover remover is not at hand1 prepare a pocketknife in the manner shown1 and it makes an excellent substitute4 ,it only requires a small notch filed in the heel of the blade1 which does not interfere with the ordinary use of the knife in the least4--,contributed by ,john ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,indiana4 99 99 99 99 99 ,ants may be effectively destroyed by placing a coop with a chicken in it over the hill4 ,a ,mechanical ,bicycle ,horn ,the body of the horn ,a is made of metal1 about #c in4 in diameter1 with a screw cover4 ,the shaft ,b1 to which is attached a driving pulley1 ,c1 and a ratchet wheel1 ,d1 is fitted in holes drilled through the diameter of the body4 ,the diaphragm ,e is clamped1 between the edge of the body and the cover1 on a seat made of rubber rings1 ,f1 and carries a contact device1 ,g1 that is riveted to its center4 ,the diaphragm should be set so that the contact will touch the ends of the ratchets4 ,illustration3 ,the ,horn is ,sounded by ,making ,connections with the ,moving ,surface of the ,tire ,a metal cone is fastened in an opening cut in the center of the cover1 over the diaphragm4 ,the back of the body is fitted with a bracket for attaching it to the front fork on a bicycle4 ,the lever ,h carries an idler pulley which is forced against the bicycle tire and the pulley ,c by means of a cord1 ,j4 ,adjusting the diaphragm contact on the ratchet wheel will change the tone of the horn4--,contributed by ,p4 ,mertz1 ,jamaica1 ,l4 ,i4 ,retarder for ,plaster of ,paris ,when it is desired to lengthen the time of setting after preparing plaster of ,paris1 dissolve #a oz4 of citric acid in water used for mixing #ajj lb4 of plaster1 and it will retard the setting for about three hours4 ,an ,inkwell ,stopper ,illustration ,a good way to keep an inkwell of the type shown in the sketch clean is to place a marble over the opening4 ,the marble keeps out flies and dust1 is easily rolled aside and is no obstacle to the pen entering the well4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pennsylvania4 ,a ,grass ,rake ,this adaptation of an ordinary iron rake for use on a lawn was the outcome of not having a lawn rake at hand4 ,two spools1 each #a-a_/b in4 in diameter1 were procured and one forced on each end tooth of the rake4 ,the spools were forced on the teeth just far enough to allow the rake to slide on the ground and prevent the other teeth from digging out the grass4 ,the end of the spools may be rounded and smoothed so that they will slide easily on the ground4--,contributed by ,h4 ,e4 ,gray1 ,montclair1 ,n4 ,j4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spools ,prevent the ,teeth from ,injuring the ,grass ,roots as the ,rake ,passes over the ,ground ,a ,staple ,puller ,illustration ,a very simple way to pull a staple is to use the claws of an ordinary carpenter's hammer and a nail1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the staple can be removed quickly without being bent1 and no damage to the material into which it was driven will result4 ,to ,remove ,acid ,stains from ,cloth ,apply pearlash directly to the stain1 allowing it to set a minute or two1 then boil the article in soap water for several minutes4 ,the method is harmless and inexpensive1 and can be used by anyone4 ,repairing ,rocker on a ,chair ,illustration ,the tenons on the posts of a rocking chair being broken off so close to the rocker that it was impossible to make the ordinary repairs1 four window-shade-roller brackets were used in the following manner3 ,the metal was straightened so that it would lie flat and two brackets were used on the end of each post4 ,this made a neat and strong repair4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,schmidt1 ,baltimore1 ,md4 ,electric-,lamp ,reflector for a ,target ,illustration ,an ordinary #a-lb4 coffee can may be quickly fashioned into a most effective reflector for an electric bulb4 ,the light is projected upon the target while the marksman's eyes are shielded4 ,of course1 this device can be used for other purposes4 ,the can is shaped into a reflector by cutting it open along one side with a pair of snips1 then following the circumference of the bottom halfway around on each side4 ,bend the flaps outward as far as desired and cut a hole in the bottom just large enough to insert the bulb1 as shown4--,contributed by ,burke ,jenkins1 ,port ,washington1 ,l4 ,i4 99 99 99 99 99 ,linoleum may be renewed by applying floor wax in liquid form4 ,making ,small ,taps ,the owner of a private workshop has need for taps and occasionally wishes to make them1 not because they are cheaper1 but for the sake of experience or to get some special thread4 ,in cutting the flutes1 whether it be by hand or in a shaper1 it is a good plan to give the flutes an angle1 that is1 to cut them1 not parallel with the axis of the tap1 but at an angle of #e to #ae deg4 with the center line4 ,this makes the tap cut easier1 giving it a wedge action instead of just simply pushing the metal off4 ,the same method applies to counterbores and countersinks1 which1 when so made1 take less power to drive4 ,sink a ,substitute for a ,dishpan ,illustration ,on special occasions when company is entertained or in large families1 it is almost impossible to wash all the dishes in an ordinary dishpan2 in fact1 the large platters will not go in at all1 so ,i devised the following method as a substitute for a larger pan4 ,a tin disk was cut from the top of a tomato can with a can opener so as to be as round as possible1 then a piece of cheesecloth was folded into an even square1 the disk placed in the center and all four corners of the cloth drawn over to the center of the disk4 ,a nail was driven through the center of the disk1 to make a hole1 through which a string was drawn with the nail and tied to it to form a loop on the head4 ,this is used to stop the sink drain4 ,when this is put over the drain outlet the sink may be used as a dishpan4 ,the same result could be obtained a little better with a piece of an old rubber boot or rubber coat1 but usually this material is not at hand1 and the cheesecloth will do almost as well4--,contributed by ,hannah ,jennings1 ,chicago4 ,how to ,make ,small ,coil ,springs ,procure a nut1 having a small thread that will admit the size of the wire to be used in making the spring4 ,cut a small notch to the depth of the thread where the thread starts1 and procure a smooth rod that will pass snugly through the threads of the nut4 ,shape one end of the rod to fit a carpenter's brace1 if there is no drill chuck at hand1 and drill a hole in the other end to admit one end of the spring wire4 ,illustration3 ,the ,threads in the ,nut ,will ,guide as ,well as ,coil the ,spring ,evenly ,bend the wire at right angles and insert the end in the hole4 ,place the end of the rod in the nut1 which should be gripped in a vise1 and turn the rod1 at the same time seeing that the wire is guided into the notch cut at the start of the thread4 ,the wire will follow the thread of the nut and make a perfect spring of an even opening throughout its length4 ,closed or open coils can be made by using a nut having the proper number of threads4--,contributed by ,a4 ,spencer1 ,kinston1 ,n4 ,c4 ,a ,pruning-,saw ,guard ,the double-edged pruning saw with coarse teeth on one side and fine on the other would be far more widely used1 if it were not for the fact that the unused edge so often injures the bark of the trunk when the saw is being used4 ,a very satisfactory guard may be quickly made of a brass curtain rod by prying it apart slightly at the seam and cutting a suitable length to fit over the edge1 as shown in the sketch4 ,this will cling to the saw blade by its own tension4--,contributed by ,james ,h4 ,brundage1 ,katonah1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,teeth on the ,unused ,edge are ,covered with a ,piece of ,brass ,curtain ,rod ,illustration ,home-,made ,motion-,picture ,camera and ,projector ,by ,charles ,frank ,in ,three ,parts--,part ,i ,illustration3 7,fig4 #a7 ,motion pictures are made and reproduced by means of a camera and projector1 each having a similar mechanism that would seem entirely too complicated for the average person to construct at home1 yet a correspondent of the ,nickelodeon has devised a simple rotary cylinder shutter that can be substituted for the complicated parts4 ,while this simple cylinder shutter is not claimed to be infringing on existing patents1 yet1 as it has no commercial value1 there would be no objection on this score4 ,the instruments described are nothing more than toys1 and if the amateur photographer can secure a few dozen feet of animated photographs about the home that are dear to his heart1 and reproduce them on a screen1 it will have served its purpose4 ,the camera and projector described uses standard film1 #a-c_/h in4 wide1 with perforations every #c_/af in4 ,the ,camera ,the ordinary hand camera for making still pictures consists of a light-tight box with a lens at one end and a sensitized plate or film at the other4 ,the motion-picture camera 7,fig4 #a7 is nothing more than a hand camera with a mechanical device for stepping a long roll of film through a space in the focal plane of the lens at a speed of about #af pictures a second1 and stopping the film long enough to make the requisite exposure on each division4 ,the first thing to consider is the lens4 ,a lens having ordinary speed for a hand camera1 and one with about #c in4 focal length will give satisfactory results4 ,if one does not care to purchase a lens1 a small #a-a_/b in4 or #b in4 reading glass can be used1 if it is stopped down1 or a lens may be taken from a hand camera4 ,the width of the camera from front to back 7,w1 ,fig4 #b7 must be determined by the focal length of the lens4 ,the dimensions given in the drawing are only approximate1 and they can be changed if the camera is to be used in making an extra long film negative4 ,the roll of unexposed film 7,a1 ,fig4 #b7 is placed on a small shaft between ,u-shaped bearings1 made of sheet metal and screwed to the top board of the camera4 ,the lens ,b is set in the front board at a point #d in4 below the top4 ,if a large roll of film is to be used1 this distance must be greater to allow room for the film roll in the top of the camera4 ,the cylinder ,c1 which acts as a shutter and intermittent movement1 revolves directly behind and in the path of the light passing through the lens4 ,partitions1 ,,dd1 are set in grooves cut in the boards1 forming the sides of the camera4 ,these partitions are to keep the light1 which may be diffused from the lens1 from striking the film at either side of the shutter1 and at the same time acting as guides for the film at the rear end of the camera4 ,their edges at the back are covered with black velvet4 ,the back of the box is a hinged door1 rabbeted on all edges1 and opening at the side to allow the insertion and removal of the film1 and also acting as a guide for the film when closed4 ,a strip of black velvet1 ,e1 a little wider than the film1 is pasted to the inside surface of the door1 so that it bears lightly against the back edges of the partitions ,,dd4 ,the film passes between the edges of the partitions and the velvet on the door with some friction1 which keeps it from moving except when pulled through with the roller shutter4 ,a wire-staple guide1 ,f1 is fastened in the lower partition1 through which the end of the film is passed before closing the door4 ,the film as it is run through drops in folds in the bottom of the box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--;,details of ,camera ,the rotary cylinder shutter is the heart of the machine and should be made well and strictly according to the dimensions4 ,the detail of this part is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,a rectangular opening is mortised through one of its diameters to admit light on the film when in certain positions4 ,the cylinder is of wood with a #a_/d in4 steel rod inserted in the center of each end for axles4 ,a small grooved pulley 7,g1 ,fig4 #b71 about #a in4 in diameter1 is fastened to the outer end of one of these rods4 ,the cylinder is revolved by a round belt from a drive wheel1 ,h1 #c or #c-a_/b in4 in diameter and turned by the aid of a crankpin4 ,owing to the backward rotation of the cylinder1 the belt must be crossed between the drive wheel ,h1 and the pulley ,g4 ,the projections or sprockets1 ,fig4 #c1 must be accurately set at a distance of #c_/h in4 from the #ij deg4 point1 using the center of the mortised hole as a base4 ,these projections can be pins or small staples1 but they must not be over #a_/af in4 in size4 ,the base of the sprockets must fit the hole in the film snugly1 but the points should be slightly rounding1 so that they will easily enter the perforations4 ,when the upper sprocket1 which is approaching the film1 engages a perforation1 just below the upper partition1 it will carry the film downward until the sprocket disengages from the perforation at the lower partition4 ,the distance of travel must be exactly #c_/d in41 as that is the height of each picture4 ,the cylinder requires some adjustment to meet this condition2 therefore the axles are made to revolve in holes bored in two strips of wood1 ,,jj1 which can be moved forward or backward to obtain the proper distance from the film4 ,to allow for this movement1 the axles pass through slots cut in the sides of the camera box instead of round holes4 ,the strips ,,jj are fastened temporarily and when the correct position for the cylinder is found1 they are permanently fastened to the box4 ,grooves1 ,k1 are cut through the black velvet and into the back of the door to allow a space for the sprockets to pass through freely4 ,the inside of the box should be painted a dead black1 and black paper pasted on all corners and joints4 ,black velvet is pasted in the rabbet of the door to insure a light-tight joint when the door is closed4 ,the cylinder shutter is also painted a dead black inside and out4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #c--;,details of ,shutter ,the cylinder in revolving exposes the film immediately behind it through the mortised hole4 ,the sprockets or cylinder does not touch the film while the exposure is being made1 but as the hole turns toward a perpendicular position1 the sprockets catch the perforations of the film and it moves down #c_/d in4 ,just as soon as the sprockets disengage the film1 the shutter exposes the next section of film1 and so on as rapidly as the cylinder is turned1 but the average should be about #af pictures per second4 ,a view finder must be supplied so the field covered by the lens can be determined4 ,such a finder is made of two pieces of metal1 ,l and ,m1 bent ,l-shaped and fastened to the top of the camera box4 ,one of the pieces 7,l7 has a rectangular opening #a in4 wide and #c_/d in4 high1 and the other 7,m7 is drilled with a #a_/h in4 drill1 the distance between the two pieces being the focal length of the lens4 ,one eye applied to the #a_/h in4 hole in the piece ,m will see through the rectangular hole in the piece ,l about the same field as covered by the lens4 ,the pieces should be accurately placed and fastened on the box when the camera is set1 so that the lens will throw the same portion of the picture on the space where the film passes as will be seen through the finder4 ,a ,swimming ,raft ,swimming is learned only by experience and to get this experience one must not be afraid to trust himself in the water4 ,this is sometimes accomplished by the use of a swimming raft or water wings4 ,as the water wings need to be inflated frequently1 ,i made a swimming raft instead1 in the following manner3 ,two logs1 about #f or #g ft4 long and about #h in4 in diameter1 were fastened together with large nails1 as shown in the illustration1 and a piece of burlap or other strong material was nailed across the center with slack enough for it to be partially submerged4 ,illustration3 ,plan of ,raft ,the middle of the band1 its depth1 etc41 can be adjusted to suit the user4 ,be sure to remove all the roughness of the logs and boards with a rasp and sandpaper4--,contributed by ,w4 ,p4 ,johnston1 ,sumner1 ,ill4 ,removing ,finger ,marks on ,books ,dampen a piece of wash leather and use it to rub pumice on the spot to be cleaned4 ,brush off the pumice and rub again with a piece of dry wash leather4 ,tightening a ,tennis ,net ,anyone who has ever played tennis will readily see the advantage of the net-tightening device shown1 in preference to the old method of pulling the net tight by hand4 ,all that is necessary to make the device is #a ft4 of ordinary gas or water pipe1 #h or #aj in4 of #a_/b-;in4 iron bar1 and two twenty-penny nails4 ,the posts generally used are #f by #f in4 ,about #d in4 from the top of the post bore a #a-;in4 hole1 parallel with the direction the rope is to run4 ,on the inside surface of the post bore four #a_/d-;in4 holes4 ,illustration3 ,tightener on ,post ,drill a #a_/b-;in4 hole #a in4 from one end of the pipe1 and a #a_/d-;in4 hole #a in4 from the other end4 ,put the iron bar in the #a_/b-;in4 hole1 tie the rope around the pipe and bar at ,a and wind4 ,with the leverage of the iron bar one can readily pull the net to any desired tightness4 ,after the net is drawn in position1 put one of the nails through the #a_/d-;in4 hole in the pipe and the other in one of the #a_/d-;in4 holes in the post4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,s4 ,looper1 ,gainesville1 ,ga4 ,holding ,fishing-,rod ,joints ,together ,the addition of two or three screweyes properly placed in a jointed fishing rod of the ordinary type will prove decidedly worth while1 as the joints will often pull out easily when they should not and stick tightly when they should pull apart4 ,assemble the rod and bore small holes through the brass sockets into the joints as shown in ,fig4 #a and place some screweyes into the holes4 ,mark the joints so that the holes in the joints and holes in the brass sockets will always be in the same position4 ,illustration3 ,screweye in ,joint 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the screweyes prevent the joints from pulling out when an effort is made to free the line from some object in which it has become entangled4 ,they also act as guides for the line4 ,should the joints fit too tightly1 scrape the ends until they slip easily into the sockets1 as the screweyes will hold them properly1 even if they fit a little loose after the scraping4 ,roller ,skate on a ,bicycle ,wheel ,illustration ,when the front tire on a bicycle will not hold and needs to be taken to a repair shop1 strap or tie a roller skate to the rim of the wheel1 as shown1 and no trouble will be experienced in wheeling or riding the bicycle to the shop4--,contributed by ,k4 ,chase ,winslow1 ,elizabeth1 ,n4 ,j4 ,rope ,oarlocks ,having considerable trouble because of breaking of oarlocks1 ,i devised a successful way by which the difficulty was overcome4 ,the device is extremely simple and is nothing more than a piece of rope fastened to the gunwale as shown in the sketch4--,contributed by ,arthur ,l4 ,chetlain1 ,rogers ,park1 ,illinois4 ,illustration3 ,piece of ,rope in ,place ,home-,made ,motion-,picture ,camera and ,projector ,in ,three ,parts--,part ,,ii ,developing ,after having exposed the film in the camera1 the next steps are to develop and make a positive film from the negative4 ,the developing and exposing of the film for the positive are the same as in ordinary photography for making negatives and lantern slides1 the only difference being in the apparatus for handling the long films4 ,one of the simplest ways of developing a long film is to use a large tray in connection with a cross arm having upright pins around which the film is wrapped in a continuous spiral4 ,a film #ajj ft4 long would require a tray #ah by #bb in41 with pins set in the cross arm about #c_/h in4 apart4 ,this method of developing is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d--;,cross ,arms with ,pins ,a long film can be developed in a small tray by using two flanged wheels or spools mounted on a frame 7,fig4 #e7 that holds them directly above the liquid in the tray4 ,the spools have a wood core or center with metal sides of sufficient diameter to take in the length of film to be developed4 ,one end of the undeveloped film is attached to one spool and then wound upon it1 then the other end is passed through the guides1 gelatine side down1 and fastened to the other spool4 ,the film is first run slowly through a water bath until it is thoroughly saturated1 then it is passed through the developing solution again and again until the proper density is secured4 ,the trays can be easily removed and others substituted for fixing1 washing1 hardening and soaking1 the film being passed through each solution in the same manner4 ,before developing either negative or positive film1 small test strips should be run through the solution so that the proper timing and treating of the full-length strip will correspond to the test strip4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #e--;,developing ,long ,films ,a reel should be prepared for drying the film4 ,this can be made of small slats placed around two disks to form a drum 7,fig4 #f7 about #a-a_/b ft4 in diameter and #b-a_/b ft4 long4 ,after the film has been passed through the various solutions and is ready for drying1 it is wound spirally around on the slats with the gelatine side out1 and the whole hung up to dry4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #f--;,drying ,reel ,printing ,the printing to make the transparency is accomplished by a very simple arrangement4 ,the negative and positive films must be drawn through a space admitting light while their gelatine surfaces are in close contact4 ,a box may be constructed in several ways1 but the one shown in ,fig4 #g illustrates the necessary parts and their relative positions4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #g--,printing ,machine ,the sprocket ,a is placed directly back of the opening ,b which may be regulated to admit the proper light4 ,the sprocket can be purchased from a moving-picture stock house cheaply1 but if the builder so desires1 one can be made from wood turned up about #a in4 in diameter1 or so that the circumference will receive sprockets at points #c_/af in4 apart4 ,the sprockets are made of metal pins driven into the wood4 ,two rows of them are placed around the wood cylinder about #a-a_/h in4 apart4 ,the cylinder is provided with a small metal shaft at each end which turns in round holes or bearings in the sides of the box4 ,one of the shafts should project through the side of the box and have a grooved wheel1 ,c1 attached4 ,the sprocket cylinder is driven by a smaller grooved wheel or pulley1 ,d1 to which a crank is attached for turning4 ,the relative sizes of these wheels are determined by the speed of the exposure and the kind of light used4 ,a #c-;in4 or #d-;in4 wheel on the cylinder sprocket shaft1 driven by a pulley about #a in4 in diameter1 will be suitable under ordinary circumstances4 ,the opening ,b may be adjusted by two metal slides which fit tightly in metal grooves fastened to the wood front4 ,the metal grooves and slides can be made of tin and painted a dead black4 ,the films after passing over the sprocket1 fall into the bottom of the box1 or1 if very long films are to be made1 the instrument can be used in the dark room and the light admitted only to the opening ,b1 then the ends can be dropped into a basket or other receptacle at the bottom and the unprinted portions carried on reels above the box4 ,the speed of the exposure and the width of the opening ,b can be determined by making test strips4 ,this can be done by setting the opening ,b to a certain width and turning the crank for #aj or #ae seconds and counting the number of revolutions4 ,the proper exposure can be easily attained by this method4 ,an ,emergency ,clamp ,illustration ,while making an extra large guitar ,i did not have clamps large enough to hold the top and bottom onto the sides while gluing1 so ,i fastened three pieces of wood together1 each piece being about #a by #b in41 as shown in the sketch4 ,then ,i bored holes in both top and bottom pieces and inserted a piece of soft wire in the form of a loop1 which1 when twisted1 drew the ends of the clamp together4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,e4 ,walsh1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 99 99 99 99 99 ,while camping1 remember a hot stone wrapped up makes an excellent substitute for a hot-water bag4 ,home-,made ,motion-,picture ,camera and ,projector ,in ,three ,parts--,part ,,iii ,the ,projector ,the film positives are projected on a screen with the same kind of a lantern as is used for lantern slides1 with the addition of the device for stepping the film through1 one picture at a time1 and flashing light on each picture as it remains stationary for an instant4 ,the projector 7,fig4 #h7 is composed of a lamp house1 a condensing lens to make the beam of light converge upon the film for illuminating it evenly1 a film-stepping device1 and a projecting lens for throwing the enlarged picture of the illuminated film upon a screen4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #h--,projector ,complete ,the lamp house is made of ordinary stovepipe metal and the dimensions given in the sketch are for a size suitable to use an acetylene or gas burner4 ,the metal is laid out as shown by the pattern 7,fig4 #i7 and bent on the dotted lines to form the sides and ends of the house4 ,the joint may be riveted1 or1 if taken to a tinshop1 lock-seamed4 ,the cover is cut out as shown1 the sides and ends having bent holes which are covered on the inside with perforated sheet metal1 ,a4 ,in order to deflect the light1 a small angular strip1 ,b1 is riveted on so that its upper portion will cover the holes and allow a space for the heat to pass out4 ,the cover may be hinged or set on like a cover on a can4 ,the lamp house is attached to a sliding wood base for adjusting its position on the baseboard4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #i--;,details of the ,lamp ,house ,the condensing lenses are fixed into a metal barrel having a tapering end4 ,this can be made of the same material as used in the lamp house4 ,the parts can be rolled and a lock joint made at a local tinshop1 or the pieces shaped over a wood form and riveted4 ,small ,l-shaped pieces are riveted to the inner surfaces to hold each lens in place4 ,a rim is turned up on the back end of the metal tube for attaching the lens barrel to the lamp house4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aj--;,details of the ,lamp1 ,stepping ,device and ,base ,an ordinary mantle or acetylene burner is attached to a gas pipe that has for its base a drop elbow fastened to a sliding board similar to the slide of the lamp house on the baseboard4 ,a good reflector should be attached to a standard just back of the burner4 ,the standard is also fastened to the sliding board4 ,the proper distance of the light from the condensing lens can be easily set by this adjusting device4 ,this arrangement is shown in ,fig4 #aj in the diagram entitled lamp parts4 ,the device for stepping the film is a duplicate of the one used in the camera as described in ,part ,i1 with the exception of the lens4 ,the lens should be about #b in4 in diameter with such a focal length that will give a picture of the required size1 or a lens of #ab-;in4 focus enlarging a #a-;in4 film to about #f ft4 at a distance of #bd ft4 ,a regular lens fitted in a metal tube can be purchased from a moving-picture stock house at a reasonable price4 ,the box is made up similar to the camera box1 but with a metal back instead of the wood4 ,the intense heat from the light would quickly burn the wood and for this reason the light should be kept from the film while it is not in motion4 ,the projecting lens barrel should be fitted snugly1 yet loose enough for focusing4 ,the baseboard is cut as shown and the film-stepping device is firmly attached to the small end4 ,the sides extend over the baseboard and are fastened with screws and braced with metal brackets4 ,the slot in the small end of the baseboard is for the film to pass through4 ,the film should have a tension the same as in the camera with velvet placed on the edges of the partitions4 ,it is well to have a guide below the roller shutter to keep the film from encircling the roller as it turns4 ,homemade ,graining ,tools ,desiring to do some fancy graining and having no tools at hand1 ,i hastily made two of them from pieces of garden hose1 as shown in the sketch4 ,two pieces were cut from the hose1 each #e in4 long1 and the first one made as follows3 ,a small hole1 about #a_/d in4 in diameter1 was cut through the outside layer of rubber with a sharp knife at two points on opposite sides of the hose and exactly in the center for length4 ,around these holes rings of the rubber were cut out1 or rather peeled off from the canvas part1 the rings being #c_/af in4 wide1 and the grooves1 or parts removed1 also #c_/af in4 wide4 ,the hose will then appear as shown in the upper left-hand corner of the sketch4 ,illustration3 ,tools ,cut from ,pieces of ,garden ,hose for ,making ,grains of ,wood in ,painted ,surfaces ,to use this grainer1 first paint the ground color1 using a buff tint for imitation light oak1 and allow it to dry1 then put on a light coat of raw sienna1 and while wet1 take the prepared hose and draw it slowly over the length of wood1 at the same time revolving the grainer slowly4 ,the other piece of hose1 at the other corner1 is made to take the place of a steel graining comb4 ,the rubber is cut away lengthwise1 leaving four segments1 about #d in4 wide1 on four sides of the hose4 ,these segments are then notched out1 like threads on a tap1 each segment having a different number to the inch4 ,these are used in the same manner as steel combs4--,contributed by ,a4 ,h4 ,waychoff1 ,koenig1 ,colo4 ,needle for ,repairing ,screens ,in attaching patches to window or door screens1 the work requires a continual shifting from one side to the other1 or two persons1 one on each side1 must be present to pass the threaded needle back and forth4 ,the operation can be easily simplified by using a bent needle1 which has been heated and suitably shaped4 ,the point of this needle can always be made to return to the side from which it entered1 thereby avoiding the need of an assistant or the tiresome shifting back and forth4--,contributed by ,g4 ,jaques1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,an ,emergency ,tourniquet ,illustration ,a valuable addition to any shop medicine cabinet is the tourniquet4 ,a device that will answer the purpose of the tourniquet can be made from an ordinary clothespin and a piece of binding tape1 about #c_/d in4 wide and #ad in4 long4 ,to stop the bleeding from a wound on a limb1 pass the tape around the injured member between the wound and the blood supply4 ,pass the tape through the slot in the pin1 wind the ends around the pin two or three times to prevent slipping1 then turn the pin to draw up the tape tightly until the flow of blood is stopped4 ,mechanical ,aid to ,singers ,procure a large cigar box1 of the square variety1 and three ordinary drinking glasses with very thin walls and of different sizes1 and place them in the box1 as follows3 ,space them evenly1 and drive three brads close to the circumference of each glass bottom1 so that the glasses will have to be forced in between them4 ,to prevent the glasses from touching the wood place a one-cent piece under each one4 ,a fourth glass is used1 but from this the bottom must be removed4 ,this can be done by saturating a string1 or piece of yarn1 in kerosene oil1 wrapping it once around the glass near the bottom1 then lighting it and allowing the string to burn out4 ,the glass is then quickly dropped into cold water1 which will remove the bottom4 ,a hole is cut in the cover of the box to receive the bottomless glass from the upper side1 so that its lower edge will be flush with the under surface4 ,cut a slot1 #c in4 long and #a_/h in4 wide1 in the cover near the back side4 ,to use1 close the cover and at a distance of about #a_/b in4 from the glass in the cover1 or mouthpiece1 sing into it4 ,the glasses will impart to the voice a peculiar tone delightful to hear4--,contributed by ,j4 ,b4 ,murphy1 ,plainfield1 ,new ,jersey4 ,model ,boat with ,aerial ,propeller ,procure or make a small model boat1 #ab or #ah in4 long1 and place in the hold one or two cells of dry battery4 ,make a small platform in the stern and mount on it a small battery motor with the shaft parallel with the length of the boat and in the center4 ,directly above and parallel with the motor shaft run a shaft--a hatpin will do--in bearings fastened to the deck4 ,attach a drive pulley directly over the pulley on the motor and belt it up with a cord or rubber band4 ,purchase or make a propeller blade and attach it to the rear end of the shaft4 ,a switch can be located on the deck for controlling the motor4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,b4 ,riker1 ,ft4 ,wayne1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,the ,aerial ,propeller is ,driven by a ,small ,battery ,motor ,placed in the ,boat ,lantern-,slide ,binding ,machine ,the machine shown in the illustration is very simple to make and when complete is one of the greatest time savers that a photographer can possess4 ,the base is made of a piece of board1 #i in4 long1 #b in4 wide1 and #g_/h in4 thick4 ,the uprights support a small bar upon which the roll of binding revolves4 ,an old ink bottle filled with water and with some cotton stuffed in the neck serves as a moistener for the binding4 ,the use of this machine insures a neat job in a very short space of time4 ,the slide is always in the center of the binding4 ,the end of the slide should run a little over the end of the base so that the binding may be fixed to the edge with the fingers1 using a downward motion4 ,the slide is then turned over on the other edge with a rolling motion and the operation repeated4--,contributed by ,alvin ,g4 ,steier1 ,union ,hill1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,a ,machine ,that will ,help to ,bind ,lantern ,slides ,quickly and ,neatly ,adjustable ,film-,developing ,machine ,the simple homemade developing machine1 shown in the illustration1 can be easily made with three film spools1 some strong wire1 and odd pieces of wood4 ,it consists of an open frame1 having two side pieces provided with slots down the center1 sufficiently wide to allow an ordinary wood screw1 of suitable size1 to slide up or down freely4 ,the two end-connecting pieces act as supports for the developing tray and should be made of sufficient length so the tray can pass freely between the sliding upright frame1 made to fit in between the side pieces of the base4 ,this frame can be adjusted to suit the length of film and is clamped in place at the desired position by wood screws1 fitting in the long notches and screwed into the uprights4 ,the two bottom rollers consist of film spools which are fastened in place by being slipped over a suitable wire1 bent so the spool can enter the developing tray and the wire pass over the sides4 ,another bend at the outer end provides for the adjustment of the spools and for securing the wire in place by staples4 ,the top spool is secured to a wire fitted with a crank at the outer end1 so that in turning the wire1 the spool will also turn1 thereby driving the film4 ,when placing the film on the machine1 the sensitive side should face outward so it will not rub against the spools4 ,the ends of the film may be connected with pins or ordinary paper fasteners4--,contributed by ,h4 ,r4 ,f4 ,richardson1 ,ottawa1 ,ont4 ,illustration3 ,developing a ,roll ,film in a ,tray with a ,machine ,that ,drives the ,film around ,rollers and through the ,developing ,liquid by ,turning a ,crank ,preventing ,loss of ,fish from ,covered ,baskets ,in the cover of fish baskets an opening is frequently made permitting the fish to be put in without lifting the cover4 ,in traveling over rough places1 or when the basket is full1 some of the fish are likely to be shaken out1 or may wiggle out of the basket4 ,to guard against this1 a leather flap can be provided covering the hole on the inside4 ,at one end of the flap1 four holes should be punched4 ,it can then be placed in position and securely laced to the cover4 ,the flap acts as a valve1 allowing fish to be put into the basket1 but preventing their escape4--,contributed by ,a4 ,w4 ,cook1 ,kamela1 ,ore4 ,repair for a ,broken ,lock ,keeper ,illustration ,having broken the recess half of a common cupboard lock1 or latch1 which was used to fasten a hinged storm window1 ,i used a round-head wood screw as shown4 ,the screw was easily placed1 and it serves the purpose as well as the regular keeper4--,contributed by ,r4 ,f4 ,pohle1 ,lynn1 ,mass4 99 99 99 99 99 ,when using glue contained in screw-stoppered vessels it is advisable to smear a little vaseline on the thread to prevent the stopper from adhering to the container4 ,illustration3 ,throwing a ,spot ,light with the ,lantern on ,individuals of a ,home ,play1 ,which can be ,given ,brilliant ,effects by the ,use of the ,tinted ,celluloid in the ,openings of the ,revolving ,wheel ,lantern for ,spot and ,colored ,lights ,the school play in pantomime is not complete unless the different parts of the play are illuminated in different colors1 especially if the performers are clad in glittering garments4 ,a spot light is also a feature not to be forgotten in singling out the star player or the one singing a song4 ,the cost of a light for this purpose is entirely out of the reach of the average schoolboy1 but if he has any ingenuity and a little time1 a lantern for throwing those colored lights can be made at home1 and the necessary parts will not cost much4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for ,cutting the ,metal to ,form the ,entire ,lantern1 or ,lamp ,house1 ,also the ,pattern for the ,top and the ,metal ,bracket ,that ,makes a ,bearing for the ,revolving ,wheel1 ,having ,openings ,covered with ,tinted ,celluloid ,the metal necessary can be the ordinary stovepipe material1 but if it is desired to have a fine-appearing lantern1 procure what is called ,russian iron4 ,this metal has a gloss1 and if used1 it should be gone over from time to time with a rag soaked in oil1 then wiped dry1 to keep it from rusting4 ,the pattern for the body of the lantern1 or lamp house1 is shown with dimensions4 ,if metal1 long enough for the whole length1 cannot be procured1 then make it in two pieces1 being sure to allow #a_/b-;in4 end also on the second part1 as shown on the first1 for a riveted joint4 ,the metal is bent on the dotted lines and cut out on the full ones4 ,the distance between the lines ,a to be bent is equal to the radius ,b4 ,the part ,a forms the sloping side of the top1 and the #b-;in4 part at the top of the side extends vertically on the upper or vertical part1 it being #a_/b in4 narrower to provide an outlet for the heat4 ,an opening is cut in the rear end1 as shown1 also a hole1 #e in4 in diameter1 in the front end4 ,the size of the round hole is optional1 as it should be cut to suit the condensing lens provided4 ,if a lens #e #a_/b in4 in diameter is used1 then a #e-;in4 hole should be cut4 ,this is enough difference in size to hold the lens from dropping through1 while clips riveted on the inside of the lamp-house end will hold it in place4 ,the lens is set in the hole with the curved side outward from the inside of the lamp house4 ,the top1 or covering1 is cut out of the same material as used in making the lamp house1 the length being #ab in41 and the sides are cut to extend #a_/b in4 on each side of the ventilator4 ,the edges1 being turned down on the dotted lines1 provide a covering to prevent any great amount of light from passing out through the #a_/b-;in4 ventilating opening mentioned in connection with the side construction of the lantern4 ,the #a-;in4 parts of the cover ends are turned down and riveted to the ends of the lamp house4 ,the little extensions on the ends provide a means of riveting the side1 to make a solid joint4 ,the arm ,c is made of a piece of #a_/h or #c_/af-;in4 metal1 shaped as shown1 to fit on the corner of the lamp house1 where it is riveted4 ,this provides a support and a place for an axis for the large revolving wheel holding the colored-celluloid disks4 ,illustration3 ,the ,base of the ,lantern is ,provided with a ,sliding ,part ,carrying the ,light for ,adjustment ,the metal forming the lamp house is fastened on a baseboard1 cut to snugly fit on the inside4 ,the base has two cleats1 nailed lengthwise to form a runway1 #d in4 wide1 into which another board is fitted to carry the burner4 ,while the illustration shows an acetylene burner1 any kind of light may be used so long as it is of a high candlepower4 ,if manufactured gas is at hand1 a gas burner with a mantle can be fitted1 or a large tungsten electric light will give good results4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for the ,revolving ,wheel in ,which ,six ,holes are ,cut and ,covered with ,tinted ,celluloid ,the wheel1 carrying the colored disks1 is made of the same kind of metal as used for the lamp house4 ,the edges should be trimmed smooth1 or1 better still1 turned over and hammered down to prevent injury to the hands while turning it4 ,a washer should be used between this wheel and the arm ,c on a bolt used for the shaft1 to make the wheel turn freely4 ,the colored disks of celluloid are fastened to the outside of the wheel over the openings4 ,a yoke to support the lantern and provide a way for throwing the light in any direction1 is made as shown4 ,a line along which the lantern balances is determined by placing it on something round1 as a broom stick1 and the upper ends of the yoke are fastened on this line with loosely fitted bolts for pivots4 ,illustration3 ,yoke for ,supporting the ,lantern ,the lantern is set in front of the stage at the back of the room and the light is directed on the players1 the colors being changed by turning the wheel4 ,sometimes good effects can be obtained by using the lantern in the wings1 or for a fire dance1 by placing it under the stage1 throwing the light upward through grating or a heavy plate glass4 ,homemade ,palette ,knife ,a corset steel makes a good substitute for a palette knife because of its flexibility4 ,it gives better satisfaction if cut in the shape shown than if left straight4 ,should a handle be desired1 one can be easily made by gluing two pieces of thin wood on the sides4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,a ,palette ,knife ,made of a ,corset ,steel and a ,wood ,handle ,attached 99 99 99 99 99 ,to remove a white mark on wood having a wax surface1 rub it lightly with a rag moistened in alcohol2 then rub with a little raw linseed oil4 ,self-,closing ,gate ,this gate is suspended from a horizontal bar by chains1 and swings freely about a #a-;in4 gas pipe1 placed vertically in the center of the gate4 ,the chains are of the same length1 being fastened equidistant from the pipe1 the upper ends farther out than the lower4 ,the distance depends on the weight of the gate and the desired force with which it should close4 ,any of the numerous styles of latches can be used1 if desired4--,contributed by ,kenneth ,osborn1 ,loveland1 ,colo4 ,illustration3 ,the ,gate will ,swing in ,either ,direction and ,come to a ,rest ,where ,it ,closes the ,opening ,a ,poultry ,shade ,if a poultry yard is in an open space where the sun's rays will strike it squarely1 a shade can be put up as follows3 ,a piece of old carpet1 rug1 or canvas1 fastened to the wire mesh with clothespins1 will produce a shade at any place desired4--,contributed by ,walter ,l4 ,kaufmann1 ,santa ,ana1 ,cal4 ,reflector for ,viewing ,scenery from a ,car ,window ,construct a box of pasteboard or thin wood1 about #i in4 long1 #c in4 wide and #b in4 thick1 and fasten two pieces of mirror in the ends at an angle of #de deg41 both sloping in the same direction with their reflecting surfaces toward each other4 ,an opening as large as the mirror is cut1 facing it1 in the box at the end ,a1 and a small hole bored through at the end ,b so that it will center the mirror4 ,both of these apertures are covered with plain pieces of glass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,reflecting ,device as ,it is ,used in a ,car ,window for ,viewing the ,scenery ,ahead ,in use1 the end ,a is placed outside of the car window and the user places an eye to the small hole ,b4 ,it is impossible to be struck in the eye with a cinder or flying object4--,contributed by ,mildred ,e4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,can4 ,a ,muskrat ,trap ,it is difficult to catch muskrats in an ordinary steel trap1 as a broken bone allows them to sever the flesh and escape4 ,during the summer these rats build a shelter for the winter constructed of moss and sticks placed on the river or lake bed1 the top extending above the water level and the entrance being through a hole in the bottom near one side1 while the passage itself is under water4 ,it1 therefore1 only remains for the trapper to make one of these houses over into a huge wire trap so that the animal may be caught alive4 ,illustration3 ,a ,trap for ,catching ,muskrats ,alive in ,one of ,their ,mounds ,built of ,moss and ,sticks ,the house ,a is prepared by removing the top and building the trap from heavy mesh wire which can be easily shaped1 the joints being held together by binding the edges with wire4 ,the passage is then fitted with a double trapdoor1 the first1 ,b1 provided with sharp points on the swinging end1 while the other is a falling cover4 ,these two doors are placed in an entrance way1 ,c1 made of wire mesh and fastened over the passageway4 ,the muskrat comes up through the passage1 pushing a bunch of moss or sticks and does not notice passing the trapdoors4 ,the upper door is to keep the animals caught from getting at the first door4--,contributed by ,vance ,garrison1 ,bemidji1 ,minn4 ,a ,casein ,glue ,casein glues are splendid in woodworking1 making cardboard articles1 and when the composition is varied somewhat1 make excellent cements for china and metals4 ,casein is made from the curd of soured milk after removal of the fat1 and is put on the market in the form of a dry powder4 ,to make the glue1 soak the casein powder two hours in an equal weight of hot water4 ,to this gummy mass add about one-seventh the weight of the casein in borax which has been dissolved in very little hot water4 ,stir until all is dissolved after mixing borax and casein4 ,this can be thinned with water to suit and is a good glue1 but it can be made more adhesive by the addition of a little sodium arsenate4 ,any alkali1 such as soda or ammonia1 could be substituted for the borax4 ,to make a china cement1 lime or water glass should be substituted for the borax4 ,addition of burnt magnesia increases the speed of hardening4 ,illustration ,the ,mile-,o-,view ,camera ,by ,t4 ,b4 ,lambert ,many have tried1 but heretofore no one has succeeded in taking panoramic views from the side of fast-moving trains or street cars4 ,motion pictures are easily obtained from the front or rear of moving trains1 but none with the camera lens pointing at right angles1 or nearly so1 to the track4 ,a complete apparatus for taking continuous and perfect panoramic pictures of any desired length as one travels through a country is too complicated to be described in detail within the limits of this article1 but a simple arrangement1 invented and constructed by the writer1 will enable anyone to perform the experiment at practically no cost except for the film4 ,illustration3 ,the ,board ,used ,instead of a ,tripod is ,placed across the ,backs of ,two ,car ,seats ,some form of a roll-film camera is essential1 and simply as a working basis1 it will be assumed an ordinary camera is used1 post-card camera in size1 for which the following things will be required3 ,a piece of thin black card1 or hard rubber2 a small board1 and a piece of wire to be used as a crank4 ,illustration3 ,these ,two ,articles ,constitute the ,only ,parts ,necessary to ,change a ,camera into a ,mile-,o-,view ,prepare the paper1 or hard rubber1 by cutting it to a size that will exactly cover the rear camera opening when the back of the camera is removed1 which1 in the case of a post-card size1 is #f in4 long and #c-c_/d in4 wide2 then cut a narrow slot1 about #c_/fd in4 wide crosswise through the center of the material4 ,this slot should extend to within about #a_/b in4 of each edge1 and the edges must be perfectly smooth and straight4 ,if paper is used1 glue it to the opening in the camera4 ,if hard rubber is used1 it can be made up as shown and set in the camera opening4 ,this will bring the slot directly back of the lens center and at right angles to the direction in which the film moves when being rolled4 ,illustration3 ,the ,two ,parts as ,they are ,applied to an ,ordinary ,roll-,film ,camera ,a board is prepared1 about #d ft4 long1 #aj in4 wide and #c_/d in4 thick4 ,this is to take the place of a tripod1 and it must have a small hole and suitable wing nut to attach the camera near the center4 ,this length of board will reach from the back of one seat to another when it is placed to support the camera during the exposure4 ,a wire1 about #a_/h in4 in diameter1 is bent1 as shown1 with a short hook on one end1 and the other turned up at right angles1 to serve as a handle4 ,this wire1 when hooked into the wing nut1 will enable one to wind up the film at a fairly uniform speed4 ,this completes all the necessary apparatus4 ,to take pictures with this panoramic outfit1 load the camera in the usual way1 but do not wind it up to exposure ,no4 #a2 stop at a point where the beginning of the film will be nearly opposite the narrow slot in the black paper1 or rubber4 ,this would be to stop the turning at about the time the hand pointer appears in the small back window4 ,attach the camera firmly to the board and brace up the lens end so that it will not easily shake with the movement of the car4 ,place the board across the backs of two adjacent seats1 so that the camera will point out of the window at exactly right angles to the car4 ,when ready to expose1 open the shutter wide1 turn the crank that is hooked into the wing nut1 and slowly wind up the film while the train is running4 ,this will give a panoramic picture1 continuous in character1 and if the speed of turning is well judged1 some very splendid views can be made4 ,the speed of turning the crank will be governed by the focal length of the lens and the speed of the train4 ,for an average lens1 the crank should be given one turn per second when the car is traveling about #ae miles an hour1 or the average speed of a street car1 ,a train traveling #cj miles an hour will require two turns of the crank per second4 ,a good method of trying this out is to use one film as a test and turn the crank a few times and note its speed by the second1 then stop and begin again at another speed for a few turns and so on1 until the entire film is exposed1 always noting the turns and time for each change1 also the speed of the train4 ,when the film is developed the one that shows best will give the proper number of turns per second4 ,the following points must be considered3 ,the track should not be rough1 and the camera must be perfectly steady and not twisted out of position by turning the crank1 otherwise the resulting picture will be wavy4 ,if the slot in the back board is not smooth and true1 the picture will be streaked4 ,turning the film too fast will make the picture elongated1 and too slowly1 condensed4 ,should the camera be pointed otherwise than at right angles the picture will be distorted4 ,this arrangement cannot be used to take moving objects except under special conditions4 ,a picture of a passing train of cars can be made if the camera is stationary1 but the wheels and drive rods will appear twisted out of shape4 ,it is best for the experimenter to confine himself to scenery at the beginning1 avoiding architectural objects1 because a variation in speed of turning the crank to wind the film naturally distorts the architecture1 which variation is not so noticeable in a scenic view4 ,illustration ,a ,photographic ,worktable for ,small ,quarters ,by ,k4 ,v4 ,reed ,flat dwellers have no space at their disposal for a person to work at photography1 and the bathroom must take the place of a dark room4 ,as this was very inconvenient in my case1 ,i constructed a table1 that from all appearances was nothing more than a large-size kitchen worktable1 and such a table can be used in case the builder does not care to construct it4 ,the table is turned upside down and the top removed by taking out the screws4 ,the top is made of several pieces glued together and will remain in one piece4 ,it is then hinged at one side to the top edge of the rail1 so that it can be turned back like a trunk1 or box1 cover4 ,boards are then nailed to the under edge of the rails4 ,if a very neat job is required1 these boards should be set inside on strips nailed to the inside surfaces of the rails1 at the proper place to make the boards come flush with the under edges of the rails4 ,at the back side and in the center of the new bottom1 a hole is cut1 #f or #g in4 square1 and a box fastened beneath it1 to form a bottom several inches below the main bottom4 ,in this space bottles filled with solutions are kept4 ,the main bottom should be painted with an acid-proof varnish4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ordinary ,kitchen ,worktable ,fitted ,up as a ,handy ,workshop for the ,amateur ,photographer ,who ,has a ,limited ,space in a ,flat1 and ,where a ,table can be ,used to ,advantage in a ,room ,the space in the table is then divided1 and partitions set up1 which can be arranged to suit the builder4 ,another attachment1 which comes in exceedingly handy1 is the ruby light4 ,this consists of a box1 large enough to receive a printing frame at the bottom4 ,two holes are cut in the table top1 at the right places to make a window for the light and a slit for the printing frame4 ,when the table top is raised1 the box with the light is fastened over the openings with hooks1 the arrangement of which will depend on the size and shape of the box4 ,in closing1 the lamp box is removed1 and pieces of board are set in the holes4 ,this can be easily arranged1 if the holes and blocks are cut on a slight slope1 so that the latter when set in will not fall through the openings4 ,back ,thrust ,prevented on ,skis ,to overcome the difficulty of skis slipping back when walking uphill either of the two devices shown is good1 if the attachments are fastened to the rear end of the skis4 ,illustration3 ,two ,methods of ,making an ,attachment to ,prevent the ,backward ,thrust of a ,ski ,the first represents a piece of horse-hide1 about #d in4 square1 tacked on the ski and with the hair slanting backward4 ,this will not interfere with going forward1 but will retard any movement backward4 ,the other consists of a hinged portion that will enter the snow on a back thrust4 ,as the ski end is thin1 a block of wood must be attached to it on the upper side1 and the projecting piece hinged to the block4 ,the bevel at the end allows it to dig into the snow when the ski starts back4 ,in going forward1 it will swing out of the way freely4 ,crystallization ,shown on a ,screen ,the formation of chemical crystals can be shown in an interesting manner as follows3 ,spread a saturated solution of salt on a glass slide1 or projection-lantern glass1 and allow it to evaporate in the lantern's light or beneath a magnifying glass4 ,the best substances to use are solutions of alum or sodium1 alum being preferable4 ,ordinary table salt gives brilliant crystals which reflect the light to a marked degree4 ,for regular formation1 where the shape of the crystal is being studied1 use a solution of hyposulphite of soda4 ,many startling facts may be learned from the study of crystals in this manner1 and watching them grow is great sport even to the chemist4--,contributed by ,l4 ,t4 ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,furniture ,polish for ,fine ,woods ,boiled olive oil1 to which a few drops of vinegar has been added1 makes an excellent furniture polish for very fine woods4 ,it will be found to work nicely on highly polished surfaces1 and also for automobile bodies4 ,it is applied in moderate quantities1 and rubbed to a luster with a flannel cloth4 ,illustration ,enlarging ,photographs ,by ,a4 ,e4 ,swoyer ,when the photographer wishes to make an enlarged print from a small negative1 he arranges a suitable light and condensers back of the negative and by means of a lens projects the resultant image upon a sheet of sensitive paper4 ,owing to the comparative weakness of the light1 however1 it is necessary either to use bromide paper or some of the faster brands of developing-out paper4 ,if a more artistic medium is desired1 a glass positive must first be made and enlarged to produce a negative from which the final prints will be made by contact4 ,this process is somewhat clumsy and expensive1 for if any retouching or doctoring is to be done1 it must be upon a glass surface1 either that of the two negatives or of the intermediate positive4 ,as all of this work is done by transmitted light1 there is the loss of fine detail common to all enlargements4 ,the difficulties incident to this process may be done away with by the use of a modification of the popular post-card projector2 the alteration consisting simply in the substitution of a better lens for the cheap plate glass with which such instruments are usually fitted4 ,a contact print1 preferably on glossy paper1 ferrotyped1 is made from the original negative by contact in the usual way2 this is then placed in the modified projector and the image thrown upon a sensitive plate of the desired size4 ,after a brief exposure1 development will show an enlarged negative having every quality of the original4 ,the advantages of this process are obvious4 ,in the first place1 the comparative cheapness of the apparatus is a factor2 in the second1 the intermediate glass positive is eliminated1 the print which is substituted for it providing a much better medium for retouching1 faking or printing in4 ,transparent water colors in the less actinic shades may be used upon this print to control the final result1 and if spoiled1 it may be replaced at a negligible cost4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ordinary ,post-,card ,projector ,used ,back of a ,camera to ,illuminate a ,photograph ,which is ,enlarged on a ,plate to ,make a ,negative ,instead of a ,print 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,at first glance1 it would appear as if this method were simply a form of photographic copying2 it is1 in fact1 the reverse4 ,for in copying any object with a camera1 the sensitive medium is behind the lens and the object to be copied is in front1 and the size of the copy is therefore limited both by that of the camera and by its bellows draw4 ,in the reflection process1 the object to be copied is back of the lens and the sensitive medium is in front2 as large a copy can be made with a small camera as with an eight by ten4 ,it is really more convenient to work with a short-focus lens and a camera of limited bellows extension2 the nearer the lens is to the back of the camera the larger will be the projected image4 ,the diagram 7,fig4 #a7 shows that the size of the object to be enlarged does not depend upon the focal length of the lens used1 as in ordinary enlarging1 but simply upon the size of the opening in the front of the projector4 ,the dotted lines are drawn from the edges of the card to be projected through the lens4 ,figure #b is a sketch of a projector with the lens tube removed1 so that it may be used with a camera as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,homemade ,screen-,door ,spring ,illustration ,a screen or storm-door spring can be easily made of spring-steel wire4 ,the wire is bent to the shape shown in the sketch and two turns given to the coil as shown at ,a4 ,the ends of the wire are fastened to the casing and door with staples4 ,two or three of these springs can be attached to one door where it is necessary to have more strength4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,rosenberg1 ,watertown1 ,mass4 ,a ,surprise ,water ,bottle ,the performer produces a bottle and gives it with a glass to anyone in the audience1 asking the person selected to take a drink of a very delicious concoction4 ,when the person attempts to pour out the solution it is found to be frozen4 ,to perform this trick1 the fluid must be previously made with a saturated solution of sulphate of soda and hot water4 ,fill a clean white bottle with the solution1 taking care to cork the bottle while the liquid is hot4 ,the liquid remains in a fluid state as long as the bottle is corked4 ,when the bottle is shown1 it appears to contain a liquid1 and in handing it to a person the performer must be careful to take out the cork in time to allow it to solidify4 ,in order to gain the proper time1 pretend to be looking for a glass1 make some remark about a sudden chill or feel the hand holding the bottle and say it is very cold4 ,in the meantime1 the air acting upon the solution has caused it to become fixed and immovable1 and when the person attempts to pour it out1 he finds it is impossible4 ,a ,graduate ,holder ,a simple and easily constructed graduate holder in the form of a bracket placed in the corner of a dark room is shown in the sketch4 ,the bracket not only holds the graduates securely1 but allows them to drain perfectly and prevents dust settling on the inside1 as they are suspended by the base4 ,holes of different size are cut in the board to accommodate large1 medium and small graduates4 ,illustration3 ,the ,graduate ,holder is ,permanently ,fastened in a ,corner of the ,dark ,room ,homemade ,enlarging ,camera ,the ordinary hand camera of the focusing type can be used to enlarge pictures from negatives of its own make4 ,the requirement is a device to hold the negative rigid in a position in front of the camera lens1 and at such a distance that the rays of light passing through the negative and lens will enter a box of sufficient size for the desired enlargement and focus plainly on a sheet of sensitive paper attached to the end of the box4 ,the first thing to do is to find the distance that is required from the camera lens to the paper enlargement to make the proper size1 and the distance from the lens to the negative4 ,a correspondent of ,camera ,craft gives the following rule for finding these dimensions3 ,to find the distance between the lens and paper enlargement1 add #a to the number of times the picture is to be enlarged and multiply the result by the focus of the lens in inches4 ,the example given is for a #f-;in4 focus lens4 ,an example3 ,a #d by #e-;in4 negative enlarged to #h by #aj in4 is a two-time enlargement 7four times in area72 #ba #c1 and #cf #ah1 the distance in inches of the lens from the sensitive paper4 ,to find the distance of the lens to the negative1 divide the above result1 #ah in41 by the number of times desired to enlarge1 #ahb #i1 the distance in inches from the lens to the negative4 ,with these figures as a working basis1 the box can be made in any size to use any focusing camera4 ,the dimensions given in the drawing are for a #d by #e-;in4 camera having a #f-;in4 focus lens1 and to enlarge the pictures from a #d by #e-;in4 negative to #h by #aj in4 ,in the first place make a box #h-a_/b in4 wide1 #aj-a_/b in4 deep and #ad in4 long1 inside measurement1 using #c_/d-;in4 material1 as shown in the sectional drawing ,a4 ,one end is left open and in the center of the other a hole is cut #e in4 square4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,construction and ,camera ,complete ,the back end of the camera is placed over this hole as shown at ,b and #a_/d-;in4 strips nailed to the box end around the camera back to exclude all light4 ,the camera must be centrally located4 ,the next to be made is the end board or easel1 consisting of two pieces of #c_/d-;in4 material1 one #h-a_/b by #aj-a_/b in41 which should fit easily into the end of the box1 and a larger one1 #aj by #ab in41 the outside dimensions of the box1 as shown at ,c4 ,nail the smaller piece to the center of the large one1 crossing the grain of wood in so doing4 ,the end board is the easel upon which the sensitive paper is fastened with push pins1 and should be covered with a sheet of white paper1 pasting it on the #h-a_/b by #aj-a_/b-;in4 board with a thin coat of glue4 ,the slide ,d is a piece of wood #c_/d in4 thick1 #c-a_/b in4 wide and #bf in4 long4 ,this is fastened to the under side of the box with four screws1 placing it exactly in the center and parallel with the sides of the box4 ,be careful to have the slide parallel or the holder will not freely slide upon it4 ,the negative holder ,e is made of a piece of #c_/d-;in4 board1 #h in4 wide and #aj in4 long4 ,a hole #e-a_/b by #g-a_/b in4 is cut in its center1 leaving a margin of #a-a_/d in4 on all sides4 ,this holder is set in a groove cut in a block of wood having a mortise cut #c_/d by #c-a_/b in4 to fit on the slide easily4 ,a thumb screw is fitted in the center of the bottom of the block of wood4 ,this is used for fastening the negative holder rigidly to the slide when the focus is secured4 ,a #a-;in4 hole is bored in the upper corner of the box end1 as shown1 to serve as a peephole for seeing the image on the end board or easel4 ,this is covered before putting the sensitive paper in the box4 ,the end board is held in position with two flat brass hooks4 ,the camera is held in place with two buttons placed on blocks of wood the height of the camera back1 as shown at ,f4 ,two pieces of clear glass1 #f by #h in4 in size1 are held in place in the negative holder by means of buttons1 the film negative being placed between them4 ,all the joints in the box must be carefully puttied and the inside of the box blackened1 which is done with a mixture of lampblack and alcohol1 to which is added a small quantity of shellac to give it body4 ,a darkroom is not essential1 a bathroom with the window covered over with orange paper will do1 or even a large room with the shades drawn and pinned close to the window casing4 ,it is best to leave a space in one of the windows to be covered with orange paper1 doing the developing about #aj ft4 from the source of light4 ,to operate the camera place it on the enlarging box1 hook the easel in place1 put a negative in the holder with the film side toward the lens4 ,take the outfit to a shady place outdoors1 point the holder end at an unobstructed portion of the sky and look through the peephole4 ,rack the lens in and out to focus the picture4 ,the easel should have heavy black lines drawn upon it inclosing parallelograms from #e by #g in4 to #h by #aj in41 so that one can readily see the size of the enlargement to be made4 ,when the focus is obtained take the outfit into the darkroom1 remove the easel and fasten the sensitive paper with push pins4 ,replace the easel and take the outfit outdoors again1 point it toward the clear sky and make the exposure1 which should be at least #e seconds with a #af stop4 ,it is best to make a trial exposure on a small strip of paper to find the proper time4 ,directions for the use of bromide papers will be found in each package4 ,an ,easy ,way to ,make a ,shelf ,procure an ordinary packing box and mark a line from corner to corner on both ends1 as shown1 from ,a to ,b in ,fig4 #a4 ,pull out all the nails from the corners that may cross the line4 ,nail the top to the box and saw it on the lines marked and two shelves will be formed which may be used as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,boxes dovetailed at the corners will make excellent shelves and look neat if painted4 ,illustration3 ,two ,shelves ,made of ,one ,box 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,illustration ,multiplying ,attachment for a ,camera ,by ,j4 ,c4 ,moore ,the hand camera suitable for this work is the kind commonly known as the reversible back1 which is a detachable part that carries a ground glass for focusing and a place to insert the plate holders4 ,when this part is removed1 it will be seen that the back of the camera is mortised to prevent light from entering4 ,construct a frame to take the place of the back1 but make it about #e_/h in4 larger all around1 and make one surface to fit the mortise of the camera box4 ,illustration3 ,the ,attachment as ,it is ,fitted to the ,camera and the ,reversible ,back in the ,frame ,a back is now made and attached to the frame1 to carry the ground-glass reversible back1 so that it can be shifted over the center of focus for each small portion of the plate on which the picture is to be made4 ,measure the outside of the plate holder and1 doubling the dimensions both ways1 lay out a diagram on a piece of paper4 ,lay the plate holder on the paper and move it to the extreme left1 then to the right1 to see if the center of the plate will coincide with the center of the back4 ,in the same manner locate the center in a vertical position4 ,if the center lines do not coincide1 increase the dimensions until this occurs4 ,mark1 in the exact center1 an opening the size of the plate and cut out the wood4 ,it is best to use a three-ply wood for making the back1 but if this cannot be obtained1 procure a dry piece of wood and mortise and glue strips to the ends to keep the wood from warping4 ,glue the frame to this back1 over the opening1 and make attachments to hold it to the camera in the same manner as the reversible back was attached4 ,illustration3 ,manner of ,laying ,out the ,pattern for the ,back and ,locating the ,exact ,center ,if pictures of two or three different sizes are to be made1 the opening in the new back should be fitted with as many new pieces as there are sizes of pictures1 each to have an opening of corresponding size4 ,for a #e by #g-;in4 plate1 #a-a_/h by #a-a_/d-;in4 pictures is a good size1 as there will be room for #bd pictures on the plate with a small margin left for notes4 ,the piece to fill the opening should be made of the same material as the back so that a smooth joint will result4 ,as a board cannot be made smooth enough for a perfectly light-tight joint1 the surface on the new back1 over which the reversible back travels1 must be covered with cloth--a piece of black velvet is suitable--to exclude all light as the plate holder is shifted over the back4 ,a frame is now made to carry the reversible back of the camera1 the size of which will depend on the size of the other parts1 as well as on the size of the camera to be used4 ,this frame consists of two horizontal strips joined at the ends with grooved pieces1 fitting the edge of the new back1 so that it may be slid up and down in the grooves4 ,the crosspieces are also rabbeted to receive the reversible back and allow it to be moved back and forth horizontally4 ,the rabbet in the horizontal strips should not be so deep as to permit the extending edge to overlap the ground-glass frame1 thus preventing it from moving back as the plate holder is inserted4 ,if the frame on the back and the reversible back fit tightly1 they will remain in any position1 but if they are loosely fitted1 it will be necessary to provide some means to hold them4 ,small springs with pins may be fitted to the vertically moving frame to hold it in the position for the horizontal rows of pictures4 ,the ground glass should be marked for the size picture to be taken4 ,the positions of the frame and plate carrier should also be marked so that the plate holder need not be taken out to find the location and focus for the next picture4 ,connecting a ,pipe to ,sheet ,metal ,in the absence of a waste nut1 an iron pipe can be easily fastened to sheet-metal work as shown in the sketch4 ,the end of the pipe1 ,fig4 #a1 is slotted with a hacksaw to form four projections1 which are turned outward and their ends rounded as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the face of the projections are tinned and then riveted to the sheet-metal surface1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,after soldering the joint1 it will be as good or better than if a waste nut had been used4--,contributed by ,lorin ,a4 ,brown1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,the ,end of the ,pipe as ,it is ,prepared to be ,riveted on the ,sheet ,metal 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,an ,acid ,siphon ,when siphoning off acids or other disagreeable or poisonous liquids1 it is very important that none of it touch the flesh or mouth4 ,it is almost impossible to do this when starting the ordinary siphon4 ,a siphon that does away with this inconvenience and danger can be made as follows3 ,procure a good ,bunsen burner and two pieces of #a_/d in4 glass tube1 one #b ft4 and the other #ah in4 long4 ,heat the #b ft4 length at a point #h in4 from one end in the flame until it can be bent as shown at ,a4 ,the other piece should be plugged at one end and then slowly and evenly heated at a point #aj in4 from one end4 ,when the glass is soft1 blow slowly and steadily into the open end1 at the same time turning the tube around in the flame4 ,this will form a bulb1 ,b4 ,the ends of the glass tube are heated and bent as shown1 at ,c and ,d1 and then fused onto the piece ,a1 as shown at ,e4 ,this can be accomplished by heating the piece ,a at a point #d in4 from the unbent end4 ,when the glass becomes soft1 place one end of a short piece of tube in it and pull out into a thread4 ,break this off as close to the tube as possible1 to make a hole in the tube4 ,heat the end of the tube ,d and also the glass around the hole1 and when both become soft1 they can be fused together4 ,illustration3 ,when ,starting ,this ,siphon ,it is ,difficult for the ,liquid to ,touch the ,mouth or ,flesh ,in use1 close the end not in the liquid and1 placing the mouth at ,f1 exhaust the tube1 thus filling it with the liquid4 ,when the closed end is opened1 the siphon will flow4 ,the liquid collects in the bulb1 and if a little care is used1 none of it can reach the mouth4--,contributed by ,o4 ,f4 ,tronnes1 ,evanston1 ,ill4 ,bottle-,opening ,trick ,a local junk dealer1 who was also known as the strongest man in town1 used to mystify the folks by opening a bottle1 apparently with a stroke of his index finger4 ,his audience saw his index finger strike the stopper1 but did not see the knuckle of his second finger strike the eccentric at the point ,a1 as shown in the sketch1 causing it to fly up while his index finger ,b assisted the stopper out of the bottle mouth4 ,illustration3 ,in ,striking the ,bottle ,cork1 the ,knuckle of the ,second ,finger ,loosens the ,wire ,lock ,when trying the trick1 it is best to select a bottle with a loose stopper1 or else wear a glove1 as the gentleman who demonstrated the trick had hands of the hard and horny type4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,setting ,colors in ,fabrics ,the colors of fabrics or other materials of any kind may be set by boiling the articles in the following solution3 ,to #a gal4 of soft water add #a oz4 of ox gall4 ,this solution should be boiling when the articles are dropped into it4 ,a chemical reaction results and the colors are set or made nonfading4 ,the process is harmless4 ,colors in wood may be treated in the same manner4 ,towel-,roller ,brackets ,very serviceable brackets for a towel roller can be made by using ordinary wire clothes hooks1 as shown in the illustration4 ,the roller is made of wood and two nails with their heads cut off1 one in each end1 form bearings to turn in the ends of the hooks4 ,when it is desired to remove the roller1 the hooks are sprung apart enough to allow it to drop out4--,contributed by ,hugh ,carmichael1 ,west ,lorne1 ,ont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,roller ,brackets are ,easily ,adjusted in ,any ,location and ,serve the ,purpose ,admirably ,a ,developing-,tray ,rocker ,the tank method of photographic development is acknowledged as the best1 yet there are many who1 for various reasons1 still use the old-style tray method4 ,for those who use the tray1 a splendid and simple method that combines the good qualities of both the tank and tray is the tray-rocking device shown in the illustration4 ,illustration3 ,developing-,tray ,rocker to ,keep the ,liquid in ,motion over the ,plate ,automatically ,the rocker consists of a wood box1 #ac in4 long1 #i in4 wide and #a-a_/b in4 deep1 made of #c_/h-;in4 material1 together with a similar box #a-a_/b in4 deep1 that fits over the other as a light-proof cover4 ,both are given a coat of black paint4 ,at the center on the under side of the tray part1 a right angle made of strap iron is fastened with screws4 ,on the part projecting down1 a hole is drilled to receive a sleeve made of a brass tube which is soldered in place4 ,an ordinary shelf bracket is procured1 one end of which is filed and fitted with a strip of metal having both ends turned up slightly4 ,small-pointed pins are fastened in holes drilled near the turned-up part4 ,the points of the pins serve as a knife-edge for the rocker4 ,the extending end of the strap iron is fitted with a pendulum rod having a weight at the bottom4 ,the rocker is attached to the wall in a convenient place in the dark room4 ,the tray with the developer and plate is placed in the box1 which is light-tight1 and the pendulum is started swinging4--,contributed by ,t4 ,b4 ,lambert1 ,chicago4 ,an ,adjustable ,bookholder ,a very satisfactory adjustable holder for books or letters can be constructed of ordinary materials4 ,a board is used for the base1 and two pieces1 ,c1 cut from the grooved edges of flooring boards1 are fastened on top as shown4 ,a permanent end1 ,a1 is fastened to one end of the base4 ,a good-size holder is #ai in4 long1 #f in4 wide1 made of material #c_/d in4 thick4 ,illustration3 ,the ,holder may be ,used for ,books or ,letters and ,papers as a ,file ,the movable slide ,b has two pieces attached to its under side1 which are cut from the tongued edges of flooring boards4 ,the piece ,d answers the double purpose of a handle and brace4 ,a lock1 ,e1 is made of a bolt1 having a long thread and a square head4 ,a hole is bored from the under side through the brace1 and a portion of the wood is cut out to admit the nut4 ,a square place is cut out to admit the square bolt head in the bottom pieces4 ,to lock the slide1 simply screw the nut upward so that it will push the bolt head against the base4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,an ,old-,oak ,stain ,to make old oak of ash1 elm1 box alder1 chestnut1 maple1 yew1 and sycamore wood use a solution of copper acetate1 or iron acetate4 ,either of these can be made by allowing a strong acid to come in contact with copper or iron4 ,acetic acid1 or vinegar1 will do for the acid4 ,the chemical can be obtained from a local druggist if it is not desired to make the stain4 ,by varying the strength of the solution1 several shades may be obtained4 ,a weak solution of iron acetate gives various brown hues4 ,as the strength of the salt increases by concentration1 the shades of brown darken4 ,tablespoon ,end ,used as ,lemon ,squeezer ,in an emergency1 the ordinary tablespoon can be used as a lemon squeezer by turning the lemon around the end of the spoon4 ,this produces the same result as obtained with the regular squeezers1 which act on the principle of extracting the juice by turning and crushing the lemon over a rough projection which approximately matches the shape of a half lemon4--,contributed by ,l4 ,e4 ,turner1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,spoon ,bowl ,produces the ,same ,effect as the ,lemon ,squeezer ,a ,back ,stop for a ,workbench ,in planing small pieces on a bench1 they usually have a tendency to tip up or slide around4 ,this difficulty can be easily overcome by providing the bench with an extra back stop4 ,for this purpose a discarded plane iron will do very well4 ,its edge should be notched so that it will easily enter the wood4 ,the edges of its central slot should be beveled off1 if an ordinary wood screw is used to fasten it to the bench4 ,a series of holes1 several inches apart and in line with the regular back stop1 should be bored in the bench so the screw and iron can be readily changed1 to fit varying lengths4--,contributed by ,c4 ,s4 ,rice1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,a ,plane ,bit ,fastened to the ,top of a ,bench to ,hold ,blocks ,while ,planing ,them ,croquet ,mallets ,protected by ,metal ,rings ,illustration ,due to the severe service they are subjected to1 croquet mallets very frequently split off at the ends1 which spoils them for further use in accurate driving4 ,to prevent this1 metal bands may be placed around the ends of the mallets4 ,thin sheet iron1 or tin1 can be used for this purpose4 ,one end is bent up at right angles1 the opposite end is provided with a loop to fit over the upright portion of the first end1 and then the loop is closed up and hammered down to draw the metal tightly around the mallet4 ,the ring is secured in place with several tacks1 or short nails1 driven through the seam4--,contributed by ,h4 ,e4 ,stratmeyer1 ,rockville1 ,md4 ,distance ,marker for ,printing ,photographs ,a convenient homemade printing device1 or distance marker1 for printing photographs by artificial light consists of a smooth board on which twelve #a-;in4 marks are drawn1 as shown4 ,a wall-base electric socket is attached on the first line and the others are numbered up to #ab4 ,a trial test of a negative marks the distance and time of exposure which should be recorded on the negative4 ,such a device makes uniform prints possible and provides a means of recording time on negative-storage envelopes4--,contributed by ,harold ,davis1 ,altoona1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,same ,distance with the ,same ,exposure will ,always ,produce ,uniform ,prints ,mantel ,picture ,frames ,made in ,plaster ,procure a small oval or rectangular frame of a suitable size and use it as a pattern in making a mold4 ,if it is not necessary to select an expensive frame1 one that is straight without any floral designs is the best to use4 ,ordinary molding made into a frame will do as well1 or a pattern1 whittled out of wood in oval shape1 will produce good results4 ,make a flask out of any small box1 and fill it with clay instead of molding sand4 ,make an impression of the frame in the clay1 and the mold is ready for the plaster4 ,procure four #h-oz4 bottles1 fill them with water1 and tint the water in three of them red1 green1 and blue1 with dyes4 ,when purchasing the plaster of paris--#b lb4 will do--also get some brass filings from a machine shop1 and mix it with the plaster while in a dry state2 then divide the lot into four parts of #a_/b lb4 each1 or equal parts4 ,use the tinted water to mix the plaster and pour it into the mold4 ,this will give the combinations red1 green1 blue1 and white4 ,picture frames made in this manner will stand enough polishing to keep the brass filings on the surface bright and shining1 which gives a pretty effect4--,contributed by ,j4 ,b4 ,murphy1 ,plainfield1 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,five-,pointed ,star ,there are many ways of making a five-pointed star1 but the one illustrated is new and easy to apply4 ,a long strip of paper1 which should be transparent1 is tied into a knot4 ,when the ends ,a and ,b are drawn tightly1 the paper strip takes the position shown in ,c4 ,the end ,a is folded forward1 or in front of the knot2 then the whole is turned over and it will take the position shown in ,d4 ,hold the paper to a good light and a perfect five-pointed star will be seen4--,contributed by ,j4 ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,holding the ,knot to the ,light a ,star will be ,seen1 ,shown by the ,dotted ,lines ,fastening ,portire ,pole in a ,doorway ,a pole can be fastened between two supports1 posts1 or in a door casing neatly and without fixtures in the following manner3 ,the pole is cut #a_/h in4 shorter than the space between the casings1 and a #e_/af in4 hole is drilled in each end1 one to a depth of #a-a_/b in4 and the other #c_/h in4 deep1 a coil spring being placed in the deepest hole4 ,screws are turned into the center of the location for the pole in the door jambs1 allowing one screw head to project #a_/h in41 and the other at least #a_/d inch4 ,illustration3 ,no ,fixtures ,that will ,show are ,required with ,this ,fastening of a ,portire ,pole ,to place the pole in position1 put the end with the spring in the hole on the screw head projecting #a_/d in4 and push the pole against the jamb1 allowing the other end to pass over the other projecting screw head until it slips into the hole by pressure from the spring4 ,the spring will keep the pole in position4--,contributed by ,ernest ,f4 ,dexter1 ,hartford1 ,conn4 ,trick with ,knives and ,glasses ,an interesting trick may be performed with three tumblers and three table knives4 ,place the tumblers in an equilateral triangle on a table so the knife ends1 when the knives are laid between them1 as shown in the plan sketch1 are about #a in4 away from the tumblers4 ,the trick is to arrange the knives so that they are supported by the tops of the three tumblers and nothing else4 ,most observers will say that it is impossible2 some will try it and in most cases fail4 ,it can be done1 and the illustration shows how simply it may be accomplished4--,contributed by ,r4 ,neland1 ,minneapolis1 ,minn4 ,illustration3 ,knives ,placed in ,such a ,manner as to be ,supported by the ,three ,glasses ,a ,scraper ,handle ,in using the ordinary steel-plate scraper1 much inconvenience and cramping of the hands is experienced unless some suitable handle is attached4 ,if a piece of scrap wood is taken and cut to a convenient shape1 with a groove tightly fitting the scraper steel1 greater pressure can be exerted and more effective work produced1 without cramping the hands or tiring out the operator as readily4--,contributed by ,a4 ,p4 ,nevin1 ,hancock1 ,mich4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ordinary ,piece of ,board ,shaped for a ,handle and ,notched for the ,scraper ,blade ,photographic ,tray-,rocking ,stand ,films develop better if the tray holding the solution is kept in motion or rocked4 ,this is inconvenient and tiresome where a great many films are to be developed4 ,the trouble may be overcome by the use of the rocking device shown in the sketch4 ,it may be made of any light wood1 the right size to suit the photographer's needs4 ,illustration3 ,tray ,rocked ,automatically by a ,weight ,the tray holder ,a is pivoted on the uprights ,c with pins ,,ee4 ,the uprights are fastened to a base1 ,b4 ,two braces1 ,d1 one on each side of the upright ,c1 limits the tip of the tray holder ,a4 ,the weight ,f works as a pendulum1 which automatically rocks the tray when set in motion4--,contributed by ,abner ,b4 ,shaw1 ,no4 ,dartmouth1 ,mass4 ,kite-,line ,traveler ,the amusement of kite flying can be broadened by adding the kite-line traveler shown in the sketch4 ,the frame of the traveler is made of poplar1 spruce or soft pine1 #a_/d in4 square4 ,the horizontal piece is #bd in4 long and the piece to which the wings are fastened is #h in4 long4 ,this piece is cut so it will have a slight slant4 ,the brace is a mitered piece1 #ac in4 long4 ,the frame is fastened together with small brads1 giving it the appearance shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 ,traveler ,details 7,fig4 #a7 ,after the frame is finished1 the traveler wheels are made and attached4 ,they should be #a_/d in4 thick1 about #a-a_/d in4 in diameter1 and have a groove cut #c_/af in4 into their faces4 ,the pattern for cutting the bearings is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,these are bent at the places shown by the dotted lines and attached to the main frame stick as shown by ,,bb in ,fig4 #c4 ,the end view of the bearing is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the metal is bent in as shown by ,,aa1 so that the wheel will rotate without much friction4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e7 ,in ,fig4 #f is shown the method of attaching the wings to the slanting frame part4 ,the wings are made of light cardboard and each fastened with tacks to a wood arm1 cut as shown4 ,the large end of each arm is made to hinge in a piece of tin with brads ,,aa4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #f7 ,fasten a string to the ends of the arm pieces1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 and attach a wire loop to the middle of the string1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the wire shown at ,l in ,fig4 #c is bent and attached to the main frame so it will slide easily4 ,the trip for dropping the wings1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 is a small block of wood about #b in4 square and #a_/d in4 thick with a #a_/b-;in4 hole in the center4 ,slip the kite line through the hole before tying it to the kite4 ,place the trip about #ajj ft4 from the kite and wedge it to the string with a small piece of wood4 ,the eyelets ,,ss are necessary1 as they make it impossible for the pulley to run off the string4 ,the traveler is first put on the kite string with the end having the loop ,l 7,fig4 #c7 up1 then1 after letting out #ajj ft4 of string1 the trip block is fastened in place and the kite tied to the end of the string4 ,hook the wire loop on the string attached to the ends of the wings in place in the wire catch of ,l1 and it is ready for the flight4 ,when the traveler reaches the trip1 the loop ,l is pushed back1 thus causing the end of the wire to slip out of wire loop and the wings to fall back as shown in ,fig4 #b1 when the traveler descends ready to be set for another flight4--,contributed by ,stanley ,c4 ,funk1 ,bellefontaine1 ,ohio4 ,a ,mouse ,trap ,illustration ,a simple mouse trap can be made of two lengths of steel wire4 ,the spiral wire is #a_/af in4 in diameter and the center wire is of larger size4 ,the trap is set by pulling out the spring and catching the ends on the bends ,a and ,b4 ,the bait is tied on at ,c4 ,when the mouse puts his head through the coils and pulls the bait1 the springs are released and his head is caught between the coils4 ,how to ,make a ,small ,electric ,furnace ,the furnace consists of a large flower pot containing an ordinary clay crucible about #f in4 in height1 the space between the two being packed with fireclay4 ,two #c_/d-;in4 holes are bored through the sides of the crucible about half way between the top and the bottom4 ,holes corresponding to these holes are molded in the fireclay1 which should extend several inches above the top of the flower pot4 ,a smaller crucible is placed inside of the large one for use in melting such metals as copper1 brass and aluminum4 ,with metals that will melt at a low degree of heat1 such as tin1 lead or zinc1 the large crucible can be used alone4 ,each crucible should be provided with a cover to confine the heat and keep out the air4 ,the electrodes are ordinary arc-light carbons4 ,illustration3 ,electric ,connections to ,furnace ,the furnace is run on an ordinary #aaj-volt lighting circuit and it is necessary to have a rheostat connected in series with it4 ,a water rheostat as shown in the sketch will serve to regulate the current for this furnace4 ,small quantities of brass or aluminum can be melted in about #aj minutes in the furnace4--,contributed by ,leonard ,stebbins1 ,denver1 ,colo4 ,repairing a ,broken ,knife ,handle ,a piece was broken from the pearl handle of my knife and ,i repaired it in the following manner3 ,after cleaning both the edges of the pearl and the brass beneath1 ,i run in enough solder to fill the place of the piece of pearl broken out4 ,the solder was then filed1 sandpapered and polished4 ,the broken part cannot be felt and it appears to be only an end decoration4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,humphrey1 ,columbus1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,repairing with ,solder 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,picture-,frame and ,triangle ,clamp ,a picture frame or triangle is quite difficult to hold together when fitting the corners4 ,it is still more difficult to hold them together while the glue dries4 ,the clamp illustrated will be found quite satisfactory in solving this problem1 and at the same time is very simple to construct and easy to manipulate4 ,the material list for making the clamps and corner blocks is as follows3 ,picture frame clamp3 #d pieces1 #a-a_/d by #a-a_/d by #ae in4 #b pieces1 #a-a_/d by #a-a_/d by #e in4 ,triangle clamp3 #c pieces1 #a-a_/d by #a-a_/d by #aj in4 #a piece1 #a-a_/d by #a-a_/d by #d in4 ,corner blocks3 #d pieces1 #g_/h by #c-a_/b by #c-a_/b in4 #h pieces1 #g_/h by #a by #b in4 ,the pieces mentioned are of oak1 ,s-#d-,s4 #a piece #c_/h-;in4 maple for dowels ,hardware3 #aj bolts1 #a_/d by #b in4 #d bolts1 #a_/d by #c in4 #b bolts1 #c_/h by #f in4 ,the picture-frame clamp consists of the four arms ,a1 ,b1 ,c and ,d1 ,fig4 #a4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 hole is bored in one end of each piece1 #a_/b in4 from the end4 ,a series of #c_/h-;in4 holes1 #a in4 apart1 are bored along the center in each piece4 ,the two short pieces1 ,e and ,f1 have two #a_/d-;in4 holes bored in their centers1 #a_/b in4 from each end4 ,these pieces are bolted to the four arms with #a_/d-;in4 bolts as shown in the sketch4 ,a #c_/h-;in4 hole is bored in the middle of each piece ,e and ,f for one of the #f-;in4 bolts ,k4 ,illustration3 ,the ,corner ,blocks on ,both ,picture ,frame and ,triangle ,clamps are so ,constructed ,that ,they ,hold the ,molding together ,while ,fitting the ,corners and also ,hold ,them ,securely ,while the ,glue is ,hardening 7,fig4 #a7 ,the four corner blocks ,g1 ,h1 ,i and ,j1 ,fig4 #a1 have a #c_/h-;in4 hole bored in the center of each and a dowel glued into it with the end projecting #a-a_/d in4 on the under side and level with the surface on the upper side4 ,each of the corner blocks is fitted with two pieces like ,x1 ,fig4 #b4 ,each of these pieces has one end round or a semicircle1 and in its center a #a_/d-;in4 hole is bored4 ,the other end has a #c_/h-;in4 hole bored #a_/b in4 from the end4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,after making the small pieces1 take the four corner blocks ,g1 ,h1 ,i and ,j and draw a line on the upper side in the center1 with the grain of the wood1 and mark the angles as follows1 so that one-half the angle will be on each side of the center line3 ,on one end of the pieces ,g and ,h mark a #ij-;deg4 angle1 on the other end a #de-;deg4 angle1 on the piece ,i mark a #ij-;deg4 and #cj-;deg4 angle and on ,j mark a #ij-;deg4 and #fj-;deg4 angle4 ,mark the number of degrees of each between the sides of the angle4 ,place two of the pieces marked ,x1 ,fig4 #b1 on each of the corner blocks1 one piece on each side between the different angle lines1 so their round ends will be toward the center and toward each other with a space of #a_/d in4 between them4 ,clamp the pieces to the corner blocks and bore the #a_/d-;in4 holes through them to secure perfect alinement4 ,put the bolts in and turn the pieces first to one angle and then the other1 and while in the respective positions1 bore the #c_/h-;in4 holes #c_/h in4 deep in the corner blocks4 ,glue a dowel in each #c_/h-;in4 hole of the small pieces1 allowing it to project #a_/d in4 on the under side so it will fit in the #c_/h-;in4 hole in the corner block4 ,be sure to countersink the holes for the heads of the bolts4 ,all bolts should be fitted with wing nuts4 ,all that is necessary to change from one angle to another is to loosen the nuts and swing the small pieces around so the dowel pins will drop into the other holes1 then tighten the nuts4 ,the triangle clamp is made in the same manner as the picture-frame clamp1 except that the arms ,l and ,m1 ,figs4 #b and #c1 are half-lapped into the crosspiece ,p4 ,the bolt ,o is #c_/h in4 and the head is cut off4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole in the bolt1 #a_/d in4 from the end1 and bore a #c_/h-;in4 hole in the end of the arm ,n4 ,insert the headless bolt ,o in this hole and drive a nail through the side of the arm ,n1 so it will pass through the hole drilled in the bolt4 ,this keys the bolt in the end of the arm ,n4 ,to clamp a picture frame1 set the corner blocks ,g1 ,h1 ,i and ,j to the #ij-;deg4 angles and adjust them on the arms ,a1 ,b1 ,c and ,d to accommodate the size frame to be made1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,tighten the thumbnut on the bolt ,k1 and this will draw all four corners together with the same pressure4 ,the corners can then be examined to see if they fit properly4 ,if they do not1 saw in the joints with a backsaw until they do fit4 ,the triangles are clamped in the same way4 ,the corner blocks are set to take the proper angles4 ,the ends of the bolts should be slightly burred over so that the thumbnuts cannot be turned off4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,a4 ,pettit1 ,baltimore1 ,md4 ,exterior ,sliding ,fly ,screen ,the method shown for fitting fly screens on the outside of the upper and lower sash permits the screen to be raised and held at different heights4 ,screweyes are turned into the outer strips1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the sides of the screen frame are grooved1 ,fig4 #b1 to allow it to slide up and down on the screweyes4 ,illustration3 ,the ,heads of the ,screweyes in the ,window-,frame ,stop ,slide in a ,groove ,cut in the ,screen ,frame 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the screen can be raised and two of the screweyes turned from the normal vertical position1 ,a1 ,fig4 #c1 to a horizontal position1 ,b1 to hold the frame at that point4 ,by the use of a greater number of screweyes more places can be provided to support the screen at different heights4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,bushing a ,stovepipe in a ,chimney ,hole ,when a stovepipe is too small for the hole in the chimney1 a bushing can be made of the kind of metal tobacco boxes that are curved to fit in a pocket4 ,remove the tops and bottoms of the boxes and shove them in around the pipe4 ,if such tobacco boxes are not at hand1 tin cans of any kind can be used by melting off the tops and bottoms and bending the remaining cylindrical shells into proper shape4--,contributed by ,elmer ,mc,conaughy1 ,dayton1 ,o4 ,a ,screweye ,driver ,illustration ,an ordinary wire nail1 #c in4 long1 bent as shown and with its head filed square1 makes a good tool for turning in screweyes4 ,the square head is readily held in the chuck on most braces4 ,the screweye can be turned in with greater speed than by the ordinary method4--,contributed by ,robert ,t4 ,johnston1 ,buffalo1 ,new ,york4 ,copying ,stand for ,photographic ,enlarging and ,reducing ,a camera stand or table1 which can be put to many uses1 is easily made and1 when made1 will be of particular service1 says ,work1 ,london1 for enlarging1 reducing1 copying1 and1 with a slight modification1 for making lantern slides by reduction4 ,copying with a camera on a tripod is always a more or less complicated job1 because of the ease with which a picture1 being focused1 may be thrown out of focus1 and even out of the field of view1 the camera not being attached to the same support as the picture4 ,with the stand shown in the illustration1 the picture is attached to the same support as the camera4 ,this makes it possible to place the apparatus on a table1 out in the open1 or in any other suitable position1 where the light may be best for the work4 ,when used for enlarging with artificial light it will also be found convenient1 as it may be placed in any position in a darkened room4 ,illustration3 ,camera ,stand for ,use in ,copying and ,enlarging1 as ,well as for ,making ,lantern ,slides 7,fig4 #a7 ,the size of the stand will depend on the sizes of pictures to be made1 but it is better to have it too large than too small1 as a small camera can be used on a large stand while a small stand would be of only limited use4 ,the general appearance of the stand is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the material list is as follows3 #b ,sides1 #a_/b in4 by #i-a_/b in4 by #e ft41 ,s-#b-,s4 #d ,crosspieces1 #a_/b in4 by #c in4 by #a ft4 #g in41 ,s-#b-,s4 #d ,guides1 #c_/d in4 by #a-a_/d in4 by #b ft4 #f in41 ,s-#b-,s4 #b ,bottom ,pieces1 #a in4 by #i in4 by #b ft4 #f in41 ,s-#b-,s4 #a ,easel1 #c_/d in4 by #a ft4 #f in4 by #b ft41 ,s-#b-,s4 #b ,cleats1 #a_/b in4 by #a-a_/b in4 by #a ft4 #d in41 ,s-#b-,s4 ,straight-grained soft pine or poplar is the best material to use4 ,the side pieces should be narrowed at one end or to a point about halfway of their length4 ,the extent of this narrowing will depend somewhat on circumstances4 ,the guide pieces are then attached with screws1 the two upper pieces so that they have their upper edges flush with the edges of the side boards4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the bottom piece1 on which the camera is to be set1 is made of the two pieces1 cut as shown in ,fig4 #b1 and joined with cleats1 as in ,fig4 #c4 ,the space left after part of one side of each board has been cut away1 should be sufficient to make a slot which1 when the boards are joined together1 will admit the screw to hold the camera in place4 ,a rod is run through holes bored in the sides1 just below the two pairs of guides1 and fitted with a wing nut for clamping the sliding bottom when a focus and the size of the picture is found4 ,in copying1 the camera is attached to the bottom board and the picture is tacked to the easel4 ,the camera is then focused roughly by means of the rack and pinion1 the final1 fine focusing being done by moving the sliding bottom board4 ,for enlarging1 the lantern is placed on the sliding bottom and the bromide paper tacked to the easel4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,for lantern-slide work1 which is reducing1 it is necessary to cut an aperture in the easel1 after the manner shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the edges of the opening have a rabbet to receive first a ground glass and then the negative1 both being held in place with turn buttons4 ,it is not necessary to have two easels1 as this opening can be fitted with a piece to make a level surface when the apparatus is used for copying or enlarging4 ,to ,make ,whitewash ,stick to ,surfaces ,coated ,in using whitewash much difficulty is experienced in making it stick to the substance covered4 ,a good way to prevent the coating from cracking and peeling off is to add #b oz4 of pure sodium chloride to every #a gal4 of whitewash mixture4 ,this is not expensive1 but should be secured at a drug store because some salts of sodium are not pure and will darken the whitewash4 ,the sodium chloride should be added after the whitewash solution is made up4 ,when this mixture is used in buildings it will destroy all vermin which it touches4 ,a ,mechanical ,camera ,illustration ,the young person who likes to draw will find the device illustrated of great assistance for outlining a portrait or a bit of scenery which can be filled in to make the picture4 ,the camera consists of a box without a cover1 about #ab in4 long1 #f in4 wide and #d in4 deep4 ,an oblong hole is cut in one end1 a small hole bored in the other1 and a piece cut out of the lower edge so that one eye can be placed close to the hole4 ,the oblong hole1 shown by the dotted lines1 is covered with a fine perforated cardboard1 the kind used for working in mottoes with yarn4 ,supports are nailed in the corners of the box1 their length being calculated to allow the operator to sit or stand1 as desired4 ,illustration3 ,outlining a ,portrait on the ,perforated ,paper ,placed over the ,oblong ,hole in the ,camera ,the camera is used in the manner illustrated4 ,if a portrait is to be drawn1 then the one sitting for it must be quiet until the outlines are completed4 ,the operator1 looking through the hole1 traces the lines on the cardboard between the perforations4 ,when the outlines are drawn in this manner1 the cardboard is removed and placed on the paper or cardboard used for the picture4 ,the outline is then transferred by marking with a sharp-pointed pencil through the perforations on the outlines as drawn4 ,after separating the two pieces1 the markings can be connected with a continuous line and an exact outline will be obtained which can be filled in as desired4 ,the outline picture is a sample of work done with the camera4--,contributed by ,florence ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,ont4 ,gauge ,attachment for a ,pocket ,rule ,illustration ,the base of the gauge ,a is cut from a block of hard wood1 about #b-a_/b in4 long1 #a in4 wide and #c_/h in4 thick4 ,a notch is cut in one side to admit the rule and the wedge ,b1 which has a slot that slides on a pin in the base4 ,a small metal clip keeps the wedge in place4 ,the gauge can be readily set on the rule at any mark4 ,plate ,hangers ,in hanging old china plates for decorative purposes use three large white dress hooks1 placed at equal distances apart on the edge of the plate4 ,the hanging wire or cord is run through them from the back side and drawn up tightly4 ,these hooks are much better than the ordinary plate hanger1 as they are small and will not show much on the plate4 ,an ,electrically ,operated ,camera ,shutter ,illustration3 ,the ,electromagnet ,trips a ,spring ,plunger ,that ,forces a ,piston on the ,camera ,air ,bulb ,it is often quite desirable to operate the shutter of a camera from a distance1 especially in photographing birds and animals4 ,the device shown in the accompanying sketch serves the above purpose very nicely1 and its construction and operation are exceedingly simple4 ,in brief1 the operation is as follows3 ,the switch ,a is mounted on the limb of a tree1 in such a manner that it is not conspicuous1 and connected in series with a magnet1 ,b1 and a battery by means of a piece of flexible conductor1 such as lamp cord4 ,the magnet ,b is energized when the switch is closed and attracts the iron armature ,c1 which is mounted on an arm1 pivoted at ,d4 ,the lower end of this arm is in the form of a latch1 which supports the rod ,e when it is raised to its upper position4 ,the rod ,e when it is raised compresses the coiled spring ,f1 which is held between the gauge ,g and the washer ,h mounted on the rod4 ,a small coil spring holds the armature ,c away from the core of the magnet ,b4 ,the lower end of the rod ,e is in the form of a piston operating in a wooden cylinder ,j4 ,the rubber bulb at the end of the tube leading to the camera shutter is located in the lower end of the cylinder ,j4 ,when the rod ,e is released by the latch ,k1 it moves downward in the cylinder ,j1 due to the action of the spring ,f1 and compresses the bulb ,l1 causing the shutter of the camera to be operated4 ,a small handle1 ,m1 may be mounted on the rod to be used in raising it to the upper position4 ,the component parts of this device may be mounted on a small wooden base by means of brass straps1 and the terminals of the electric circuit connected to the binding posts ,n and ,o1 as shown4 ,the switch ,a may be dispensed with and a push button used in its place1 as the operator may station himself several hundred feet away4 ,it may be necessary to use a battery of more than one cell in such cases4 ,electroplating without a ,tank ,electroplating without a plating tank is made possible with the following easily homemade apparatus described in a ,german scientific magazine4 ,it consists of a rubber ball1 ,a1 fitted at one end with a glass tube1 ,b1 which carries at the opposite end a small sponge4 ,a rod1 ,d1 passes through the rubber ball1 which is tightly corked at both ends1 into the glass tube ,b and carries at that end the anode ,e4 ,a small glass tube1 ,f1 also connects the rubber ball with the larger tube ,b4 ,the connections from the battery to the cathode1 ,g1 the object to be plated1 and to the projecting end of the anode-carrying rod1 ,d1 are made as shown4 ,the rubber ball is filled with the electrolyte1 and is squeezed so as to force the fluid through the small tube ,f1 into the larger tube1 ,b1 filling it and soaking the sponge ,c4 ,the current is then turned on1 and by moving the wet sponge over the cathode ,g1 the latter will be plated4 ,not only is this an interesting accessory for the amateur's laboratory1 but it can be used in the industry where only parts of some object are to be plated1 and where it is desired to remedy bad spots without putting the articles back into the bath4 ,illustration3 ,a ,hand ,tool for ,applying a ,plate ,electrically to the ,surface of ,metal ,a ,milk-,bottle ,tray ,bottled milk is difficult to deliver without knocking the bottles together when carrying them or while in a wagon4 ,there are several kinds of wire baskets for carrying the bottles1 but they all have the disadvantage of allowing the bottles to strike one another4 ,a carrier not having this fault can be made very cheaply as follows3 ,procure a board #a in4 thick1 #h in4 wide and #b ft4 long1 plane and make it smooth1 and use ordinary tin fruit or vegetable cans for the bottle holders4 ,cut each can off #b-a_/b in4 from the bottom and smooth off the jagged edges with a file4 ,nail these in two rows on the board1 starting #a in4 from each end4 ,attach a segment of a barrel hoop for a handle4 ,the carrier can be painted as desired4--,contributed by ,g4 ,h4 ,clemmons1 ,storm ,lake1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,parts of ,tin ,cans ,fastened to a ,board for ,holding ,milk ,bottles ,a ,springboard ,select straight-grained hickory or ash for the springboards4 ,these can be of any width to make up the board to #ah in4 wide4 ,the frame part may be of any material of the dimensions given in the sketch4 ,the butt ends of the springboard should be well fastened to the crosspiece with screws1 or1 better still1 small carriage bolts with the nuts on the under side4 ,illustration3 ,a ,springboard for ,use in ,connection with a ,vaulting ,pole or for ,turning ,acts ,the crosspiece at the rear is cut on the angle of the springboard4 ,the front crosspiece is mortised into the frame1 and the one near the center is laid on top of the two side rails4 ,the rear crosspiece is either fastened with large dowels or mortised into the sidepieces4 ,this springboard will be of use in connection with a back-yard gymnasium for vaulting and doing turning acts4 ,planing ,rough-,grain ,boards ,the surface of a board having a grain that runs both ways is very hard to smooth with a plane4 ,by sharpening the plane iron to a keen edge1 then placing it in the plane with the cap reversed and set about #a_/cb in4 from the cutting edge1 ,i find that with a light cut the plane will smooth regardless of the direction of the grain4--,contributed by ,william ,rollins1 ,wichita1 ,kansas4 ,braces for ,aeroplane ,frames ,in making model aeroplanes or gliders the brace shown will serve the purpose admirably4 ,the size and strength of the metal used will depend on where it is to be used4 ,the metal is bent into the shape shown with the use of a vise4 ,the manner of attaching the braces is clearly shown4--,contributed by ,francis ,chetlain1 ,chicago4 ,illustration3 ,the ,braces are ,cut from ,stake ,iron or ,sheet ,metal ,according to the ,size ,machine being ,built ,a ,puzzle ,purse ,the puzzle purse is made of four pieces of chamois1 two of the pieces being merely flaps1 one on each side at the upper edge4 ,one of the pieces forming one side of the purse extends upward for about twice the height of the purse part4 ,the part above the purse has a number of slits cut in it to make the width of each strip #a_/h in4 ,these slits should be accurately cut in order that the purse may be opened easily4 ,the other half is only the size of the purse proper4 ,the upper edge of the latter piece and the flap on that side are stitched together to the flap on the opposite side1 the threads of the stitches running between the strips of the long piece4 ,these stitches are made on the line ,,ab and around the edge4 ,illustration3 ,the ,strips of ,leather ,sliding through the ,stitches ,make the ,puzzle ,part of the ,purse ,to open the purse1 take hold of each side on the purse part and draw the pieces apart4 ,in doing so1 the strips are drawn through the stitches so that they may be separated and a coin taken from the purse4 ,a pull on each end will close the purse4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,motton1 ,toronto1 ,ont4 ,an ,emergency ,sandpapering ,machine ,while doing some work ,i had several small pieces to be finished with sandpaper4 ,they were so small and of such a shape that it was impossible to do the work by hand4 ,not having a sanding machine1 ,i used a disk talking machine for the purpose4 ,i placed a sheet of sandpaper over the disk and fastened it to the felt at the corners with pins4 ,the machine was then set going at its highest rate of speed1 and the articles were smoothed by holding them on the disk4--,contributed by ,fred ,s4 ,barnard1 ,los ,angeles1 ,cal4 ,a ,developing ,machine ,the base of the developing machine consists of a wood tray with sloping ends and high sides1 which is placed at the center and provides bearings for the wheel axle4 ,the dimensions given in the sketch are for making a machine to develop a film about #bi in4 long4 ,the disk1 or wheel1 is cut from a board1 #g_/h in4 thick1 and the attached crosspieces are cut from #a_/d in4 dowels to make them #b-a_/b in4 long4 ,these are placed about #a in4 apart on the circumference of the disk4 ,an axle1 fastened solidly in the wheel and adjusted in the bearings1 is kept from slipping sideways by bushings made of a spool4 ,a crank is attached to one end of the axle4 ,hot paraffin is applied to the inside of the tank part1 to make it liquid-tight4 ,two pins or hooks are attached to one of the crosspieces to catch into the film end4 ,if the wheel is the correct size1 the same pins can be used for fastening the other end of the film4 ,illustration3 ,the ,entire ,length of ,film is ,placed on the ,wheel ,where ,it is ,run through the ,developer ,the film is first attached to the wheel2 then1 while turning slowly1 the developer is poured into the tray4 ,keep on turning the wheel until full development is obtained1 then pour out the liquid and turn in fresh1 clear water1 and turn the wheel to wash out the developer4 ,remove the film and place it in the hypo bath4--,contributed by ,raymond ,m4 ,bealer1 ,baltimore1 ,md4 ,a ,stove-,wood ,carrier ,a handy wood carrier1 for bringing wood and kindling from the basement or yard to the wood box in the house1 may be made from a grain sack1 as shown in the sketch4 ,use a complete sack and make rope handles at each end4 ,when used1 place only sufficient wood or kindling in it to permit the handles to come together over the top of the load4 ,this will make a comfortable grip and it is no harder to carry than a medium-weight suitcase4 ,when the wood is removed the carrier can be taken to the back yard and shaken out1 thus doing away with the dirt that usually results from other methods of filling wood boxes4--,contributed by ,walter ,nelson ,kidston1 ,seattle1 ,wash4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ropes at the ,ends of the ,sack ,make a ,handle to ,carry ,it ,like a ,grip ,a ,pencil ,sharpener ,a pencil sharpened with the device shown will have a better point and one that will not break easily while being sharpened4 ,the lower arm ,a is made from a strip of sheet steel1 #a_/af in4 thick4 ,an extension1 #a_/d in4 wide1 is cut and bent in a circle to form the lower finger hold4 ,the upper arm ,b forms the cutter1 which is made from a piece of hacksaw blade4 ,the teeth are ground off and the temper is drawn from the extension that forms the upper circle4 ,a portion of the arm ,a is bent over1 as shown at ,c1 to form a support for the pencil point to rest upon4 ,a hole1 large enough for a pencil to turn in1 is bored through a stick of hardwood1 ,d1 and tapered so that the center of the hole meets the inner edge of ,c4 ,it is fastened to the lower arm with screws4 ,a sharp cutting edge is ground on the blade which is then attached to the arm ,a with a rivet loosely enough to swing freely4--,contributed by ,j4 ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,a ,pencil ,sharpener ,that will ,make a ,point without ,breaking the ,lead ,cleaning an ,oilstone ,use kerosene oil and a sprinkling of emery flour and proceed to sharpen tools4 ,it is not necessary to clean a stone thus treated before placing the tool on it1 as the emery and kerosene will make a good surface on the stone as well as assisting in producing a sharp edge on the tool4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,landing for ,small ,boats ,not having a landing for my small boat1 ,i made a series of sectional platforms1 rising #b ft4 above the bottom1 which served the purpose well and were inexpensive4 ,each section is about #ae ft4 long1 #c ft4 wide1 and #b ft4 high4 ,the frame is made of material #b in4 thick and #d in4 wide1 and on top is a floor made of boards1 while the bottom consists of #b by #d-;in4 crosspieces1 nailed on #f in4 apart4 ,stones are laid on these crosspieces to moor it down in place4 ,the whole landing is simple to make and it lasts a long time1 as the sections can be drawn out and stored during the winter4--,contributed by ,henry ,briggs1 ,lexington1 ,massachusetts4 ,illustration3 ,the ,series of ,platforms ,make a ,good ,small-,boat ,landing on a ,slanting ,beach ,bearings for ,model ,work ,for experimental work ,i use hangers or bearings made of sheet brass or copper1 bent at right angles for strength and capped with a box4 ,the main part of the bearing ,a is shaped as shown1 and the box ,b consists of a small piece cut from a brass rod and drilled for the size of the shaft4 ,the box is soldered to the top end of ,a and the base ,c to the bottom end4 ,when a large metal base is used for a certain model1 the part ,a is attached directly to that base and the part ,c need not be used4 ,illustration3 ,sheet-,copper ,support with a ,base and a ,shaft ,bearing ,soldered to the ,ends ,the bearings can be made in different heights1 each of which will demand a corresponding size and thickness of the parts4 ,sheet brass or copper1 #a_/cb in4 thick1 is about right for a bearing #c in4 high4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,day1 ,pittsfield1 ,mass4 ,holding the ,tongue of a ,shoe in ,place ,the tongue in a shoe will often slip down or over to one side or the other and expose the hose4 ,to overcome this and have the tongue fit snugly in the right place1 fasten a common lace clasp or hook near the top of the tongue1 as shown in the illustration1 so that in lacing the shoe the laces are passed under the hook to hold the tongue in place4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hook on the ,tongue of the ,shoe and ,manner of ,lacing to ,hold the ,tongue ,a ,photo ,vignetter ,procure a piece of heavy wire1 one that is fairly stiff1 says ,camera ,craft1 and a pair of pliers and bend the wire with the pliers as shown in the illustration4 ,after the loop is made to fit around the lens barrel the wire is bent at right angles at a point #f in4 below the circle4 ,at a distance of #h in4 on the extending part of the wire it is bent as shown to form a clip for holding a sheet of cardboard4 ,illustration3 ,the ,arm for ,holding the ,vignette ,cardboard is ,made of a ,heavy ,piece of ,wire ,the cardboard should be about #g in4 wide and of dark color1 with one edge cut semicircular and notched4 ,the size of the wire and the other measurements will depend upon the size and focal length of the lens4 ,if a heavy vignetting card is required1 it may be necessary to make the portion that encircles the lens double in length1 bending it back upon itself to secure a firmer hold4 ,this is a cheap and efficient vignetter that anyone can make in a few moments of spare time4 ,pocket for the ,inside of a ,book ,cover ,students or anyone wishing to retain notes on a subject will find it quite handy to have a large envelope pasted in the back of each textbook4 ,instead of having notes all through the book1 they can be arranged in order and slipped into the envelope4 ,if the book is accidentally dropped1 the notes will not be lost4--,contributed by ,harold ,mynning1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,cleaning ,steel of ,grease and ,stains ,grease and stains can be easily removed from steel with a mixture of unslaked lime and chalk powder1 by rubbing it on the steel with a dry cloth4 ,the best proportion for the mixture1 which is easily prepared1 is #a part of lime to #a part of chalk powder4 ,the powder should be used dry4 ,it is kept in cans for future use and can be used over and over again4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,an ,electrically ,ignited ,flash ,light for ,making ,photographs ,the results obtained in a great many cases in trying to take pictures by flash-light are exceedingly unsatisfactory1 as the expression on the faces of the people in the picture usually is strained or unnatural1 due to the suspense in waiting for the flash4 ,the following simple device avoids this difficulty because the flash is set off by means of electricity1 so that the operator can control the flash from a distant point and thus be able to take the picture quite unawares to his subjects4 ,the construction of the device is as follows3 ,obtain a piece of rather heavy sheet iron1 about #f in4 wide and #aj in4 long4 ,bend this piece of iron into the form shown in the sketch1 and fasten a wooden handle to it with a wood screw4 ,obtain a sheet of #a_/h-;in4 sheet asbestos1 the same size as the piece of sheet iron1 and glue it to the inside surface of the curved piece of iron4 ,it is best to fasten the four corners down by means of some small rivets with rather large washers under the heads next to the asbestos4 ,now mount two pieces of sheet copper1 #a_/b in4 wide and #f in4 long1 parallel with each other on the surface of the asbestos and #a-a_/b in4 apart1 so that their ends are even with the end of the piece of asbestos4 ,these pieces of copper should be insulated from the piece of sheet iron1 and there should be a small screw in one end of each and a small binding post mounted on the other end4 ,illustration3 ,the ,asbestos-,lined ,tray and the ,wiring ,connections for ,attaching to the ,electric-,light ,wires ,procure a piece of lamp cord1 #ae or #bj ft4 in length4 ,fasten an ordinary plug to one end of this cord and the other end to the two binding posts4 ,open one of the conductors in the cord at some point and introduce a single-pole switch1 as shown in the sketch4 ,close the gap between the two pieces of copper by means of a piece of ,no4 #cb gauge copper wire4 ,place the flash-light powder in position1 but do not cover up the wire or have it in actual contact with the powder1 and close the circuit4 ,the operator may include himself in the picture by having a sufficiently long piece of lamp cord and the switch properly arranged4 ,a ,simple ,twine-,ball ,holder ,illustration ,in looking for a place to put a twine ball ,i happened to see a tin funnel and it gave me the idea which ,i put into practice4 ,i punched three holes at equal distances apart in its upper edge and attached three strings which were run to an apex and tied to a screweye in the ceiling4 ,the end of the twine from the center of the ball was run through the funnel stem and allowed to hang as in an ordinary ball holder4--,contributed by ,w4 ,c4 ,loy1 ,rochester1 ,ind4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a filler for birch1 red gum and beech can be made of #a lb4 of bleached shellac to each gallon of water4 ,a ,toy ,popgun ,a toy popgun can be easily made of two blocks of hard wood1 #a_/b in4 thick2 a joint of bamboo1 about #g_/h in4 in diameter and #f in4 long2 a small hinge1 a piece of spring steel1 #a_/b in4 wide and #a in4 long1 and a piece of soft wood for the plunger4 ,the plunger ,a is cut to fit snugly1 yet so it will move easily in the piece of bamboo ,b4 ,one of the blocks of hard wood1 ,c1 is bored to fit one end of the bamboo1 the other block has a #a_/d-;in4 hole bored1 to center the hole in the first block4 ,the two blocks are hinged and the spring latch attached as shown in the sketch4 ,the spring has a hole drilled so it can be fastened with a screw to the outer block1 and a slot cut in the other end to slip over a staple driven into the block ,c4 ,illustration3 ,detail of ,popgun1 ,showing the ,parts ,assembled and ,position of the ,paper ,a piece of paper1 ,d1 is placed in between the blocks while the plunger ,a is out at the end of the bamboo4 ,a quick pressure on the plunger ,a will cause the paper ,d to break out through the small opening with a loud pop4--,contributed by ,paul ,h4 ,burkhart1 ,blue ,island1 ,ill4 ,a ,non-,rolling ,thread ,spool ,illustration ,a spool of thread may be kept from rolling by gluing squares of cardboard to the ends4 ,the squares should be a little larger than the spool4 ,this will save many a step and much bending over to pick up the spool4 ,the spool1 when it falls1 will stop where it landed4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,shoe-,shining ,stand ,to anyone who finds it tiresome to shine his shoes while putting the foot on the rim of a bathtub1 on a cook-stove or chair with a newspaper on it1 the stand here described will afford relief and at the same time he will always have the shining outfit ready for use4 ,illustration3 ,dimensioned ,parts and ,completed ,stand ,which has a ,box to ,hold the ,shining ,outfit ,the whole is of pine1 the foot rest being made of a piece #b by #d in42 the legs1 of #a by #b in41 and the bottom of the box1 of #a_/b by #d-a_/d in4 ,all other dimensions are given in the sketch4 ,after the legs are attached and the bottom of the box in place1 the sides are fitted and fastened with nails4--,contributed by ,samuel ,hughs1 ,berkeley1 ,cal4 ,cutter ,made of a ,wafer ,razor ,blade ,a useful instrument for seamstresses and makers of paper patterns and stencils can be made of a piece of steel or iron and a wafer razor blade4 ,the end of the metal is flattened and two holes drilled to match the holes of the razor blade4 ,small screw bolts are used to attach the blade to the handle4 ,place a cork on one edge as a protection for the hand of the user4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wafer ,blade ,attached to the ,handle1 the ,top ,edge being ,protected with a ,cork ,illustration ,to ,hold a ,negative in a ,printing ,frame ,when printing postal cards and working fast1 it always bothered me to hold the negative in the printing frame while removing the card4 ,to overcome this trouble ,i decided to contrive some arrangement to hold the negative in the frame when the back was removed4 ,the device ,i made consists of a thin1 flat spring1 about #a_/h in4 wide and as long as the width of the frame opening4 ,two lugs are formed and soldered to the ends1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 for holding the plate1 and a central lug is soldered on to provide a means of fastening the spring in position4 ,a groove1 about #a_/af in4 deep1 was cut in the opposite end of the frame to receive one end of the negative4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spring with ,its ,clips and ,manner of ,holding a ,negative in a ,printing ,frame 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,in use1 slide the plate into the frame and into the lugs on the spring1 and push the spring upward until the plate can be slipped into the slot at the opposite end of the frame4 ,the pressure of the spring1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 will hold the plate securely4 ,the frame can be handled quite roughly and as fast as desired without any danger of the plate falling out4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,montana4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a number of bright tin disks tied to the limbs of a fruit tree will prove an efficient means of driving away infesting birds4 ,how to ,make an ,electrolytic ,interrupter ,illustration ,obtain a glass jar or wide-mouth bottle about one-quart size4 ,an ordinary round bottle will serve very nicely by having the top cut off1 thus forming a glass jar4 ,make a top for the jar from a piece of #a_/b-;in4 pine similar to the one shown in the illustration4 ,the lower portion extends down inside the jar and serves to hold the top in place4 ,cut a slot in this top1 #a_/h in4 wide and #b in4 long4 ,this slot should be cut at right angles to a diameter of the top and extend #a in4 on either side of the diameter4 ,it should be about #a_/b in4 from the center of the top4 ,directly opposite the center of the slot drill a #c_/h-;in hole1 #a_/b in4 from the center of the top4 ,drill a #a_/d-;in4 hole in the center of the top to give ventilation to the jar4 ,boil the completed top in paraffin for a few minutes4 ,obtain a piece of #a_/h-;in4 sheet lead1 #b in4 wide and about #a_/b in4 longer than the depth of the jar4 ,mount a small binding post on one end of this piece of lead and then support it in the slot in the wooden top by means of two metal pins4 ,the lower end of the piece of lead should be at least #a_/b in4 from the bottom of the jar4 ,next get a piece of #c_/h-;in4 glass tube and fuse a piece of platinum wire into one end4 ,make sure the inside end of the platinum wire is not covered with the glass1 and that the outside end protrudes a short distance beyond the end of the glass tube4 ,now bend about #c_/d in4 of the end of the glass tube which has the platinum in it over at right angles to the remainder of the tube4 ,the tube should then be placed in the opening on the wooden top provided for it and a rubber band placed around it to prevent it dropping through the opening4 ,the lower end of the tube should be a little higher than the lower end of the sheet of lead4 ,a small quantity of mercury should be placed in the tube and a bare copper wire run down inside4 ,the mercury affords a connection between the piece of platinum in the end of the tube and the copper wire4 ,connect the outside end of the copper wire under a binding post and the interrupter is complete with the exception of the solution4 ,the solution for the interrupter is dilute sulphuric acid made by mixing about four parts of water and one part of acid4 ,in preparing this mixture1 be sure to pour the acid into the water1 not the water into the acid4 ,the jar should be about two-thirds filled4 ,at least #dj volts will be required for the satisfactory operation of the interrupter4 ,the distance between the platinum point and the lead sheet may be adjusted by simply turning the glass tube4 ,no condenser will be required in operating an inductor coil with an interrupter of this kind4 ,the make-and-break interrupter1 if there is one in circuit1 should of course be made inoperative by screwing up the contact point against the spring4 ,a ,homemade ,hand ,drill ,press ,the little use ,i had for a drill press did not make it advisable to purchase one1 so ,i constructed a device for drilling iron and brass which answered all purposes4 ,a broken carpenter's brace furnished the chuck1 which was fastened to a #a_/b-;in4 shaft having a detachable crank4 ,the shaft turns in a brass tube which is fitted tightly in a hole bored in the upright4 ,the sliding part or table is forced up against the drill with a #a_/b-;in4 machine bolt4 ,the bolt turns in a square nut fastened in the opposite post4 ,the end of the screw bears on a plate fastened on the under side of the table to prevent wear4 ,a crank could be attached to this bolt so that it may be turned more easily4 ,illustration3 ,a ,very ,inexpensive ,drill ,press ,frame ,which ,answers the ,purpose ,admirably ,the sliding or table part is made of a post similar to the end posts1 but with guides attached so as to keep it in place4 ,the holes for the chuck shaft and bolt should be bored on a line and exactly in the center of the posts4--,contributed by ,l4 ,r4 ,kelley1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,a ,hose ,nozzle ,the nozzle shown in the accompanying sketch was made from an empty tobacco can having an oval shape4 ,i cut the can in two near the center and punched small holes in the bottom4 ,i then cut a piece of #a_/b-;in4 board to fit tightly in the end of the can and turned the edges of the tin down to hold it in place4 ,a hole was bored in the center of the wood and a #a_/b-;in4 hose coupling fitted in it4 ,the water will swell the wood enough to make an absolutely watertight joint1 but by using a little care in fitting it1 the joint will be watertight without the swelling4 ,illustration3 ,the ,oval ,form of the ,box ,makes ,it ,possible to ,sprinkle ,close ,up to ,walks ,the holes being punched in straight lines1 the nozzle throws a rectangular section of fine streams1 which makes it possible to sprinkle close up to walks without wetting them4 ,the friction is much less than in the ordinary hose nozzle1 and consequently this nozzle delivers more water and also materially reduces the strain on the hose4--,contributed by ,j4 ,b4 ,downer1 ,seattle1 ,washington4 ,an ,electric ,water ,heater ,a simple electric water heater may be made as follows3 ,procure two sheets of copper1 each #d by #f in41 and place pieces of wood or other insulating material at the corners to keep them about #c_/d in4 apart4 ,bind them with cords1 or1 if the wood pieces are large enough1 use screws so that there will be no contact between the plates4 ,attach wires to the plates with solder as shown1 and make connections to a plug4 ,pour water in an earthenware jar1 place the plates in it and turn the plug in a lamp socket4 ,do not use a metal vessel4--,contributed by ,g4 ,henry ,jones1 ,sylacauga1 ,ala4 ,illustration3 ,an ,inexpensive ,electric ,water ,heater ,made of ,two ,copper ,plates ,frosting ,glass ,procure a piece of flat iron similar to an iron hoop1 bend it1 as shown in the sketch1 to make a piece #c in4 long and #a-a_/d in4 wide and file one edge smooth4 ,sprinkle some fine lake sand over the glass1 dampen the sand and rub the smooth edge of the iron band over the glass4 ,it requires only a short time of rubbing to produce a beautiful frosted surface on the glass4--,contributed by ,m4 ,e4 ,duggan1 ,kenosha1 ,wis4 ,illustration3 ,the ,filed ,edge on the ,coiled ,metal ,retains the ,sand ,particles as ,it is ,rubbed over the ,glass ,surface ,long ,handle for a ,dustpan ,illustration ,the dustpan is a rather unhandy utensil to use1 especially for stout persons4 ,one porter overcame this difficulty by attaching a long handle to the pan as shown in the illustration4 ,the handle was taken from a discarded broom and a yoke of heavy wire was attached to it1 the ends being bent to enter holes punched in the upturned edge of the pan4 ,a stout cord1 fastened to the handle and tied into the ring of the dustpan handle1 keeps the pan from turning backward1 and it is thus possible to push it or carry it with the long handle4 ,to ,fasten ,chair ,legs ,chair legs often become loose when chairs are handled roughly1 so that the glue is broken up4 ,a small device made from a piece of pointed metal1 ,a1 which is securely fastened to the end of the chair leg by means of a screw1 will hold the legs more firmly than wire or glue4 ,when the leg is driven into the hole1 the points are pushed into the wood ,b as the metal flattens4 ,illustration3 ,the ,metal on the ,end of the ,leg ,fastens ,it ,solidly in ,place ,disk-,throwing ,pistol ,a pistol for throwing small disks of paper or metal balls1 can be easily made at almost no expense as shown in the sketch4 ,two pieces of board1 one of which is shaped to the form of a pistol1 are hinged together and a fairly strong spiral spring is fastened at the front end of the movable piece and the middle of the other4 ,a slot is sawed in the movable piece to hold the disk1 or a small round depression may be formed in it to receive a bean1 pea1 or shot4 ,the movable arm is folded back and held in position by means of a stirrup of wire fastened on the other part4 ,when the movable part is disengaged by pulling the stirrup away with the finger1 the disk will be thrown with considerable force1 depending on the strength of the spring4 ,illustration3 ,disks of ,paper or ,metal as ,well as ,shot may be ,thrown with ,this ,pistol ,displaying ,dye ,colors ,a certain druggist utilized old electric bulbs for displaying dye colors4 ,water was colored with a dye and the end of a bulb dipped into the liquid4 ,then the tip end was broken off1 and the bulb being a vacuum1 the colored water was drawn into it1 and filled the globe4 ,the point was then sealed with paraffin4 ,illustration3 ,globes ,filled with ,colored ,water1 ,representing the ,different ,colors of ,dyes ,carried in ,stock ,a ring-shaped piece1 #ae in4 in diameter and #b-a_/b in4 wide1 was cut from a piece of board1 and #a-;in4 holes bored1 #b-a_/b in4 apart1 in one-half of the ring1 ,the globes holding the colored water were set in these holes and a light with a round shade placed in the center4 ,it proved to be an attractive display and a good method of showing the colors4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,a ,homemade ,bench ,vise ,a serviceable and inexpensive bench vise can be made in the following manner3 ,procure a piece of hard wood1 #a in4 thick1 and shape it into an eccentric with an extending handle1 as shown at ,a4 ,the jaws ,b are made of material #b in4 thick1 and the drawbar ,c is a #b by #c-;in4 piece of hickory4 ,the outer end of the bar is slotted to receive the eccentric handle1 through which a bolt1 ,d1 passes to form a bearing4 ,holes are bored into the opposite end of the bar1 #b in4 apart1 into which a peg is inserted to come against the back side of the rear jaw4 ,this provides an adjustment for a range of various thicknesses of material4 ,another bar is located at the bottom of the jaws to provide a means of keeping the jaws parallel4 ,this bar is made in a similar manner to the bar ,c4 ,the rear jaw can be fastened to the side of a bench1 post1 or any support that may be handy4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,s4 ,thompson1 ,columbia1 ,tenn4 ,illustration3 ,a ,vise ,that can be ,quickly ,constructed ,where ,no ,bench ,vise is at ,hand ,illustration ,timing ,photo ,printing ,having hundreds of postals of a single subject to print1 ,i made a perfect timing apparatus for exposing the prints from an old metronome and an old gong magnet4 ,a disk1 ,b1 #bj in4 in diameter1 was made of heavy tin with two apertures1 ,c ,c1 each cut #g in4 in diameter1 on a line with the center of the disk1 and #b in4 from the edge4 ,a large spool1 ,f1 was used to serve as a hub and also as a reel on which strong twine was wound1 with a weight1 ,e1 attached to the free end4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,timing ,apparatus ,the disk was bolted to the partition ,p of the darkroom1 the partition having a hole1 ,g1 to coincide with the holes in the disk as it revolved4 ,four catch pins were fastened on the rim of the disk to engage a catch pin on the armature of the magnet4 ,the gong and commutator were removed and the magnet placed in the position shown in the sketch4 ,a strip of wood was fastened across the face of the metronome ,h1 about #a in4 above the pendulum shaft or axle4 ,on the inside of the center of the strip a small piece of wood was projected1 with copper wire on one side only1 to form a contact with a piece of flexible copper on the pendulum4 ,wiring was made as shown in the sketch and a switch used to stop the disk from revolving4 ,an ordinary postal-card printing frame1 ,d1 with a hinged back was used and placed on the shelf ,a1 as shown4 ,a hinge was made from heavy elastic bands to allow for two dozen cards in the frame at one time4 ,as each card was printed it was taken out and dropped into the developer4 ,the reel and metronome should be wound up after printing two dozen cards4 ,the stops can be varied for any length of time by regulating the weight on the metronome4 ,the disk and all woodwork must be painted a dull black4 ,the circuit is completed on the return stroke of the pendulum1 causing the magnet to attract the armature1 which releases the catch1 allowing a quarter turn of the disk4--,contributed by ,frank ,w4 ,preston1 ,paterson1 ,n4 ,j4 ,pail ,hook for a ,pitcher ,pump ,illustration ,when pumping water from the ordinary pitcher pump1 the bucket must either be held to the spout or placed on the ground4 ,the accompanying sketch shows how ,i arranged a hook1 fastened over the collar of the pump1 to take the bail of the bucket4 ,the hook is made of #a_/d-;in4 round iron4--,contributed by ,laurence ,b4 ,robbins1 ,harwich1 ,mass4 ,shade ,roller ,attached to ,upper ,window ,sash ,free circulation of air cannot be obtained through a window when the shade is attached to the window casing1 as it partly fills the opening caused by lowering the upper sash4 ,if the shade roller is attached to the top of the upper sash1 the shade can perform its function without obstructing the opening when the sash is lowered4 ,it only requires a shorter roller and a narrower shade4 ,the roller brackets are attached in the usual manner1 but1 in order to have the shade hang vertically1 a block1 as wide as the lower sash frame1 must be fastened under each bracket4 ,illustration3 ,when the ,upper ,sash is ,lowered the ,shade is ,out of the ,way of the ,opening ,this arrangement also makes it much easier to put up a curtain1 as the sash can be let down until the roller can be reached while standing on a chair4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,flashing ,hook ,illustration ,having occasion to do a large amount of counter-flashing in a new wall where the mortar was soft and the joint too large to use an ordinary nail or the regular flashing hook1 ,i made hooks from ,no4 #bd gauge galvanized iron1 having hooks of extra size and strength1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the size of the hook is #a-c_/d by #c-a_/h in4 ,on each side edge1 #a-a_/h in4 from one end1 ,i cut teeth1 ,a ,a1 and clipped the corners of the opposite end at an angle4 ,the end at ,b was turned down at right angles and the points ,a ,a bent in the opposite direction4 ,i placed the counter-flashing in the usual manner1 with the projection ,b hanging down and the pointed end of the hook in the joint1 and drove or pushed it in tightly4 ,the points ,a ,a will catch on the under side of the brick and hold solidly4--,contributed by ,ralph ,m4 ,chatham1 ,orleans1 ,indiana4 ,a ,homemade ,dibble ,a dibble made of a round and sharp-pointed stick is the usual tool for making holes when setting tomato and other plants4 ,i found by experience that a dibble made of a flat board would work much better and leave a cleaner hole if worked into the earth with a horizontal swinging motion4 ,the hole produced is just right for the plant4 ,the illustration shows its construction4 ,illustration3 ,a ,dibble ,used for ,making ,holes in the ,soil to ,transplant ,tomato and ,other ,plants ,liquid ,court-,plaster ,a good liquid preparation for cuts and bruises that forms a covering like liquid court-plaster is made by mixing #c_/d oz4 of flexible collodion with #a_/d oz4 of ether4 ,when this solution is applied to cuts it will not wash off4 ,as the ether evaporates1 add more to keep the mixture liquid4 ,a ,substitute for ,candles ,one evening our electric light was cut off by a storm1 and having no gas1 candles1 or oil lamps1 a very good light was made in the following manner3 ,a tablespoonful of lard was melted and poured in the top of a baking-powder can1 and four strands of ordinary white wrapping twine were put into it1 allowing one end to stand up for about #a_/b in4 above the edge of the can4 ,the end was lighted the same as a candle4--,contributed by ,b4 ,e4 ,cole1 ,eureka1 ,california4 ,a ,poultry ,coop ,illustration ,a barrel makes a good protection for a hen with a brood of chicks1 if it is arranged as shown in the sketch4 ,procure a good barrel with a bottom and cut off each alternate stave at both ends close up to the first hoop4 ,the lower openings thus formed make entrances for the chickens and the upper ones admit air and light4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,r4 ,konnan1 ,neillsville1 ,wis4 ,preventing ,mildew on ,canvas ,to prevent mildew on canvas1 soak it in bluestone water1 or if the mildew is already present1 coat the parts well with ordinary soap and rub on powdered chalk1 or whiting4 ,a solution of corrosive sublimate1 well weakened with water1 will also prevent mildew1 but owing to its poisonous nature it is best to use the former method4--,contributed by ,a4 ,ashmund ,kelly1 ,malvern1 ,pa4 99 99 99 99 99 ,when the steel point of a compass is lost1 a phonograph needle makes a good substitute4 ,holder for ,books in a ,case ,very often it is found1 after arranging the books in a case1 that the rows are not complete and the books at the end are continually sliding down on the shelf4 ,the sketch shows a very useful type of wire bracket to support the last book4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,wire ,makes ,it ,easily ,applicable to ,any ,open ,bookshelf ,a brass wire1 #bf in4 long and about #a_/h in4 in diameter1 is bent1 with the use of a vise or pliers1 to the shape and dimensions shown at ,a4 ,when the wire is placed on the bookshelf1 as shown at ,b1 it prevents the end book from falling4 ,its location can be changed as books are added to the shelf4--,contributed by ,john ,y4 ,dunlop1 ,craighead1 ,scotland4 ,laying ,out a ,dovetail ,joint ,illustration ,with dividers and compass lay off the width of the board into twice as many parts as the dovetails wanted4 ,draw a light line1 ,,ab1 across the board as far from the end as half the thickness of the board4 ,on this line step off the divisions with the dividers1 beginning with a half space or division4 ,with the bevel square1 set to a bevel of #a in4 in #c1 draw lines through the division dots4 ,this method will save much time and give accurate results4--,contributed by ,joseph ,f4 ,parks1 ,wichita1 ,kan4 ,oiling ,bright ,parts of ,machinery ,it is my duty to go over the bright parts on the machinery in my father's shop and give them a coat of oil late in the afternoon to prevent any rust accumulating over night4 ,as the work took considerable time from my playing ,i thought of a plan that not only reduced the amount of work but applied the grease much better than with a brush or rag4 ,i procured a sprayer1 as shown in the sketch1 and sprayed the oil on the bright parts4--,contributed by ,waller ,kaufman1 ,santa ,ana1 ,california4 ,illustration3 ,a ,sprayer ,filled with ,oil ,makes a ,good ,device for ,coating the ,bright ,parts of ,machinery ,window ,ventilator to ,prevent ,drafts ,the ventilator consists of a piece of wood1 about #h in4 wide1 #c in4 thick and as long as the window is wide4 ,holes1 #a-c_/d in4 in diameter1 are bored at regular intervals into one edge and these are connected with openings from one side as shown4 ,the piece is set under the lower sash with the long openings toward the outside4 ,this will direct the incoming air currents upward into the room4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ventilator ,prevents the ,air from ,entering a ,room in a ,straight ,line ,a ,chisel ,rack ,turn two large screweyes into the under side of a shelf1 as far apart as is necessary1 and slip a rod into the eyes4 ,the rod may be kept from slipping out by threading each end and turning on a nut after it is in place4 ,hooks are made from heavy wire1 in the shape of the letter ,s1 and placed on the rod4 ,a screweye is turned into the end of each chisel handle and used for hanging the tool on an ,s-hook4 ,as many hooks are provided as there are tools in use4 ,this method of hanging tools is especially adapted for the wood turner4--,contributed by ,wallace ,e4 ,fisher1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,chisels are ,kept ,close at ,hand and the ,right ,tool may be ,quickly ,found ,homemade ,snap ,hooks ,illustration ,having had occasion to use several snap hooks of various sizes and being unable to find anything suitable for my purpose on the market1 ,i procured several cotters of the desired sizes and by bending them over1 as shown at ,a1 and cutting them off1 as at ,b1 ,i had snap hooks which1 besides answering my original purpose1 have also found use as key rings and tool-chuck holders4--,contributed by ,jos4 ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 ,a ,dropper and ,cork for ,medicine ,bottles ,illustration ,a convenient way to accurately drop medicine and liquids without any other appliance than the cork is the following3 ,simply burn or puncture a smooth hole in the cork as shown4 ,pull the cork out slightly when the liquid is to be dropped1 and when this is done1 push the cork in and the bottle is sealed4 ,repairing a ,broken ,oilstone ,a broken oilstone can be repaired and made as good as new in the following manner3 ,warm the pieces by heating them on the top of a stove or gas heater1 with a piece of heavy sheet metal placed on it so as to protect the stone from the direct heat of the flame4 ,the heating should be done somewhat slowly or the stone will crack4 ,when the stone is warm wipe off the oil which the heat has driven out and apply a couple of coats of shellac to the broken ends4 ,when the shellac is thoroughly dry1 warm the stone again to melt the shellac1 and clamp the pieces together4 ,after cooling1 the pieces will be found firmly stuck together4--,contributed by ,f4 ,l4 ,sylvester1 ,reading1 ,mass4 ,homemade ,towel ,roller ,illustration ,the towel roller is made of a piece of broom handle1 #af in4 long1 squared on both ends and a nail driven in the center of each end4 ,procure two small pieces of tin--disks about #a in4 in diameter will do--and drive a hole through the center of each with a wire nail4 ,cut from one edge of the disk down to the hole taking out a narrow ,v-shaped section4 ,fasten each disk to a block and nail these to any convenient wall at such a distance apart that the nail heads in the broomstick will slip down in the slots and rest in the holes in the centers of the disks1 which form the bearings for the nail heads resting beyond the tin and next to the block4 ,with a little care the tin can be made to bulge outwardly in the center making room for the nail heads4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,augusta1 ,ga4 ,clothesline ,reel ,the usual method of reeling up a clothesline and taking it in is quite a task and many times the lines are left out in the open from one wash day to another1 due to neglect or forgetfulness4 ,i made the arrangement shown in the sketch to take care of the line without any effort to the user4 ,illustration3 ,reel in the ,basement ,all that is necessary with this arrangement is to take the end of the line and run it over the hooks or sheaves on the posts and make it secure around an awning fastener4 ,when loosed1 the weight in the basement will wind up the line4 ,a knot can be tied in the line near the reel to catch at a hole in the sill1 which will prevent the strain on the reel4 ,if the reel is made to wind up #d ft4 of line to each revolution and the sash-cord shaft is #c_/d in4 in diameter1 about #ajj ft4 of line can be taken up in a basement #g ft4 high4--,contributed by ,a4 ,e4 ,little1 ,akron1 ,o4 99 99 99 99 99 ,black-heart malleable iron derives its name from the fact that in annealing only the outer layers of carbon are oxidized1 the carbon of the interior being simply changed to a black amorphous state4 ,a ,candle-,shade ,holder ,a holder for either round or square shades can be easily constructed from a piece of heavy copper wire to fit on a candlestick4 ,one end of the wire is looped around the upper end of the candlestick1 then bent so that the main part will be vertical4 ,the top end is shaped into a circle #b in4 in diameter or a square having sides #b in4 long1 as desired4--,contributed by ,harry ,slosower1 ,pittsburgh1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,two ,forms of ,shade ,holder ,made of ,copper ,wire for a ,candlestick ,wire ,mesh ,used as a ,shelf ,in covering a window back of my lathe with wire mesh as a protection ,i also made a shelf for the tools between the window sill and the lathe bed of the same material4 ,the mesh used was #a_/d-;in4 ,the shelf is always clean1 as the shavings and dirt fall through1 and the tools may be readily picked up4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,sanford1 ,pasadena1 ,california4 ,heel ,plates ,a good heel or toe plate can be made by driving ordinary thumb tacks into the leather of the shoe heel or sole4 ,the shape can be varied by using tacks having different-sized heads4--,contributed by ,james ,t4 ,gaffney1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,the ,heads of the ,tacks ,form a ,wearing ,surface ,equal to an ,ordinary ,heel ,plate ,a ,bright ,dip for ,metal ,articles of brass1 copper and bronze may be given a bright luster by dipping them into a solution composed of #ej oz4 of nitric acid1 #be oz4 of sulphuric acid1 liquid measure1 and #a_/b oz4 of soot and #a_/b oz4 of salt1 by weight4 ,after the articles are dipped into the solution they are removed and thoroughly washed1 then dried in sawdust to prevent streaks4 ,an ,interesting ,vacuum ,experiment ,illustration ,a very interesting experiment may be performed with two drinking glasses1 a small candle end and a piece of blotting paper1 says the ,pathfinder4 ,the glasses must be the same size and of the thin-glass kind4 ,the candle end is lighted and set in one glass2 the blotting paper is well dampened and placed on top of the glass1 and the other glass inverted and its rim placed exactly over the lower one and pressed down tightly4 ,the candle will burn up all the oxygen in the glass and go out4 ,the air in the glass being heated will expand and some of it will be forced out from under the moist paper1 and then1 as the portion remaining cools1 it will contract and draw the upper glass on the paper and make an air-tight joint4 ,the upper glass can then be taken up and the lower one will cling to it4 ,a ,sliver ,extractor ,if a clipper for the finger nails becomes dull do not throw it away1 but keep it in the tool box in a handy place4 ,it is very useful for extracting slivers from the flesh4--,contributed by ,g4 ,wokenfuss1 ,mc,cook1 ,neb4 ,night ,croquet ,playing ,croquet playing became so interesting to us that we could not find time to do all our playing during the day4 ,so at night we attach a candle to each of the wickets and also use one at each corner of the grounds4 ,these light the grounds so that the game can be played nicely4 ,the candles may be attached by wiring them to the wickets or by using small pasteboard boxes1 similar to a pill box of sufficient size1 and running a wire through the center or down the sides1 which is hooked over the top to hold them upright on top of the ground4 ,the latter way is the better as the candles may be pulled up in the day time and taken out of the way4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,goodbrod1 ,union1 ,ore4 ,a ,nursing-,bottle ,holder ,the ordinary nursing bottle with nipple necessitates holding the bottle in a certain position1 and when the valve nipples are used1 the bottle should be held far enough away to allow this valve free action4 ,to accomplish this ,i constructed a very simple wire holder for the bottle as shown in the illustration4 ,ordinary telephone wire will hold any bottle4 ,the wire is bent to hook on the side of the crib1 cradle or cab4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,humphrey1 ,columbus1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,nursing ,bottle in ,holder ,milk-,ticket ,holder ,an ordinary spring mousetrap makes a good bread or milk-ticket holder4 ,the wood part of the trap can be easily nailed or screwed to a door or window casing4 ,the way the tickets are held is clearly shown in the sketch4 ,illustration3 ,trap ,used as ,ticket ,holder ,joint for ,cabinet ,work ,in making a cabinet containing #ef drawers of various sizes1 ,i used the method shown in the sketch for making the frame4 ,the horizontal strips ,a should be all fastened together when sawing the notches to fit over the uprights4 ,the uprights ,b should be sawn in the same manner4 ,it is best to round the front of the rear uprights slightly and also any other places where the drawers might strike when pushing them into place4 ,the length of the runners ,c should be #a-a_/b in4 less than the length of the drawer4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,dickson1 ,polk1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,joint ,construction 99 99 99 99 99 ,do not expect accurate work unless you have accurate tools4 ,starting a ,saw ,cut ,a fine piece of woodwork is often spoiled by the amateur craftsman when starting a cut with a saw4 ,as the first stroke of the saw on the edge of the board is made1 the teeth often break a splinter from the edge or the saw jumps to one side of the line1 thereby making a rough and uneven cut4 ,this can be avoided in a very simple way4 ,illustration3 ,starting a ,saw on a ,knife ,cut will ,prevent ,roughing or ,splintering the ,edge ,after marking the line1 take a sharp knife and make a cut across the edge1 as shown1 and draw the knife down well over the corners of the board for about #a_/h in4 ,place the saw on the cut and start it slowly4 ,the saw blade will follow the cut of the knife blade4 ,a ,substitute ,penholder ,one evening when my wife was using the only penholder in the house ,i desired to do some writing and being in a hurry1 ,i hastily made a substitute holder of a pencil4 ,two cuts were made in the butt end1 as shown2 the pen was then slipped in1 the outside wound with a rubber band1 and my penholder was complete4--,contributed by ,h4 ,a4 ,sullwold1 ,st4 ,paul1 ,minn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,end of the ,pencil as ,it is ,prepared to ,receive the ,pen ,protecting ,binding ,posts on ,wet ,batteries from ,corrosion ,when recharging the cells of a wet battery it is best to procure the best grade of sal ammoniac1 the kind that is put up in boxes having a sufficient amount for one cell4 ,then1 before putting the solution into the cell1 melt some paraffin used for preserving purposes and dip the upper end of the carbons1 zinc1 and the glass jar in it4 ,this will apply a coat of insulating wax that will prevent any white deposit from working up on the parts and corroding the binding posts1 or terminals4 ,the cells are then filled in the ordinary manner1 after which the carbons and zincs are raised just far enough to admit a layer of common machine oil1 about #c_/h in4 thick4 ,the oil not only prevents evaporation but aids greatly to keep the uncovered parts from corrosion4--,contributed by ,l4 ,r4 ,kelley1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,a ,cork ,puller ,illustration ,a very simple and easy way to remove a stopper from a bottle1 when a cork puller is not at hand1 is to press two nails into the cork1 as shown in the sketch1 and1 taking a firm hold on both nails1 draw the cork out4 ,brads may be used on smaller corks4 ,large and tightly fitted corks may be drawn by gripping the nails with a pair of pliers4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,jaquythe1 ,richmond1 ,cal4 ,holder for a ,garden-,hose ,nozzle ,illustration ,when sprinkling a lawn with an automatic spraying device on a hose nozzle it is necessary to have some kind of an arrangement to tilt the end at the proper angle4 ,i find that a holder made of a heavy piece of galvanized wire bent in the shape shown can be used to set the nozzle at any angle4 ,the wire is easily pushed into the earth and does no harm to the lawn4--,contributed by ,t4 ,j4 ,ingram1 ,jr41 ,lynchburg1 ,va4 ,alarm to ,designate a ,filled ,storage ,battery ,when a storage battery is recharged1 the completion of the recharging is marked by the development of gas in the cell4 ,this fact is the basis of a simple electrical device which will ring a bell when the battery is fully charged4 ,a glass tube bent as shown and having a small bulb near its upper end is inserted in the top of the cell1 a small quantity of mercury being first introduced in the bend below the bulb4 ,wires extend down the upper tubing to within a short distance of the mercury4 ,these wires are connected with binding posts so mounted that they can rest on top of the tube1 whereupon the bell circuit is completed as shown4 ,small quantities of gas may develop during the charging of the cell1 but if a small hole is pierced in the tube between the mercury and the cell1 this gas will not exert pressure enough on the mercury to push it up and connect it with the wires1 which will take place first when the development of gas becomes very active at the completion of the recharging4 ,illustration3 ,the ,gas ,generated by a ,filled ,storage ,battery will ,make ,electric ,connections and ,sound an ,alarm ,stretching ,poultry ,fencing ,the woven-wire poultry fencing is an unusually difficult thing to handle and fasten on posts so that it will be taut and evenly stretched4 ,the best method ,i have ever seen for drawing this fencing and holding it for nailing to a post is the use of the device shown in the sketch4 ,it consists of a board1 as long as the fencing is wide1 with screw hooks set far enough apart to catch into the meshes of the wire1 and a crosspiece attached to the board by pieces of rope at the ends and provided with a pulling loop in the center4--,contributed by ,joseph ,c4 ,laackman1 ,meadow ,brook1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,board ,fitted with ,screw ,hooks and a ,pulling ,device for ,stretching ,poultry ,fencing on ,posts ,a ,centering ,gauge ,the centering gauge consists of a piece of celluloid on which several circles are drawn having different diameters1 but all drawn from the same center4 ,a small hole is made at the center to admit the point of a center punch4 ,two sets of circles may be drawn on one piece as shown1 but the lines should be spaced far enough apart to allow the metal to be clearly seen through the celluloid4 ,the sheet is placed on the end of a shaft and adjusted so that a ring will match the circumference of the shaft1 then the center punch is set in the center hole and struck with a hammer4 ,the center punch for marking is shown in the sketch4--,contributed by ,harry ,holst1 ,san ,francisco1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,circles ,drawn on ,celluloid to ,adjust ,it on the ,end of a ,shaft in ,finding the ,center ,homemade ,letters for ,marking ,bags ,illustration ,an initial marker for bags can be made of a beet or potato4 ,cut off enough of the vegetable to provide a flat surface of sufficient size and then cut out the letter as shown in the sketch1 and use shoe blacking as ink4 ,in cutting1 remember that most of the letters must be made reversed in order to print right4 ,for example1 in making a ,b1 draw it out on paper and cut it out1 then lay the face of the pattern on the flat surface of the vegetable and cut around it4 ,to ,keep a ,crease in a ,soft ,hat ,the crease in a soft hat can be kept in proper shape with the aid of a paper clip4 ,the clip is slipped over the fold inside of the hat which forms the bottom part of the crease4--,contributed by ,jas4 ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pennsylvania4 ,illustration3 ,paper ,clip on the ,fold1 ,holding ,it in the ,right ,shape for the ,outside ,crease ,a ,shoe ,scraper ,illustration ,a good boot and shoe scraper for a step can be made of a worn-out and discarded broom4 ,cut off the straws and strings as shown in the sketch1 allowing one string to hold them together1 and make the notch the width of the shoe4 ,tie the extending ends together1 and mount the whole on a suitable block1 or1 if desired1 a hole can be bored in the step to receive the handle1 and the scraper thus securely attached4 ,this makes an effective scraper for the bottom as well as the sides of shoes of almost any size4--,contributed by ,jno4 ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,a ,vegetable ,slicer ,illustration ,a tin bucket or can makes a good slicer for vegetables when no other slicer is at hand4 ,a number of slots are cut across one side of the can1 and the lower edge of each slot slightly turned out to form a cutting edge4 ,the vegetable is placed against the top of the can and pushed down over the slots4 ,each slot will cut off a slice which falls inside of the can4 ,bench ,stop for ,planing ,thin ,boards ,illustration ,a bench stop for planing thin boards with a hand plane may be made in the following manner3 ,procure a piece of strap iron about #a_/d in4 thick1 #a-a_/b or #b in4 wide1 and about #f in4 long4 ,file or grind one edge sharp on top and drill a #a_/d-;in4 hole through the center4 ,cut a slot in a board or in the workbench large enough to receive the stop ,a flat4 ,place enough strips of rubber or fit two coil springs1 ,b1 to raise the sharp edge out of the slot4 ,insert a screw in the hole of the stop and adjust it to the desired height by turning the screw up or down4 99 99 99 99 99 ,in a case of emergency1 lemon juice may be used as soldering flux4 ,a ,jardinire ,pedestal ,the pedestal may be made of any close-grained wood1 such as basswood or maple1 if the stain is to be walnut or mahogany1 but it can also be constructed of quarter-sawed oak and finished in a waxed mission or varnished surface4 ,the material required is as follows3 #a top1 #ab by #ab by #g_/h in41 ,s-#b-,s4 #b caps1 #f by #f by #g_/h in41 ,s-#b-,s4 #a upright1 #ah by #d by #d in41 ,s-#d-,s4 #a base1 #h by #h by #g_/h in41 ,s-#b-,s4 ,the top is centered and a circle1 #aa-a_/b in4 in diameter1 is drawn upon it1 and sawn out4 ,the caps are also centered and circles drawn upon them1 #e-a_/b in4 and #c-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,saw them out on the larger circles and center them in a wood lathe and turn out the wood in the smaller circles to a depth of #a_/b in4 ,the upright is then centered in the lathe and turned to #c-a_/b in4 in diameter for its full length4 ,illustration3 ,the ,pedestal can be ,made of a ,wood ,suitable for ,finishing to ,match ,other ,furniture ,the base and foot pieces are cut out as shown1 fitted together and fastened with screws from the under side4 ,one of the caps is mounted in the center on the base and the other cap in the center on the under side of the top4 ,the upright is then placed in the turned-out parts of the caps and either glued or fastened with screws4 ,if light wood is used1 the finish can be walnut or mahogany4 ,a very pretty finish can be worked out in pyrography1 if one is familiar with that work4--,contributed by ,russell ,t4 ,westbrook1 ,dover1 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,lawn-,tennis ,marker ,the liquid receptacle is a metal biscuit box1 about #i in4 square and mounted on a wheel with a handle1 the whole being similar to a wheelbarrow4 ,the wheel is #g in4 in diameter and #b-a_/b in4 thick4 ,the wheel and box are bolted between two pieces of strap iron in the manner shown1 and the handle is attached back of the box4 ,if the box is of very thin metal1 boards should be placed within on the sides where it is fastened to the strap iron4 ,a roller is pivoted in the box at the lower back corner and a canvas tape or band run over the roller and wheel in the manner of a belt4 ,the tape should run through a slot cut in the front part of the box1 about midway between the top and the bottom4 ,the edges of the tin in the slot must be turned over and hammered down to make a smooth surface for the tape to run over4--,contributed by ,george ,n4 ,bertram1 ,toronto1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,a ,marker ,that will ,make a ,clear1 ,white ,line on the ,ground for a ,tennis ,court ,removing ,tannin ,stains from ,teacups ,a small portion of hyposulphite of soda mixed with vinegar will make a good cleaner for teacups having tannin stains4 ,this process does not injure the finest china and is inexpensive4 ,the same solution works quite well on clothes that are accidentally stained with tea4 ,they should be washed out and dried quickly after its application in order to make this method most effective4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,weaving the ,top of the ,stool by ,using a ,wet ,weaver of ,reed ,woven-,top ,stool ,the material necessary for this stool is as follows3 #d legs1 #a-c_/d by #a-c_/d by #af in4 #d bottom rails1 #g_/h by #a-c_/d by #af in4 #d top rails1 #g_/h by #b by #af-a_/b in4 #d diagonal braces1 #g_/h by #a-c_/d by #f in4 ,illustration3 ,construction of the ,frame and ,manner of ,laying the ,weavers for the ,top ,the legs are mortised so the top rails come level4 ,the upper rails are tenoned on the sides only and beveled at the ends4 ,for the bottom rails1 the mortises are made one above the other1 the rails being tenoned on all sides4 ,the braces are cut at #de on each end and glued into place4 ,in weaving the top1 proceed as follows3 ,use a wet weaver and wrap one layer over the entire top1 the strips being placed close together and tightly wound4 ,start the second layer at right angles to the first by going under one strip1 then over three strips1 under three1 and so on1 by threes1 until that strip is finished4 ,start the second by going under two strips1 then over three1 under three1 and so on1 as before4 ,the third strip should start by going under three1 then over and under three1 etc4 ,start the fourth by going over one1 then under three1 and over three1 as in the preceding2 the fifth1 start over two1 then under and over three1 repeatedly4 ,the sixth1 and last of the series1 begin over three and then continue1 by threes1 as before4 ,having finished one series1 the remainder of the top should be completed in similar order4 ,good white shellac makes the best finish for the seat2 the stool itself may be finished to suit4--,contributed by ,russel ,dodsworth1 ,erie1 ,pa4 ,preserving ,shafting from ,rust and ,corrosion ,in a laboratory it was very difficult to keep the line shaft and countershafts bright and free from rust1 owing to the fumes and gases issuing from the several fume closets within the same room4 ,the following method was tried1 and proved very satisfactory4 ,the shafting was covered with two coats of flat white paint and allowed to dry1 after which a coat of white enamel was applied1 giving it a clean1 glossy1 and sanitary appearance4 ,this eliminated all the trouble of cleaning it with emery cloth1 and it also made it appear in harmony with the other furnishings of the laboratory4--,contributed by ,geo4 ,f4 ,stark1 ,norwich1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,reed ,furniture ,by ,chas4 ,m4 ,miller ,reed ,furniture ,by ,chas4 ,m4 ,miller ,a ,reed ,basket ,inasmuch as there is a great demand for reed furniture and since good weavers are comparatively few in number1 it would be well to learn the process of reed weaving4 ,the weaving operations can be learned much better through the construction of some small article1 such as a basket or jardinire cover4 ,the center is the most difficult part of the basket making1 and it is best to begin with wood bottoms1 as the whole basket can be kept in a much better form due to the stiffness furnished by such a bottom4 ,it is also an approach to the reed furniture which is woven on framework4 ,the objectionable feature of the wood bottoms is the unfinished appearance of the wood edge showing through1 but this can be overcome by the use of the roll shown in the illustration4 ,illustration ,while the wood bottoms have been used for this class of work for a number of years1 the roll is new and is very popular with those who have seen and used it4 ,the roll can be placed in many ways on different-shaped baskets1 and other reed pieces1 so that it is best to master this piece of work thoroughly before attempting the other1 or larger1 pieces that will be described later1 in other articles4 ,illustration ,the description is for a basket #e in4 in diameter and #c in4 high1 as shown in the illustration4 ,a disk of wood1 #a_/d in4 thick and #e in4 in diameter1 is required4 ,basswood makes the best bottom1 but pine1 or cedar1 will do4 ,cut a board about #f in4 square1 and draw diagonal lines on it intersecting at the center1 then draw a circle1 #e in4 in diameter1 as shown in ,fig4 #a2 also another circle1 using the same center1 #d-c_/d in4 in diameter4 ,set compass points about #e_/h in4 apart1 and step off spaces on the inner circle to make #bd points4 ,this will have to be tried out more than once1 to get the spaces to come out evenly and just have the right number of points4 ,holes are bored with a #a_/h-;in4 bit1 just inside of the inner circle1 back of the places marked by the compass points1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,cut the board on the outside circle with a coping1 or turn1 saw1 to make the circle1 as in ,fig4 #c4 ,do not saw out the circle before boring the holes1 as otherwise the disk might split out in places4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bottom is ,cut from a ,piece of ,wood to ,give ,strength and to ,avoid the ,most ,difficult ,part of the ,weaving 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the reeds placed vertically are called spokes1 and the horizontal ones are the weavers4 ,for the spokes1 what is called a ,no4 #d reed is used4 ,do not wet the spokes before putting them through the wood4 ,allow the ends to project about #e-a_/b in4 below the bottom1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,place the bottom1 with the spokes1 in water1 and soak them thoroughly1 especially the part below the bottom4 ,about #ae minutes of soaking will be sufficient to make them pliable enough to bend over at right angles4 ,it will not injure the wood bottom to soak it with the reeds4 ,as shown at ,a1 ,figs4 #d and #e1 each spoke below the wood bottom is bent1 down and back of the two nearest spokes1 ,b and ,c1 then out between the third and fourth spokes1 ,c and ,d1 and so on4 ,the last two spokes1 ,y and ,z1 ,fig4 #f1 are forced under the spokes ,a and ,b1 respectively4 ,in this illustration the spoke ,y is shown as it is being inserted under the spoke ,a4 ,when this operation is completed1 the bottom will have the appearance of a fireworks pinwheel4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,illustration3 ,the ,reeds are ,attached to the ,bottom and ,their ,lower ,ends ,bent as ,shown 7,fig4 #e7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #f7 ,continue the bending of the spokes1 in the same direction1 up and across the thickness of the wood in front of three other spokes and behind the fourth1 as shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,this would not cover the edge of the wood entirely1 and1 for this reason1 other short spokes must be inserted in front of each of the first ones before it is brought up across the edge of the wood4 ,these supplementary spokes should be about #d in4 long4 ,the manner of inserting these spokes before making the bend is shown at ,g and ,t1 ,fig4 #f4 ,the double spokes must be pressed down flat1 when brought up in place1 without riding one on the other4 ,if the ends are too long and interfere with the next pair1 they can be cut off a little with a flat chisel1 or knife1 being careful not to make them too short1 or the pieces will not stay in place4 ,if there is still an open space1 an extra1 short spoke can be inserted to crowd the pieces together and fill up the space4 ,illustration3 ,the ,lower ,ends of the ,spokes are ,turned to ,cover the ,edge of the ,bottom444 7,fig4 #g7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #h7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #i7 ,when the roll is completed1 insert three weavers1 of ,no4 #c reed that has been soaked about #ae minutes1 placing them between the spokes ,a and ,b1 ,b and ,c1 and ,c and ,d1 as shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,pass weaver ,l in front of the spokes ,b and ,c1 then back of ,d and out between ,d and ,e4 ,weaver ,m is passed in front of ,c and ,d1 back of ,e and out in front of ,e and ,f4 ,these operations are clearly shown in ,fig4 #i4 ,the weaver ,n is placed in front of ,d and ,e1 back of ,f and then in front of ,g and ,h4 ,at this point the weaver ,l is used again4 ,the weaver farthest behind each time is brought in front of the two spokes nearest to it1 then behind the third and out in front of the next two spokes4 ,do not try to use weavers longer than #h ft41 which is about half the length of a reed4 ,when a weaver is used up1 press it back to the side a little1 push in a new reed about #a-a_/b in41 and continue the weaving4 ,this is clearly shown in ,fig4 #aj4 ,this weaving is known as the triple weave1 which cinches down well and holds tightly4 ,the first round should be carefully worked1 so as to get the ends of the roll properly pressed down flat in place4 ,each throw of the weaver should be well pressed down4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #aj7 ,illustration3 444,then the ,reeds are ,woven into the ,upright ,spokes to the ,right ,height1 ,where ,they are ,broken ,down and ,woven into a ,top ,border 7,fig4 #aa7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #ab7 ,the break-down-tight border is used for the finish at the top4 ,the first operation in making this border is shown in ,fig4 #aa4 ,the spoke ,a is bent over back of spoke ,b and out between spokes ,b and ,c4 ,the spoke ,b is bent over back of the spoke ,c and out between ,c and ,d1 and so on1 until the spoke ,e is turned down4 ,then take the end of the spoke ,a1 ,fig4 #ab1 and lay it over ,b1 ,c1 ,d1 and ,e1 in front of ,f1 back of ,g1 and out between ,g and ,h4 ,the end of spoke ,f is then brought down1 also between ,g and ,h1 but back of the end of ,a4 ,the end of ,b takes a similar leap1 passes behind ,h and out between ,h and ,j2 then ,g is brought down behind the end of ,b1 in the same manner as ,f was brought down back of ,a4 ,the last four or five spokes are the most difficult to handle1 as they must be forced through the first ones to correspond with those already in place4 ,it is best not to pull the ends of ,a1 ,b1 ,c1 and ,d down too tightly at first1 keeping in mind that the last ones must be inserted under the first ones4 ,the last standing spokes are represented by the full and shaded lines4 ,if the roll illustrated in ,figs4 #aa and #ab is too difficult1 a simple break-down can be used1 such as shown in ,fig4 #ac4 ,to make this finish1 spoke ,a is turned back of spoke ,b1 in front of spoke ,c and back of spoke ,d1 but not out again4 ,spoke ,b is bent back of ,c1 in front of ,d1 and back of ,e4 ,the others are turned down the same way4 ,the manner in which the two last spokes are turned down and inserted is shown by the double dotted lines4 ,illustration3 ,a ,simple ,break-,down ,roll for the ,top444 7,fig4 #ac1 ,fig4 #ad7 ,the remainder of the illustrations show the method of forming a roll between the first and second spokes1 where only three spokes are turned down before the throwing-across process begins4 ,the first three spokes turned down are shown in ,fig4 #ad1 and the throwing over1 in ,fig4 #ae4 ,the second beginning is shown in ,fig4 #af4 ,the finishing of this top is shown in ,figs4 #ag and #ah4 ,the full1 heavy lines represent the final insertions1 and the reed must be in quite a sharp loop to make the end enter the right place4 ,it is then drawn down and forced in front of the other reed that passes out between the same spokes4 ,illustration3 444,also a ,method of ,forming a ,roll between the ,first and ,second ,spokes ,where ,only ,three ,spokes are ,turned ,down ,before the ,throwing-,across ,process ,begins 7,fig4 #ae1 ,fig4 #af1 ,fig4 #ag1 ,fig4 #ah7 ,when the basket is dry1 the long ends can be cut off close up with a knife1 being careful not to cut a weaver4 ,if there are hairy fibers sticking out they can be singed off over a gas1 or other1 flame that will not smut4 ,if it requires bleaching1 brush some chloride of lime1 mixed in a little water1 over the reeds and set in the sunlight for a short time4 ,it is better to leave the finish a little dark rather than use too much bleaching1 as the latter will give an objectionable whitish appearance that looks like a poor job of painting4 ,in working the reeds1 do not leave them in the water longer than necessary1 as this will turn them dark4 ,a bleached reed will stand the water much longer than in the natural state4 ,dampen the reed frequently while weaving it1 as the weavers pack down much closer when wet4 ,the dampening process is also required to remedy the drying out caused by whisking the reeds through the air in weaving operations4 ,a great variety of baskets can be made from this form1 viz41 low1 tall1 tapering vase forms1 bowl shapes1 etc41 in plain or dark weaves4 ,wireless-,lighted ,lamp ,deception ,window displays of puzzling nature usually draw crowds4 ,a lighted globe lying on its side in full view1 yet apparently not connected to any source of electricity1 could easily be arranged as a window display1 deceiving the closest observer4 ,a mirror1 or window glass1 backed with some opaque material1 should be used for the foundation of the device4 ,for the display lamp1 it is best to use a #be or #dj-watt tungsten1 as these will lie flatter on the glass than the larger sizes1 and the deception will not be as easily discovered4 ,the place where the brass cap of the lamp touches the glass should be marked and a small hole drilled through to the wire connecting the tungsten filament to the plug on the top of the lamp4 ,at any suitable place1 a hole should be drilled in the glass plate1 no larger than is necessary1 to permit two small cotton-covered magnet wires to pass through4 ,one of the wires should be looped1 passed through the hole in the cap and hooked onto the bare wire connecting with the plug on top of lamp4 ,the other wire should be fastened to the brass cap1 near the drilled hole1 after which the lamp may be placed in position and the two wires connected to a source of electricity4 ,if proper care has been taken and no crosses occur1 the lamp will light1 and if the display is placed in the proper surroundings1 it will prove very deceiving4 ,to protect against a fuse blow-out from a short circuit1 it is advisable to run another lamp in series with the display lamp1 as shown4--,contributed by ,clyde ,w4 ,epps1 ,mineola1 ,tex4 ,illustration3 ,an ,electric ,globe ,lighted on a ,piece of ,glass ,makes a ,good ,window ,attraction ,live ,bait ,used in ,fishing ,with the simple device illustrated1 no fisherman need worry over running short of bait or even regarding the usual repeated baiting of the hook4 ,a small clear-glass bottle should be procured1 and several hooks wired to it about the neck1 or at each end1 as desired or found best after several trials4 ,after filling the bottle with water a live minnow is placed in it1 and the bottle is sealed with a cork1 which is notched around the edge to permit water to enter or leave the bottle without losing the bait4 ,if live grasshoppers1 or similar bait1 is desired the cork can be used unnotched to form a watertight stopper4 ,as illuminated bait for night fishing1 several fireflies can be put in the bottle4--,contributed by ,l4 ,wahrer1 ,tiffin1 ,ohio4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bait is ,kept ,alive and ,unharmed in a ,bottle ,surrounded with ,hooks ,bookrack ,the material necessary for the illustrated bookrack is as follows3 #b end pieces1 #e_/h by #e-a_/d by #f in4 #a shelf #e_/h by #e-a_/d by #ac in4 ,the shelf is cut rectangular1 #e-a_/d in4 wide by #ad-a_/b in4 long4 ,its two ends should then be provided with tenons #c_/h in4 thick by #d-a_/d in4 wide1 and extending out #a_/d inch4 ,illustration3 ,a ,bookrack ,that can be ,made in ,any ,wood to ,match ,other ,furniture ,the end pieces1 after being cut to the given dimensions1 are marked off and cut out for mortises to fit the shelf tenons4 ,in assembling the parts1 they are glued in place1 and clamped with hand screws until the glue has set4 ,any of the good mission stains1 properly applied1 will give a finished appearance to the bookrack4 ,a ,paper ,gas ,pipe ,when one fits up an attic or a back room as a workshop1 it is seldom that a gas connection is available on about the same level as the workbench so that a ,bunsen burner and soldering apparatus may be operated4 ,to install the standard gas pipe1 it would be necessary either to alter the chandelier connection or to tear up some of the plaster1 the former plan resulting in a rather conspicuous display of pipe and the latter in considerable expense4 ,the following method permits the rolling of a pipe1 about the size of a lead pencil1 from paper that becomes so stiff that it is almost impossible to crush it between the thumb and fingers4 ,this small inconspicuous pipe may be run directly from the side of the valve on the chandelier to the wall1 as shown in the sketch1 thence down some corner formed by a door jamb or window frame1 which protects it and renders it almost unnoticeable4 ,illustration3 ,the ,tube is ,run ,out ,horizontally from the ,chandelier to the ,wall ,where the ,drop is ,connected ,a good grade of tough ,manila paper should be procured and cut into strips1 about #ah in4 long and wide enough to build up a tube at least #a_/cb in4 in diameter4 ,this will require from #d to #f in41 according to the thickness of the paper4 ,a piece of #a_/d-;in4 round iron or hard wood1 #bj in4 long1 is procured and carefully oiled or greased4 ,apply a coat of strong fish glue to one of these pieces of paper1 omitting a strip along one edge1 about #a in4 wide4 ,using the outspread fingers of each hand1 begin with the unglued edge and roll the paper around the wood4 ,as it is impossible to get the paper uniformly tight with the fingers1 select a smooth place on the table and then roll the newly formed tube forward by means of a piece of board1 as shown in the illustration4 ,on the return stroke lift the board4 ,in this way it is possible to get a tight1 smooth tube4 ,immediately withdraw the core1 twisting it slightly in a reverse direction if it tends to stick4 ,before using the core again1 make sure it is free from glue and regrease it4 ,when a sufficient number of tubes have been made and hardened1 neatly trim the ends off squarely1 and then form an equal number of short tubes1 about #b in4 long1 by winding a strip of glued paper on a large wire nail until a diameter is reached that will fit snugly into the pipes already made4 ,the joints may then be set up with strong glue and finally wrapped with two thicknesses of paper on the outside4 ,the construction of these joints is shown in the cross section4 ,the connection with the chandelier can be made by means of a metal tube soldered in at a point where the regular valve will cut off all connection with the paper piping when it is not in use4 ,this metal tube should be coated with thick shellac1 and the paper tube slipped over it for #a in4 or more1 after which the joint should be given several additional coats on the outside4 ,a small regulating gas cock can be attached to the lower end of the piping1 and if this is rigidly fastened to the wall1 or casing1 the connecting and disconnecting of the rubber tubing will not disturb the piping in any way4--,contributed by ,john ,d4 ,adams4 ,rubbing ,slats for a ,washing ,board ,in an emergency1 and to substitute something for a broken glass rubbing plate on an ordinary washing board1 ,i fitted a series of #c_/h-;in4 dowels horizontally across the board1 closely together4 ,this proved to be better than glass or zinc1 as fabrics adhered to the wood dowels and caused them to revolve1 making a more desirable rubbing surface and accomplishing the work of loosening the dirt in the fabric with far less effort than that necessary on the metal or glass board4--,contributed by ,h4 ,m4 ,spamer1 ,vineland1 ,n4 ,j4 ,catching ,bugs ,attracted by ,light ,illustration ,bugs1 moths1 and insects attracted by lights on summer evenings can be caught by means of sticky fly paper1 suspended as shades around the lamps4 ,cuts in the shade allow the greater portion of the light to pass through and attract the bugs1 which will surely be caught as they travel about the light onto the sticky paper4 ,it is advisable to make two shades at the same time from a double sheet of the sticky paper1 pasted1 as when bought1 with the sticky faces together so that the shades may be cut and handled easier4--,contributed by ,john ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,illinois4 99 99 99 99 99 ,oilcans should be marked to indicate the kind of oil in them4 ,needle ,box for ,talking ,machines ,an empty cigarette box can be easily changed to a useful container for talking-machine needles1 as shown in the sketch4 ,take a fairly heavy card1 trim it to the same length as the box1 then bend and crease it1 as shown at ,a1 and glue the short1 upright side to the inside of the box4 ,cut another card to the shape ,b1 so that the depth ,c equals the inside depth of the box1 and the side ,d is as long as its width4 ,the side ,e should equal the inclined length of the card ,a1 and is glued upon it when ,b is in position4 ,the three compartments may be suitably labeled as indicated4--,contributed by ,v4 ,a4 ,rettich1 ,new ,york1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,three ,compartments are ,provided with ,sloping ,bottoms in a ,neat ,box for the ,needles ,trick of ,taking ,dollar ,bill from ,apple ,a rather pleasing1 yet puzzling1 deception is to pass a dollar bill into the interior of an examined lemon or apple4 ,this can be accomplished in several ways1 either mechanically or purely by sleight of hand4 ,the mechanical method1 of course1 is the easier and really just as effective4 ,in performing1 a plate with three apples is first exhibited1 and the audience is given choice of any one for use in the experiment4 ,the selected one is tossed out for examination and then returned to the performer1 who places it in full view of the spectators while he makes the dollar bill vanish4 ,taking the knife he cuts the apple into two pieces1 requesting the audience to select one of them4 ,squeezing this piece he extracts the dollar bill therefrom4 ,the entire secret is in the unsuspected article--the table knife4 ,illustration3 ,the ,dollar ,bill is ,hidden in the ,knife ,handle ,that ,cuts the ,apple ,the knife is prepared by boring out the wooden handle to make it hollow4 ,enough space must be made to hold a dollar bill4 ,the knife lies on the plate with the fruit1 the open end facing the performer4 ,after the bill has been made to vanish and the examined apple returned to the entertainer1 he takes it and cuts it in half4 ,one of the halves is chosen1 the performer impaling it on the end of the knife blade and holding it out to view4 ,while still holding the knife he turns the blade downward and grasps the half apple and crushes it with a slight pass toward the knife-handle end where the bill is grasped along with the apple1 which makes a perfect illusion of taking the bill out of the apple4 ,as to the disappearance of the dollar bill1 there are many ways in which this may be accomplished4 ,perhaps the method requiring the least practice is to place the bill in the trousers pocket1 and then show the audience that the latter is empty4 ,this can be done by rolling the bill to small compass1 and pushing it into the extreme upper corner of the pocket where it will remain undetected while the pocket is pulled out for inspection4 ,other combinations can be arranged with the use of the knife1 which is simple to make and very inexpensive4 ,guide for ,making ,buttonholes ,it is almost impossible to make a perfect buttonhole in the ordinary manner by hand without a guide4 ,the illustration shows a very simple guide that can be easily made by anyone4 ,procure two pieces of tin1 or sheet brass1 cut them as shown1 and drill holes in them large enough for a needle1 so that it will be easy to fasten them to the cloth with basting thread4 ,cut the buttonhole slot1 then punch a hole at the end with an ordinary belt punch4 ,such a punch can be purchased from a local hardware dealer in any size4 ,in making the buttonhole stitch1 keep the needle close against the metal edge of the guide1 as shown4--,contributed by ,a4 ,l4 ,kerbaugh1 ,allentown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,form of the ,buttonhole is ,cut in the ,edges of the ,two ,pieces of ,metal 99 99 99 99 99 ,an easy way to put varnish in the grooves of a tennis racket is to use a medicine dropper4 ,illustration ,a ,child's ,playhouse ,the child's playhouse is an expensive luxury1 if it is purchased ready to set up1 but by following the instructions given herewith a large and inexpensive one may be constructed4 ,illustration3 ,the ,covered ,framework can be ,used ,in or ,outdoors1 as ,desired1 and ,when ,set ,up and the ,wings ,swung ,back1 ,it ,presents the ,appearance of a ,house ,procure about #ajj ft4 of #a-c_/d by #a-a_/b-;in4 boards1 and saw out pieces1 as shown4 ,with the use of iron brackets instead of nails1 it will be found much easier to construct than if the corners are mortised and nailed or glued4 ,the frame will also be much stronger4 ,illustration3 ,the ,entire ,framework is ,held ,together with ,brackets1 and is ,hinged at the ,joints1 so ,that ,it can be ,folded ,up and ,put into a ,small ,space1 the ,sections being ,covered with ,colored ,burlap to ,make ,them ,appear ,solid444 7,fig4 #a7 ,when the frame is completed1 burlap is tacked on to make the covering4 ,the burlap can be purchased cheaply1 and the best color to use is either green1 red or brown4 ,this material should be fastened on the different sections before they are hinged together4 ,to prevent the burlap from unraveling1 turn the edges under before tacking them down4 ,a piece of wire screen is used for the door4 ,an old piece will do1 if it is well coated with black or dark-green paint4 ,it is then tacked on the inside of the door4 ,fasten the different parts together with the hinges4 ,the hinges are fastened on the inside of the side wings1 and on the outside of the two front pieces4 ,with the hinges placed in this manner1 the house can be folded into a small space4 ,for the one built by the writer1 green burlap was used1 and by trimming the door and window frames along the edges with white paint a very pretty effect was produced4 ,illustration3 444,on the ,right is ,shown the ,awning-,frame ,construction 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a small awning was made over the window1 which improved the appearance very much4 ,roller shades on the door and window and an electric door bell completed a very neat and practical playhouse4 ,removing ,basketball from ,closed-,bottom ,receptacle ,the closed-bottom basket used in the game of basketball is so high that it is difficult to remove the ball after a goal is made4 ,generally a long stick is used for this purpose1 but ,i desired to have a better way1 and the device shown in the illustration was the outcome4 ,a light iron rod was hinged to the edge of the basket and bent to its inner shape1 the lower end resting at about the center of the basket4 ,a rope was attached to the lower end and run up and over a sheave pulley attached to the basket support1 then down so it could be easily grasped4 ,when a goal is made1 it is only necessary to give a pull on the rope for throwing the ball out of the basket4--,contributed by ,annie ,b4 ,currine1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,the ,iron ,rod in the ,basket ,throws the ,ball ,out ,when the ,rope is ,pulled ,testing ,dry ,batteries ,for testing dry batteries or any low-voltage current1 take an ordinary thermometer and wind around the mercury bulb enough wire to make about #aj ohms resistance4 ,this will make a good tester4 ,a dry cell of about #b volts attached to the ends of the wire should generate enough heat to expand the mercury about four degrees in one-half minute4 ,this tester is not as fast as a voltmeter1 nor has it as wide a range1 but it is reasonably accurate1 and by using a battery of known voltage1 the winding can be increased or diminished to allow the mercury to expand as many degrees as desired per volt4--,contributed by ,e4 ,h4 ,kimbrough1 ,bartlett1 ,kan4 ,a ,wall-,paper ,cleaner ,to #a qt4 of flour add about #b oz4 of #ij-per-cent ammonia and enough lukewarm water to make a dough4 ,wipe the paper with this preparation while turning and kneading it as in making dough4 ,this will take up the dirt and a clean side is always presented to the paper4--,contributed by ,f4 ,c4 ,myer1 ,tacoma1 ,wash4 ,illustration ,a ,trunk ,mystery ,doubtless every person has seen the trunk mystery1 the effect of which is as follows3 ,a trunk1 mounted upon four legs1 is brought out on the stage and proven to be empty by turning it all the way around to show that there is nothing on the back1 whereupon pieces of plate glass are placed along the back1 sides1 and front1 the trunk is closed and given a swift turn and then opened1 when to the amazement of all1 a lady steps out appearing to come from nowhere4 ,the secret of this trick is very simple1 and the trunk can be made up very cheaply4 ,illustration3 ,a ,shelf and ,panel ,set at ,right ,angles to ,form a ,place at the ,back for the ,assistant to ,conceal ,herself1 ,no ,matter ,which ,way the ,trunk is ,turned to ,face the ,audience ,in the back of the trunk there is a movable panel with a shelf exactly the same size as the panel attached to its bottom1 forming a right angle1 the corner of which is hinged to the bottom of the trunk4 ,the back panel can be turned in until it rests on the bottom of the trunk and1 when this is done1 the shelf part rises and takes its place1 making the back of the trunk appear solid4 ,illustration ,when the trunk is brought out upon the stage1 the assistant is crouching on the shelf4 ,the trunk can then be shown empty4 ,this is all very simple until the trunk is turned around when it takes skill not to give the trick away4 ,as soon as the performer starts to turn the trunk around1 the assistant shifts her weight on the panel1 thus causing it to fall inward and bring the shelf up to make the back appear solid4 ,the assistant is now in the trunk1 and the back can be shown clear of any apparatus4 ,when the trunk is turned to the front again1 the lady repeats the previous operation in the opposite direction1 thus bringing her body to the back of the trunk again4 ,to make the trick appear more difficult1 glass plates are made to insert in the ends1 front and back of the trunk4 ,in making the trunk1 have the back the same size as the bottom4 ,fit the piece of glass for the back into a light frame1 similar to a window frame4 ,this frame is hinged to the bottom of the trunk and is #a_/b in4 smaller all around than the back of the trunk1 so that the two pieces of glass can be put in the ends and also allow the back frame and glass to fall flush in the bottom of the trunk4 ,a few rubber bumpers are fastened in the bottom of the trunk to catch the glass without noise as it falls4 ,the best way to work this is for the performer to let the frame down with his right hand while he is closing up the front with his left4 ,as soon as the trunk is closed1 the assistant again shifts her weight to cause the panel to fall in and then the trunk can be turned to show the back1 or whirled around and turned to the front again1 then opened up1 whereupon the assistant steps out1 bows to the audience1 and leaves the stage4 ,how to ,make a ,candy-,floss ,machine ,every person is familiar with candy floss1 made at stands on fair grounds1 or carnivals1 in an expensive whirling machine4 ,it is not necessary to wait for a fair or a carnival to have a bunch of candy floss1 as it can be made at home much quicker than making taffy candy4 ,illustration ,the device for making the candy floss consists of ordinary things that can be had in any home1 and usually a boy has a battery motor of some kind that will furnish the power4 ,illustration3 ,the ,disk is ,driven by a ,small ,battery ,motor and ,melted ,sugar is ,spun ,out into ,floss ,procure a tin pan1 the shape of an ordinary dish pan and of medium size2 cut a hole about one-half the diameter of the pan in the bottom and solder in a conical-shaped piece similar to a cake pan1 allowing it to extend up inside about half the height of the pan4 ,fasten supports to the pan so that a ,bunsen burner can be set under it where the flame will pass through the conical center opening4 ,mount a small battery motor with its shaft vertical1 pulley end up1 and centering the conical hole1 on a base1 which supports the pan4 ,procure a can cover1 similar to that used on coffee cans1 and fasten it with solder to the pulley on the motor shaft1 being careful to locate it centrally so that it will run smoothly4 ,close to the bottom and in the rim of the can cover1 make a number of small holes with a prickpunch1 or other sharp-pointed tool4 ,wire the motor to the battery1 and the candy-floss machine is ready for use4 ,light the burner1 start the motor1 and pour a little granulated sugar in the revolving can cover4 ,as the sugar is melted1 it will be spun out in floss form through the small holes into the pan receiver4--,contributed by ,herbert ,hahn1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,enlarging ,pictures ,a very simple and sufficiently accurate way of enlarging pictures by means of a pencil holder and elastic is shown in the illustration4 ,the picture to be enlarged is fastened to a table top or drawing board1 and the paper on which it is to be drawn is placed directly below it4 ,a small brad or tack is driven into the board at ,a1 the location depending on the desired size of the enlarged picture1 and the elastic is attached to it4 ,the pencil holder ,b is fastened to the other end of the elastic over the drawing paper4 ,a pointer1 or a knot1 is placed in the elastic at ,c4 ,the pencil holder consists of a stick of wood turned into a handle with a hole bored centrally for a pencil4 ,illustration3 ,the ,size of the ,enlarged ,picture ,depends on the ,length of the ,elastic and the ,spacing of ,pencil and ,pointer ,in use1 the pencil is moved over the drawing paper while the knot or pointer is watched1 to keep it following the lines of the original drawing4 ,the stretch of the elastic is sufficient to enlarge the parts equally1 as well vertically as horizontally4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,weitzsacker1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 ,distance ,chart for ,wireless ,stations ,the amateur wireless telegrapher may be troubled more or less regarding distances from other stations4 ,the difficulty can be overcome by following a plan similar to that of a parcel-post map4 ,a map should be selected covering the desired territory4 ,with the home station as center1 circles should be drawn to diameters corresponding in length to the scale used on the map4 ,by measuring the distance other stations may be from any of these circles1 their cross-country distance from the home station can be determined at a glance4--,contributed by ,e4 ,l4 ,hartlett1 ,wausau1 ,wis4 ,illustration3 ,circles on a ,map the ,same as for ,parcel ,post to ,designate ,wireless ,distances ,a ,carrier for ,fishhooks ,hooks that are attached to gut or short strings are difficult to carry and to keep in good shape for use on a line4 ,i made a carrier that overcame this trouble1 from a block of wood4 ,the block is #a_/b in4 in thickness with brads driven into one end1 for engaging the loops on the gut or string1 while the hook is caught on the opposite end1 the block being just long enough for the short line4 ,the hooks will be held securely1 and the block can be carried in the pocket4--,contributed by ,victor ,e4 ,carpenter1 ,south ,bend1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,the ,string is ,drawn ,taut over the ,block1 and the ,hooks are ,caught in the ,block ,end ,a ,substitute for a ,pen ,recently ,i was hard pressed for a pen1 and as none could be found and the hour was late it was necessary to find a substitute4 ,i fashioned a pen from a piece of boxwood1 and was agreeably surprised at the excellent results obtained with it4 ,the wood was sharpened like a lead pencil at one end1 and a groove was cut out of the tapered part to hold the ink4--,contributed by ,richard ,f4 ,pohle1 ,lynn1 ,massachusetts4 ,illustration3 ,a ,notch ,cut in the ,tapered ,part of a ,wood ,stick ,forms a ,substitute ,pen 99 99 99 99 99 ,a very convenient method of keeping shipping tags at hand is to slip them on a desk spindle4 ,a ,bucket-,ball ,game ,this is a new indoor game which follows out in principle the regular baseball play4 ,it is an exciting and interesting pastime1 and while a certain amount of skill is required to score runs1 a person who cannot play the regular game can score as many runs1 and as often1 as the best players in the national leagues4 ,illustration3 ,the ,frame is ,made ,up without a ,back1 to ,hold the ,buckets at an ,angle ,that ,makes ,it ,difficult to ,toss the ,ball ,so ,that ,it will ,stay in ,any ,one of ,them 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,anyone that is just a little handy with tools can make the necessary parts for this game4 ,the tools required are a hammer and a saw1 and the materials consist of some finishing nails2 three strips of wood1 #f ft4 long1 #b in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick2 two strips1 #ah in4 long1 #d in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick2 four strips1 #bd in4 long1 #b in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick2 two strips1 #ah in4 long1 #b in4 wide1 and #a in4 thick2 two blocks1 #d in4 square1 and #a in4 thick1 and four wood buckets4 ,a frame is built up as shown1 #f ft4 long1 #ah in4 wide1 and #bd in4 high1 without a back4 ,one of the long pieces is fastened to the bottoms of the buckets as shown1 spacing the latter equally on the length of the piece4 ,this piece is then set in notches cut in the blocks of wood at an angle of #de4 ,these blocks are fastened to the upper crosspieces at the ends of the frame4 ,the upper part of the buckets rest on the upper front piece of the frame4 ,illustration3 ,the ,player must ,throw the ,ball ,so ,that ,it will ,enter and ,stay in ,one of the ,buckets1 ,which ,designates the ,base ,hits by the ,number in ,its ,bottom ,the rules for playing the game are as follows3 ,three baseballs are used4 ,the players stand about #aj ft4 distant and in front of the buckets4 ,each player1 or side1 is only permitted to throw three balls an inning1 irrespective of the number of runs scored4 ,any kind of delivery is permitted1 but an underhand throw will be found most successful4 ,the buckets are numbered from #a to #d1 and represent1 respectively1 one1 two1 and three-base hits1 and home runs4 ,the one in which the ball stays designates the run4 ,plays are figured as in a regular ball game4 ,for instance1 if a ball should stay in bucket ,no4 #b and the next in bucket ,no4 #c1 the first man would be forced home1 counting one run1 and leaving one man on third base4 ,if the next ball stays in bucket ,no4 #d1 the man on third base is forced home1 as well as the one who scored the home run1 making three runs for that inning4 ,the runs should be scored as made1 to guard against confusion and argument4--,contributed by ,walter ,talley1 ,pottsville1 ,pa4 ,a ,staple ,puller ,illustration ,with nothing but ordinary tools the removing of staples is tedious and difficult work4 ,if a suitable-sized wire nail is bent like a fishhook and the hook part driven under the staple1 the latter can be easily pulled out by grasping and pulling the nail with a hammer in the usual way4--,contributed by ,r4 ,neland1 ,minneapolis1 ,minn4 ,a ,dissolving ,coin ,trick ,this is a very simple and effective trick4 ,the articles required to perform the trick are1 a glass of water1 a silver dollar1 a handkerchief and a watch crystal1 or round piece of glass1 the size of a silver dollar4 ,conceal the crystal in the palm of the hand and show the audience the dollar4 ,hold the handkerchief in one hand and place the hand holding the silver dollar and crystal under it so that the crystal can be grasped by the hand holding the handkerchief4 ,remove the dollar by holding it in the palm of the hand and slip it1 unobserved1 into a pocket4 ,ask some one in the audience to hold the handkerchief with the inclosed crystal and ask him to let it drop into the glass of water as the handkerchief covers both4 ,the falling glass can be heard1 but upon removing the handkerchief nothing can be seen of the dollar or watch crystal4 ,the circular glass disk cannot be seen in the water4--,contributed by ,albert ,biery1 ,spokane1 ,wash4 ,a ,fruit-,jar ,opener ,the accompanying sketch shows a handy device for turning up and unscrewing the covers on glass fruit jars4 ,the loop is slipped over the cover and the handle turned in the direction of the arrow4 ,to unscrew the cover1 the tool is turned over and the handle turned in the opposite direction4 ,illustration3 ,the ,loop in the ,leather ,grips the ,cap ,tightly ,when the ,handle is ,turned as the ,arrow ,indicates ,the loop should be just large enough to slip over the cover easily4 ,it is made of leather and fastened to the wood handle with screws4--,contributed by ,j4 ,b4 ,downer1 ,seattle1 ,wash4 ,anti-,tangle ,safety ,pin ,a small disk of rubber or leather1 placed on a safety pin as shown in ,fig4 #a1 will prevent the fabric which is fastened by the pin from becoming tangled in the spring loop4 ,the manner of using the pin is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,the ,small ,disk on the ,pin ,prevents the ,goods from ,becoming ,tangled in the ,coil ,how to ,nickel or ,silverplate ,iron by ,friction ,the following methods of plating iron with nickel and silver appeared in a recent issue of a ,german paper4 ,in nickelplating iron1 a thin coating of copper is first produced on it by rubbing on a solution of #bj parts sulphate of copper1 #e parts sulphuric acid and #ajj parts of water4 ,after the copper plate has been formed rub over it1 with a rag1 a solution of #c parts tin1 #f parts nickel and #a part iron in #ajj parts of hydrochloric acid and #c parts of sulphuric acid4 ,if finally the object is rubbed with a rag that has been dipped in finely pulverized zinc1 a nickel deposit will be formed on the copper4 ,the thickness of the deposit of nickel can be increased by repeating the two last operations4 ,according to a recent patent1 a silver coating can be produced by dissolving freshly precipitated chloride of silver in a solution of hyposulphite of soda1 #a4a parts to #aj parts of water1 and adding to this solution #ahj parts spirits of sal ammoniac and then stirring in #hjj parts of finely washed chalk4 ,this mixture is applied and rubbed until it dries on the object being silvered1 and the result is a brilliant deposit of pure silver4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a good filling for cracks in old furniture is made of shellac1 either melted by heat or dissolved in alcohol to make a thick paste4 ,a ,homemade ,cradle ,the cradle shown in the sketch can be made quickly and easily at home and will be found far more serviceable than1 and possessing several advantages over1 the ones purchased4 ,it is made of a clothes basket1 an iron rod and two ordinary chairs4 ,it can be taken down and the parts used for other purposes4 ,the upper portion of the rod prevents the chairs from slipping4 ,a light cloth can be placed over the rod1 in tent fashion1 to keep flies out1 while at the same time permitting air for ventilation4--,contributed by ,bert ,verne1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,a ,clothes ,basket ,supported with a ,rod between ,two ,chairs ,makes a ,good ,cradle ,a ,removable ,post ,illustration ,it is often desirable to have football and baseball grounds in public parks roped in during the game1 but after the game the ropes and stakes must be removed4 ,to drive in iron stakes and then remove them is hard work and requires considerable time4 ,the sketch shows a much better way4 ,a piece of #b-;in4 pipe1 about #ah in4 long1 is sunk level with the ground in the right location for a post4 ,the post is made of #a-a_/b-;in4 pipe of the length desired4 ,this will just fit inside of the #b-;in4 pipe4 ,a wood plug is fitted in the upper end of the pipe in the ground to keep out dirt when the post is removed4--,contributed by ,abner ,b4 ,shaw1 ,n4 ,dartmouth1 ,mass4 ,string-and-,ball ,trick ,illustration ,the stopping of a ball on a string at any desired point is understood by almost every person1 but to make one that can be worked only when the operator so desires is a mysterious trick4 ,procure a wooden ball1 about #b in4 in diameter1 and cut it into two equal parts4 ,insert a small peg in the flat surface of one half1 a little to one side of the center1 as shown1 and allow the end to project about #c_/af in4 ,the flat surface of the other half is cut out concave1 as shown1 to make it #a_/b in4 deep4 ,the two halves are then glued together1 and a hole is drilled centrally on the division line for a string to pass through4 ,to do the trick1 hold an end of the string in each hand tightly and draw it taut with the ball at the top1 then slacken the string enough to allow the ball to slide down the string4 ,to stop the ball at any point1 pull the string taut4 ,before handing the ball and string out for inspection1 push the string from each side of the ball and turn it slightly to throw it off the peg4 ,this will allow the string to pass freely through the ball1 and it cannot be stopped at will4 ,to replace the string reverse the operation4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,o4 ,swett1 ,chicago4 ,wall-,paper ,cleaner ,the following mixture ,i have used with the best results for years4 ,thoroughly mix together #c pt4 of wheat flour and #a pt4 of powdered whiting1 then add sufficient water to make a dough4 ,to clean a dirty papered wall1 take a piece of the dough that can be easily grasped in the hand1 press it against the surface and make a long stroke downward4 ,during the process of cleaning1 keep kneading the dirt into the dough4 ,the preparation can be mixed in any amount desired by using the proportions named4--,contributed by ,c4 ,w4 ,bause1 ,jr41 ,e4 ,troy1 ,wis4 ,revolving ,shaft without ,power ,the device illustrated seems paradoxical for it apparently works without any power being applied to it1 making from two to three revolutions per hour1 which1 though slow1 is nevertheless motion1 requiring energy4 ,illustration3 ,the ,expansion and ,contraction of the ,ropes ,keep the ,disk ,up and to ,one ,side of the ,center ,the shaft ,a is supported on the edges1 in the bearings ,b and ,c1 of a tank1 ,d4 ,a disk1 ,e1 having a central hole larger in diameter than the shaft1 is located at the middle of the latter4 ,the disk is supported by #ab or more cotton ropes1 ,f4 ,the tank is filled to the level ,g with water4 ,the lower ropes1 being immersed in the water1 shrink and lift the disk slightly above the center in the position of an eccentric1 as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch4 ,the center of gravity of the disk in this position1 being higher and slightly to one side of the shaft1 the disk has a tendency to turn around4 ,the motion drives the next rope into the water where it becomes soaked and shrinkage takes place again1 lifting the disk to a higher position1 while the rope coming out of the water dries out4 ,the ropes emerging from the water but not yet thoroughly dry cause the upper part of the disk to be in an eccentric position laterally with reference to the center of the shaft1 thus causing the center of gravity to be not only above but also slightly to one side4--,contributed by ,charles ,roberts1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,paper-,bag ,holder ,illustration ,a holder1 to accommodate the different-sized bags used in a store1 can be easily made of a board1 #f in4 wide and #cj in4 long4 ,one edge of the board is cut with notches similar to the teeth of a ripsaw and their back-sloping edges are drilled to admit a nail point4 ,a sufficient quantity of bags is placed in a pile and a nail is driven through the edge near their upper ends1 and the projecting point of the nail is stuck into one of the holes4 ,proceed in the same manner with bags of other sizes4 ,to remove a bag1 take hold of the lower end of the outermost one and tear it from the nail4 ,be sure to drive the nails through the bags close to the top4--,contributed by ,abner ,b4 ,shaw1 ,n4 ,dartmouth1 ,mass4 ,covering for ,chalk ,trays ,the chalk trays fitted at the lower edge of blackboards soon collect considerable chalk dust and the chalk sticks dropped into it are1 therefore1 disagreeable to handle4 ,a simple way of keeping the sticks clean is to cover the trays with wire mesh which is shaped like a tray but not so deep as the chalk tray4 ,thus the chalk dust will fall through this screen and be out of the way of the sticks4 ,a ,curtain ,hanger ,a close-coiled spring1 about #a_/d in4 in diameter1 makes a much better hanger for a short curtain than a small rod4 ,the spring should be about #a in4 shorter than the width of the window and fastened with screwhooks4 ,the spring is preferable not only because it is less apt to tear the fabric1 as it will give some if the curtain is pulled1 but also for the reason that it is much easier to put it through the hem than the rod4--,contributed by ,walter ,ramm1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,illustration ,joints for ,model ,aeroplane ,in constructing model or toy aeroplanes the strips used are so slender that it is difficult to join them at the ends with brads without splitting them4 ,if glue is used1 there is danger of breaking two or more ribs1 should it be necessary to remove a broken or defective rib4 ,illustration3 ,cartridge ,shells ,used for ,joints 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,an empty #bb-;gauge long cartridge can be formed into an elbow that will connect the framework accurately1 give more strength than glue or brads1 and allow a broken section to be removed without spoiling the other part of the framework4 ,file off the end ,a1 ,fig4 #a1 so that the shell will form a straight tube1 and file as shown in ,fig4 #b with a three-cornered file4 ,then bend the two sections into the form shown in ,fig4 #c and solder the adjacent edges4 ,file off the rough spots and drill small holes1 as shown1 for the insertion of pins to hold the wood strips4 ,much time in the building of model aeroplanes can be saved by keeping a supply of these elbows on hand4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a deep rust on tools may be removed by soaking them in a strong1 hot bath of potash and water for a half hour1 then dipping them into a solution of #a part muriatic acid in #b parts cold water4 ,an ,indoor ,baseball ,game ,an indoor game of baseball may be played on a board #e ft4 long and #c ft4 wide4 ,a diamond is laid off at one end of the board and pins representing the hits are attached to the board so they will project above the surface4 ,the locations of the players are designated by holes bored part way in the wood with an expansive bit4 ,these holes should be large enough to receive the rings easily4 ,the rings may be gaskets or they may be made of rope1 and should have an inside diameter of about #c in4 ,illustration3 ,baseball ,diamond on a ,board ,only two persons can play at this game4 ,the distance from the board to the thrower may be from #aj to #ajj ft41 according to the size of the room4 ,this distance should be marked and each thrower stand at the same place4 ,if the ring is thrown over one of the base-hit or two-bagger pegs1 it shows the number of bases secured4 ,throwing a ring over one of the home-run pegs means a score1 of course4 ,the infield hit secures a base4 ,if the ring slips into a hole1 that counts one out4 ,a player must throw until he has three outs4 ,the score is kept for the runs made4--,contributed by ,francis ,p4 ,hobart1 ,willoughby1 ,o4 ,a ,lantern for the ,camp ,illustration ,a very desirable lantern for camp use is one that utilizes a candle instead of a lamp4 ,such a lantern can be made of an ordinary oil-lantern globe1 a block of wood1 some galvanized wire1 a few nails1 a metal collar1 and a hood of zinc or tin4 ,the block of wood is cut octagonally and the metal collar is fastened to it as shown4 ,four headless nails are driven into the center of the block1 spaced so as to hold an ordinary candle securely4 ,the wire is formed into a ,u-shape and the ends fastened into the block of wood outside of the candle socket1 and within the globe circle4 ,a conical piece of tin or zinc is formed to fit over the top of the globe as shown4 ,as the candle does not require much draft there is no opening provided4--,contributed by ,addison ,w4 ,baird1 ,m4 ,d41 ,new ,york ,city4 ,electric ,lights ,controlled from ,two or ,more ,switches ,many times it is quite an advantage to have a lamp or group of lamps so connected that the current may be turned on or off by any one of a number of different switches4 ,for example1 the lights in a long hall or passage-way can be lighted or extinguished by operating a switch at either end of the hall2 the lights in the upper and lower halls of a residence1 turned on or off by operating a switch upstairs or downstairs as the case might demand2 the lights in the garage1 controlled by switches at both the inside and outside door1 etc4 ,illustration3 ,lamps ,controlled from ,two ,switches 7,fig4 #a7 ,the method of connecting a number of lamps to a circuit so that they can be controlled from either of two switches is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the switches1 as illustrated in this drawing1 are in such a position that the lamps will burn4 ,if either of the switches be thrown to its other position 7there are two positions for each switch71 the circuit will be opened4 ,the operation then of either switch will again close the circuit4 ,illustration3 ,lamps ,controlled by ,any ,number of ,switches 7,fig4 #b7 ,the method of connecting a number of lamps to a circuit so that they can be controlled by any number of switches is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the switches are all in such a position that the lamps will burn4 ,if any one of the switches be turned to its second position 7all the switches have two positions71 the circuit will be open4 ,the dotted lines at switch ,c show the connections through switch ,c after it has been operated4 ,operating switch ,d then will again close the circuit1 by using the dotted lines in switches ,c and ,d4 ,the wiring for the control of lamps1 as just indicated1 must comply with the underwriters' requirements1 and also city requirements1 if the work be done in a place having city regulations for electric wiring4 99 99 99 99 99 ,wire netting may be cut by laying it on the side edge of a spade and striking it with a hammer4 ,illustration ,electric ,score ,board for ,indoor ,games ,a very satisfactory electric score board1 for use in scoring basketball and other games played indoors1 is shown in the illustration4 ,it is constructed entirely of wood1 but should be lined with asbestos board or sheathing4 ,the dimensions are a matter of choice1 but one #d ft4 long1 #b ft4 wide and #ah in4 deep is a good size4 ,the back of the box is provided with two cleats1 each #b-a_/b ft4 long1 fastened at each end4 ,this allows a projection of #c in4 at the top and bottom1 for fastening the score board to the wall4 ,the manner of construction is shown in ,fig4 #a1 and a cross section of the box1 in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,electric ,indoor ,score ,board1 ,showing ,its ,construction and ,manner of ,cutting ,out the ,letters and ,numbers 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f1 ,fig4 #g7 ,the front of the box should be fastened with screws so as to make its removal easy in case of repairs4 ,this part of the box carries the frame for inserting the numbers and the words ,home ,team and ,visitors1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,as the words are a permanent fixture1 the cards carrying them are fastened to the front4 ,at the end of these words a frame is constructed as shown in ,fig4 #d1 in which the cards having the numbers are inserted in slides4 ,numerals and letters can be cut out of heavy cardboard or tin4 ,the design of a letter having sharp angles and straight edges1 as shown in ,fig4 #e1 is very easily cut out with a chisel4 ,the method of cutting is shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,as portions of the letters and numerals1 such as the center in an ,o1 would fall out if cut entirely around1 some way must be provided to hold the parts in place4 ,the way to prepare stencils is to leave a portion uncut1 which is known as a tie1 and the letter will appear as shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,the best method for making these letters and figures is to cut out the letter entirely1 then to paste thin paper over the back and replace the parts removed by the cutting in their original position4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,a ,mission ,frame for an ,alarm ,clock ,the old nickelplated alarm clock which usually adorns the kitchen mantel is1 to say the least1 not ornamental1 and ,i improved the appearance of mine without lessening its usefulness by making a small case in mission style for it4 ,illustration3 ,an ,alarm ,clock with a ,wood ,covering ,ornamented and ,finished in ,mission ,style ,the sketch shows a design which is neat and easily made4 ,accurate dimensions cannot be given as these will vary with the size of the clock4 ,quarter-sawed oak1 #a_/d in4 thick1 is the best material to use4 ,the front and back can be cut on a jigsaw1 the opening for the clock face being cut slightly smaller than the metal of the clock so that only the face shows4 ,an opening in the back piece should be cut a little smaller than the one in front1 to provide a free opening for winding the clock4 ,fasten the parts together with small round-head brass brads or screws and finish to match the furniture4 ,a small desk clock can be made in a similar manner1 using a cheap watch instead of the alarm clock4--,contributed by ,c4 ,e4 ,hamann1 ,somerville1 ,mass4 ,mixing ,sulphuric ,acid ,one of the first lessons given a student in chemistry is how to mix sulphuric acid with water4 ,this would naturally be supposed to be very easy1 yet1 if it is not done right1 it will surely result in injury to the person doing the mixing4 ,the specific gravity of sulphuric acid is #a4hdi and1 on account of its chemical attraction to water1 great heat is set up or generated when the two are being mixed4 ,if the acid is put into a jar and the water poured onto it1 they will be temporarily separated1 as the heavy acid will remain at the bottom1 the chemical reaction taking place on the dividing line only4 ,this soon generates heat which rapidly increases until steam is formed4 ,then the water boils over and finally becomes a bubbling volcano which readily ejects the contents of the jar4 ,as the mixture at this moment is very hot1 bad burns will be the result1 which are aggravated by the biting of the acid2 and clothing or anything that it comes in contact with will be ruined or badly damaged4 ,always remember this caution3 add the acid to the water4 ,the following is the proper way to proceed in mixing sulphuric acid as well as other acids of lighter weight4 ,place the water in a jar and pour the acid in1 a little at a time1 stirring the mixture with a wooden stick4 ,the mixing process will always heat the solution1 which in many instances1 must be allowed to cool before using4 ,a ,chinese ,pagoda ,fold the end of a long and narrow strip of paper over several times as shown in ,fig4 #a and roll the entire length over a stick1 then remove the roll and crease1 or make it flat1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,make two cuts with a sharp knife centrally so that they reach to the several folds first made on the inner end of the paper1 then cut the fold in the paper between the cuts as shown in ,fig4 #c1 and bend the ends over to form the shape in ,fig4 #d4 ,insert the knife blade under the first fold and draw it out until the paper takes the form in ,fig4 #e4 ,illustration3 ,stages in ,making the ,strip of ,paper into the ,finished ,pagoda 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e7 ,these pagodas can be made large or small1 as desired1 and also varied in several ways4 ,large ones can be formed and used as small tree ornaments4 ,all that is necessary to make them high is to roll up one strip of paper on another in the rolling process4 ,in rolling up several strips1 one on top of the other successively1 various colored papers may be used and the appearance is greatly enhanced4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,c4 ,bradley1 ,w4 ,toledo1 ,o4 ,a ,cuspidor ,carrier ,illustration ,the task of handling cuspidors under all conditions is anything but pleasant1 but the carrier shown in the sketch makes quite an improvement over ordinary methods4 ,the carrier consists of an iron rod1 #a_/d in4 in diameter and #c ft4 long4 ,one end is bent to fit around the neck of the cuspidor and the other is shaped into a handle4 ,guide for ,grinding a ,plane ,iron ,when a plane iron has been sharpened a number of times1 it often becomes so out of square that the edge cannot be made parallel with the bottom of the plane block1 even by using the lateral adjustment4 ,where this happens1 the plane iron must be reground4 ,if an emery wheel mounted in a polishing head or lathe is at hand1 this can be easily accomplished4 ,loosen the plane-iron cap and screw it down at right angles to the plane iron1 also reverse the tool rest as shown in the sketch4 ,in this way the work can be done better and more quickly than by the usual method4--,contributed by ,l4 ,s4 ,uphoff1 ,schenectady1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,plane-,iron ,cap ,turned at ,right ,angles1 ,provides a ,guide to ,grind the ,edge ,straight ,to ,prevent ,torch ,lights from ,smoking ,in the shop or factory oil torches are sometimes used and much trouble is experienced by the excessive smoking of the flame4 ,this occurs because too much carbon remains unburned1 and can be remedied by first soaking the wick in a weak solution of acetic acid4 ,a #e-per-cent solution can be purchased for a few cents at any drug store and will soak a great number of wicks4 ,the acid is not poisonous unless taken internally4 ,a ,lard and ,fruit ,presser ,a very simple but handy device for pressing out lard1 juices for jelly1 or fruit for marmalade1 is made from two boards1 each #ah in4 long1 #c in4 wide and #a_/b in4 thick1 formed into the shape of paddles and hinged together4 ,the hinge is made by running a wire through holes bored in one end of the paddles and twisting the ends together as shown4 ,this presser will save the hands from stains and other effects of the juices4--,contributed by ,julia ,a4 ,white1 ,glenburg1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,two ,paddles ,hinged ,together with a ,piece of ,wire ,make a ,presser for ,lard and ,fruits ,an ,electric-,light ,bulb as ,barometer ,to use a discarded electric bulb as a fairly reliable barometer the point is broken off with a pair of pliers while holding the bulb under water4 ,as the bulb is a vacuum1 it completely fills with water4 ,if the bulb is now suspended from a wire or thread fastened at the socket end1 the water will not run out of it in fair weather when the atmospheric pressure is normal or high1 but if the pressure falls1 as happens when bad weather is approaching1 the water will begin to bulge out of the small opening and sometimes a small drop may even fall off4 ,when1 with returning fair weather1 the atmospheric pressure increases1 the water can no longer bulge or drop out of the bulb4 ,a ,swinging-,pendulum ,trick ,to swing a pendulum1 picked out from a number of them at random1 without touching it is a very puzzling trick4 ,the articles necessary are a medium-sized table and a number of pendulums1 some of which are suspended from a rod with their lower weighted ends inside of water and wine glasses placed on the table1 and others attached to corks so that they will hang inside of bottles4 ,the spectators gather around the table which can be in full light4 ,the performer sits at one side of the table with his hands flat on the top4 ,a person may pick out any pendulum and ask him to swing it1 which he will proceed to do without touching it1 also making it strike the glass while it swings4 ,another pendulum may be pointed out and he will start that one apparently by looking at it1 while the other one stops4 ,illustration3 ,any ,one ,pendulum can be ,made to ,swing at ,will by ,moving the ,table ,slightly ,this may seem to be impossible1 yet it is very easy4 ,it will be seen that no two pendulums have the same length4 ,a pendulum makes a certain number of swings in a given time1 depending on its length4 ,a long pendulum requires more time to complete its swing and will1 therefore1 make a less number of swings than a short one in the same time4 ,it is only necessary to move the table slightly and watch the pendulum picked out until it begins to swing independently of the others1 which soon happens4 ,to make the longer pendulums swing1 longer movements of the table top must be made4 ,with a little practice anyone can become a skilled medium in pendulum swinging4--,contributed by ,james ,a4 ,hart1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,applying a ,strap ,hinge ,an ordinary strap hinge can be applied to a door or box cover in such a way that only one wing will show4 ,ordinarily the hinge opens as at ,a1 and1 on reversing it1 the hinge will open to the limit as shown at ,b4 ,if one wing is bent toward the other1 as shown at ,c1 the hinge may be applied1 as shown at ,d4 ,as this process reverses the hinge1 the screw holes must be countersunk on the opposite side4 ,illustration3 ,reversing a ,strap ,hinge ,so ,that ,when ,it is ,applied ,only ,one ,wing will ,show ,tricks ,performed with ,thumbs ,tied ,together ,to have one's thumbs securely tied together by any person in an audience and examined by the spectators1 then have some one throw a hoop or bicycle rim on one of the performer's arms as if the thumbs were not tied1 seems impossible1 yet this trick can be done1 and its simplicity is its own protection1 even though performed close to a committee selected from the audience4 ,a stick can be held perpendicularly by anyone with one hand at each end and the performer can thrust his arms at the stick which passes between them with the thumbs apparently tied tightly together4 ,the same effect is produced on the arm of any person1 while the hands are tightly clasped1 and before and after each movement the tied thumbs are examined by the committee4 ,the two cords used for the trick are made as follows3 ,the first should be about #ag in4 long1 #a_/d in4 in diameter at its center and tapering to points at the ends4 ,the other cord is about #ac in4 long1 #a_/h in4 in diameter in the center and also tapering at the ends4 ,they are constructed of ,chinese or ,japanese paper1 which is a soft1 but very tough1 fibrous texture4 ,cut the paper into strips1 #a in4 wide1 taking care that the grain1 or rather the fiber1 runs lengthwise4 ,beginning at one end1 twist the paper on itself at an angle as in rolling the old-fashioned paper lamp lighter4 ,each turn should lap over the former about half of its width4 ,when within #c in4 of the end of the first strip apply another by moistening the joining ends and continue the twisting4 ,when the length given is reached1 break off the strip and start back over the first in the opposite direction4 ,lay on enough layers to secure the diameter given4 ,when finished1 the cords should be strong enough to resist the pressure applied by the hands4 ,illustration3 ,manner of ,crossing the ,thumbs to ,receive the ,double ,tie of the ,cord ,with all fingers pressed together spread both thumbs away from the hands1 as shown at ,a4 ,lay the right thumb across the left1 as at ,b1 the large knuckle bone of one lying directly over that of the other4 ,the largest cord is laid over the crossing and both ends brought down1 crossed under the thumbs1 then up again1 and tied in two knots on top of the right thumb1 as at ,c4 ,the trick in the tying is at this point4 ,just as the tie is being made pull the left thumb until the smallest-diameter joints reach the cord and pull down with the left hand4 ,push the right thumb so that the fleshy part enters as far as possible into the cords4 ,insist on the tie being made tightly4 ,illustration3 ,the ,cords as ,they are ,placed around the ,thumbs and ,tied in a ,double ,knot ,the second and smaller cord is laid below the right thumb as shown at ,d1 and on top of the left against the first cord1 crossed1 brought back and tied twice4 ,when this is being done reverse the pushing and pulling as described1 pushing the left thumb and pulling out on the right4 ,secure all the slack on the left thumb1 the right being pushed into the cords at its smallest diameter and the second cord being tied high up and as near the right thumb as possible1 with knots tightly drawn4 ,if this second knot is not tight it will give trouble in performing the trick4 ,the release is made by bringing the tips of the fingers together and placing the thumbs into the palms4 ,if the ties have been carefully made there will be no trouble to withdraw the left thumb as it is masked by the hands4 ,the peculiar nature of the paper cord causes the loop from which the thumb was removed to remain open and rigid as a wire loop1 and if the last tie was tightly drawn1 the second cord will not slip down to close the loop4 ,in approaching the hoop1 stick1 or arm1 touch the thing to be passed with the finger tips and withdraw them1 swaying backward a few times and1 in the last swing before making the pass1 remove the thumb from the loop4 ,after passing1 replace the thumb in the loop4 ,in passing the object1 open the finger tips1 then close them and open the palms1 and push the left thumb back into the loop1 close the palms and apply a strain on both thumbs1 then show the tie4 ,be careful to press both thumbs closely into the palms in passing so that they will not strike the object4 ,always exhibit the tie from the back of the hands with the palms spread out4 ,if there is any difficulty in drawing out or replacing the thumb in the loop1 it is because the ties have not been properly made or tied when the thumbs were in the right place4 ,it requires some practice to do the trick quickly4--,fayette4 ,a ,way to ,keep ,home ,accounts ,an easy way to keep track of all the home expenses is by the popular card system4 ,the index cards can be had at any stationery-supply house4 ,place the cards in a box on end and have a good supply of blanks back of them ready for use4 ,under1 or back of1 each letter place as many blanks as is necessary1 and almost instantly any item of expense in the home may be found1 such as the cost of coal for the year1 drugs1 meat1 the cost of clothing for a child1 and the account of the head of the family4 ,the boy's account might read as follows under the letter ,j3 ,johnnie ,jan4 #c ,shoes #c4ej ,jan4 #ae ,book 4#de ,jan4 #bi ,hair cut 4#be ,feb4 #a ,stockings 4#ge and so on through the year4 ,the mother can see at a glance just when the last shoes were bought1 and how much it cost for books and paper4 ,everything pertaining to the home keeping can be so recorded and each year compared4 ,once given a trial no other bookkeeping will be required in the home where time counts4 ,children can be taught to keep account of their expenses in this way1 and thus thrift and good business methods are encouraged4--,contributed by ,harriette ,i4 ,lockwood1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,how to ,make a ,blowgun ,either a #ab-;in4 length of a small curtain-rod tubing or a straight piece of small bamboo pole1 cut off between the joints1 can be used for the gun part of this simple device4 ,if bamboo is used1 see that it is cleaned out smoothly on the inside4 ,the dart used in the gun is shown at ,a in the illustration4 ,it is made by threading the eye of a darning needle full of yarn1 clipping all the strands off to a uniform length of about #c_/d in41 and then picking out the fibers into a brushlike mass above the needle's eye4 ,another needle or pin can be used for fuzzing the threads4 ,the point to observe is that the brush is of somewhat larger diameter than the bore of the gun1 so that when the needle is pushed into the mouth end the brush will be compressed and make an air-tight plug4 ,illustration3 ,the ,blowgun is ,made of a ,piece of ,tubing1 and the ,dart of a ,darning ,needle ,after thus inserting the dart1 hold it as shown and give a quick1 sharp blast of the breath into the gun4 ,the dart will travel with great speed and accuracy for #bj ft4 or more1 and stick wherever it strikes4 ,the point being so small1 it can be used in the house for shooting at a paper target pinned to the wall without injury to the plaster or woodwork4--,contributed by ,c4 ,c4 ,fraser1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,a ,brush for ,applying ,soldering ,acid ,a good brush for applying acid to articles for soldering can be made of a piece of small copper pipe for the handle1 and fine copper wire for the brush4 ,to make the brush part1 take a piece of cardboard1 about #a-a_/d in4 wide1 and wind several turns of ,no4 #bh gauge copper wire around it1 then remove the coil1 insert about #a_/b in4 of it in the pipe1 and flatten the latter to hold the wire4 ,clip the ends of the wire1 and a brush will be had that ordinary acids will not affect4 ,if only a short piece of pipe is available1 it can be used as a ferrule and a handle made of wire or wood4--,contributed by ,a4 ,r4 ,cunning1 ,w4 ,new ,brighton1 ,n4 ,y4 ,inkwell and ,penholder ,illustration ,an empty paste pot with a water well in the center makes an excellent inkwell and penholder4 ,fill the exterior well ,a with cement or plaster of paris1 push the number of penholders to be held into the cement before it sets1 moving them about occasionally to prevent the cement from sticking to them and to make the hole a little larger than the holder4 ,the part ,b is for the ink4--,contributed by ,r4 ,f4 ,pinkney1 ,lazareto del ,mariel1 ,cuba4 ,a ,homemade ,loose-,leaf ,pocket ,memorandum ,the little memorandum illustrated herewith is very handy to carry in the coat or vest pocket for taking notes1 etc4 ,loose leaves may be supplied with very little trouble4 ,it consists of a fold of paper1 cut as shown and pasted at the ends4 ,the pocket thus formed will easily hold #b doz4 sheets and the slits cut on the outside will admit #h sheets4--,contributed by ,c4 ,b4 ,hanson1 ,fitchburg1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,holder is ,made of ,heavy ,manila ,paper and will ,stand ,considerable ,wear 99 99 99 99 99 ,an ideal cleaner for kid gloves is carbon tetrachloride4 ,rubber-,band-,change ,trick ,the trick of changing a rubber band from the first and second fingers to the third and fourth1 if done quickly1 can be performed without detection by any one4 ,the band on the first two fingers is shown to the spectator as in ,fig4 #a1 with the back of the hand up4 ,the hand is then turned over and the band drawn out quickly1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 in a manner as to give the impression that the band is whole and on the two fingers4 ,while doing this1 quickly fold all the fingers so that their ends enter the band1 and turn the hand over and let go the band1 then show the back with the fingers doubled up4 ,in reality the fingers will be in the band1 as in ,fig4 #c1 and the back will still show the band on the first two fingers4 ,quickly straighten out all the fingers1 and the band will snap over the last two fingers1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4--;,contributed by ,e4 ,k4 ,marshall1 ,oak ,park1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,transferring ,rubber ,band from the ,first ,two ,fingers to the ,last ,pair1 ,like ,magic 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,a ,swinging ,electric-,light ,bracket ,the light bracket shown is both ornamental and useful and can be swung from one side of the room to the other in an instant1 a feature that is of great value in a dimly lighted kitchen4 ,it can be made of either brass or soft iron1 but1 for the sake of convenience1 the description will be for one made of brass4 ,procure four pieces of brass1 #a in wide1 #a_/h in4 thick and #g in4 long1 and bend them to the shape shown at ,a4 ,these are to form the ceiling bracket4 ,a #c_/af-;in4 hole is drilled in the end of each piece to be against the ceiling4 ,the other end is bent slightly concave and soldered to a brass collar1 ,b1 which is threaded on the inside4 ,this collar must be of such a size that it will screw on the end of a brass pipe1 ,c1 #a in4 in outside diameter4 ,the length of this pipe should be #ah or #bj inches4 ,the base ,d of the bracket is made of a brass bar1 #a_/h in4 thick1 #a_/b in4 wide and #de in4 long1 a scroll being turned on #f in4 of its length at the globe end1 and #c in4 of the other end turned up at right angles and soldered to a ring made of #a_/af-;in4 brass that acts as a bearing around the pipe4 ,illustration3 ,a ,bracket ,forming a ,pendant and ,swinging ,arm to ,change the ,location of the ,electric ,light ,the upper brace ,e is made of #a_/af-;in4 brass1 the same width as the base piece and about #dh in4 in length4 ,each end is turned into a scroll and then riveted or soldered to the base ,d and to the upper brass ring4 ,the space between the base ,d1 the brace ,e1 and the pipe ,c is filled with any style of scroll or other brace that may suit the taste of the maker1 but the base ,d must be at right angles to the pipe ,c before the scroll is fastened in place4 ,a cap1 ,f1 is screwed to the lower end of the pipe1 to keep the bracket in place4 ,ordinary flexible light cord is used to connect to the light which is swung to the scroll end of the base4--,contributed by ,f4 ,l4 ,matter1 ,portland1 ,oregon4 ,match ,safe to ,deliver ,one ,match at a ,time ,a match safe that will deliver only one match at a time is constructed of two parts1 the box or holder and the base1 with slider4 ,the box is diamond-shaped and of the size shown by the dimensions4 ,the base1 with slider1 consists of two pieces1 the baseboard and a standard which runs through the box diagonally on the longest dimension in a vertical position4 ,a thumbtack is inserted in the standard near the top to prevent the box from being lifted entirely from the base4 ,illustration3 ,the ,box ,delivers ,only ,one ,match ,when ,it is ,raised and ,lowered on the ,standard ,the matches are filled into the box on both sides of the standard4 ,when a match is wanted1 lift the box up and let it down again1 and one match will be caught in the notch and raised out of the box4 ,to prevent the box from tipping sideways when it is raised up1 small pieces can be glued to the box ends on the inside and on both sides of the standard4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,barrows1 ,new ,britain1 ,conn4 ,cartridge ,shells ,used for ,electrical ,contacts ,in making small switchboards1 rheostats1 and other electrical devices1 ,i found a good use for old center-fire cartridge shells as shown in the sketch4 ,a hole a little smaller than the diameter of the shell is made in the board and the shell is forced in4 ,the proper wires are then soldered to the metal on the inside1 or the wire may be placed inside of the shell and held in contact by driving a wood plug in as indicated4--,contributed by ,w4 ,o4 ,nettleton1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,the ,heads of the ,cartridge ,shells ,make ,good ,contacts for a ,switch ,lever ,a ,dowel-,turning ,tool ,the owner of a wood or metal lathe can easily construct a tool that will turn dowels of any size quickly4 ,this tool1 as described by a correspondent of ,work1 ,london1 consists of a block of wood1 shaped as shown at ,a1 and a plane bit1 ,b1 attached with a wood screw4 ,the hole in the collet ,c must be of such size that it will admit the rough stock freely but also prevent it from wabbling as the stick turns4 ,the stock is chucked in the ordinary manner and the tool is run on the outer end4 ,illustration3 ,the ,tool is ,very ,similar to a ,plane and is ,used with a ,lathe for ,turning ,dowels ,to ,tie a ,hammock ,illustration ,a method not generally known to quickly and securely hitch up a hammock between two trees1 in camp or elsewhere1 is shown in the sketch4 ,each end rope is given one or more turns around a tree trunk and then tucked under1 as shown4 ,the pull on the rope will draw it tightly against the rough bark on the tree4 ,the harder the pull1 the tighter the rope binds against the tree trunk4 ,in this manner a hammock can be put up in a few moments and it is as readily taken down4--,contributed by ,bert ,morehouse1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,an ,inexpensive ,file ,envelopes make a very inexpensive as well as a neat file for papers and letters if they are arranged and fastened together so that they can be kept in one packet4 ,in making such a file procure as many envelopes as there will be headings in the file1 also a number of strips of gummed tape1 about #a-a_/b in4 long4 ,there must be twice as many of these strips as there are envelopes4 ,illustration3 ,the ,file is ,built ,up of ,envelopes ,joined ,together with ,small ,strips of ,tape ,bind the backs of two envelopes1 ,a and ,b1 together leaving a space of #a_/h in4 between the envelopes4 ,bind a third envelope1 ,c1 to ,b1 and so on4 ,the strips of tape from ,a to ,b and from ,b to ,c are on opposite sides of the envelope ,b4 ,continue binding until the required number of envelopes have been joined together4 ,assign a heading to each of the envelopes1 and the file is ready for use4 ,when completed it should appear as shown in ,d4--,contributed by ,alfred ,rice1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,window-,shade ,guides ,the annoyance of a shade that will not run true on the roller and flops in the wind coming through an open window can be overcome by using guide wires as follows3 ,illustration3 ,two ,parallel ,guide ,wires ,hold the ,stick of the ,shade in ,its ,proper ,place ,the stick in the hem on the lower edge of the shade is supplied with a screweye1 ,a1 at each end4 ,a wire is run through the screweye and fastened in a vertical position on the casing with screweyes as shown by ,b1 ,b4 ,a second wire is similarly attached on the other side of the shade1 taking care to have both wires parallel and true with the ends of the roller4--,contributed by ,george ,lue1 ,san ,francisco1 ,california4 ,watering ,plants at the ,roots ,an effective way to water rose bushes1 shrubs or plants is to place an old cowhorn in the earth so that the small end will be near the roots of the plant and the large end level with the surface of the ground1 and fill the horn with water4 ,the small end of the horn should be cut off at such a point that the hole will be about the size of a lead pencil4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,l4 ,richards1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,how to ,clean ,jewelry ,to cleanse articles of silver1 gold1 bronze and brass use a saturated solution of cyanide of potassium4 ,to clean small articles1 dip each one into the solution and rinse immediately in hot water2 then dry and polish with a linen cloth4 ,larger articles are cleaned by rubbing the surface with a small tuft of cotton saturated in the solution4 ,as cyanide of potassium is a deadly poison1 care must be taken not to have it touch any sore spot on the flesh4--,contributed by ,g4 ,a4 ,koerbis1 ,u4 ,s4 ,s4 ,vermont4 ,runner for a ,go-,cart ,as the wheels of a go-cart do not push through the snow very easily and the cart1 therefore1 does not run in a straight direction1 and as ,i did not care to purchase a sled1 ,i instead fitted the go-cart wheels with runners as shown in the sketch4 ,i purchased a piece of machine steel of a diameter to fit the grooves in the wheels after the rubber tires were removed4 ,this ,i cut and bent to the shape shown at ,a1 making two runners1 and applied one to each pair of wheels1 front and rear1 as shown at ,b4 ,the runners kept the wheels immovable and caused the cart to glide over the snow as a sleigh4 ,this runner will not interfere with the folding of a collapsible cart4--,contributed by ,roy ,b4 ,hanaford1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,illustration3 ,the ,runners are ,easily ,applied to the ,wheels of a ,go-,cart and ,hold ,them ,solidly ,a ,ring-,throwing ,game ,the board for this game is made of a cover from an old candy or lard pail1 washed and painted black4 ,when the paint is dry1 place #ej pegs on the surface as shown and number them with white paint or by fastening numbers cut from paper below them4 ,the numbering of the pegs is not consecutive1 but low and high numbers distributed with the object in view of making it difficult to secure a high score4 ,each player has a set of five rings1 which are nothing else but rubber fruit-jar rings4 ,these can be purchased at a grocery store4 ,the board is hung on a wall or post1 and the player stands about #e or #f ft4 away and throws the rings1 one at a time1 trying to ring pegs having the highest numbers4 ,the sum of the numbers corresponding to the pegs ringed counts toward the final score4 ,turns are taken by each player1 and each time five rings are thrown4 ,the score can be set at any amount1 #ejj being about right4--,contributed by ,francis ,p4 ,hobart1 ,willoughby1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,the ,candy-,pail ,cover with ,pegs ,numbered and a ,set of ,rings for ,each ,player ,a ,pen and ,brush ,holder ,a sheet of corrugated paper is a handy thing to have on the writing desk1 for the purpose of placing wet pens or brushes in its grooves4 ,the paper absorbs the liquid1 and the corrugations hold the pens or brushes in handy positions4 ,a sheet of this paper is almost as useful a desk accessory as a blotter4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,depressions in the ,paper ,hold the ,pens or ,brushes and ,also ,absorb the ,excess ,fluid ,supporter for a ,double ,clothesline ,illustration ,a double clothesline of any length should have a supporter in the center to keep the line from sagging when the clothes are hung on the lower one4 ,the supporter shown in the sketch saves the wear from the strain on the lines4 ,it also keeps the clothes in a higher current of air so that they dry quicker4 ,the supporter is made of two nickelplated rings measuring #b in4 in diameter4 ,they are bound together as shown4 ,the rings being nickelplated1 the supporter will not rust the clothes4 ,the clothes should be arranged on the lower line so that the supporter will rest in the center4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,new ,york4 ,pincushion for the ,arm ,those that have trouble in keeping the pincushion within reach while sewing1 can remedy the trouble by making one to fit the wrist or arm4 ,an ordinary pincushion is attached to a piece of cardboard and an elastic sewed to the cardboard edges so that it will fit on the arm4 ,the pincushion is not in the way and is readily worn so that the pins are easier to reach than if pinned to the dress4--,contributed by ,frank ,sterrett1 ,portland1 ,o4 ,electric ,test for ,fixtures ,a very useful device for testing out fixtures before they are connected up can be easily made as follows3 ,two wires are run from a plug1 ,a1 one to a socket1 ,b1 and the other to terminate at ,c4 ,the line from the other side of the socket ,b terminates at ,d4 ,in testing a fixture1 the plug ,a is turned into a socket of some source of current1 and a lamp is turned into the socket ,b4 ,the terminal ,c is held to the metal covering of the fixture1 while the end ,d is held to one of the wires4 ,if there is a leak of current1 the lamp at ,b and those of the fixture will light up4--,contributed by ,fred ,schumacher1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,one ,line of the ,two ,connecting ,wires is ,broken and the ,ends ,used as ,terminals on the ,fixture ,opening for ,steam in a ,utensil ,cover ,when cooking certain foods the ordinary cover on a vessel confines too much steam1 while if no cover at all is used1 too much will escape1 hence a cover which is provided with a vent is very desirable4 ,the cover attachment shown in the illustration is evidently well adapted for service on such occasions and can be easily made as follows3 ,illustration3 ,the ,small ,triangular ,surface ,provided with ,holes for ,releasing ,surplus ,steam is ,covered with a ,cap ,lay out a small triangle on some level part of the cover and punch several holes inside of the lines4 ,cut a cap1 ,a1 from a piece of tin to cover the holes4 ,a small projection on the edge of the cap serves to swing it one way or the other1 as needed1 and it is fastened loosely to the cover with a soft-copper rivet1 so that it may be easily opened4 ,drying ,seeds ,a good way to dry tomato1 cantaloupe1 and other seeds is to put them on blotters4 ,they will quickly dry in this manner and will not become moldy1 as the blotter soaks up the moisture4--,contributed by ,theodore ,becker1 ,kansas ,city1 ,mo4 ,cleaning ,clothes by ,boiling ,them ,when cleaning clothes by boiling them in a boiler over a fire1 fit in a false bottom to keep the clothes from touching the bottom4 ,the false bottom should be perforated with holes1 #c_/h-;in4 in diameter and #a in4 apart1 over the entire piece4 ,fasten four legs1 each about #b in4 long1 to the under side to make a space between the bottoms4 ,in washing1 all that is necessary is to place the clothes in the boiler and boil them4 ,the dirt will come loose and settle through the holes and on the boiler bottom4 ,an ,emergency ,tack ,puller ,one day ,i had to pull some tacks but had no tack puller at hand4 ,an idea came to me to use the kitchen spoon1 and ,i found that it worked even better than a regular tack puller4 ,the ordinary kitchen spoon usually has an edge sharp enough to get under any tack4--,contributed by ,h4 ,d4 ,harkins1 ,st4 ,louis1 ,mo4 ,illustration3 ,the ,point of a ,spoon will ,easily ,pull a ,tack from ,soft ,wood ,a ,puzzle with ,figures ,this puzzle is to arrange all the figures or digits1 from #a to #i inclusively1 in two rows1 each containing all the digits1 so that the sum in addition as well as the remainder in subtraction will have nine figures1 in which all the digits are represented4 ,there are several solutions to the puzzle1 and the following is one of them3 #cgabidefh #bafcighde ,the sum of the foregoing numbers and the remainder1 when the lower row is subtracted from the upper1 will both have nine figures and include all the digits from #a to #i4--;,contributed by ,walter ,bennett1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,to ,fasten ,loose ,table ,legs ,when legs of an ordinary table become loose and unsteady they may be easily repaired as shown in the sketch4 ,nails do not hold well in such places and glue will not stand much washing4 ,illustration3 ,a ,piece of ,wire ,bent around the ,leg of a ,table will ,make ,it ,rigid ,the method of making the repair is to drill #a_/h-;in4 holes through the rails on each side of the leg and insert pieces of galvanized wire of a size to fit the holes4 ,after the wire is inserted1 the ends are bent over4 ,the illustration clearly shows the repair4--,contributed by ,edwin ,c4 ,wright1 ,newport1 ,ky4 ,washbasin ,holder ,illustration ,a piece of wire formed into the shape shown in the sketch makes a handy hook to hold a washbasin when it is not in use4 ,this keeps it out of the way and out of the dirty water which might be thrown into the kitchen sink4--,contributed by ,f4 ,c4 ,althen1 ,anamosa1 ,iowa4 ,a ,cleaner for ,canvas ,shoes ,one of the most economical cleansers for canvas shoes is oxide of zinc4 ,mix a small quantity of the powder with water1 to the consistency of thin paste1 and apply it to the canvas with an old toothbrush1 rubbing it in thoroughly4 ,then set the shoes aside to dry before wearing them4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a good substitute currycomb can be made of corncobs tied together tightly4 ,ruling ,blank ,books ,a special ruling for a blank book can be drawn by using a thin piece of sheet metal or cardboard1 cut as shown in ,fig4 #a1 for a template4 ,the pencil is drawn along one edge of the cutout so that it will make lines as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,a ,template ,having ,slots ,cut for ,drawing ,special ,vertical and ,horizontal ,lines on ,pages 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,if horizontal lines are required1 cut notches on the edge for the location of each line as shown4 ,when the vertical lines are drawn1 these notches will mark the places for the horizontal lines4 ,how to ,demagnetize a ,watch ,quite often the attendants or a visitor to an electric-light plant discovers after a few days that his watch is losing a half hour or more a day by having become magnetized by the dynamos4 ,in stations where the old types of machines are still in use there is a great deal more danger from what is called stray magnetic fields than in those where modern machines are installed4 ,the jeweler demagnetizes a watch in the following way3 ,he has a piece of soft iron with an opening cut in its center of such shape and size as to receive the watch1 and with a fine wire wound about it4 ,after the watch has been placed in position1 an alternating current1 that is1 one whose direction is changing at regular intervals1 is sent through the winding1 and thus a magnetic field is produced that also changes in direction as the current reverses4 ,the current is gradually reduced in value and the magnetism originally possessed by the watch is removed4 ,when an alternating current is not available1 a direct current may be used1 its direction being rapidly reversed by what is known as a polarity changer4 ,anyone can demagnetize his own watch1 however1 with very little trouble and no expense by a much simpler method4 ,procure a piece of heavy linen thread about #c ft4 long1 attach one end of it to the ring of the watch1 hold the other end and turn the watch around until the thread is twisted at least one hundred times4 ,now allow the thread to unwind1 and as the watch revolves1 pass it back and forth near a powerful electromagnet4 ,the field magnet of a good-sized generator or motor will answer4 ,the machine should be in operation1 or at least there should be a current in the windings about the fields1 when you attempt to demagnetize the watch4 ,while the thread is unwinding1 and the watch moved in the magnetic field1 gradually withdraw from the magnet so that when the watch ceases to revolve1 it is just outside of the field4 ,always be sure to keep the watch revolving while it is in the magnetic field1 otherwise the results will be very unsatisfactory1 and more harm than good may result4 ,a ,pencil ,holder ,procure a piece of paper1 #g in4 long and #d in4 wide1 and roll it one time around a lead pencil1 then coat the remaining surface of the paper with glue4 ,roll this around the pencil and a tube is formed1 which will hold a pencil or even pieces of pencil down to #a_/b in4 in length4--,contributed by ,w4 ,d4 ,brooks1 ,paterson1 ,n4 ,j4 ,illustration3 ,a ,stub of a ,pencil can be ,easily ,held in the ,tube for ,writing ,a ,poultry-,food ,chopper ,the illustration shows a handy device for cutting roots for food1 and for chopping and mixing stale bread1 potatoes1 peelings1 refuse fruit1 etc41 for poultry4 ,any blacksmith can make the chopper at little cost4 ,for the cutting blades use two pieces of steel a little heavier than oil-barrel hoops1 each #a-a_/b in4 wide and #h in4 long4 ,procure a #a_/b-;in4 iron rod1 about #c ft4 long1 bend one end in the shape of a spade handle and split the other end for a distance of about #b-a_/b in4 ,illustration3 ,the ,chopper ,consists of a ,rod ,handle to ,which ,blades are ,attached by ,riveting or ,welding ,sharpen one edge of each blade and curve the metal slightly4 ,lay the two blades together with the convex sides touching in the center and insert them in the slit in the handle end4 ,they are riveted or welded in place4 ,heat and bend the blades at right angles4 ,many of the materials mentioned for poultry foods may be chopped in an ordinary pail having a strong bottom1 but it is best to make a box1 about #a-a_/b ft4 square and with a plank bottom1 for use with the chopper4 ,a ,small ,spring ,hinge ,box covers or small doors that are seldom used can be supplied with a small spring hinge as shown in the illustration4 ,the hinge is made of a piece of spring wire which is formed similar to a staple with a coil or complete turn given to the wire in the center4 ,it is attached by driving the points1 one into the door and the other into the casing4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,hinge1 and the ,manner of ,attaching ,it to a ,cover or ,door ,shoestring ,end ,when the tips slip from shoelaces1 new ones may be readily made of fine wire4 ,the wire is run through the end of the lace1 ,fig4 #a1 and the two ends are twisted tightly together as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,this covers the end of the lace and makes1 a tip that is easily passed through the eyelets4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wire ,prevents the ,lace from ,raveling and ,makes a ,tip for ,easily ,entering the ,eyelets 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,threads on ,wood ,shafts ,in model making it is quite necessary at times to have threads on a wood shaft4 ,these can be made quite satisfactorily by coiling a wire around the shaft where the threads are wanted1 and driving the ends into the wood4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wire ,forms a ,thread ,that in ,many ,instances is ,quite ,serviceable for ,model ,making ,a ,glass ,breaker ,after cutting glass1 and especially where a small strip is to be removed1 the part must be broken away in small pieces4 ,the accompanying sketch shows a very useful tool for this purpose4 ,the tool is made of a piece of metal having a bolt fastened to it at one end whose nut can be adjusted to the thickness of the glass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,nut is ,set to the ,thickness of the ,glass and ,used to ,break ,pieces ,away 99 99 99 99 99 ,old discarded blueprints can be made white and used for sketching by dipping them in a solution of soda and water1 in the proportions of #d oz4 of soda to each gallon of water4 ,wood ,postal ,cards ,the card consists of three pieces1 or three-ply1 veneer4 ,the grain of the outside veneer runs lengthwise1 while that of the inside piece runs crosswise4 ,this makes the card straight and keeps it from breaking4 ,for the inner section1 walnut1 which may be had as thin as #a_/fd in41 or any thin straight-grained veneer may be used4 ,two pieces of veneer1 about #c-c_/d in4 wide and #f in4 long2 one piece1 #f in4 wide and #c-c_/d in4 long1--the length being with the grain of the wood--and two blocks of wood1 known as cauls1 of the same size or a little larger1 and about #g_/h in4 thick1 are required4 ,the veneer is laid flat on a board and cut with a sharp knife or fine saw along the edge of a ruler4 ,the three pieces are glued together in the following manner4 ,use ordinary hot glue1 not too thin1 but thin enough to run freely from the brush4 ,the glue is applied evenly on both sides of the inner piece only1 and this is then stood on edge until the glue chills4 ,then the cauls are heated4 ,this is best done on a stove1 or on stove lids over a gas fire4 ,while the blocks are being heated1 put one veneer on either side of the middle piece1 and a piece of thin paper on each side to keep the glue from the cauls4 ,a hand screw or vise should be opened to almost the distance required4 ,one of the cauls is now laid flat1 the veneers upon it and the other caul on top4 ,this should be done quickly4 ,then clamp the whole firmly together4 ,while the full pressure is only needed for about two hours1 the pieces should be allowed to dry between the cauls for1 say1 a day or two1 so that they will keep straight4 ,the size of the finished card is #c-c_/h in4 by #e-a_/b in4 ,it is cut and planed to size while lying flat on a board1 the plane being pushed along on its side on the bench top4 ,to dress or clean1 clamp one side to the bench4 ,while a scraper blade may be used to advantage1 it is not essential1 as a block of wood and sandpaper will do4 ,the thinner it is dressed the better4 ,the sharp edges should be removed with sandpaper4 ,the writing on a wood card is not done in the ordinary manner1 as the ink would run4 ,the surface must be prepared1 which also gives a finish to the wood4 ,melt some wax or paraffin in a suitable vessel and cover the surface of the wood1 using a brush or rag4 ,the lines for the address on one side are then drawn1 and the writing is done with a hard lead pencil4 ,when through writing on one side1 cover it with some strong aniline stain4 7,aniline1 dissolved in hot water1 commonly known as water stain and used especially to stain mahogany1 is the right kind47 ,do not remove the wax that was raised by the pencil point4 ,brush the stain over until the whole side is covered4 ,when dry1 repeat on the other side4 ,in about an hour the wax may be scraped off with a dull scraper or some other dull instrument4 ,after every particle of wax has been removed1 the card is given a good rubbing with a clean1 soft rag4 ,it is well to protect the hands as well as the table during the process4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,schapmeier1 ,baltimore1 ,md4 ,fastening ,screws in ,tile and ,brick ,walls ,a simple way to fasten screws in tile or brick walls is to drill holes1 not too large1 for the screws1 then tear up some paper1 wet it and make a pulp4 ,pack this pulp tightly in the hole and turn in the screws4 ,the screws will stand a great deal of strain4--,contributed by ,john ,thomas1 ,brantford1 ,ont4 ,shoe ,pull ,made of an ,eyelet ,the pulling-on strap at the back of a shoe often comes loose1 or pulls out1 and even if it does not1 the trousers will sometimes catch on it if the strap is not tucked inside of the shoe4 ,a very simple way to overcome these troubles is to remove the straps and substitute eyelets4 ,a buttonhook will then serve admirably in pulling the shoe onto the foot4 ,holder for a ,set of ,sadirons ,a very attractive holder for a set of sadirons and their handle can be made as shown in the illustration1 although the design may be changed if desired4 ,the holder consists of a shield-shaped back1 which is fastened to the wall in a convenient place and has a shelf with openings for the irons attached to it4 ,the shelf is made in two pieces1 the bottom part being covered with a heavy piece of tin while the upper is cut out to receive the irons4 ,the irons are placed on the upper piece in such positions that they will be attractively displayed and evenly located1 and then a lead-pencil mark is drawn around their base4 ,openings are cut in the wood on these marks and the board fastened on top of the tin-covered shelf4 ,an ordinary brass bracket is used in the center beneath the shelf1 to keep it from sagging4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ornamented ,bracket ,shelf for ,holding a ,complete ,set of ,sadirons and ,their ,handle ,the shield is fastened to the wall with two screws1 over which two brushed-brass1 diamond-shaped pieces are fastened with large brass tacks1 to cover the screw heads4 ,the corners of the shield may be ornamented with brushed-brass designs1 and the wood finished as desired4 ,the irons can be set in the holder while hot without fear of burning any part1 and they will present a very neat appearance4--,contributed by ,g4 ,e4 ,martin1 ,hastings1 ,nebraska4 ,a ,garden ,roller ,a garden roller for digging the earth and crushing clods is easily made of the following material3 ,one round piece of wood1 #aj in4 in diameter and #ah in4 long2 two pieces of wood1 each #ef in4 long1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #a-a_/d in4 thick2 one piece1 #ba in4 long1 #b in4 wide and #a in4 thick2 two #a_/b-;in4 lag screws1 #f in4 long1 and a quantity of #h-penny nails4 ,illustration3 ,a ,roller for ,crushing ,clods and ,digging the ,earth in ,garden ,making ,the short piece of wood is fitted between the two long pieces with tenon-and-mortise joints to serve as a handle at one end and the roller is fastened between the side pieces at the opposite end to revolve on the lag screws4 ,the nails are driven into the roller so that they project about #a in4 ,a ,substitute for ,glaziers' ,points ,ordinary small staples make good substitutes for glaziers' tacks4 ,the points of the staples should be drawn apart slightly1 as shown at ,a1 to give them a greater holding area and at the same time make them easier to drive4 ,these points seem to hold the glass better than the regular glaziers' points1 consequently the putty will not crack and loosen1 and renewing is avoided4--,contributed by ,edward ,sieja1 ,chicago4 ,illustration3 ,double-,pointed ,tacks1 or ,staples1 with the ,points ,spread1 ,used as ,substitutes for ,glaziers' ,points ,water-,heating ,coil in a ,furnace ,pipe ,illustration ,the accompanying sketch shows a plan ,i adopted for conserving the waste heat from my furnace4 ,i found that ,i was able to put a coil into the smoke pipe1 which was about #h in4 in diameter1 and thus heat water for domestic purposes4 ,it will be seen that the coil is spiral in shape rather than cylindrical1 as the latter would leave a free passage up the center and therefore would not bring enough gases into contact with the coil4 ,in addition to this coil ,i have a gas heater near the tank which is used only in case the demand for hot water exceeds the capacity of the coil1 which is naturally not as efficient per unit of length as one directly within the firepot would be4 ,it has the advantage of not absorbing heat which should go to make steam1 but only that which would otherwise be wasted4 ,the heating surface of the coil is much greater than would be possible within the firepot1 which in a measure compensates for its lower efficiency4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,morey1 ,chicago4 ,a ,homemade ,marking ,gauge ,illustration ,a #c_/h-;in4 bushing is turned into the side outlet of a #c_/h-;in4 tee4 ,the bushing is then tapped to receive a #g_/af-;in4 wing bolt4 ,a tight-fitting wood plug is driven into the throughway of the tee and the ends ground off flush on the emery wheel4 ,a slot1 #e_/af-;in4 square1 is then cut through the wood plug just under the bushing4 ,two pieces of flat steel1 each #a_/d in4 wide by #a_/h in4 thick and #a_/h in4 longer than the tee1 are fitted in the slot cut in the plug as shown in the sketch4 ,the outer end of each piece is bent at right angles and sharpened4 ,after the points have been drawn out to the right distance1 the wing bolt is turned to hold them in that position4--,contributed by ,c4 ,molloy1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,protecting ,brush ,handles from ,paint ,a very efficient method to prevent paint from running down on a paintbrush handle and on the hand is to cut a hollow rubber ball in half1 ,fig4 #a1 make a hole in the center to fit the brush handle and attach it as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,one ball will fit up two brushes4 ,the cup shape catches the paint and prevents it from getting on the handle4--,contributed by ,o4 ,h4 ,meyer1 ,churdon1 ,iowa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,ball ,forms a ,cup to ,catch the ,paint from the ,brush 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a ,tie-,pin ,holder ,illustration ,having lost several tie pins by theft or by their falling out ,i made a little device to securely hold the pin in the tie4 ,this device makes it almost impossible to pull the pin out and it cannot be lost accidentally4 ,the device is made of a small safety pin1 bent as shown1 with one arm1 ,a1 longer than the other1 ,b4 ,the arm ,a is put on the pin first or upward1 and attached as shown at ,c4 ,when pulling on the tie pin the arms of the holder tend to draw together and clamp it on the pin4--,contributed by ,robert ,c4 ,knox1 ,colorado ,springs1 ,colo4 ,hulling ,walnuts ,when gathering my winter supply of walnuts1 ,i found that they could not be hulled readily by hand4 ,not knowing of any machine designed for the purpose1 ,i tried running them through a corn sheller and found it to do the work nicely4 ,the sheller not only hulled them1 but separated the nuts from the hulls1 the nuts being carried out through the cob opening and the hulls dropping through the grain spout4--,contributed by ,irl ,r4 ,hicks1 ,hallsville1 ,mo4 ,how to ,make a ,small ,vise ,screw ,procure an ordinary lag screw1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 cut off the pointed end and file the threads into the shape shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,a hole is drilled through the head and a handle put in1 as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,this makes a good substitute screw when the original screw for a small vise is broken4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown4 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,a ,vise ,screw ,formed of an ,ordinary ,lag ,screw1 the ,threads being ,made ,square and a ,handle ,attached 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a ,medicine-,spoon ,holder ,when a dropper is not at hand it is difficult to drop medicine in a spoon while holding it1 and the shape of the spoon will not permit its being set down4 ,a shoe horn used as shown in the sketch will hold the spoon right side up and in a position to hold the liquid4--,contributed by ,maurice ,baudier1 ,new ,orleans1 ,la4 ,illustration3 ,a ,shoe ,horn is the ,right ,shape to ,hold the ,spoon ,right ,side ,up and ,level ,knife ,holder on a ,frying ,pan ,instead of laying a knife on the stove or carrying it to a table or elsewhere while frying anything in a pan1 make a clip to fit the edge of the pan for holding the knife when it is not in use4 ,the clip is easily made of brass wire and when attached to a frying pan it will save many steps4--,contributed by ,john ,c4 ,harlacker1 ,jr41 ,cumberland1 ,b4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shape of the ,clip and ,manner of ,attaching ,it to a ,frying ,pan ,a ,broom for ,sweeping ,out ,corners in ,steps ,illustration ,sweeping the corners of steps is one of the greatest difficulties of the housewife1 or others who have a number of stairs to sweep4 ,i have made this task easy in a very simple manner4 ,i secured a used broom1 the longer and newer the better1 and cut the straws off diagonally across the sweeping edge4 ,the pointed part will easily clean out the corners in steps or in a room4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,stamaman1 ,berlin1 ,ontario4 ,removing a ,cork from a ,bottle ,a cork that has been pushed into a bottle accidentally or otherwise can be easily removed in the following manner3 ,tie several knots in one end of a string to form a large cluster and drop it into the bottle1 holding on to the other end of the string4 ,turn the bottle over so that the cork will fall to the opening in the neck1 then pull on the string4 ,the cluster formed by the knots at the end of the string will easily draw out the cork4--,contributed by ,frank ,hart1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,filing ,flat ,surfaces ,anyone who has used a file knows what skill is required to produce flat surfaces4 ,a fixture which is nothing more than a mirror properly placed enables the operator to sight along the file and see at all times just how the file is running4--,contributed by ,a4 ,f4 ,stearns1 ,madison1 ,wis4 ,illustration3 ,the ,file can be ,seen in the ,mirror and ,its ,direction ,controlled for ,filing ,flat ,surfaces ,tacking a ,screen on a ,frame ,illustration ,screen wire is very difficult material to fasten on a frame so that it becomes taut4 ,to make it taut and even drive the tacks as follows3 ,first tack the screen on one side of the frame1 taking care to leave no slack between the tacks1 which should be about #a ft4 apart4 ,fasten the opposite side by stretching the screen with one hand and with the other place the tack through the meshes and push the point as far as possible toward the outer edge of the screen frame as shown in the sketch4 ,drive the tack so that it will enter the wood straight1 which will draw the screen taut4 ,after having thus fastened the screen to two opposite sides of the frame with tacks #a ft4 apart1 other tacks are driven in midway between the first ones1 stretching the screen and driving the tacks as before described1 until a sufficient number of tacks are driven into either side4 ,then both ends are attached in the same manner4--,contributed by ,bertram ,s4 ,barnes1 ,santa ,barbara1 ,cal4 ,safety ,tips on ,chair ,rockers ,some rocking chairs are so constructed that when the person occupying it gives a hard tilt backward1 the chair tips over or dangerously near it4 ,a rubber-tipped screw turned into the under side of each rocker1 near the rear end1 will prevent the chair from tipping too far back4 ,portable and ,folding ,bookcase or ,closet ,two packing boxes hinged as shown and fitted with casters make a very convenient portable closet4 ,it can be folded flat against a wall or fitted into a corner4 ,if furnished with shelves1 it can be used as a bookcase or tool closet1 and when fully opened1 it makes a handy workbench4 ,two projecting strips are fitted on the inside of one box so as to fit tightly against the inner top and bottom surfaces of the other box1 to increase the rigidity of the box when closed4 ,the addition of casters makes the opening1 closing and pushing about very easy4 ,an ornamental hasp or lock can be fitted if desired4 ,illustration3 ,the ,two ,boxes are ,joined on ,one ,edge with ,hinges and with a ,hasp1 if ,desired1 on the ,other ,a ,curtain ,stop ,a small screweye turned into the bottom part or wood strip inclosed in the lower end of the curtain will prevent this end from winding over the top roller when the curtain is quickly released and rolls to the top4--,contributed by ,d4 ,o4 ,c4 ,kersten1 ,detroit1 ,michigan4 ,an ,alarm for a ,sleepwalker ,a little girl in our family would walk in her sleep and it caused us no little worry lest she might leave the house without our knowing it4 ,i therefore rigged up an alarm device to ring a bell should she leave the room4 ,the device consisted of a bell and battery in a circuit1 and a switch which was attached to one door casing4 ,a string was stretched across the doorway and attached to the switch lever in such a manner as to pull it closed when the string was pushed through the doorway opening4--,contributed by ,j4 ,woodburn1 ,toronto1 ,canada4 ,a ,kraut and ,root ,grinder ,the grinder is intended mainly for chopping cabbage when making sauerkraut1 but it is also of much service in grinding vegetables and roots to be cooked for poultry4 ,illustration3 ,the ,grinder will ,easily ,reduce ,cabbage ,heads to ,bits ,suitable for ,sauerkraut ,the base ,a is made of a plank1 at least #a ft4 wide and #d ft4 long1 with a #i-a_/d by #i-a_/b-;in4 hole cut in the center4 ,the grinding part1 or cylinder1 is made of wood1 #c in4 in diameter and #i in4 long1 with #h-penny nails1 spaced #c_/af in4 apart1 driven partly into it and then cut off so as to leave #a_/d in4 projecting4 ,the cylinder is turned by means of a crank attached to the end of the shaft4 ,a hopper1 ,b1 is constructed1 #d by #i-a_/b in4 inside measurement at the bottom1 and as large as necessary at the top4 ,a space is provided at the bottom as shown to receive the concave ,c1 which consists of a #a-;in4 board1 #c to #d in4 wide and #i in4 long1 with nails driven in and cut off as described for the cylinder4 ,the hopper is securely fastened on top of the baseboard and over the cylinder4 ,the concave is slipped into place and held with wedges or by driving two nails in just far enough to fasten it temporarily4 ,the concave can be adjusted for grinding the different vegetable products1 or replaced at any time with a new one4 ,the ends of the base are supported on boxes1 or legs may be provided if desired4 ,when grinding cabbage1 cut the heads into quarters and remove the hearts4 ,press the cabbage on the cylinder and turn the crank4 ,fine bits of cabbage1 suitable for sauerkraut1 will be the result4--,contributed by ,j4 ,g4 ,allshouse1 ,avonmore1 ,pa4 ,opening for ,air at the ,top of a ,shade ,procure an extra long shade and cut two openings in the end to be used at the top4 ,the openings may be cut square or ornamental as desired1 leaving a strip at each side and one in the center4 ,these strips are reinforced by gluing on some of the same material as the shade or pieces of tape4 ,illustration3 ,when the ,shade is ,pulled ,down the ,openings ,coincide with the ,opening over the ,upper ,sash ,a shade made in this manner permits the air to enter the room unhindered when the top sash is lowered and at the same time obstructs the view of passers-by4--,contributed by ,warren ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,hose ,attachment for ,watering ,window ,plants ,the window garden of the house has its watering difficulties which one owner overcame in a neat and handy manner4 ,a hose on a weighted reel was attached to the joists in the basement under the floor near the window flower pots4 ,the weight on the reel kept the hose wound on it and the nozzle end which projects through the floor is large enough to hold it from passing through the hole bored for the hose4 ,a long stem valve was provided with the wheel attached above the floor for turning the water on and off4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hose is ,automatically ,run on a ,reel by a ,weight beneath the ,floor ,when the plants need a shower all that is necessary is to draw the hose nozzle up and turn on the water4 ,the hole for the hose and the valve wheel can be located close to the wall under the flower tray where they will scarcely be seen4 ,removing ,paint from ,glass ,paint may be easily cleaned from glass by using a #ej-per-cent solution of acetic acid4 ,the acid should be heated and applied with a cloth4 ,the hot acid will not hurt the hands or fabrics1 nor the glass1 but should be kept from children who might drink of it4 ,the solution is made of commercial acetic acid and heated by adding hot water4 ,the acid is inexpensive and can be purchased at any local drug store4 ,to ,prevent ,baking ,ovens from ,scorching ,a good method to prevent baking ovens from scorching or burning pastry is to sprinkle a mixture of sand and salt on the bottom where the pans are placed4 ,this affords a way of radiating the heat evenly4 ,the mixture also absorbs fruit juices1 which may be spilled in the course of cooking4 ,the covering is easily changed1 which keeps the oven clean4 ,the best proportion is half salt and half sand4 ,horn ,candle ,sconce ,the person who cares for things unusual will find the candle sconce made of a cowhorn a suitable fixture for the den4 ,a well shaped and not too large cowhorn is selected1 and prepared by first partly filling it with paper1 packed in tightly1 then filling it to the top with plaster of ,paris1 in which a candle socket is formed4 ,the bracket is made of strips of metal1 formed as shown and riveted together where they touch each other1 the back piece being fastened with screws to a wall board4 ,the metal may be brass or copper and finished in nickel1 antique1 bronze1 or given a brush finish4 ,the wooden wall piece can be finished in any style desired4 ,illustration3 ,the ,cowhorn with ,bracket and ,wall ,board1 ,making an ,unusual ,candle ,sconce for the ,den 99 99 99 99 99 ,white spots on furniture can be removed by rubbing the wood with ammonia4 ,how to ,make a ,copper ,stencil for ,marking ,laundry ,a stencil suitable for marking laundry may be easily made as follows3 ,first procure a small sheet of stencil sheet copper1 about #a in4 wide and #d in4 long4 ,dip this sheet of copper in a vessel containing some melted beeswax1 so that both sides will be evenly covered with a thin coat of the wax when it cools4 ,the design--name1 monogram or figure--that is wanted in the stencil should now be drawn upon a piece of thin white paper1 the reverse side of the paper blackened with graphite1 and then laid on the stencil plate with the design in the center of the plate1 whereupon the design is lightly traced with a blunt point on the thin wax coating4 ,after the paper is removed1 trace the design on the wax surface with a pointed instrument1 but not completely1 the lines being broken at more or less regular intervals1 to form holders so that1 after etching1 the design cannot fall out4 ,next lay the stencil in a small shallow dish and pour a small quantity of fresh nitric acid over it4 ,keep the air bubbles removed from the surface by means of a piece of soft feather4 ,the design will be eaten away in a very short time1 where the wax has been removed1 and this may be readily observed by holding the stencil plate up to the light4 ,the acid should then be rinsed off with water1 and the wax removed by heating and wiping it off with a cloth4 ,the stencil may be given a final cleaning in a dish of benzine or gasoline1 which will remove any remaining wax4 ,a ,brass ,pin ,tray ,a novelty pin tray can be easily made of a piece of ,no4 #bd gauge sheet brass or copper1 #e in4 in diameter4 ,the metal is annealed and polished with fine emery cloth1 which is given a circular motion to produce a frosted effect4 ,the necessary tools are a #a-;in4 hardwood board with a #b-a_/b-;in4 hole bored in it1 and a round piece of hard wood1 #a-g_/h or #b in4 in diameter1 with the ends sawn off square4 ,illustration3 ,the ,former and ,method of ,using ,it to ,produce a ,wrinkled ,edge on the ,tray ,place the sheet metal centrally over the hole in the board and set one end of the round stick in the center of the metal4 ,drive the stick with a hammer until a recess about #a in4 deep is made in the center4 ,the edge of the metal will wrinkle up as shown in the sketch4 ,it is scarcely possible to make two trays alike1 as the edge almost invariably will buckle in a different manner4--,contributed by ,f4 ,van ,eps1 ,plainfield1 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,homemade ,exerciser ,a weight machine for exercising the muscles of the arms is easily constructed by using two screw hooks1 #e in4 long1 and two small pulleys1 #b-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,an awning pulley can be used for this purpose4 ,the hole at the top of the hanger will allow the pulley to freely turn at almost any angle4 ,a paving brick or a piece of metal can be used as a weight for each rope4--,contributed by ,sterling ,r4 ,speirs1 ,st4 ,louis1 ,mo4 ,illustration3 ,the ,yoke of the ,pulley is so ,arranged as to ,make ,it ,move in ,all ,positions on the ,hook ,a ,book ,covering ,new books can be quickly and neatly covered to keep them clean by cutting a paper large enough to cover the back and sides when the book is closed1 allowing #a in4 extra at each end to be turned over the front and back edges1 then pasting on corners cut from used envelopes4 ,the paper jacket can be slipped on or off easily when the book is opened1 and it will keep a new cover clean while the book is being handled4--,contributed by ,dr4 ,john ,a4 ,cohalan1 ,philadelphia4 ,illustration3 ,paper ,covering ,kept in ,place with ,corners ,cut from ,old ,envelopes and ,pasted on the ,paper ,a ,tilting ,inkstand ,an ink-bottle stand1 that can be tilted or adjusted so that the pen will always be filled with a sufficient quantity of ink even when little of it remains in the bottle1 as shown in the sketch1 can be easily made by the amateur4 ,the base may consist of a square piece of sheet brass1 which has soldered or riveted to its center two pieces of spring brass1 placed crosswise and bent upward so as to form clips to hold the bottle firmly4 ,the legs are made of two lengths of wire1 of sufficient stiffness1 and are shaped to form holders for lead pencils and penholders4 ,one pair of the legs may be soldered to the brass plate and the opposite side of the latter rolled over the other pair so as to allow them either to stand upright or be depressed in order to tilt the stand1 when the ink supply in the bottle gets low4 ,illustration3 ,tilting ,stand for an ,ordinary ,ink ,bottle to ,give ,access for a ,small ,supply of ,ink ,a ,ring ,trick ,the trick to be described is one of the simplest and at the same time one of the most effective1 and but little make-ready is required to perform it4 ,the magician1 while sitting in a chair1 allows his hands to be tied together behind the back of the chair4 ,a ring is placed between his lips which he claims to be able to slip on his finger without untying his hands4 ,this1 to the audience1 seems practically impossible1 but it is easily accomplished4 ,a screen is placed in front of the performer before the trick is started1 so that the audience will not see how it is done4 ,as soon as he is hidden from view1 he tilts his head forward and drops the ring in his lap4 ,he then allows the ring to drop to the seat of the chair between his legs4 ,the chair is tilted backward slightly1 and he raises himself to allow the ring to slip to the back part of the chair seat1 where he catches it in his hands and slips it on the finger4 ,any one finger may be mentioned1 as he can slip the ring as readily on one as on another4 ,use a leather-bottom chair1 if possible1 as the least noise will then be made when the ring is dropped4--,contributed by ,abner ,b4 ,shaw1 ,n4 ,dartmouth1 ,massachusetts4 ,removing ,old ,putty ,a very effective way to remove old putty from window panes or other articles is to apply a red-hot iron1 as follows3 ,the iron should be made of a broken file or cold chisel and the point heated quite hot4 ,this is run over the surface of the putty1 which will crack and fall off4 ,be careful not to let the hot iron touch the glass1 as the heat may cause the latter to break4 ,illustration ,how to ,make a ,water ,wheel ,the materials used in the construction of this water wheel are such as the average amateur mechanic may pick up or secure from a junk pile4 ,the drawings in ,fig4 #a clearly show the way the wheel is built4 ,the nozzle1 ,fig4 #b1 is made of pipe and fittings and is adjustable to concentrate the stream so as to get the full efficiency of the weight and velocity of the water4 ,the cap on the end of the nipple is drilled to receive the pin point filed on the end of the #a_/d-;in4 rod4 ,the parts of this nozzle are a #a_/b-;in4 tee1 connected to the source of water supply2 a plug1 drilled to snugly fit the #a_/d-;in4 rod1 and fitted into one end of the straight part of the tee2 and a #a_/b-;in4 nipple of sufficient length to make the dimension shown in the sketch4 ,the nipple has a long thread to receive two #a_/b-;in4 locknuts1 which clamp the nozzle to the sheet-metal covering1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,water ,wheel 7,fig4 #a7 ,the buckets1 ,fig4 #c1 are formed of some easily melted1 but not too soft metal alloy which can be cast in plaster molds4 ,they are attached with rivets to the circumference of #a_/af-;in4 thick sheet-metal disk of the diameter given in ,fig4 #a4 ,this disk is fastened to a #a_/d-;in4 shaft1 #f in4 long1 with two collars1 one on each side of the disk1 both being riveted to the disk and pinned to the shaft4 ,the bearings ,,aa are made of #c_/d-;in4 pipe1 each #b-a_/d in4 long4 ,long threads are cut on these to turn through the two #c_/d-;in4 waste nuts ,,bb1 which provides a way to adjust the buckets centrally with the stream of water1 and to take up any side motion4 ,the pipe is babbitted and drilled for oil holes4 ,the runner or wheel must be well balanced1 as the speed will be from #b1jjj to #b1ejj revolutions per minute with ordinary city pressure4 ,in balancing the wheel1 instead of adding an extra weight1 a part of the disk is filed out on one edge4 ,the inclosing sides are made of wood--cypress preferred--having the dimensions given1 and two #g_/h by #a-a_/b-;in4 pieces are attached to the bottom outside surfaces for mounting the wheel4 ,the curved part is covered with galvanized sheet metal4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the drawing shows a wheel of small diameter1 but having considerable power4 ,greater power may be obtained by increasing the size of the jet and the diameter of the wheel1 but the use of too many buckets results in decrease of power4 ,one bucket should be just entering the stream of water1 when the working bucket is at a point at right angles to the stream4 ,the water should divide equally exactly on the center of the bucket and get out of the way as soon as possible4 ,any stagnant water in the case1 or dead water in the bucket1 is detrimental to the power4 ,a free exit for the water is made at the bottom of the case1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,metal ,casing ,instead of ,wood 7,fig4 #d7 ,the construction of the case may be varied and1 instead of wood1 metal sides and frame may be used4 ,where the builder cares to make a more substantial wheel and has access to a foundry1 the metal parts can be made as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the parts are in this instance fastened together with machine screws4 ,patterns are made and taken to a foundry for the castings1 which are then machined to have close fitting joints4--,contributed by ,r4 ,h4 ,franklin1 ,unnatosa1 ,wis4 ,an ,interesting ,experiment ,take an ordinary board1 #b or #c ft4 long1 such as a bread board1 and place it on the table so that about one-third of its length will project over the edge4 ,unfold a newspaper and lay it on the table over the board as shown in the sketch4 ,anyone not familiar with the experiment would suppose the board could be knocked off by hitting it on the outer end4 ,it would appear to be easy to do1 but try it4 ,unless you are prepared to break the board you will probably not be able to knock the board off4 ,illustration3 ,striking the ,board ,the reason is that when the board is struck it forces the other end up and the newspaper along with it4 ,this causes a momentary vacuum to be formed under the paper1 and the pressure of the air above1 which is about #ae lb4 to the square inch1 prevents the board from coming up4 ,this is an entertaining trick to play at an evening party1 and also makes a simple and interesting school experiment4 ,ironing-,board ,holder ,an ironing board that had been used on two chairs was cut off square on one end and a piece of heavy sheet metal cut and bent into the shape shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the square end of the board was fitted into the socket formed by the sheet metal4 ,after attaching the socket to the wall with screws the board was easily put in place as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the brace is hinged to the under side of the board4--,contributed by ,l4 ,g4 ,swett1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,socket and ,manner of ,holding ,board 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,how to ,make a ,water ,motor ,by ,edward ,silja ,after making several different styles of water motors ,i found the one illustrated to be the most powerful as well as the simplest and most inexpensive to make4 ,it can be constructed in the following manner3 ,a disk1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 cut from sheet iron or brass1 #a_/af in4 thick and #i-c_/d in4 in diameter1 constitutes the main part of the wheel4 ,the circumference is divided into #bd equal parts1 and a depth line marked which is #h-a_/d in4 in diameter4 ,notches are cut to the depth line1 similar to the teeth of a rip saw1 one edge being on a line with the center of the wheel and the other running from the top of one tooth to the base of the preceding tooth4 ,illustration3 ,metal ,disk with a ,saw-,tooth ,circumference ,that ,constitutes the ,main ,body of the ,wheel 7,fig4 #a7 ,a #a_/d-;in4 hole is drilled in the center of the disk and the metal strengthened with a flange1 placed on each side of the disk and fastened with screws or rivets4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 steel rod is used for the shaft4 ,the cups1 or buckets1 are shaped in a die which can be cast or built up of two pieces1 as desired4 ,both of these dies are shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the one at ,a is made of two pieces riveted together4 ,illustration3 ,two ,ways of ,making the ,dies to ,shape the ,sheet-,metal ,water ,cups 7,fig4 #b7 ,if a foundry is near1 a pattern can be made for a casting1 as shown at ,b4 ,the die is used in the manner shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,a strip of galvanized metal is placed over the depressions in the die and a ball-peen hammer used to drive the metal into the die4 ,cups1 or buckets1 are thus formed which are soldered to the edge of the teeth on a line with the center of the disk1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,as there are #bd notches in the disk1 #bd cups will be necessary to fill them4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sheet ,metal is ,placed on the ,die and ,then ,hammered into ,shape 7,fig4 #c7 ,the cups are made in pairs or in two sections1 which is a better construction than the single cup4 ,the water from the nozzle first strikes the center between the cups1 then divides and produces a double force4 ,illustration3 ,the ,water ,cups are ,fastened to the ,teeth on the ,metal ,disk with ,solder 7,fig4 #d7 ,when this part of the work is finished it is well to balance the wheel1 which can be done by filing off some of the metal on the heavy side or adding a little solder to the light side4 ,this will be necessary to provide an easy-running wheel that will not cause any unnecessary wear on the bearings4 ,the housing for the wheel consists of two wood pieces1 about #c_/d-;in4 thick and cut to the shape shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,grooves are cut in one surface of each piece1 to receive the edges of a strip of galvanized metal1 as shown at ,a4 ,the grooves are cut with a specially constructed saw1 shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,it consists of a piece of wood1 #f in4 long1 #a-a_/b in4 wide and #a_/b in4 thick1 the end being cut on an arc of a circle whose diameter is #aj in4 ,a piece of a broken hacksaw blade is fastened with screws to the curved end4 ,a nail is used as a center pivot1 forming a #e-;in4 and a #e-c_/d-;in4 radius to swing the saw on in cutting the groove4 ,after inserting the strip of galvanized metal1 ,a1 ,fig4 #e1 the sides are clamped together with bolts about #c-a_/d in4 long4 ,illustration3 ,the ,housing for the ,wheel with a ,connection to ,attach the ,motor on an ,ordinary ,faucet 7,fig4 #e7 ,illustration3 ,construction of the ,saw for ,making the ,groove to ,receive the ,metal ,strip in the ,sides 7,fig4 #f7 ,a piece of pipe1 ,b1 ,fig4 #e1 having an opening #c_/h-;in4 in diameter1 is soldered onto the metal strip ,a4 ,an ordinary garden-hose coupling1 ,c1 is soldered to the end of the pipe4 ,a bearing1 ,d1 shaped as shown1 is fastened to one of the wood sides with screws1 the wheel shaft is run into it1 and the parts assembled4 ,a wheel1 either grooved or flat1 #b-a_/b or #c in4 in diameter1 is placed on the shaft4 ,the hose coupling makes it easy to connect the motor directly to the water faucet4 ,an ,application for ,small ,wounds ,pure wintergreen oil makes a good local application for all small wounds1 bites1 scratches1 abrasions1 etc4 ,there is no germ or microbe1 animal or vegetable1 dead or living1 that can withstand this oil1 and at the same time it is not injurious to living tissues4 ,a few drops gently rubbed in where there is apt to be any infection is sufficient4 ,an infection always follows the wound of a bullet or the scratch of a brass pin1 with irritation extending up the limb or part threatening tetanus or lockjaw4 ,these symptoms are manifested by spasmodic pains which shoot upward1 but are quickly subdued1 if the oil is applied along the track of the pain or infection4 ,this oil is equally effective when locally applied to tendons or ligaments which have been unduly strained4 ,an ounce of the pure oil does not cost much1 and it should be kept in every shop and household4 ,if #e or #aj per cent of olive oil is added to it1 the oil will have more body and will last longer4--,contributed by ,dr4 ,e4 ,r4 ,ellis1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,cores for ,use in ,babbitt ,metal ,it is often necessary in making things of babbitt metal to core out some of the parts4 ,a very good core is made of common salt and glue4 ,mix just enough of the glue into the salt to make a stiff paste1 which is then formed into the desired shape or molded in a core box and allowed to harden4 ,this kind of a core can be removed from the casting by soaking it in warm water1 which will dissolve the salt and leave the desired hole4--,contributed by ,h4 ,f4 ,hopkins1 ,n4 ,girard1 ,pa4 ,how to ,build a ,wind ,vane with an ,electric ,indicator ,quite often it is practically impossible to ascertain the direction of the wind by observing an ordinary wind vane on account of the necessity of locating the vane at such a height that it may give a true indication4 ,by means of the device shown in ,fig4 #b1 the position of the vane may be determined without actually looking at the vane itself and the indicating device may be located almost anywhere and independently of the position of the wind vane4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a--,the ,diagram of a ,wheatstone ,bridge ,which ,shows the ,points of ,contact ,so ,placed ,that a ,balance is ,obtained ,the principle upon which the device operates is that of the ,wheatstone bridge4 ,the position of the moving contact ,a1 ,fig4 #a1 is controlled by the wind vane4 ,this contact is made to move over a specially constructed resistance ,r1 ,fig4 #b4 ,a second movable contact1 ,b1 is controlled by the observer and moves over a second resistance1 identical with that over which the contact ,a moves4 ,these two resistances are connected so as to form the two main branches of a ,wheatstone bridge2 the points ,a and ,b are connected to the current-detecting device1 which may be a galvanometer or telephone receiver1 and current is supplied by a number of dry cells4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--,the ,weather ,vane with ,resistance ,coil1 and ,diagram of ,indicator ,which is ,identical with ,that of the ,vane ,in order to obtain a balance--that is1 no current through the receiver--the points ,a and ,b must occupy corresponding positions on their respective resistances4 ,if the two resistances over which the points ,a and ,b move are mounted in the same position with respect to the cardinal points of the compass1 then the points themselves will always be in the same position with respect to the cardinal points when a balance is obtained4 ,the arrow head on the wind vane and the point ,a are made to occupy corresponding positions1 and hence the position of the point ,b1 when no current passes through the receiver1 is an indication of the direction in which the wind vane is pointing4 ,the principal parts in the construction of the device are shown in the illustration1 and the following description of their construction may be of interest to those who contemplate building the indicator4 ,procure two pieces of #a_/af-;in4 hard rubber1 #a-a_/b in4 wide by #bd in4 long4 ,clamp these1 side by side1 between two boards and smooth down their edges and ends1 and then file small slots in the edges with the edge of a three-cornered file4 ,these slots should all be equally spaced about #c_/cb in4 apart4 ,have the pieces clamped together while filing the slots and mark one edge top and one end right so that the pieces may be mounted alike4 ,now procure a small quantity of ,no4 #bj gauge bare manganin wire4 ,fasten one end of this wire to one end of the pieces of rubber by winding it in and out through three or four small holes and then wind it around the piece1 placing the various turns in the small slots that were filed in the edges4 ,after completing the winding1 fasten the end just as the starting end was attached4 ,wind the second piece of rubber in a similar manner and make sure to have the length of the free ends in each case the same4 ,obtain a cylinder of some kind1 about #h in4 in diameter1 warm the pieces of rubber by dipping them in hot water1 bend them around the cylinder and allow them to cool4 ,a containing case1 similar to that shown in cross section in the upper portion of ,fig4 #b should now be constructed from a good quality of tin or copper4 ,the inside diameter of this case should be about #a in4 more than the outside diameter of the resistance ring ,r1 and it should be about #c in4 deep4 ,the top ,c may be made curved as shown in the illustration1 and should be fastened to the case proper by a number of small machine screws4 ,the base of this case may be made so that the whole device can be mounted on the top of a pole4 ,mount a piece of #a_/d-;in4 steel rod1 about #a_/b in4 long1 with a conical hole in one end1 in the center of the bottom of the case as shown by ,m4 ,a number of supports1 similar to the one shown1 should be made from some #a_/d-;in4 hard rubber and fastened to the sides of the case1 to support the resistance ring4 ,the dimensions of these supports should be such that the ends of the piece of rubber1 forming the ring1 are against each other when it is in place4 ,the upper edge of the ring should be about #b in4 above the bottom of the case4 ,next1 mount a piece of brass tube1 ,d1 in the exact center of the top and perpendicular to it4 ,a washer1 ,e1 may also be soldered to the top so as to aid in holding the tube4 ,procure a piece of steel rod1 ,f1 that will fit in the tube ,d and turn freely4 ,sharpen one end of this rod and mount a brass wind vane on the other end4 ,a small metal cup1 ,g1 may be soldered to a washer1 ,h1 and the whole mounted on the steel rod ,f in an inverted position as shown1 which will prevent water from getting down inside the case along the rod4 ,the cup ,g may be soldered directly to the rod4 ,make a small arm1 ,j1 of brass1 and fasten a piece of light spring1 ,k1 to one side of it1 near the outer end1 then mount the arm on the steel rod so that it is parallel to the vane and its outer end points in the same direction as the arrow on the vane4 ,the free end of the light spring on the arm ,j should be broad enough to bridge the gap between adjacent turns of wire on the resistance ring4 ,four bindings should then be mounted on the inside of the case and all insulated from it with the exception of number #a4 ,numbers #b and #c are connected to the ends of the winding and number #d is connected to number #c4 ,a second outfit should now be constructed1 identical with the one just described except that it should have a flat top with a circular scale mounted on it1 and the arm ,l should be controlled by a small handle in the center of the scale4 ,the position of the contact ,b may be indicated on the scale by a slender pointer1 attached to the handle controlling the arm ,l4 ,four leads of equal resistance should be used in connecting the two devices and the connections made as shown4 ,an ordinary buzzer placed in the battery circuit will produce an interrupted current through the bridge circuit and a balance will be obtained by adjusting the contact point ,b until a minimum hum is heard in the telephone receiver4 ,illustration ,planting ,seeds in ,egg ,shells ,when growing flower plants from seeds1 start them in halves of shells from hard-boiled eggs4 ,when the time comes to transplant them1 they can be easily removed by allowing the dirt in the shell to become hard and then breaking off the shell1 whereupon the plant is placed in the ground4 ,a pasteboard box provided with holes large enough to support the egg shells can be used to hold them1 unless egg crates are at hand4 ,two large seeds such as nasturtiums and sweet peas can be planted in one shell1 and four seeds of the smaller varieties4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,locating ,drip ,pan under a ,refrigerator ,in replacing the drip pan of an ice box or refrigerator it is often necessary to bend over in locating it under the drip pipe4 ,this trouble may be done away with by fastening two strips of wood in a ,v-shape to the floor beneath the refrigerator4 ,when the pan is shoved under1 it will strike one strip and slide along until it strikes the other4 ,then the pan is sure to be under the drip pipe4--,contributed by ,lloyd ,a4 ,phelan1 ,beachmont1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,strips on ,floor under ,refrigerator ,windmill for ,light ,power ,the windmill shown in the sketch is one that will always face the wind1 and it never requires adjustment4 ,it consists of a vertical shaft1 ,a1 provided with a number of arms1 ,b1 on which are hinged square sails1 ,c4 ,these sails are preferably made of wood frames covered with canvas4 ,they are provided with hinges1 ,d1 attached to the ends of the arms in such a way that they offer resistance to the wind on one side of the wheel1 while they move edgewise against the wind on the other side1 as shown4 ,the shaft of the mill can either be run in bearings set on an upright post1 the lower end of the shaft turning on a conical bearing1 or collars may be used on the bearings to keep it in position4 ,the power can be transmitted with gears or by a flat belt over a pulley4 ,illustration3 ,frames ,hinged to the ,arms ,a wheel of this kind is not adapted for high speed1 but direct-connected to a pump or other slow-working machinery will prove very efficient4--,contributed by ,edward ,hanson1 ,kane1 ,pennsylvania4 ,a ,small ,bunsen ,burner ,illustration ,an excellent bunsen burner for small work can be made as follows3 ,draw a glass tube to the shape shown1 to produce a fine hollow point4 ,mark carefully with a file and break at ,a and then at ,b4 ,bore or burn a hole in a cork to fit the tube4 ,cut a ,v-shaped notch in the side of the cork extending to the hole4 ,bend the lower tube at right angles and insert it in a wood block1 previously slotted with a saw to make a snug fit4 ,a little glue will hold the glass tubes1 cork and base together4 ,the air mixture can be adjusted by sliding the upper tube before the glue sets4 ,the burner is especially adapted to continuous work1 such as sealing packages1 etc4 ,the flame will not discolor the wax4--,contributed by ,e4 ,p4 ,fert1 ,spokane1 ,wash4 ,the ,hindoo ,sand ,trick ,this is one of the many tricks for which the ,hindoos are famous1 and was long kept a secret by them4 ,it consists of placing ordinary sand in a basin full of water1 stirring the water and taking out the sand in handfuls perfectly dry4 ,it need scarcely be said that without previous preparation1 it is impossible to do so4 ,take #b lb4 of fine silver sand1 place it in a frying pan and heat well over a clear fire4 ,when the sand is thoroughly heated1 place a small piece of grease or wax--the composition of a paraffin candle preferred--in the sand1 stirring it well to get it thoroughly mixed1 then allow the sand to cool4 ,when this sand is placed in a basin of water1 it will be apparently dry when taken out4 ,it is very important that only a small portion of the adherent be used so that it cannot be detected when the sand is examined by the audience4 ,the explanation is that the grease or wax coating on each sand particle repels the water4--,contributed by ,mighty ,oaks1 ,oshkosh1 ,wis4 ,a ,kite-,line ,cutaway for ,toy ,parachutes ,the cutaway is made of a small piece of board1 a cigar-box lid1 an old yardstick or a piece of lath1 which should be about #f in4 long4 ,common carpet wire staples are used to hold it on the string4 ,the under side has a wire bent into such a shape as to form a loop at the forward end over the kite string1 then running back through the two staples at the one side and through two staples at the other side4 ,illustration3 ,wires ,attached to the ,traveler ,the parachute should have a small wire ring fastened at the weight end so as to fasten in the carrier1 and should be put between the two staples that are closest together on the under side of the carrier4 ,a small nail or button--anything larger than the loop in the wire--should be attached to the kite string a few feet from the kite4 ,when the parachute is carried up the kite string1 the knob on the string will strike the loop of the wire on the carrier1 which releases the parachute and allows it to drop4 ,the carrier will return of its own weight to the lower end of the string4--,contributed by ,i4 ,o4 ,lansing1 ,lincoln1 ,neb4 ,a ,cherry ,pitter ,procure an ordinary quill feather and cut the tip off to form a small hole4 ,do not remove so much of the end that the cherry stone can stick in it4 ,the hole must be slightly smaller than the cherry stone4 ,push the quill through the center of the cherry and the stone will come out easily4--,contributed by ,harold ,wynning1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,to ,hold a ,fish while ,removing the ,scales ,insert a screwdriver or ice pick in a fish as shown1 and the scales can be removed much better and quicker than in any other way4 ,the handle of the screwdriver affords an efficient grip so that the fish can be held firmly on the board and every scale can be removed4 ,illustration3 ,holding ,fish for ,scaling ,carrying ,stone ,jars ,the handholds on stone jars are usually not large enough to carry the jars safely when they are full4 ,if the handles of an old galvanized tub are riveted to a leather strap long enough to reach under the bottom and almost to the top on each side1 the jar can be handled without danger of being dropped4 ,the fingers are placed in the handles to carry the weight1 while the thumbs are used to keep the jar from tipping4 ,by placing a buckle near one end1 the strap may be used for carrying a jar of any size4--,contributed by ,c4 ,h4 ,floyd1 ,elwood1 ,ind4 ,vibrator for a ,spark ,coil ,if you do not have the time to make a vibrator or electrolytic interrupter for a spark coil1 a common electric door-bell makes a good substitute4 ,connect one of the primary wires to the binding-post of the bell that is not insulated from the frame1 and the other primary wire to the adjusting screw on the make-and-break contact of the bell1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the connections are made from the batteries to the bell in the usual manner4--,contributed by ,ralph ,tarshis1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,bell ,used as ,vibrator ,head ,rest for a ,chair ,while seated in a chair a person very often desires to lay the head back in resting4 ,a support for the head is lacking in the low-back rockers and ordinary chairs4 ,a detachable1 padded support can be easily made at home for placing on any low-back chair and used as a head rest4 ,illustration3 ,rest on ,chair ,back ,the support standards can be made of wood or metal as desired4 ,if metal is used1 the rest will have some springiness1 which combined with the pad will insure much greater comfort than the hard rigid back4 ,a cloth or paper is placed over the back of the chair to prevent marring of the varnish or wood4 ,lighting a ,lawn ,mower for ,use at ,night ,illustration ,those who desire to do so1 or must1 for lack of time during the day1 may use their lawn mower at night and light the front of their machine with an ordinary bicycle lamp4 ,the arm to hold the lamp can be attached with screws to the handle as shown in the sketch4 ,it is easily made from a piece of hoop or bar iron4--,contributed by ,samuel ,f4 ,reid1 ,minneapolis1 ,minn4 ,tying a ,rosette in a ,couch-,cover ,corner ,in the accompanying illustration is shown a very simple method of tying a rosette in the corner of a couch cover4 ,the use of the average couch cover as a throw-over leaves a large corner which drags upon the floor4 ,to dispose of this extra length and at the same time make an artistic corner1 the ,upholsterer suggests the following method3 ,illustration3 ,different ,stages in ,tying the ,rosette 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,spread the couch cover on the couch so that the surplus is evenly divided between the sides and ends1 and pass a pin through the cover to show each corner as in ,fig4 #a4 ,measure the distance from each corner of the couch to the floor1 ,fig4 #b1 and measuring from the point of the corner1 mark the same distance by the insertion of another pin1 repeating in all four corners4 ,the distance between the two pins at each corner now defines the amount of surplus that is to be taken up4 ,chalk a circle to include the portion between these two pins1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 and with a circular needle and stout stitching twine run a shirring thread around the circle1 and when this is drawn tightly and tied1 the surplus is formed into a rosette1 while the corner may be draped into an artistic cascade1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,driving ,screws ,illustration ,a wood screw having the threads hammered flat on two sides can be easily driven in with the flattened sides parallel to the grain of the wood4 ,when the screw is turned a quarter turn the remaining threads cross the grain and hold as well as if they had been turned in all the way4 ,this is an especial advantage where something is wanted which is easily inserted and will hold better than a nail4--,contributed by ,p4 ,d4 ,merrill1 ,chicago4 ,illustration ,a ,power ,windmill ,the windmill shown is somewhat different from the ordinary kind4 ,it is not a toy1 nor does it approach in size the ordinary farm windmill1 but is a compromise between the two1 and in a good strong wind1 will supply power enough to run a washing machine1 a small dynamo1 an emery wheel1 or any other device used in the home workshop4 ,the wheel is about #e ft4 in diameter1 with eight blades4 ,the over-all length is about #f feet4 ,the windmill is easily made and the cost is within the means of the average boy4 ,there is not a part used in its construction that cannot be found about an ordinary manual-training shop4 ,the most difficult parts of the construction will be described in detail4 ,symmetry and smoothness of design should be preserved and the parts made as light as possible consistent with strength and durability4 ,illustration3 ,the ,hub ,consists of ,two ,parts1 ,each ,having ,four ,arms for ,holding the ,blades 7,fig4 #a7 ,the ,wheel ,as shown in the drawings1 the wheel has eight blades4 ,ordinarily the use of eight blades makes it difficult to construct a hub of sufficient strength to carry them4 ,where so many blades radiate from a common center it is almost impossible to provide an anchorage for each blade4 ,to provide a maximum of strength coupled with simplicity of design1 the plan of using two hubs of four arms each was adopted in the construction of this mill4 ,the ordinary hub of four arms is simple to make and quite strong4 ,four pieces of straight-grained oak1 each #af in4 long and #a-g_/h in4 square1 are used in constructing the hubs4 ,the manner of notching each pair of pieces together is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the slope for the blades is made to run in opposite directions on the ends of each crosspiece4 ,the slope is formed by cutting out a triangular piece1 as shown4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the two hubs1 thus formed1 are mounted on the shaft1 one behind the other1 in such positions that the arms will be evenly divided for space in the wheel circle4 ,these details are shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the blades1 ,fig4 #c1 are made of thin basswood or hard maple1 and each is fastened in its place by means of two #c_/h-;in4 bolts1 in addition to which a few brads are driven in to prevent the thin blades from warping4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the ,gears ,this windmill was designed to transmit power by means of shafts and gear wheels1 rather than with cranks and reciprocating pump rods1 such as are used on ordinary farm mills4 ,to obtain this result1 an old sewing machine head was used4 ,such a part can be obtained from a junk dealer or a sewing-machine agent4 ,the head is stripped of its base plate with the shuttle gearing2 likewise the needle rod1 presser foot1 etc41 are taken from the front end of the head along with the faceplate4 ,the horizontal shaft and gear wheel are taken out and the bearings reamed out for a #a_/b-;in4 shaft1 which is substituted4 ,the shaft should be #b ft4 in length1 and #h or #aj in4 of its outer end threaded for the clamping nuts which hold the two hubs in place1 as shown at ,a and ,b1 ,fig4 #b4 ,the gear wheel is also bored out and remounted on the new shaft4 ,illustration3 ,the ,supporting ,standard ,holds the ,machine ,head with the ,wheel and the ,vane on an ,axis 7,fig4 #d7 ,the supporting standard is constructed of oak1 with mortise-and-tenon joints1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the width of the pieces will depend on the kind of sewing-machine head used4 ,it may be necessary also to slightly change the dimensions4 ,the machine head is fastened on the support with bolts4 ,a sleeve and thrust spring are mounted on the shaft1 as shown4 ,the sleeve is made of brass tubing1 of a size to fit snugly on the shaft4 ,a cotter will keep it in place4 ,the sleeve serves as a collar for the thrust spring1 which is placed between the sleeve and the standard4 ,this arrangement acts as a buffer to take up the end thrust on the shaft caused by the varying pressure of the wind on the wheel4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,the ,vane ,to keep the wheel facing the wind at all times1 a vane must be provided4 ,it is made of basswood or hard maple1 as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,it is not built up solid1 air spaces being left between the slats to reduce the wind resistance4 ,unless built in this manner1 the vane is liable to twist off in a gale4 ,the horizontal slats are #a_/d in4 thick1 and the upright and cross braces #c_/h in4 thick1 while the long arm connecting the vane to the supporting standard is #a_/b in4 thick4 ,the supporting standard1 carrying the wheel and the vane1 must revolve about a vertical axis with the changes in the wind1 and this vertical axis is supplied in the form of a piece of gas pipe which runs through the supporting standard at the points marked ,c and ,d1 ,fig4 #d4 ,ordinary pipe fittings1 called flanges1 are bolted to the frame at these points4 ,the coupling in the gas pipe beneath the supporting standard serves as a stationary collar to support the weight of the whole mill4 ,the vane should be placed correctly to balance the weight of the wheel4 ,the shaft passes through the framework of the mill on the inside of the pipe1 as shown at ,e4 ,a #c_/h-;in4 soft-steel or wrought-iron rod is satisfactory for the shaft1 as no weight is supported by it and only a twisting force is transmitted4 ,the use of a larger rod makes the mill cumbersome and unwieldy4 ,the upper end of the shaft is fastened to the shaft that projects from the under side of the machine head by means of a sleeve made of a piece of #c_/h-;in4 pipe4 ,two cotters hold the shafts and sleeve together4 ,illustration3 ,the ,lower ,end of the ,shaft has a ,horizontal ,shaft ,geared to ,it for the ,drive ,pulleys 7,fig4 #f7 ,at the lower end of the shaft1 inside the workshop1 the device shown in ,fig4 #f is installed4 ,the purpose of this appliance is to provide a horizontal shaft upon which pulleys or driving gears may be mounted4 ,the device is constructed of another sewing-machine head similar to the one already described4 ,the head is cut in two and the separate parts mounted on suitable supports4 ,the gap between the sawed portions permits a pulley to be fastened on the shaft to serve as the main drive4 ,the wheel propelled by the treadle of the sewing machine will make a good drive wheel4 ,the small handwheel1 originally mounted on the machine-head shaft1 is left intact4 ,this arrangement gives two sizes of drive wheels4 ,heavy sewing-machine belts will serve to transmit the power4 ,the ,tower ,the tower can be built up in any manner to suit the conditions4 ,ordinarily sticks1 #b in4 square1 are suitable4 ,these are well braced with wire and fastened securely to the roof of the shop4 ,the arrangement of the tower with the mill is shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,illustration3 the ,manner of ,building the ,tower on ,which the ,supporting ,standard ,revolves 7,fig4 #g7 ,telegraph ,code on ,typewriter ,keys ,a very simple and practical method of transcribing wireless time and other messages on the typewriter without having such perfect knowledge of the ,morse system as to be able to immediately translate it into the common alphabet is the following3 ,the characters of the ,morse system are inscribed on small slips of paper--thus1 three dots 744471 for the letter ,s2 two dashes 7--71 for the letter ,m1 etc4--and these slips are pasted on the corresponding keys of the typewriter4 ,the operator puts on his receiver1 and the proper key is struck as he hears the corresponding ,morse letter4 ,as there are no capitals1 spacing between words1 or even punctuation1 the manipulation of the typewriter is much simplified1 and it is easily learned to record the signals as fast as they are heard4 ,an ,aid in ,sketching ,profiles ,the means usually employed by most beginners to obtain the correct outline of an object1 such as tracing or a pantograph1 make them dependent on mechanical help rather than train the eye to form and proportion a drawing correctly4 ,the device shown not only greatly assists the beginner1 but actually trains him toward a point where he can dispense with any such device and correctly sketch by free hand4 ,it also has the effect of encouraging the beginner1 because his first efforts will not be complete failures1 as is usually the case4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fine ,wire is ,bent as ,near as ,possible to the ,outline of the ,object ,the device consists of a rather fine wire bent in the shape of a human profile and supported on a stand or base4 ,the stand may be dispensed with1 however1 and the wire held in the hand4 ,in use1 it is placed near the model or person whose profile is to be drawn2 then1 after closing one eye1 it is set at a position where it will correspond to the features of the model4 ,this enables one to note the variations between the wire and the model's features4 ,for instance1 the forehead may recede from the wire at the top1 or the nose may have a different slant or shape4 ,the paper on which the drawing is to be made should have a faint outline drawn by laying the wire upon it and marking around it with a soft pencil4 ,having noted the variations between the wire and the features1 proceed to draw the profile1 observing the same variations1 and when the sketch is completed1 erase the faint outlines4 ,then compare the drawing with the model without using the wire1 and make final corrections4 ,the dotted line indicates the outline to be erased4 ,the drawing may be made larger or smaller than the bent wire1 but the outline on the paper must be kept in exactly the same proportion4 ,it is not necessary that the wire be bent so that it represents perfect features4 ,with the use of this device one forms a habit of comparing and proportioning1 which applies to the correct sketching of all objects4--,contributed by ,will ,l4 ,burner1 ,columbus1 ,ohio4 ,a ,small ,hydroelectric-,power ,plant ,wherever a water pressure of over #cj lb4 is available a small hydroelectric-power plant will produce sufficient electric current for any light work1 such as charging storage batteries1 operating sewing and washing machines1 toys1 etc4 ,the design is for a #f-;in4 hydraulic motor of the ,pelton type1 which will operate well on almost all city-water pressures1 and at #hj lb4 will drive a #ajj-watt generator to its full output4 ,the castings may be procured from any foundry cheaply1 so that these parts need not trouble the builder4 ,the patterns can be constructed easily and are not so complicated that they will tear the molds when being removed4 ,they are made from well seasoned white pine1 #a_/d in4 thick4 ,fill in all sharp corners with small fillets4 ,all the patterns should taper slightly from the parting line4 ,illustration3 ,layout for the ,casing1 ,cover and ,wheel for the ,construction of a ,hydraulic ,motor ,that will ,drive a ,small ,dynamo1 to ,produce ,current for ,experimental ,purposes1 to ,charge ,storage ,cells or to ,run ,electric ,toys 7,fig4 #a7 ,the motor casing is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,it is made with a wide flange so that the cover plate can be bolted to it4 ,the lug ,a is to give additional strength and thickness to the side so that it may be drilled and tapped for the nozzle4 ,the legs ,b and ,c are for bolting the case to a base or support4 ,the outlet pipe is of lead1 #a-c_/d in4 outside diameter1 and the hole for it in the case can be either drilled or cored4 ,solder the pipe flush with the inside of the casing4 ,drill and tap the holes around the flange for #h1cb bolts4 ,the shaft hole must be drilled very carefully4 ,drill #a_/d-;in4 holes in the feet4 ,the oil holes are #a_/h in4 in diameter4 ,file the surface of the flange smooth and also the inside shoulder of the bearing lug4 ,drill and tap the nozzle hole for a #c_/d-;in4 pipe thread4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the cover plate is shown in ,fig4 #b1 ,this is bolted to the casing with #h1cb brass bolts1 #a_/b in4 long4 ,the holes for them are drilled #c_/af in4 in diameter4 ,a shallow hole1 for the end of the shaft to fit in1 is drilled in the lug1 as shown4 ,it does not pass all the way through the plate4 ,file the inside face of the lug smooth and also the edge of the plate where it joins the casing4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the wheel1 with brackets attached1 is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,this style of wheel need not be followed out closely4 ,bore the hub centrally for a #a_/d-;in4 shaft and fit in two setscrews4 ,drill and tap the rim for the buckets with a #a_/d-;in4 standard tap4 ,the buckets must be evenly spaced and bolted on to make the wheel balance4 ,illustration3 ,the ,best ,shape of the ,buckets to ,take ,up the ,force of the ,water 7,fig4 #d7 ,the buckets are shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,they may be cast from iron or babbitt4 ,the sharp ridge in the center provides for a deviation of the water jet as it flows on the bucket4 ,the ridge divides the bucket into two equal lobes which turn each division of the jet through almost #ahj deg41 using all the kinetic energy in the jet4 ,this is shown at ,d4 ,the dividing ridge must lie in the plane of the revolution1 so that each bucket will enter the center of the jet4 ,the buckets being evenly spaced on the periphery of the wheel1 only one at a time receives the force of the jet1 the one in front and the one behind clearing the jet4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,the nozzle is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,it can be made of iron or brass4 ,the inside gradually tapers from #c_/d to #c_/af in4 ,it has a #c_/d-;in4 pipe thread and is screwed into the hole in the case from the inside and is secured with a lock nut4 ,enough additional threaded portion is left protruding to allow the supply pipe to be connected4 ,when assembling the motor1 fasten the wheel to the shaft with the two setscrews1 and place a metal washer1 ,e1 on each side of the wheel4 ,place the wheel in the casing and screw the cover plate in place4 ,a thin rubber gasket should be placed between the cover and the casing to provide a water-tight joint4 ,illustration3 ,the ,motor as ,it is ,coupled to ,drive the ,dynamo1 and the ,water ,connections 7,fig4 #f7 ,the general arrangement of the plant is shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,the motor and dynamo are mounted on a heavy wood base1 which in turn is firmly bolted to a concrete foundation4 ,level up the two machines by the use of thin washers on the bolts between the base and machine4 ,a heavy sleeve and setscrews are used to connect the two shafts4 ,the connection to the water supply is made with #c_/d-;in4 pipe1 with a globe valve in it to regulate the flow of water4 ,any dynamo of about #ajj-watt output can be used4 ,paper ,shades for ,electric-,light ,globes ,the appearance of an electric-light globe can be very prettily improved by making a shade of crpe paper of any desired color for each one4 ,canary-colored crpe produces a soft1 mellow effect4 ,pale blue1 yellow1 red and1 in fact1 all the colors can be used1 making a very pleasing variety4 ,illustration3 ,two ,pieces of ,crpe ,paper ,stitched ,together and ,ruffled1 to ,make a ,fancy ,electric-,light ,shade ,the body of the shade is made of a piece of paper about #e-a_/b in4 wide and #c-a_/b ft4 long4 ,the width will vary with the length of the globe to be covered1 and it is best to have it full1 as the edge can be trimmed even with the lower end of the globe afterward4 ,another piece of the same color is cut #b-a_/b in4 wide and of the same length4 ,this piece makes the ruffle4 ,the smaller piece is placed on the larger centrally1 and both are stitched together with a running stitch1 using a needle and cotton thread4 ,a plain running stitch is also made #a_/d in4 from one edge of the larger strip4 ,the material is gathered along both threads4 ,this operation makes the material shrink in length4 ,wrap it around the globe1 pulling the threads taut so that the ends of the paper will just meet4 ,tie the threads and clip off the extending ends4 ,if the paper extends beyond the end of the globe1 trim it off with the shears4 ,ruffle the two edges of the narrow strip and the lower edge of the larger one4 ,this operation is simply stretching the edge of the crpe to cause it to stand out4--,contributed by ,jas4 ,a4 ,hart1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,renewing the ,markings on ,graduates ,graduates that have been in use a long time1 especially for measuring alkalies1 become unreadable4 ,the graduations are easily restored in the following manner3 ,moisten a small piece of absorbent cotton with a solution of white shellac1 cut in alcohol4 ,rub this well into all the etched parts and allow to dry for about two minutes1 then rub in a fine whiting or litharge with an old toothbrush4 ,if red is desired1 use rouge2 if black is preferred1 use lampblack or powdered graphite4 ,when dry1 wipe off the excess pigment with a cloth moistened in alcohol4--,contributed by ,a4 ,c4 ,norris1 ,rockford1 ,ill4 ,repairing a ,broken ,ball-,clasp ,purse ,illustration ,having occasion to repair a purse of the ordinary ball-clasp kind where one of the stems was broken off and lost1 ,i first had some trouble in finding a way to repair it4 ,i started to take off the remaining stem in an attempt to replace the locking device with another kind1 and in bending it down toward the opposite side1 ,i happened to close the purse and found that it locked just as well as if there had been two balls on it4 ,i have since repaired two other purses in the same manner and found that they worked well4 ,the idea is to bend the remaining clasp over until it is low enough to come in contact with and to spring over the other side1 thus giving the same snap and holding qualities as before4--,contributed by ,w4 ,c4 ,loy1 ,rochester1 ,ind4 ,automatic ,valve for a ,funnel ,illustration ,where liquid is run through a funnel into an opaque bottle or earthen jug1 the filling cannot be watched1 and if not watched constantly1 the vessel will overflow4 ,this can be obviated by applying the automatic valve to the funnel stem1 as shown4 ,a washer support is soldered or otherwise fastened in the upper end of the stem1 or at the base of the sloping part1 and a crossbar is fastened to its upper surface across the hole4 ,the crossbar is centrally drilled to receive a small rod or wire1 to which is attached a valve that will cover the hole in the washer4 ,a cork is stuck on the lower end of the rod4 ,the location of the cork on the rod should be at a point a little below the level to which the bottle or vessel is to be filled4--,contributed by ,h4 ,w4 ,hilton1 ,hopington1 ,b4 ,c4 ,chisel ,holder for ,whetting ,to obtain the proper slope and apply a fine cutting edge1 the plane iron or chisel must be held at the proper slope while grinding1 and especially so when whetting4 ,the illustration shows a holder to keep the iron or chisel at the proper slope4 ,it consists of a block of wood with a sloping cut at the right angle to make two pieces4 ,one of these pieces is permanently fastened to the strip at the back1 while the other is held with a bolt passing through a notch in the strip for adjusting or clamping4 ,the rear end of the back piece is fitted with a large screw hook or ,l-hook to provide a slide to keep the rear end of the holder at the right height4 ,the iron or chisel is inserted between the sloping edges of the blocks and clamped in place1 then the ,l-screw is adjusted for height to secure the proper angle on the stone4 ,it is then only necessary to move the block and tool back and forth over the stone4 ,illustration3 ,the ,tool ,edge is ,kept at the ,proper ,angle ,while ,it is ,run over the ,stone ,a ,large ,hole in a ,small ,piece of ,paper ,it would seem impossible to cut a hole in a piece of paper1 #b in4 wide and #c in4 long1 large enough to allow a person's body to pass through it1 but if carefully cut as shown by the lines in the sketch1 one will find with surprise that the paper can be extended so that the feat is easily accomplished4 ,make the cuts about #a_/h in4 apart and these will allow the paper to expand several times its size4--,contributed by ,h4 ,martine ,warner1 ,e4 ,orange1 ,n4 ,j4 ,illustration3 ,the ,slits ,cut in the ,paper ,allow ,it to ,expand ,several ,times the ,size of the ,original ,homemade ,bunsen ,burner ,the amateur craftsman1 at some time or other1 needs a hot flame for certain kinds of work1 and a ,bunsen or alcohol flame is brought into service4 ,the gasoline and alcohol flames have their drawbacks1 one of which is the starting of the burner and the waiting for the heat4 ,they are also unhandy in directing the flame on parts of the work4 ,as ,i desired a burner for quick work and one whose flame ,i could direct at any angle1 for repouss and chasing on copper and silversmith's work1 ,i made the one shown in the sketch to attach to a hose and connected it with the gas pipe of the illuminating system in the house4 ,it consists of a hose connection into which a piece of pipe1 #e in4 long1 is fitted4 ,the hose connection is also fitted with a small nozzle1 ,a1 for the gas1 and the pipe has an opening through it at the end of the nozzle4--,contributed by ,john ,koestner1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,bunsen-,burner ,attachment for ,use with ,illuminating ,gas ,taken from the ,house ,mains ,cane-,seat ,cleaner ,a rapid and practical method of removing stains and discolorations from the cane seats of chairs1 wickerwork1 etc41 is to use oxalic acid and powdered pumice4 ,dissolve oxalic-acid crystals in hot water and saturate a small stiff brush in it1 then dip the brush in the powdered pumice and rub the discolored cane briskly with the brush4--,contributed by ,w4 ,f4 ,jaquythe1 ,richmond1 ,california4 ,shade-,roller and ,curtain-,pole ,bracket ,the main advantage of this shade bracket is that a person can lower it for adjusting the shade or in changing curtains while standing on the floor1 thus eliminating the use of a step ladder and the danger possibly attending such use4 ,illustration3 ,the ,brackets as ,they are ,attached to a ,window ,casing for ,lowering the ,curtain ,pole 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the front elevation of a window with bracket attachment in position is shown in ,fig4 #a1 and a cross section in ,fig4 #b4 ,the position of the curtain pole when the brackets are lowered is shown by the dotted lines4 ,a detail sketch of the support end is given in ,fig4 #c and one bracket is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,illustration3 ,the ,attachments1 ,supports and ,brackets for ,holding both ,curtain ,pole and ,shade ,roller 7,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,the curtain pole ,a is fastened to the brackets ,b with #a_/d-;in4 dowel pins1 ,c4 ,these pins and the pole keep the brackets from spreading at the top1 so that a shade roller1 ,d1 may have its attachments fastened to the inner sides of the brackets4 ,a small pulley1 ,e1 is attached to the window casing above the right bracket and a double pulley is located above the left1 cords being passed through them1 down along the casing to a point within easy reach1 and fastened in any manner desired4 ,all that is necessary to change the curtains or fix a shade is to loosen the cord and allow the brackets to drop down until they may be easily reached4--,contributed by ,james ,f4 ,napier1 ,montreal1 ,can4 ,planing ,arrow ,sticks ,while making some bows one day ,i discovered ,i had no suitable dowel sticks for the arrows1 so ,i started to make them out of #a_/d-;in4 square stock4 ,i found it rather difficult to plane these pieces until ,i hit upon the scheme shown in the sketch4 ,i procured a piece of ordinary tongue-and-groove flooring and clamped it in the bench vise1 then drove a nail in the groove to act as a stop1 and in no time ,i had the sticks planed into arrows4--,contributed by ,j4 ,f4 ,culverwell1 ,washington1 ,district of ,columbia4 ,illustration3 ,planing the ,corners from ,square ,stock by ,placing ,them in the ,groove of a ,flooring ,board ,to ,clean ,shellac from a ,brush ,put the brush in a strong1 warm solution of borax and water1 and then wash in clean1 warm water4 ,if the bristles have become hard1 allow the brush to remain in the solution until soft1 keeping the solution warm in the meantime2 then wash it out in warm water4--,contributed by ,n4 ,j4 ,shattuck1 ,woburn1 ,mass4 ,lathe ,dogs ,in the absence of a full equipment of lathe dogs the amateur can make them cheaply from pieces of iron pipe4 ,one of these is shown in the sketch4 ,a section of pipe1 #a-a_/b in4 to #c in4 long1 is partly cut away1 as shown1 leaving a projection of metal #a in4 wide4 ,one or more setscrews are fitted in the round part1 and the dog is complete4 ,illustration3 ,two ,forms of ,lathe ,dogs ,that are ,quickly and ,cheaply ,constructed ,a dog1 or driver1 may also be made of two ,u-clamps and two bolts as shown4 ,this is especially useful for large work1 where the cost of a dog would be prohibitive4 ,after these two clamps are bolted on the work to be turned a bolt is attached in the faceplate that bears against the clamp1 thus turning the work4 ,to ,remove a ,splinter from the ,flesh ,quite frequently small particles of steel1 splinters1 or thorns are run into the flesh and cannot be removed with the fingers4 ,these can be readily removed in the following manner3 ,press the eye of an ordinary needle over the protruding end1 then turn the needle until the edges bind or clinch4 ,while in this position1 raise the needle and out comes the splinter4 ,illustration3 ,the ,eye of a ,needle ,slipped over a ,thorn for ,removing ,it from the ,flesh 99 99 99 99 99 ,a fine luster can be given to zinc by rubbing it with kerosene or a weak solution of sulphuric acid4 ,holders for ,displaying ,magazines ,illustration ,papers and magazines often are sold in drug stores where the display space usually is limited1 especially in the window4 ,the method used by one druggist gave space for the magazines in the window without interfering with the other goods4 ,the back of the window was arranged with rows of hooks1 three hooks for each magazine1 two at the top edges and one in the center at the bottom4 ,the magazine is easily slipped into these holders1 and the whole presents a tidy appearance4 ,the hooks are the ordinary screwhooks that can be obtained from a hardware or furniture store4--,contributed by ,t4 ,f4 ,monaghan1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,waste-,paper ,basket ,illustration ,the covering of a broken demijohn was used in the manner shown as a waste-paper basket4 ,the glass was broken out and the covering soaked in water1 after which the splints were turned down and tied with a cord4 ,this ,i found to make a first-class waste-paper basket4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,canada4 ,lettering ,photographs ,amateur photographers often write1 or print1 the names of the subjects on the mounts1 or in the albums1 with white ink or scratch it on the negative so that it will print in the picture4 ,a very good method is to take ordinary black ink and do the lettering on the sensitive paper before it is printed under the negative1 being careful not to scratch the paper4 ,after printing the paper to the proper shade the toning and fixing baths will wash away the ink and leave the lettering in white4 ,the lettering is easily accomplished and a post card can be sent with any message desired on any negative1 the inscription being printed on the paper so that the negative is unharmed for other printing4--,contributed by ,henry ,j4 ,marion1 ,pontiac1 ,mich4 ,a ,stamp ,moistener ,illustration ,a handy stamp moistener and envelope sealer can be made by procuring a small medicine bottle or glass vial and inserting a piece of felt or other wicking material in the place of the stopper1 and filling it with water4 ,this moistener will be found handy for a small office where the mail is quite heavy1 but not big enough to warrant the purchasing of a sealing machine4 ,this moistener is sanitary and replaces the wet sponge4--,contributed by ,theo4 ,j4 ,becker1 ,kansas ,city1 ,mo4 ,a ,window ,lock ,illustration ,a very neat window lock can be made of sheet steel1 #a_/b in4 wide4 ,one piece1 shaped like a saw tooth1 is fastened to the sash1 and the other1 which is bent to form a catch over the tooth projection and ends in a curved top for a finger hold1 is attached to the window casing4 ,the illustration clearly shows how the lock is attached4--,contributed by ,lee ,b4 ,green1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 99 99 99 99 99 ,georgia pine should be filled with white shellac4 ,varnished ,candles ,burn ,longer ,the heated tallow or wax of a candle runs down the sides and this results in a considerable waste4 ,this waste can be stopped by coating the new candles with white varnish and laying them aside for a few days to harden4 ,the varnish will keep the melted tallow or wax from running away and it is used in the wick4 ,guides for a ,mill ,file ,having a large number of wires to file true on the end ,i devised a way to do this with the use of some old worn-out and discarded files that had good cutting edges4 ,a piece of sheet copper1 about the same length as the files1 was bent to fit over one edge and both sides of the file1 allowing both edges to project about #a_/d in4 ,this made a guide that prevented the edge of the file from slipping off the end of the wire4 ,the guide was held in place on the file by cutting a slit in the projecting edges1 about #a_/d in4 from the end1 and turning these separated parts back on the file4 ,illustration3 ,guide for ,using the ,edge of ,worn-,out ,files on ,small ,round or ,square ,stock ,if such a guide is fitted tightly on a file1 the edges of worn-out files can be used for such work1 and the file cannot slip off and mar the sides of the work4--,contributed by ,a4 ,r4 ,drury1 ,hampton1 ,ill4 ,a ,simple ,motion-,picture ,machine ,the drum ,a is a piece of wood1 #a-c_/d in4 long and #a-c_/af in4 in diameter1 supported on the end of a round stick1 ,b1 which can be made in one piece with the drum1 if a wood lathe is at hand1 but a piece cut from a curtain pole and a lead pencil inserted in a hole bored in the end will answer the purpose4 ,be sure to have the diameter of the drum #a-c_/af inches4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts for ,making the ,revolving ,drum for ,holding the ,strip of ,pictures ,provide a base piece1 ,c1 #a_/b in4 thick and #b in4 square1 and fasten a piece of cardboard having a slit ,e1 as shown4 ,the cardboard should be #b in4 wide and #b-a_/b in4 high1 the slit being cut #a_/b in4 in width1 #a_/d in4 from the top and #c_/d in4 from the bottom4 ,a hole is bored in the center of the block to admit the standard ,b easily4 ,the next step is to provide the picture and attach it to the drum4 ,a picture of a boy pounding cobblestones is shown in the sketch1 at ,f1 which should be made on a strip of paper #d-c_/h in4 long4 ,this is glued or attached with rubber bands to the drum4 ,the drawing can be enlarged in pen and ink1 or can be reproduced as it is1 if a hand camera is at hand1 and a print used on the drum4 ,illustration3 ,the ,different ,positions of the ,picture will ,appear in ,action ,when ,turning with the ,drum ,it is only necessary to put the parts together1 grasp the base in one hand and turn the support ,b with the other1 when1 looking through the slot ,e1 the boy is seen pounding the stones4 ,various pictures can be made and the strips changed4--,contributed by ,c4 ,c4 ,fraser1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,substitute for ,cleats on ,boards ,the necessity for using more than one cleat for fastening two boards together may be done away with by using the device shown in the sketch4 ,the center cleat prevents the boards from buckling while the sides are tightly held by these simple flat fasteners4 ,the fasteners are made of tin cut as indicated1 slipped between the edges of the boards and the parts bent over and tacked4 ,where the strain is not too great the holders may be used without a cleat1 making an effective flat fastening4--,contributed by ,w4 ,o4 ,nettleton1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,the ,metal ,clips ,hold the ,edges of the ,boards ,together ,closely and ,quite ,rigidly ,attaching ,door ,knobs to ,locks ,when putting a lock on a door it is often difficult to press the two knobs together tightly enough to prevent them from rattling and still be able to insert the screw into the shank4 ,by using a piece of board1 #a in4 thick1 #f in4 wide and #a ft4 or more in length1 with a ,v-shaped piece cut out of one side1 the knobs can be easily forced and held together while the screw is inserted4--,contributed by ,h4 ,musgrave1 ,sidney1 ,british ,columbia4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sloping ,edges in the ,notch ,forces the ,knobs ,together and ,holds ,them ,while ,inserting the ,screws ,a ,finger-,nail ,buffer ,the flywheel on a sewing machine is usually turned with a semicircular face and this makes a good base on which to apply a piece of chamois skin for use in buffing nails4 ,a strip of the chamois is cut the length of the wheel's circumference and small holes pierced in its edges1 through which strings are run to hold it to the rim of the wheel4 ,the chamois can then be removed or left on the wheel as desired4 ,run the machine and hold the nail on the buffer4 ,when there is a free wheel on the machine this makes an excellent buffing device4 ,illustration3 ,a ,strip of ,chamois ,skin ,attached to the ,flywheel of a ,sewing ,machine for a ,buffer ,grinding ,chisel ,edges ,illustration ,a cold chisel ground with a rounding edge1 as shown1 will last twice as long and do better work than one that is ground straight1 because it will not wedge1 and the cutting edge1 having a better support1 will not chip off4--,contributed by ,f4 ,g4 ,marbach1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,reducing ,amperage of a ,fuse ,wire ,it is sometimes necessary to use an electrical fuse of smaller amperage than those at hand1 and for experimental work this is often the case4 ,a smaller amperage may be readily made from a larger-size wire by making a nick in it with the cutting edge of pliers1 or with a knife4 ,the illustration shows how to reduce the size of a #aj-;ampere fuse to make it five amperes4--,contributed by ,louis ,litsky1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,amperes of a ,fuse ,reduced by ,making a ,nick in the ,lead ,wire ,dip-,plating ,process ,the various ways of doing dip plating are practically the same method1 the coating fluid consisting of essentially the same materials4 ,the tank or crucible1 as it may be called1 consists of a piece of #c-;in4 gas pipe1 #i in4 long1 threaded at both ends1 one end being fitted with a screw cap and the other with a pipe flange4 ,this part is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,a piece of sheet metal is cut in the shape shown in ,fig4 #b and bent to form a cone1 so that the smaller end will fit snugly around the pipe and the base be #i in4 in diameter4 ,the joined edges are riveted together4 ,the assembled parts will appear as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the metal used for plating consists of bismuth1 #d oz42 antimony1 #d oz41 and pure block tin1 #aj lb4 ,place the antimony in the crucible and melt it1 then add the tin and bismuth4 ,a flame from an ordinary gasoline burner will be sufficient to heat the crucible4 ,clean the article to be coated by rinsing it in strong caustic potash1 which will remove all grime and grease1 then dip it in a strong solution of sal ammoniac and water4 ,dry it and then dip it in the melted metal1 allowing it to remain there about #a minute1 then remove and plunge it in a bath made of #a lb4 of sal ammoniac and #a gal4 of water4 ,the article is then dried in sawdust4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts to ,make the ,crucible ,consist of ,pipe and ,fittings and a ,piece of ,sheet ,metal 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the coating put on in this manner is a nice1 shiny plate that will stand a lot of wear4 ,no polishing or grinding is necessary4--,contributed by ,a4 ,h4 ,waychoff1 ,lyons1 ,colo4 ,a ,model ,steam-,turbine ,boat ,a piece of thin board1 or shingle1 is cut to the shape of a boat and two standards are fastened to it4 ,the standards have notches cut in them to hold an ordinary baking-powder can which is used for the boiler4 ,the lid of the can is soldered on1 and a small hole punched in one side with an awl4 ,two candles are used to heat the water4 ,illustration3 ,model ,turbine ,boat ,using a ,baking-,powder ,can for a ,boiler with ,candles as ,fuel ,the turbine is constructed on an axle made of a hatpin which runs through the top of the standards for bearings4 ,the paddles are made of cardboard1 or better still1 pieces of thin sheet tin1 cut and bent as shown at ,a1 and three of these are attached to a three-cornered block of wood fastened to the shaft1 as shown at ,b4 ,the manner of attaching the shaft for the propeller is shown at ,c4 ,the propeller consists of a piece of tin1 slightly twisted and attached to the shaft with solder4 ,the pulleys are located as shown and connected with a string band4 ,the hole made in the can should be pointed to one side of the turbine shaft so that the escaping steam will strike one side of the paddles on the turbine4--,contributed by ,mc,kinley ,wood1 ,ava1 ,n4 ,y4 ,plant ,shelf for a ,window ,an ingenious and simple method of putting up window shelves for winter plants so that the window casing and facing are not marred is shown in the sketch4 ,the materials required are one shelf1 about #h in4 wide1 #a-a_/b yd4 of picture wire1 two screweyes1 two fence staples1 and two strips of wood1 to raise the shelf slightly from the window sill4 ,the board for the shelf is cut to fit the window frame and casing4 ,the picture wire1 screweyes and staples are attached as shown4 ,when cleaning the window the shelf can be drawn out of the way4--,contributed by ,h4 ,c4 ,dixon1 ,johnstown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,shelf is ,hung on ,wires ,attached to ,screweyes ,placed in the ,facing ,edge ,a ,camera ,support ,a device which1 in many instances1 will take the place of a tripod1 can be made of a brass wood screw and can be carried in the pocket as easily as a pencil4 ,the screw should be #c or #d in4 long and #a_/d in4 in diameter4 ,cut off the head and thread the end about #a_/b in4 to fit the socket in the camera4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole through the metal just below the threaded part and insert a short piece of #a_/h-;in4 wire4 ,slip a washer over the end1 down to the wire1 and fasten it with solder4 ,illustration3 ,substitute for a ,camera ,tripod ,that can be ,carried in the ,pocket ,like a ,pencil ,the device can be turned into a tree1 post or a stick thrust into the ground1 and the camera screwed onto it and adjusted to any angle4--,contributed by ,o4 ,d4 ,turner1 ,seattle1 ,wash4 ,combination ,tool for ,amateur ,draftsmen ,a common #f-;in4 mill file can be converted into a very useful tool for an amateur draftsman4 ,grind the end of the file as shown in the sketch and use it for prying out thumbtacks that are driven in too tightly4 ,grind the base of the tang into a knife blade for sharpening pencils1 shaving chalk1 opening envelopes1 etc4 ,shape1 by careful grinding1 the part ,a for cutting and trimming sheets4 ,grind one edge of the file round and polish it for smoothing and burnishing purposes4 ,grind a sharp point on the tang for perforating sheets4 ,a piece of rubber stuck on the tang end answers the double purpose of a protector and eraser4 ,the file part is used for finishing points on pencils4 ,illustration3 ,a ,tool ,made of a ,file ,combining ,several ,tools ,which are ,used by a ,draftsman ,varnishing ,bases for ,electric ,apparatus ,it is quite difficult to keep from making finger marks on freshly varnished boards used as bases on electric devices4 ,it is easily avoided1 however1 by procuring a large spool and fastening it to the bottom of the base with a wood screw4 ,the spool will serve as a handle while the varnish is applied1 and also makes a stand for the board while the varnish dries4--,contributed by ,jacob ,laudan1 ,louisville1 ,ky4 ,waterproof ,shoe ,dressing ,melt some tallow and1 while it is hot1 put in some scraps of rubber from old rubber shoes or boots4 ,be careful to select rubber that is free from cloth4 ,put in as much of the rubber as the tallow will absorb4 ,stir freely while it is melting1 and keep it away from any flames4 ,allow it to cool and set away for future use4 ,take enough for immediate use and warm it sufficiently so that it may be applied with a brush4--,contributed by ,f4 ,s4 ,cummings1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,an ,adjustable ,bench ,stop ,a simple adjustable bench stop for light work may be made from a piece of #a-;in4 broom handle and a piece of piano wire4 ,plane a flat surface on the broom stick and drill two #a_/af-;in4 holes1 about #a_/d in4 deep1 #a_/d in4 from each end4 ,bend the ends of the wire to enter the holes and have the wire of such length as to give it a slight curve between the ends when it is in place on the stick4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spring ,wire will ,hold the ,stop at ,any ,desired ,position for ,height ,bore a #a-;in4 hole through the bench top where it is desired to use the stop and cut several grooves1 as shown1 in the walls of the hole with a compass saw4 ,the spring wire will slide into a groove and hold the stick wherever it is set4 ,the position of the face can be changed by inserting the stick so that the wire will enter the right groove4--,contributed by ,alan ,h4 ,andrews1 ,fall ,river1 ,mass4 ,a ,crochet ,hook ,in making some kinds of lace work different-sized hooks must be used as the work proceeds4 ,considerable time will be lost in changing from one hook to another1 if they are separate4 ,the best way is to mount all the hooks necessary on one handle1 as shown in the sketch4 ,the handle part is made of a large wire or small rod1 bent to the shape shown and with holes drilled through the ends for a small rivet4 ,the ends of the hooks are drilled or bent to fit on the rivet4 ,a small tin ferrule is made to slip over the handle and the hooks not in use4 ,all hooks but the one in use are turned back into the handle and the ferrule slipped into place4--,contributed by ,miss ,nita ,s4 ,ingle1 ,w4 ,toledo1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,a ,crochet-,hook ,handle for ,holding ,several ,hooks ,that are ,required for ,some ,lace ,work ,writing ,board for ,children ,a writing desk for a child can be easily made as shown in the sketch4 ,the materials necessary are a board of suitable size1 two screwhooks1 four screweyes and a pair of rods for braces4 ,the hooks are screwed into the back of a chair and the screweyes into the board1 as shown4 ,this desk is instantly attached or taken down when desired4 ,if the chair is light and apt to tip over1 make the rods long-enough to reach to the floor4--,contributed by ,john ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,the ,writing ,board is ,easily ,attached to1 or ,detached from1 an ,ordinary ,chair ,back ,geometric ,principle in ,line ,division ,when sketching a plan1 if any one of the first few lines drawn is found to be the proper length1 then this line can be made into a scale by the geometric rule for dividing a given line into equal parts4 ,illustration3 ,a ,scale can be ,made for ,use on ,any ,sized ,sketch or ,drawing ,suppose1 for example1 the line ,,ab1 which is to represent #ab ft41 is found to be #a ft4 long4 ,draw a line1 ,,ac1 at any angle from the point ,a and step off on it #ab equal parts1 beginning at ,a4 ,the last point1 or the one at ,c1 is connected to the end ,b1 then eleven other lines are drawn parallel with ,,cb4 ,thus ,,ab will make a scale of #a in4 to each #a ft4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,repairing a ,broken ,whip ,procure a piece of thin tin--the metal taken from a discarded fruit can will do--and cut it about #b-a_/b in4 long and wide enough to encircle the break4 ,notch the ends like saw teeth and remove any sharp edges with a file4 ,place the tin on the break and tie temporarily4 ,wind the whole from end to end with a waxed linen thread1 such as used by harness makers4 ,the threads lying alternately on the whip and on metal at the notched ends eliminate any possibility of the parts working loose4 ,a break near the small and flexible end of a whip is repaired in the same manner1 using a quill instead of the tin4 ,in either case1 do not let the edges of the splicing material meet1 and it will clamp tightly on the whip4--,contributed by ,w4 ,s4 ,kingsley1 ,w4 ,gouldsboro1 ,me4 ,illustration3 ,the ,repair on a ,whip ,made with a ,notched ,ferrule and a ,waxed ,thread ,repairing a ,worn ,thimble ,silver thimbles are easily worn through at the end1 and they can be quickly repaired by soldering from the inside4 ,a very neat repair can be made with an alcohol lamp and a blowpipe by using a little silver solder4 ,borax or resin is used as a flux4 ,a ,small ,torch ,a small torch1 that will give a very fine and hot smokeless flame1 can be made from a piece of glass tube1 about #d in4 long1 and #d ft4 of rubber tubing4 ,the glass tube is heated in the center until it is red1 then the ends drawn apart so that the tube will have a small diameter4 ,after the glass has cooled1 make a small scratch with a file on the thin part and break it4 ,one of the pointed ends is connected to a straight piece of glass tube with a short piece of the rubber tube1 as shown in the sketch4 ,a small hole is cut in the side of the piece of rubber to admit air to the gas4 ,the torch is connected to an ordinary gas jet4--,contributed by ,e4 ,k4 ,marshall1 ,oak ,park1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,a ,torch ,made of ,glass and ,rubber ,tubing1 to be ,used on an ,ordinary ,gas ,jet ,fountain ,attachment for an ,ordinary ,pen ,a quite efficient fountain pen may be quickly made by bending an ordinary pen1 as shown at ,a1 and inserting it in the holder opposite to the regular pen1 as shown at ,b4 ,for best results1 the point of the auxiliary pen should just touch the regular pen4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,mont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,space between the ,pens ,forms the ,fountain1 ,which is ,sufficient for ,considerable ,writing 99 99 99 99 99 ,a little water added to oil paint will make a flat or lusterless finish and will do no harm to the paint1 as the water evaporates in time4 ,illustration ,homemade ,cut ,press ,the person who has a little ability in making wood cuts with a knife will find it very interesting to make the press shown in the sketch4 ,a fair job of printing can be done with the press1 using printer's ink spread on a piece of glass with a hand ink roller1 such as can be purchased cheaply of any dealer in printing supplies4 ,illustration3 ,a ,hand ,press for ,printing from ,cuts ,made of ,wood1 ,using ,ordinary ,printer's ,ink ,the press may have a base1 ,a1 of any size to suit1 but one #a-a_/b in4 thick1 #f in4 wide1 and #ab in4 long will be found to serve best for most purposes4 ,it must be smooth and level4 ,hard wood1 such as maple1 beech1 or birch1 is best for all parts4 ,the post ,b is #a-a_/d in4 thick1 #b in4 wide1 and #e in4 long4 ,before setting it1 slot the upper end for the end of the lever4 ,this is done by making a saw cut1 #a-c_/d in4 deep1 #e_/h in4 from either side and cutting out the core to make a slot #c_/d in4 wide4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 hole is then bored through the prongs to receive a stove bolt that connects them with the lever4 ,the post is fastened with screws and glue in a notch cut in the center of the base end4 ,the lever ,c is made of a piece of wood #a_/d in4 square and #aj in4 long4 ,at the forward end the sides are pared away to form a tongue1 or tenon1 that will pass between the prongs of the upright1 and a hole is bored through it to match those in the prongs4 ,the entire upper surface of the lever is rounded and the under surface is rounded1 beginning #f in4 from the tenon end4 ,glue to the under side of the lever a block1 ,d1 at the end of the under1 flat surface4 ,the block should be about #a-a_/d in4 square by #a-a_/b in4 long4 ,if the under side of the base is crowning1 either level it with a plane or nail cleats across the ends for feet4 ,a washer is used with the stove bolt in connecting the lever and post4 ,the cuts are made of small blocks of wood1 about #c_/d in4 thick and of a size to take the characters desired4 ,these blocks must be level and the printing side made smooth with very fine sandpaper1 or a scraper1 before the characters are laid out4 ,boxwood is best for cuts1 but pearwood1 applewood1 birch1 or maple will do very well4 ,mark out the characters backward1 using the pencil very lightly4 ,then1 with the small blade of a knife1 made as sharp as possible1 cut around the outlines1 holding the knife slanting1 and remove the adjacent wood by cutting in at a reverse angle to meet the boundary cut4 ,gradually deepen the cuts around the characters until they stand in relief about #a_/h in41 then score ,v-shaped grooves1 checkerboard fashion1 across the remaining high surface that is not a part of the design1 and chip out the resulting small blocks to bring the entire secondary surface of the block to a uniform level with the portions adjoining the characters4 ,a touch of glue to the back of the cut will set it securely enough to the bottom of the block ,d for printing1 and allow its removal without injury when desired4 ,to get a uniform impression in printing1 place paper on the base1 as at ,e1 to the thickness required4 ,for controlling the printing position on the stock paper1 pins or tacks can be stuck into the base and each sheet to be printed laid against these guides4--,contributed by ,chelsea ,curtis ,frazier1 ,saginaw1 ,mich4 ,an ,electrical ,testing ,instrument for ,experimenters ,the amateur having an ordinary flash light can make an instrument that will serve for a variety of purposes4 ,it is only necessary to solder a piece of lamp cord to the spring of the battery which comes in contact with the lamp1 and pass the end through a hole drilled in the top of the case4 ,the end can be fitted with a cord tip4 ,illustration3 ,an ,instrument ,made of an ,electrical ,pocket ,flash ,light for ,testing ,circuits and ,instruments ,to test batteries1 take the flash light in the right hand and press the button1 lighting the lamp1 then place the bottom of the flash light on one binding post and the cord on the other4 ,if the light burns brilliantly1 the battery is dead1 but if it burns dimly or goes out the battery is good4 ,it may happen that the experimenter's telegraph line is out of order and the trouble cannot be found4 ,the sounder may be tested out by disconnecting the wires from the instrument and placing the bottom of the flash light on one binding post and the cord on the other4 ,if the light goes out1 the trouble does not lie in the sounder1 but in some other part of the line4 ,the line may be tested in a similar manner if one end is short-circuited and the flash light connected to the other4 ,a tester of this kind cannot be used on long lines1 or on instruments of much resistance1 as their resistance will overcome that of the light4 ,keep in mind the fact that the lamp will always burn on an open circuit and go out on a closed circuit4 ,softening the ,tone of a ,talking ,machine ,illustration ,an effective mute1 for use on any disk talking machine1 can be made by clamping an ordinary wood clothespin on the head of the setscrew that holds the needle4 ,thus the tone will be softened a great deal more than by the use of a wood needle4 ,the record of a stringed instrument1 such as a violin1 will be almost exactly reproduced4 ,it will also eliminate almost all the scratching sound caused by a steel needle4--,contributed by ,c4 ,m4 ,reeves1 ,los ,angeles1 ,cal4 99 99 99 99 99 ,an antenna should be made of wire larger than ,no4 #ad gauge4 ,illustration ,a ,musical ,doorbell ,by ,h4 ,marcelle ,in the construction of this doorbell it is best to purchase a small instrument known as the tubaphone4 ,it consists of a rack with several pieces of brass tubing cut to different lengths to give the proper tones as they are struck4 ,such an instrument with eight tubes will play almost any tune1 and can be purchased from #ej cents up1 depending on the size4 ,brass tubes can be purchased1 cut1 and toned1 but the time taken in doing this is worth more than the price of the instrument1 and no changes are necessary in it to make the doorbell4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts for the ,construction of a ,musical ,doorbell ,that will ,play the ,music on ,brass ,tubes with ,one ,touch of a ,push ,button ,several strips of pine1 #b in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick1 are procured for the framework4 ,the tubes are placed on a table top1 #a in4 apart and with their lower ends on a line at right angles to their length4 ,allow a space of #a in4 outside the first and last tube1 and cut a piece of the wood to this length1 allowing sufficient additional material to fasten on the ends of two uprights1 which are cut long enough to admit the longest tube and allow sufficient room for a large roller and space at the top to swing the tubes4 ,a base is cut from a board1 #g_/h in4 thick and of sufficient size to admit the roller and tube rack1 together with a small battery motor4 ,the tube rack is fastened to the back of this base by making a tenon on the lower end of each upright1 and a mortise in the baseboard to receive it4 ,a roller is turned from a piece of soft pine1 large enough to provide room on its surface for a number of horizontal lines equal to the number of notes in the composition to be played4 ,these lines should not be too close together4 ,supposing the music it is desired to play has #ae notes in its composition1 then #ae horizontal lines must be spaced evenly on the surface of the roller4 ,the length of the roller should be a free-working fit between the uprights4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 steel rod is run through its center for a shaft1 allowing sufficient ends for the bearings1 and1 in addition1 at one end sufficient length for a pulley4 ,the motor is lined up on the base1 so that its pulley wheel will run a belt on the large wheel of the roller4 ,the current is turned on after making belt and wiring connections1 a lead pencil is held directly centering the place where each tube hangs1 and a line is drawn on the circumference of the roller4 ,a #a_/h-;in4 hole is drilled through each tube1 near one end1 and a piece of catgut string run into it to make a hanger4 ,a piece of board1 long enough to fit between the uprights when placed on the slope formed by the upper ends of the tubes after their lower ends are set straight on a line at right angles to their length1 and wide enough to swing the tubes clear of the frame1 is fastened in place1 as shown4 ,small screw eyes are turned into the under side of this board1 at even spacings of #a in41 and used to swing the tubes by the catgut strings4 ,another piece of board1 the same width as the former1 is placed1 perfectly horizontal1 between the uprights a short distance above the lower ends of the hanging tubes4 ,evenly spaced holes are bored in this crosspiece to admit the ends of the tubes4 ,the holes should be of such size that when they are lined with a piece of felt1 the tubes will have a little play without touching the sides at any point4 ,the hammers are each made of a strip of sheet brass1 having a length that will extend from the base to a short distance above the lower ends of the tubes4 ,a hole is drilled in each end of the strip1 the lower one being of a size to fasten it to the base crosspiece with a round-head wood screw4 ,the hole in the upper end is used to fasten a small block of wood with a screw1 for the hammer head4 ,a small strip of felt is glued to the striking side of the block4 ,another piece of brass1 used for a trip1 is fastened to the center part of each long piece with rivets1 so that its upper end will be near the center of the roller for height1 and strike the end of a small peg driven into the roller4 ,the length of these pieces1 in fact1 of all pieces1 will depend on the length of the tubes in the tubaphone and the size roller required for the music4 ,the setting of the pegs in the roller requires some patience in order to get the tune correct1 but one mistake will be of more value than an hour's description4 ,the pegs can be procured from a shoemaker4 ,if the roller is of pine1 they can be driven into the wood of the roller with a hammer4 ,illustration3 ,the ,appearance of the ,doorbell ,is ,that of a ,mission ,clock on a ,mantel ,with ordinary connections to the push button and motor1 the mechanism will only run while the push button is being pressed4 ,a device that will cause the piece of music to be played through to the finish after the push button is pushed for a short time1 consists of a turned piece of wood fastened to the outside surface of the driving wheel on the roller4 ,this piece of wood should be carefully set1 so that its outside surface will be true as it revolves4 ,three brushes1 made of copper strips1 are fastened to the base4 ,the length of these brushes will depend on the size of the roller and height of the block of wood4 ,they should be evenly spaced and fastened1 so that they will be insulated from each other4 ,one strip of brass1 or copper1 is fastened around the turned piece of wood4 ,this strip must be as wide as two brushes1 except for a short distance to make a break in the electrical circuit4 ,the notch in the strip1 to make this break1 should be on the outside edge where it will disconnect the center brush1 and its location on the turned piece of wood should be on a line with the end and the beginning of the pegs for the music4 ,another short strip is fastened to the turned piece of wood1 where it will make a contact with the first brush when the second or middle brush is in the notch1 or disconnected1 and is connected to the other notched strip with a piece of wire run beneath the wood4 ,the wiring shown will make it possible to start the motor with the push button which will turn the roll far enough to connect the center brush2 then the roller will turn until the music is played1 at which point it will stop and remain in rest until the push button again makes the contact4 ,the entire mechanism can be made to set on the mantel or shelf1 incased like a mission clock1 and the wires running to it may be concealed4 ,replacing ,buckle ,tongues ,illustration ,having several buckles without tongues ,i tried to repair them with pieces of wire1 but could not get them to bend short enough to fasten around the buckle frame4 ,some cotters were at hand and seeing them gave me the idea of using one leg1 with the eye part1 as a tongue4 ,by using the proper-sized cotter1 a substantial and quickly made repair will be the result4--,contributed by ,everett ,hoar1 ,bowmanville1 ,ont4 99 99 99 99 99 ,bread crumbs thoroughly rubbed over a pencil drawing will remove most of the dirt and without disturbing the pencil lines4 ,drying ,towels in ,photographer's ,dark ,room ,in doing a large amount of photographic work the towel becomes wet1 and to dry the hands on it is impossible4 ,to obviate this annoyance1 ,i made a galvanized-iron pipe1 about #b ft4 long and #h in4 in diameter1 with a disk1 or circular piece1 of metal about #aj in4 in diameter soldered on each end to form flanges4 ,one flange was fastened to the wall of the dark room in a convenient place to support the device4 ,on the inside of the spool1 or towel support1 an ordinary incandescent electric globe was placed4 ,the heat of the lamp would easily dry #ab in4 of the towel1 and when the dry part was pulled down for use another wet portion was brought into position for drying4 ,illustration3 ,an ,electric ,globe ,makes ,heat in the ,spool for ,drying a ,portion of the ,towel ,those who have tried to handle gelatin dry plates with moist hands will readily appreciate the value of this simple contrivance4 ,the lamp in the spool is connected on the switch with the ruby light1 so that it is not forgotten1 when leaving the room1 to turn it out4--,contributed by ,t4 ,b4 ,lambert1 ,chicago4 ,an ,electric ,chime ,clock ,by ,john ,e4 ,mahlmeister ,illustration3 ,the ,alarm ,clock in ,its ,case and the ,location of the ,contact ,pins and ,contact ,lever 7,fig4 #a7 ,in the construction of this clock one perfectly good and accurate alarm clock and the works of an old or discarded one are used4 ,the clock for the accurate time is set into a frame1 or casing1 made of thin boards which have a circular opening cut in them to fit snugly on the outside casing of the clock4 ,the back of the clock and casing are shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,a circular line is drawn on the casing1 about #a in4 larger in diameter than the clock1 and brass machine screws with two nuts clamping on the wood back1 as shown at ,a1 are set at intervals so as to be opposite1 or just back of1 the hour marks #b1 #c1 #e1 #f1 #h1 #i1 #aa1 and #ab4 ,a contact spring1 ,b1 is shaped as shown and soldered to the knurled knob on the back of the clock used for setting the hands in a position where it will travel or be parallel with the minute hand4 ,the end of the contact spring should be shaped so that it will slide over the points of the screws easily1 but in good contact4 ,the ends of the screws should be filed to a slightly rounding point4 ,the wiring diagram for this part of the apparatus is clearly shown1 and the terminals are connected to binding posts ,c and ,d4 ,the binding post ,e is connected to the metal part of the clock4 ,illustration3 ,location of the ,clock ,works1 ,magnets1 ,binding ,posts1 ,gongs and ,strikers on the ,baseboard 7,fig4 #b7 ,the chime part is made entirely separate and can be located at any reasonable distance from the clock4 ,it is propelled by the works from an old clock1 as shown at ,f1 ,fig4 #b4 ,the old clock is prepared for use by removing the hands1 balance wheel and escapement so that the wheels will turn freely4 ,to prevent the works from running too fast1 a piece of sheet brass1 ,g1 is soldered to the shaft running at the highest speed4 ,the brass should be as large as the space will admit4 ,it forms a fan to catch the air and retard the speed1 and also provides a means of stopping the works by the electric mechanism4 ,the parts for the gongs and electrical apparatus are supported on a baseboard1 #c_/d in4 thick1 #f in4 wide1 and #ah in4 long4 ,the automatic switch is located at one end of the base1 and consists of two sets of magnets1 ,h and ,j1 with an armature1 ,k1 to which is attached a stiff contact wire1 ,l4 ,this wire is to make contact with the spring ,m when the armature is drawn by the magnets ,j1 and with ,n when drawn by the magnets ,h4 ,the springs ,m and ,n are made of thin sheet brass1 bent as shown1 and mounted on the base4 ,a piece of wood1 ,o1 on which to mount the works of the old clock is mortised into the base4 ,another standard1 ,p1 of the same height as ,o1 is also mortised into the base to provide a bearing for the end of the shaft which carries the wood disk ,q1 the opposite end of the shaft being connected by means of a ferrule and soldered to the end of the minute-hand shaft4 ,the shaft should be well lined up1 so that it will turn freely4 ,the wood disk is #a_/d in4 thick and about #f in4 in diameter4 ,illustration3 ,the ,pins are ,accurately ,set in ,four ,circular ,lines and on ,radial ,lines 7,fig4 #c7 ,mark four circles on the face of the disk1 near the outside edge and #a_/d in4 apart4 ,step off the outside circle into #aej parts and draw a radial line from each mark across the four circular lines with the straight edge on the center of the disk4 ,an arc of the disk is shown in ,fig4 #c1 where trip pins are driven in for making the electric contacts4 ,this part of the arc shows the method of locating the pins for the hour from #c to #d o'clock1 with the intermediate pins for the quarter1 half1 and three-quarter-hour contacts4 ,the intermediate pins are arranged in the same manner for all hours1 but the hour pins1 on the second circle1 run from #a pin to #ab pins consecutively4 ,ordinary pins1 with the heads cut off1 are used and should be driven in accurately on the division lines to secure proper results4 ,the arrangement of the springs is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,these springs1 when pressed together1 will close the circuit for ringing the gongs4 ,they are made of thin sheet brass1 bent as shown at ,r1 and fastened to a piece1 or block1 of hard wood with screws1 as shown at ,s4 ,the springs numbered #c1 #e1 #g1 and #i are the ones made as shown at ,r for sliding over the pins in the disk ,q1 and their ends should clear the face of the disk about #a_/h in4 ,the springs #a1 #b1 #d1 #f1 and #h are about #a_/b in4 shorter and have their ends bent up at right angles so that they will almost touch the long ones4 ,the spring #a should be a little shorter than #b4 ,when fastening the springs to the block of wood1 be sure that no two springs touch and that each one is separated from the other to form no contact until the pins in the wheel force them together4 ,the block is then fastened to the base under and parallel with the shaft carrying the disk ,q1 as shown4 ,the starting and stopping of the clockwork ,f is accomplished by means of a set of bell magnets1 arranged1 as shown at ,t1 ,fig4 #b1 with the wire attached to the armature bent to touch the brass wing of the fan ,g4 ,the armature must not vibrate1 but stay against the magnet cores while the current is flowing through them1 thus allowing the clock wheels to turn1 and as soon as the current is cut off1 the armature will spring back and stop the wheels4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts ,constructing the ,chime are ,placed in the ,clock ,frame below the ,works ,arrange four gongs1 ,u1 ,v1 ,w1 and ,x1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 and also three bell magnets with clappers #a1 #b and #c4 ,these gongs should be selected for tone as in a chime clock4 ,the connections to the bell magnets #a1 #b1 and #c should be direct to the binding posts so that the armature will not vibrate1 but give one stroke4 ,for instance1 bell magnet #a should produce one stroke on the gong ,u when the current is on1 and one stroke on the gong ,v when the current breaks4 ,the magnets #b should cause the clapper to strike once on the gong ,v when the current is on1 and to make one stroke on the gong ,w when the current is broken4 ,the magnets #c produce only one stroke on the gong ,x at a time1 which is used to sound the hours4 ,illustration3 ,the ,contact ,springs are ,operated by the ,pins on the ,disk ,wheel 7,fig4 #d7 ,the parts are connected up electrically as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the lines between the clock1 ,fig4 #a1 and the bell-ringing part1 ,fig4 #b1 are connected from ,c to ,c1 ,d to ,d1 and ,e1 ,fig4 #a1 to the zinc of a battery and from the carbon to ,e1 ,fig4 #b4 ,two dry cells will be sufficient for the current4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wiring ,diagram for the ,location of the ,wires on the ,under ,side of the ,base 7,fig4 #e7 ,the working of the mechanism is as follows3 ,suppose the time is #f minutes of #c o'clock and the contact spring on the back is near the #aa pin4 ,as soon as it touches the pin1 the armature ,k of the switch will be drawn in contact with the spring ,n1 then when the contact spring touches the #ab pin1 the current will flow into the magnets ,t and release the wheels of the clockwork ,f1 which turns the disk ,q1 and the three pins in the second row will pass over the spring #e and press it in contact with the spring #d three times1 causing the gong ,x to toll out #c o'clock4 ,as the contact spring ,b will be on the contact pin #ab for about #a minute1 the wheels of the clockwork ,f would continue to turn and the bells ring1 if it were not for the stop pin located on the outside1 or first1 circle of the disk ,q1 which pin is set in line with the last pin in the set of pins for the hour1 or1 in this instance1 in line with the third pin4 ,when the stop pin has passed the spring1 the connection through the magnets ,t is broken and the clockwork ,f stops instantly4 ,when the spring ,b strikes the #b o'clock pin1 or #aj minutes after #c o'clock1 the armature ,k is drawn over to ,n1 and at the #c pin1 or #ae minutes after #c o'clock1 the bells ,u1 ,v1 and ,w will ring and then the stop pin will break the current1 and so on1 at every #ae minutes of the #ab hours4 ,hinges ,used to ,substitute ,night ,bolt ,one of the safest devices for bolting1 or locking1 a door against intruders is to use two sets of hinges4 ,the extra set is fastened to the door and frame in the same way but directly opposite the regular hinges4 ,it may be necessary to file the extra hinges and pins in order to separate and bring the parts together easily4 ,the usual door lock need not be used with this arrangement1 as the hinges are exposed only on the inside of the room and cannot be tampered with from without4 ,propellers for a ,hand ,sled ,desiring to propel my hand sled with power transmitted by cranks and wheels1 ,i set about to procure the necessary materials4 ,two medium-sized buggy wheels were found in the back yard of a blacksmith shop1 which were procured for a nominal price4 ,the fellies of these wheels were removed1 the tenons cut from the spokes and nails substituted1 which were driven in their ends so that about #a_/b in4 of the body with the head projected4 ,the heads were then removed and the nail ends sharpened4 ,the hubs were plugged with pieces of wood1 whittled to tightly fit the holes4 ,a hole was then bored exactly central through each plug for a #a_/b-;in4 rod4 ,this size rod was procured and bent to form a crank1 the bearing end being threaded for a distance equal to the length of the hub4 ,illustration3 ,sled ,propelled by ,revolving ,wheels ,turned by ,cranks1 the ,pointed ,nails ,doing the ,pushing ,two pieces or blocks of wood1 #b in4 square and #d in4 long1 were used as bearings4 ,these were bored centrally through the long way1 to receive the #a_/b-;in4 rod just loose enough to make a good bearing4 ,these bearings were supported by a pair of braces made of strap iron1 about #a_/d in4 thick and #c_/d in4 wide4 ,the length of the iron will depend on the size of the wheels and the height of the sled runner4 ,the braces were shaped as shown4 ,the center of the bearing hole must be as high from the surface of the ground as the distance the spoke ends are from the center of the hub hole4 ,the crank is then run through the bearing hole and a nut run on the threads and a washer placed against the nut4 ,the wheel is then slipped on the axle1 and another washer and nut run on tightly4 ,both wheels1 bearings1 cranks1 and brackets are made alike4 ,the brackets are fastened with small bolts to the sled top4--,contributed by ,justin ,stewart1 ,wallingford1 ,conn4 ,a ,self-,feeding ,match ,box ,with the addition of the simple device here illustrated1 any match box can be converted into one of the self-feeding type4 ,a piece of tin1 or cardboard1 is cut1 as shown at ,a1 the exact size depending on the match box used4 ,the piece cut out is folded on the dotted lines1 the cover on the match box is removed1 and the part ,b pushed into the end of the box beneath the matches4 ,the part ,b is twice as long as the depth of the box1 therefore it enters the box as far as the line ,c4 ,the flaps ,d rest against the outside of the box1 and are held in place by the box cover4 ,the matches feed into the box formed of the tin or cardboard as fast as used1 while the burnt ones can be placed in the upper part ,e4 ,illustration3 ,the ,attachment ,consists of a ,receptacle ,fitting into the ,end of a ,match ,box ,corks-in-a-,box ,trick ,procure a pill box and a clean cork4 ,cut two disks from the cork to fit in the box1 and fasten one of the pieces centrally to the inside bottom of the pill box with glue4 ,to perform the trick1 put the loose disk in with the one that is fast1 and then open the box to show both corks4 ,close the box and in doing so turn it over1 then open and only one cork will be seen4 ,be careful not to show the inside of the other part of the box with the cork that is fastened4--,contributed by ,fred ,b4 ,spoolstra1 ,yonkers1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,disk-,armature ,motor ,one of the simplest motors to make is the disk motor1 its construction requiring a wood base1 a brass disk1 a #c-;in4 horseshoe magnet1 and some mercury4 ,illustration ,the base is made of hard wood1 in the proportions shown in the sketch4 ,the leading-in wires are connected to the binding posts ,a and ,b1 and from these connections are made1 on the bottom of the base1 from ,a to the groove ,c cut in the upper surface of the base for the mercury1 and from ,b to one screw1 ,d1 of one bearing4 ,the end of the former wire must be clean and project into the end of the groove1 where it will be surrounded with mercury4 ,illustration3 ,parts of the ,disk ,motor ,shown in ,detail1 ,also the ,location of the ,horseshoe ,magnet on the ,base1 ,ends of the ,poles being ,directly under the ,center of the ,shaft ,the bearings consist of thin sheet brass1 cut to the dimensions shown1 the bearing part being made with a well-pointed center punch1 as at ,e4 ,the disk wheel is made of sheet brass1 #b in4 in diameter1 and a needle1 with the eye broken off and pointed1 is used for the shaft4 ,the needle shaft can be placed in position by springing the bearings apart at the top4 ,when the current is applied1 the disk will revolve in a direction relative to the position of the poles on the magnet4 ,the reverse can be made by turning the magnet over4--,contributed by ,joseph ,h4 ,redshaw1 ,homestead1 ,pa4 ,repairing ,marble ,with a little practice any mechanic can repair holes1 cracks or chipped places on marble slabs1 so that the patched place cannot be detected from the natural marble4 ,use the following mixture as a base for the filler3 ,water glass1 #aj parts2 calcined magnesite1 #b parts1 and powdered marble1 #d parts4 ,these should be mixed thoroughly to a semifluid paste4 ,fill the crack or hole and smooth off level1 then with a camel's-hair brush and colors1 made of aniline in alcohol1 work out the veins1 body colors1 etc41 as near to the natural marble as possible4 ,it will depend on the application of the colors whether the repair can be seen or not4 ,artificial-marble slabs can be formed from this mixture4--,contributed by ,a4 ,e4 ,soderlund1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,the ,construction of a ,simple ,wireless ,telephone ,set ,by ,a4 ,e4 ,andrews ,in ,two ,parts--,part ,i ,among the various methods for the transmission of speech electrically1 without wire1 from one point to another1 the so-called inductivity system1 which utilizes the principles of electromagnetic induction1 is perhaps the simplest1 because it requires no special apparatus4 ,since this system is so simple in construction1 and its operation can be easily understood by one whose knowledge of electricity is limited1 a description will be given of how to construct and connect the necessary apparatus required at a station for both transmitting and receiving a message4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a--,wire ,connected to ,galvanometer ,before taking up the actual construction and proper connection of the various pieces of apparatus1 it will be well to explain the electrical operation of the system4 ,if a conductor be moved in a magnetic field in any direction other than parallel to the field1 there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor1 and this induced electrical pressure will produce a current in an electrical circuit of which the conductor is a part1 provided the circuit be complete1 or closed1 just as the electrical pressure produced in the battery due to the chemical action in the battery will produce a current in a circuit connected to the terminals of the battery4 ,a simple experiment to illustrate the fact that there is an induced electrical pressure set up in a conductor when it is moved in a magnetic field may be performed as follows3 ,take a wire1 ,,ab1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 and connect its terminals to a galvanometer1 ,g1 as shown4 ,if no galvanometer can be obtained1 a simple one can be made by supporting a small compass needle inside a coil composed of about #ajj turns of small wire4 ,the terminals of the winding on the coil of the galvanometer should be connected to the terminals of the conductor ,,ab1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,if now the conductor ,,ab be moved up and down past the end of the magnet ,n1 there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor1 and this electrical pressure will produce a current in the winding of the galvanometer ,g1 which will cause the magnetic needle suspended in the center of the coil to be acted upon by a magnetic force tending to move it from its initial position1 or position of rest4 ,it will be found that this induced electrical pressure will exist only as long as the conductor ,,ab is moving with respect to the magnetic field of the magnet ,n1 as there will be no deflection of the galvanometer needle when the motion of the conductor ceases1 indicating there is no current in the galvanometer winding1 and hence no induced electrical pressure4 ,it will also be found that the direction in which the magnetic needle of the galvanometer is deflected changes as the direction of motion of the conductor changes with respect to the magnet1 indicating that there is a change in the direction of the current in the winding of the galvanometer1 and since the direction of this current is dependent upon the direction in which the induced electrical pressure acts1 there must have been a change in the direction of this pressure due to a change in the direction of motion of the conductor4 ,the same results can be obtained by moving the magnet1 allowing the conductor ,,ab to remain stationary1 the only requirement being a relative movement of the conductor and the magnetic field created by the magnet4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--;,compass ,needle ,test ,it is not necessary that the magnetic field be created by a permanent magnet4 ,it can be produced by a current in a conductor4 ,the fact that there is a magnetic field surrounding a conductor in which there is a current can be shown by a simple experiment1 as illustrated in ,fig4 #b4 ,if a wire be placed above a compass needle and parallel to the direction of the compass needle and a current be sent through the wire in the direction indicated by the arrow ,i1 there will be a force acting on the compass needle tending to turn the needle at right angles to the wire4 ,the amount the needle is turned will depend upon the value of the current in the wire4 ,there is a definite relation between the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the magnetic field surrounding the wire1 because a reversal of current in the conductor will result in a reversal in the direction in which the compass needle is deflected4 ,remembering that the direction of a magnetic field can be determined by placing a magnetic needle in the field and noting the direction in which the ,n-pole of the needle points1 this being taken as the positive direction1 if one looks along a conductor in which there is a current and the current be from the observer1 the direction of the magnetic field about the conductor will be clockwise4 ,imagine a conductor carrying a current and that you are looking at a cross-section of this conductor 7see ,fig4 #c71 and the direction of the current in the conductor is from you 7this being indicated in the figure by the cross inside the circle71 then the lines of force of the magnetic field will be concentric circles about the conductor1 they being nearer together near the conductor1 indicating the strength of the field is greatest near the conductor4 ,a compass needle placed above the conductor would place itself in such a position that the ,n-pole would point toward the right and the ,s-pole toward the left4 ,if the needle be placed below the conductor1 the ,n-pole would point to the left and the ,s-pole to the right1 indicating that the direction of the magnetic field above the conductor is just the reverse of what it is below the conductor4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #c--,lines of ,force ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d--,reversed ,lines of ,force ,the strength of the magnetic field produced by a current in a conductor can be greatly increased by forming the conductor into a coil4 ,figure #d shows the cross-section of a coil composed of a single turn of wire4 ,the current in the upper cross-section is just the reverse of what it is in the lower cross-section1 as indicated by the cross and dash inside the two circles4 ,as a result of the direction of current in the two cross-sections being different1 the direction of the magnetic field about these two cross-sections will be different1 one being clockwise1 and the other counter-clockwise4 ,it will be observed1 however1 that all the lines of force pass through the center of the coil in the same direction1 or the magnetic field inside the coil is due to the combined action of the various parts of the conductor forming the complete turn4 ,this magnetic field can be increased in value1 without increasing the current in the conductor1 by adding more turns to the coil4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #e--,magnetic ,lines ,passing through ,center ,a cross-section through a coil composed of eight turns placed side by side is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the greater part of the magnetic lines created by each turn pass through the remaining turns as shown in the figure1 instead of passing around the conductor in which the current exists that creates them4 ,this results in the total number of lines passing through the coil per unit of cross-sectional area being greater than it was for a single turn1 although the value of the current in the conductor has remained constant1 the only change being an increase in the number of turns forming the coil4 ,if a conductor be moved by the end of a coil similar to that shown in ,fig4 #e1 when there is a current in the winding of the coil1 there will be an electrical pressure induced in the conductor1 just the same as though it were moved by the end of a permanent magnet4 ,the polarity of the coil is marked in ,fig4 #e4 ,the magnetic lines pass from the ,s-pole to the ,n-pole through the coil and from the ,n-pole to the ,s-pole outside the coil1 just as they do in a permanent magnet4 ,how to ,lock a ,tenoned ,joint ,a tenon placed in a blind mortise can be permanently fastened1 when putting the joints together1 by two wedges driven in the end grain of the wood4 ,in some cases1 where the wood to be used is very dry and brittle1 it is advisable to dip the tenon in warm water before applying the glue4 ,the glue must be applied immediately after the tenon is removed from the water1 and then inserted in the mortise4 ,the sketch shows the application of the wedges4 ,the bottom of the mortise drives the wedges as the tenon is forced in place4 ,illustration3 ,wedges in ,tenon ,fitting a ,large ,cork in a ,small ,bottle ,when necessary1 a large cork may be made to fit a small bottle1 if treated as shown in the sketch4 ,two wedge-shaped sections are cut from the cork1 at right angles to each other1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the points are then squeezed together 7,fig4 #b7 and the end inserted in the bottle 7,fig4 #c74 ,wet the cork slightly and the operation will be easier4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,reducing ,size of ,cork 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,a ,homemade ,wet ,battery ,illustration ,procure a large water bottle and have a glass cutter cut the top off so that the lower portion will form a jar about #h-a_/b in4 high4 ,next obtain two pieces of carbon1 about #h in4 long1 #d in4 wide and #a_/d in4 thick4 ,melt up some old scrap zinc and mold a piece having the same dimensions as the pieces of carbon4 ,the mold for casting the zinc may be made by nailing some #a_/d-;in4 strips of wood on a piece of dry board1 forming a shallow box1 #d in4 wide and #h in4 long4 ,remove all the impurities from the surface of the zinc when it is melted1 with a metal spoon or piece of tin4 ,before filling the mold with the metal1 place a piece of ,no4 #ad gauge bare copper wire through a small hole in one of the end pieces forming the mold1 and allow it to project several inches inside1 and make sure the mold is perfectly level4 ,the zinc will run around the end of the wire1 which is to afford a means of connecting the zinc plate to one of the binding posts forming the terminals of the cell4 ,cut from some hard wood four pieces a little longer than the outside diameter of the glass jar1 two of them #a_/b by #a_/b in41 and two1 #a_/b by #e_/h in4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole in each end of all four pieces1 the holes being perpendicular to the #a_/b-;in4 dimension in each case1 and about #c_/h in4 from the end4 ,boil all the pieces for several minutes in paraffin and stand them up on end to drain4 ,procure two #a_/h-;in4 brass bolts1 #c-a_/b in4 long1 which are to be used in clamping the elements of the cell together4 ,the two smaller pieces of wood should be placed on each side of one end of the zinc1 then the carbon pieces and the larger pieces of wood outside the carbon pieces4 ,the carbon plates should be connected together and then connected to a binding post which forms the positive terminal of the cell4 ,if unable to obtain pieces of carbon of the required dimensions1 a number of ordinary electric-light carbons may be used4 ,get about ten #a_/b-;in4 carbons1 without the copper coating1 if possible2 if not1 file all the copper off4 ,cut these carbons off1 forming #h-;in4 lengths4 ,file the top ends of the carbons flat and so that they all become equal in thickness1 and clamp them in place by means of the brass bolts4 ,if rods are used1 they should all be connected together by means of a piece of copper wire and then to a binding post4 ,the plates may now be hung in the jar1 the wooden pieces resting on the top of the jar and acting as a support4 ,the solution for this cell is made by dissolving #a_/b lb4 of potassium bichromate in #a_/b gal4 of water1 and then adding very slowly #a_/b lb4 of strong sulphuric acid4 ,more or less solution may be made by using the proper proportion of each ingredient4 ,this cell will have a voltage of two volts1 a rather low internal resistance1 and will be capable of delivering a large current4 ,if it should begin to show signs of exhaustion1 a little more acid may be added4 ,a chemical action goes on in this cell regardless of whether it supplies current to an external circuit or not1 and for this reason the elements should be removed from the solution and hung directly over the jar when the cell is not in use4 ,a simple device for this purpose may be constructed as shown4 ,a cord may be passed through the opening in the crossbar at the top and its lower end attached to the elements4 ,when the elements are drawn out of the solution1 the upper end of the cord may be fastened in some manner4 ,this frame can1 of course1 be made longer1 so it will accommodate a number of cells4 ,the ,construction of a ,simple ,wireless ,telephone ,set ,by ,a4 ,e4 ,andrews ,in ,two ,parts--,part ,,ii ,if two coils of wire be placed parallel to each other as shown in ,fig4 #f1 and a current be passed through the winding of one of them1 say ,a1 a part of the magnetic lines of force created by this current will pass through the other coil ,b4 ,these lines of magnetic force must cut across the turns of wire of the coil in which there is no current as the magnetic field is being created1 and as a result there will be an electrical pressure produced in the winding of the coil carrying no current4 ,when the current in coil ,a is discontinued1 the magnetic field created by this current is destroyed or it contracts to zero1 and the magnetic lines again cut the various turns composing the winding of coil ,b4 ,the direction in which the magnetic lines of force and the winding of coil ,b move with respect to each other is just the reverse1 when the current in the winding of coil ,a is increasing1 to what it is when the current in the winding of the coil ,a is decreasing4 ,any change in the value of the current in the winding of coil ,a will result in a change in the number of magnetic lines of force linked with the winding of the coil ,b1 and as a result of this change in the number of lines linked with the winding of coil ,b there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in coil ,b4 ,the direction of this induced electrical pressure will depend upon whether the current in the winding of coil ,a is increasing or decreasing in value4 ,when the current in the winding of coil ,a is increasing in value1 the electrical pressure induced in the winding of coil ,b will be in such a direction that the current produced by this induced electrical pressure will pass around the winding of coil ,b in the opposite direction to that in which the current passes around the winding of coil ,a4 ,or the current produced by the induced electrical pressure tends to produce a magnetic field opposite in direction to the one created by the current in the winding of coil ,a4 ,when the current in the winding of ,a is decreasing in value1 the induced pressure in the winding of the coil ,b is just the reverse of what it was in the previous case and the current produced by this induced pressure passes around the winding of the coil ,b in the same direction as the current passes around the winding of coil ,a4 ,the current produced by the induced electrical pressure aids the current in the winding of coil ,a in producing a magnetic field4 ,in general the current resulting from the induced pressure always passes around the circuit in such a direction as to produce a magnetic effect which will oppose a change in the value of the magnetic field causing the induced electrical pressure4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #f ,there will be an induced pressure in the winding of coil ,b1 due to a change in the value of the current in the winding of coil ,a1 as long as the coil ,b remains in the magnetic field of the coil ,a and its plane is not parallel to magnetic lines2 or1 in other words1 coil ,b must always be in such a position that some of the magnetic lines created by the current in coil ,a will pass through the winding of coil ,b4 ,if a telephone transmitter and a battery be connected in series with the winding of coil ,a1 a fluctuating or varying current can be made to pass through the winding by causing the diaphragm of the transmitter to vibrate by speaking into the mouthpiece of the transmitter4 ,this varying current will set up a varying magnetic field and there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in coil ,b1 if it be properly placed with respect to coil ,a4 ,a receiver connected in series with the winding of coil ,b will be subjected to the action of a varying current due to the induced electrical pressure in the winding of coil ,b and as a result1 the diaphragm of the receiver will vibrate in unison with that of the transmitter1 and speech can thus be transmitted4 ,the connection just described should be somewhat modified and a little more equipment used in order to give the best results4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #g--,sending and ,receiving ,equipment ,figure #g shows the complete sending and receiving equipment1 a complete outfit of this kind being required for each station4 ,the transmitter ,t and the receiver ,r may be an ordinary local battery transmitter and receiver1 although a high-resistance receiver will give better results4 ,the induction coil with the windings1 marked ,p and ,s1 may be any commercial type of induction coil as used in a magneto telephone instrument1 but a coil with a high-wound secondary will give better results4 ,the push button ,k is to be used in closing the transmitter circuit when the set is being used for transmitting1 the key being depressed1 and for shorting out the high resistance secondary winding when the set is used in receiving1 the key being in the normal position4 ,ten dry cells should be connected in series and used to supply current to the transmitter circuit1 as shown by ,b in the figure4 ,the receiver ,r1 secondary winding of the induction coil ,s1 and the winding of coil ,a used in transmitting and receiving the magnetic effects1 are all connected in series4 ,the winding of the coil ,a consists of two parts1 ,d and ,e1 as shown in the figure1 with two of their ends connected together by means of a condenser1 ,c1 having a capacity of about #b micro-farads4 ,each of these parts should consist of about #bjj turns of ,no4 #bb gauge silk-covered copper wire1 wound on an ordinary bicycle rim4 ,the inside end of one winding should be connected to the outside of the other by means of the condenser1 the two coils being wound in the same direction4 ,the condenser ,c can be procured at a small cost from almost any telephone company4 ,to talk1 two of the instruments are placed #be or #cj ft4 apart1 and they may be placed in different rooms as walls and other ordinary obstructions that do not interfere with the production of the magnetic field about the transmitting coil1 have no effect upon the operation4 ,pressing the button ,k at the transmitting station1 closes the transmitter circuit and removes the shunt from about the secondary winding of the induction4 ,any vibration of the transmitter will cause a varying current to pass through the primary winding ,p1 which in turn induces an electrical pressure in the secondary winding ,s1 and this pressure causes a varying current to pass through the coil ,a4 ,the varying current in the winding of the coil ,a produces a varying magnetic field which acts upon the receiving coil1 inducing an electrical pressure in it and producing a current through the receiver at the receiving station4 ,a filing coherer1 adapted to close a local relay circuit and ring an ordinary bell1 may be used with the sets just described for signaling between stations4 ,illustration ,an ,electric ,incubator ,where electric current is available1 it can be used to heat an incubator much better and cleanlier than the kerosene lamp4 ,the materials are inexpensive and the cost should be no more than for the ordinary kind of heater4 ,first of all the box part must be made of very dry wood1 #a_/b in4 thick4 ,the material should be matched1 as the cost of the operation depends upon the construction of the box4 ,the proper size for an #hj-;egg incubator is #b ft4 square and #a ft4 high4 ,if a larger one is desired1 the dimensions may be varied to suit1 but it is not necessary to make it any higher for a larger one4 ,if it is desired to have a window in the door1 care must be taken to make it a good fit4 ,the top1 as shown in the sketch1 is made without hinges so that it can be readily set on and removed4 ,this makes it handy in case of repairing the heater and cleaning the box4 ,the inside of the box1 with the exception of the bottom1 should be covered with asbestos paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a--;,box ,details ,after the box is finished1 fit it with a tray1 #a-a_/b ft4 by #a ft4 #aj-c_/d in4 ,a tray having these dimensions will slide easily in the box4 ,this is an essential feature of the hatching4 ,the frame of the tray ,d1 ,fig4 #a1 consists of wood1 #c_/d by #c_/d in41 with a bottom made of wire mesh4 ,the mesh should be firmly attached1 so that it will not give away when full of eggs4 ,runners for the tray are placed #d-a_/b in4 from the bottom of the box4 ,when the tray is put in place1 it will not touch the back4 ,this small space is left for the chicks to fall into the nursery below4 ,about #d in4 below the tray four holes are bored1 ,,aa1 #a_/h in4 in diameter1 one on each side of the box4 ,these holes admit fresh air to the eggs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--;,heater ,details ,the electric heater is just large enough to allow a space about #a_/b in4 on all edges4 ,this makes it #bc in4 square4 ,a piece of #a_/d-;in4 asbestos of the above size should be secured1 on which to place the heating wire4 ,the amount of wire depends on the size and kind4 ,as it is not necessary to heat the wire very hot1 iron or steel wire may be used4 ,the length of wire may be determined by the following method3 ,wind the wire on a long stick1 making sure that no one coil touches its neighbor4 ,connect one wire of the current supply at one end of the coil and run the other end of the current supply along the coils1 starting at the extreme opposite end and drawing toward the center until the iron wire gets too hot to hold with the bare hand4 ,this will be the right length of wire to use4 ,the length being known1 a number of tacks are placed in the asbestos board to hold the wire1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,cover the wire with a sheet of asbestos and attach binding-posts1 ,e and ,f1 at each end4 ,the asbestos inclosing the heating wires is covered with a thin piece of sheet iron1 which is made to fit tightly over the bottom and sides4 ,this will spread the heat evenly4 ,be careful to have the binding-posts insulated from the sheet metal4 ,in the cross section of the heater1 ,fig4 #b1 ,a represents the #a_/d-;in4 asbestos board2 ,b1 the heater wire2 ,c1 the asbestos paper1 and ,d the sheet-metal covering4 ,the most important part of the incubator is the thermostat which regulates the current to maintain a steady heat4 ,it is not advisable to make this instrument1 as a good one can be purchased for less than #a4 ,place the thermostat in the end of the box at ,b1 ,fig4 #a4 ,a small door1 ,e1 is made in the box for easy adjustment of the thumbscrews4 ,suspend the heater from the cover of the box with bolts #b-c_/d in4 long1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,a base receptacle1 ,g1 and a snap switch1 ,h1 are fastened on top of the cover and connected up to the thermostat ,b1 the condenser ,c1 the heater ,f1 and lamp ,i1 as shown4 ,another snap switch1 ,j1 is used on the light only4 ,the condenser ,c is to prevent sparking1 thus saving the platinum points on the screws4 ,do not use more than a #b-;cp4 lamp for lighting purposes1 as a brighter light blinds the young chicks4 ,the incubator should be run for a day or two so that the current may be well regulated before placing the eggs in the tray4 ,the incubator is operated the same as with lamp heat4--,contributed by ,m4 ,miller1 ,lansing1 ,mich4 ,a ,cover for ,magazines ,as soon as ,popular ,mechanics1 or any other magazine of similar size1 arrives and before any member of the family looks through it1 strip off the front cover and carefully remove the narrow strip on the back as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,strengthen the back with a piece of bookbinding tissue1 ,a1 ,fig4 #b1 and then paste a piece of heavy manila paper1 ,b1 over the covers and back4 ,over this paste a piece of dark blue cambric1 ,fig4 #c1 carefully turning the edges even with the book4 ,the picture from the cover and the date added to the left corner of the picture are neatly pasted on1 ,fig4 #d1 and the narrow strip is glued to the back4 ,illustration3 ,removing the ,cover1 and ,binding with ,heavy ,paper 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the book is put under a heavy weight for several hours4 ,thus a neat1 strong cover1 which looks well in a bookcase1 is secured at very little expense4 ,the eager handling by every member of the family cannot soil or deface the cover4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,cloth ,cover and ,paper ,cover ,attached 7,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d7 ,an ,optical ,illusion ,a very deceiving illusion can be contrived with a bit of wire1 a rubber band and a toothpick4 ,an ordinary straight hairpin will serve instead of the wire4 ,the hairpin or wire is bent as shown in the illustration1 and the rubber band then placed on the inverted ,u-shaped part4 ,a toothpick is inserted through the rubber band and a few turns taken by slipping the toothpick back and forth so it will pass the wire4 ,illustration3 ,toothpick in ,rubber ,band 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,hold the wire straight in front of the eyes1 and1 using the forefinger of the right hand1 turn the end of the toothpick ,a1 ,fig4 #a1 down until it almost reaches the opposite point ,a1 ,fig4 #b1 and let the finger slip off4 ,it will appear as if the toothpick passed through the wire4--,contributed by ,h4 ,h4 ,windsor1 ,jr4 ,temperature ,alarm ,the falling temperature of a room during the night may result in a very bad cold for the occupant4 ,this may be prevented by the use of an alarm to awaken the sleeper and warn him to close the window4 ,an alarm can be made as follows3 ,take a glass tube about #d in4 long and #a_/d in4 in diameter and close one end1 used for the bottom1 with sealing wax1 in which the bare end of a ,no4 #bj gauge magnet wire is inserted4 ,the tube is almost filled with mercury4 ,on the mercury a float of wax is placed in which a bare piece of the same magnet wire is inserted and bent as shown in the sketch4 ,the tube of mercury is fastened to a base with two clips of metal4 ,at the upper end of this base the adjustable lever ,a is attached4 ,the electric connections are made as shown in the sketch4 ,illustration3 ,the ,alarm and ,wiring ,diagram ,should the temperature fall during the night1 the mercury will contract1 the float descend and the circuit close1 so that the bell will ring4 ,the adjustable lever allows setting the alarm for various differences of temperature4--,contributed by ,klyce ,fuzzelle1 ,rogers1 ,ark4 ,paper ,smoother and ,penwiper ,illustration ,a convenient paper smoother and penwiper can be easily made as follows3 ,procure a common celluloid harness ring1 ,a1 about #a-a_/b in4 in diameter and fasten a penwiper1 ,b1 to it4 ,the wiper is made of arts-crafts leather1 doubled and filled with pieces of chamois4 ,they are held in place with a ribbon or cord tied as shown4 ,the roughened paper caused by erasing can be easily smoothed with the ring4--,contributed by ,g4 ,h4 ,holter1 ,jasper1 ,minn4 ,stereoscopic ,pictures with an ,ordinary ,camera ,make a small table as wide as the camera is long and #c in4 longer than the camera is wide4 ,sink a screw nut in the center of the under side to engage the regular tripod screw4 ,fasten a double or two-way spirit level on the front left-hand corner4 ,nail strips on both ends and on the rear side1 to form a shallow box with three sides4 ,the illustration shows the construction quite plainly4 ,this device was used by a correspondent of ,camera ,craft as follows3 ,the table was fastened to the tripod and carefully leveled4 ,the camera is placed at one side1 bringing the back snugly into the corner on that side4 ,make the exposure1 change the film1 slide the camera over to the other side and make another exposure4 ,the table being #c in4 longer than the camera is wide1 the lens will be moved exactly #c in4 when the camera is moved over to the other side4 ,three inches is the separation of the lenses in stereoscopic cameras and the negatives made as above will be the same4 ,illustration3 ,table on ,tripod for ,camera ,as the negatives must be sized1 it is necessary to use films4 ,a camera using films #c-a_/b by #c-a_/b in4 will make negatives that can be trimmed #a_/d in4 on each side to make prints #c by #c-a_/d in4 ,each two negatives making a pair are fastened together1 properly transposed1 by folding a narrow strip of black paper like a long1 ,v-shaped trough1 pasting it1 and putting one on the bottom of the two negatives1 as they lie side by side1 and one at the top2 saddle fashion4 ,this can be done still easier by using strips of passe-partout binding1 or strips used for binding lantern slides4 ,if so desired1 the use of black paper can be carried farther by cutting the top strip of binding paper in such a way that it gives the round corners to the top of the prints4 ,a narrow strip through the center and a binding of black paper along the two end edges make a mask unnecessary in printing4 ,how to ,make a ,paper ,drinking ,cup ,every person should understand the simple method of making a paper drinking cup4 ,it may be necessary at times to make quick use of medicine and with no cup or spoon convenient1 the pyramid-shaped cup shown in the sketch is a useful emergency utensil4 ,illustration3 ,folds in the ,paper 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e7 ,the paper cup is made as follows3 ,cut the paper into a square and crease it on the dotted lines1 ,a ,g1 ,f ,b1 and ,c ,d ,e1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,fold the paper in half through the line ,c ,d ,e to form a rectangle1 ,fig4 #b4 ,fold points ,c and ,e inward until they meet inside the triangle to form the shape shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,this makes four distinct corners1 ,f1 ,g1 ,a and ,b4 ,fold the paper over on the dotted line and bring the points ,a and ,b together as in ,fig4 #d4 ,the extreme edges meet in the central line indicated4 ,reverse the paper and fold the points ,g and ,f in like manner4 ,turn the points ,a ,b and ,f ,g inward and fold on the dotted line1 and you will have a perfect pyramid-shaped cup as shown in ,fig4 #e4--;,contributed by ,miss ,margaret ,s4 ,humphreville1 ,mt4 ,pleasant1 ,o4 ,a ,hand ,corn ,sheller ,a very handy device for shelling corn1 and especially popcorn1 can be made of a #a-;in4 board on which is fastened a piece of metal lath4 ,the edges of the metal lath are bound with a strip of wood nailed to the board4--,contributed by ,ulysses ,flacy1 ,long ,beach1 ,california4 ,illustration3 ,metal ,lath on a ,board ,a ,shaft ,coupling ,in connecting a small #a_/h-;hp4 motor to a small air pump where both shafts were #c_/h in4 in diameter1 ,i quickly made a coupling that would save the wear on the machines1 as follows4 ,the coupling was made of a piece of #c_/d-;in4 brass rod with a #c_/h-;in4 hole drilled through its center4 ,one end of the hole was enlarged to #g-af in4 for about #g_/h in4 ,the end of the coupling having the small hole was slipped on the pump shaft and fastened with two setscrews4 ,the other end was drilled to take a pin loosely1 the pin fitting tightly in a hole drilled in the motor shaft4 ,the pin was bent at one end so as to keep it from falling out and the other end fitted with two nuts4 ,the motor shaft being a little loose in the coupling1 gave it a chance to work free without binding4--,contributed by ,leo ,j4 ,werner1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,illustration3 ,coupling on the ,shafts ,reading the ,date of a ,worn ,coin ,the date and denomination of a coin worn smooth can be determined in the following manner3 ,take an ordinary coal shovel1 or a piece of sheet metal1 and place it in a hot fire4 ,allow it to become red hot1 then remove1 and place the coin on the hot surface of the metal4 ,any figures or letters can be readily seen when heated in this manner4 ,this test seldom fails even when the inscriptions have been worn so smooth that they are invisible to the naked eye4 ,making a ,knife an ,easy ,opener ,the large blade of my knife being so hard to open placed me in constant risk of breaking my thumbnail4 ,to overcome this difficulty1 ,i ground a notch in the handle as shown in the sketch4 ,after smoothing it up with a round file and fine sandpaper1 ,i had just as good a job as if the knife had been made that way1 and it is very easy to open it1 as it can be done with the thumb and forefinger4 ,anyone can improve his knife in this way1 but be careful not to cut the notch back of the point of the small blade4--,contributed by ,c4 ,m4 ,mahood1 ,warren1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,notch in the ,handle ,construction of a ,small ,bell-,ringing ,transformer ,by ,a4 ,e4 ,andrews ,part ,i--,fundamental ,principles ,the transformer in its simplest form consists of two separate and electrically independent coils of wire1 usually wound upon an iron core4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a--,two ,coils on an ,iron ,ring ,figure #a shows two coils1 ,p and ,s1 placed upon an iron ring1 ,r4 ,one of these coils is connected to some source of energy1 such as an alternating-current generator1 or an alternating-current lighting circuit1 receiving its energy therefrom4 ,the other coil is connected to a load to which it delivers alternating current4 ,the coil of the transformer that is connected to the source of energy is called the primary coil1 and the one that is connected to the load1 the secondary coil4 ,the electrical pressure 7voltage7 at which current is supplied by the secondary bears a definite relation to the electrical pressure at which current is supplied to the primary4 ,this relation1 as will be explained later1 is practically the same as the relation between the number of turns in the secondary and primary coils4 ,if there are a smaller number of turns in the secondary coil than there are in the primary1 the secondary voltage is less than the primary1 and the transformer is called a step-down transformer4 ,if1 on the other hand1 there are a larger number of secondary turns than of primary1 the secondary voltage is greater than the primary voltage1 and the transformer is called a step-up transformer4 ,the transfer of electrical energy from the primary coil to the secondary coil of a transformer is based upon the fundamental principles of electromagnetism and electromagnetic induction1 and it will be necessary to investigate these principles before we can understand the operation of the transformer4 ,a magnet is a body1 which1 when freely suspended1 assumes approximately a north and south position4 ,the end of the magnet that points north is called the north pole1 while the end that points south is called the south pole4 ,the region surrounding a magnet is called a magnetic field4 ,in this field the magnetism is supposed to flow along a large number of imaginary lines1 called lines of force1 and these lines are all supposed to emanate from the north pole of the magnet1 pass through the medium surrounding the magnet and enter the south pole4 ,the magnetic field surrounding a bar magnet is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the strength of any magnetic field depends upon the number of these lines of force per unit area 7square centimeter71 the area being taken perpendicular to the direction of the lines4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b--,magnetic ,field ,in #ahab1 ,oersted discovered that a compass needle1 which is nothing but a permanent magnet freely suspended or supported1 when placed near a conductor in which there was a direct current1 was acted upon by a force that tended to bring the needle into a position at right angles to the conductor4 ,this simple experiment proved to ,oersted that there was a magnetic field produced by the current in the conductor4 ,he also found that there was a definite relation between the direction of the current in the conductor1 and the direction in which the north pole of the compass needle pointed4 ,if the compass needle is allowed to come to rest in the earth's magnetic field1 and a conductor is placed above it1 the conductor being parallel to the needle1 and a current then sent through the conductor1 the needle will be deflected from its position of rest4 ,reversing the current in the conductor1 reverses the direction in which the needle is deflected4 ,if the needle be allowed to come to rest while there is a current in the conductor1 and this current is then increased1 it will be found that the deflection of the needle will be increased1 but not in direct proportion to the increase in the current4 ,hence the strength of this magnetic field surrounding the conductor depends upon the value of the current in the conductor1 and the direction of the field depends upon the direction of the current4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #c--,magnetic ,field around ,conductor ,if a conductor be passed through a piece of cardboard1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 and a current sent through it in the direction indicated by the arrow ,a1 a compass needle1 moved about the conductor in the path indicated by the dotted line1 will always assume such a position that the north pole points around the conductor in a clockwise direction as you look down on the cardboard4 ,if the current be reversed1 the direction assumed by the compass needle will be reversed4 ,looking along a conductor in the direction of the current1 the magnetic field will consist of magnetic lines encircling the conductor4 ,these lines will be concentric circles1 as a general rule1 except when they are distorted by the presence of other magnets or magnetic materials1 and their direction will be clockwise4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d--,magnetic ,field ,surrounding a ,conductor ,illustration3 ,fig4 #e--,magnetic ,field about a ,coil ,illustration3 ,fig4 #f--;,a ,coil about a ,magnetic ,circuit through ,iron and ,air ,the strength of the magnetic field at any point near this conductor will depend upon the value of the current in the conductor1 and the distance the point is from the conductor4 ,the magnetic field surrounding a conductor is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the plus sign indicates that the direction of the current is from you4 ,the strength of a magnetic field due to a current in a conductor can be greatly increased by forming a coil of the conductor4 ,each turn of the coil then produces a certain number of lines1 and the greater part of these lines pass through the center of the coil1 as shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the field strength inside such a coil is dependent upon the number of turns in the coil1 and the value of the current in these turns4 ,increasing the number of turns in the coil increases the number of magnetic lines passing through the center of the coil1 as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,if the current be decreased in value1 the field strength is decreased1 and if the current be reversed in direction1 the magnetic field is reversed in direction4 ,the number of magnetic lines passing through the solenoid depends also upon the kind of material composing the core of the solenoid1 in addition to the number of turns and the value of the current in these turns4 ,the number of lines per unit area inside a solenoid with an air core can be multiplied several times by introducing a soft-iron core4 ,if this core be extended as shown in ,fig4 #g1 the magnetic circuit 7the path through which the magnetic lines pass7 may be completed through it4 ,the larger part of the total number of lines will pass through the iron1 as it is a much better conductor of magnetism than air4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #g--;,a ,coil about a ,magnetic ,circuit through ,iron ,in #ahca1 ,michael ,faraday discovered that there was an electrical pressure induced in an electrical conductor when it was moved in a magnetic field so that it cut some of the lines forming the field4 ,if this conductor be made to form part of a closed electrical circuit1 there will be a current produced in the circuit as a result of the induceds electrical pressure4 ,the value of this induced electrical pressure depends upon the number of magnetic lines of force that the conductor cuts in one second4 ,if #ajj1jjj1jjj lines are cut in one second1 an electrical pressure of one volt is produced4 ,the direction of the induced pressure depends upon the direction of the movement of the conductor and the direction of the lines of force in the magnetic field2 reversing either the direction of the magnetic field or the motion of the conductor1 reverses the direction of the induced pressure4 ,if both the direction of the magnetic field1 and the direction of the motion of the conductor be reversed1 there is no change in the direction of the induced pressure1 for there is then no change in the relative directions of the two4 ,the same results can be obtained by moving the magnetic field with respect to the conductor in such a way that the lines of force of the field cut the conductor4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #h--,two ,coils about a ,magnetic ,circuit through ,iron ,if a permanent magnet be thrust into a coil of wire1 there will be an electrical pressure set up in the coil so long as the turns of wire forming the coil are cutting the lines of force that are produced by the magnet4 ,when the magnet is withdrawn1 the induced electrical pressure will be reversed in direction1 since the direction of cutting is reversed4 ,a magnetic field may be produced through a coil of wire by winding it on the magnetic circuit shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,now any change of current in the coil ,p will cause a change in the number of magnetic lines passing through ,s and hence there will be an induced electrical pressure set up in ,s so long as the number of lines passing through it is changing4 ,the pressure induced in each of the turns comprising the coil ,s depends upon the change in the number of magnetic lines through it4 ,let us now consider a condition of operation when there is no current in the secondary coil and the primary coil is connected to some source of electrical energy4 ,when this is the case the current in the primary coil is not determined by ,ohm's law1 which states that the current is equal to the electrical pressure divided by the resistance1 but is considerably less in value1 for the following reason4 ,the magnetic lines of force produced by the current in the primary induces an electrical pressure in the primary winding itself1 the direction of which is always opposite to the impressed pressure1 or the one producing the current4 ,as a result of this induced pressure being set up in the primary1 the effective pressure acting in the circuit is decreased4 ,at the same time there is an electrical pressure induced in the secondary winding in the same direction as that induced in the primary4 ,if the secondary circuit be connected to a load1 there will be a current in the secondary winding1 which will pass around the magnetic circuit in the opposite direction to the primary current1 and as a result will decrease the number of lines passing through the primary coil4 ,this will in turn decrease the electrical pressure induced in the primary coil1 and a larger current will exist in the primary winding than there was before any current was taken from the secondary coil4 ,the decrease in induced pressure is small1 but it is always ample to allow the required increase in primary current4 ,there is1 at the same time1 a small decrease in the secondary pressure4 ,when the transformer is operating on no load1 with no current in the secondary coil1 the induced pressure in the primary coil is practically equal to the impressed pressure and hence a very small current will be taken from the source of energy4 ,it is apparent now that if the primary and secondary coils have the same number of turns1 the induced electrical pressure in each of these coils will be the same1 assuming1 of course1 that all the magnetic lines that pass through the primary also pass through the secondary coil1 and vice versa1 or the secondary pressure is practically the same as the pressure impressed on the primary4 ,if the number of turns in the secondary coil is greater or less than the number of turns in the primary1 the magnetic lines will be cut a greater or less number of times by the secondary coil1 and hence the induced pressure will be greater or less1 depending upon the relation of the number of turns in the two coils4 ,spirit ,photographs ,print some photographs in the usual way on printing-out paper1 then fix them in a solution of #a oz4 hyposulphite of soda and #h oz4 of water1 and wash them thoroughly4 ,while the prints are still wet1 immerse them in a saturated solution of bichloride of mercury4 ,be very careful to wash the hands and trays after using the mercury solution1 as it is poisonous4 ,when the print is placed in the mercury solution1 the picture vanishes completely4 ,leave the prints in this bath just long enough for the image to disappear1 and then wash and dry them thoroughly4 ,soak some clean blotting paper in the hyposulphite-of-soda solution and allow it to dry4 ,you are now ready to perform the magic-photograph trick4 ,to cause the spirit photograph to appear1 cut a piece of blotting paper the same size as the prepared print and moisten it1 then hold the apparently blank piece of paper in contact with it4 ,the picture will come out clear and plain1 and if thoroughly washed out it will remain permanently4 99 99 99 99 99 ,saturate a small piece of cotton batting in glue and wrap it around a nail1 then place it in a hole previously made in a plaster wall4 ,when the glue dries1 the nail will remain permanently4 ,construction of a ,small ,bell-,ringing ,transformer ,by ,a4 ,e4 ,andrews ,part ,,ii--,construction ,transformers may be divided into two main groups1 the classification being made according to the relation between the magnetic circuit of the transformer and the primary and secondary windings4 ,when the two windings surround the magnetic circuit of a transformer1 as indicated in ,fig4 #i1 the transformer is said to be of core type4 ,if the magnetic circuit surrounds the windings1 as indicated in ,fig4 #aj1 the transformer is said to be of the shell type4 ,the following instructions are for a shell-type transformer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #i--;,core-,type ,transformer ,any mass of magnetic material1 such as a piece of soft iron1 when placed in a magnetic field that is produced by an alternating current1 will be rapidly magnetized and demagnetized1 the rapidity of the change depending upon the frequency of the current producing the field4 ,when a piece of iron is magnetized and demagnetized1 as just stated1 there will be a certain amount of heat generated in it and this heat represents energy that must come from the electrical circuit producing the magnetic field in which the iron is placed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aj--,shell-,type ,transformer ,the heat that is generated in the iron is due to two causes3 ,first1 the hysteresis loss which is due to a property of the iron that causes the magnetism in the iron to lag behind the magnetizing influence1 or the changes that are constantly taking place in the field strength due to the alternating current4 ,this loss cannot be entirely eliminated1 but it may be reduced to a very low value by using a soft grade of iron1 or one having what is called a low hysteretic constant4 ,second1 the eddy-current loss which is due to the circulation of currents through the mass of metal4 ,these currents are due to unequal electromotive forces set up in the different parts of the piece of metal when there is a change in the strength of the field in which the metal is placed4 ,this loss cannot be entirely eliminated1 but it can be greatly reduced by breaking the mass of metal up into parts and insulating these parts from each other1 which results in the paths in which the eddy currents originally circulated being destroyed to a certain extent4 ,the breaking up of the metal is usually made in such a way that the joints between the various parts are parallel to the direction of the magnetic field4 ,when the joints are made in this way1 they offer less opposition to the magnetizing force4 ,this is one of the principal reasons why induction-coil cores are made up of a bundle of wires instead of a solid piece4 ,these wires are annealed or softened to reduce the hysteresis loss that would occur4 ,the combined hysteresis and eddy-current losses1 which are spoken of as the iron losses1 will of course be very small in the transformer you are going to construct1 but the above discussion is given to show why the magnetic circuits of transformers are built up from sheets of soft iron1 called laminations4 ,the core is said to be laminated4 ,the dimensions of the complete magnetic circuit1 of the transformer you are going to construct1 are given in ,fig4 #aa4 ,the primary and secondary windings are both to be placed about the center portion ,c1 and it is apparent that the winding of these coils would be very tedious if the wire had to be passed back and forth through the openings ,a and ,b4 ,this procedure in winding can be prevented by first forming the part of the magnetic circuit upon which the windings are placed2 then wind on the coils and1 after they are completed1 finish building up the magnetic circuit with pieces cut to the proper size and shape4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aa--;,complete ,magnetic ,circuit ,procure a small quantity of soft1 thin sheet iron and cut out a sufficient number of rectangular pieces1 #c in4 by #d-a_/d in41 to make a pile #c_/d in4 in height when firmly pressed together4 ,now cut a rectangular notch in each of these pieces1 #b in4 wide and #c-e_/h in4 long4 ,the sides of this notch can be cut with a pair of tinner's shears1 and the end can be cut with a sharp cold-chisel4 ,be careful not to bend either piece any more than you can help4 ,the outside piece1 or the one in which the notch is cut1 should have dimensions corresponding to those given in ,fig4 #ab4 ,when all of these pieces have been cut1 as indicated above1 the rectangular pieces1 #b in4 by #c-e_/h in41 that were cut out to form the notch in the larger pieces1 should have two of their corners cut away1 so as to form pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #ac4 ,these last pieces are to form the core and part of the end of the transformer4 ,now make sure that all the edges of the pieces are perfectly smooth and that they are all of the same size2 then give each one a coat of very thin shellac4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ab--,outer ,portion of the ,magnetic ,circuit ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ac--;,inner ,portion of the ,magnetic ,circuit ,now cut from a piece of insulating fiber1 that is about #a_/af in4 thick1 two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #ad4 ,when these pieces are completed1 the core of the transformer can be assembled as follows3 ,place the ,t-shaped pieces1 whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #ac1 through the openings in the pieces of insulation1 alternate pieces being put through the openings from opposite sides4 ,the distance from outside to outside of the pieces of insulation should be exactly the same as the length of the vertical portion of the ,t-shaped pieces forming the core1 or #c in4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ad--;,insulating ,washer ,cut from some soft wood four pieces having cross sections whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #ae1 and of such a length that they will just slip down between the two pieces of insulation4 ,these pieces should now be placed on the four sides of the iron core and covered with several layers of heavy insulating cloth4 ,each layer of the cloth should be shellacked as it is put on1 which will increase the insulation and at the same time help in holding the wooden pieces in place4 ,you are now ready to start winding the transformer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ae--,wood ,filler ,the secondary1 which is the low-voltage side in this case1 as you are using the transformer to reduce or step down the voltage1 will have the smaller number of turns1 and larger wire should be used in winding it than in the primary1 as it will carry a larger current4 ,on account of the secondary being of larger wire1 it will be placed on the core first4 ,for this winding you will need a small quantity of ,no4 #bf ,b4 ,s4 gauge1 single cotton-covered wire4 ,drill a small hole through one of the insulating washers1 down close to the cloth covering the core1 being careful at the same time to keep the hole as far from the metal part of the core as possible4 ,pass the end of a short piece of ,no4 #ah or #bj ,b4 ,s4 gauge1 double cotton-covered wire through this opening and solder it to the end of the ,no4 #bf wire4 ,insulate the joint with a piece of paraffin paper or cloth1 and bind the piece of heavy wire to the core of the transformer with a piece of linen thread4 ,now wind the ,no4 #bf wire on the core as evenly as possible1 to within about #a_/h in4 of the end of the spool4 ,place over the first layer two layers of paraffin paper and wind on a second layer of wire4 ,three layers should give you the required number of turns in the secondary winding and a resistance of approximately #c-a_/b ohms4 ,the end of the secondary winding should be terminated in the same way as the winding was started4 ,outside of the completed secondary winding place at least six layers of paraffin paper1 or several layers of insulating cloth4 ,the paraffin paper used should be approximately five mills in thickness4 ,you can make your own paraffin paper by taking a good quality of writing paper about two mills thick and dipping it into some hot paraffin1 then hanging it up by one edge to drain4 ,the primary winding is to be made from ,no4 #cd ,b4 ,s4 gauge1 single silk-covered copper wire4 ,the inside end of this winding should be started in the same way as the secondary1 but at the end opposite to the one where the secondary terminated4 ,wind about #bdj turns on each layer and place one layer of paraffin paper between each layer of wire4 ,the primary winding should have at least #ab layers1 and the outside end should be terminated as the inside end4 ,outside of the completed windings1 place several layers of insulating cloth to serve as an insulation1 and at the same time provide a mechanical protection for the windings4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #af4--,upper ,clamping ,pieces ,the outside part of the magnetic circuit can now be put in place4 ,when the ,u-shaped pieces are all in place1 the magnetic circuit will have the form and dimensions shown in ,fig4 #aa4 ,a clamp should now be made for each end of the transformer1 to hold the pieces forming the magnetic circuit together1 and at the same time give an easy means of mounting the transformer4 ,cut from a piece of sheet iron1 about #a_/af in4 in thickness1 two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #af1 and two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,fig4 #ag4 ,drill the holes in these pieces as indicated1 and bend the larger ones into the form shown in ,fig4 #ah4 ,these pieces can now be clamped across the ends of the transformer with small bolts1 as shown in ,fig4 #ai4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ag--,lower ,clamping ,pieces and ,mounting ,supports ,a box should now be made from sheet iron to hold the transformer4 ,the box should be of such dimensions that it will be at least #a_/h in4 from the transformer at all points4 ,this box should be provided with a cover that can be easily removed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ah--,shape of ,support ,now mount the transformer in the box by means of small bolts1 that pass through the holes in the supports and holes in the bottom of the box4 ,two binding-posts can now be mounted on one end of the box1 and insulated from it1 to serve as terminals for the secondary winding4 ,two pieces of stranded ,no4 #ad ,b4 ,s4 gauge1 rubber-covered copper wire should now be soldered to the terminals of the primary circuit and passed out through insulating bushings mounted in holes cut in the end of the box opposite to the one upon which the binding-posts were mounted4 ,these heavy wires should be firmly fastened to the iron part of the transformer inside the box1 so that any outside strain placed upon them will not1 in time1 break them loose from the smaller wires4 ,be sure to insulate all joints and wires well inside the box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ai--,method of ,clamping ,transformer ,together ,a circuit can now be run from a #aaj-volt lighting or power circuit1 observing the same rules as though you were wiring for lights1 and connected to the heavy wires1 or primary circuit4 ,the binding-posts1 or secondary winding should be connected to the bell circuit and the transformer is complete and ready to operate4 ,you may have to change the adjustment of the bells1 but after a little adjustment they will operate quite satisfactorily4 ,mirror ,hinged to ,window ,casing ,illustration ,a shaving mirror is usually placed on a window sash to avoid shadows as much as possible4 ,this is very inconvenient and many times the mirror is broken by a fall4 ,a good way to avoid shadows and have the mirror handy is to hinge it to the window casing4 ,this can be done with screweyes1 ,a1 and screwhooks1 ,b4 ,the screweyes are turned into the frame of the mirror and the screwhooks into the window casing4 ,two screwhooks can also be turned into the casing on the opposite side of the window1 if desired1 so that the mirror can be used on either side4--,contributed by ,james ,d4 ,mc,kenna1 ,new ,britain1 ,conn4 ,a ,cleaning ,bath for ,silverware ,a good way to clean silverware of all coloring by eggs or other substances is to place the silver articles in a kettle of boiling water containing a few pieces of zinc4 ,an electrolytic action is produced by the zinc1 water and silver which decomposes the sulphides on the silver and leaves it well cleaned4 ,no silver is taken away by this method4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,to ,prevent ,poultry ,water from ,freezing ,the method shown in the sketch is used by me in cold weather to keep the drinking water for the poultry from freezing4 ,the device consists of a part of a barrel inverted and set over the fountain1 and a tubular lantern4 ,a small opening is cut in one side of the barrel through which the fowl can reach the water4--,contributed by ,p4 ,c4 ,fish1 ,kansas ,city1 ,mo4 ,illustration3 ,lantern and ,fountain in ,half ,barrel ,how to ,make a ,letter ,scale ,illustration ,a reliable letter scale that can be easily made is shown in the sketch4 ,it consists of a wide-neck bottle filled with water into which the weighing device is inserted4 ,this latter part is made of a light piece of wood weighted on the lower end1 to keep it in a stable1 upright position1 and a piece of cardboard is tacked to the other4 ,the wood is placed in the water1 and known weights are used on the cardboard while calibrating4 ,the first line is marked at the water level when there is no weight on the cardboard1 and then a known weight placed on the top and another mark made at the water level1 and so on1 until a sufficient number of #a_/b-oz4 and ounce-divisions have been marked4 ,the wood should be well coated with shellac varnish before it is placed in the water4--,contributed by ,francis ,chetlain1 ,chicago4 ,summer ,dish ,washing ,a labor-saving method in dish washing for a summer day is as follows3 ,construct a substantial wood frame and cover it with galvanized wire mesh4 ,attach legs and put it in a convenient place on the back porch4 ,wash the dishes on one end1 and wipe the silverware dry4 ,at the outer end spread a towel over the wire and place the dishes turned down upon it to dry1 and cover them with another towel4--,contributed by ,l4 ,alberta ,norrell1 ,tifton1 ,ga4 ,nozzle ,angle for ,lawn ,sprinkling ,illustration ,where there is no prop or water sprinkler at hand for tilting the nozzle of a hose1 start to tie a knot in the hose1 as shown in the sketch1 but do not draw it up tightly4 ,the hose nozzle can be tilted to any angle in this manner4--,contributed by ,s4 ,j4 ,eddy1 ,portland1 ,oregon4 ,simple ,methods of ,connecting ,call ,bells ,illustration3 ,wiring ,diagrams for a ,single ,bell 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the following diagrams will indicate a few of the various methods that may be employed in connecting up electric bells for different purposes1 ,a1 ,b and ,c representing the push buttons2 ,d1 the bells2 ,e1 the batteries1 and ,g1 the ground4 ,the simplest possible connection is shown in ,fig4 #a1 the bell ,d1 battery ,e1 and push button ,a1 are all connected in series4 ,the operation of the bell is independent of the order in which the bell1 battery1 and push button are placed1 so long as there is a complete circuit when the push button is pressed4 ,one of the wires in this circuit may be done away with by completing the circuit through the ground1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,connecting a bell as shown in this diagram often results in quite a saving of wire4 ,the proper connections for operating one bell from either of two push buttons1 ,a or ,b1 is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,two bells1 ,d1 operated from a single push button1 ,c1 are connected as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the two bells1 ,d1 are shown connected in parallel1 which requires more wire than if they were connected in series4 ,if they be connected in series1 one or the other should have its make-and-break contact closed4 ,the bell whose circuit remains unchanged will intercept the current for the other bell in series with it4 ,the operating of the bells is more satisfactory1 however1 when they are in parallel1 and each taking current from the battery independent of the other4 ,illustration3 ,wiring ,diagram for ,two or ,more ,bells 7,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f7 ,the diagram1 ,fig4 #e1 shows the proper connections for operating two bells from two independent push buttons1 each push button operating a particular bell4 ,any number of bells operated from any number of push buttons1 all of the bells being rung from any one of the push buttons1 are connected as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,such a circuit can be used as a fire alarm or time call in a factory1 the operation of the circuit being controlled from any one of a number of different points4 ,illustration3 ,wiring ,diagrams for ,return-,call ,bells 7,fig4 #g1 ,fig4 #h1 ,fig4 #i7 ,the proper connections for what is called a return-call circuit is shown in ,fig4 #g4 ,the circuit is so arranged that the bell at one end is controlled by the push button at the other end4 ,such a circuit can be used in transmitting signals in either direction4 ,a ground return-call circuit is shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,in the circuits shown in ,figs4 #g and #h1 only one battery is needed4 ,the connections of a two-wire metallic return-call circuit are shown in ,fig4 #i4 ,a special push button must be used in this circuit1 and in this case two batteries are used instead of one1 as in ,figs4 #g and #h4 ,this circuit may be changed to a ground return-call circuit by using the earth as a conductor instead of either wire4 ,there are1 of course1 numerous other methods that may be used in connecting call bells1 but the connections shown in the diagrams are perhaps the most common4 ,refrigerator for ,dry and ,warm ,climates ,set a bowl containing butter1 cream or fruit in a saucer and cover the bowl with a moistened napkin1 allowing the edges to hang in a larger saucer filled with water1 and place the whole in the air out of the sun's rays4 ,the article to be kept cool may also be placed in a pan with an earthenware crock turned over it and covered with a small towel or cloth1 the edges of which extend into another outer pan partly filled with water4 ,the method can be applied on a larger scale by using a shallow galvanized pan which will contain many articles and more water4 ,this manner of cooling is especially adapted to camping parties and will prevent sloppy butter1 sour milk and spoiling fruit4 ,the articles are also kept free from ants and flies4--,contributed by ,c4 ,b4 ,hosford1 ,swansea1 ,ariz4 ,pencil-,sharpening ,guide ,illustration ,the sketch shows how a guide for making a true point on a lead pencil may be made of a block of wood4 ,the hole1 which should be large enough to allow the pencil to be turned easily1 is bored at the proper angle to form the desired point on the pencil4 ,the long side of the block serves as a guide for the knife blade1 while the projection at the bottom acts as a stop4 ,the guide insures an even point and is easily manipulated4 ,it is held in the palm of the left hand and the pencil is turned with the thumb and forefinger1 while the knife is held against the face of the block1 cutting edge downward1 and worked up and down with the right hand4 ,homemade ,hinges ,illustration ,when making a chicken house recently ,i had forgotten to procure hinges4 ,when searching the junk box ,i found some little metal brackets such as used for holding spring roller shades4 ,attaching these as shown1 ,i made a good substitute hinge4 ,a pair of the brackets having no slots were selected4 ,a #b-a_/b-;in4 wire nail with a washer was placed in the hole and driven into the top of the door1 #a in1 from its back edge4 ,the other bracket was placed on the bottom of the door in a similar manner4 ,the door was placed in an open position and the prongs of the brackets were nailed to the door post4 ,the bottom bracket may also be nailed to the floor and the top one to the lintel4--,contributed by ,robert ,smith1 ,e4 ,burnaby1 ,b4 ,c4 ,skimmer for ,bottled ,milk ,the cream that rises on the milk in an ordinary milk bottle cannot be removed easily4 ,where a small family desires to use the cream for coffee1 the skimmer shown in the sketch is very handy4 ,illustration ,the cone is made of metal--tin1 brass or copper--which can be nickelplated1 the seam being soldered4 ,the cone is #b in4 deep with a diameter at the top of #a-c_/h in4 ,a handle can be made of a discarded sugar or teaspoon1 which is soldered to the cone4 ,insert the cone in the bottle far enough for the cream to flow into it and then withdraw4 ,cream will gather about #c in4 deep on rich milk4 ,the milk can be used for cooking4 ,a piece of wire can be used for a handle instead of the spoon4--,contributed by ,victor ,labadie1 ,dallas1 ,texas4 ,how to ,preserve ,putty ,having some putty left over after a job of glazing and wishing to keep it without its becoming dried up1 ,i tried wrapping it in paraffin paper such as used to wrap butter4 ,i found this method to be a decided success1 the oil being prevented from drying out4--,contributed by ,levi ,r4 ,markwood1 ,fairview1 ,pa4 ,illustration ,how to ,build a ,simple ,electric ,motor ,by ,a4 ,g4 ,mc,clure ,an exceedingly simple and inexpensive motor that may be used in operating small toys can be constructed as follows3 ,first procure a good permanent magnet1 about #e in4 long and about #a-a_/b in4 between the inside edges at the open end4 ,this magnet should be at least #a_/b in4 thick1 and if it cannot be had in one piece1 two or more may be placed side by side1 like poles being placed together4 ,the writer was unable to procure ready-made magnets1 so one was formed and magnetized4 ,obtain a piece of tungsten or some other good-grade steel1 #a_/b in4 by #a_/b in41 and about #aa in4 long4 ,bend this piece into the form of a ,u1 with the inner edges #a-c_/d in4 apart4 ,square off both ends and drill two small holes in the outside surface of each end1 at ,,aa1 about #c_/h in4 from the end4 ,tap these holes for small machine screws4 ,drill the hole ,b with a small drill1 about #a_/af in41 in the center of the lower portion of the ,u and ream it out4 ,the piece should now be clamped with a good pair of blacksmith's tongs1--a block of iron being placed between the ends to keep the pressure of the tongs from drawing them together--heated to a cherry red and then plunged into a bath of oil4 ,it can then be magnetized by placing it in contact with a permanent magnet4 ,illustration3 ,detail of ,armature ,laminations1 and ,completed ,parts ,assembled1 but without ,armature ,windings ,next obtain a piece of #a_/h-;in4 brass1 about #a_/b in4 wide and #e-a_/b in4 long4 ,drill two holes in each end of the piece to match those drilled in the ends of the magnet1 also one in the center1 and tap it for a #a_/h-;in4 machine screw4 ,now bend this piece into the form shown4 ,provide a machine screw1 ,s1 for the hole ,c and drill a small tapered hole in the end of the screw4 ,obtain a small quantity of soft sheet iron and cut a sufficient number of pieces similar to that shown at ,d to make a pile #a_/b in high4 ,cut two pieces of the same size from some thin sheet brass4 ,now place all of these pieces in a pile1 the brass pieces being on the outside1 and clamp them securely1 then drill the two small holes1 ,e and ,f4 ,place two small copper rivets in these holes and rivet the heads down before removing the clamp4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole1 ,g1 through this piece1 the armature1 for the shaft to pass through4 ,procure a piece of #a_/h-;in4 steel rod1 about #f in4 long4 ,sharpen one end so that it will enter the hole ,b1 then cut the other end off and sharpen it so that it will enter the opening made in the end of the screw ,s4 ,the armature may now be soldered to this shaft1 its left-hand surface being flush with the ends of the magnet4 ,a small commutator1 ,h1 should now be made as follows3 ,obtain a piece of thin brass tubing about #e_/h in4 in diameter4 ,turn down a piece of hard rubber so that the tube will fit tightly on it4 ,drill a hole in this piece of rubber of such a size that it will have to be forced on the steel shaft4 ,saw two longitudinal slots in the brass tube diametrically opposite each other and then bind these two pieces in place on the piece of rubber with some heavy linen thread wrapped around each end4 ,the armature is now ready to wind4 ,get a small quantity of ,no4 #bb gauge cotton-covered wire1 solder one end to one of the segments of the commutator1 then wind one end of the armature full and cross over and wind the other end full1 soldering the end of the wire to the second commutator segment4 ,make sure to wind both ends of the armature in the same direction so the current in both parts of the winding produces magnetizing effects in the same direction4 ,insulate the winding from the core and the different layers from each other with a good quality of thin writing paper4 ,two small brushes should now be made from some thin spring brass and mounted on the brass piece as shown4 ,these brushes should be insulated from the piece of brass and two small binding posts should be provided for making connections to them4 ,the position of the commutator and brushes should be such that the brushes move from one segment to the other when the ends of the armature are directly in line with the ends of the permanent magnet4 ,a small pulley should be mounted upon the shaft to be used in transmitting the power4 ,the whole device may be mounted in a horizontal position on a wooden base as shown1 and the motor is complete4 ,how to ,make a ,humidity ,indicator ,a simple weather indicator that may be used in determining the condition of the atmosphere may be made as follows3 ,dress a small figure1 in the form of a doll1 with a piece of cloth1 previously dipped in the following solution3 ,chloride of cobalt1 #cj parts by weight2 sodium chloride1 #ae parts2 gum arabic1 #g-a_/b parts2 calcium chloride1 #d-a_/b parts1 and water1 #djj parts4 ,this cloth will change color as the amount of moisture in the atmosphere changes1 the change being due to the cobalt salt1 which1 in dry air1 is lavender blue4 ,as the moisture in the atmosphere increases1 the color changes first to bluish red1 then light red and finally pink1 according to the amount of moisture4 ,with a decrease in moisture1 the colors change in the reverse order to that given above1 and the blue color returns when the air becomes dry4 ,the ,q ,trick ,lay out the form of the capital letter ,q with coins on a table and ask someone in the audience to select a number and then ask that person to count up from one until the number is reached1 beginning at ,a and stopping on the circle1 for instance at ,b1 then counting back again beginning with one1 but1 instead of counting on the tail1 pass it and go around the circle1 say1 to ,c4 ,the performer gives these instructions to the person doing the counting4 ,the one selecting the number must not tell the performer what the number is1 and the latter is to leave the room while the counting proceeds4 ,the performer1 before leaving the room1 is to tell which coin will be the last one counted4 ,illustration ,take1 for example1 the number #g4 ,counting from ,a to ,b there are just #g coins and counting back the last number or #g will be at ,c4 ,try #i for the number and the last one counted will also be ,c4 ,the number of coins in the tail represents the number of coins in the circle from the intersection of the tail and circle to the last number counted4 ,for instance1 the sketch shows #d coins in the tail1 therefore the last coin counted in the circle will be at ,c or the fourth coin from the intersection of the tail and circle4 ,by slipping another coin in the tail the location of the last coin counted is changed1 thereby eliminating any chance of exposing the trick by locating the same coin in the circle every time4 ,this can be done secretly without being noticed4 ,to ,keep ,ants ,away ,from ,food ,suspend a shelf1 breadbox or rack with wire around which is tied a piece of cotton cloth1 saturated with a mineral oil4 ,the ants will not cross the oil-soaked cloth4 ,some strong wire hooks attached to the rack or shelf answer well to hang small articles on1 such as bacon1 bags of sugar1 syrup cans1 etc4--,contributed by ,c4 ,b4 ,hosford1 ,swansea1 ,ariz4 ,vaulting-,pole ,holder ,an adjusting device for a vaulting pole that can be easily fixed at any point on a round pole by using a wedge and ring1 is shown in the sketch4 ,the wedge carries a pin on which to place the cross pole4 ,the manner of using this device as well as its construction is clearly indicated4--,contributed by ,sterling ,r4 ,speirs1 ,st4 ,louis1 ,mo4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ring on the ,upright1 ,held in ,position by the ,wedge1 ,which in ,turn ,carries the ,pole on the ,pin ,flying ,model ,aeroplane for a ,display ,a novelty for a window display is made of a model aeroplane flying by its own power4 ,to control the direction and make the model fly in a circle it is fastened to a long stick or beam which is pivoted in the center4 ,the one shown was pivoted to a roller-skate wheel which in turn was fastened to a metal standard4 ,the beam was attached to the skate wheel with two small bolts which were insulated and carried two brushes as commutator contacts4 ,illustration3 ,detail of ,parts ,showing ,wire ,connections and ,model in ,flight around the ,central ,axis ,the commutator rings were made of heavy brass strips1 fastened to a round piece of wood which was attached to the metal standard4 ,the wires from the current supply were connected to the commutator rings4 ,from the brushes connecting wires were carried along the beam to the aeroplane motor which was a small battery motor with propeller4 ,the opposite end of the beam was weighted to balance it4 ,the first sketch shows the parts and the manner of making the connections4 ,the aeroplane is driven in a circular path by its own power in a realistic manner4 ,an ,electric ,time ,light ,although the modern alarm clock is a wonderfully effective piece of mechanism1 it is1 to say the least1 very abrupt in its manner4 ,it seldom confines its efforts to the chamber of its owner1 but spreads its disturbance all over the building4 ,it is very easy for a person to arise early in the summer and no greater difficulty should be experienced in winter1 if the bedroom is brightly lighted at the proper hour4 ,to do this simply and automatically became the problem4 ,illustration ,the first thought was to obtain one of those clock-actuated electric-light switches1 such as the stores use1 but this would not do1 because it meant some unsightly wiring around the room4 ,it was then remembered how1 in the course of some experiments1 an ordinary incandescent light was operated through a piece of ,no4 #cf gauge wire without any sign of heating4 ,if1 then1 a wire only #a_/bjj in4 in diameter were of ample carrying capacity1 surely a dollar watch would be sufficient to make the connection4 ,such being the case1 the whole mechanism could readily be attached to the drop cord of a lamp directly above the socket1 thus obviating any additional wiring4 ,this all proved to be true1 and the whole was made and attached in the course of a couple of hours4 ,while one might feel enthusiastic about this small and easily contrived affair1 it is scarcely to be presumed that it would operate so effectively on one who had spent the larger part of the night tripping the light fantastic1 or in undue conviviality4 ,an ordinary #af-;cp4 globe has thus far operated perfectly1 and a #dj-watt tungsten lamp would1 if not too far away1 surely awaken the hardest sleeper of sober habits4 ,the base of the mechanism is a small piece of #a_/d-;in4 hard wood1 upon which is fastened a small brass bracket1 ,a1 bent so as to hold the watch from slipping down4 ,a small clip1 ,b1 was then arranged so as to grip the neck of the watch after its lower edge had been placed against ,a1 and a small brad at either side prevented lateral movement4 ,in this way the watch was held firmly1 yet in a manner that would permit its being taken out instantly when necessary4 ,the glass and minute hand were removed4 ,the brass bolt from an exhausted dry cell was placed at ,c1 so as to clamp a small copper washer to which was soldered a narrow strip of copper1 ,d1 about #a_/af in4 wide and cut from a leaf of an old dynamo brush4 ,this strip is arranged so as to wipe the hour hand as it travels past1 but being so thin1 it has no appreciable effect on the time keeping4 ,as illustrated1 the device is set for six o'clock1 but by loosening the nut ,c an hour's adjustment either way may be had4 ,it is a very simple matter1 however1 to arrange the device so it will operate at any hour4 ,in connecting up1 one end of the drop cord is removed from the socket and attached to ,a1 which throws the current through the watch1 thence along the hand and down ,d to ,c1 from where it is carried by a short piece of wire to the socket again4 ,as there are so many circuits through the watch1 the small current required for one light does not affect it in any way4 ,thus far1 no trouble has been experienced in making this delicate connection with #aaj volts1 but if any should develop1 the contacts may be tipped with the small pieces of platinum taken from a burned-out globe4 99 99 99 99 99 ,the meat of a white ,english walnut may be easily removed by heating the nut in an oven or on top of a stove1 then using a knife to pry the shell open4 ,illustration ,a ,small ,shocking ,machine ,illustration3 ,the ,shocking ,coil as ,it is ,used for ,amusement1 or in the ,manner a ,current is ,given a ,patient ,an amusing as well as instructive shocking machine1 usually called a medical coil1 can be easily constructed from a discarded buzzer or electric bell1 four binding posts1 some pieces of insulated wire1 two carbon rods1 and a rheostat4 ,illustration3 ,the ,base upon ,which the ,buzzer and ,rheostat are ,fastened1 and the ,electrical ,connections 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 ,the ,rheostat ,that is ,used to ,regulate the ,flow of ,current in the ,carbon ,hand ,pieces 7,fig4 #c7 ,a base for attaching the parts is made of a piece of poplar1 #aj in4 long1 #e in4 wide1 and #a_/b in4 thick1 which can be finished as desired1 but a good method is to shape the edge like molding and give it a mahogany stain1 and when dry apply a coat of white shellac1 which should be allowed to dry a day1 whereupon the surface is rubbed with prepared wax4 ,when the base is ready1 mount the buzzer at one end4 ,this can be easily done by making an ,l-shaped piece of metal1 ,a1 which is fastened to the base with a screw1 and to the yoke of the magnet coil with a small bolt4 ,if the armature and its connections are also used from the buzzer1 the height of the coils must be taken in consideration4 ,these parts are fastened in position as shown1 using an ,l-shaped piece of metal1 ,b1 for the spring end4 ,the screw holding the armature spring to the base1 as well as the vibrator screw1 should be of such a length that it will enter the base far enough to permit a connection for a wire in a countersunk hole bored in the base from the under side4 ,binding posts are placed in the corners of the base in holes countersunk from the under side for the screw heads4 ,the rheostat is of the miniature-battery type1 which has a round base and a coil of resistance wire with a lever passing over the coil4 ,such a rheostat can be purchased from an electrical store1 but if the person constructing the shocking machine desires to make one1 it is not difficult if a lathe is at hand4 ,to make the rheostat1 turn up a disk1 about #c in4 in diameter1 from a piece of hard wood1 such as oak1 maple1 or walnut1 and form a circular groove in the upper surface1 about #c_/h in4 inside of the circumference4 ,the groove is to admit a circular coil of resistance wire1 and in making it1 be sure to have it the proper size to take the coil snugly4 ,the coil can be of any size1 and to make it1 resistance wire is wound around a piece of wire used as a mandrel4 ,if the coil is #a_/d in41 or a trifle smaller1 in diameter1 it will make a good size4 ,be sure that the depth of the groove is such that it will allow a part of the coils of the resistance wire to project above the surface of the wood disk4 ,the coil of wire should be just long enough to fit in the groove and allow a #a-;in4 space between the ends1 one of which is anchored to the base1 at ,c1 the other being attached to the binding post ,d4 ,drill a hole through the center of the disk and fasten a lever1 taken from a switch1 or one made of a piece of sheet brass1 that will extend from the center to the outside of the disk1 or over the resistance-wire coil4 ,a small handle is attached to the outer end4 ,a connection is made from the center support of the lever to the binding post ,e4 ,the connections for the buzzer and rheostat are made on the under side of the base1 where grooves are cut to run the wires in1 so that they will be below the surface of the wood4 ,in the diagram1 the binding post ,f is connected to the binding post ,d of the rheostat1 which in turn is connected to the screw of the make-and-break point ,g4 ,the other binding post ,h is connected to the bracket ,b supporting the armature spring4 ,the binding post ,e of the rheostat is connected to the base binding post ,j4 ,the magnet coils are connected1 as shown1 from ,k to ,l1 and from ,m to ,b4 ,the two pieces of carbon1 which are used for the hand pieces1 are connected with silk-insulated wire4 ,these connections are made to the binding posts ,f and ,h4 ,the other two binding posts1 ,j and ,l1 are connected to a battery4 ,the carbons used may be purchased1 or taken from an old battery4 ,two or more dry cells are used for the current4 ,the rheostat controls the amount of current passing through the hand pieces4--,contributed by ,gilbert ,crossley1 ,erie1 ,pa4 ,secret ,compartment in ,ordinary ,table ,drawer ,it is frequently desired to have some handy place for storing valuables where there is but little chance of discovering them4 ,secret drawers in tables usually require special and expensive changes1 but with only a few simple changes on a regular drawer of any ordinary table1 a secret compartment can be made which is as secure as can ordinarily be figured on1 outside of a steel safe4 ,having chosen the desired table1 a partition should be placed across the entire back part of the drawer1 allowing for necessary space in the secret compartment4 ,this partition should resemble the real back of the drawer as closely as it is possible to make it4 ,the compartment must not be too wide1 for the resulting small width of the front part of the drawer might then arouse suspicion4 ,on the lower side of the secret compartment a strip of wood1 ,a1 should be attached with a screw1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 allowing sufficient looseness so the strip may be turned end for end when necessary4 ,with the strip set as shown1 it will strike the front side ,b of the table when the drawer is pulled out1 leaving the secret compartment still hidden4 ,in order to expose this1 it will be necessary to turn the strip1 as shown in ,fig4 #b1 when the drawer can be pulled out to its full length4 ,illustration3 ,two ,positions of the ,strip for ,holding1 or ,giving ,access to1 the ,secret ,part1 and a ,hinged ,strip 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,it being necessary that the strip ,a be as long as the secret compartment is wide1 to fully expose this1 there may be cases where the drawer is not wide enough to allow the strip ,a to turn around4 ,in that case the strip can be hinged to the back of the drawer as shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,when it is hanging down1 as shown by the dotted outline1 the drawer may be pulled out to its full extent4 ,when it is desired to lock the secret compartment1 the hinged strip must be swung up in position1 and fastened4 ,an ordinary thumbscrew or eye can be used which1 by a turn or two1 will either release it or fasten it in place4--,contributed by ,paul ,durst1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,inflating ,handballs ,when handballs become dead1 or no longer bounce freely1 they may frequently be restored by inflating them with air4 ,this can be done by means of a bulb attached to a hypodermic needle4 ,the needle must be inserted through the soft plug which every inflated ball has1 and which can be discovered by pressure4 ,after the ball is inflated and the needle extracted1 the soft rubber closes around the fine hole1 preventing the escape of the air4 ,if a leak is found1 which allows the air to escape too rapidly1 a repair can be made with a single-tube tire outfit4--,contributed by ,a4 ,b4 ,wegener1 ,camden4 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,garden-,bed ,scarecrow ,a very neat and successful scarecrow for garden beds can be made as follows3 ,a number of corks are procured1 and a feather is stuck in each end of them1 as shown4 ,these are tied to a string1 spacing them from #a to #b ft4 apart1 and the string is hung over the beds4 ,the slightest breeze will keep them fluttering1 and no bird will come to rest on the beds4--,contributed by ,m4 ,t4 ,canary1 ,chicago4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fluttering ,feathers ,attached to the ,string with ,corks ,scare the ,birds ,away ,measuring the ,length of ,wire ,wound on a ,spool ,when winding magnet spools on a lathe1 the exact amount of wire used can be easily determined by means of the device shown in the illustration4 ,the large reel from which the wire is obtained is conveniently placed on a loose mandrel1 or rod1 near the lathe1 and in line with the spool which is to be wound4 ,a grooved idler wheel1 the exact diameter of which is known1 is supported between the spool and wire reel so it may freely revolve2 the number of its revolutions should be obtained1 automatically1 by a revolution counter4 ,when using the device1 the wire from the reel is placed once around the idler to insure the necessary grip to prevent it from sliding2 then it is led to the spool4 ,the exact diameter of the idler being known and the number of revolutions indicated1 the true length of the wire wound on the spools can be easily determined by the following formula3 ,length of wire on spool in feet equals circumference of idler in feet times number of revolutions of idler4--,contributed by ,c4 ,swayne1 ,st4 ,louis1 ,mo4 ,illustration3 ,measuring the ,length of ,wire on a ,spool with the ,use of an ,idler and ,counter ,homemade ,lawn ,sprinkler ,with a short length of old hose1 a serviceable lawn sprinkler can be quickly and easily made4 ,one end is provided with a regular coupling for connecting it to the line of good hose4 ,the other end is turned up for several inches1 and securely wired to the main part1 thereby shutting off any flow through it4 ,several cuts are made into it1 about halfway across and #f in4 apart4 ,if the water is forced in1 the only means of escape will be through the slots1 which will produce fine sprays1 giving as good service as a manufactured sprinkler4--,contributed by ,a4 ,b4 ,shaw1 ,n4 ,dartmouth1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,slots ,cut in the ,hose will ,produce a ,very ,fine ,spray of ,water ,homemade ,toy ,bank ,the little bank illustrated is not exactly burglar-proof1 but once put together it cannot be opened except by the destruction of one of the units of which it is composed4 ,it requires but little skill to make1 and would be a good problem for manual training1 as it offers an excellent opportunity for teaching certain rudiments of woodworking by the application method4 ,illustration3 ,six ,pieces of ,wood as ,they are ,put ,together to ,form a ,toy ,bank ,in its construction1 six pieces of hard wood1 of the dimensions shown in the sketch1 are required4 ,white wood will do if there is no hard wood at hand4 ,the coin slot is #a_/h in4 wide by #a-a_/d in4 long1 and is cut in only one piece4 ,no difficulty will be experienced in putting the first five pieces together1 but the sixth1 or top1 piece1 shown in the sketch1 will not go in1 because the bottom edge of the raised side will strike the inside of the piece to the right4 ,by beveling this edge with a chisel from top to bottom between the dadoes1 or grooves1 it can be forced down quite a distance and sprung in place by placing a block of wood on the high side and striking it a sharp blow with a heavy hammer4--,contributed by ,j4 ,a4 ,shelly1 ,brooklyn1 ,new ,york4 ,an ,electric ,anemometer ,by ,wm4 ,h4 ,dettman ,the construction of this instrument is so simple that any amateur can make one and if accurate calibrations are desired1 these can be marked by comparison with a standard anemometer1 while both are placed in the wind4 ,the ,indicator ,the case of the indicator is built of thin wood--the material of an old cigar box will do--#i in4 long1 #f in4 wide and #a-a_/b in4 deep4 ,if cigar-box material is used1 it must first be soaked in warm water to remove the paper4 ,if a cover is to be used on the box1 a slot1 on an arc of a circle1 must be cut through it to show the scale beneath4 ,the arc is determined by the length of the needle from a center over the axis on which the needle swings4 ,when the box is completed1 smooth up the outside surface with fine sandpaper and give it a coat of stain4 ,the core of the magnet is made by winding several layers of bond paper around a pencil of sufficient size to make an inside diameter of slightly over #a_/d in41 and a tube #b in4 long4 ,each layer of the paper is glued to the preceding layer4 ,two flanges or disks are attached to the tube to form a spool for the wire4 ,the disks are cut from thin wood1 #a-a_/d in4 square1 and a hole bored through their centers so that each will fit on the tube tightly4 ,one of them is glued to one end of the tube and the other fastened at a point #a_/b in4 from the opposite end4 ,the space between the disks is filled with seven layers of ,no4 #bb gauge insulated magnet wire1 allowing sufficient ends of the wire to project for connections4 ,the finished coil is located in the box1 as shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 ,the ,indicator ,box with ,coil1 ,needle and ,scale1 as ,it is ,used in ,connection with the ,anemometer 7,fig4 #a7 ,the core for the coil is cut from a piece of #a_/d-;in4 iron rod1 #a-a_/d in4 long1 and a slot is cut in each end1 #a_/d in4 deep1 into which brass strips are inserted and soldered1 or otherwise fastened4 ,the strips of brass are #c_/af in4 wide1 one #a-a_/b in4 long and the other #c_/d in4 ,two #a_/af in4 holes are drilled in the end of the long piece1 and one #a_/af in4 hole in the end of the short piece4 ,the complete core with the brass ends is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,the ,metal ,core for the ,coil444 7,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 444and the ,bearing ,block for the ,axis of the ,needle 7,fig4 #c7 ,the needle ,b1 ,fig4 #a1 is made of a copper or brass wire1 about #f in4 long1 and is mounted on an axis at ,c4 ,the detail of the bearing for the axis is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the axis ,d is a piece of wood fitted in the ,u-shaped piece of brass and made to turn on brads as bearings1 the center being pierced to receive the end of the needle4 ,after locating the bearing for the axis ,c1 ,fig4 #a1 it is fastened in place so that the upper end or pointer of the needle will travel over the scale4 ,the needle is then attached to the bearing after having been passed through the inner hole of the longer brass strip of the core1 and the coil is fitted with the core in the manner shown at ,d4 ,a light brass coil spring is attached to each end of the core1 as shown at ,e and ,f1 the latter being held with a string1 ,g1 whose end is tied to a brad on the outside of the box1 for adjustment4 ,a better device could be substituted by attaching the end of the spring ,f to a nut and using a knurled-head bolt passed through the box side4 ,one of the wires from the coil is attached to a push button1 ,h1 to be used when a reading of the instrument is made4 ,the connections for the instrument consist of one binding post and a push button4 ,illustration3 ,the ,anemometer as ,it is ,mounted on a ,standard ,similar to a ,small ,windmill ,weather ,vane 7,fig4 #d7 ,the ,anemometer ,the anemometer resembles a miniature windmill and is mounted on top of a building or support where it is fully exposed to the air currents4 ,it differs from the windmill in that the revolving wheel is replaced by a cupped disk1 ,a1 ,fig4 #d1 fitted with a sliding metal shaft1 ,b1 which is supported on crosspieces1 ,,cc1 between the main frame pieces ,,dd4 ,the latter pieces carry a vane at the opposite end4 ,the frame pieces are #a_/b in4 thick1 #b-a_/d in4 wide and #cf in4 long1 and the crosspieces have the same width and thickness and are #d in4 long4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,a variable-resistance coil1 ,e1 is made as follows and fastened in the main frame4 ,the core of this coil is a piece of wood1 #b in4 square and #d in4 long1 and wound with ,no4 #ah gauge single-wound cotton-covered german-silver wire4 ,the winding should begin #a_/d in4 from one end of the core and finish #a_/d in4 from the other1 making the length of the coil #c-a_/b in4 ,the ends of the wire are secured by winding them around the heads of brads driven into the core4 ,a small portion of the insulation is removed from the wire on one side of the coil4 ,this may be done with a piece of emery cloth or sandpaper4 ,a sliding spring contact1 ,f1 is attached to the sliding shaft ,b1 the end of which is pressed firmly on the bared portion of the wire coil4 ,one end of a coil spring1 which is slipped on the shaft between the pieces ,,cc1 is attached to the end crosspiece1 and the other end is fastened to the sliding shaft so as to keep the shaft and disk out1 and the flange ,h against the second crosspiece1 when there is no air current applied to the disk ,a4 ,the insulation of the standard upon which the anemometer turns is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the standard ,j is made of a piece of #a_/b-;in4 pipe1 suitably and rigidly attached to the building or support1 and the upper end1 around which the anemometer revolves to keep in the direction of the air currents1 is fitted with a plug of wood to insulate the #a_/d-;in4 brass rod ,k4 ,a bearing and electric-wire connection plate1 ,l1 is made of brass1 #a_/h in4 thick1 #b in4 wide and #d in4 long4 ,the bearing and connection plate ,m are made in a similar manner4 ,the surface of the holes in these plates1 bearing against the pipe ,j and the brass rod ,k1 make the two connections for the wires from the variable-resistance coil ,e1 ,fig4 #d1 located on the main frame1 to the wire connections between the two instruments4 ,these wires should be weather-proof1 insulated1 attached as shown1 and running to and connecting the indicator with the anemometer at ,,nn1 ,fig4 #a4 ,two or more dry cells must be connected in the line1 and when a reading is desired1 the button ,h1 ,fig4 #a1 is pushed1 which causes the current to flow through the lines and draw the magnet core ,d in the coil1 in proportion to the magnetic force induced by the amount of current passing through the resistance in the coils on ,e1 ,fig4 #d1 from the contact into which the spring ,f is brought by the wind pressure on the disk ,a4 ,how to ,make ,stick ,shellac ,it is often desired to use shellac in solid or stick form1 and to get it into this shape by melting and molding requires considerable time4 ,a much quicker method is to place the shellac in a shallow box1 spread it out in a thin layer and play the flame from a ,bunsen burner upon it until the mass is melted and run together4 ,allow it to stand a few seconds1 then1 with moistened fingers1 fold it over and over and shape it with the fingers4 ,it is possible to make a stick #h or #aj in4 long and #e_/h in4 in diameter in about #e minutes4--,contributed by ,j4 ,h4 ,beeber1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,substitute for a ,hose ,reel ,not having the room to spare for the ordinary hose reel1 ,i used as a substitute a piece of wire bent into the shape of a letter ,s and with its aid coiled the hose in a manner to expel the water and leave it in shape for storing4 ,illustration3 ,a ,hook for ,coiling a ,hose ,instead of ,turning ,it on a ,reel ,the hook ,a is sprung around the hose about #e ft4 from the connection joint and remains there permanently4 ,the end of the hose with the connection ,c is then brought around in a circle and forced into the hook ,b4 ,this forms the start for the coil and the hose is easily rolled up to the nozzle1 the water being expelled during the operation4--,contributed by ,f4 ,h4 ,aldrich1 ,toledo1 ,ohio4 ,addressing a ,roll of ,papers ,when addressing rolled-up papers it is difficult to write on the curved surface4 ,the papers also have a tendency to roll away4 ,by placing the roll in the hollow on the front edge of a large book1 as shown in the sketch1 it will be found easy to write on the wrapper4--,contributed by ,w4 ,p4 ,shaw1 ,toronto1 ,canada4 ,illustration3 ,the ,roll of ,paper is ,placed in the ,curved ,edge of a ,book for ,addressing ,repairing the ,bruised ,sides of a ,motorboat ,when the sides of a boat become scored or bruised scrape the parts clean and fill the depressions with wood cement4 ,the wood cement or stick cement1 as it is called1 can be procured from a paint store4 ,heat the cement with a blowtorch and apply it to the bruised parts4 ,use a heated putty knife to smooth the cement and make the surface level4 ,after sandpapering the fills and applying a coat of paint the boat sides will look as good as new4 ,the cement will not chip or fall out4--,contributed by ,henry ,beck1 ,bronx1 ,new ,york4 ,how to ,make an ,electric ,lamp ,flasher ,procure two pieces of metal1 one of brass and the other of sheet iron1 #e in4 long1 #a_/b in4 wide1 and #a_/cb in41 or just a little more1 in thickness4 ,bend the brass strip into the form shown in ,fig4 #a1 then place the brass piece on top of the iron and drill the holes ,a and ,b indicated in ,fig4 #b4 ,after the brass piece has been bent1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 it will of course be shorter than the iron strip and the iron strip must be cut off1 or a brass strip a little longer than #e in4 can be secured and cut the same length as the iron strip after it is bent4 ,the holes ,a and ,b should be #c_/cb in4 in diameter4 ,the next thing to do will be to wind a heating coil about the brass strip4 ,wrap a very thin layer of sheet asbestos about the brass strip1 and wind on the strip #ah ft4 of ,no4 #cd gauge bare superior resistance wire4 ,use a thread about 4#jjf in4 in diameter to separate the various turns4 ,this thread can be removed after the winding is completed and the ends have been fastened4 ,rivet the iron and brass pieces together with a small brass rivet in the hole ,a1 ,fig4 #b4 ,after the two pieces are riveted together bend them into the form shown in ,fig4 #d and then drill the two #a_/h-;in4 holes ,c and ,d1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,tap the hole ,b1 ,fig4 #b1 to take a small machine screw4 ,illustration3 ,dimensions of the ,brass ,strip and ,mounting ,base1 ,showing the ,location of the ,holes and the ,shape of the ,brass ,strip to ,receive the ,coil of ,wire 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the base is constructed as follows3 ,procure a piece of slate1 #e-c_/h in4 long1 #a-a_/b in4 wide1 and #a_/b in4 in thickness4 ,drill the holes indicated in ,fig4 #c4 ,the four corner holes are for mounting the flasher in its containing case1 and should be about #a_/h in4 in diameter4 ,the holes ,e1 ,f1 ,g1 and ,h should be #a_/h in4 in diameter and countersunk with a #c_/h-;in4 square-ended drill1 on the under side1 to a depth of #c_/af or #a_/d in4 ,cut from some #a_/af-;in4 sheet brass a piece #a-c_/h in4 long1 and #a_/b in4 wide4 ,drill two #a_/h-;in4 holes in this piece1 #g_/h in4 apart and equally spaced from the ends4 ,procure four #a_/h-;in4 brass bolts1 two #a_/b in4 in length1 and two #a in4 in length4 ,secure four small washers and two additional nuts4 ,mount the combined iron and brass strip on the slate base1 using a long and short bolt as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,one terminal of the winding should be placed under the head of the bolt ,j4 ,place a washer1 ,k1 between the head of the bolt and the wire4 ,the brass strip ,l can now be mounted in a similar manner1 as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,place the other end of the winding under the head of the bolt ,m4 ,illustration3 ,the ,assembled ,parts ,showing the ,complete ,flasher and ,electric ,connections with ,adjusting ,screw 7,fig4 #d7 ,obtain a small screw1 ,n1 ,fig4 #d1 of such a length that its point will reach the brass strip ,l when the screw is placed in the hole ,b1 ,fig4 #b4 ,a lock nut1 ,o1 should be provided for this screw so that it will remain in adjustment4 ,the point of the screw and the point on the brass plate where the screw touches should be of platinum1 as the brass will not withstand the high temperature of the arc formed when the circuit is broken4 ,a metal box should now be provided to serve as a containing case and the flasher is complete4 ,this box should be of such design and construction that it will comply with the requirements of the electrical inspection department having jurisdiction over the locality where the flasher is to be used4 ,the flasher should be connected in series with the lamp1 the wires being fastened under the nuts on the bolts ,p and ,r1 ,fig4 #d1 and the screw ,n adjusted so that it lacks a small fraction of an inch of making contact with the brass plate when there is no current in the winding4 ,when the switch is turned on there will be a current through the lamp and winding in series4 ,the brass strip will be heated more than the iron and it will expand more1 thus forcing the point of the screw ,n down upon the brass plate1 which will result in the winding about the brass strip being shorted and the full voltage will be impressed upon the lamp1 and it will burn at normal candlepower4 ,when the coil is shorted there will of course be no current in its winding and the brass strip will cool down1 the screw ,n will finally be drawn away from contact with the brass plate1 and the winding again connected in series with the lamp4 ,the lamp will apparently go out when the winding is in series with it1 as the total resistance of the lamp and winding combined will not permit sufficient current to pass through the lamp to make its filament glow4 ,the time the lamp is on and off may be varied to a certain extent by adjusting the screw ,n4 ,timing ,photograph ,prints ,an amateur photographer insists that a timing clock in the darkroom is a needless luxury4 ,in order to time printing exposures1 which he does with a pendant tungsten light under a reflecting shade1 he simply fastens the electric-light cord so that the lamp and shade will act like a pendulum bob which beats the seconds4 ,of course he makes no effort to be exact1 but if the distance between the lamp and the point of suspension of the cord be about #ci or #dj in41 the beats will be very nearly seconds4 ,when the light is turned on1 it is started swinging1 and the operator can thus easily count seconds with sufficient accuracy1 and1 besides1 it readily furnishes a guide for duplicating printing results4 ,the same principle can be applied to camera exposures1 if so desired1 by the following plan4 ,select some suitable place on the under side of the tripod plate1 as1 for instance1 the screw head1 and fasten a small string1 having a weight attached to it about #ci in4 from the point of support4 ,like the swinging lamp1 this device too1 will beat seconds4 ,for convenience1 one of the tripod legs may be marked to indicate the length of string needed1 so that the operator at any time can quickly fasten a string1 measure off the right length on the tripod leg1 attach a bunch of keys1 a knife1 or any other convenient weight1 even a small stone1 and have a second-beating pendulum for time exposures4--,contributed by ,f4 ,b4 ,lambert1 ,chicago4 ,supports for ,camp-,fire ,utensils ,the sketch shows how to make a standard or support to hold cooking utensils over a camp fire4 ,the main part or stake is made of a piece of gas pipe1 on one end of which is turned an ordinary coupling1 ,fig4 #a4 ,this is used to furnish a strong head when the stake is driven into the ground4 ,the rings and supports for the utensils are made of heavy wire bent into the shape required to hold the respective vessels4 ,the sketch1 ,fig4 #b1 shows the manner of shaping the wires4 ,illustration3 ,a ,piece of ,gas ,pipe ,constitutes the ,standard with ,wires ,attached for ,holding the ,utensils 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a ,rotary ,tuning ,coil ,the rotary tuner shown in the sketch was designed by a correspondent of ,modern ,electrics4 ,the circle is cut from #c_/d-;in4 stock1 #a in4 wide and well covered with insulating material4 ,it is then wound with ,no4 #bd single cotton-covered copper wire so that the coils will lie flat4 ,all the arms are of #a_/d-;in4 square brass4 ,the supports are smaller in section4 ,sliders are mounted on the ends of the long arms and are kept in place by setscrews4 ,illustration3 ,tuning ,coil444 7,fig4 #a7 ,illustration3 444and ,wiring ,diagram 7,fig4 #b7 ,the insulation on the wire is removed with a small piece of sandpaper pasted on a block of wood4 ,this should be temporarily fastened to the revolving lever at the point where the contact is wanted1 then the lever is turned until the insulation is removed4 ,the wiring diagram shows the location of the tuning coil in the line4 ,preparing ,sheet ,music for ,turning ,each page on sheet music having three or more pages should be cut #a_/d in4 shorter than the preceding page1 as shown by the dotted lines in the sketch4 ,this will enable the player to quickly turn the pages one at a time4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,homewood1 ,waterloo1 ,ia4 ,illustration3 ,leaves ,cut for ,turning ,toy ,parachute ,cut-,away for ,kite ,lines ,an interesting pastime while flying kites is to attach large toy parachutes to the lines and have some device to drop them when they are at a great height4 ,in ,fig4 #a is shown how the parachute is dropped by the burning of a piece of punk4 ,another method is shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,it is only necessary to send a piece of paper or cardboard along the line and when it strikes the wire coil ,a 7,fig4 #b7 the part ,b slides out of the loops ,c1 the end ,d will then fall and disengage the loop ,g on the end of the parachute string4 ,the wires ,e and ,f are twisted around the kite string4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,de ,loof1 ,grand ,rapids1 ,michigan4 ,illustration3 ,two ,parachute ,drops 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,how to ,make an ,electric ,furnace ,illustration3 ,the ,furnace ,consists of a ,flowerpot in ,which a ,crucible is ,set1 and on ,either ,side the ,carbon ,holders are ,fastened to the ,base 7,fig4 #e7 ,a small electric furnace that will be very serviceable in a laboratory may be made as follows3 ,first procure a small clay flowerpot1 about #d in4 in diameter at the bottom1 and also a small clay crucible1 about #b in4 in diameter at the bottom and at least #a in4 less in height than the flowerpot1 and having as nearly as possible the same slope to its sides as the pot4 ,now obtain a small quantity of asbestos compound and pack it around the small crucible inside the flowerpot4 ,make sure the crucible is in the exact center of the flowerpot and that their tops are even with each other4 ,assuming that ordinary electric-light carbons are to be used1 which are about #a_/b in4 in diameter1 drill two #e_/h-;in4 holes1 exactly opposite each other1 through the walls of the flowerpot and asbestos compound so that they enter the crucible about #c_/d in4 above its bottom on the inside4 ,a suitable lid for the furnace may be made from #a_/d-;in4 sheet asbestos and should be large enough to cover the top of the flowerpot4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,base1 ,rod and ,handle for ,each ,carbon ,feed1 ,which is ,attached to the ,large ,base on ,one ,side of the ,furnace 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the feeds and supports for the carbon electrodes are constructed as follows3 ,procure two pieces of #a_/h-;in4 brass1 #a in4 wide and #i in4 long4 ,cut a #a_/h-;in4 groove lengthwise in the center of these pieces to within #a-a_/b in4 of each end1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,drill four #a_/h-;in4 holes1 ,,aa1 in each piece1 a #c_/h-;in4 hole1 ,b1 in one end and a #c_/af-;in4 hole1 ,c1 in the other end4 ,now bend the ends up at right angles to the remainder of the piece along the dotted lines shown at ,d and ,e4 ,next obtain two #c_/h-;in4 rods1 #aj-c_/af in4 long4 ,turn one end of each down to a #c_/af-;in4 diameter for a distance of #c_/h in4 ,from that point thread the same end of the rods for a distance of #f in4 ,drill a #a_/af-;in4 hole in each end of the rods a little less than #a_/d in4 from the ends4 ,the dimensions of the rods are given in ,fig4 #b4 ,two small rubber or wooden handles1 similar to the one shown in ,fig4 #c1 should now be made and fastened to the large ends of the rods by means of #a_/af-;in4 steel pins4 ,obtain two pieces of brass of approximately the following dimensions3 #a in4 by #a in4 by #c in4 ,drill four holes in each of these pieces as shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,the hole ,h should be just large enough to allow the carbon to enter1 or about #a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,the hole ,g should be tapped to take a #a_/d-;in4 machine screw1 the hole ,f should be threaded so that the threaded rods will enter1 and a small binding post should be mounted on a lug fastened in the hole ,j4 ,cut away one end of this piece as shown in ,fig4 #d until it is a little less than #a_/h in4 in thickness1 or so it will enter the grooves cut in the brass strips4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,the parts of the furnace are now ready to assemble1 which may be done as follows3 ,procure a piece of well seasoned board1 hard wood if possible1 about #a in4 thick1 #h in4 wide and perhaps #bj in4 long4 ,cover one side of this board and the edges with some #a_/h-;in4 sheet asbestos4 ,now place the flowerpot in the exact center and then mount the grooved brass strips one on either side of it with the longest dimension parallel to the longest dimension of the board and the inside end about #a in4 from the side of the pot4 ,the end with the #c_/af-;in4 holes should be next to the pot4 ,assemble the parts of the carbon feeds and then cut out some circular disks of asbestos to place under the flowerpot so as to raise it to such a position that the holes in its sides will be on a line with the carbon rods4 ,three long screws should now be placed in the board1 forming the base1 in such a position as to hold the flowerpot always in place4 ,this completes the furnace proper1 which is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the furnace can now be put into operation provided there is a suitable current rheostat to connect in series with the carbon arc to prevent an excessive current being taken from the line4 ,if such a rheostat is not available1 a serviceable one may be made as follows3 ,obtain two pieces of #a_/af-;in4 sheet iron1 #f by #f in41 that are to form the end plates4 ,cut off the corners of one piece so as to form an octagon and drill a number of #a_/h-;in4 and #a_/d-;in4 holes in it1 as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,bend the corners of the other piece down along the dotted lines marked ,l1 ,fig4 #g1 and then make a second bend in each corner along the dotted lines ,k1 so that the outermost portion of the corner is parallel to the main portion of the piece4 ,drill a number of #a_/h-;in4 holes in this piece as indicated4 ,a #c-;in4 opening should be cut in the center of this piece to give access to the interior of the completed rheostat4 ,now obtain eight #c_/h-;in4 iron rods1 #aj in4 long4 ,drill and tap each end of these rods to accommodate a #a_/h-;in4 machine screw4 ,wrap several layers of thin sheet asbestos around each rod and tie it in place with some thread4 ,these rods should now be fastened between the end plates by means of a number of iron machine screws4 ,mount four back-connected binding posts on the plate shown in ,fig4 #f1 making sure they are insulated from the plate by means of suitable bushings and washers4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,upper and ,lower ,end ,plates ,that are ,used in ,making a ,rheostat 7,fig4 #f1 ,fig4 #g7 ,procure a small quantity of ,no4 #ad gauge iron wire4 ,fasten one end of the wire under the head of the screw holding one of the binding posts in place and then wind it around the rods about #bj times1 making the distance between the turns equal to the diameter of the wire4 ,after winding on the #bj turns1 attach a short piece of wire to the main wire and fasten the free end of the short piece to one of the other binding posts4 ,wind on #bj more turns1 and make another connection to the third binding post1 then complete the winding and attach the end to the remaining binding post4 ,different amounts of this resistance can now be connected in series with the arc by changing the connections from one binding post to another4 ,the rheostat may be located on a bracket fastened to the wall1 but care must be taken not to place it in such a position that it will come into contact with inflammable material4 ,as an extra precaution1 the circuit should be properly fused4 ,cleaning ,brass ,articles ,embossed or undercut brass work may be easily cleaned by boiling the pieces in a strong solution of caustic soda or lye1 and then immersing them in a mixture of hydrochloric acid1 #f parts2 water1 #b parts1 and nitric acid1 #a part1 until they become covered with a dark deposit4 ,take them from the solution and remove the black substance with a fine scratch brush4 ,after cleaned in this manner1 rinse in hot water and dry in hot sawdust4 ,a fine orange-yellow tinge may be given to the brass by substituting an equivalent weight of powdered alum for the nitric acid in the solution4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,richard ,f4 ,pohle1 ,e4 ,lynn1 ,mass4 ,a ,whetting ,block ,a handy tool gauge for sharpening the various tools about the household is made of a block of wood with the sides of one end cut sloping in different degrees so that each will serve to secure the proper slant of the cutting edge on a certain tool4 ,the block of wood with the corners cut is shown in ,fig4 #a1 and the manner of whetting a chisel is shown in ,fig4 #b4--;,contributed by ,will ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,mont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sloping ,edges on the ,block of ,wood and the ,manner of ,whetting a ,chisel 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 99 99 99 99 99 ,a cardboard cut the same size as a page and fastened with paper clips in the center of a magazine will prevent the pages from folding over when the magazine is placed in a bookcase4 ,submarine ,photographs ,a photographer at a seashore resort1 wishing to increase his sales of souvenir postal cards1 rigged up a device for producing negatives to make submarine pictures4 ,the device consisted of an aquarium1 about #dj in4 long1 #ah in4 high and #f in4 wide4 ,the aquarium was designed to stand on edge or the narrow way1 and was equipped with rocks1 living sea moss1 kelp1 and some fish1 and the bottom was covered with sand and shells4 ,illustration3 ,the ,camera ,set in ,front of the ,aquarium ,ready to ,make a ,submarine ,picture ,a canvas was hung back of the aquarium and the camera set in front at such a distance as to make a negative of only the water and the prepared sea bottom4 ,very fine views that will give the appearance of being made at the bottom of the sea can be produced4 ,mending ,paper-,pulp ,utensils ,pails1 washtubs1 and other receptacles made of paper pulp1 when cut and worn1 may be easily mended with adhesive tape4 ,after this is applied to the place to be mended1 give the mended part a coating of paint1 and when the paint has dried1 the surface is given another coat to match the color of the article mended4 ,leaks may be entirely stopped in this way at a very reasonable cost4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,homemade ,mailing ,tube ,a photograph or manuscript may be sent through the mail unmounted without the danger of being broken by placing it in a tube made as follows3 ,for an #h by #aj-;in4 photograph procure a piece of cardboard #f by #aj in41 plain mounting board preferred1 and cut halfway through the card in three places as shown by the dotted lines in ,fig4 #a4 ,then fold it in a triangular shape as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,it is easy to make such a tube to fit any photograph or manuscript to be mailed4--,contributed by ,a4 ,h4 ,schaefer1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bends in the ,cardboard are ,made on ,lines ,equal ,distances ,apart to ,form a ,triangle 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,cutter for ,lace ,leather ,illustration ,lace leather may be easily cut with an ordinary pocket knife having a ,u-shaped block fitted on the edge of the blade4 ,the width of the opening should be exactly the same as the thickness of the leather and the width of the lace is determined by the distance between the blade and the depth of the notch4 ,several places can be provided for the blade to cut different widths of lacing4--,contributed by ,a4 ,k4 ,runkle1 ,kinsman1 ,o4 ,refinishing ,chairs ,when refinishing chairs1 a good way to get at the bottom part is to turn the chair upside down and place its seat on the seat of another chair4 ,the legs and rungs can thus be easily cleaned and varnished4--,contributed by ,a4 ,mandeville1 ,ware1 ,mass4 ,an ,electric ,gas ,lighter ,a very simple and inexpensive electric gas-lighting device is shown in the accompanying illustration4 ,the gas is ignited by means of an electric spark which is produced between the two parts ,a and ,b of an electric circuit4 ,this circuit is composed of a source of electrical energy1 such as a number of dry cells1 a kick coil1 the connecting leads1 and a special operating switch for opening and closing the circuit to produce the spark4 ,the circuit is normally open1 but as the lever controlling the gas valve is moved from one position to the other1 by pulling the chains1 the lever ,c is caused to move through a certain arc4 ,now1 as this lever ,c moves1 its upper end passes the projecting point ,b1 which is attached to the upper portion of the burner1 and the electric circuit will be completed and broken4 ,just as the point ,a leaves contact with the point ,b an arc will be produced4 ,this arc is greatly intensified by the kick coil1 which acts as a sort of reservoir in which energy is stored while the circuit is closed1 and upon opening the circuit this stored energy is given out by the kick coil and increases the size of the arc4 ,illustration3 ,the ,igniting ,points as ,they are ,attached to a ,gas ,burner to ,work ,automatically ,the points ,a and ,b should both be made of platinum1 as other metals will not withstand the extremely high temperature of the arc4 ,pieces of platinum that will serve very nicely for the purpose may be obtained from an old incandescent lamp4 ,the piece ,b is mounted on a brass collar1 ,d1 by means of a small screw1 ,e4 ,the brass collar ,d is held in place by the screw ,f1 which draws the two ends together4 ,this collar must be insulated from the stem or fixture by some thin sheets of mica4 ,the upper end of the piece of platinum ,b should be just high enough to come within the lower edge of the gas flame4 ,now mount an arm1 ,c1 on the valve stem so that it stands in a vertical position when the lever to which the chains are attached is in a horizontal position4 ,bend this arm into the form shown in the figure and cut its upper end off so that it is about #a_/b in4 below the outwardly projecting end of the piece of platinum ,b4 ,drill a small hole in the upper end of ,c1 and insert a piece of platinum and run some solder around it4 ,then the complete burner and valve are mounted on the gas fixture1 and from the collar ,d an insulated wire is run to the point where the battery and kick coil are to be located4 ,the gas fixture itself is to form one side of the electric circuit1 and one terminal of the battery should be connected to the gas pipe as shown in the figure4 ,a kick coil may be made as follows3 ,procure a small quantity of rather small soft-iron wire and cut a sufficient number of #h-;in4 lengths to make a bundle about #g_/h in4 in diameter4 ,from some good writing paper make a tube1 #h in4 long and #g_/h in4 in outside diameter4 ,use at least six layers of paper and glue the various layers together in forming this paper tube4 ,after the tube has dried thoroughly1 fill it with the pieces of iron wire until it is perfectly hard4 ,cut from some #a_/b-;in4 hard wood1 two pieces1 #c in4 square1 and drill a #g_/h-;in4 hole in the center of each of these to a depth of #c_/h in4 ,now glue these pieces to the completed core and the winding can begin as soon as the glue is dry4 ,wind on this spool six layers of double cotton-covered ,no4 #ah gauge wire1 insulating the various layers from each other with several thicknesses of good writing paper4 ,this coil is then mounted on a wooden base and suitable terminals provided4 ,at least four dry cells will be required to give satisfactory results4 ,bear in mind that the gas must be escaping from the burner when the arc is formed4 ,the adjustment of the arm ,a1 as given above1 may result in the gas valve being closed when the arc is formed1 and the device will then fail to operate4 ,if this is the case1 the arm ,c should be loosened and moved back so that the circuit is broken at a later time while the valve is being moved from the off to on position4 ,the circuit should be closed for some little time before it is opened so that some energy may be stored in the kick coil4 ,if the wire ,a is made long enough to project a short distance above ,b1 it will result in the circuit being closed for a longer time than it would if they just touched4 ,stretching ,tight-,fitting ,shoes ,a tight-fitting shoe can be stretched by filling it tightly with oats dampened in water and packing some old paper in the top4 ,the grain will quickly swell and1 as the leather will get softened by the dampness1 the shoe will be rapidly stretched4 ,allow time for the oats to dry out before removing them4--,contributed by ,fred ,l4 ,king1 ,islip1 ,new ,york4 ,pad for a ,percolator ,illustration ,to prevent heating the bowl of a percolator and burning the handle1 as often happens when it is placed on a stove1 use an ordinary asbestos pad with a hole cut in the center as shown1 just large enough to admit the foot of the percolator4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,g4 ,w4 ,coplin1 ,bay ,city1 ,mich4 99 99 99 99 99 ,if a motorcycle engine is raced while on the stand1 the cylinder will heat1 often with the result that it is ruined4 ,compass ,time ,chart ,a very instructive little instrument can be easily made for telling the time of any location on the globe4 ,its construction is extremely simple4 ,draw a circle1 about #a-a_/b in4 in diameter1 on a piece of paper and then draw a larger circle1 about #d in4 in diameter1 around the first one4 ,divide the circles into #cf equal parts and draw lines from one circle to the other like the spokes in a wheel4 ,these divisions will be #aj deg41 or #dj minutes of time1 apart4 ,they should be numbered around the outside1 commencing at a point marked #j and marking the numbers by tens each way until they meet at #ahj deg4 ,illustration3 ,a ,time ,chart for ,telling the ,hour of the ,day at ,any ,place on the ,globe ,using a map of the eastern and western hemispheres1 write the names of the different cities on the globe in their respective degrees of longitude4 ,the center1 or inside1 of the smaller circle is divided into #bd divisions representing the hours of the day and night1 and these are marked from #a to #ab1 the left side being forenoon1 and the right1 afternoon4 ,the noon mark must be set on the line nearest to the location in which the instrument is to be used4 ,for instance1 if the instrument is to be used in ,chicago1 it is set as shown in the sketch4 ,the disk is mounted on a thin piece of board and a pin is driven through the center from the back side so as to make a projecting point on the upper side on which to place the magnetized needle of a compass4 ,the needle may be taken from any cheap compass4 ,all that is necessary to do1 to tell what time it is in any other city or country1 is to turn the instrument so that the name of that place points toward the sun1 when the north end of the compass needle will point on the disk to the time it is in that city or locality4--,contributed by ,henry ,j4 ,marion1 ,pontiac1 ,mich4 ,reversing ,switch for ,small ,motors ,a reversing switch made as follows will be found very serviceable in reversing the direction of the rotation of small motors1 changing the polarity of electromagnets1 etc4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of the ,wiring to a ,small ,motor and the ,details of the ,switch ,a diagram of the connections to the switch and on the switch base is given in the sketch1 and in this particular case the switch is shown connected to a small toy motor4 ,the field of the motor is represented by ,a1 the armature by ,b2 and ,c1 ,d1 ,e1 and ,f are four binding posts mounted on the base of the switch2 ,g1 ,h1 and ,i are three contacts2 ,j and ,k are terminals of the switch blades1 and ,l a single-pole switch4 ,the two blades of the reversing switch have their lower ends fastened to the terminals ,j and ,k1 and their upper ends1 which are indicated by arrow heads1 may be moved over the contacts ,g1 ,h1 and ,i4 ,for the position of the reversing switch shown by the full lines1 ,j is connected to ,g and ,k to ,h4 ,when the switch is thrown to the right-hand position1 as shown by the dotted lines1 ,j is connected to ,h and ,k to ,i4 ,it is obvious that the direction of the current through the armature ,b will be reversed when the reversing switch is thrown from one position to the other4 ,the direction in which the armature rotates will change1 due to the reversal in direction of the current through it4 ,the same results could be obtained by reversing the current in the field winding ,a4 ,but it must always be borne in mind that in order to reverse the direction of rotation1 the current must be reversed in the armature only or in the field only1 not in both4 ,the above switch may be constructed as follows3 ,first1 procure a piece of well-seasoned hard wood1 say maple1 #a_/b in4 thick1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #d in4 long4 ,round off the corners and the edges of this piece on one side and drill the holes indicated in the sketch4 ,the four corner holes should be of such a size as to accommodate the screws used in mounting four small back-connected binding posts4 ,the remaining holes should be #a_/h in4 ,all these holes should be countersunk with a #c_/h-;in4 bit to a depth of #a_/d in4 on the under side4 ,cut from some #a_/af-;in4 sheet brass two pieces1 #b-c_/d in4 long1 #a_/b in4 wide at one end and #a_/d in4 at the other1 and round their ends4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole through the larger end of each of these pieces1 #a_/d in4 from the end1 and also a hole through each1 #a-a_/d in4 from the narrow end4 ,the last two holes should be threaded for #a_/h-;in4 machine screws4 ,obtain five #a_/h-;in4 brass bolts1 #a_/b in4 long4 ,file the heads of three of these bolts down to a thickness of approximately #a_/af in4 and mount them in the holes ,g1 ,h and ,i4 ,before mounting anything on the base the grooves indicated by the heavy dotted lines should be cut in the under side so that the various points may be properly connected by conductors placed in the grooves4 ,now mount the two pieces of sheet brass upon the base by means of the remaining two bolts1 which should pass through the holes ,j and ,k4 ,a #a_/af-;in4 washer should be placed between the pieces of brass and the wooden base4 ,procure a piece of #a_/h-;in4 fiber1 #a-a_/d in4 long and #c_/h in4 broad4 ,drill two #a_/h-;in4 holes in this piece1 one in each end1 so that they are #a in4 apart4 ,drill a third #a_/h-;in4 hole in the center and fasten a small handle to the piece of fiber4 ,now mount this piece upon the two pieces of brass that form the blades of the switch by means of two small #a_/h-;in4 brass machine screws4 ,two small brads should be driven into the wooden base so as to prevent the possibility of the switch blades moving beyond their proper position4 ,two pieces of #a_/af-;in4 fiber should be placed between the heads of the screws ,g and ,h1 and ,h and ,i1 to prevent the ends of the switch blades from dropping down on the wooden base4 ,adjustable ,rod for ,potted ,plants ,procure a brass sash-curtain rod of the telescoping kind and stick the solid part into the soil close to the plant and tie it to the rod4 ,as the plant grows move the tubular part of the rod upward to correspond with the height of the plant4 ,this makes a good support and is not so unsightly as a stick4--,contributed by ,gertrude ,m4 ,bender1 ,utica1 ,n4 ,y4 ,wrench for ,different-,size ,nuts ,a very handy wrench can be made from a piece of square bar1 shaped as shown and fitted with a handle4 ,the joint at ,a may be halved and riveted or a weld made as desired4 ,the size of the bar and the space between the parts will depend on the size of nuts to be turned4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sloping ,notch in the ,wrench ,permits ,its ,use on ,nuts of ,various ,size ,a ,simple ,sextant ,a sextant for measuring the latitude of any place can be easily constructed as follows3 ,while a board1 #a in4 thick1 #f in4 wide1 and #ab in4 long is about right for the instrument1 any dimensions can be used1 providing the line ,,ab is at perfect right angles to the level of the sights ,c and ,d4 ,the sights are better to use1 although the upper edge of the board1 if it is perfectly straight1 will do as well4 ,if it is desired to use sights1 a slight groove is cut in the upper edge2 a ,v-shaped piece1 cut from tin1 is fastened at one end1 and a small pointed nail is driven in at the other4 ,in doing this1 be sure to level the bottom of the ,v-notch and nail point so that in drawing the line ,,ab it will be at perfect right angles to a line between the sights4 ,a tack is driven into the side of the board at the upper edge1 a line fastened to it and a weight tied to the lower end which should swing below the lower edge of the board4 ,illustration3 ,the ,main ,part of the ,instrument ,consists of a ,board with a ,plumb ,attached ,the instrument is placed in such a manner that the ,north ,star is sighted1 as shown1 and the point on the lower edge of the board is marked where the line ,e comes to rest4 ,a line is then drawn from ,a to the point marked and the angle ,f is measured with a protractor4 ,the number of degrees in this angle will be approximately equal to the number of degrees in the latitude of that place4 ,illustration3 ,the ,two ,stars at the ,end of the ,great ,dipper are ,pointers to the ,north ,star ,the ,north ,star is easily located by reason of its position relative to the ,great ,dipper1 as shown by the diagram4--,contributed by ,carlos ,harrison1 ,anderson1 ,ind4 ,how to ,make a ,taper ,ferrule ,having occasion to make a taper ferrule of irregular form1 a pattern from which to cut the material was made as follows3 ,a mandrel of the desired shape was made1 a piece of writing paper1 soaked in water1 wrapped around the mandrel1 and a piece of twine wound over it1 coil after coil like the thread on a spool4 ,this was allowed to dry thoroughly1 using a little heat4 ,the string was then removed and a longitudinal cut made in the paper while on the mandrel4 ,when opened this paper formed the pattern4 ,a piece of metal was cut from the pattern and the edges were brought together and brazed with spelter4 ,the point of the mandrel was driven through a piece of block tin1 about #a_/b in4 thick4 ,the mandrel was then removed1 the ferrule was placed on it1 and both then started in the hole made in the tin and driven through it4 ,as the mandrel with the ferrule passed through the tin1 the metal was shaped exactly to the mandrel4 ,it is best to oil the hole in the tin slightly4 ,tin is preferable as it is harder4--,contributed by ,james ,h4 ,beebee1 ,rochester1 ,n4 ,y4 ,how to ,make a ,continuously ,ringing ,bell ,the bell shown in the accompanying diagram is known as the continuously ringing type1 and has quite a field of usefulness in connection with burglar alarms1 door-bell signals1 telephone signals1 etc4 ,the operation of the bell proper is identical with that of the ordinary vibrating bell and1 in addition1 there is a circuit controlled by the armature of the bell1 which is normally open1 but becomes closed as soon as the armature is drawn over4 ,the closing of this circuit by the operation of the armature amounts to keeping the push button in the bell circuit depressed1 and the bell will continue to ring until the latch ,a is restored by pulling the cord ,b4 ,illustration3 ,an ,ordinary ,vibrating ,bell ,used as a ,continuously ,ringing ,bell1 and the ,wiring ,diagram ,any ordinary vibrating bell may be converted into a continuously ringing bell as follows3 ,in the armature1 ,c1 mount a short metal pin1 ,d1 and round off its under side slightly4 ,a latch1 ,a1 should now be constructed similar to the one shown in the sketch and mounted in such a position that its left end will rest on the outer end of the pin ,d when the armature1 ,c1 of the bell is in its extreme outer position4 ,the length of the latch should be such that its left end will drop off the end of the pin ,d1 due to the action of the spring ,e1 when the armature ,c is drawn over by the electromagnets ,f1 thus allowing it to come into contact with a spring ,g1 which is electrically connected to the terminal of the bell marked ,h4 ,the latch ,a is connected to one side of the line1 as shown in the sketch1 so as to include the bell winding and battery in a local circuit that is formed by the latch coming in contact with the spring ,g4 ,the end of the latch should not interfere with the free operation of the armature when it is resting on the spring ,g4 ,a cord1 ,b1 attached to the outer end of the latch1 is used in restoring it1 and at the same time stopping the bell from ringing4 ,the tension in the spring ,e should be so adjusted that the operation of the latch is sure and firm1 yet not too stiff4 ,a ,mission-,style ,inkstand ,having a couple of good-sized ink bottles of the ordinary type lying around1 ,i fashioned a mission-style stand for them out of a piece of yellow pine1 #b in4 wide and #c in4 long1 set on another piece of pine large enough to project all around on all four sides of the block1 for a base4 ,the wells were cut out with a wood chisel1 and the parts fastened together with screws4 ,the supports were four brass-head or upholsterer's tacks4 ,the finish was flat black4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,two ,pieces of ,pine ,shaped to ,receive the ,inkwells and ,finished in ,mission ,style ,raising ,dents in ,wood ,the imprint of a hammer on finely finished wood caused by a glancing blow1 or otherwise1 may be removed in the following manner3 ,pour enough wood alcohol on the dented spot to cover it1 then light the alcohol and allow it to burn out4 ,the heat will expand the wood and raise it enough so that the spot can be planed and smoothed in the usual manner4--,contributed by ,w4 ,f4 ,elwell1 ,waltham1 ,massachusetts4 ,carrying ,two ,pails in ,one ,hand ,when it is necessary to carry two small filled pails in one hand and a package in the other it will be found a very difficult job1 if the contents are liquid4 ,procure a stick of sufficient size to carry the weight of the pails and cut a small notch in each end to admit the bail4 ,place a pail on each end of the stick and take hold in the center1 or1 if the pails are not equally filled1 a little to one side of the center4 ,illustration3 ,two ,filled ,pails can be ,readily ,carried by ,placing the ,bails on the ,ends of a ,stick ,preserving ,paint in ,open ,cans ,to keep paint from drying out in an open can it is necessary to exclude the air from the oil4 ,this can be done by procuring an air-tight paper sack1 which is tested by blowing into it4 ,set the can into the sack and tie it tightly with a cord4 ,mixed paint will be kept in a working state in this manner4 ,jelly-,straining ,stand ,illustration ,procure a board1 #g_/h in4 thick and #ah in4 square1 and cut a hole1 about #a ft4 diameter1 in the center4 ,fasten posts1 #d ft4 long1 to each corner4 ,screw hooks are located around the edge of the hole to catch into the cloth used for holding the fruit4 ,the stand is high enough to be convenient and admit a vessel beneath to catch the juice4 ,renewing ,dry ,batteries ,it is a well-known fact that dry cells commence to deteriorate from the time they are manufactured1 and it is a matter of considerable uncertainty in purchasing cells to know whether they will continue to be efficient for their supposed natural life under the existing conditions of service1 or for only a small part of this period4 ,when the voltage of a dry cell falls below a certain value it is usually discarded and replaced by a new one1 which often means quite an expense4 ,the following simple suggestion will enable one to renew the prematurely exhausted cell with very little trouble and slight expense1 so that its period of usefulness will be extended for a length of time1 at least equal to that for which it could be used if put into service immediately after its manufacture4 ,illustration ,the procedure in renewing the cell is as follows3 ,a casing is placed outside of the zinc-containing case1 having inside dimensions a little greater than the zinc cup4 ,the space between the zinc cup and case is filled with a dry electrolyte1 which1 upon the addition of moisture1 sets up a chemical action with the exterior surface of the zinc1 and the latter having been perforated1 causes electrical action to be again produced4 ,the casing1 or cup1 to be used outside the zinc cup should be made of a waterproof material4 ,the electrolyte instead of being placed between this cup and the zinc in a powdered form1 as might be expected1 should be held by several layers of blotting paper1 formed into a cylinder of the proper diameter to fit snugly on the outside of the zinc cup4 ,this porous cup should be impregnated with a solution containing the following materials in the approximate amounts given3 ,muriate of ammonia1 #aj parts2 bichromate of potash1 #d parts1 and chloride of sodium1 #d parts4 ,after the porous cup has thoroughly soaked in the above solution it should be dried by passing a roller over its external surface when it is mounted on a wooden cylinder of proper diameter4 ,the moisture-proof cup may be formed outside the porous cup by covering the latter with several coats of waterproofing paste and winding on several thicknesses of common manila paper1 each layer of paper being treated with the paste4 ,a disk of cardboard1 properly treated1 should be placed in the end of the cylinder to form the bottom1 and the edge of the manila paper folded in over it and pasted in place4 ,the pasteboard covering surrounding the zinc cup of the cell should be removed and the surface of the zinc thoroughly cleaned4 ,the coal tar in the top of the zinc cup should be removed by tapping around the edge with a hammer1 and a large number of small holes should be made in the walls of the cup with a sharp instrument4 ,then put the cell within the porous cup and fill the top with clear water1 preferably rain water4 ,a chemical reaction will immediately take place between the outer surface of the zinc and the chemicals contained in the material forming the porous cup1 and the terminal voltage of the cell will be practically the same as it was when the cell was new4 ,the water1 of course1 must be replenished from time to time on account of evaporation1 and the useful life of the cell can be prolonged for a considerable time4 ,a part cross section of a cell treated as described above is shown in the accompanying sketch4 ,workbench ,equipment for a ,table ,top ,the average home mechanic with a few tools seldom has a place to work and is usually without a workbench4 ,as this was my case1 ,i constructed a bench equipment that ,i could easily clamp to the kitchen or other table and thus have the necessary tools at hand for work4 ,a plank1 #b in4 thick1 #aj in4 wide and #ah in4 long1 was planed and smoothed up on all sides1 and a vise and a bench pin were fastened on one edge4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bench ,top can be ,quickly ,attached to ,any ,table ,top without ,harming ,it ,to the under side of the same edge two blocks were securely fastened1 as shown1 and to these blocks two other pieces were fastened with hinges4 ,with a bolt1 running through from the top1 and a thumb nut used underneath1 these pieces are used as clamps for holding the bench to the table top4 ,the top can be removed and set away in a closet when not in use4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,h4 ,hathaway1 ,nutley1 ,n4 ,j4 ,a ,nonsticking ,drawer ,guide ,illustration ,the guide shown is nonbinding and has been found thoroughly practical after several years' use on furniture4 ,the guide ,a consists of a piece of wood1 about #a-a_/h in4 square1 with a concave cut in its upper edge1 the width being about #c_/d in4 and the depth such as not to cut through the extending end projecting over the crossbar ,b4 ,the drawer sides have a half-round edge on the bottom edge to run in the groove in the guide4 ,the difference in width between the groove in the guide and the rounding edge on the drawer side causes the drawer always to ride snugly without binding as the wood expands or contracts with changes in the weather4--,contributed by ,herman ,hermann1 ,portland1 ,ind4 ,a ,milk ,stool ,the stool is made of three pieces of board and a piece of round1 or stake1 iron4 ,the appearance and manner of construction are clearly shown in the illustration4 ,the seat board is sawed out to fit the circumference of the bucket to be used1 and the iron is also bent to this curve and fastened to the board as shown4 ,the little shelf on the front support holds the bucket at the right height1 and keeps it clean and out of the way of the cow's foot while milking4 ,illustration3 ,a ,milk ,stool ,having a ,place to ,keep the ,bucket ,clean and at the ,right ,height ,sounder for ,wireless-,telegraph ,messages ,the owner of an amateur wireless outfit often has reason to regret that he cannot let some of his friends listen to a message at the same time as he himself4 ,the magnifier described in the following permits all those present in the room to hear the message1 provided1 of course1 they are able to interpret the ,morse alphabet by sound4 ,illustration3 ,the ,phonograph ,horn as ,it is ,connected to a ,detector for ,transmitting the ,messages ,a very simple means1 making the message audible at a distance of about #aj ft41 is to attach a phonograph horn1 or a horn of cardboard or metal1 to the telephone receiver1 but a much better arrangement can be made as shown in the diagram1 in which ,a represents the antenna or aerial2 ,b1 the detector1 and ,c1 the receiver4 ,procure a small microphone1 ,d1 placing its mouthpiece closely against the receiver--for the sake of clearness the two are separated in the diagram--and connect the former with a battery1 ,f1 of two or three dry cells1 in series with the microphone of an ordinary telephone transmitter provided with a large horn4 ,the effect obtained by this simple means will be surprising4 ,joint for ,mission ,furniture ,the mortise for this joint is made in the usual manner1 the only requirements being that the mortise is run through the piece1 and the tenon is cut #a_/h in4 shorter than the depth of the mortise or the width of the piece it is entering4 ,the end of the tenon and the mortise is then covered with a piece of metal1 fastened with screws as shown4 ,the metal can be of any desired material and beveled on the edges4 ,this makes a very good knock-down joint for mission furniture4--,contributed by ,h4 ,r4 ,allen1 ,cheyenne1 ,wyoming4 ,illustration3 ,metal ,covering and ,holder for a ,tenon and ,mortise ,joint on ,mission ,furniture ,a ,towel ,roller ,a substantial1 convenient and nonrusting towel roller can be made from #h or #i of the familiar wood handles on bundle carriers and a length of brass curtain rod4 ,the bracket ends can be shaped from any piece of wood of suitable dimensions4 ,the rollers and ends can be finished as desired4--,contributed by ,f4 ,e4 ,s41 ,e4 ,lynn1 ,mass4 ,an ,electric ,shaving ,mug ,the general use of electricity in the home has opened up a new field in the way of heating and cooking utensils4 ,while these utensils are sold by electric-supply houses1 some of them can be easily made at home and answer the purpose just as nicely4 ,one of these is the electric shaving mug4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts for the ,construction of an ,electric ,shaving ,mug4 ,the ,heating of ,sufficient ,water for a ,shave can be ,accomplished at a ,nominal ,cost 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c1 ,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e7 ,a mug that will stand heat is the first thing required1 and an aluminum cup of standard shape and design1 which can be bought in almost every town1 will do perfectly well4 ,these cups are spun from a flat sheet and have no seams to open and leak1 and it is necessary that no holes be drilled in the cup as it is impossible to make such a hole watertight4 ,the heating element must be fastened to the mug with a clamp4 ,the clamp will also allow the heating coil to be removed for repairs without injury to the mug4 ,the bottoms of these mugs have a flange which makes a recessed part and in this the heating element is placed4 ,the legs of the mug are made of sheet brass as shown in ,fig4 #a1 one of the three having an enlargement near its center with a hole for an insulating button 7,fig4 #b71 of transite or some other material1 to hold the supply cord in place4 ,the clamp for holding the heating coil in place is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,this clamp has a screw in the center to tighten it in place4 ,the legs and clamp may be nickelplated if desired4 ,the heating coil is shown in ,fig4 #d which is a coil of flat ,nichrome wire1 or ribbon as it is called1 #ab ft4 long1 #a_/af in4 wide and #c_/ajjj in4 thick4 ,this is equal in cross section to a ,no4 #bf gauge wire4 ,to wind this coil1 procure a block of wood1 #g_/h in4 thick and about #d in4 square1 with a #a_/b-;in4 hole in the center for an axis or pivot4 ,clamp a #a_/b-;in4 rod in a vise so that the block can be rotated about it4 ,begin at the center and fasten one end of the ribbon to the block1 leaving about #b in4 projecting for a connection1 then proceed to wind the ribbon in a spiral coil1 separating each turn from the preceding one with a strand of asbestos cord4 ,a small section of the coil is shown in ,fig4 #e1 in which ,a1 or the light part1 represents the asbestos insulation1 and ,b1 or the black lines1 the heating element4 ,the insulation may be obtained by untwisting some #a_/h-;in4 round asbestos packing and using one of the strands4 ,this cord insulates each turn of the ribbon from the other and the current must travel through the whole coil without jumping across from one turn to the other4 ,the whole coil must be closely wound to get it into the limited space at the bottom of the mug4 ,before taking the coil from the block1 rub into its surface a little asbestos retort cement1 or a cement composed of a mixture of silicate of soda and silica1 or glass sand4 ,this mixture1 when dry1 will tend to hold the coil together and the current may be passed through the coil to test it as well as to bake it in its coiled shape4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #f1 ,fig4 #g7 ,the support for the heating coil is made of a piece of #e_/af-;in4 asbestos wood or transite4 ,cut it to fit into the recessed bottom of the mug1 then with a chisel remove the material in the top to form a depression #a_/af in4 deep to receive the coil with its top flush4 ,the leads of the coil are run through the disk4 ,the surface of the coil is then plastered evenly with retort cement4 ,the legs are fastened to a second piece of insulating material with round-head brass machine screws1 #a_/b in4 long1 with nuts4 ,the heads of these screws are shown in ,fig4 #f1 the nuts being above the brass and between the two insulating pieces4 ,the ends of the heating ribbon are brought through the lower insulating disk and attached to binding posts as shown4 ,the leads may be covered with tape to prevent any short circuit4 ,the mug uses #c-a_/b amperes at #aaj volts1 either direct or alternating current1 and it will cost about #c cents an hour to operate it4 ,care should be taken to use a separable attachment for connecting1 as an ordinary lamp socket may be burned out by turning off the current1 it being adapted only to a small capacity4 ,in assembling the parts1 several pieces of mica should be placed between the coil and the metal of the mug to insulate the coil from the mug4 ,a ,handbag ,lock ,illustration ,the pickpocket finds it easy to unsnap a handbag and remove some of the contents1 especially in crowded places4 ,to make it less easy for the pickpocket1 ,i fixed my mother's handbag as shown in the sketch4 ,i used a chain which had served its day holding a small coin purse--any small chain will do--by passing it through the links that hold the handle and winding it once or twice around the snap fasteners to hold them securely closed4 ,the chain may be either shortened enough to make it convenient to hold with the handle of the handbag1 or may be left long and used over the shoulder under the coat1 thus making it possible to have both hands free for shopping while the handbag hangs by the side4 ,this leaves a person free from the worry of taking care that the bag is not laid down somewhere and lost4 ,the bag may be easily opened by unwinding the chain after loosening it by raising the bag slightly4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,waterhouse1 ,aurora1 ,ill4 ,an ,emery-,cloth ,holder ,emery cloth in sheets is very easily spoiled around a workbench4 ,oil or other fluids used on work are apt to drop on it and when wet for a short time the abrasive is useless4 ,the illustration shows a tin holder1 ,a1 that can be placed on the under side of the bench where space is not required for drawer room4 ,illustration3 ,a ,receptacle for ,emery ,cloth ,made of ,sheet ,metal or ,tin and ,fastened to a ,bench ,the portion cut out of the bottom of the holder ,b is to enable the workman to easily grasp the sheets of emery cloth4 ,as the holder is on the under side of the bench1 there is little danger of any liquid or other substance spoiling the sheets4 ,the sheets are also within easy reach4--,contributed by ,f4 ,w4 ,bently1 ,huron1 ,s4 ,d4 ,the ,operation of the ,compass ,after trying to tell a few small boys what a compass is1 they wanted a practical illustration--something they could see4 ,not having a compass or knowing where to locate one handily1 ,i used a piece of cork with needles and a needle for a pivot and found it very satisfactory4 ,the method used is shown in the sketch4 ,it is best not to magnetize both needles unless care is exercised in maintaining pole relationship1 or they will oppose each other and not point to the north4 ,the extreme ends or the heads of the needles must be opposites1 the head of one negative and the head of the other positive4 ,illustration3 ,two ,large ,needles in a ,cork ,balanced on a ,central ,needle to ,make ,them ,revolve ,easily ,if a good compass is brought carelessly in contact with a magnet1 the poles may become reversed and the north end will no longer point to the north but to the south until the current has been reversed again by bringing the opposite pole of the magnet in contact with the compass4--,contributed by ,w4 ,h4 ,albright1 ,bellevue1 ,o4 ,thawing ,out ,frozen ,pipes ,when the water pipes connecting a range boiler become frozen1 get a plumber and avoid an explosion of the water back4 ,if1 however1 the frozen pipe is a cold-water pipe in no way connected with the hot-water boiler1 it can be thawed out as follows3 ,illustration3 ,the ,faucet is ,turned ,upwards and ,opened and ,alcohol ,poured ,in on the ,ice ,procure some grain alcohol--not denatured or wood alcohol--and after turning the spigot upward or upside down1 as shown1 open it and pour in the alcohol4 ,when the water begins to flow turn it to its proper position4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,a ,wire ,clothespin ,illustration ,the pin is made of galvanized wire1 ,a1 #h or #aj in4 long1 wound spirally1 ,b1 on a round surface1 such as a broom handle1 to make the holding part4 ,the ends are fastened together as shown4 ,the space between the spiral turns makes the cloth-holding part4--,contributed by ,wesley ,h4 ,freeman1 ,palestine1 ,tex4 ,vent for ,pouring ,heavy ,liquids ,a tube placed in a jug or bottle as shown in the sketch will assist greatly in removing molasses or heavy liquids4 ,the tube can be placed in the receptacle without getting the liquid inside by holding a finger over the outer end4 ,the air can easily enter without disturbing the flow of the liquid4--,contributed by ,homer ,payear1 ,owensboro1 ,ky4 ,illustration3 ,the ,vacuum ,caused by the ,flow of ,heavy ,liquids is ,easily ,overcome by the ,air ,tube ,a ,hat ,hanger ,illustration ,procure a piece of #a_/h-;in4 wire1 about #c ft4 long1 bend it into the shape shown in the sketch1 and sharpen the projecting end4 ,drive this into the wall above a coat hanger4 ,this provides a better hat hanger than the ordinary hook4--,contributed by ,john ,d4 ,watt1 ,roxbury1 ,mass4 ,repairing a ,broken ,tenon on a ,chair ,post ,illustration ,instead of cutting off the four posts to make new tenons where one tenon was broken ,i used a metal piece made from a short length of bicycle tubing1 as shown4 ,the tube was slotted two ways to make four parts which were turned out and flattened4 ,the remaining end of the tube was slipped over the broken post and the four parts were fastened with screws to the under side of the chair seat4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,h4 ,roberts1 ,calumet1 ,mich4 ,substitute for an ,iron-,holder ,knob ,illustration ,the wood knob on the holder for my irons became charred from the heat and finally broke away from the pin4 ,the pin would get so hot in continued use that it could not be moved without burning my fingers4 ,i remedied the difficulty by attaching a short string to the handle and the pin4 ,a pull on the string with the forefinger readily released the iron4 ,i have found this better than the knob1 as it is handier to use4--,contributed by ,mrs4 ,h4 ,c4 ,dixon1 ,johnstown1 ,pa4 ,an ,egg-,frying ,pan ,the frying of eggs in an ordinary frying pan is accompanied with some difficulty in removing them when they are cooked without breaking the yolk4 ,then1 sometimes1 the pan is too hot and the egg sticks to the pan and the top remains uncooked4 ,a much better way is to shape a piece of sheet metal or tin as shown in the sketch to place the egg in and use it in the ordinary pan4 ,it will not burn the egg1 and the egg can be lifted out of the pan and easily slipped on a plate or toast when it is cooked4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,jaquythe1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,a ,metal ,plate for ,use in an ,ordinary ,frying ,pan to ,cook ,eggs without ,scorching ,them ,a ,sander ,mandrel for the ,lathe ,a cylindrical sander for use in the lathe can be easily made of two pieces of wood1 turned to a diameter that will take the stock size of sandpaper1 and clamped together with pinch dogs at the ends4 ,one edge of the sandpaper is clamped between the pieces and then it is wrapped around the wood1 the opposite edge being glued to the starting edge1 as shown at ,a4 ,the dimensions given are for a #i by #ab-;in4 sheet of sandpaper4 ,the sander is easily placed in the lathe centers when needed1 and the sandpaper may be replaced at any time4--,contributed by ,james ,t4 ,gaffney1 ,chicago4 ,illustration3 ,a ,wood ,mandrel for ,attaching ,regular ,sheets of ,sandpaper to ,make a ,lathe ,sander ,how to ,construct a ,simple ,galvanometer ,a galvanometer is an instrument used to detect the presence of an electrical current in a circuit or to measure the value of the current in amperes4 ,the operation of practically all galvanometers is based upon the same principle1 and they differ chiefly in mechanical construction and the relative arrangement of their different parts4 ,a very simple galvanometer1 that will give quite satisfactory results1 under favorable conditions1 may be constructed as follows3 ,turn from a piece of hard wood a ring having dimensions corresponding to those given in the cross section1 ,fig4 #a4 ,fill the groove in this ring to within #a_/h in4 of the top with ,no4 #ah gauge double-cotton-covered copper wire1 insulating the different layers from each other by means of a layer of good bond paper4 ,the winding may be started by drilling a small hole through the side of the groove1 as close to the bottom as possible1 and allowing about #f in4 of the wire to protrude through it4 ,the outside end may be terminated in a similar manner1 and the two ends should be on the same side of the ring1 or as near each other as possible4 ,a protecting covering of bookbinder's paper is placed over the winding and the completed ring given a coat of shellac4 ,the electric current to be detected or measured is to pass around the winding of this coil and produce an effect upon a compass needle mounted in its center4 ,in order that the current may produce a maximum effect upon the needle1 the coil should be mounted in a vertical position4 ,illustration3 ,the ,wood ,ring for the ,coil and ,its ,holding ,stirrup 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,the base upon which the ring is to be mounted may be cut from some #a_/b-;in4 hard wood4 ,it should be circular in form and about #e in4 in diameter1 and have its upper edge rounded off and shellacked to improve its appearance4 ,the ring is mounted in a vertical position on this base1 which may be done as follows3 ,cut a flat surface on each of the flanges of the ring so that it will stand in a vertical position and the terminals of the winding will be as near as possible to the surface upon which the ring rests4 ,then form a stirrup from some thin sheet brass1 similar to that shown in ,fig4 #b1 so that it will fit tightly over the ring and its outwardly projecting ends will rest upon the base of the instrument4 ,small wood screws are used in fastening the stirrup to the base4 ,the fastening may be made more secure by cutting a groove across the inside of the ring for the stirrup to fit in1 ,fig4 #c1 thus preventing the possibility of the ring moving through the stirrup4 ,two holes should be drilled in the base for the terminals of the winding to pass through1 and it would be best to cut two grooves in the side of the ring for these wires so as to prevent their coming into contact with the metal stirrup4 ,two back-connected binding posts1 ,a and ,b1 ,fig4 #c1 are mounted on the base and the ends of the winding attached to them4 ,the wires should be placed in grooves cut in the under side of the base1 and the screws used in fastening the binding posts should be countersunk4 ,illustration3 ,galvanometer as ,it is ,used to ,detect the ,presence of an ,electrical ,current 7,fig4 #c7 ,a short compass needle is then mounted on a suitable supporting pivot in the center of the coil4 ,this compass needle will always come to rest in an approximate north and south position when it is acted upon by the earth's magnetic field alone4 ,if now the plane of the coil be placed in such a position that it is parallel to the direction of the compass needle 7no current in the coil71 the magnetic field that will be produced when a current is sent through the winding will be perpendicular to the magnetic field of the earth and there will be a force1 due to this particular current1 tending to turn the compass needle around perpendicularly to its original position4 ,there will be a deflection of the needle for all values of current in the coil1 and this deflection will vary in value as the current in the coil varies4 ,the mere fact that the compass needle is deflected due to a current in the coil gives a means of detecting a current in any circuit of which the coil is a part1 and the degree of this deflection affords a means of measuring the current1 the value of the different deflections in terms of the current in the coil having been experimentally determined by sending a known current through the coil and noting the positions of the compass needle for each value of current used4 ,in order to determine the deflection of the needle1 a scale1 ,c1 ,fig4 #c1 must be mounted directly under the compass needle and a pointer1 ,d1 attached to the compass needle so that any movement of the needle results in an equal angular displacement of the pointer4 ,the compass needle1 ,e1 should be short and quite heavy1 say1 #e_/h in4 in length1 #a_/af in4 in thickness and #a_/d in4 in width at its center1 and tapering to a point at its ends4 ,it should be made of a good grade of steel1 tempered and then magnetized by means of a powerful electromagnet4 ,the reason for making the compass needle short is that it will then operate in practically a uniform magnetic field1 which exists only at the center of the coil4 ,on account of the needle being so short and in view of the fact that it comes to rest parallel to the coil for its zero position1 it is best to use a pointer attached to the needle to determine its deflection1 as this pointer can be made much longer than the needle1 and any movement of the needle may be more easily detected1 as the end of the pointer moves through a much larger distance than the end of the needle1 and since it may be attached to the needle1 at right angles to the needle's axis1 the end of the pointer will be off to one side of the coil and its movement may be easily observed4 ,the pointer should be made of some nonmagnetic material1 such as aluminum or brass1 and it should be as long as it may be conveniently made4 ,a suitable box with a glass cover may be provided in which the needle1 pointer and scale may be housed4 ,the construction of this box will be left entirely to the ingenuity of the one making the instrument4 ,illustration3 ,the ,electric ,circuit1 ,showing ,connections for ,finding the ,value of a ,current in ,calibrating 7,fig4 #d7 ,in order to use this instrument as an ammeter1 it will be necessary to calibrate it1 which consists in determining the position of the pointer for various values of current through the coil4 ,it will be necessary to obtain the use of a direct-current ammeter for this purpose4 ,the winding of the galvanometer1 ammeter1 battery and a variable resistance of some kind should all be connected in series as shown in the diagram1 ,fig4 #d4 ,allow the compass needle to come to rest under the influence of the earth's magnetic field and then turn the coil into such a position that it is as nearly parallel with the needle as possible4 ,this corresponds to the zero position1 and the instrument must always be in this position when it is used4 ,the position of the ends of the pointer is now marked on the scale for different values of current1 first with the current in one direction and then in the opposite direction4 ,the deflection of the needle will1 of course1 reverse when the current is reversed4 ,the effect produced by any current upon the compass needle can be changed by changing the number of turns in the coil4 ,in measuring a large current1 a few turns of large wire would be required1 and in measuring a small current1 a large number of turns of small wire could be used4 ,in other words1 the size of the wire will depend upon the current it is to carry and the number of turns in the coil will depend upon the magnetic effect the current is to produce1 which is proportional to the product of the number of turns and the current1 called the ampere-turns4 ,experiments with ,camphor ,place a few scrapings from gum camphor in a tumbler of water and watch the phenomenon4 ,the scrapings will go through all kinds of rapid motions as if they were alive4 ,a drop of turpentine1 or any oil1 will stop their maneuvers4 ,this experiment will show how quickly oil spreads over the surface of water4 ,boiling ,cracked ,eggs ,eggs with the shells cracked can be boiled in the ordinary manner without danger of the white boiling out1 if they are first wrapped in tissue paper4 ,as soon as the paper becomes wet it will cling so tightly to the shell that the cracks are effectively closed4 ,a ,trousers ,hanger ,a very serviceable hanger can be easily made of two clothespins of the clip type and about #b ft4 of large wire4 ,illustration3 ,clothesline ,clips ,joined ,together with a ,wire and ,used as a ,trousers ,hanger ,the wire should be bent into the shape shown at ,a with a loop about #a in4 in diameter as a hanger4 ,the ends of the wire are slipped under the hooks on the sides of the clothespins1 which are fastened to the trousers as shown in ,b4--,contributed by ,olaf ,tronnes1 ,evanston1 ,ill4 ,removing ,tight-,fitting ,can ,covers ,illustration ,tight-fitting covers on lard and similar pails can be readily removed by tying a stout cord loosely below the cover1 then placing an ordinary nail under the cord and twisting it4 ,this will tighten the cord around the can evenly1 which will loosen the cover4 ,a ,skimming ,spoon ,a handy skimming spoon can be made very quickly of an ordinary spoon of any size desired4 ,slits are sawn across the bowl in the manner shown1 using a hacksaw4 ,the illustration is self-explanatory4--,contributed by ,g4 ,h4 ,holter1 ,jasper1 ,minn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,straight ,cuts ,sawn ,across the ,bottom of the ,bowl ,provide ,openings to ,drain ,out the ,liquid ,how to ,make ,falling ,blocks ,procure a thin board large enough to cut six blocks1 #b in4 wide and #c in4 long2 also #b yd4 of cotton tape1 #a_/d in4 wide1 and some very small tacks4 ,cut the board into pieces of the size mentioned1 and number two of them on both surfaces1 #a1 #b1 #c1 and #d4 ,cut off three pieces of tape1 #d-c_/d in4 long1 and on the side of block #a tack one piece of tape in the center at one end1 and the other two pieces at each edge on the opposite end1 all being on one side of the block as shown4 ,take the other block and lay the side numbered #d up1 then draw the two strips of tape on the edges of block #a under it and back to the end of the surface on block #d1 and tack them on this surface at the edges as shown4 ,the center tape is passed under block #d and turned over the opposite end and tacked4 ,this is clearly shown in the sketch4 ,thus the second block will hang from either end of block #a by simply folding them together and separating the ends4 ,illustration3 ,set of ,blocks ,joined with ,tape ,so ,that ,they ,appear to ,fall from the ,top ,mark the sides of the third block #e and #f1 and place it with the two others so that the sides numbered #b1 #c1 and #e will be up4 ,cut off three more pieces of tape1 #d-c_/d in4 long1 and tack them on as shown1 being careful not to tack through any of the first three pieces4 ,put on the fourth block in the same manner as the third block was attached to the second1 and so on1 until all the blocks are attached4 ,take hold of the first block on the edges and tip it as shown by the arrow4 ,the second block will then fall as shown by the second arrow1 and the third block falls away in the same manner1 and so on1 down to the end4--,contributed by ,wayne ,nutting1 ,minneapolis1 ,minn4 ,writing ,name ,reversed on ,paper ,placed on ,forehead ,the following is an entertaining experiment in a party of young people4 ,one of those present is asked if he can write his name1 and will1 of course1 answer yes4 ,he is then subjected to the following test3 ,he is asked to sit down in a chair1 a paper1 folded several times1 is placed on his forehead1 a lead pencil is handed him and he is asked to write his name on the paper4 ,as little time as possible to reflect should be left him2 if he hesitates1 he should be told to just go ahead1 and in most cases it will be found that he starts writing his name at the left temple and1 to the amusement of the others present1 writes it in the way of many left-handed persons1 that is1 so that it is legible only when held in front of a mirror1 unless one is practiced in reading reversed writing4 ,use for an ,old ,table ,an old table of the extension type1 that may have a post broken1 can be used against the wall in a kitchen as a work table4 ,if there is a damaged part1 that side is removed by sawing the crosspieces of the table in two and attaching it to the wall against the leaf which is turned in a reverse position4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,one ,half of the ,table is ,removed and the ,remaining ,part ,fastened to the ,wall ,how to ,make a ,small ,rheostat ,in operating small motors there is as a rule no means provided for regulating their speed1 and this often is quite a disadvantage1 especially in the case of toy motors such as used on miniature electric locomotives4 ,the speed1 of course1 can be regulated by changing the number of cells of battery by means of a special switch1 but then all the cells are not used the same amount and some of them may be completely exhausted before the others show any appreciable depreciation4 ,if a small transformer is used with a number of taps taken off the secondary winding1 the voltage impressed upon the motor1 and consequently the speed1 can be changed by varying the amount of the secondary winding across which the motor is connected4 ,illustration3 ,diagram ,showing the ,connections for a ,small ,motor ,where a ,rheostat ,is in the ,line 7,fig4 #a7 ,but in both these cases there is no means of varying the speed gradually4 ,this can1 however1 be accomplished by means of a small rheostat placed in series with the motor4 ,the rheostat acts in an electrical circuit in just the same way a valve does in a hydraulic circuit4 ,it consists of a resistance1 which can be easily varied in value1 placed in the circuit connecting the motor with the source of electrical energy4 ,a diagram of the rheostat is shown in ,fig4 #a1 in which ,a represents the armature of the motor2 ,b1 the field2 ,c1 the rheostat1 and ,d1 the source of electrical energy4 ,when the handle ,e is in such a position that the maximum amount of resistance is in circuit there will be a minimum current through the field and armature of the motor1 and its speed will be a minimum4 ,as the resistance of the rheostat is decreased1 the current increases and the motor speeds up1 reaching a maximum value when the resistance of the rheostat has been reduced to zero value4 ,such a rheostat may be used in combination with a special switch ,f41 as shown in4 ,fig4 #b4 ,the switch gives a means of varying the voltage and the rheostat takes care of the desired changes in speed occurring between those produced by the variations in voltage4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of a ,small ,motor ,where a ,rheostat and ,switch ,are in the ,line 7,fig4 #b7 ,a very simple and inexpensive rheostat may be constructed as follows3 ,procure a piece of thin fiber1 about #a_/af in4 thick1 #a_/b in4 wide and approximately #aj in4 long4 ,wind on this piece of fiber1 after the edges have all been smoothed down1 a piece of ,no4 #bb gauge cotton-covered resistance wire1 starting about #a_/d in4 from one end and winding the various turns fairly close together to within #a_/d in4 of the other end4 ,the ends of the wire may be secured by passing them through several small holes drilled in the piece of fiber1 and should protrude #c or #d in4 for connecting to binding posts that will be mounted upon the base of the rheostat4 ,now form this piece of fiber into a complete ring by bending it around some round object1 the flat side being toward the object4 ,determine as accurately as possible the diameter of the ring thus formed and also its thickness4 ,obtain a piece of well seasoned hard wood1 #a_/b in4 thick and #d-a_/b in4 square4 ,round off the corners and upper edges of this block and mark out on it two circles whose diameters correspond to the inside and outside diameters of the fiber ring4 ,the centers of these circles should be in the center of the block4 ,carefully saw out the two circles so that the space between the inside and outside portions will just accommodate the fiber ring4 ,obtain a second piece of hard wood1 #a_/d in4 thick and #d-c_/d in4 square1 round off its corners and upper edges and mount the other pieces upon it by means of several small wood screws1 which should pass up from the under side and be well countersunk4 ,place the fiber ring in the groove1 but1 before doing so1 drill a hole in the base proper for one end of the wire to pass through4 ,two small back-connected binding posts should be mounted in the corners4 ,one of these should be connected to the end of the winding and the other to a small bolt in the center of the base that serves to hold the handle or movable arm of the rheostat in place4 ,these connecting leads should all be placed in grooves cut in the under side of the base4 ,illustration3 ,a ,cross ,section of the ,rheostat1 ,showing the ,connections through the ,resistance 7,fig4 #c7 ,the movable arm of the rheostat may be made from a piece of #a_/af-;in4 sheet brass1 and should have the following approximate dimensions3 length1 #b in42 breadth #a_/b in4 at one end1 and #a_/d in4 at the other4 ,obtain a #a_/h-;in4 brass bolt1 about #a in4 long1 also several washers4 ,drill a hole in the larger end of the piece of brass to accommodate the bolt and also in the center of the wooden base4 ,countersink the hole in the base on the under side with a #a_/b-;in4 bit to a depth of #a_/d in4 ,on the under side of the piece of brass1 and near its narrow end1 solder a piece of thin spring brass so that its free end will rest upon the upper edge of the fiber ring4 ,a small handle may be mounted upon the upper side of the movable arm4 ,now mount the arm on the base by means of the bolt1 placing several washers between it and the upper surface of the base1 so that its outer end will be raised above the edge of the fiber ring4 ,solder a short piece of thin brass to the nut that is to be placed on the lower end of the bolt1 and cut a recess in the countersunk portion of the hole in the base to accommodate it4 ,when the bolt has been screwed down sufficiently tight a locknut may be put on1 or the first nut soldered to the end of the bolt4 ,if possible1 it would be best to use a spring washer1 or two1 between the arm and base4 ,the insulation should now be removed from the wire on the upper edge of the fiber ring with a piece of fine sandpaper1 so that the spring on the under side of the movable arm may make contact with the winding4 ,the rheostat is now complete with the exception of a coat of shellac4 ,a cross-sectional view of the completed rheostat is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,folding ,arms for ,clothesline ,posts ,the inconvenience of using a number of clothesline posts and the limited space available resulted in the making of a clothesline post as shown in the sketch4 ,the entire line is supported on two posts1 which should be about #f in4 square and are set in concrete4 ,the upper ends of the posts are equipped with two arms1 hinged to the sides of the posts in such a manner that the inside ends of the arms will meet on top of the post when they are in a horizontal position4 ,each arm is provided with three wood pins1 equally spaced for the line4 ,the arms are supported in a horizontal position by two bars of metal at the center1 as shown4 ,holes are bored into the sides of the posts to receive the pins when the arms are at rest4 ,illustration3 ,a ,post ,that ,provides a ,way to ,hold ,six ,lines ,taut without the ,use of ,props ,a small box is fastened to one post1 to provide a place for the clothesline and the clothespins4 ,the line1 when put up1 gives space for an entire washing without the use of a prop1 as the line can be drawn taut enough to hold the garments4--,contributed by ,olaf ,tronnes1 ,evanston1 ,ill4 ,a ,folding ,bookrack ,having need of a bookrack which ,i could pack away in my trunk and still have room for my clothes1 ,i made one as follows3 ,i procured a piece of pine1 #e_/h in4 thick1 #f in4 wide and #ah in4 long1 and laid out the plan on one side4 ,holes were drilled in the edges1 #c_/d in4 from the ends1 to receive #a-a_/b-;in4 round-head brass screws4 ,the design for the ends was sawn out with a scroll saw and the edges smoothed up with fine sandpaper1 whereupon the surfaces were stained and given a coat of wax4 ,the screws were put in place to make the ends turn on them as on a bearing4 ,in use the ends were turned up4--,contributed by ,spencer ,hall1 ,baltimore1 ,maryland4 ,illustration3 ,the ,ends of the ,rack ,turn ,down1 ,making a ,straight ,board ,a ,simple ,balance ,having use for a balance in a laboratory and being unable to procure any scales at the time1 ,i hastily rigged up a device that served the purpose as well1 as the work did not require very great precision4 ,an elastic band and a short piece of string was procured and the band cut open4 ,the string was then fastened around the beaker as shown1 and the whole suspended from a shelf4 ,illustration3 ,a ,graduate ,scale ,used in ,connection with an ,elastic ,band to ,make a ,simple ,balance ,into the beaker was then poured #ajj cubic centimeters of water and the stretch of the elastic band noted by the displacement of a knot in the string in respect to the scale on a graduate1 placed beside the beaker4 ,the length of the elastic was then changed until the knot was exactly opposite the #ajj-;division mark on the graduate scale4 ,then1 since the elongation of the elastic band follows ,hook's law1 the extension of the band to the amount of one scale division means an added weight of one gram in the beaker4--,contributed by ,l4 ,horle1 ,newark1 ,new ,jersey4 ,an ,ink ,eraser ,a good knife eraser for ink can be made from a discarded or broken ruling pen4 ,one of the parts1 or nibs1 is cut off close to the handle and the remaining one sharpened on both edges at the point4 ,this instrument is better than a knife or the regular scratcher1 because the cutting edge will shave the surface of the paper or tracing cloth and not roughen or cut it4 ,erasing done with this knife will readily take ink without further preparation of the surface4--,contributed by ,warren ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,one of the ,nibs on the ,ruling ,pen ,sharpened and ,used as an ,eraser ,gate ,fasteners ,illustration ,buttons on gates or small doors are apt to become loose and then drop down1 thereby allowing the gate or door to become unfastened4 ,the ordinary button is shown at ,a where it is loose and turned by its own weight4 ,if the button is cut as shown at ,b1 it will remain fastened1 even if it is loose on the screw or nail4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,amherstburg1 ,ont4 ,a ,compensating ,siphon ,the homemade siphon shown in the sketch consists of two rubber corks and a glass tube with a rubber hose connected to it4 ,the cork ,a is used as a bearing and support on the edge of the tank4 ,the position of the cork ,b on the tube determines the distance that the mouth of the tube will be under the surface of the liquid1 also to some extent the sensitiveness of the apparatus4 ,however1 the principle of the device is the buoyant effect of the water and the lever action of the rubber tube which is attached4 ,illustration3 ,the ,end of the ,pipe is ,kept ,just under the ,surface of the ,liquid at all ,times ,the one that ,i made had a tube #ad in4 long1 and the cork ,b was #a-c_/d in4 in diameter1 #a in4 thick1 and weighed about #a_/aj of a pound4 ,the practical application of this siphon will be found in sieve tests where it is necessary to collect the residue on the bottom of the tank while drawing off the liquid at the surface1 also in oil-storage tanks where it is not wished to disturb the dirt or other residue which collects on the bottom of the tank4--,contributed by ,james ,hemphill1 ,jr41 ,duquesne1 ,pennsylvania4 ,a ,polarity ,indicator ,lines in a cable or the ends of connections at a distance from the battery must be tested to determine the polarity4 ,where a large amount of this work is to be done1 as in automobile and motorboat repairing1 it is necessary to have an indicator to save time4 ,a cheap indicator for this purpose can be made of a #f-;in4 test tube having its ends sealed and inclosing a saturated solution of ammonium chloride 7sal ammoniac7 and water4 ,the sealed ends are made by inserting a piece of wire through a cork and1 after forcing this tightly into the end of the test tube1 covering it with sealing wax4 ,illustration3 ,a ,simple ,pocket ,indicator for ,finding the ,negative ,wire in ,battery ,cable ,lines ,to use1 connect the terminals to the battery lines1 and the end of the wire in the solution giving off bubbles is the negative wire4--,contributed by ,h4 ,s4 ,parker1 ,brooklyn1 ,n4 ,y4 ,small ,steam-,engine ,cylinders ,made from ,seamless ,brass ,tubing ,in making a small steam engine it was desired to use seamless brass tubing for the cylinders4 ,to have them exactly alike a piece of tubing of the right size and of sufficient length for both cylinders was fitted on a wood mandrel1 ,a1 and the ends trued up in a lathe4 ,as these cylinders were to fit into holes bored in a steel bedplate1 it was necessary to have a flange at one end4 ,a groove was turned in the tubing ,b in the center1 and as a final operation a parting tool was used on the line ,,cd4 ,this resulted in a pair of cylinders flanged to fit the bedplate4--,contributed by ,harry ,f4 ,lowe1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,illustration3 ,a ,wood ,mandrel ,used to ,face the ,ends and ,turn ,flanges on ,tubing for ,cylinders ,a ,pocket ,direct-,current ,voltmeter ,the assembled drawings of a very simple voltmeter are shown in ,fig4 #a1 and its operation is as follows3 ,the moving portion consists of a pointer1 or needle1 ,a2 a small permanent magnet1 or armature1 ,b1 and a counterweight1 ,c1 mounted upon a small steel shaft1 ,d4 ,the ends of this steel shaft are pointed and rest in bearings provided in the ,u-shaped piece of brass ,e1 which is rigidly fastened to the fiber base ,f1 by means of two screws4 ,the permanent magnet ,b1 carried on the shaft ,d1 is at all times under the magnetic influence of the permanent horseshoe magnet1 ,g1 which is fastened1 by means of thin brass straps1 ,h ,h1 and small screws1 to the base ,f1 so that the ends of the armature ,b are directly above the poles of the horseshoe magnet4 ,the armature ,b will assume the position shown in the sketch when it is acted upon by the permanent magnet ,g alone and the moving system is perfectly balanced4 ,a solenoid1 ,j1 is mounted in the position shown4 ,when there is a current in its winding its soft-iron core will become magnetized and the magnetic pole produced at the lower end will produce a magnetic force upon the armature ,b1 with the result that the armature will be rotated either in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction1 depending upon its polarity and the polarity of the end of the core adjacent to it4 ,thus1 if the left end of the armature has north polarity1 the right end south polarity1 and the lower end of the core is magnetized to a south polarity the armature will be rotated clockwise1 for the left end1 or north pole1 will be attracted by the lower end of the iron core1 which is a south pole1 and the right end will be repelled4 ,this is in accordance with one of the fundamental laws of magnetism which states that magnetic poles of unlike polarity attract each other and those of like polarity repel each other4 ,the amount the armature ,b is rotated will depend upon the relative effects of the pole of the solenoid and the permanent magnet ,g4 ,the strength of the pole of the solenoid will depend upon the current in its winding and the number of times the current passes around the core1 or the number of turns in the winding4 ,in other words1 the strength of the pole of the solenoid varies as the product of the current and the number of turns1 which is called the ampere-turns4 ,the same magnetic effect can be produced by a large current passing through a few turns or a small current passing through a relatively large number of turns4 ,this simple relation of current and turns gives a means of adjusting the current capacity of the instrument so that a full-scale deflection of the needle will correspond to any desired maximum current4 ,the instrument may be used as either a voltmeter or as an ammeter1 and its operation will be identical in each case4 ,the resistance of the voltmeter1 however1 will be many times the resistance of the ammeter1 as it will be connected directly across the line1 while the ammeter will always be in series in the circuit in which it is desired to measure the current4 ,the following description and suggestion as to how to proceed in the construction of this instrument may be useful to those who undertake to build one4 ,all the minor details and some of the dimensions will be omitted in the description1 but these can be easily supplied4 ,illustration3 ,the ,parts as ,they are ,assembled to ,make a ,pocket ,voltmeter for ,direct ,currents 7,fig4 #a7 ,procure a piece of hard rubber or fiber1 about #a_/d in4 in thickness and of sufficient size to cut from it a disk1 #b-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,make a small horseshoe magnet from a piece of the very best steel obtainable1 and magnetize it to as high a strength as possible4 ,this magnet is made of a piece of steel1 #a_/h in4 thick1 about #c_/h in4 in breadth1 and of such length that the overall lengthwise dimension of the completed magnet will be about #a-g_/h in4 and the distance between the inside edges of the ends a little greater than #a_/b in4 ,fasten the completed magnet to the base ,f by means of two or three straps1 made from some thin brass1 and small machine or wood screws4 ,then cut from some #a_/af-;in4 sheet brass a piece having the general appearance and dimensions shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #b4 ,bend the ends of this piece over at right angles to the center portion along the dotted lines4 ,drill the hole at the upper end and thread it for a #a_/af-;in4 machine screw4 ,by means of a pointed drill1 make a small recess at the lower end directly opposite the first hole4 ,this small recess is to form the lower bearing for the shaft supporting the moving system1 while a small recess cut centrally in the end of a screw1 mounted in the upper hole1 will form the upper bearing4 ,the screw placed in the upper hole need be only about #c_/af in4 long4 ,the holes in the two wings are for mounting this piece upon the fiber base1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the shaft for supporting the moving system is made of a piece of a hatpin4 ,it is about #ac_/af in4 long and its ends are pointed so that they will turn freely in the bearings provided for them4 ,the armature is cut from a piece of #a_/af-;in4 sheet steel4 ,it is made about #c_/d in4 long1 #e_/af in4 wide at the center1 tapering to #a_/h in4 at the ends4 ,a hole is drilled in its center so that it may be forced onto the shaft4 ,it is mounted so that its lower surface comes about #a_/d in4 from the lower end of the shaft4 ,then cut from some very thin brass a piece1 that is to form the needle1 #a_/d in4 wide at one end and tapered to a point at the other1 the total length being about #c in4 ,drill a hole in the large end of this piece1 the same size as the shaft and #a_/b in4 from the end4 ,this piece is not fastened to the shaft until some of the other parts are completed4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,supports for the ,coil and for the ,needle1 or ,pointer1 ,shaft 7,fig4 #b7 ,the spool upon which the winding is to be placed is made as follows3 ,procure a piece of very soft wrought iron1 #a-a_/d in4 long and #a_/d in4 in diameter1 to form the core4 ,the ends of the spool are made of thin brass and are dimensioned as shown in ,fig4 #b1 at ,b and ,c4 ,the piece shown at ,b is to form the lower end of the spool1 and is bent at right angles along the dotted line4 ,the two holes at the lower edge are for attaching the end of the spool to the fiber base4 ,the piece shown at ,c forms the upper end of the spool and at the same time a back upon which the scale of the instrument is mounted4 ,the holes in the lower edge are threaded for small machine screws1 as it will be necessary to fasten this piece to the base by means of screws that pass through the base from the under side1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,bend the upper and lower portion of the piece over at right angles to the center portion along the dotted lines4 ,make sure that the large hole in the center of each end piece is of such size that it will fit very tight on the end of the wrought-iron core4 ,force the end pieces onto the ends of the core a short distance1 say1 #a_/af in41 and hammer down the edges of the core so that the end pieces cannot be easily removed4 ,in fastening the ends to the core be sure that the parts that are to rest upon the base are parallel with each other and extend in opposite directions2 also that the ends are at right angles to the core4 ,then insulate the inner portions of the completed spool with several thicknesses of onion-skin paper1 or any good-quality1 thin writing paper1 and shellac4 ,the winding will be described later4 ,mount the spool and support for the bearings upon the base so that they occupy the positions1 relative to each other1 indicated in ,fig4 #a4 ,a paper scale is then mounted upon the brass base provided for it by means of some thin shellac4 ,the upper and lower lines for the scale can now be drawn upon the paper1 using the center of the screw at the lower end of the needle as a center4 ,these lines are best placed about #a_/h in4 apart and not nearer the edge of the base than #a_/d inches4 ,the needle is bent over at right angles #e_/af in4 from the center of the shaft4 ,another right-angle bend in the needle is then made so that the pointed end will be about #a_/af in4 above the surface of the scale when the large end of the needle is fastened to the shaft #c_/h in4 from the upper end of the latter4 ,turn the needle on the shaft so that the pointer is at the left end of the scale when the moving system is at rest4 ,the shaft must be exactly vertical when this adjustment is made4 ,cut the end of the needle down until its end is midway between the two scale lines4 ,solder the needle to the shaft1 and then place a sufficient quantity of solder on the broad end to balance the system perfectly and allow it to come to rest in any position when the armature ,b is not influenced by any magnetic field4 ,a containing case for the instrument may be made as follows3 ,make a cylinder from some thin sheet brass1 having exactly the same inside diameter as the base1 and a height a little greater than the vertical distance from the lower surface of the base to the upper surface of the needle4 ,also a disk from some thin sheet brass1 having a diameter #a_/h in4 greater than the outside diameter of the cylinder4 ,round off the edges of this disk and cut a curved slot in it directly over the scale1 about #c_/h in4 wide and of the same length and form as the scale4 ,solder the disk to one end of the cylinder1 placing the solder all on the inside4 ,to prevent moisture from entering the case1 fasten a piece of thin glass on the under side of the slot in the disk by means of some shellac and several pieces of brass soldered to the disk and bent down onto the glass4 ,the case can now be fastened to the base by means of several screws1 passing through its lower end into the edge of the base4 ,two small binding posts are mounted on the outside of the case1 about #ij deg4 apart and well insulated from each other and from the case1 to serve as terminals for the instrument4 ,the instrument is now complete with the exception of the winding4 ,since this is to be a voltmeter and it is always desirable that a voltmeter take as small a current as possible1 the winding must consist of a relatively large number of turns of small wire1 each turn carrying a small current4 ,the difference in the construction of different instruments necessitates that their winding contain a different number of turns in order that a given voltage may produce a full-scale deflection4 ,a little experimenting with different windings is the easiest means of determining the proper size of wire and number of turns to meet individual requirements4 ,after adjusting the winding so that the maximum voltage it is desired to measure produces a full-scale deflection1 the scale is calibrated by marking the positions of the needle in accordance with those of the needle of a standard instrument connected in parallel with it4 ,in marking the scale of an ammeter1 connect the instruments in series4 ,remember that if the instrument is to be used as an ammeter1 it must have as low a resistance as possible and that to prevent undue heating1 the wire must have ample cross section4 ,if difficulty is experienced due to the continuous vibration of the needle1 although the current be practically constant1 this trouble can be greatly reduced by mounting a paper wind vane on the moving system1 which will tend to dampen its movement4 ,falling ,leaves in a ,nature ,scene ,use an ordinary pasteboard box1 a shoe box or larger1 and cut out one end4 ,fasten the box to the ceiling by means of pasteboard strips4 ,one end of these strips is pasted on the bottom of the box and the other ends tacked to the ceiling4 ,fit a piece of board1 #a_/b in4 thick1 into the open end of the box so that it will slide easily back and forth on the inside4 ,place this slide in the back of the box1 attach a string to it and run this through double tacks placed in the ceiling and to the side wings4 ,illustration3 ,the ,box as ,it is ,prepared to ,fasten on the ,ceiling for ,dropping the ,leaves ,have the box almost full of autumn leaves1 and when the slide is pulled slowly by the operator1 they will be pushed1 one or two at a time1 out of the open end1 and will drift down to the stage as naturally as if falling from trees1 making quite a realistic scene4--,contributed by ,miss ,s4 ,e4 ,jocelyn1 ,new ,haven1 ,conn4 ,home or ,traveling ,utility ,bed ,pocket ,the pocket is made of cretonne with wire hooks attached on the upper edge4 ,the compartments are arranged as needs may require4 ,it can be hooked on the head1 foot or side rail of the bed or used1 as shown1 in a sleeping car4 ,it provides a place to keep the slippers1 gown and other necessities1 and can be rolled up and put in a bag4--,contributed by ,harriette ,i4 ,lockwood1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,various ,pockets for the ,change ,garments for ,use at ,home or in ,traveling ,a ,paper ,perforator ,in an emergency an ordinary hacksaw blade may be made to serve very acceptably as a paper perforator4 ,the toothed edge is applied to the paper and the reverse edge tapped with a mallet or hammer4 ,a considerable number of sheets may be perforated at one time1 depending of course on the thickness and softness of the paper4 ,turning ,brass ,rings ,illustration ,occasionally an amateur has need of brass rings of round cross section1 and if their construction is not understood1 the task is a difficult one4 ,if a piece of brass tubing1 an old bushing or a cored piece is at hand1 a part of the work is already done4 ,if not1 a piece of stock with large enough outside diameter should be chucked in the lathe and drilled out with the right size of drill4 ,a tin or pasteboard template should be prepared the size of the ring section--a half circle is best1 and it is easiest made by drilling a hole in the tin and cutting it in two4 ,an inside boring tool and a turning tool are necessary4 ,it is preferable to shape the inside first1 cutting it out roughly and checking up with the template4 ,the amount of inside cutting is shown in the drawing4 ,a hard scraper and emery cloth may be used for smoothing and polishing4 ,turn and polish the outside and finally turn as far down on the inner quarter as can be done without cutting off the finish1 then polish and cut it off4 ,it only requires a little filing to smooth up the rim of rough metal left4 ,illustration3 ,the ,electric ,globes1 as ,they ,light beneath the ,spray1 ,illuminate the ,top1 and the ,light ,follows the ,streams of ,water ,so ,that ,they ,appear ,like ,streams of ,light ,an ,electric ,fountain ,by ,walter ,p4 ,butler ,to make the grounds as attractive as possible for a lawn party given one night1 ,i constructed an electric fountain which at first appeared to be an expensive proposition1 but when completed the desired effect was produced without any expense whatever1 as ,i had the things used in its construction on hand4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,different ,parts to ,construct the ,electric ,fountain 7,fig4 #a7 ,a light frame1 #i in4 square1 was made1 of #c_/d-;in4 material1 as shown in ,fig4 #a1 and a grooved pulley was attached exactly in the center on the under side of the crosspiece4 ,a turned stick1 ,a1 #b in4 in diameter and #b-a_/b in4 long1 was fastened to the face of the pulley so that it turned true as the pulley and frame revolved4 ,a hole was then bored centrally through the three parts1 the frame crosspiece1 the pulley1 and the turned stick1 of a size to fit a spindle about #c_/h in4 in diameter4 ,a box was procured1 large enough for the frame to turn in freely1 and a block of wood was fastened centrally in its bottom1 which had a #c_/h-;in4 pin set in a hole bored in the center4 ,the pin may be of hard wood1 but it is better to use metal4 ,a bolt1 or piece of rod1 will answer the purpose of a pin very well4 ,a small battery motor--,i had one on hand and did not need to purchase one--was fastened to one side of the box so that its pulley was in line with the pulley on the lower surface of the frame4 ,the batteries to run the motor were placed in the corner of the box1 where the revolving frame would not touch them4 ,the motor may be of larger current capacity1 however1 and run direct on the current used for the lamps4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,about #a_/b in4 from the lower end of the turned piece ,a1 a brass strip was fastened around it4 ,this work should be neatly done1 and the joint soldered and smoothed1 so that the outer surface will not catch on the brush used to make the contact4 ,this ring can be better made by cutting the width from a piece of brass tubing of a size to fit on the turned stick ,a4 ,about #a-a_/b in4 from the lower end four segments of a circle were fastened so as to make a space of about #a_/d in4 between their ends4 ,this construction is clearly shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,a cross section1 showing the wire connections from the brass ring and segments to the lamps and where they lead out on top1 is shown at ,b4 ,the contact brushes consist of brass strips fastened with bolts to an upright1 ,c1 made of wood and attached to one edge of the block in the bottom of the box4 ,two nuts are used on each bolt1 between which are fastened the lead wires from a source of current4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the wiring diagram is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the wire ,d from the ring is run to the brass base of each lamp1 of which there are four4 ,the wires ,e1 from each segment1 are connected with solder to each screw ferrule of the lamps1 and the ends are left bare and open1 as shown1 between the lamps4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,a lamp is fastened to each corner of the frame on top1 as shown in ,fig4 #d1 with a piece of wire wrapped once around the screw ferrule and the extending ends held with staples4 ,the wire used should be heavily insulated or1 if it is of iron1 a rubber tube slipped over it4 ,a piece of tin1 or bright metal1 is placed beneath each globe for a reflector4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,a glass plate was used to cover the box1 and a lawn spray of the fountain type was placed on the glass4 ,the globes1 as they light beneath the spray1 illuminate the top and the light follows the streams of water so that they appear like streams of light4 ,each light is turned on in succession as the frame revolves within the box1 and by using globes of different colors1 an exceedingly beautiful effect is obtained4 ,if the bared ends of the wires are twisted together between the globes1 these will all glow at once4 ,a ,mystery ,coin ,box ,the effect of this trick is as follows3 ,a small metal box1 just large enough to hold a half dollar and about #a_/b in4 high1 with a cover that fits snugly over the top1 is passed out to be examined1 and when handed back to the performer he places it on the finger ends of his left hand1 and a half dollar is dropped into it and the cover put on4 ,the box is then shaken to prove that the coin is still there4 ,the performer then taps the box with his fingers and picks it up with the other hand and the coin will appear to have fallen through the bottom4 ,both the coin and box are then handed out for examination4 ,this seemingly impossible effect is made when the performer places the cover on the box4 ,the box is resting on the fingers of the left hand and the cover is held between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand1 but just before placing the cover on1 the box is turned over with the right thumb1 and the cover is placed on the bottom instead of the top4 ,the trick can be done within a foot of the spectators without their seeing the deception4 ,it is a good plan to hide the box with the right hand when placing the cover1 although this is not necessary4 ,how to ,make a ,small ,series ,motor ,the motor here described has been constructed and found to give very good results4 ,it is simple to build and the materials required can be easily obtained4 ,the armature core and field1 or frame1 are made of laminated iron1 instead of being cast as is often done by the manufacturers1 which is a decided advantage1 as certain losses are thereby reduced1 and its operation will be improved by this type of construction especially if used on an alternating-current circuit4 ,the machine will be divided into three main parts1 the construction of each of which will be taken up in turn and the method of procedure discussed in detail4 ,these parts are the completed armature1 the field and bearings1 and the brushes together with suitable terminals and connections4 ,the armature core is constructed from a number of pieces1 having dimensions that correspond to those given in ,a1 ,fig4 #a4 ,these pieces are cut from thin annealed sheet iron1 in sufficient number to make a pile1 #c_/d in4 high1 when placed on top of each other and firmly clamped4 ,it would1 no doubt1 be best to first lay out one of these pieces very carefully and then cut it out and mark out the other pieces with the first one as a pattern1 being careful to file off all the rough edges on each piece4 ,illustration3 ,details of the ,armature ,laminations and the ,commutator ,segments1 and the ,method of ,mounting ,armature ,core and ,commutator 7,fig4 #a7 ,now obtain a piece of #a_/d-;in4 iron or brass rod1 #c-a_/d in4 long1 that is to serve as a shaft upon which to mount the armature and commutator4 ,this rod is threaded for a distance of #g_/h in4 on one end and #a-g_/h in4 on the other4 ,procure five brass nuts1 #a_/h in4 thickness1 to fit the threads on the rod4 ,if possible have the ends of the rod centered before the threads are cut1 for reasons to be given later4 ,place one of the nuts on that end of the shaft that is threaded for #g_/h in41 and in such a position that its inner surface is #c_/d in4 from the end of the rod4 ,solder this nut to the rod when it is in the proper place and remove all extra solder4 ,drill a #a_/d-;in4 hole in each of the armature stampings and place them on the shaft1 clamping them together with three small clamps1 one on each extension or pole4 ,then place a second nut on the shaft and draw it up tight against the last stamping placed in position1 and solder it to the shaft4 ,next wind two or three layers of good strong tape around each of the rectangular portions of the armature and then remove the clamps4 ,make sure that all the edges of the different laminations are perfectly even before applying the tape4 ,the shaft is then placed between two centers to determine whether the core is approximately balanced and runs true4 ,if the armature core is unbalanced or not true1 the trouble should be corrected before proceeding with the remainder of the armature construction4 ,the armature winding is not to be put on the core until the commutator has been constructed and mounted on the shaft4 ,the commutator consists of three pieces of thin sheet brass similar to that shown at ,b1 ,fig4 #a1 mounted on the surface of a cylinder of insulating material1 #c_/h in4 long and #g_/h in4 in diameter4 ,a #a_/d-;in4 hole is drilled lengthwise through the cylinder of insulating material4 ,bend the pieces of brass around the outside of the cylinder1 and turn all the lugs1 except the center one1 marked ,c1 over at right angles and put a small nail or screw through the holes in the ends of the lugs into the cylinder4 ,these pieces of brass are equally spaced around the cylinder so that all the lugs1 not turned down1 project in the same direction4 ,now place a nut on the end of the shaft that extends the greatest distance through the armature1 so that its outside surface is #a_/b in4 from the surface of the end of the armature core next to it1 and solder the nut to the shaft4 ,place the commutator on the shaft so that the projections on the pieces of brass are toward the armature core and the spaces between the ends of the pieces occupy the position relative to the cores1 shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #b4 ,another nut is then placed on the shaft and drawn up tight against the cylinder4 ,the proper spacing of the various parts on the shaft of the machine is shown at ,d1 ,fig4 #a4 ,another small nut is placed on the end of the shaft1 away from the commutator1 so that its outside surface is #a_/b in4 from the surface of the end of the armature core4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of the ,winding on the ,armature and ,detail of the ,field ,laminations 7,fig4 #b7 ,the threads on that part of the shaft extending beyond the last nut on each end are now filed off1 which can be easily done by placing the shaft between the centers of a lathe and revolving it quite rapidly1 the file being applied to the parts that are to be cut down4 ,obtain a small quantity of ,no4 #bb gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wind four layers on each of the three legs1 or poles1 of the armature core1 insulating the layers from each other and the entire winding from the core by means of paper and shellac4 ,the three coils are wound in the same direction about their respective cores and each winding is started at the center of the armature with #b or #c in4 of wire extending out toward the commutator4 ,the outside end of each winding will terminate at the end of the coil toward the center of the armature1 if an even number of layers is wound on1 and is securely fastened by means of two or three turns of heavy thread4 ,the inside end of one coil is then connected to the outside end of the next one1 and so on4 ,these connections can be easily made1 and at the same time the proper connections made to the commutator1 by cutting the inside end of one coil and the outside end of the next so that they will reach the lug on the nearest segment of the commutator1 with about #a_/d in4 to spare1 then removing the insulation from each for about #a_/h in4 and soldering them both to the same lug4 ,the arrangement of the winding is shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #b4 ,connect all of the coils and segments in this manner1 and the armature of the motor is complete4 ,the field or frame of the machine is made from a number of laminations whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,b1 ,fig4 #b4 ,as many laminations are used in the construction of the frame as the number of pieces in the armature1 if iron of the same thickness is used4 ,four of the laminations have extensions at their lower corners to correspond to the parts shown by the dotted lines in ,b1 ,fig4 #b4 ,place all of these laminations in a pile and clamp them rigidly together1 then drill the four holes1 indicated by the letters ,c1 ,d1 ,e and ,f1 with a #c_/af-;in4 drill4 ,two of the pieces with the extensions on them are placed in the bottom of the pile and the other two on top4 ,place a #c_/af-;in4 bolt through each of the lower holes and draw up the nuts on them tight4 ,procure two pieces of #c_/af-;in4 rod1 #a-a_/b in4 long1 and thread each end for a distance of #a_/b in4 ,get #h nuts for these rods1 about #a_/h in4 thick and #e_/h in4 across the face1 if possible4 ,both sides of these nuts are filed down flat4 ,put the threaded rods through the two upper holes in the field frame and place a nut on each end and draw them tight1 leaving an equal length of rod protruding from each side4 ,obtain two pieces of #a_/h-;in4 brass1 #e_/h in4 wide1 one #d-c_/d in4 long and the other #e-c_/d in4 long4 ,bend these pieces into the forms shown at ,a1 ,fig4 #c4 ,drill a #c_/af-;in4 hole in each end of both pieces so that they may be mounted upon the ends of the rods protruding from the field frame4 ,the exact center of the space the armature is to occupy is then marked on each of these pieces1 and a hole is drilled in each1 having the same diameter as the ends of the armature shaft4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,armature ,supports and the ,brushes1 and the ,manner of ,mounting the ,brushes 7,fig4 #c7 ,the extensions on the outside laminations are bent over at right angles to the main portion of the frame1 thus forming a base upon which the motor may rest4 ,holes may be drilled in the extensions after they are bent over to be used in mounting the frame upon a wooden base4 ,procure about #a_/b lb4 of ,no4 #ah gauge single-cotton-covered copper wire and wind it on the lower center portion of the frame until the depth of the winding is about #a_/b in4 ,be careful to insulate the winding well and1 to insure mechanical protection1 place a layer of adhesive tape outside4 ,about #d or #e in4 of wire is allowed at each end for making connections4 ,it is best to have these ends terminate on the commutator side of the frame4 ,the brushes for the machine are made from some thin sheet copper or brass1 and are shaped and dimensioned approximately as shown at ,b1 ,fig4 #c4 ,two pieces of hard rubber1 or fiber1 #a_/b in4 square and #g_/h in4 long1 serve as mountings for the brushes4 ,these pieces of insulation are mounted in the corners of the armature support1 at the commutator end1 by means of two small screws in each4 ,mount the brushes on these pieces so that their free ends bear on the commutator exactly opposite each other4 ,one brush is mounted on the upper end of its support and the other brush on the lower end of its support4 ,this is shown at ,c1 ,fig4 #c4 ,two small binding posts are mounted at the same time as the brushes1 and are electrically connected to the brushes1 thus affording an easy means of making a connection to the armature4 ,the brushes are so mounted as to bear firmly upon the commutator4 ,to operate the motor1 connect the armature and field windings in series1 and the combination to a source of electromotive force of several volts4 ,if it is desired to reverse the direction of rotation1 reverse the connections of either the armature or field windings1 but not both4 ,the motor may be mounted on a neat wooden base and the connections all brought down to a reversing switch1 which may also be mounted on the same base as the motor4 ,the speed can be varied by changing the impressed voltage1 or by connecting a variable resistance in the armature circuit1 such as a wire rheostat4 ,a small pulley may be made and attached to the armature shaft so that the motor may be used in driving various kinds of toys4 ,cooler for ,milk and ,butter ,illustration ,an earthen jar or crock1 with a cover1 set in a box containing moist sand will keep butter and milk in hot weather better than a refrigerator4 ,the sand must be kept moist at all times4--,edwin ,j4 ,bachman1 ,jr41 ,fullerton1 ,pa4 ,rubber ,bumper on a ,water ,faucet ,sometimes a dish is broken by striking it on the faucet4 ,this is easily remedied by cutting a rubber washer from a rubber-boot heel with a sharp chisel and a hammer4 ,the washer is pushed into place on the end of the faucet1 and the dishes may strike the rubber without being broken4--,contributed by ,harriette ,i4 ,lockwood1 ,philadelphia1 ,pa4 ,boring a ,clean-,edged ,hole ,illustration ,when boring a hole in wood1 withdraw the bit as soon as the worm shows1 then start the worm in the hole on the opposite side and finish boring the hole4 ,it will then have clean edges on both sides of the wood4 ,often the bit pushes splinters of wood ahead of it1 when passing through1 but by using the method described this is avoided4 ,drilling ,thin ,metal ,illustration ,in drilling very thin stock the drill1 if not properly ground1 will tear the metal and leave a ragged edge4 ,to cut a hole through neatly the drill should be ground as illustrated4 ,the center ,a should extend about #a_/fd in4 beyond the points ,b4 ,the point ,a locates the center and the sharp points ,b cut out the disk of metal4 ,holes have been neatly and quickly made with this drill grinding in metal measuring 4#jjb in4 thickness4--,contributed by ,joseph ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 99 99 99 99 99 ,a pencil may be kept from falling out of the pocket by wrapping a couple of turns of tape around it or by wrapping it with a small rubber band4 ,flexible-,cord ,adjuster for an ,electrical ,flatiron ,illustration ,when using an electrical flatiron the flexible cord frequently gets under the iron1 causing much trouble for the user1 and mussing up the clothing4 ,the cord can be kept out of the way by fastening a pulley to the ironing board and attaching a coil spring to the electric cord between the pulley and the electric-fixture socket4 ,a coil spring that will draw out about #c ft4 should be used4--,contributed by ,herbert ,blandford1 ,elmira1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,wood ,clothes ,peg ,illustration ,if clothes that are slightly damp are hung on a nail or metal peg1 a rust stain that is almost impossible to remove will be the result4 ,to prevent this1 drive a nail with the head removed into the wall or cleat1 and place a wood peg over it4 ,the peg may be turned up or whittled out with a pocket knife and the hole bored with a hand drill4--,contributed by ,wm4 ,a4 ,robinson1 ,waynesboro1 ,pa4 ,to ,make ,scratch ,pads of ,old ,labels ,illustration ,labels and blank paper of uniform size1 that would otherwise be cast aside1 can be turned into handy scratch pads by placing them between blocks of wood1 secured by a wood clamp1 and applying paste on two edges1 then pressing a strip of paper on the pasted portions4 ,the edges to be pasted should project a trifle beyond the edges of the blocks4 ,how to ,make an ,electric ,heater ,the electric heater described in this article is very simple to construct1 its operation exceedingly satisfactory1 and the necessary material easily procured at a small cost at most electrical-supply stores4 ,the few tools needed are usually found about every home1 and the heater may be constructed by any ingenious person4 ,procure #f porcelain tubes1 #bj in4 long and approximately #ac_/af in4 in diameter4 ,on each of these tubes wind #be ft4 of bare ,no4 #bf gauge ,climax resistance wire4 ,the various turns should be uniformly distributed along the tubes and not allowed to come into contact with each other1 which can be prevented by placing a thin1 narrow coat of plaster of ,paris along the side of each of the tubes immediately after the winding has been put on4 ,several inches of free wire should be allowed at each end1 for making connections1 and the first and last turns on each tube should be securely fastened to the tube by several turns of binding wire4 ,it would be best not to extend the winding nearer the ends of the tubes than #c_/d in4 ,cut from some heavy tin1 or other thin sheet metal1 two disks1 #f in4 in diameter1 and punch six #e_/af-;in4 holes in each of the disks at equal distances and within #c_/d in4 of the outer edge4 ,punch two #a_/h-;in4 holes in one of these disks1 to be used in mounting a porcelain socket1 and also one #a_/b-;in4 hole through which the wires may be led to the socket1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,in the other disk punch four #a_/h-;in4 holes1 for mounting two porcelain single-pole snap switches1 and two #a_/b-;in4 holes1 for leading the wires through to the switches1 as shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,two ,ends on the ,heater ,giving ,dimensions and the ,location of ,parts 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,cut off six lengths of #e_/af-;in4 iron rod1 #bb in4 long1 and thread both ends of each piece for a length of #a-a_/d in4 ,fasten the porcelain tubes between the metal disks1 by placing one of the rods through each of the tubes and allowing the ends to extend through the #e_/af-;in4 holes in the outer edge of the disks4 ,a nut should be placed on each end of all the rods and drawn up so that the length of rod protruding at each end is the same4 ,obtain two single-pole snap switches and a porcelain socket1 and mount them on the ends by means of some small stove bolts4 ,the windings on the porcelain tubes should be connected as follows3 ,let the windings be designated by the letters ,a1 ,b1 ,c1 ,d1 ,e1 and ,f1 and their position be that indicated in ,figs4 #a and #b4 ,the primes indicate the ends of the windings at the socket end1 and the letters without the primes indicate the ends of the windings at the switch end of the heater4 ,the ends ,a and ,d should be connected directly together4 ,the ends ,b and ,c to the clips of the right-band snap switch1 and ,e and ,f1 to the clips of the left-hand snap switch4 ,the ends ,f1 ,a1 and ,b should be connected to one terminal of the socket1 and ,c1 ,d1 and ,e to the other terminal of the socket4 ,electrical connection is made to the winding by means of a plug and piece of lamp cord4 ,it is obvious that the windings ,a and ,d will be connected as soon as the plug is screwed into the socket1 if the circuit is closed at all other points1 and the windings ,b and ,c1 and ,e and ,f are controlled by the right and left-hand snap switches1 respectively4 ,make sure all the connections are properly insulated1 and that there is little chance of a short circuit occurring4 ,after the socket and snap switches have been connected to the windings1 two more thin disks1 the same diameter as the first1 may be fitted over the ends and held in place by two units on the end of each rod1 a nut being placed on each side of the disks4 ,a better way of mounting these disks would be by small machine screws that enter threaded holes in the ends of the rods4 ,these last disks are not absolutely necessary1 but they will add some to the appearance of the completed heater4 ,four small ears1 about #e_/h in4 square1 should be cut on the outer edge of the outside or inside disks and bent over at right angles to the main portion1 to be used in mounting the outside case of the heater4 ,cut from a sheet of #a_/h-;in4 asbestos a piece just long enough to fit between the inside disks and wide enough to cover the three lower windings ,c1 ,d1 and ,e4 ,the object of this piece of asbestos is to protect the surface upon which the heater will stand from excessive heat1 since it is to rest in a horizontal position4 ,obtain a piece of perforated1 thin sheet metal1 #ai-a_/b in4 wide and long enough to reach from one outside disk to the other4 ,bend this into a cylinder and fasten it to the lugs on the disks by means of small screws or bolts4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the legs may be made of #a_/h-;in4 strap iron1 #e_/h in4 wide1 bent into the form shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,these pieces may be attached to the perforated cylinder1 before it is mounted on the heater proper1 by means of several small bolts4 ,the piece of asbestos should be wired to the cylinder after the heater is all assembled1 so that it will always remain in the lower part of the cylinder and serve the purpose for which it is intended4 ,the heater1 as described above1 is constructed for a #aaj-volt circuit1 which is the voltage commonly used in electric lighting4 ,the total consumption of the heater will be approximately #fjj watts1 each part consuming about #a_/c of the total1 or #bjj watts4 ,if it is desired to wind the heater for a #bbj-volt circuit1 #be ft4 of ,no4 #bi gauge ,climax resistance wire should be used on each tube4 ,a ,molding-,sawing ,block ,used on a ,bench ,having occasion to saw some short pieces of molding1 ,i experienced considerable trouble in holding them without a vise until ,i made a block1 as shown in the sketch4 ,this answered the purpose as well as a vise4 ,the block is not fastened in any manner1 but is simply pushed against the edge of the bench or table and held with the hand4 ,it should be about #i in4 wide and #a ft4 long1 with strips #b in4 thick at each edge4--,contributed by ,w4 ,f4 ,brodnax1 ,jr41 ,bethlehem1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,a ,block for ,holding ,molding1 or ,strips of ,wood1 ,while ,sawing ,small ,pieces from ,them ,pipe ,caps ,used as ,castings for ,engine ,pistons ,desiring to make a small piston for a model engine and not caring to make a pattern and send it away to have a casting made1 ,i thought of using ordinary pipe caps1 these being both inexpensive and of a quality adapted to machining4 ,the cylinder bore was #a-a_/b in4 in diameter1 so ,i secured a standard pipe cap for #a-a_/d-;in4 pipe which gave an outside diameter of about #a-e_/h in4 ,the cap1 not having sufficient depth for holding in a chuck1 was screwed on a short piece of pipe and then trued in the lathe chuck4 ,the outside surface was turned to a diameter of #a-a_/b in41 then removed from the pipe1 reversed and chucked again1 and the threads bored out to reduce the walls to #a_/h in4 ,this made an excellent piston for a single-acting engine4--,contributed by ,harry ,f4 ,lowe1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,an ,electric ,horn ,a simple electric horn for use on a bicycle1 automobile1 or for other purposes1 can be constructed as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the size will of course depend somewhat on the use for which it is intended1 but one with the diaphragm #a-c_/d in4 in diameter and the horn #e in4 long and #d in4 in diameter1 at the large end1 will be sufficient for most purposes4 ,this will make the instrument #g-a_/b or #h in4 in over-all length4 ,illustration3 ,an ,electric ,horn ,operated in a ,manner ,similar to an ,electric ,bell on a ,battery ,circuit 7,fig4 #a7 ,the horn proper1 ,a1 ,fig4 #a1 is constructed first4 ,this can be formed from sheet brass4 ,to lay out the metal to the desired size draw a cross section1 as ,,abcd1 ,fig4 #b1 then project the lines ,,ac and ,,bd until they meet at ,e4 ,strike two arcs of circles on the brass sheet1 using ,,ec as radius for the inner one and ,,ea for the outer4 ,measure off ,,fg and ,,hj equal to #c-a_/d times ,,dc and ,,ab1 respectively1 and cut out ,,fgjh4 ,roll and lap #a_/d in4 at the edges and solder the joint neatly4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,after smoothing the edges on the ends1 solder a very thin disk of ferrotype metal1 ,b1 ,fig4 #a1 to the small end of the horn4 ,this is used for the diaphragm4 ,cut out a ring1 ,c1 from #a_/d-;in4 hard fiber and bevel it on the inside edge to fit the horn4 ,also make a disk of fiber1 ,d1 having the same outside diameter as the ring ,c4 ,these parts form the ends for a brass cylinder ,e1 which is made in two parts or halves joined on the lines shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,fasten one of the halves1 ,f1 ,fig4 #c1 to the fiber ring ,c and disk ,d1 ,fig4 #a1 with small screws1 the other half to be put in place after the instrument is completed and adjusted4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,a small support1 ,g1 is cut from fiber and fastened in as shown4 ,a pair of magnets of about #ej ohms are mounted on this support4 ,the parts from an old bell or buzzer may be used1 which consist of a soft-iron armature1 ,h1 ,fig4 #a1 having a strap of spring brass1 ,j1 attached by soldering and pivoted at ,k1 with an adjusting screw1 ,l1 to set the tension4 ,another ,u-shaped spring-brass strip1 ,m1 constitutes the current breaker1 which has an adjusting screw1 ,n4 ,the points of contact on the current breaker should be tipped with platinum4 ,a piece of brass wire1 ,o1 is soldered to the diaphragm disk ,b and the soft-iron armature ,h1 to connect them solidly4 ,the tone of the horn can be adjusted with the screws ,l and ,n4 ,the faster the armature vibrates1 the higher the tone1 and vice versa4 ,the connections are the same as for an electric bell4--,contributed by ,james ,p4 ,lewis1 ,golden1 ,colo4 ,combination ,meat ,saw and ,knife ,a very handy combination knife and meat saw can be made of an old discarded saw blade4 ,the blade is cut on a line parallel with the toothed edge1 allowing enough material to make a good-sized blade1 then the straight part is ground to a knife edge and a wood handle attached at one end4 ,the handle is made in halves1 placed one on each side of the blade1 and riveted together1 then the projecting metal is ground off to the shape of the handle4--,contributed by ,a4 ,c4 ,westby1 ,porter1 ,minn4 ,illustration3 ,the ,blade of the ,knife is ,cut from the ,toothed ,side of a ,discarded ,saw ,blade ,clamp ,used as a ,vise ,a carpenter's wood clamp fastened to the edge of a bench1 as shown in the sketch1 makes a good substitute for a vise for many kinds of light work4 ,if the clamp is located over or in front of the bench post1 holes must be bored in the latter to admit the ends of the clamp screws4 ,a hole is bored through the shoulder screw and a handle attached as shown4--,contributed by ,h4 ,w4 ,j4 ,langletz1 ,harrisburg1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,clamp ,attached to a ,bench ,top will ,serve the ,purpose of a ,vise in ,many ,instances ,wire ,expansion ,meter ,when there is a current of electricity in an electrical conductor a certain amount of heat is generated due to the opposition or resistance of the conductor to the free passage of the electricity through it4 ,the heat thus generated causes a change in the temperature of the conductor and as a result there will be a change in its length1 it contracting with a decrease in temperature and expanding with an increase in temperature4 ,the temperature of the conductor will change when the current in it changes1 and hence its length will change1 and it will reach a constant temperature or a constant length when the current in it is constant in value and the rate at which it is giving off heat is exactly equal to the rate at which heat is being generated in it4 ,the fact that there is an actual change in the length of the conductor due to a change in current in it constitutes the fundamental principle of the following simple instrument4 ,illustration3 ,meter for ,measuring the ,expansion of ,metal ,wires ,which are ,heated by ,electricity ,the parts needed in its construction are as follows3 ,an old safety-razor blade2 one #h-;in4 hatpin2 two medium-size nails2 a short piece of ,german-silver wire2 a small piece of sealing wax2 a #a_/b-;in4 board for the base1 approximately #c-a_/b in4 by #aj in41 and a small piece of thin sheet brass4 ,remove the head from the hatpin and fasten the blunt end in the center of the safety-razor blade ,a with a piece of sealing wax so that the pin ,b is perpendicular to the blade as shown4 ,now drive the two nails into the board ,c1 so that they are about #a_/d in4 from the edges and #a-a_/b in4 from the end4 ,fasten the piece of ,german-silver wire ,d to these nails as shown4 ,the size of this wire will depend upon the value of the current to be measured4 ,make a small hook1 ,e1 from a short piece of rather stiff wire and fasten it to the hatpin about #a in4 from the razor blade4 ,the length of this hook should be such that the pointed end of the hatpin will be at the top of the scale ,f when there is no current in the wire1 ,d4 ,the scale ,f is made by bending the piece of sheet brass so as to form a right angle and fastening it to the base4 ,a piece of thin cardboard can be mounted upon the surface of the vertical portion of the piece of brass and a suitable scale inked upon it4 ,the instrument is now complete with the exception of two binding posts1 not shown in the sketch1 that may be mounted at convenient points on the base and connected to the ends of the ,german-silver wire1 thus serving as terminals for the instrument4 ,the completed instrument can be calibrated by connecting it in series with another instrument whose calibration is known and marking the position of the pointer on the scale for different values of current4 ,how to ,make a ,fire and ,burglar ,alarm ,a very serviceable fire and burglar alarm may be installed by anyone who can work with carpenters' tools and who has an elementary knowledge of electricity4 ,fire and burglar alarms are divided into two general types1 called open circuit and closed circuit1 respectively4 ,in the open-circuit type of alarm all the windows1 doors1 and places to be protected are equipped with electrical alarm springs which are in circuit with an ordinary vibrating bell and battery1 and these alarm springs are all normally open4 ,when a window or door is disturbed or moved more than a predetermined amount1 the bell circuit is closed and the alarm sounded4 ,the arrangement of such an alarm is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,a switch1 ,a1 is placed in circuit so that the alarm may be disconnected during the day and the opening and closing of doors and windows will not operate the bell4 ,it is best not to place a switch in the fire-alarm circuit as this circuit should be in an operating condition at all times4 ,illustration3 ,connections and ,wiring ,diagram ,showing an ,open-,circuit ,fire and ,burglar ,alarm 7,fig4 #a7 ,the alarm switch controlled by the window consists of a narrow metal plate1 ,b1 and a spring1 ,c1 mounted in a recess cut in the side of the window frame4 ,the spring ,c is bent into such a form that its upper end is forced into contact with the plate ,b1 when the window is raised past the outwardly projecting part of the spring ,c1 and the bell circuit is thus closed4 ,the position of the alarm switch can be adjusted so that the window may be opened a sufficient distance to permit the necessary ventilation but not allow a burglar to enter4 ,the alarm switch controlled by the door is arranged in a different manner4 ,in this case the free end of the spring ,d is held away from contact with the spring ,e by the edge of the door1 which forces the spring ,d back into the recess cut in the door jamb4 ,when the door is opened the spring ,e is permitted to move out and come into contact with the spring or plate ,e1 and the alarm circuit is thus closed4 ,the form of the spring ,d can be so adjusted that the door may be opened some distance1 but not enough to allow a person to enter1 before the alarm is sounded4 ,an alarm switch1 identical with that just described for the door1 should be mounted in the upper part of the window frame to take care of the upper sash4 ,this alarm switch may be located low enough to permit the window to be lowered for the purpose of ventilation without sounding the alarm4 ,the wires for these various alarm switches should be run as near completely concealed as possible to prevent them being tampered with by curious parties1 who may unintentionally break one of the conductors and thus make some part of the system inoperative4 ,it might be best to test the system occasionally1 to make sure all switches are in operating condition4 ,the fire-alarm switch consists of two springs that are held from contact with each other by means of a thin cord4 ,this switch is placed in the location to be protected1 or wherever a fire is most likely to break out1 such as over the furnace1 in the coal bin1 etc4 ,when the cord is destroyed the springs make contact and the alarm is sounded4 ,a metal having a very low melting temperature may be used instead of the cord1 and the alarm will be sounded when the temperature exceeds a certain amount and the actual occurrence of a fire thus prevented4 ,in some cases1 the fire-alarm switch may be completely destroyed and the alarm circuit will then be opened and the bell will cease ringing4 ,to prevent this trouble a small electric drop may be placed in the circuit1 the arrangement being similar to that shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,when the shutter of the drop falls1 due to the closing of the alarm circuit1 there is a second circuit closed1 and this second circuit remains closed until the shutter is restored to its vertical or normal position1 or the switch1 ,a1 is thrown to the open point4 ,the addition of the drop in the burglar-alarm circuit may prove to be an advantage1 as a burglar cannot stop the alarm1 after he has once closed any of the alarm switches and operated the drop1 by simply restoring the window or door to its original position4 ,illustration3 ,circuit ,equipped with ,drop to ,ring the ,bell in ,case the ,switch is ,destroyed 7,fig4 #b7 ,in the closed-circuit type1 the alarm switches are all normally closed and the alarm is sounded by opening the circuit at some point4 ,the arrangement of such an alarm is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,the alarm switches are all connected in series in this case and in circuit with a closed-circuit battery and relay or drop4 ,the drop or relay controls a local circuit composed of an open-circuit battery and an ordinary vibrating bell4 ,illustration3 ,wiring ,diagram ,showing ,connections for a ,closed-,circuit ,burglar and ,fire ,alarm 7,fig4 #c7 ,the operation of a drop on a closed circuit is a little different from its operation on a normally open circuit4 ,the drop for the closed circuit must be so constructed that its latch holds the shutter in a vertical position when there is a current in the drop winding1 but allows it to fall as soon as the drop circuit is opened4 ,an ordinary telegraph relay may be used in connection with the closed-circuit alarm4 ,the connections to the relay are such that the bell circuit is normally open and remains so until the armature of the relay is released1 which does not occur until the circuit of which its winding is a part is opened at one of the alarm springs4 ,a special switch1 ,a1 and resistance1 ,b1 are shown connected in circuit in ,fig4 #c1 the object of which is as follows3 ,when it is desired to disconnect the alarm springs or make them inoperative they must be replaced by another circuit which will permit a sufficient current to pass through the relay winding at all times1 to prevent its armature from being released and sounding the alarm4 ,the switch ,a is so constructed that either the alarm switches or the resistance ,b is in series with the battery and relay winding at all times1 there being no open-circuit position for the switch4 ,the fire-alarm switch for this type of signal may be made from a narrow piece of tin foil1 or some metal having a low melting temperature1 mounted between two insulated clips that are connected in the alarm circuit4 ,strips of gold or silver foil may be placed on windows and connected in the alarm circuit1 which will give a protection from theft by breaking the glass4 ,two or three gravity cells will serve very nicely for the closed-circuit battery1 while several dry cells will do for the open-circuit or bell battery4 ,all types of alarm switches can be purchased at any up-to-date electrical supply house1 but their construction and operation is so simple that they may be easily made by almost anyone4 ,a detailed description of the construction of the various parts of the above circuits will not be given here1 but such details can be safely left to the ingenuity of the person installing the system4 ,it is easily seen from the above description that a burglar who might discover that a house was wired for alarm would be greatly perplexed to know what to do1 for the very thing that would prevent one kind of alarm from ringing would cause the other to ring4 ,removing a ,rear ,bicycle ,sprocket ,if a bicycle rider desires to remove the rear sprocket for changing the gear1 or for any other reason1 and there is no large pipe wrench at hand1 a piece of tube or pipe1 as shown in the sketch1 can be used as a lever4 ,fasten one end of the chain in one end of the pipe with a wedge and place the other end of the pipe on a sprocket4 ,the chain is then placed over the sprockets and a leverage equal to any pipe wrench is secured4--,contributed by ,jno4 ,v4 ,loeffler1 ,evansville1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 ,the ,piece of ,pipe ,gives a ,leverage ,equal to ,that of a ,large ,pipe ,wrench ,hand ,propeller-,wheel ,attachment for a ,rowboat ,the rear fork of an old bicycle frame1 with the crank hanger attached1 and the rear hub constitute the main parts of the propelling device4 ,one of the cranks is cut from the hanger and a bracket attached to the frame1 as shown1 for making it fast to the stern of the boat4 ,two propeller blades are bolted to the rear hub4 ,a rudder is fastened to the rear tube of the frame with hooks and eyes so that it can be turned with a handle at the top1 or with ropes run to a wheel4 ,the illustration shows the connection of the device to a boat4--,contributed by ,berge ,lion1 ,fresno1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,the ,rear ,fork of a ,bicycle with ,its ,parts ,constitutes the ,main ,propeller ,attachment ,an ,attached ,back for a ,photographic ,printing ,frame ,in using the ordinary photographic printing frame with a spring-pressure back1 the back must be entirely removed from the frame to put in the paper1 and as this operation is carried on in a dim light1 the back is often mislaid1 causing no little inconvenience and delay4 ,to do away with this annoyance1 ,i placed at one end of the frame1 as shown in the sketch1 a second hinge made of cloth or any pliable material4 ,when the pressure springs are released1 the back swings down on this auxiliary hinge1 and after changing the papers1 it is instantly closed by a slight movement of the hand1 making it very rapid and easy to use4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,wibaux1 ,mont4 ,illustration3 ,the ,back1 being ,hinged to the ,frame1 ,prevents ,it from being ,mislaid ,repairing a ,worn ,stop ,cock ,the plug of a worn stop cock1 or one that has been reground1 of the type shown in the illustration will project beyond the bottom so that the ring1 or washer1 and screw will not draw it tightly into place4 ,illustration3 ,removing a ,portion of the ,plug and ,shortening the ,screw ,allows the ,parts to be ,drawn ,tightly ,together ,to remedy this trouble1 file off a portion of the plug on the line ,,aa and also file off a sufficient amount of the screw on the line ,,bb4 ,when the plug is replaced and the washer and screw drawn up1 the stop cock will be as good as a new one4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,tool ,holders ,made of ,brass ,clips ,hangers to grip tool handles can be easily formed of sheet metal in any desired material4 ,the clips are shaped as shown at ,a in the sketch4 ,any number of the clips may be fastened with screws to a wood crosspiece or a wall in such a manner as to make openings into which the handles of the tools are pressed4 ,before fastening the clips they should be spaced for the widths of the handles4--,contributed by ,f4 ,h4 ,tillotson1 ,sycamore1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,the ,clips can be ,set ,so ,that ,they will ,grip ,any ,size ,tool ,handle ,removing ,perspiration ,stains from ,delicate ,cloth ,lay the stain in the cloth over some blotting paper1 and sponge the cloth with a grain-alcohol and ether solution1 which should be made by mixing equal portions of each4 ,the sponging should be quite vigorous and kept up until the cloth is dry1 then the spot should be touched lightly with ammonia water1 which can be purchased at any drug store4 ,this will leave a slight blur1 which can be removed by rubbing with ,french chalk on the wrong side4 ,the chalk is cheap and can be procured with the ammonia water4 ,do not forget the blotting paper1 as it keeps the solution from forming a ring around the spot4 ,buttonhole ,cutter ,if the buttonhole scissors are mislaid or there are none at hand1 the holes may be cut in the manner shown in the sketch4 ,place a piece of wood1 having a width equal to the length of the buttonhole1 on the table and lay the cloth over it in the line where the holes are required1 then draw a sharp knife across the cloth on the wood where the holes are marked4 ,this will cut the cloth neatly and accurately4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,gordon1 ,can4 ,illustration3 ,sharp ,knife ,drawn across the ,cloth ,laid over a ,piece of ,wood ,cuts the ,holes ,filing ,small ,rods in a ,lathe ,reducing the diameter of a small rod by filing while it is turning in a lathe is a difficult thing to do1 as the pressure of the file on one side bends the rod4 ,the filing may be easily accomplished by using two files1 as shown in the sketch4 ,in this manner almost any amount of pressure can be applied by squeezing the files together without danger of bending the rod4--,contributed by ,j4,f4 ,tholl1 ,detroit1 ,mich4 ,illustration3 ,the ,pressure of ,one ,file ,against the ,other ,prevents the ,rod from ,bending 99 99 99 99 99 ,young sleepwalkers may be cured if watched and given a good switching until they are wide awake4 ,a ,d',arsonval ,galvanometer ,a galvanometer in which the moving part of the instrument is a permanent magnet controlled by the action of the earth's magnetic field and the magnetic effect of a current in a coil of wire1 that usually surrounds the magnet1 has the great disadvantage of having its indications changed1 although the current itself may remain constant1 due to a change in the strength of the magnetic field in which the instrument operates4 ,the operation of instruments of the above type is satisfactory only in localities where there is a practically constant magnetic field for them to operate in1 which it is almost impossible to have1 due to the presence of permanent and electric magnets and magnetic materials such as iron and steel4 ,an instrument constructed as follows will not have the above disadvantage and its operation will be a great deal more satisfactory1 as its indications will be practically independent of outside disturbances4 ,in this instrument1 the moving part is the coil carrying the current1 and it moves in a permanent magnetic field so strong that other disturbing magnetic effects can be neglected4 ,the coil is hung by means of a fine wire and the twist in this wire is the only force acting to bring the coil back to its zero position1 after it has been deflected1 and maintain it there4 ,illustration3 ,the ,permanent ,magnet and ,its ,brass ,support1 and ,their ,position on the ,base 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b1 ,fig4 #c7 ,the construction of the magnet and containing case for the instrument will be taken up first4 ,obtain a piece of ,norway iron1 #a_/b in4 square and about #i in4 long4 ,bend this piece into the form shown in ,fig4 #a1 and file off the inner edges until they are parallel and about #g_/h in4 apart4 ,drill four #a_/h-;in4 holes in the ends of this piece1 two in each end1 as indicated4 ,this piece of iron is first tempered and then magnetized by placing it in contact with a powerful electromagnet4 ,cut a second piece from some soft iron with dimensions corresponding to those given in ,fig4 #b4 ,drill two #a_/h-;in4 holes1 ,a and ,b1 in this piece as shown in the sketch4 ,this second piece is mounted between the poles of the magnet1 as follows3 ,cut from some #a_/cb-;in4 sheet brass a piece similar to the one shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,drill the holes indicated and thread those designated by ,a1 ,b1 ,c1 ,d1 ,e1 and ,f to take a #a_/h-;in4 machine screw4 ,bend the upper end of the piece over at the point indicated by the dotted line until it is perpendicular to the lower part4 ,the center of the hole in the projecting part ,k1 when it is bent over1 should be about #a_/d in4 from the outer surface of the main part of the piece4 ,the small piece of iron is then fastened to the piece of brass with two round-headed screws that pass through the two holes in it and into the holes ,a and ,b in the brass piece4 ,the magnet is mounted1 also with small brass screws1 so that the main part of the magnet and the piece of brass extend in opposite directions1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the assembled parts are then mounted on a wooden board1 whose dimensions are given in ,fig4 #a1 with three brass screws that pass through the holes ,g1 ,h1 and ,j1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,upper and ,lower ,connections to the ,coil and ,supports1 and the ,supports for ,suspension 7,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f1 ,fig4 #g7 ,the moving coil of the galvanometer is constructed as follows3 ,cut from some #a_/h-;in4 pine a piece #a-a_/h in4 long and #e_/h in4 wide4 ,cut two other pieces whose dimensions1 except their thickness1 are #a_/d in4 larger than the first piece4 ,then fasten these two pieces to the sides of the first1 with three or four small screws through each of them1 thus forming a small spool4 ,saw about #af slots with a very fine saw in the edges of the projecting pieces and a short way into the edge of the center piece4 ,wind on this spool about #cjj turns of ,no4 #ch gauge silk-covered copper wire4 ,start with the terminal of the wire in the center of one end of the spool1 with a few inches of free wire for making connections1 and end up with the terminal in the center of the opposite end of the spool4 ,a small thread is then passed through the slots under the coil and tied1 thus serving to hold the various turns of wire together when the coil is removed from the form4 ,the coil should be given a coat of shellac as soon as it is removed from the form4 ,two pieces must now be attached to the top and bottom of the coil to be used in making electrical connections and suspending the coil4 ,cut from some very thin sheet brass two pieces whose dimensions correspond to those given in ,figs4 #d and #e4 ,drill a small hole in the center of each of these pieces4 ,bend the lower part of each piece over at the dotted lines ,l until it is perpendicular to the main portion of the piece4 ,the bent-over portions of these two pieces are then fastened to the ends of the coil with some fine thread1 making sure that they are in the center of the ends before they are fastened4 ,the terminals of the coil are now soldered to these pieces4 ,it would be best to place a sheet or two of thin paper between the brass pieces and the coil1 to prevent any part of the coil1 except the ends1 from coming into contact with the brass pieces4 ,obtain a small piece of thin mirror and mount it with some glue1 as shown by the dotted lines in ,fig4 #d4 ,the upper support for the suspension is shown in ,fig4 #f and consists of a #a_/h-;in4 threaded screw1 ,a1 that passes through the hole in the part ,k1 ,fig4 #c1 and is provided with two lock nuts1 ,b4 ,the lower end of this screw should be slotted a short distance1 and a small screw put through it1 perpendicular to the slot1 so that a wire can be easily clamped in the slot by turning up the screw4 ,next1 take a piece of #a_/cb-;in4 brass1 as shown in ,fig4 #g1 and bend it at the dotted line ,a until it forms a right angle4 ,the hole ,b should be threaded to take a #a_/h-;in4 screw4 ,the holes ,c and ,d are for mounting the piece on the back of the instrument4 ,slot the end of a #a_/h-;in4 screw1 about #a_/b in4 long1 and put a screw through the end as for the upper support for the suspension4 ,this piece is mounted below the position the coil is to occupy1 as shown by ,m1 ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #h7 ,a case should be made for the galvanometer whose inside dimensions correspond to those of the piece ,n1 ,fig4 #a1 and whose depth is about #c_/d in4 more than the thickness of that piece4 ,four pieces of wood can be fastened in the corners that will allow the case to slip just far enough on the piece ,n to make the edge of the case and the back surface of the piece ,n flush4 ,cut an opening in the front of this case1 about #b in4 long and #a in4 wide1 in such a place that the center of the opening is about level with the ends of the magnet4 ,fasten1 back of this opening1 a piece of thin glass with four small screws whose heads rest upon the edge of the glass4 ,the interior of this case and all the parts should be given a coat of lampblack mixed with a little vinegar4 ,two small binding posts1 ,o and ,p1 are mounted on the upper end of the piece ,n and connected to the upper and lower supports for the suspension of the coil4 ,this galvanometer will work best1 of course1 when it is in an exactly vertical position and the following simple device1 when attached to it1 will allow it to assume this position independent of the level of the surface its base may rest upon4 ,cut from some #a-a_/h-;in4 brass two pieces1 #a_/b in4 wide and #b-a_/b in4 long4 ,drill a #a_/h-;in4 hole in the center of each end of them1 #a_/d in4 from the end1 and a #a_/d-;in4 hole through the center of each4 ,bend these pieces to a #c_/d-;in4 radius4 ,cut from some #a_/b-;in4 hard wood a block1 #a-a_/d in4 square4 ,fasten the two pieces of brass to the wooden block with #a_/h-;in4 screws1 as shown in ,fig4 #h4 ,one of these pieces is fastened to the upper end of the piece ,n1 ,fig4 #a1 so that the galvanometer will hang vertically4 ,the other piece is fastened to a bracket from which the galvanometer is suspended4 ,a suitable bracket for this purpose can be easily made4 ,when the galvanometer is hung in this way1 two binding posts are mounted on the bracket1 and connected to the two on the galvanometer4 ,in this way the galvanometer will not be disturbed when making connections4 ,the suspension is made as follows3 ,take a piece of small copper wire and roll it out flat4 ,solder one end of a piece of this wire in the hole in the piece of brass1 with the mirror mounted on it4 ,fasten a piece of the same wire to the lower brass piece1 attached to the coil4 ,the upper piece of wire is then clamped in the end of the screw ,a1 ,fig4 #f1 so that the coil hangs perfectly free about the iron core4 ,the lower piece of wire is bent around a small rod several times and its end fastened in the slot in the lower screw4 ,the deflection of the instrument is read by causing a beam of light from a lamp or candle to be reflected from the mirror to a scale located in front of the instrument4 ,if the light from the lamp is allowed to shine through a small slit in a piece of dark paper1 there will be a streak of light reflected upon the scale1 instead of a spot4 ,to use this instrument in measuring larger currents than it will safely carry1 connect it in parallel with another resistance which will carry the larger part of the total current4 ,the galvanometer can be calibrated with this resistance1 which is known as a shunt4 ,how to ,make ,advertising ,lantern ,slides ,procure some old discarded photographic films and remove the gelatin coating by soaking them in hot water4 ,when dry1 write the desired words on the thin celluloid and place it between two pieces of glass1 lantern-slide size1 and bind them as in making a lantern slide4 ,with the use of a carbon paper a very nice slide can be made by writing the words on a typewriter1 and it will serve the purpose of an expensive announcement slide4--,contributed by ,f4 ,p4 ,dickover1 ,atkinson1 ,neb4 ,utilizing ,old ,brush ,handles ,illustration ,the handle cut from an old dusting brush1 fitted with the brass end of a shotgun shell1 makes a first-class tool handle4 ,the handle is cut off at ,a and the wood cut down to fit tightly into the brass shell4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 99 99 99 99 99 ,tincture-of-iodine stains may be removed from clothing or the skin by using strong ammonia water4 ,preserving ,paints and ,pastes ,white lead1 thick shellac1 and pastes that are used occasionally may be preserved by laying a piece of leather over the exposed surface4 ,when these materials are kept in cans1 cut a piece of leather from the upper of a heavy boot of such a size that it will drop freely into the container4 ,form a handle on the leather disk by driving a nail through its center from the under side4 ,press the disk down smoothly over the surface of the contents and a thin film of oil will soon form over the disk1 effectually excluding the air4 ,a loose cover is placed over the container1 to keep out dust4--,contributed by ,luther ,mc,knight1 ,colorado ,city1 ,col4 ,a ,burner for ,soldering ,small ,work ,illustration ,as it was necessary for me to solder the joints of fine wires on electrical instruments1 and other small work1 ,i found myself in need of a blowpipe that gave a small but very hot and easily directed flame1 was automatic in its operation and required no blast4 ,i tried an ordinary acetylene burner on coal or city gas1 and found it gave an intensely hot1 nonluminous flame1 due to the forced draft of air through the small holes4 ,this flame will melt silver1 copper and1 also1 silver solder4 ,its great advantage lies in the fact that it may be used for sweating together small articles rapidly and with great neatness4 ,i always keep this blowpipe burning1 as the gas it consumes is very small1 and the burner is kept within easy reach by using a hanger1 as shown in the illustration4 ,a single jet of flame is obtained by stopping up one of the tips1 which is very useful in many ways4 ,this flame may contain a small luminous spot on some city gas1 but it does not interfere with the heat4--,contributed by ,arthur ,worischek1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,a ,safety-,match-,box ,holder ,a holder1 as well as a tray1 for safety matches can be made from any ordinary tobacco can4 ,the metal on one side is cut as shown and the pieces bent up to form standards for holding the match box in an upright position4 ,the openings left where the metal was raised are used for dropping the burned matches into the box4 ,the hinged cover is used for emptying the tray4--,contributed by ,david ,b4 ,lutz1 ,e4 ,st4 ,louis1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,the ,match ,box is ,held ,upright between ,standards ,formed from the ,tin of the ,tobacco ,box ,removing ,ink ,stains from ,book ,leaves ,when the leaves of a book are accidentally stained with ink it can be removed quite readily by the following process3 ,after removing as much of the ink as possible with a camel's-hair brush dipped in water1 soak the stained parts in a solution of oxalate of potash1 or better still1 oxalic acid4 ,this will remove all the ink4 ,treat again with water1 as before1 so that when it dries out no salt will appear on the paper4 ,this process does not affect printer's ink4--,contributed by ,s4 ,g4 ,thompson1 ,owensboro1 ,ky4 ,a ,needle-,spray ,nozzle ,illustration ,to make a needle-spray nozzle1 either insert a #bb-;caliber cartridge in a small tube1 or place a #de-;caliber shell over the end of the tube and solder it in place4 ,the end is perforated to make one or more small holes1 as desired4 ,illustration ,how to ,make an ,electrotype ,stamp ,the method described in the following produces a very good metal stamp for any name1 initial1 drawing1 etc4 ,procure a smooth and perfectly level sheet of brass about #a_/af in4 thick and about #c by #d in4 in size4 ,nickelplate the brass so that the copper deposit will not stick to it4 ,if a small plating outfit is not at hand the piece may be plated at a local plating works for a nominal price4 ,dip the plate in melted paraffin until the coating is about #a_/af in4 thick and see that no metal is exposed4 ,drill a hole in one corner and attach a wire4 ,draw the letters or sketch desired1 using a metal stylus having a sharp point1 taking care to make the lines scratched in the wax clean and open to the surface of the metal 7,fig4 #a74 ,illustration3 ,making the ,copper ,shell 7,fig4 #a7 ,a large open-mouthed bottle or glass tank will be required for the plating solution1 which is made by dissolving copper sulphate in water until the solution is saturated with the sulphate and then adding a few drops of sulphuric acid4 ,immerse the plate in the solution as shown in ,fig4 #b and connect with the zinc pole of the battery4 ,put a piece of pure copper in on the opposite side of the jar and connect with the carbon pole of the battery1 using care in each case to keep the connection of the wire and the upper part of the plate above the surface4 ,one or two dry cells will be sufficient4 ,if the current is right1 the deposit on the waxed plate will be a flesh pink2 if too strong1 it will be a dirty brick color and the plate will have to be washed and the current reduced4 ,when the desired thickness of metal is deposited1 remove the plate and pour boiling water on the back4 ,this will remove the thin copper shell and the nickeled plate may be laid away for future use4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,procure a flat pan and after placing the shell in it1 face down1 sprinkle a little resin or soldering flux on the back4 ,lay three or four sheets of the lead from tea packages on the back of the shell and heat it over a spirit lamp or on the stove until the lead melts and runs into the crevices on the back of the copper1 thus making it solid and suitable for mounting4 ,mount as shown in ,fig4 #c with small brass screws and after polishing the surface to remove dirt1 etc41 the stamp is ready for use4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,an ordinary stamp pad will do for inking1 but the best ink to use is printer's slightly thinned1 as the ordinary rubber stamp ink is not suitable for a metal stamp4--,contributed by ,s4 ,v4 ,cooke1 ,hamilton1 ,ont4 ,a ,cover for a ,bottle ,if a glass medicine bottle is to be carried constantly in the pocket1 it is best to cover it with leather or rubber4 ,the sketch shows how to cut the pattern so that it will fit a square bottle4 ,the bottle is placed on the leather1 or a piece of paper as a pattern1 and the outlines marked upon it4 ,the leather or paper is then folded over four times and cut out as shown4 ,this cover will prevent the glass from being scattered in the pocket should the bottle be accidentally broken4 ,it always provides a means of distinguishing it from other bottles of the same type and size4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for ,making a ,bottle ,cover of ,leather or ,rubber for ,bottles ,carried in the ,pocket ,boring a ,long ,hole ,illustration ,the usual method of boring a hole through a piece of wood longer than the bit is to bore from each end4 ,to make the hole straight by this method1 split the wood or saw it in halves1 then make a knife kerf in both pieces on a center line of the hole and glue the pieces together4 ,the spur of the bit will follow the kerf from either end1 and the result will be a meeting of the holes1 almost perfectly in the center4--,contributed by ,ernest ,j4 ,dickert1 ,niagara ,falls1 ,n4 ,y4 ,covering for a ,gas-,stove ,top ,while frying or cooking on a gas stove the grease will spatter over the top and make the cleaning rather difficult1 especially where there are many crevices4 ,a simple method of avoiding this trouble is to place a paper over the top of the stove1 with round holes cut out for each burner a little larger than the pots and pans used in the cooking4 ,this will keep the stove very clean with a minimum of bother4 ,a paper cut to fit the under pan will keep that part clean4--,contributed by ,s4 ,f4 ,warner1 ,east ,orange1 ,n4 ,j4 ,homemade ,skis ,not having a bent board suitable for a pair of skis1 ,i proceeded to make the skis in the following manner3 ,a cheese box was procured and two pieces cut out of the side1 each #ae in4 long and #c in4 wide4 ,these were used for the upturned ends and two boards1 #f ft4 long and #c in4 wide1 served as the runners4 ,a notch1 #d in4 long and #a_/h in4 deep1 was cut in one end of each board to receive one end of the thin curved pieces cut from the cheese box1 which were fastened with screws4 ,the upper end of each thin piece was cut to a point4 ,illustration3 ,the ,curved ,part of the ,runner is ,made from ,pieces ,cut ,out of a ,round ,cheese ,box ,a piece for the foot1 #aj in4 long and #c in4 wide1 with a notch #a in4 wide and #a_/d in4 deep1 was fastened in the center of the runner4 ,a strap is run through the notch for holding the ski to the foot--,contributed by ,henry ,meuse1 ,reading1 ,mass4 99 99 99 99 99 ,to remove iron rust or ink stains from cloth1 use a warm solution of oxalic acid with a few crystals of citric acid added4 ,repeat the washings until the stain is removed4 ,how to ,make a ,dry ,cell ,the containing vessel for the cell should be made from sheet zinc4 ,it should be cylindrical in form1 approximately #b-a_/b in4 in diameter and #f in4 long4 ,this vessel is to form the negative terminal of the cell and a suitable connecting device1 similar to the one shown in the sketch1 should be provided and securely fastened to the upper edge of the vessel4 ,the vessel should be lined with some heavy blotting paper1 both sides and bottom4 ,illustration3 ,cross ,section through the ,cell1 ,showing the ,construction and ,location of the ,parts ,place into a glass jar a small quantity of chloride-of-zinc crystals1 and pour over them #a_/b pt4 of distilled water4 ,allow the crystals to dissolve at least one-half hour4 ,if the crystals all dissolve1 add more until some remain in the bottom of the jar1 or until the liquid is saturated4 ,pour off the solution and dilute it by adding an equal part of distilled water4 ,add to this solution sal ammoniac1 in the proportion of #a lb4 of sal ammoniac to every #b qt4 of liquid4 ,fill the dry-cell vessel with this solution and allow it to remain until the blotting paper is completely saturated4 ,obtain a good size electric-light carbon1 about #e_/h in4 in diameter1 and file one end down as shown4 ,drill a hole through the carbon and mount a terminal4 ,make a mixture of equal parts of finely powdered carbon and manganese dioxide of sufficient amount to almost fill the vessel4 ,add to this mixture some of the solution and thoroughly mix them4 ,continue adding solution until a thick paste is formed4 ,pour the solution out of the vessel and allow the latter to drain for a few minutes in an inverted position4 ,place the carbon rod in the center of the vessel and pack the paste down around it1 being careful not to move the carbon rod from its central position4 ,the vessel should be filled with the paste to within about #e_/h in4 of the top4 ,the lower end of the carbon rod should not be nearer the bottom of the vessel than #a_/b in4 ,over the top of the paste place a mixture of equal parts sand and fine sawdust and then1 over this1 a layer of pitch1 which acts as a seal for the cell4 ,a layer of blotting paper should be placed between the sand-sawdust mixture and the carbon-manganese mixture4 ,the side lining of the vessel should be turned in before the sand-sawdust mixture is placed in the top of the cell4 ,the outside of the cell should be covered with some heavy pasteboard1 which will serve to insulate the negative terminal from the surface upon which the cell rests4 ,a ,hose-,nozzle ,handle ,a handle for a garden-hose nozzle is easily made of a piece of wire and the wooden part of a package carrier4 ,the wire is bent to receive the hose at ,a1 and1 after the handle is slipped on1 the other end is formed to fit tightly over the brass nozzle at ,b4 ,the hose nozzle can be easily carried with the handle1 which will keep the hand dry4--,contributed by ,f4 ,g4 ,marbach1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,illustration3 ,the ,handle ,is ,made of a ,piece of ,wire and a ,package ,grip ,guide for ,cutting ,mortises ,illustration ,after spending considerable time in cutting one mortise in a piece to make the settee described in a recent issue of ,popular ,mechanics ,magazine1 ,i devised the plan shown in the sketch which enabled me to cut all the mortises required in the time that ,i cut one in the ordinary manner4 ,two metal plates1 one of which is shown in the sketch1 having a perfectly straight edge1 are clamped on the piece with the straight edge on the line of the mortise4 ,a hacksaw is applied through holes bored at the ends and a cut sawed along against the metal edges4--,contributed by ,george ,gluck1 ,pittsburgh1 ,pennsylvania4 ,insect-,proof ,poultry ,roost ,illustration ,to protect the poultry from mites and other insects while roosting1 ,i constructed a roost hanger1 as shown1 with oil cups made of empty shoe-polish cans4 ,the cover of the box was nailed to the roost and the bottom1 for holding the oil1 on top of the roost support4 ,a large nail was driven through the support from the under side and through the center of the can bottom1 so that about #a-a_/d in4 projected above the latter4 ,the can cover was perforated in the center and a hole1 about #a_/b in4 deep1 was drilled in the roost so that the end of the nail would easily slip into it4 ,the bottom of the can was filled with a mixture of kerosene1 vaseline and carbolic acid and the roost set in place4 ,both ends of each roost are fixed in the same way4 ,this makes it impossible for any insects to get on the roost4--,contributed by ,rudolph ,netzeband1 ,st4 ,louis1 ,mo4 ,to ,prevent ,shade ,rollers from ,unwinding ,obtain a stick for the hem on the lower end of the shade that is #b in4 longer than the shade is wide4 ,place two small wood screws in the window casing below the shade roller in such a position that they will catch the ends of the stick when the shade is raised to the top4--,contributed by ,harry ,e4 ,kay1 ,ossining1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,screen and ,storm-,door ,cushion ,illustration ,a good cushion that will prevent a spring door from slamming can be made out of material cut from an old rubber boot or1 better still1 from an old hollow rubber ball4 ,three strips of heavy rubber1 #a-a_/d in4 long and #c_/h in4 wide1 are cut and each fastened with two tacks so that the center will make a hump1 as shown in the sketch4 ,one cushion is fastened near the top1 one near the bottom1 and one in the center1 in the rabbet of the door frame4--,contributed by ,d4 ,andrew ,mc,comb1 ,toledo1 ,o4 ,repairing a ,coaster ,brake ,illustration ,anyone having a bicycle coaster brake that is apparently useless because it will not brake1 can easily repair it in the following manner3 ,remove the inner hub by unscrewing the cones and insert a piece of clock spring1 about the same width as the brake shell and almost as long as its inside periphery4 ,replace the parts and the repair will render the brake quite as efficient as a new one4 ,the spring serves as a braking surface for the expanding steel shoes of the brake4--,contributed by ,heber ,h4 ,clewett1 ,pomona1 ,cal4 ,flypaper ,holder ,the ordinary method of using sticky flypaper is quite annoying1 as it cannot be easily removed from anything that may come in contact with its sticky surface4 ,the best way to avoid this trouble is to make a holder for the paper1 and one can be constructed of a piece of wire and a metal cover taken from a jelly glass4 ,the wire is threaded at one end on which the cover is clamped between two nuts4 ,the upper end of the wire is shaped into a hook for hanging it wherever desired4 ,the paper is rolled with the sticky side out and tied with strings1 then slipped over the wire and set into the inverted cover4 ,the cover prevents any of the sticky substance from dripping onto the floor and the wire holds it from being blown about the room4--,contributed by ,percy de ,romtra1 ,cape ,may ,point1 ,n4 ,j4 ,illustration3 ,the ,paper1 ,held in an ,upright ,position1 will ,catch ,more ,flies ,than ,if ,placed ,flat ,a ,fish ,rake ,the fish rake can be made in any size1 for minnows or salmon1 but it is especially adapted for fish that run in schools1 like smelt1 herring and minnows4 ,procure a piece of wood1 #g ft4 long1 #d in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick1 and make a handle #c ft4 long on one end4 ,dress the other end to an edge1 rip off a #a-;in4 strip and drill holes to receive nails or pieces of wire from the back1 through the edge1 and projecting about #d in4 ,the strip is then replaced and fastened with screws4 ,the handle can be cut from the blade and jointed by using tubing4 ,this makes it handy to take apart and pack4--,contributed by ,l4 ,w4 ,pedrose1 ,seattle1 ,wash4 ,illustration3 ,the ,rake is so ,constructed ,that ,it can be ,taken ,apart for ,packing ,to ,harden ,small ,blocks of ,wood ,small blocks of wood can be hardened so that they will not split so easily when small screws are inserted by boiling them in olive oil for about #aj minutes4 ,the olive oil can be kept for future use4 ,if it is desired to waterproof the blocks after hardening them1 they should be placed in melted paraffin and allowed to cool in the solution4 ,this gives the block of wood a good appearance and makes it nonabrasive and waterproof4 ,homemade ,clothesline ,reel ,illustration ,it is much better to make a small reel1 like the one shown1 for a clothesline than to wind the line on the arm1 the usual method of getting it into shape for putting away4 ,the reel consists of two strips of wood1 #af in4 long1 #c in4 wide and #g_/h in4 thick4 ,these are joined together with two pieces of broom handle1 allowing a space of #i in4 between the sides and an extending handle of #e in4 on opposite sides1 as shown4--,contributed by ,bert ,longabaugh1 ,davenport1 ,iowa4 ,gear-,cutting ,machine ,perhaps the last thing that would be thought within range of the amateur who lacks a full equipment of machinery is the cutting of gear wheels4 ,the device shown in the sketch is very practical1 and1 with the most ordinary assortment of iron-working tools1 will serve to turn out an accurate gear4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,gear-,cutting ,machine 7,fig4 #a7 ,no system of supports is shown1 as they are easily supplied4 ,a flat1 square board1 ,b1 as large as can be obtained--#b ft4 on a side being the safest minimum--is used for a dial4 ,a sheet of paper is pasted over the entire board and a large circle drawn on it4 ,this circle is divided into as many parts as there are to be teeth in the gear4 ,a depression is made with a prick punch at each division4 ,a shaft1 ,c1 is run through the center1 to which an arm1 ,a1 is firmly attached4 ,a nail1 ,n1 is placed at the end of the arm so that the point can enter each of the punch marks on the periphery or circumference of the circle4 ,a blank wheel1 ,w1 is attached to the shaft ,c1 in the position shown1 and resting on the iron plate or strap ,f4 ,a cutting tool1 ,d1 works up and down in a slot in ,f4 ,this cutter is held away from the blank wheel by the spring ,s1 and moved up to it by the screw ,g1 acting through the sliding member ,h4 ,a stove bolt may be used for ,g1 with the nut firmly fastened to the strap ,f4 ,the cutter is actuated with a handle ,e1 whose motion is limited by the pegs as shown4 ,in ,fig4 #b is shown a top view of the strap ,e1 with a cross section of the cutter and the slot in which it works4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the operation of the mechanism is as follows3 ,with the blank wheel in place set the nail ,n in one of the punch marks and move the handle ,e downward4 ,this will make a slight cut on the wheel4 ,then give the screw ,g a turn or two1 which will make the cutter take a deeper bite1 and push the handle down again4 ,this operation is repeated1 screwing ,g constantly deeper1 until it is stopped by the locknut ,j1 which regulates the depth of the cut4 ,move the nail ,n to the next punch mark and repeat4 ,the operations are very quickly performed and the circle will be closed almost before you know it4 ,there are several points to be observed4 ,the accuracy depends upon three things4 ,first1 the slot through which the cutter passes must be tight-fitting1 even at the expense of working hard4 ,second1 the shaft ,c must fit tightly in the holes made for it through ,b and ,f1 also the arm ,a must be firmly attached1 the shaft being filed flat at the point of attachment4 ,the blank wheel should be keyed on the shaft or securely fastened with a setscrew4 ,third1 the nail ,n must enter the punch marks accurately4 ,as the grinding circle is so much larger than the blank1 any error here is greatly reduced in the finished wheel4 ,once in a punch mark the nail must not be allowed to slip until the tooth has been cut4 ,in practice1 it will be found better1 after each stroke of the handle1 to give a quarter turn outward to the screw ,g1 thus avoiding the scraping of the tool on the up stroke4 ,the cutter can be made of any suitable steel with the cutting point ground to give whatever shape is desired for the tooth4 ,the best shape for any particular purpose can be found by reference to a book on gears4 ,this cutter is adapted1 of course1 only to the softer metals4 ,for experimental purposes a blank cast in type metal is excellent and will last as long probably as required4 ,the mechanism here described will cut brass perfectly well and a gear made of this more durable metal will answer for a finished construction4 ,type-metal blanks commend themselves because they are so easily cast1 any flame which will melt solder being sufficient1 and the molds1 of wood1 plaster of ,paris or any easily worked material1 being quickly constructed4--,contributed by ,c4 ,w4 ,nieman1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,a ,potato ,peeler ,the guard is made of a piece of wire about #a in4 shorter than the blade of an ordinary table knife4 ,the ends of the wire are turned into a coil to resemble a coil spring with coils close together4 ,allow enough wire to project on one end to be flattened and pointed for an eye extractor4 ,illustration3 ,guard ,made of ,wire ,when this device is placed on the knife1 the contrivance works on the same principle as a spokeshave4 ,the first setting peels the potato without any appreciable waste1 the other setting may be as desired for cutting slices4--,contributed by ,h4 ,w4 ,ravens1 ,seattle1 ,washington4 ,an ,easy ,way to ,develop ,roll ,film ,this is simply a different motion to the tiresome seesaw one usually employs when films are being developed4 ,in wetting them down previous to immersion in the developer1 do not keep them in the water long enough to become limp1 but remove them after a few quick dips1 says ,camera ,craft1 ,they will then retain some of their curling tendency1 so that by taking one end in one hand and gradually lowering the film into the dish of developer and then raising it out of the dish1 it will be found that the film will roll and unroll quite readily1 much as one would let out or wind in a reel4 ,this method will result in quicker development1 because the roll is nearly always immersed in developer4 ,the method necessitates using only one hand1 making it possible to develop a second strip at the same time with the other4 ,the illustration shows quite clearly just how the film will behave4 ,illustration3 ,developing ,film ,a ,shoe ,hanger ,an inexpensive shoe hanger can be made of a strip of tin1 about #a_/b in4 wide and as long as the space will permit4 ,cut notches along one edge and bend the tin and tack or screw it on a strip of board or to the inside of the closet door4 ,the shoes are hung up by the heels with the toes down4--,contributed by ,c4 ,r4 ,poole1 ,los ,angeles1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,notched ,metal ,hanger ,how to ,make a ,small ,vertical ,drill ,illustration ,a small hand drill with a three-jaw chuck that will take the smallest drill can be purchased very reasonably4 ,for ordinary work these drills do very well1 but for comparatively deep holes1 or when using long1 slender drills1 some sort of a stand should be made1 if for no other reason1 to avoid breaking the drills1 which is almost invariably due to the side motion of the hand4 ,there are other reasons1 however1 for making such a stand1 and these lie in the fact that it is impossible to drill by hand at right angles with the surface of the metal1 or to hold such a drill sufficiently steady to avoid widening the hole around the top4 ,as each make of hand drill will require a somewhat different form of stand1 no detailed description need be given of the one illustrated4 ,the principal point is to have the base and standard securely set at right angles to each other1 and then provide a smoothly sliding piece to which the hand drill may be clamped4 ,the edges on this slide and the corresponding guides should be planed off to an angle of #de deg4 ,one of the guides should be adjustable1 which may be arranged by elongating the screw holes and placing small washers under the heads of the screws that hold this guide to the main standard4 ,a neat little hand drill1 arranged in this manner and firmly secured to the bench1 may also be used for finishing the ends of small shafts1 either flat or pointed1 for polishing screw heads1 etc41 to all of which it gives that workmanlike appearance that can only be had when things are polished with a true rotary motion4--,contributed by ,john ,d4 ,adams1 ,phoenix1 ,ariz4 ,decorating ,candles ,candles can be easily decorated by the following method3 ,the designs can be selected from paper prints which are tightly wrapped around the candle with the design in contact with the wax4 ,strike a match and play the flame over the back of the paper4 ,allow time enough for the melted wax to harden and then remove the paper4 ,the print will be transferred to the wax4 ,select designs that are not larger than the circumference of the candle4 ,a good impression of ink on thin paper works best4--,contributed by ,j4 ,j4 ,kolar1 ,maywood1 ,ill4 ,homemade ,hacksaw ,frame ,a home workshop not having a complete set of tools may be supplied in many ways with tools made by the owner4 ,the hacksaw frame illustrated is one of these4 ,the frame is made of hard wood4 ,the saw end is inserted in a slot sawed in the handle end1 and a screw or small bolt holds it in place4 ,the other end is equipped with a bolt having a sheet-metal head1 as shown at ,a4 ,the blade is kept from turning by a projection of the sheet metal which fits in a saw cut made in the frame4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,henry1 ,galesburg1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,hacksaw ,frame1 ,cut from ,hard ,wood1 with ,fittings ,attached to ,draw the ,blade ,taut ,illustration ,drill ,press on an ,ordinary ,brace ,as the greater part of the energy required for drilling metal by hand is used for feeding the drill1 ,i made what ,i term a drill box in which the brace is held perfectly true and pressure is applied by a weight4 ,the feed can be changed for the different metals and sizes of drills1 also for drilling the hard outside of castings and relieving the drill for the softer body4 ,the constant feed will cause the drill to turn out a long chip1 and a number of holes may be drilled to a uniform depth by using the same feed and counting the turns of the brace handle4 ,illustration3 ,the ,weights ,apply a ,constant ,pressure to the ,drill1 ,which can be ,easily ,turned 7,fig4 #a7 ,to build the box1 first find the dimensions of the brace1 as shown in ,fig4 #a3 the diameter of the head ,a1 the clearance ,b from the top of the head to #a_/d in4 above the top of the handle ,c1 and the over-all length ,d when the longest drill is in the brace4 ,make a box having an inside length equal to the dimension ,d1 plus whatever additional height may be necessary for the work4 ,make the inside width twice the distance ,c1 plus #f in4 for clearance2 and the inside depth the length ,c1 plus one-half of the dimension ,a1 plus #c in4 ,use material #g_/h in4 thick and nail the parts together to form a rectangular frame4 ,cut a piece of broomstick as long as the dimension ,b1 and two pieces of wood as long as the inside width of the box and as wide as the dimension ,b4 ,cut two pieces #a_/af in4 longer than the dimension ,a and as wide as the length ,b4 ,nail these latter pieces together as shown in ,fig4 #b1 leaving a square space in the center4 ,this frame is to be nailed inside of the top of the box flush with the front1 but before doing so lay it on top of the box to determine where the center of the square space will come1 and bore a hole1 large enough for the round stick cut from the broom handle to slip through easily1 then nail the frame on the under side of the top piece4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,procure a tough piece of wood1 #a-a_/b in4 square and long enough to project #b in4 over the right and #aj in4 over the left side of the box top1 and when in this position1 locate the hole bored for the round stick and bore a hole in the square stick1 #a_/h in4 deep1 to coincide with it4 ,place the head of the brace in the guide and push it up until it touches the top of the box and block it up in this position1 then drop the round stick through the hole and rest it on the head of the brace4 ,place the socket in the lever over the top of the round stick4 ,make a loop1 #h in4 long1 of heavy wire and hang it over the right end of the lever and mark the box at the lower end of the loop4 ,turn in a large screw #a_/b in4 below this mark allowing it to project enough to hook the loop under it4 ,remove the round stick and put a screw at the point the bottom of the loop reaches when the lever is flat on the top of the box4 ,another screw turned in between these two will be sufficient to hold the lever in position4 ,different-sized weights1 of from #e to #aj lb41 are used on the lever1 but for small drills the weight of the brace alone is sufficient4--,contributed by ,maurice ,coleman1 ,w4 ,roxbury1 ,mass4 ,homemade ,picture-,frame ,miter ,box ,any person wishing to make a picture frame1 or to cut down an old one1 requires a miter box for that purpose1 so that the molding may be properly held while sawing it1 and also for nailing the corners together4 ,i made a miter box1 as shown1 and found it to be just the thing for this purpose4 ,it is built on a base similar to an overturned box1 the saw guides being held on the ends of a piece1 constructed as shown at ,a4 ,holes are cut in the top1 as shown at ,b1 for one of the guides and for the two wedges4 ,two pieces1 ,c1 are fastened with their outer edges at perfectly right angles on the top4 ,illustration3 ,homemade ,miter ,box for ,sawing ,frame ,molding and to ,hold the ,parts for ,fastening ,together ,the frame parts are clamped against the pieces on top with the wedges driven in between the frame parts and the brackets ,,dd4 ,after cutting the frame parts they are tightly held in place while fastening them1 in any manner desired4--,contributed by ,a4 ,s4 ,thomas1 ,amherstburg1 ,can4 ,tank-,development ,methods ,used in ,tray ,development ,if there are a number of plates to be developed1 place a rubber band1 about #a_/h in4 wide1 around the ends of each plate and put them together in a tray4 ,the bands keep the plates apart4 ,the developer is made up as for a tank and poured over the plates1 then another tray1 or dark covering1 is placed over the top4 ,allow this to stand1 rocking the tray from time to time1 the same length of time as is required for tank development4--,contributed by ,earl ,r4 ,hastings1 ,corinth1 ,vermont4 ,a ,pushmobile ,racer for ,ice ,the pushmobile shown in the illustration takes the place of the one with rollers that is now so popular with the boys4 ,the materials required1 usually found about any home1 consist of a foot board1 #a in4 thick1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #b ft4 long2 two pieces of wood1 each #c_/d in4 thick1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #i in4 long2 one steering post1 #a in4 thick1 #a-a_/b in4 wide and #cj in4 long2 one handle1 #f in4 long2 one small hinge2 one carriage bolt1 #a_/b in4 in diameter and #b-a_/b in4 long2 two #a_/b-;in4 washers2 a few screws1 and a pair of discarded ice skates4 ,illustration3 ,homemade ,pushmobile1 ,constructed the ,same as the ,wheeled ,kind1 with ,runners for ,snow and ,ice ,one of the #c_/d-;in4 thick pieces is fastened solidly to one end of the foot board with the ends flush4 ,the other piece is swiveled with the bolt at the opposite or front end of the foot board so that at least one-half of the piece projects beyond the end4 ,the steering post is hinged to the projecting end4 ,the skates are fastened to the #c_/d-;in4 pieces for runners4 ,the manner of propelling the racer is the same as for the pushmobile4--,contributed by ,w4 ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,o4 ,homemade ,ellipsograph ,by ,chelsea ,curtis ,fraser ,an efficient ellipsograph is the only device that will make true ellipses of various sizes quickly1 and such a machine is in demand on some classes of work in a drafting room4 ,its cost1 however1 is prohibitive where only few ellipses are to be drawn1 but a person handy with tools can make an apparatus that will do the work as well as the most expensive instrument4 ,illustration3 ,practically ,any ,size or ,proportion of ,ellipse1 from #a-a_/b to #af ,in4 ,maximum ,diameter1 can be ,drawn with an ,instrument of ,this ,size1 and ,larger ,instruments will ,work ,equally ,well 7,fig4 #a7 ,the completed ellipsograph1 herein described1 will appear as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,it consists of two main parts1 the base and the arm4 ,the former is a hardwood piece1 ,a1 ,fig4 #b1 to the side center of which is attached another hardwood piece1 ,b4 ,this latter piece may be dovetailed into ,a1 but an ordinary butt joint will suffice1 as a one-piece base1 ,c1 also of hard wood1 is glued to the bottom surfaces of the pieces ,a and ,b1 thus securely holding them together4 ,before gluing1 however1 care must be taken to see that the piece ,b is exactly at right angles with the piece ,a4 ,this can be done with a try-square4 ,dimensions are given in ,fig4 #b4 ,the same letters are used throughout for the same parts4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,a #a_/af-;in4 groove1 ,h1 is cut out at the juncture of ,a and ,b1 to admit the flange of the minor-axis swivel head4 ,another groove1 ,j1 is made along the longitudinal center of the piece ,b1 to receive the spine of the major-axis swivel head4 ,sheet brass plates1 ,d and ,e1 are cut from #a_/af-;in4 stock and attached to the top of the piece ,a with screws4 ,the plates ,f and ,g are of the same material and fastened in a like manner to the upper surface of the piece ,b4 ,all plates project slightly where they touch the groove borders1 as shown4 ,this is to provide a bearing for the projections on the sliding parts against metal instead of wood4 ,a piece of thin celluloid or brass plate1 ,k1 is inserted in the bottom side of the base ,c so that the point will be exactly in line with the center groove ,j1 and extend outward #a_/h in4 ,this point indicates the center of all ellipses to be drawn4 ,in the bottom of the base ,c1 at each end1 drive an ordinary pin and cut it off so that a part of it will project beyond the surface of the wood4 ,these extending ends are pointed with a file1 and serve to keep the instrument from slipping when in use4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,the arm ,l is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,it is made of either maple or birch4 ,follow the dimensions given1 cutting a slot through it longitudinally1 as shown at ,m1 narrower on the upper side than on the lower1 the upper being #a_/d in4 wide4 ,an octagon-shaped piece of wood1 ,n1 #a_/b in4 thick1 is glued to the end1 to give a good seating for the sleeve ,o1 which is a piece of #a_/b-;in4 solid-brass rod1 #b in4 long1 drilled to receive closely the pencil sheath4 ,the latter1 ,p1 can be made from a section of brass tubing such as is used in a bicycle-pump valve4 ,the upper end is notched to receive a rubber band1 and an ordinary pencil can be cut down to fit closely into the other end4 ,the piece ,o fits tightly in a hole bored through ,n and ,l4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,the detail of the minor-axis swivel head is shown in ,fig4 #d4 ,this swivel head consists of two pieces of brass1 one1 marked ,q1 being #c_/h in4 square by #c_/d in4 long and the other1 ,r1 #g_/h in4 square by #a_/b in4 long1 with a notch cut out as shown4 ,these parts1 as well as the somewhat similar ones for the major-axis swivel head1 can be cast cheaply1 or block brass may be cut with a hacksaw and filed to the right shape4 ,a shortened dry-cell screw1 ,s1 with washer1 to fit a tapped hole drilled in the piece ,q1 serves to bind the head where desired on the arm4 ,the flange ,t is a piece of #a_/af-;in4 brass driven into a slot cut in the piece ,r4 ,the piece ,r is pivoted to the piece ,q1 as shown1 by means of a piece of wire nail which engages ,q1 by friction1 the lower end being fitted with a washer and riveted loosely so that the parts will turn freely4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #e ,the major-axis swivel-head detail is shown in ,fig4 #e4 ,the piece ,u is the same size as ,q1 ,fig4 #d1 with its screw set a little farther forward to make room for the pivot ,v1 which loosely joins ,u and ,w together4 ,the pivot is made of a wire nail1 riveted on both ends4 ,the piece ,w is of brass1 #a_/b in4 thick1 #c_/d in4 wide and #g_/h in4 long4 ,the spine ,x is made just thick enough to pass freely in the groove ,j1 ,fig4 #b4 ,a screw taken from a discarded dry-battery cell is used to bind the head to the arm4 ,to operate the ellipsograph1 draw a line1 ,y1 ,fig4 #a1 on the paper1 which is to mark the major axis of the ellipse4 ,about midway of its length make a point to represent the center4 ,on the latter set the point ,k1 ,fig4 #b1 and adjust the bottom forward edge of the base ,c parallel with the line ,y4 ,set the minor-axis swivel head at such a point on the arm ,l that1 when the latter is directly on top of the piece ,b1 the pencil will touch the paper at a distance from the center1 marked by ,k1 equal to half the minor axis of the proposed ellipse4 ,to secure the major axis swing the arm until it is parallel with the piece ,a1 leaving the major-axis swivel head unset1 and set it when the pencil point has been adjusted to the proper major radius4 ,grasp the arm with the right hand between the swivel heads and bearing down1 swing the pencil end from right to left4 ,the rubber band will keep it constantly on the paper with even pressure4 ,when half of the ellipse is completed detach the rubber band and reverse the instrument to the opposite side of the longitudinal line ,y and draw the other half in the same manner4 ,protector ,cap for a ,chisel ,handle ,illustration ,the ordinary chisel handle will soon split and break under the continuous blows of a mallet4 ,a very good and inexpensive method of preventing this is to procure an ordinary patent bottle cap and place it on the end of the handle4 ,it is advisable to shape the end of the handle like a bottle top in order to firmly hold the cap in place4--,contributed by ,bert ,verne1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,sweeping ,compound ,a good sweeping compound may be made as follows3 ,mix #a_/b pt4 of warm paraffin oil with #b oz4 of melted paraffin wax and add #b oz4 of artificial oil of sassafras4 ,then pour the mixture into #aj lb4 of sawdust and work the whole thoroughly together4 ,add to this mixture #d lb4 of clean sand and #a_/b lb4 of coarse salt4 ,each article mentioned is comparatively cheap1 and the compound can be kept in an open container4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,illustration ,freezing a ,basin to a ,chair ,fill a basin or pot half full of snow1 and secretly put a handful of table salt in it and place the vessel on a chair or table1 wetting the space where it is to be set4 ,after holding the basin in place for about two minutes1 continually stirring the contents1 it will freeze to the chair so solidly that when the basin is lifted the chair will come along with it4 ,this experiment is quite interesting to an audience and can be performed at any assemblage with success4 ,if the instructions are carried out closely1 the trick will always succeed and the audience will consider it magic4 ,even if performed in a warm room1 the combination of snow and salt will reduce the temperature below the freezing point where the bottom of the vessel comes in contact with the chair seat4--,contributed by ,harry ,slosower1 ,pittsburgh1 ,pa4 ,an ,envelope and ,stamp ,moistener ,illustration ,a moistener for postage stamps or envelopes can be easily made from a screw-top jar4 ,a strip of felt cut as wide as the jar is deep and made into a roll large enough to fit the neck of the jar serves as a wick4 ,the metal top is perforated1 and1 after filling the jar with water1 it is screwed into place4 ,this makes a very inexpensive moistener for the library desk4 ,a ,homemade ,drill ,press ,an ordinary breast drill is used in the construction of this drill press1 it being rigidly secured to a piece of oak1 ,a1 #b in4 square and #ah in4 long1 which is a sliding member on the pipe ,b4 ,in attaching the breast drill to the wood1 a bolt1 having a hook on the head end1 was used at the top1 at ,c1 and a stud at the bottom ,d4 ,pipe clips1 ,,ee1 were attached on one side of the block to fit loosely over the pipe ,b4 ,the vertical part of the pipe is supported by two horizontal pieces1 ,,ff1 which are fastened to a post4 ,a feed lever1 ,g1 is pivoted at the top of the vertical piece of oak ,a and fulcrumed on the post with a bolt through a slot1 the extending end carrying a weight as a counterbalance4 ,the illustration clearly shows the construction of this very useful drill press4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,ready1 ,boston1 ,mass4 ,illustration3 ,the ,breast ,drill as ,it is ,attached to an ,upright1 to ,make a ,drill ,press 99 99 99 99 99 ,a pair of bicycle trousers guards makes excellent sleeve bands when the cuffs are turned back and rolled above the elbows4 ,arts-,crafts ,leather ,work ,by ,mary ,c4 ,scovel ,part ,i ,leather work is one of the most interesting of the crafts1 first1 because the material is so pliable that anyone can work it1 and secondly1 because any ordinary article can be made by simply following the directions carefully1 although each of the various kinds of leather demands a different process4 ,the equipment necessary is simple1 consisting of two special tools costing #ej cents each1 one with a narrow edge for lining patterns1 and one with broad ends for tooling2 and a piece of tin1 plate glass1 or very smooth hard wood1 which should not be smaller than #i by #ab in4 ,a soft sponge1 a triangle1 a rule1 tracing paper and a hard pencil are also needed4 ,the first attempt should be made on a piece of ,russian calfskin4 ,this may be purchased at any leather store or craft shop and costs about #ej cents a square foot1 if cut to measure4 ,whole skins contain from #h to #ab sq4 ft4 and cost about #ce cents a square foot4 ,calfskin may be had in almost any color4 ,illustration3 ,coin ,purse--,back ,illustration3 ,coin ,purse--,front ,the coin purse will be the first article described4 ,the size1 pattern and design must first be determined4 ,it consists of three parts1 the front1 back and flap1 as shown in the sketch4 ,this purse will require a piece of leather #d by #h in41 in order to allow an extra #a_/d in4 outside of the pattern to pin the leather on the board while transferring the design4 ,the upper flap ,c folds over the front of the purse ,d4 ,the design must be divided1 the part belonging to ,c placed on the flap1 and the part belonging to the front ,d1 on the lower part of the front4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for ,purse ,take a piece of paper and fold it in accordance with the desired proportions of the purse1 taking care that the design for the front ,d is on the same side of the paper as that of the flap ,c4 ,the space ,f under the flap is without any design4 ,the design for the front ,d is on the lower part of the upper division of the pattern4 ,fold the part ,f behind ,h1 and then the part ,c behind ,h and ,f4 ,turn the pattern over for the proper position of the purse4 ,draw the entire design on tracing or tough tissue paper4 ,wet the leather on the wrong or unfinished side with a soft sponge4 ,pat the leather and endeavor to moisten1 but not soak it1 with water4 ,on some leather the water1 if it comes through1 leaves a stain4 ,when the leather is too wet it is very hard to tool1 as the tool sticks and makes an uneven background4 ,pin the design firmly down against the leather and fasten the leather with thumb tacks on the outer margin4 ,with a hard pencil go over every line of the design with a firm1 even pressure4 ,if the leather is properly moistened1 this will leave a clear outline of the design when the tracing paper is removed4 ,then with a lining tool--the tool with the narrow edge--go over the lines on the leather with a strong1 firm stroke4 ,should a line design only be desired1 this operation finishes the decoration4 ,illustration3 ,stamp-,case ,pattern ,two other methods may be used3 tooling or stamping4 ,the design shown does not go to the edge of the pattern4 ,a margin of at least #a_/h in4 between the edge of the pattern and design must be left for tooling and stamping4 ,for tooling1 after lining the pattern1 use the broad end of the tool and make even1 long strokes to press down the background4 ,if the background is not easily pressed down1 the leather is too dry4 ,take it off the board and moisten the back again1 move the tool back and forth and around until the background is comparatively smooth4 ,keep the edges very sharp between parts pressed down and those that remain raised4 ,the depth of pressing down the background is a matter of taste1 but it should be tooled down enough to make the design stand out plainly4 ,fold the parts together and line with silk to match the leather and then stitch up the front and back parts of the purse close to the edge4 ,this can be done on any sewing machine1 or by a shoemaker4 ,the circle ,m in the pattern is the catch or button which can be furnished and put on by a shoemaker1 or at a trunk store4 ,any ordinary article of leather can be stitched on a sewing machine in the home4 ,to do this successfully the stitch must be long and the needle of a large rather than a small size4 ,try the stitch on a scrap of leather before sewing the article4 ,if the foot or feed of the machine mars the leather1 place tissue paper or a plain piece of paper over the leather and stitch through both4 ,after making the stitch the paper can be pulled away4 ,use as heavy a silk as the needle will take4 ,the card case1 coin purse1 stamp case and bags can all be stitched on an ordinary machine1 if the above directions are followed4 ,in stitching any soft leather1 such as ooze cow or ooze calf1 if paper is not put between the leather and the machine1 the stitching will stretch the leather4 ,in making bags1 instead of stitching on a machine one can punch holes close together with a small punch1 and then with strips of leather sew the sides together over and over1 or in any manner desired4 ,if no machine is at hand1 nor a shoemaker's shop nearby1 a large pin or awl may be used to prick holes in the leather1 and then the parts sewed together with needle and silk4 ,use a running or over-and-over stitch4 ,an over-and-over stitch from one end of the seam to the other and back to the beginning of the seam1 makes an ,x-shaped stitch which gives a very good finish4 ,the second method after tooling is stamping4 ,line the pattern as described4 ,purchase a common carpenter's nail set1 with the head not too large4 ,the smaller sets fit the patterns better and make smaller circles4 ,moisten the leather as described4 ,use a wooden mallet to strike the tool in stamping the background4 ,this may be done either along circular lines or in a more irregular manner1 but avoid striking the tool too hard1 as too much pressure cuts through the leather4 ,other stamping tools of good patterns may be purchased at hardware stores or crafts shops4 ,a needle book or stamp case is another handy article to make in leather4 ,the sketch shows the design4 ,a piece of ,russian calf1 #f-a_/d by #c-c_/d in41 is necessary4 ,this allows #a_/d in4 on each side and end for pinning down the pattern4 ,fold a piece of paper into three parts as ,a1 ,b and ,c1 the front being ,a2 the back1 ,b1 which is folded underneath the part ,a4 ,the flap ,c folds up with ,b and then over ,a toward the front4 ,when the pattern is open1 the design for all parts must be on the same side of the paper4 ,the design for the back ,b is put on the leather upside down4 ,when the pattern is folded this makes the design upright4 ,the parts ,a1 ,b and ,c are equal in length and width4 ,the part ,c may be cut in any shape desired1 but keep the tongue ,d long and narrow4 ,make two horizontal cuts in the front ,a about #c_/af in4 apart4 ,these cuts must be at the same distance from the bottom of the front as the narrowest part of the tongue is from the end4 ,the tongue will then fit the cuts4 ,make the horizontal cuts a little wider than the tongue4 ,the design is put on the leather in the same manner4 ,it can be worked out in line1 tooling or stamping4 ,the parts ,a and ,b are sewed together4 ,illustration3 ,a ,mat ,the mat illustrated is another useful article and easy to make4 ,any size may be used1 and the method of lining or tooling the design1 or both1 gives a very beautiful effect4 ,how to ,make a ,wood ,lathe ,a strong1 substantial lathe in which wood and light metal articles may be turned can be made by carefully following the description below and the detailed drawings of the parts4 ,illustration3 ,detail of ,wood ,lathe 7,fig4 #a7 ,the bed is made of two pieces of straight-grained1 smooth1 #b by #d-;in4 hard wood1 #e ft4 long4 ,they are held apart at each end by blocks of wood #b in4 wide4 ,the bed can1 of course1 be made longer or shorter if desired1 but the above dimensions are very satisfactory4 ,the frame of the headstock1 ,figs4 #a and #b1 is made of hard wood4 ,the two end pieces have the dimensions and shape shown4 ,these are fastened with screws to the base4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #b7 ,the base has a slider1 a strip of wood #a in4 thick and #aj in4 long1 wide enough to slide smoothly between the bed pieces1 nailed to its bottom1 #b in4 from the rear end4 ,two #a_/b-;in4 holes are bored through the baseboard and slide4 ,two #a_/b-;in4 bolts are run through these holes and through another slide and board which runs on the under side of the bed4 ,when the nuts on these bolts are tightened1 the headstock is firmly clamped to the bed4 ,a half-round1 wedge-shaped piece is fastened with screws in the frame against the front end1 to serve as a brace against any strain1 and will also add to its appearance4 ,the spindle is of tool steel or steel tubing1 #c_/d in4 in diameter and #ad in4 long4 ,threads are cut on one end4 ,a hardened steel collar1 #a_/d by #a-a_/b in41 is riveted on the spindle so it may turn against another collar of the same size on the headstock4 ,another collar is fastened with screws to the rear end piece1 and a collar with a removable pin is fixed on the spindle4 ,these should be fitted so as to revolve easily against each other and yet have no end play4 ,the bearings are of brass tubing drilled for a spindle4 ,these are inserted and wedged in the headstock1 #f in4 from the bed4 ,care should be taken to see that they are in line4 ,small holes are drilled from the top for oil4 ,the pulleys are #b in4 wide with the diameters given in the drawing4 ,they are fastened to the spindle with a removable pin4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #c7 ,a good chuck for this lathe is made1 as shown in ,fig4 #c1 of a piece of shafting #a-a_/b in4 in diameter and #b-a_/b in4 long4 ,a #a_/b-;in4 hole is drilled through its center and one end reamed out and threaded to fit the threads on the end of the spindle4 ,a setscrew is fitted over the #a_/b-;in4 hole4 ,a center for turning wood is also shown4 ,many centers1 drills1 etc41 can be made of #a_/b-;in4 tool steel4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #d7 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #e7 ,the tailstock1 ,figs4 #d and #e1 is built up of three pieces of hard wood1 #b in4 thick1 and one piece1 #a in4 thick1 shaped as shown4 ,these are held together with four bolts1 #g-a_/b in4 long4 ,it has sliders and is clamped to the bed in the same manner as the headstock1 but only one bolt is used4 ,a handle is welded to the nut4 ,this will make the clamping easy4 ,illustration3 ,,section ,,through ,fig4 #d 7,fig4 #f7 ,a piece of tubing1 #b in4 long1 is drilled for a #a_/b-;in4 dead center and inserted for #a-a_/b in4 between the two upper pieces1 as shown in ,fig4 #f4 ,a hole for a #a_/b-;in4 bolt is bored through the sections so as to allow the bolt to slide freely in the tubing4 ,the top section is taken off and a place chiseled out just back of the tube for a #a_/b-;in4 nut4 ,a bolt1 #g in4 long and threaded for #b in4 of its length1 is turned into the nut and tubing4 ,a handle or wheel is riveted on the end of the bolt4 ,the center is made of tool steel1 #a_/b in4 in diameter1 with a tapering point4 ,other centers can be made of #a_/b-;in1 tool steel4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #g7 ,the tool rest1 ,figs4 #g1 #h and #i1 has a slide1 #c_/d by #c by #ac in41 with a slot #a_/b by #f in4 ,the base of the rest is bolted on this slide so it can be adjusted4 ,the rest is fastened on this base with screws4 ,the height of the rest can be varied4 ,it can be raised or lowered by inserting wedges between the slide and the rest base4 ,the tool rest is clamped to the base the same as the tailstock4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #h7 ,the power for this lathe can be supplied by means of a countershaft1 although a foot-power arrangement may be attached4--,contributed by ,e4 ,e4 ,hulgan1 ,marion1 ,ind4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #i7 ,to ,reduce the ,gasoline ,consumption of an ,automobile ,quite recently ,i tried out a method of reducing the consumption of gasoline in my automobile1 and1 as a result1 have higher efficiency without resorting to any of the numerous and exceedingly costly devices on the market4 ,i procured a piece of wire screen1 cut it in the shape of the gasket between the carburetor and the intake manifold1 but leaving it blind1 that is1 with the screen across the inlet4 ,i put this between two gaskets and fastened the whole back in place4 ,the result was an increase of #c miles per gallon of fuel4--,contributed by ,w4 ,j4 ,weber1 ,new ,york ,city4 ,cutting a ,tin ,ball from a ,child's ,finger ,a three-year-old child found a globe of tin with a hole cut through the center1 and--it is hardly necessary to state--immediately thrust his finger into the hole4 ,but he could not get it out again1 and the mother1 accompanied by several other small children1 brought the screaming child to my office4 ,i found the hole had been punched1 which caused three harpoon-like fragments to be carried into the center of the globe4 ,the mother in her attempt to remove it had caused the sharp points to enter the flesh of the finger in two or three places4 ,any attempt to pull the ball off1 drove the points of the harpoons deeper into the finger1 and it was therefore a question of cutting the tin or the finger4 ,but what kind of an instrument could ,i use on this tin globe8 ,i had nothing in my case that would cut it4 ,my #ce years of medical experience gave me no help4 ,the tin was as hard and smooth as a glass marble4 ,yet1 it would have been ridiculous to be thus conquered by a tin whistle1 so after some meditation ,i called to mind that ,i had a pair of heavy tinner's snips in the basement4 ,by using the utmost care ,i succeeded in cutting a small incision in the round ball1 and then with the points of the shears ,i cut the metal away from the finger4 ,such an accident may come under the observation of any parent1 and if so1 he can use the same method to relieve the child where medical assistance is not near at hand4--,contributed by ,r4 ,w4 ,battles1 ,m4 ,d41 ,erie1 ,pa4 ,child's ,seat for ,theaters ,as children must hold tickets for theaters the same as adults1 but the ordinary chair is too low to permit a child to see the performance1 an auxiliary seat such as shown in the sketch would sometimes be desirable as it elevates the child so its head will be on a level with those of other spectators4 ,the seat is made of a strip of canvas with eyelets for wire hooks that fit over the arms of the ordinary theater chair4 ,it is necessary to have extra eyelets at one end of the canvas to adjust it to varying widths of seats4--,contributed by ,w4 ,a4 ,jaquythe1 ,richmond1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,seat in a ,theater ,chair ,holding ,spoon on a ,hot ,dish ,after repeatedly burning my fingers in the attempt to prevent the spoon from sliding into the hot dish1 ,i decided to do a little inventing on my own hook4 ,taking a clean1 straight hairpin ,i bent it to the shape shown in ,fig4 #a1 and after hooking it over the edge of the dish1 ,i placed the spoon in it as shown in ,fig4 #b1 and my troubles were at an end4--,contributed by ,miss ,genevieve ,warner1 ,kalamazoo1 ,mich4 ,illustration3 ,spoon ,holder on a ,dish 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,locating ,gas and ,electric ,fixtures in the ,dark ,a gas or electric fixture in the center of a room is quite hard to locate in the dark2 more so if it is a single-light pendant4 ,the location may be easily found if the fixture is marked as follows3 ,coat small pieces of cardboard on both sides with phosphorus and suspend them from the fixtures with small wires4 ,no matter how dark the room may be1 the phosphorus on the cardboard can be readily seen4 ,the phosphorus is the same as used on matches and can be obtained from any druggist4 ,the phosphorus1 being poisonous1 should be handled as little as possible1 and1 after using1 should be returned to the water-filled jar in which it was received when bought4 ,if left in the open1 it may cause fire4--,contributed by ,katharine ,d4 ,morse1 ,syracuse1 ,n4 ,y4 ,a ,pea-,shooting ,gun ,the gun consists of only two parts4 ,the barrel may be either a piece of bamboo fishing pole or a section of sweet alder4 ,the spring is a piece of corset steel1 such as can be usually found about the home4 ,illustration3 ,a ,pea-,shooting ,gun ,made of a ,piece of ,alder and a ,corset ,string ,sweet alder can be found in the summer growing along the fences in the country almost anywhere4 ,find a stalk1 about #a in4 in diameter1 which is good and straight1 and cut it off to a length of #f or #g in4 ,make a ram rod of wood and use it to punch out the pith of the alder1 rendering the bore as smooth as possible4 ,an old bamboo pole of like dimensions may be used instead4 ,cut out a section of the wood1 #b-a_/b in4 long1 beginning #a-a_/b in4 from one end of the tube4 ,the depth of this cut should be almost halfway through the piece4 ,the corset steel is then inserted into the short end of the tube and bent over so that its other end will touch the bottom of the open part of the bore4 ,a nick is made with a knife across the bottom of the bore at this point1 to let the spring catch a little4 ,the ammunition is placed before the caught end of the spring1 as shown1 and discharged by hooking the forefinger over the spring at the point ,a and pulling backward as when pulling the trigger of a gun4 ,it is necessary to keep the muzzle elevated a little after the ammunition is placed in position1 otherwise the pea will roll out before the spring has a chance to strike it4 ,coloring ,electric-,light ,globes ,often it is desired to produce certain effects in lighting which demand a different-colored light than that given by the modern tungsten lamp4 ,as an example1 a soft1 mellow light is sometimes desired similar to that given by the old carbon-filament lamp4 ,in such cases it is a great mistake to install the carbon lamps on account of their exceedingly poor efficiency4 ,the ordinary tungsten lamp has an average efficiency of about #a4b watts per candlepower1 while the carbon-filament lamp requires about #c watts per candlepower4 ,therefore1 it is much more economical to color the globe of the tungsten lamp so as to produce the required color than to use the carbon lamp4 ,of course1 both lamps must be colored when any color other than a soft1 yellow light is desired4 ,a cheap coloring solution may be made as follows3 ,soak a small amount of gelatin in cold water for several hours1 then boil it and strain it through a piece of fine cloth4 ,while the solution is still hot1 add a small quantity of aniline dye of the desired color that has been previously mixed in a small quantity of cold water4 ,the lamps are dipped in the solution and then allowed to cool in a vertical position so that the coating will be more uniform4 ,a more satisfactory coloring solution may be made from celluloid4 ,obtain quite a number of old photographic films and remove all the gelatin by washing them in hot water4 ,then dissolve them in a solution of equal parts of ether and alcohol4 ,add the coloring solution and dip the lamps4 ,the coating produced by this method is impervious to water4 ,support for an ,open ,book ,illustration ,when a book is laid on a table for reading the pages at the beginning or end1 it will not stay open flat on account of the difference in the thickness of the open parts4 ,one person1 doing a great deal of reading1 uses a small card1 with the corner cut out1 which is placed under the side of the book having the smallest number of leaves1 as shown4 ,illustration3 ,some ,conventional ,designs for ,cardcases ,arts-,crafts ,leather ,work ,by ,mary ,c4 ,scovel ,part ,,ii ,when laying out designs for leather work1 avoid making them too small and intricate4 ,bold1 simple designs are the best4 ,the relation between the shapes of the background and of the design should be well balanced4 ,the design should not be so small that the large background shapes overbalance it4 ,one good way is to let the design partly follow or repeat the contour of the object4 ,if the article be rectangular in shape1 let some of the lines of the design follow rectangular lines2 and if circular1 follow the curves of the circle4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for a ,cardcase ,the first piece of leather work considered1 will be an artistic cardcase4 ,the foundation of a cardcase is a rectangle4 ,take a piece of paper #aj by #d-c_/d in4 and fold it in the middle1 making each side #e in41 then fold in #b in4 on each outside edge toward the center4 ,this last fold makes the pocket of the case4 ,if a deeper pocket is desired1 a longer piece of paper must be used1 and the fold more than #b in4 ,cut out the leather according to the paper pattern and allow at least #a_/d in4 for the margin4 ,this gives enough extra material for fastening the leather on a board outside of the pattern4 ,moisten the leather on the rough or unfinished side4 ,remember that1 as previously stated1 ,russian calfskin is the best for tooling4 ,place the folded paper on the right side of the leather1 then with a ruler1 triangle and lining tool draw the vertical lines where the paper is folded4 ,if the leather is moistened enough1 the tool will make a deep line4 ,make these lines where the leather is to be folded in the center1 and for each pocket4 ,line all around the pattern on four sides to indicate the outside border of the pattern4 ,note that there are four vertical panels or rectangles1 two wide ones and two narrow ones1 as the leather lies flat on the board4 ,select either of the wider rectangles for the front of the cardcase4 ,transfer the design onto this side4 ,place the paper on the moistened leather and go over all the lines of the design with a hard pencil4 ,when this is done1 take the paper away and deepen the lines of the design with the lining tool4 ,if tooling is desired1 use the broad-end tool and press down the background with firm even strokes4 ,keep the background and edges of the design sharp4 ,if stamping is desired1 make rows of small circles1 regular or irregular1 by using the nail set and a wood mallet4 ,the inside or lining is made of skiver leather or silk4 ,the two center rectangles are the only parts lined4 ,cut out the piece of silk or leather about #a_/af in4 less at the top and bottom of the rectangles and #a_/d in4 wider on each side4 ,if leather is used1 apply library paste on its back1 then place carefully on the inside1 smooth it down firmly and put it under a heavy weight to dry4 ,if silk is used1 apply the paste around the edges for a width of about #a_/d in41 and put it under the weight4 ,the case is then folded and sewed at top and bottom4 ,cut off the surplus leather about #a_/h in4 from the stitches4 ,illustration3 ,cover ,designs for ,cardcases ,illustration3 ,back of ,magazine ,cover ,illustration3 ,silk ,lining of ,magazine ,cover ,the next article is the useful magazine cover1 which anyone should delight in making4 ,it requires a piece of leather #aa by #ae in4 ,allow enough margin to fasten it to the board4 ,fold the narrow edges together4 ,the design can be placed on either side4 ,a border design bounded by rectangular lines is very suitable4 ,the margin allowed around the design shown in the illustration is #a in4 from the front edge1 #a-a_/b in4 from the top edge1 and #b-a_/d in4 from the bottom edge4 ,the design is #e-a_/d in4 wide4 ,it is placed on the moistened leather and lined1 tooled or stamped as described for the cardcase4 ,the inside of this cover is lined with heavy silk4 ,allow a #a_/d-;in4 margin to turn in on all four sides4 ,two strips made of the lining material1 #b-a_/b in4 wide and #aa in4 long1 are placed #a-a_/b in4 from each side1 over the lining on the inside4 ,the lining1 strips and the leather are stitched together about #a_/h in4 from the edge on all four sides4 ,the strips are to hold the magazine in place as the cover of the book is slipped between the cover and the strip4 ,illustration3 ,stampcase ,other kinds of leather1 such as ooze cow and ooze calf1 may be used1 but these only allow the method of cutting out the design1 as shown in the bag and stampcase4 ,the design is traced on the wrong or smooth side of the leather4 ,do not moisten the ooze leather4 ,fasten the leather firmly on the board and cut out the design with a sharp knife4 ,a soft silk is best for the lining4 ,apply the paste on the leather near the edge of the design and after laying the silk in place1 put it under a weight to dry4 ,illustration3 ,handbags ,the stampcase and handbags are laid out1 and the designs made in the same manner as for the cardcase and magazine cover1 but instead of stitching the edges on the handbags1 they are joined with thongs run through holes cut in the edges of the leather4 ,the stampcase edges are sewed together4 ,bear in mind that ,russian calf is used for tooling and stamping1 and ooze cow or calf for perforated designs4 ,furnace ,electrodes of ,lead ,pencils ,furnace electrodes frequently consist of carbon rods1 and if there is a short gap between them1 forming a break in the circuit1 the current jumps across that gap1 forming an arc4 ,the intense heat of the arc is used in fusing and melting metals4 ,as large electrodes are necessary for use in furnaces where great masses of metal are melted1 so small electrodes are adapted to finer or more delicate work1 says ,popular ,electricity4 ,illustration3 ,pencil ,electrodes ,which ,furnish ,intense ,heat ,as the lead or graphite in a lead pencil is a form of carbon1 it will make an excellent electrode for small work4 ,two ordinary lead pencils1 costing only one cent each1 may be used4 ,they are first sharpened as if they were to be used for the usual purpose of writing4 ,then a small notch is cut in one side of each pencil1 laying the lead bare at a point about #b in4 from the sharpened end4 ,a small copper wire is wound around the pencil and into this notch1 thereby making contact with the exposed lead or graphite4 ,by means of these small wires the pencils are connected to larger wires1 which in turn are connected to a switchboard or source of electric-current supply4 ,at some place in the circuit there should be a resistance to prevent short-circuiting and also to control the strength of the current4 ,as the wood sheath on the pencils offers sufficient insulation1 they may be picked up1 one in either hand1 and no electrical effect will be felt by the person so doing4 ,if the pointed tips are touched together1 a fine little arc1 not much larger than the tips of the pencils1 will be formed4 ,the temperature of this arc1 however1 is such that fine wires or small quantities of metal may be melted readily4 ,these little lead-pencil arcs may be used to fuse very small gold or silver wires1 or platinum thermometers1 or wires for tungsten or tantalum lamps4 ,the bead or globule of molten metal formed on the end of a fine wire need be no longer than a small-sized grain of sand4 ,coat and ,trousers ,hangers ,the hanger is simple in construction and can be easily made by following the dimensions given in the drawing1 and the directions given below4 ,illustration3 ,details of ,hangers ,the back is first marked off on a soft-pine board and cut out4 ,the curved edge should be rounded off so as to prevent injury to the coat4 ,the two end pieces are then made1 and fastened to the back with screws as shown4 ,the wedge is ripped diagonally from stock and the smaller edge made slightly round4 ,the wedge slides in between the two end pieces1 and after the trousers have been put in place1 is pushed down until it holds them securely4 ,the hanger is a screw hook turned into the wood1 or it may be made of a piece of heavy wire run through a hole in the back and bent over on the bottom edge4 ,the wood may be stained any desired color and then given two coats of shellac4--,contributed by ,olaf ,tronnes1 ,wilmette1 ,illinois4 ,mending ,broken ,fountain-,pen ,barrels ,broken fountain-pen barrels may be mended by the use of melted shellac4 ,this can be done by heating some dry shellac and applying it to the fracture4 ,do not scrape off the surplus shellac1 but shape it with a heated iron4 ,a pen with such a repair has been in use for two years4--,contributed by ,g4 ,d4 ,whitney1 ,pittsburg1 ,pa4 ,jig-,saw ,blades ,the ordinary form of jig-saw blade has a tendency to pull the fiber of the wood in one direction1 thereby producing a jagged cut4 ,to overcome this ,i made several blades with teeth as shown in the sketch4 ,after the downstroke is completed1 the teeth ,a will cut on the upstroke1 the teeth ,b cutting on the downstroke1 etc4 ,the upstroke teeth should be a trifle longer than the others and from #d to #f in number4--,contributed by ,phillip ,caflish1 ,buffalo1 ,n4 ,y4 ,illustration3 ,teeth ,cut in ,opposite ,direction ,leaded-,glass ,panels for ,furniture ,certain kinds of furniture may be greatly improved in appearance by the use of simple glazed panels in the door frames4 ,it would be inappropriate to have anything elaborate in a small cabinet for the reception of china as it distracts the attention from the contents1 but a simple leaded diapering or pattern of small design1 such as shown in ,figs4 #a and #b1 would be quite in place and have a good effect4 ,for other purposes more elaborate effects can be worked out in deep shades1 says ,work1 ,london4 ,illustration3 ,simple ,leaded ,diapering of ,small ,design for a ,small ,china ,closet or ,cabinet 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a hanging cabinet with leaded panels is shown in ,fig4 #c4 ,these panels for the doors are in the design shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,panels of this design can be used either for furniture or for small windows4 ,the process of making these panels is not difficult and the ordinary workman can form them1 the only difficult part being the soldering of the joints4 ,illustration3 ,a ,small ,hanging ,cabinet with ,doors ,having the ,leaded-,glass ,design ,shown in ,fig4 #b 7,fig4 #c7 ,the beginner should confine himself to plain glazing1 the design being formed by piecing together glass of different shades4 ,the method of procedure is to first make a small sketch in color to a scale of about #a in4 to the foot1 carefully arranging the parts and colors4 ,a full-sized panel can be drawn from this sketch4 ,the effect of plain glazing depends entirely on the arrangement of the lead lines and the art glass4 ,in the full-sized drawing the shapes are arranged so that they may be easily cut1 all long forms being either avoided in the design1 or divided by a cross-lead to guard against breakage in the cutting4 ,illustration3 ,only a ,part of the ,top of ,each ,window is ,highly ,decorated so ,that the ,maximum ,light may ,gain ,access 7,fig4 #d1 ,fig4 #e1 ,fig4 #f7 ,two simple forms of glazing are shown in ,figs4 #a and #b4 ,the one shown in ,fig4 #d is somewhat different1 the top of the panel being decorated with simple curves4 ,this general design is considerably elaborated in ,figs4 #e1 #f and #g4 ,it is desirable to decorate only a part of a window so that the maximum of light may gain access4 ,illustration3 ,two ,windows ,placed ,together ,may ,have ,their ,tops ,leaded to ,produce a ,combined ,effect 7,fig4 #g7 ,two simple treatments of a sailing craft are shown in ,figs4 #h and #i4 ,the effect of the introduction of this design in one of the panels of a small cabinet is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,illustration3 ,two ,designs for the ,tops of ,windows1 ,showing ,treatments of ,sailing ,craft 7,fig4 #h1 ,fig4 #i7 ,an example of plain glazing is shown in ,fig4 #aj4 ,this is a piece of simple leading and yet very effective1 involving no difficulty of construction4 ,illustration3 ,example of ,plain ,glazing with ,cross ,section of ,glass and ,lead ,strip1 also ,showing ,joint 7,fig4 #aj7 ,for this lead glazing a quantity of strip lead1 the section of which is shown in ,fig4 #aa1 will be required4 ,this can be purchased from dealers in art-glass supplies4 ,the lead is sold on spools and it must be straightened before it can be worked4 ,this is most easily done by fastening one end and pulling on the other4 ,the glass for this work must be reasonably thin as no advantage is gained by the use of thick material1 and it is difficult to cut4 ,a piece of art glass has a right and a wrong side1 the side on which the spots and streaks appear is the right side1 and it is cut on this side4 ,the tools required are a glass cutter1 a heavy knife and soldering appliances4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #aa7 ,sketch out the lines of the design full size on paper1 drawing in only one side of a symmetrical pattern and tracing the other4 ,after the design has been prepared1 the next step is to make a cutting pattern4 ,to do this1 take a piece of tracing cloth and lay it on the drawing4 ,trace the lines and go over them with a brush dipped in black1 making the lines exactly the same thickness as the core of the lead1 or the thickness of the distance the glasses are separated from one another1 as shown in ,fig4 #aa4 ,each division is marked for the color it is to be and the paper is then cut into sections on each side of the broad line4 ,these pieces form the patterns for cutting similar shapes from heavy cardboard which serve as templates for cutting the glass4 ,proceed to cut the glass by laying a pattern on the right side and scoring around with the cutter guided by the pattern4 ,little difficulty will be experienced in this work if the general design does not have very irregular shapes4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #ab7 ,when the various pieces of glass have been successfully cut and are ready for leading up1 arrange them in position on the preliminary sketch1 and then measure the outside leads and cut one piece for each side1 the lead being cut to fit against the core of the other at the joint1 as shown in ,figs4 #ab and #ac4 ,proceed to cut the lead for the long curves obtaining the length by bending the strips along the lines of the design4 ,as each is cut it will be found convenient to tack it in position on the working table by means of small brads1 so as to simplify the measuring and cutting of the other parts4 ,continue until the panel is complete1 when1 after truing up1 it is ready for soldering4 ,this is done in the usual way but requires extraordinary care to avoid the possibility of melting the lead4 ,the overlapping parts of the leads are pressed well against the glass in each division to keep it from rattling4 ,illustration3 ,the ,lead ,frame is ,first ,made1 the ,long ,lines are ,put in and ,then the ,short1 ,horizontal ,ones 7,fig4 #ac7 ,in making up the squares and rectangles such as appear in ,figs4 #b1 #d1 #e1 #f and #g1 lead the long lines first1 adding the shorter1 horizontal pieces last4 ,the sketch1 ,fig4 #ad1 will clearly illustrate this part of the work4 ,the sketch shows the starting of the panel1 ,fig4 #e4 ,illustration3 7,fig4 #ad7 ,raising ,cucumbers on a ,trellis ,a novelty in cucumber culture1 tried recently with great success1 is as follows3 ,as soon as the vines are about #ah in4 long1 stretch wire mesh #bd in4 wide on poles alongside the row of plants and train the vines on the wire4 ,the cucumbers will grow larger and the plants will require less care than when they are on the ground4 ,a ,barrel ,boat ,a boat that any handy boy can easily make is constructed of a barrel which is kept with the opening cut in one side up by two #d by #f-;in4 timbers and two tie pieces1 #b by #d in4 ,the lengths of these pieces will depend on the size of the barrel4 ,a good watertight barrel should be selected and an opening cut in the center between the hoops1 of such a size as to allow the body of the occupant room for handling an oar4 ,the timbers are attached to the barrel with iron straps--pieces of old hoops will do4 ,the two tie pieces are put across the timbers at the ends of the barrel and spiked in place4 ,illustration3 ,boat ,made of a ,barrel ,which is ,kept from ,capsizing by ,timbers ,attached ,the boat is to be propelled with a single1 double-end paddle4 ,there is no danger of the boat capsizing or the water splashing into the barrel4 ,homemade ,wing ,nuts ,a handle taken from a worn-out faucet1 drilled out and threaded for a bolt1 makes a good wing nut4 ,a discarded gas-bracket key1 cut off on the line ,,aa and with the part within the dotted lines filed out1 then drilled and threaded1 also makes a good wing nut4 ,illustration3 ,wing ,nuts ,made of ,discarded ,parts ,taken from a ,faucet or a ,gas ,bracket ,a ,spool-and-,ball ,puzzle ,procure an empty basting-thread spool and make a hole in its side1 at ,a1 just large enough to receive a #a_/d-;in4 steel ball4 ,a piece of celluloid1 ,b1 is wrapped around the flanges1 as shown1 and fastened with small brads4 ,an old negative film1 well cleaned1 is suitable for the celluloid4 ,be sure to put the steel ball in before fastening the celluloid in place4 ,the difficulty of the puzzle is to get the ball into the hole4--,contributed by ,r4 ,c4 ,knox1 ,waycross1 ,ga4 ,illustration3 ,the ,steel ,ball is ,not ,so ,easily ,run ,into the ,hole as ,it ,appears ,to ,start the ,ink ,flowing from a ,drawing ,pen ,in order to keep the ink flowing readily from a drawing pen it must be kept clean and not allowed to stand with the ink in the nibs4 ,a good plan is to have a small piece of velvet fastened to the drawing board or upon a small block1 conveniently located where the pen may be drawn across it as in making a line4 ,the tuft of the velvet will clean out the partly dried ink between the nibs4--,contributed by ,h4 ,l4 ,woodward1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c4 ,a ,pencil-,sharpener ,stick ,do not discard the sandpaper stick or pencil sharpener used by a draftsman just because all the abrasive sheets have been removed4 ,make use of it indefinitely by fitting a wedge in one edge1 as shown in the illustration1 to hold fresh sheets of sand or emery paper4 ,the wedge should fit tightly so that the ends of the abrasive sheet1 when wound around the block1 will be held tightly4 ,worn sheets can thus be removed and new ones applied when necessary4--,contributed by ,chas4 ,j4 ,la ,prelle1 ,flushing1 ,l4 ,i4 ,illustration3 ,a ,wedge ,attachment for a ,pencil-,sharpener ,stick for ,changing the ,sheets of ,abrasive ,splice for ,round ,belts ,sash cords or round belts are easily spliced with a coil spring1 and for belts this joint will run smooth and noiseless4 ,the coil should be a close fit on the belt1 and after turning one end halfway into the spring1 the belt itself is twisted in the reverse direction as many times as there are coils remaining in the spring1 before the other end is turned into it to meet the first4--,contributed by ,f4 ,s4 ,cummings1 ,detroit1 ,michigan4 ,illustration3 ,a ,coil ,spring ,used for ,splicing ,sash ,cords or ,small ,round ,belts 99 99 99 99 99 ,when painting wireless instruments use black asphaltum1 as it has high insulating qualities4 ,illustration3 ,the ,main ,ambition of a ,boy ,mechanic is to ,own a ,lathe ,amateur ,mechanic's ,combination ,lathe ,by ,joe ,v4 ,romig ,the thing most desired by a young mechanic is a lathe1 but the cost of these machines is usually too high to be considered by the average boy1 and consequently he is hampered in executing more difficult work4 ,the combination lathe shown in the illustration comes as near filling the wants of most boy mechanics as could be wished1 the attachments making it more than a lathe so that various kinds of work other than turning may be accomplished4 ,the materials necessary are few1 and1 outside of a few parts1 it can be constructed by the average boy at home with ordinary tools4 ,the material used for the construction of the frame consists of either well seasoned oak or maple1 #b-c_/d in4 wide and #a-a_/b in4 thick4 ,these timbers can be purchased surfaced on all sides1 and they must be straight and true to size4 ,the lengths to cut the pieces are given on the general drawing4 ,the end standard at the headstock is cut to the full length so that the upper end is used as a bearing for the headstock spindle4 ,a vise jaw1 about #b-a_/b ft4 long and of the same kind and dimension material as the frame1 is attached with screws made of bolts on the standard1 at the tailstock end of the lathe4 ,the feet are made of two boards for each standard1 and are of the same material as the frame and #g_/h in4 thick4 ,after cutting the pieces to the right length1 making sure that the ends are square1 and boring the holes to receive the bolts snugly1 they are put together1 the horizontal pieces for the ways and feet at perfect right angles to the uprights4 ,this will insure the parts running freely in the finished machine4 ,all bolts should be supplied with a washer under both head and nut1 and the nuts drawn up tightly4 ,the headstock extends #g in4 above the upper surface of the ways1 thus making a swing of #ab in4 ,one of the standards of the headstock is the extension of the lathe standard1 as previously mentioned2 the other standard being cut #i-c_/d in4 long and attached with bolts between the ways in the same manner as the lathe standards are fastened4 ,a block1 #c in4 long1 is fastened between these standards to aid in holding them rigid4 ,the bearings for the spindle1 which is a piece of steel1 #c_/d in4 in diameter and about #i in4 long1 are made in the upper ends of the standards in the following manner3 ,a #a-a_/d in4 square is laid out on the upper end of each standard1 with its center exactly over the center for the shaft1 and the wood is cut out to make a square hole1 which should be slightly tapering one way or the other toward the center of the standard1 to hold the babbitt metal used for the bearing4 ,a #c_/h-;in4 hole is bored1 vertically down from the upper end of each standard and in the center1 to meet the square hole4 ,this is used as a gate for pouring the melted metal in and later to make an oil hole4 ,prepare #h pieces of cardboard to hold the melted metal in the square holes while it cools1 by cutting them about #b in4 square and making a hole in the center of each1 #c_/d in4 in diameter4 ,two of these pieces are held between the two standards while the shaft is run through them and the square holes4 ,paint the parts of the shaft used in the bearing with thick white lead1 or wrap it with one thickness of writing paper1 then line it up perfectly parallel with the ways in both directions and tack the cardboard pieces to the standards4 ,place the remaining two cardboard disks on the ends of the shaft and tack them to the standards also4 ,place putty over all the edges and pour melted babbitt metal into the hole at the top4 ,when the metal is cool1 remove the cardboard disks and turn the shaft1 first in one direction and then in the other1 until it can be taken from the bearings4 ,a #a_/h-;in4 hole is then drilled through the metal in the top for an oil hole4 ,the ends of the shaft should be threaded by a machinist1 and nuts fitted to it and faced up true4 ,the threads should be cut just long enough to allow the back of each nut to turn freely against a washer placed on the shaft against the standard4 ,a split or solid pulley may be used1 as desired1 on the shaft between the standards4 ,if a solid pulley is used1 it must be slipped on the shaft as the latter is run into the bearings4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,plain ,lathe1 ,showing the ,construction of the ,clamp ,devices for the ,tailstock and ,rest ,slide1 and the ,manner of ,attaching a ,vise ,jaw on the ,end of the ,lathe ,bed ,the pulley is fastened to the shaft with a pin run through a hole drilled in them4 ,if a small flywheel is attached to the outer end of the spindle it will aid in keeping a steady motion4 ,the same procedure is carried out in the construction of the tailstock bearings4 ,the standards for this part are about #h in4 long and are bolted at right angles to and between two pieces that rest on top of the ways4 ,the shaft is threaded full length1 which should be done in a lathe by a machinist to get a true thread1 and the melted metal run on it to make an internal thread in the bearing4 ,a nut is run on the threads of the shaft between the standards1 and provided with a small handle for use in locking the shaft when it is set on work between centers4 ,a small handwheel is attached to the back end of the shaft1 into the rim of which a handle is set to make the turning easy4 ,the faceplate consists of a disk of metal1 #f in4 in diameter and #a_/d in4 thick1 attached with #c_/af-;in4 machine screws to a #c_/d-;in4 nut4 ,the disk is drilled in various places to receive ordinary wood screws4 ,the faceplate should be made by a machinist so that the surface of the face can be turned true4 ,the spur center is made of a #c_/d-;in4 nut1 drilled in opposite corners for #a_/d-;in4 pins1 #a-a_/d in4 long4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,various ,attachments for ,use in ,connection with the ,lathe for ,sawing1 ,planing and ,sanding1 and the ,shape of the ,tools ,used in ,turning1 ,together with the ,faceplate and ,spur ,construction ,the drive wheel for this lathe was taken from an old discarded washing machine4 ,such a wheel is a very common part of various kinds of machinery and usually one that will answer the purpose can be found in a junk pile4 ,one from #bj to #bd in4 in diameter will be about right4 ,a #a_/b-;in4 bolt is used for the shaft1 which is run through the standard at the headstock end of the lathe from the outside1 the threads being previously cut long enough to introduce a nut between the wheel and the standard for clamping the bolt in place4 ,the extending threaded end of the bolt is then supplied with two nuts1 one on each side of the wheel hub1 and a short piece of pipe is slipped on1 to make a bearing over the threads4 ,one of the spokes is drilled and a pin inserted and fastened to receive the upper end of the pitman from the treadle4 ,the wheel is adjusted on the shaft with the nuts on each side of the hub so that its face runs true with the pulley on the headstock4 ,the wheels are connected with a #a-;in4 leather belt4 ,the treadle consists of a frame built up of boards and swung in the centers at both ends on #c_/h-;in4 steel rods1 for bearing pins1 the bearings being made of wood standards with #c_/h-;in4 holes bored in them to receive the pins4 ,the pitman is made of wood1 its length being determined by measurement of the distance between the crank pin and the treadle-arm end when both are at their lowest point4 ,the slide for the rest consists of a #a-;in4 square steel bar1 about #aj in4 long1 having a hole drilled in one end and threads cut with a #a_/b-;in4 tap4 ,the rest used in this hole is made of a #a_/b-;in4 rod1 threaded on one end and bent at right angles on the other4 ,the clamping device for the slide is made of two bars1 #a in4 by #c_/af in41 fastened to the square bar and extending down between the ways with sufficient ends beneath to attach a wooden clamp block and cam with a handle4 ,this construction is clearly shown in the drawing4 ,if only a lathe is required1 the machine would be complete as now described1 but the other attachments illustrated will greatly add to its usefulness and the owner will be well repaid by making them4 ,attachments ,one table is used for the circular saw1 planer head1 sander1 and jig saw1 and it is attached on top of the headstock and tailstock standards with bolts1 run through the back edge of the board and the ends of two brackets which are screwed to the back edge of the inner standards4 ,thumb nuts are used on the bolts to aid in making the change quickly4 ,more than one hole is provided in the back edge of the board1 so that the tailstock bracket can occupy the right position for the sander or planer head1 as the case may be4 ,the holes in the bracket ends should be somewhat larger than the bolt1 to allow tilting of the table4 ,an adjusting screw is substituted for the rest1 so that the table can be raised or lowered to suit the work in hand4 ,the circular saw is #e in4 in diameter and should have fine teeth4 ,it is placed on the spindle threads against the nut1 and held there with another nut and washer on the end of the spindle4 ,the table is attached over the saw1 and the spindle is driven at a high speed4 ,the planer head is made of a wood block1 #i in4 long and #b-c_/d in4 square4 ,a #c_/h-;in4 hole is bored through one way near each end1 as shown in the drawing1 and two steel knives1 with #a_/b-;in4 holes coinciding with the #c_/h-;in4 holes in the wood1 are made and attached with their edges opposite or projecting diagonally from the corners4 ,the holes in the knives being larger than the bolts1 makes the knives adjustable for setting the cutting edges4 ,these knives may be made from an old saw blade1 ground to size and one edge beveled and sharpened4 ,a brass plate1 with holes to fit the spur center1 is fastened in the center of the block1 on one end1 and the other is centered for the cup of the tailstock screw4 ,the adjusting screw for the table is used to regulate the cut4 ,the sander is constructed of a wood piece1 #i in4 long and #c-c_/h in4 in diameter4 ,a groove is cut in one side of the rounding surface to admit the ends of the abrasive which may be fastened there with tacks4 ,an emery wheel can be used on the spindle in the same manner as the circular saw4 ,procure a wheel1 #e in4 in diameter with a #a_/b-;in4 face and having a lead center4 ,the hole should be bored out and tapped to fit the threads on the lathe spindle1 and to have the grinding surface run true1 this work should be done in a lathe by a machinist4 ,the drawings show the construction of the jig-saw attachment4 ,the standard on which the arms are pivoted is made of a #a_/b-;in4 bolt1 threaded for its entire length and with a groove cut in the head and nut to receive the arm pivots4 ,a locknut is used beneath the notched nut to hold the adjustment4 ,two nuts and washers are used near the center of the bolt for clamping the attachment to the table4 ,the pivots are made of sheet metal1 bent and drilled as shown4 ,the small projection at each end of the edge is raised slightly by hammering the corner of the metal4 ,these projections prevent the arms from sliding sideways4 ,the clamps for holding the ends of the saw blades are easily made of thin sheet steel1 or brass1 with a #c_/af-;in4 bolt and washer at the end for the clamp4 ,the tension of the blade is secured by a piece of wire1 an eyebolt and a thumb nut1 connecting the rear ends of the arms as shown4 ,the frame is driven by the spur center4 ,the pins are removed from the center and a #a_/d-;in4 pin is inserted in one of the holes so that it will project #e_/h in4 ,the pin runs in a slot cut in a brass plate that is attached to the lower arm4 ,very serviceable tools can be made of discarded files by grinding them to shape on the emery wheel4 ,always use a fine whetstone to finish the edge on a woodworking tool4 ,hanging a ,clothesline ,taut ,the line is equipped with rings1 one at each end1 used for convenience in quickly hanging the line1 which is then drawn taut with a lever4 ,a screwhook is fastened in one end post and at the other end a screwhook is attached to a lever which is pivoted to the post4 ,the lever should be about #c ft4 long1 #a in4 thick1 #c in4 wide at one end1 and #a-a_/b in4 wide at the other1 or handle1 end4 ,a large wood screw is used to attach it to the post4 ,a pin is placed in the post to hold the lever when the line is drawn taut4--,contributed by ,warren ,e4 ,crane1 ,cleveland1 ,ohio4 ,illustration3 ,a ,lever ,attached on ,one ,end ,post ,makes ,it ,easy to ,draw the ,line ,taut ,a ,double ,latch for a ,door ,illustration ,this latch is suitable for outbuildings1 small shops and sheds1 as it can be opened from both sides of the door and is easily applied4 ,it consists of a rod of suitable size which is bent in the shape shown in the sketch after the rod is inserted through a hole bored near the edge of the door4 ,the spring of the metal will hold the catch in place4 ,maulstick ,used as a ,ruler ,procure a cork having the same diameter as the knob on the maulstick and make a hole in the center so that it will slide on the stick4 ,this is very handy for using the stick as a ruler1 as it forms a sliding rest4 ,illustration3 ,the ,sliding ,cork and ,knob ,raises the ,stick so that ,it may be ,used as a ,ruler ,hinge with a ,wide ,swing ,in constructing a box ,i needed a hinge that would carry the cover farther away from the top than the ordinary double-leaf hinge4 ,i found that two pieces of #a_/d by #e_/h-;in4 wrought iron1 attached in the manner shown1 answered the purpose4 ,by using round-head screws it was unnecessary to countersink the metal4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane1 ,doylestown1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,the ,two ,bars ,provide a ,way to ,carry the ,cover ,away from the ,box ,a ,detachable ,clamp for ,stairway ,handrails ,the sketch shows a handrail clamp1 or holding device1 which is detachable1 for use on stone stairways in the winter when there is ice or snow on the steps4 ,the clamps are made of #c_/af-;in strap iron1 of any desired width1 conforming to the shape of the balustrade and provided with a hook at either end4 ,to the inside end of the band an upright is riveted and to this upright is riveted an ordinary handrail holder to take the handrail4 ,a heavy thumb screw allows the clamp to be fastened firmly to the balustrade at the outside4 ,this is a simple and inexpensive device which affords protection against falls4--,contributed by ,john ,de ,la ,mater1 ,chicago1 ,ill4 ,illustration3 ,a ,detachable ,handrail for ,use on ,stone or ,concrete ,stairways during ,winter ,a ,homemade ,leather ,punch ,an empty bottle-neck rifle cartridge can be easily made into a leather punch by grinding the edge of the opening sharp and cutting a hole near the top in one side4 ,the hole is for removing the leather slugs and should be just a little larger in diameter than the inside diameter of the shell4 ,the cartridges can be had in various sizes and almost any size of punch can be made4--,contributed by ,merhyle ,f4 ,spotts1 ,shelby1 ,ohio4 ,a ,wood-,scraper ,handle ,in using a plain scraper on the surface of wood the task grew exceedingly tiresome and ,i lightened the tedious work to some extent by making a handle for the scraper4 ,the handle consisted of a piece of wood1 #a in4 thick1 #c in4 wide1 and #f in4 long4 ,a cut was made in the edge of the wood the width of the scraper blade and about #c in4 deep1 and a bolt run through a hole bored centrally in the side1 about #b-a_/b in4 from the lower edge4 ,the blade was clamped in place with the bolt4--,contributed by ,j4 ,d4 ,keiley1 ,yonkers1 ,new ,york4 ,illustration3 ,a ,handle ,attached to a ,plain ,scraper ,blade ,makes the ,work ,much ,easier ,polishing ,gunstocks ,the fine polish applied to gunstocks and wood parts of tools will not wear well1 and if one cares for a fine finish1 a much better and more durable polish can be applied as follows3 ,soak the wood in linseed oil for a week and then rub the surface with an oil-soaked cloth for a short time every day1 for a couple of weeks4 ,a ,prick-,punch ,center ,gauge ,a simple instrument for finding and marking the center of shafting1 etc41 can be easily made of three pieces of sheet brass and a small prick punch4 ,illustration3 ,the ,point of the ,punch is ,quickly ,adjusted to the ,center of the ,work ,take two pieces of stiff sheet brass1 #b-a_/b by #c in4 in size1 and cut two corners1 #a_/b in4 square1 out at one end of each piece as shown in the sketch4 ,bend the metal on the dotted line ,a1 until it stands at an angle of #de deg4 ,the part ,b should be bent up in the same direction1 but at right angles to the plate1 while the part ,c should be bent out only slightly4 ,a hole should be drilled near each corner for rivets4 ,be sure that the two plates are bent in opposite directions1 then rivet them firmly together4 ,roll one end of a strip of sheet brass1 #g_/af in4 wide and #b-c_/d in4 long1 into a tube large enough to firmly hold a small steel prick punch4 ,place the opposite end of the brass strip in between the two ends ,c4 ,these ends should spring together slightly in order to hold the punch ,d at any height it may be placed4 ,if accurately made1 the point of the punch will be exactly in the center of the ,v-shaped trough4 ,in use1 to find and mark the center of a round bar1 it is placed in the trough with the end just touching the point of the punch4 ,the brass holding the punch is raised between the parts ,c until the point of the punch is brought as near to the center of the shaft as can be judged4 ,press the point of the punch against the end of the shaft and turn the latter in the trough4 ,if the punch marks a circle the center has not been found4 ,this is corrected by slowly moving the punch up or down until the point ceases to make a circle1 then the punch is tapped with a hammer to mark the exact center4 ,a ,whirligig ,clapper ,a good noise maker for ,halloween or any other occasion1 can be made by carefully following the directions here given4 ,the box is the first thing to make4 ,it is constructed of wood pieces1 #a_/b in4 thick1 and consists of two ends and two sides4 ,the ends are each #a-a_/b in4 square and the sides #a-a_/b in4 wide and #f in4 long4 ,these parts are nailed together with the ends lapping the sides4 ,the ratchet wheel ,a is a disk of hard wood1 #a-a_/b in4 in diameter4 ,its rim is divided into eight equal parts1 and notched with a knife as shown4 ,it is placed in the forward end of the box on a wood axle of #c_/h-;in4 diameter to which it is glued4 ,one end of this axle is squared and projects #a in4 beyond the side of the box4 ,the squared end passes through a square hole in the end of the crank ,c1 which is a piece of wood #c_/d in4 thick1 #a in4 wide and #d in4 long1 and is fastened with brads and glue4 ,at the other end of the crank1 a similar hole connects with a handle whittled to the shape shown at ,b4 ,illustration3 ,detail of the ,parts and ,how ,they are ,assembled to ,make the ,clapper ,a flat piece of steel spring1 #a_/b in4 wide and long enough to reach from the rear end of the box to the teeth of the ratchet wheel1 is shaped as shown at ,d4 ,the spring may be made from a stiff piece of corset steel or bicycle trousers guard4 ,the spring is fastened with a nail through the end and box sides and a second nail passes through the sides over the spring1 about #b in4 forward from the first nail4 ,this is to give the spring tension on the teeth4 ,to operate the clapper1 it is allowed to hang straight down1 while the right hand grasps the handle and whirls the box in a circle around to the left4--,contributed by ,c4 ,c4 ,fraser4 ,box ,partitions ,as ,i needed a box with a number of narrow partitions and it was impossible to cut grooves for the sections without removing the bottom1 ,i spaced off the places for the partitions with pieces of thin wood and fastened these in place with small nails clinched on the outside of the box4 ,this method was much more rapid and satisfactory than sawing the grooves and cutting them out with a wood chisel4--,contributed by ,james ,m4 ,kane4 ,illustration3 ,grooves for the ,partitions ,made with the ,use of ,small1 ,thin ,strips of ,wood ,safety ,catch for a ,flour ,bin ,a flour bin1 counterbalanced to swing closed at all times1 is liable to catch the arm of the one taking out flour4 ,to make it safe1 ,i applied the device shown in the sketch4 ,the bin1 at rest1 is shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,the safety catch consists of a stick of wood1 ,a1 notched at one end1 and is pivoted at ,b on a small bolt4 ,two stops1 ,c and ,d1 are located on the side of the box to prevent the catch from being thrown out of position when the bin is quickly pulled out4 ,these stops are nails driven into the box side4 ,when the bin is pulled out the catch takes the position shown in ,fig4 #b4 ,the catch stick should be a little shorter than the distance the bin is pulled out1 so that it may be raised to release the bin for its return4--,contributed by ,o4 ,f4 ,fouche1 ,erie1 ,pa4 ,illustration3 ,automatically ,operated ,catch to ,hold a ,flour ,bin ,out ,while ,taking ,flour from ,it 7,fig4 #a1 ,fig4 #b7 ,a ,homemade ,whistle ,procure two empty ,no4 #cj gauge brass cartridge shells4 ,cut one shell #c_/h in4 shorter than the other1 then flatten and bend them as shown in the sketch4 ,the mouthpiece should be at an angle of #fj deg4 ,file a slot1 #c_/af in4 in width1 about #a_/b in4 from the end4 ,file off the flange on the shorter shell so that it will fit snugly against the side of the other and solder them together4 ,a ring may be soldered on the end of the long shell to fasten it on a chain or string4 ,to give the whistle a shrill sound place a large shot in each shell before flattening them4--,contributed by ,peter ,veneman1 ,paterson1 ,new ,jersey4 ,illustration3 ,the ,tapering ,end of a ,cartridge ,shell is ,flattened and ,bent to ,make a ,whistle ,how to ,emboss ,stationery ,a person's monogram or any special lettering embossed on stationery is quite expensive4 ,the engraving of the dies by experts commanding high salaries1 and the subsequent presswork necessary to give relief to the design upon the paper cause an expense which the economical person hesitates to accept1 much as the refinement and individuality of the embossed work may be admired4 ,but there is a way by which almost anyone may emboss stationery at home with one's own design at no expense whatever4 ,the work is easy and the results pleasing1 and monograms or lettering thus done will compare very favorably with the printer's work1 especially if there is a good design to follow and the work is done with care4 ,a little artistic ability will1 of course1 aid one in preparing a design1 but is not essential1 for the letters required may be cut from printed matter and used as a guide for tracing4 ,there is no limit to the varieties of work possible by this process4 ,single letters1 monograms1 words or designs are suitable for reproduction in raised characters4 ,all the materials required for embossing the stationery are the envelope or paper on which the design is to appear1 a stylus and a blotter4 ,the paper should be of fair quality4 ,if it is too thin the stylus point is likely to push through it4 ,the linen-finished papers of medium weight and tough texture give excellent results1 although almost any grade of good writing paper can be used successfully4 ,as embossing by this process can be done well only through one thickness of paper1 in working on envelopes it is best to put the design on the central portion of the flap1 or turn it up and make the design in the left-hand corner of the envelope4 ,the stylus may be any kind of a pencil-like instrument1 easy to grip between the fingers1 with a hard1 smooth point1 rounded slightly so that it will not cut the paper4 ,the ordinary bone stiletto1 used in embroidering1 makes an ideal tool for this purpose4 ,if this is not to be had1 a substitute is easily whittled from a piece of hard wood4 ,even a wire nail1 with its point smoothed with a file1 may be used1 the upper portion being wound with string to afford a better grip4 ,the blotter should be white1 perfectly clean1 and of good weight4 ,a thin1 hard blotter will not produce a good raised letter as a softer one will4 ,when the surface of a blotter has become covered with creases from repeated use1 it should be discarded and a new one substituted4 ,illustration3 ,manner of ,holding the ,stylus ,when ,tracing the ,design on the ,back ,side of the ,paper ,as it is best to adopt a distinctive form of monogram or design for stationery and to use it without deviation1 it should be selected or worked up with care until something is outlined that will suit4 ,with the design settled upon and drawn on a piece of paper1 go over it with a soft pencil to deposit sufficient graphite for an impression4 ,lay the pattern1 face down1 upon the back of the paper to be embossed1 and directly opposite the spot on the other side where the raised characters are to appear4 ,with the handle of a knife or scissors rub over the back of the pattern till the graphite has left the tracing of the design reversed on the writing paper4 ,the pattern is now laid aside until required for transferring the design to another sheet of writing paper4 ,lay the blotter on some smooth1 hard surface1 such as a desk leaf or table top and lay the writing paper on the blotter1 reversed design uppermost4 ,hold the stylus firmly at an angle as shown in the illustration and keep the blotter and paper from moving with the other hand4 ,carefully trace the design1 using considerable pressure to insure a good relief upon the opposite side of the paper4 ,a soft eraser should be used to remove the guide marks on the back of the sheet when the relief is finished4 ,after a little practice with a certain design1 if it is not too intricate1 the operator will find that it can be reproduced quite faithfully freehand1 without the use of the pattern1 but1 of course1 the use of the pattern will be the only guarantee of exact duplicates4 ,a ,homemade ,hydrometer ,illustration ,the hydrometer is an instrument used in determining the specific gravity of a liquid1 such as acids1 etc4 ,the specific gravity of any material is the ratio of the weights of equal volumes of the material and water4 ,thus if a pint of acid weighs #a4b times a pint of water1 its specific gravity is said to be #a4b4 ,a very simple and inexpensive hydrometer1 similar to the one shown in the sketch1 may be easily constructed1 and will give quite satisfactory results1 if the scale on the instrument is carefully marked when it is calibrated4 ,purchase from the local druggist or doctor two test tubes1 one large enough to contain the other1 as shown4 ,the smaller tube is to form the hydrometer proper1 while the larger one is to serve as a containing vessel in which the liquid to be tested is placed4 ,the large tube should be mounted in a vertical position1 by placing it in a hole bored in a small block of wood1 or a suitable metal or wooden frame may be made that will accommodate one or more tubes4 ,the small tube is loaded at the lower end with a quantity of shot1 or other heavy metal1 in such a way that it will stand in a vertical position when it is placed in a vessel of water4 ,the amount of the loading will depend upon whether the hydrometer is to be used in determining the specific gravity of liquids heavier or lighter than water4 ,if the liquids are heavier than water1 the loading should be such that the tube is almost entirely immersed when placed in water2 if lighter1 only sufficient loading should be used to make the tube stand upright in water4 ,after the amount of loading has been determined it should be fastened in place by means of a small quantity of calcined plaster4 ,a small cork should now be placed in the open end of the tube1 and the tube sealed by coating the end with shellac1 or melting a small quantity of resin or sealing wax over the top of the cork with a hot soldering iron4 ,now place in the large tube a quantity of as pure water as can be obtained--fresh rain water will answer very well and distilled water still better4 ,immerse the small tube in the water in the large tube and allow it to come to rest4 ,make a small mark on the small tube with a file1 level with the surface of the water in the large tube4 ,if the hydrometer is placed in a liquid lighter than water and allowed to float1 the mark made on the tube will always be below the surface of the liquid in which the instrument is placed1 and the mark will be above the surface of the liquid when the liquid is heavier than water4 ,the hydrometer may be calibrated by making use of a hydrometer borrowed from the druggist or doctor4 ,the two hydrometers should be immersed in the same liquid and the tube of the newly made instrument marked to correspond with the markings on the borrowed instrument4 ,if the liquid is heavier than water to start with1 its specific gravity can be reduced by adding water1 and as the water is added the hydrometers will both rise4 ,a ,stirring ,stick ,the stirring1 or mixing1 stick shown in the sketch deserves its name1 as it will stir evenly all the way around4 ,it consists of two flat sticks1 one two-thirds the width of the other1 which are nailed together as shown4 ,the narrow one is only long enough to enter the depth of the liquid4--,contributed by ,frank ,j4 ,rempe1 ,oakland1 ,california4 ,illustration3 ,a ,flat ,surface ,strikes the ,liquid ,no ,matter ,which ,way the ,stick is ,moved ,illustration ,a ,telescoping ,support for a ,hinged ,shelf ,illustration3 ,when the ,shelf is ,lowered the ,support ,telescopes and is ,out of the ,way ,the supporting arm of the hinged shelf is constructed of a piece of gas pipe and a length of iron rod which slides snugly into the pipe4 ,a spring catch is set in the pipe at the proper height to engage the end of the iron rod when the shelf is up4 ,this spring must be of good size1 as it holds the entire weight of the shelf4 ,a large clock spring is suitable4 ,one end of the spring is bent outward and upward to form a releasing handle4 ,the other end is drilled for the two machine screws which hold it to the pipe4 ,the spring works in a rectangular slot1 cut lengthwise of the pipe4 ,the pipe must extend #h or #aj in4 beyond the spring4 ,the ends of the rod and of the pipe are pivoted with screws or rivets on angle pieces screwed to the shelf and wall4--,contributed by ,donald ,a4 ,price1 ,wilmington1 ,del4 ,a ,bug ,powder ,to secure a nonpoisonous roach and bug powder mix dry #c lb4 plaster of ,paris with #b lb4 of sugar1 then add #a oz4 of pulverized aniseed4 ,the addition of a little corn meal will help to draw the pests4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,how the ,capacity of an ,incubator may be ,doubled ,about #aj days after setting the incubator one may easily start another hatch by placing more eggs on top of the incubator in the following manner3 ,make a pad about #a in4 thick of any cotton material and place it on top of the incubator4 ,cut four pieces of boards1 #a by #d in41 and fit them around the top of the incubator4 ,nail them together as in making the sides and ends of a box4 ,pad the inside of this frame about #a in4 thick and tack it on top of the incubator1 being careful that none of the material comes too close to the lamp4 ,place the eggs inside of this tray and cover them with a pad about #c in4 thick4 ,turn the eggs the same as those on the inside4 ,when the first hatch comes out1 place the eggs kept on top in the incubator after having cleaned it with a solution of carbolic acid4--,contributed by ,hattie ,j4 ,day4 ,homemade ,rivet ,set ,desiring to rivet some pieces of leather together and having no rivet set1 ,i hastily made one from a strip of heavy sheet tin1 #c_/d in4 wide4 ,this was rolled at one end1 as shown in the sketch1 and the other end notched to fit over the rivet end4 ,the rolled end formed the part for setting the washer and the slotted end held the washer down while the first blows of the hammer were struck4 ,illustration3 ,a ,strip of ,tin ,shaped to ,take the ,place of a ,rivet ,set ,wash ,bottle for ,laboratory ,use ,illustration ,a large-mouth bottle neck is provided with a stopper1 having three brass or glass tubes as shown1 the tube ,a being fitted with a thick piece of rubber tubing1 ,b1 stoppered at its lower end4 ,a slit is cut at ,c1 and allows the air blown in through the tube ,a to pass into the bottle1 but will close automatically and hold the pressure within the bottle4 ,if the relief tube ,d is closed with the thumb the water is forced out in a steady stream through the nozzle ,e4 ,the water will continue to run for some time after the lips are removed from the air tube1 but the removal of the thumb from the tube ,d will stop the flow of water instantly4--,contributed by ,w4 ,schilling1 ,san ,francisco1 ,cal4 ,typewriting on ,card ,stock ,anyone having tried to typewrite on cards or heavy stock has doubtless experienced much trouble in getting the card to feed properly4 ,if at all heavy1 it will resist the curving so strongly that it will not be carried around the platen1 and the edge of the card is very apt to catch on the pressure rolls and cause the platen to slip4 ,the remedy is very simple and consists in running a sheet of paper through ahead of the card until an edge of about #a_/b in4 remains1 then inserting the edge of the card inside of the projecting edge of the paper and turning the platen4 ,the paper overlapping the card prevents the edge of the latter from catching on the pressure rolls and keeps it in close contact with the platen so that it will pass through without trouble4--,contributed by ,thos4 ,l4 ,parker1 ,st4 ,paul1 ,minn4 ,a ,furniture ,polish ,a homemade furniture polish that will compare with any known polish1 is composed of the following chemicals and oils4 ,mix #c oz4 of turpentine very gradually with #f oz4 of linseed oil1 then add #c oz4 of grain alcohol1 #c oz4 of #e-per-cent acetic acid1 and #a_/b oz4 of butter of antimony4 ,apply with a cloth and use a good friction4 ,as the substance might prove harmful to children if taken internally1 see that it is kept out of their reach4--,contributed by ,loren ,ward1 ,des ,moines1 ,iowa4 ,pointed ,end on a ,hoe ,illustration ,the rounding end on the ordinary hoe is useless in many instances for getting under growing plants1 to cut out the weeds and to loosen up the earth4 ,i find that shaping the hoe ends as shown in the sketch is very effective in getting up close to a plant and under spreading vines4--,contributed by ,r4 ,f4 ,pohle1 ,e ,lynn1 ,mass4 ,starting a ,siphon ,illustration ,roll up a soft rubber hose tightly so that it will be flattened to force out all the air and drop one end into the liquid1 then let the coil unwind as it falls down on the outside4 ,the uncoiling causes a slight vacuum in the hose and the liquid follows it up and starts the flow instantly4--,contributed by ,l4 ,j4 ,monahan1 ,oshkosh1 ,wis4 99 99 99 99 99 ,paint spots on window glass can be readily removed with a penny4 ,a ,homemade ,blowtorch ,illustration ,the torch shown in the sketch requires no air pump4 ,instead of forcing a small stream of gasoline into a heated burner it converts the gasoline into gas in the chamber and blows a small jet of it through a very small hole into the combustion chamber4 ,a medium-sized and strong oilcan is used for the reservoir1 the spout being cut off close to the screw part and a steel or brass tube1 about #e_/af in4 in diameter1 soldered to the stub end4 ,the tube is bent as shown4 ,a piece of wicking is drawn into the tube so that the upper end is within #a_/d in4 of the tube end4 ,the end of the tube is then fitted with a piece of brass rod with a very small hole in the center4 ,the hole is made in the following manner3 ,before the piece is cut from the rod1 it is held in a vise and the sharp end of a scriber is carefully driven into the center4 ,a little oil placed on the scriber point will keep it from sticking in the metal4 ,measure the depth of the hole and cut the rod off just above the point4 ,file the end of the piece cut off with a fine file until the point of the hole is reached4 ,this hole must be so small that light can be barely seen through it4 ,the combustion chamber is made of a piece of brass tubing driven over the end of the smaller tube on the spout4 ,about #a_/b in4 from the back end of the larger tube four or more holes are drilled to admit air to the gas4 ,fill the can about three-fourths full of gasoline and allow time for the wick to become saturated to the upper end4 ,hold a lighted match to the rear of the burner1 and the heat will convert the gasoline into gas which will then burn with a nice white flame about #a in4 long4 ,the success of the torch depends altogether on the fineness of the hole in the end of the tube and the tight soldering of all the joints4 ,a ,rule ,gauge ,the method of using the thumb as a gauge on a rule in scribing long boards is not always satisfactory1 especially if the board has a rough edge4 ,it is always best to have a regular gauge1 but in the absence of one1 an attachment for an ordinary carpenter's rule can be quickly made from a piece of tin1 although one made of sheet brass is better1 in appearance as well as for service4 ,cut out the metal1 as shown by the dimensions1 and roll the two sides up1 stopping at the dotted lines4 ,the ends ,a and ,b are turned out slightly so that they will slide easily along the edge of the board4 ,the gauge will snap on a rule easily and will stay where it is placed4--,contributed by ,h4 ,j4 ,blacklidge1 ,san ,rafael1 ,cal4 ,illustration3 ,gauge ,made of ,sheet ,metal ,which will ,easily ,snap on a ,carpenter's ,rule ,a ,match ,holder ,illustration ,the holder consists of a small box1 the same size as a match box1 with a sloping spring bottom and spring wires covering the lower part of the front side4 ,one end of the match box is removed and the contents dumped into the holder4 ,the matches fall to the lower sloping edge1 where one match at a time can be easily removed4--,contributed by ,bert ,verne1 ,san ,diego1 ,cal4 ,trick ,bottles and ,glasses ,by ,george ,w4 ,catlin ,illustration3 ,under ,each ,cover ,used ,is a ,bottle and ,glass1 and by ,pinching the ,cover the ,bottle is ,made to ,rise with ,it1 ,thus ,leaving the ,glass in ,view ,the performer presents to his audience two pasteboard covers1 one bottle and one glass4 ,saying that he wishes to secure the safety of the bottle and glass1 he places covers over them1 cautioning the audience to note carefully which cover incloses the glass and which the bottle4 ,then he says that1 to prevent any misunderstanding as to their positions1 it is desired the audience designate which cover holds the glass4 ,the response will be unanimous1 the left or the right as the case may be1 but on raising that cover the bottle is exposed4 ,covering the bottle again1 and asking the audience if they were quite sure that their eyes did not deceive them1 he states that the glass is really under the cover just lifted and returned to its place4 ,to prove it1 the cover is lifted again1 to show the glass this time4 ,the changing can be done as often as desired1 or will amuse the crowd4 ,the secret of the trick consists in the use of two covers1 two bottles and two glasses1 and the manner of performing it is as follows3 ,the bottles are bottomless and of such size as to admit the glass without sticking4 ,a round hole is cut in one side of each bottle1 about #b-a_/b in4 above the bottom4 ,this can be accomplished in a drill press by using a round copper tube1 with fine emery applied to its end1 as a drill4 ,the hole should be so placed that a finger will strike the top of the glass when both bottle and glass are set on the same surface4 ,if dark-colored bottles are used1 a false bottom can be made and fitted in each bottle above the upper edge of the glass4 ,this bottom can be cemented in place and made liquid-tight1 so that some wine may be placed in the bottle and poured into the opposite glass to show that it holds liquid4 ,in doing this part of the trick1 make no more changes with the wine in one glass4 ,under each cover is a bottle and tumbler1 and by pinching the cover1 the bottle is made to rise with it1 thus leaving the tumbler in view4 ,when it is necessary to show the bottle1 just raise the cover1 and the bottle covers the glass4 ,when the bottle is lifted from the table1 the thumb is inserted in the hole to press the tumbler against the opposite side1 where it is held and raised with the bottle4 ,be sure to keep the side of the bottles with the hole back and away from the audience4 ,it will be seen that it matters not which cover is mentioned2 the performer can show just the article he desires4 ,,contents ,accounts1 ,home1 ,way to ,keep1 #bhb ,acid ,siphon1 #bbb ,acid ,stains1 ,removing from ,cloth1 #aif ,addressing a ,roll of ,papers1 #cfi ,advertising ,lantern ,slides1 ,how to ,make1 #dag ,aerial ,propeller1 ,model ,boat with1 #bjg ,aeroplane1 ,flying ,model1 for ,display1 #cfa ,aeroplane ,frames1 ,braces for1 #bce ,aeroplane ,kite1 #aaa ,aeroplane1 ,model1 ,joints for1 #bge ,air ,pencil to ,make ,embossed ,letters1 #bi ,air ,pressure1 ,relieving1 ,when ,closing ,record ,boxes1 #eg ,alarm ,clock1 ,mission ,frame for1 #bgg ,alarm1 ,doorbell1 #afj ,drip-,pan1 #agh ,fire and ,burglar1 ,how to ,make1 #daa for ,sleepwalker1 #big ,temperature1 #cde to ,designate ,filled ,storage ,battery1 #bec ,amateur ,mechanic's ,combination ,lathe1 #ddg ,amperage of ,fuse ,wire1 ,reducing1 #cbb ,anchor ,posts for ,lawn ,swing1 #adh ,anemometer1 ,electric1 #cfg ,angling1 #ei1 #fi1 #gc1 #gi ,anti-,tangle ,safety ,pin1 #bgb ,ants1 ,to ,keep ,away from ,food1 #cfa ,application for ,small ,wounds1 #cjd ,arbor1 ,grape1 ,built of ,poles1 #ab ,arm1 ,pincushion for1 #bhh ,armatures for ,small ,motors1 #abd ,armatures1 ,small1 ,holding for ,winding1 #aah ,arrow ,sticks1 ,planing1 #cai ,arts-,crafts ,leather ,work3 ,part ,i1 #dcb ,part ,,ii1 #dci ,aspirator1 ,how to ,make1 #adf ,atmospheric ,thermo ,engine1 #abj ,attractor for ,game ,fish1 #ig ,automatic ,valve for ,funnel1 #cag ,automobile1 ,gasoline ,consumption of1 ,to ,reduce1 #dcf ,automobile ,robe1 ,how to ,make1 #abb ,awning1 ,combined ,shade and1 #afd ,babbitt ,metal1 ,cores for ,use in1 #cjd ,back1 ,attached1 for ,photographic ,printing ,frame1 #dac ,back ,stop for ,workbench1 #bbe ,back ,thrust ,prevented on ,skis1 #baf ,bag1 ,clothespin1 #db ,bait1 ,live1 ,pail1 #agh ,live1 ,used in ,fishing1 #bfa ,baking ,bread in ,hot ,sand1 #ec ,baking ,ovens1 ,to ,prevent from ,scorching1 #bih ,baking-,pan ,shoes1 ,adjustable1 #abi ,balance1 ,simple1 #cie ,ball ,catch for ,cabinet ,doors1 ,homemade1 #gb ,ball-,clasp ,purse1 ,repairing ,broken1 #caf ,balloons1 ,toy1 ,inflating1 #afg ,bamboo ,pole1 ,uses for1 #agc ,bank1 ,homemade ,toy1 #cff ,barn ,tools1 ,hangers for1 #aee ,barometer1 ,electric-,light ,bulb as1 #bhj ,barrel ,boat1 #dde ,baseball ,game1 ,indoor1 #bge ,basement ,light1 ,lighting1 #aef ,bases for ,electric ,apparatus1 ,varnishing1 #cbd ,basin1 ,freezing to ,chair1 #dca ,basket1 ,a ,reed1 #beg ,waste-,paper1 #cbj ,basketball1 ,removing from ,closed-,bottom ,receptacle1 #bff ,bathroom ,light1 ,to ,operate ,automatically1 #ef ,bathtubs1 ,removing ,black ,deposit on1 #aij ,batteries1 ,dry1 ,preserving1 #aib ,dry1 ,renewing1 #chb ,dry1 ,testing1 #bff ,battery1 ,homemade ,wet1 #cdj ,bearings for ,model ,work1 #bch ,bed for a ,camp1 #acc ,bed ,pocket1 ,utility ,home or ,traveling1 #djj ,bed ,warmer1 ,homemade ,electric1 #aed ,bed-,cover ,fasteners1 #ee ,bedroom ,cabinet1 #afc ,bell1 ,continuously ,ringing1 ,how to ,make1 #cha ,bell-,ringing ,transformer1 ,small1 ,construction of1 #cdh1 #ceb ,bells1 ,call1 ,simple ,methods of ,connecting1 #cef ,belt1 ,cartridge1 ,how to ,make1 #ee ,belts1 ,round1 ,splice for1 #ddf ,bench1 ,attaching ,vise ,jaw to1 #agf ,lathe1 #bb ,molding-,sawing ,block ,used on1 #djh ,bench ,stop1 ,adjustable1 #cbe for ,planing ,thin ,boards1 #bed ,bench ,vise1 ,homemade1 #adi1 #bdd ,bench with ,folding ,seats1 #aeh ,bench-,vise ,nut1 ,broken1 ,substitute for1 #adc ,bicycle ,horn1 ,mechanical1 #aie ,bicycle ,oil ,lamp ,changed to ,electric ,light #gh ,bicycle ,sprocket1 ,rear1 ,removing1 #dac ,bicycle ,wheel1 ,roller ,skate on1 #bja ,binding ,machine1 ,lantern-,slide1 #bjg ,binding ,magazines1 #ej ,binding ,posts on ,wet ,batteries1 ,protecting from ,corrosion1 #beb ,bird ,cages1 ,seed ,receptacle for1 #adg ,birds1 ,turn ,feeding ,table for1 #acg ,black ,deposit on ,bathtubs1 ,removing1 #aij ,black1 ,dull1 for ,cameras1 #afc ,blackboard for ,children1 #ea ,blades1 ,jig-,saw1 #ddb ,razor1 ,discarded ,wafer1 ,use for1 #abd ,blank ,books1 ,ruling1 #bij ,bleaching ,ivory1 #age ,block1 ,whetting1 #cge ,blocks1 ,falling1 ,how to ,make1 #cib ,blocks of ,wood1 ,small1 ,to ,harden1 #dbc ,blowgun1 ,how to ,make1 #bhb ,blowpipe1 ,automatic1 #ahj ,blowtorch1 ,homemade1 #dei ,board1 ,writing1 for ,children1 #cbe ,boards1 ,planing ,rough-,grain1 #bce ,boat1 ,barrel1 #dde ,ice and ,catamaran1 #bg ,mirror an ,aid in ,rowing1 #aba ,model ,steam-,turbine1 #cbc ,model1 ,with ,aerial ,propeller1 #bjg ,paddle-,wheel1 ,how to ,build1 #aje ,boats ,a ,canoe ,stove1 #ajc ,an ,oar ,holder1 #afh ,foot1 ,how to ,make1 #aff ,hand ,propeller-,wheel ,attachment for ,rowboat1 #dac ,holder for ,dory ,rudder1 #fh ,how to ,build a ,paddle-,wheel ,boat1 #aje ,how to ,build a ,skiff1 #ah ,ice ,boat and ,catamaran1 #bg ,mirror an ,aid in ,rowing a ,boat1 #aba ,rope ,oarlocks1 #bja ,small1 ,landing for1 #bcg ,to ,repair a ,leak in a ,canoe1 #adi ,bobsled1 ,four-,passenger ,coasting1 #bd ,guide ,ropes on1 #aee ,inexpensive1 #di ,boiling ,cracked ,eggs1 #cia ,bolster1 ,how to ,make1 #ahb ,bolt1 ,night1 ,hinges ,used to ,substitute1 #ccd ,book ,cover1 ,pocket for ,inside of1 #bch ,book ,covering1 #cjj ,book ,leaves1 ,removing ,ink ,stains from1 #dah ,book1 ,support for ,open1 #dch ,bookcase or ,closet1 ,portable and ,folding1 #bif ,bookholder1 ,adjustable1 #bbd ,bookrack1 #bfa ,folding1 #cie ,books in ,case1 ,holder for1 #bdg ,books1 ,removing ,finger ,marks from1 #bjj ,boring a ,clean-,edged ,hole1 #djf ,boring a ,long ,hole1 #dbj ,bottle1 ,cover for1 #dbj ,glass1 ,cutting1 #ahf ,removing ,cork from1 #bie ,bottle-,cap ,lifter1 #aie ,bottle-,opening ,trick1 #bbc ,bottle ,necks1 ,to ,prevent ,corks ,sticking in #agd ,bottles and ,glasses1 ,trick1 #dfj ,bottles1 ,medicine1 ,time ,indicator for1 #ach ,poison1 ,simple ,way to ,mark1 #abf ,box1 ,camp ,provision1 #ie ,box ,partitions1 #ded ,boxes1 ,homemade ,hinges for1 #ajj ,boy ,surveyor3 ,camera ,surveying1 #g ,plane-,table ,surveying1 #a ,plotting a ,camera ,survey1 #ac ,brace1 ,drill ,press on ,ordinary1 #dbg ,wrist1 #add ,braces for ,aeroplane ,frames1 #bce ,bracket1 ,shade-,roller and ,curtain-,pole1 #cah ,bracket1 ,swinging ,electric-,light1 #bhd ,brackets1 ,towel-,roller1 #bbc ,brake1 ,prony1 for ,testing ,small ,motors1 #cb ,brass1 ,cleaner for1 #aib ,frosting1 #ahe ,brass ,articles1 ,cleaning1 #cge ,brass ,clips1 ,tool ,holders ,made of1 #dad ,brass ,rings1 ,turning1 #djj ,brass ,tubing1 ,seamless1 ,small ,steam-,engine ,cylinders ,made from1 #cif ,bread1 ,baking in ,hot ,sand1 #ec ,bread1 ,toasting ,over an ,open ,fire1 #aa ,breaker1 ,glass1 #bia ,broom for ,sweeping ,out ,corners in ,steps1 #bie ,broom ,holder1 ,another1 #ii ,broom1 ,old1 ,shaping1 #ahb ,brown ,stain for ,wood1 #ahi ,brush for ,applying ,soldering ,acid1 #bhc ,brush ,handles1 ,protecting1 from ,paint1 #bid ,utilizing ,old1 #dag ,brush ,hanger for ,dark ,room1 #aef ,brush1 ,homemade1 for ,cleaning ,upholstered ,furniture1 #ahh ,to ,clean ,shellac from1 #cai ,buckle ,tongues1 ,replacing1 #cca ,bucket1 ,ear ,repair on1 #age ,bucket-,ball ,game1 #bgj ,buffer1 ,finger-,nail1 #cbb ,bug ,powder1 #deg ,bugs ,attracted by ,light1 ,catching1 #bfc ,bumper1 ,rubber1 on ,water ,faucet1 #djf ,bunsen ,burner1 ,homemade1 #cah ,small1 #cjh ,burglar ,alarm1 ,fire and1 ,how to ,make1 #daa ,burlap1 ,needle for ,sewing1 #aea ,burner for ,soldering ,small ,work1 #dah ,homemade ,bunsen1 #cah ,small ,bunsen1 #cjh ,bushing a ,stovepipe in a ,chimney ,hole1 #bca ,buttonhole ,cutter1 #dad ,buttonholes1 ,guide for ,making1 #bfd ,cabinet1 ,bedroom1 #afc ,cabinet ,doors1 ,homemade ,ball ,catch for1 #gb ,cabinet1 ,shaving1 ,mounted on ,adjustable ,pedestal1 #bc ,cabinet ,work1 ,joint for1 #bea ,calcium ,deposits on ,glass1 ,removing1 #ahi ,calculation ,trick1 ,lightning1 #aja ,caliper ,gauge1 ,vise ,used as1 #agb ,camera1 ,hand1 ,telephoto ,attachment for1 #acf ,homemade1 ,enlarging1 #bai ,mechanical1 #bcc ,mile-,o-,view1 #bac ,multiplying1 ,attachment for1 #bba ,ordinary1 ,stereoscopic ,pictures with #cdf ,camera ,shutter1 ,electrically ,operated1 #bcd ,camera ,support1 #cbd ,camera ,survey1 ,plotting a1 #ac ,camera ,surveying1 #g ,cameras1 ,dull ,black for1 #afc ,homemade ,direct-,view ,finder for #ed ,camp1 ,bed for1 #acc ,hanger for1 #aja ,lantern for1 #bgf ,camp ,furnishings1 #ic ,camp ,loom1 #ajg ,camp ,provision ,box1 #ie ,camp ,stoves1 #ig ,camp-,fire ,utensils1 ,supports for1 #cga ,camphor1 ,experiments with1 #cia ,camps1 #ij ,cams1 ,small1 ,how to ,make1 #ec ,can ,covers1 ,tight-,fitting1 ,removing1 #cia ,candle ,sconce1 ,horn1 #bih ,candle-,shade ,holder1 #bej ,candle1 ,to ,automatically ,extinguish1 #fg ,candles1 ,decorating1 #dbf ,motor ,made of1 #di ,substitute for1 #bdg ,varnished1 ,burn ,longer1 #cba ,candy-,floss ,machine1 ,how to ,make1 #bfh ,cane-,seat ,cleaner1 #cah ,canned ,foods1 ,heated1 ,relieving ,pressure for ,opening1 #db ,canoe ,stove1 #ajc ,canoe1 ,to ,repair ,leak ,in1 #adi ,canvas1 ,preventing ,mildew on1 #bdg ,canvas ,shoes1 ,cleaner for1 #bhi ,carbon ,paper1 ,renewing1 #cd ,card1 ,changing ,pip on1 #fg ,magic ,change1 #acc ,card ,stock1 ,typewriting on1 #deh ,card-and-,coin ,trick1 #da ,cards1 ,mind-,reading ,effect with1 #bi ,carrier1 for ,fishhooks1 #bfi for ,suitcase1 #aad ,milk-,bottle1 #ajg ,stove-,wood1 #bcg ,carrying ,stone ,jars1 #cji ,carrying ,two ,pails in ,one ,hand1 #chb ,cartridge ,belt1 ,how to ,make1 #ee ,cartridge ,shells ,used for ,electrical ,contacts #bhe ,case1 ,holder for ,books in1 #bdg ,casein ,glue1 #bab ,casting ,rod1 ,one-,piece1 #ei ,castings for ,engine ,pistons1 ,pipe ,caps ,used as1 #djh ,catamaran1 ,ice ,boat and1 #bg ,catapult1 #acb ,catch1 ,ball1 for ,cabinet ,doors1 #gb ,safety1 for ,flour ,bin1 #ded to ,hold ,two ,joining ,doors ,open1 #gg ,caterpillars on ,grapevines1 ,destroying1 #id ,cellar-,door ,holder1 #cd ,cement ,floors1 ,footstool for1 #aai ,cement1 ,shellac1 #ej ,center ,gauge1 ,prick-,punch1 #dec ,centering ,gauge1 #bec ,chain1 ,novelty1 #aia ,chair1 ,bottoms1 ,reinforcing1 #aia ,freezing ,basin to1 #dca ,head ,rest for1 #cji ,legs1 ,to ,fasten1 #bdc ,post1 ,repairing ,broken ,tenon on1 #chh ,repairing ,rocker on1 #aif ,rocker1 ,stop on1 for ,baby1 #aec ,rockers1 ,safety ,tips on1 #bif ,chair ,swing1 #ih ,chairs1 ,refinishing1 #cgf ,chalk ,trays1 ,covering for1 #bgd ,chart1 ,compass ,time1 #cgh ,cherry ,pitter1 #cji ,chickens1 ,tin ,can ,used for ,watering1 #add ,child's ,finger1 ,cutting ,tin ,ball from1 #dcf ,child's ,playhouse1 #bfe ,child's ,seat for ,theaters1 #dcg ,chime ,clock1 ,electric1 #ccb ,chinese ,pagoda1 #bgh ,chisel ,edges1 ,grinding1 #cbb ,chisel ,handle1 ,protector ,cap for1 #dcj ,chisel ,holder for ,whetting1 #cag ,chisel ,rack1 #bdh ,chopper1 ,poultry-,food1 #bia ,chopping ,block1 ,stick ,holder for1 #aia ,clamp1 ,detachable1 for ,stairway ,handrails #deb ,emergency1 #bjc ,picture-,frame and ,triangle1 #bcj ,used as ,vise1 #daj ,clapper1 ,whirligig1 #dec ,cleaner1 ,cane-,seat1 #cah for ,brass1 #aib for ,canvas ,shoes1 #bhi ,lamp-,chimney1 #abe ,wall-,paper1 #bff1 #bgc ,cleaning an ,oilstone1 #bcg ,jewelry1 ,how to1 #bhg ,brass ,articles1 #cge ,clothes by ,boiling ,them1 #bhi ,dirt from ,tufts in ,upholstering1 #age ,gold and ,platinum1 #aia ,painted or ,frescoed ,walls1 #ahg ,pearl ,articles1 #acc ,steel of ,grease and ,stains1 #bci ,cleaning ,bath for ,silverware1 #cee ,cleats on ,boards1 ,substitute for1 #cbb ,clips to ,hold ,magazine ,pages ,together1 #ajc ,clock1 ,electric ,chime1 #ccb ,repairing ,worn ,escapement ,wheel of #gb ,closet1 ,bookcase or1 ,portable and ,folding1 #bif ,closet ,holders for ,linen1 #aib ,cloth1 ,delicate1 ,removing1 ,perspiration ,stains from1 #dad ,removing ,acid ,stains from1 #aif ,clothes1 ,cleaning by ,boiling1 #bhi ,clothes ,peg1 ,cork-,covered1 #ahb ,wood1 #djf ,clothes ,rack1 #aff ,clothesline1 ,double1 ,supporter for1 #bhh for ,small ,goods1 #aid ,hanging ,taut1 #dea ,clothesline ,posts1 ,folding ,arms for1 #cid ,clothesline ,reel1 #bdi ,clothesline ,reel1 ,homemade1 #dbc ,clothespin ,bag1 #db ,clothespin1 ,wire1 #chg ,clothing1 ,to ,remove ,grease from1 #ajb ,to ,remove ,rust ,stains from1 #agd ,coaster ,brake1 ,repairing1 #dbb ,coaster1 ,homemade ,roller1 #aei ,coasting ,bobsled1 ,four-,passenger1 #bd ,coat and ,trousers ,hangers1 #ddb ,coil ,springs1 ,small1 ,how to ,make1 #aig ,coil1 ,water-,heating1 in ,furnace ,pipe1 #bid ,coils1 ,induction1 ,testing ,out1 #ai ,coin ,box1 ,mystery1 #djb ,coin1 ,worn1 ,reading ,date of1 #cdg ,coins1 ,display ,holder for1 #ec ,cold-,chisel ,guide1 #ahi ,collar ,fasteners1 #ef ,collar ,holder1 ,combination ,tie ,rack and1 #cj ,coloring ,electric-,light ,globes1 #dch ,colors1 ,setting1 in ,fabrics1 #bbc ,comb ,cleaner1 #ahh ,compass1 ,operation of1 #chg ,pencil1 ,emergency1 #cd ,compass ,time ,chart1 #cgh ,condenser1 ,variable1 #abi ,connecting ,call ,bells1 ,simple ,methods of1 #cef ,construction of ,simple ,wireless ,telephone ,set3 ,part ,i1 #ccg ,part ,,ii1 #cda ,construction of ,small ,bell-,ringing ,transformer3 ,part ,i--,fundamental ,principles1 #cdh ,part ,,ii--,construction1 #ceb ,cooking ,food in ,paper1 #afh ,cooler for ,milk and ,butter1 #dje ,cooling ,tube for ,laboratory ,still1 #ahg ,coop1 ,poultry1 #bdg ,copying ,stand for ,photographic ,enlarging and ,reducing1 #bcb ,cord1 ,flexible1 ,adjuster for ,electric ,flatiron1 #djf ,cores for ,use in ,babbitt ,metal1 #cjd ,cork1 ,large1 ,fitting in ,small ,bottle1 #cci ,removing1 from ,bottle1 #bie ,cork ,puller1 #agc1 #beb ,cork-,covered ,clothes ,peg1 #ahb ,corks-in-a-,box ,trick1 #cce ,corks1 ,to ,prevent ,sticking in ,bottle ,necks1 #agd ,corn ,sheller1 ,hand1 #cdg ,homemade1 #aej ,corner ,cleaner ,attached to ,scrubbing ,brush #ab ,corner ,joints1 ,picture-,frame1 #agf ,corners in ,steps1 ,broom for ,sweeping ,out1 #bie ,corrosion1 ,protecting ,binding ,posts on ,wet ,batteries from1 #beb ,costumer1 ,how to ,make1 #db ,couch-,cover ,corner1 ,tying ,rosette in1 #caj ,countersink for ,wood1 ,homemade1 #aed ,coupling1 ,shaft1 #cdg ,court-,plaster1 ,liquid1 #bdf ,cover1 ,detachable ,hinged1 for ,kettles1 #abc for ,bottle1 #dbj for ,magazines1 #cdd ,slide-,opening1 for ,plate ,holder1 #ajd ,cover ,strainer1 #adi ,covering for ,chalk ,trays1 #bgd ,covering for ,gas-,stove ,top1 #dbj ,cradle1 ,combination ,settee ,rocker and1 #df ,homemade1 #bgc ,crease in ,soft ,hat1 ,to ,keep1 #bed ,crochet ,hook1 #cbe ,croquet ,arches1 ,white ,rubber on1 #aba ,croquet ,mallets ,protected by ,metal ,rings1 #bbe ,croquet ,playing1 ,night1 #bea ,crystallization ,shown on ,screen1 #baf ,cucumbers1 ,raising on ,trellis1 #dde ,cup1 ,paper ,drinking1 #ahh ,paper ,drinking1 ,how to ,make1 #cdf ,curling-,iron ,heater1 #abf ,curtain ,hanger1 #bgd ,curtain ,stop1 #bif ,curtain1 ,stretching1 without ,frame1 #aeh ,cushion1 ,screen and ,storm-,door1 #dbb ,cuspidor ,carrier1 #bgi ,cut ,press1 ,homemade1 #cbg ,cut1 ,starting ,saw1 #beb ,cutter1 ,buttonhole1 #dad ,cutter for ,lace ,leather1 #cgf ,cutter ,made of ,wafer ,razor ,blade1 #bdj ,cyclemobile1 #ace ,cylinders1 ,small ,steam-,engine1 ,made from ,seamless ,brass ,tubing1 #cif ,dampness1 ,keeping ,out1 #acd ,dark1 ,locating ,droplight in1 #abc ,dark ,room1 ,brush ,hanger for1 #aef ,photographer's1 ,drying ,towels in1 #cca ,d',arsonval ,galvanometer1 #dae ,date of ,worn ,coin1 ,reading1 #cdg ,decorating ,candles1 #dbf ,decoration1 ,forcing ,fruit ,blossoms for1 #ab ,decorative ,wood ,panels1 #eh ,demagnetize a ,watch1 ,how to1 #bij ,demagnetizer1 ,watch1 ,how to ,make1 #aej ,dents in ,wood1 ,raising1 #cha ,desk1 ,sloping1 ,telephone ,stand for1 #aab ,develop ,roll ,film1 ,easy ,way to1 #dbe ,developing ,machine1 #bcf ,developing ,tray ,made of ,tin ,can1 #aba ,developing-,tray ,rocker1 #bbd ,dibble1 ,homemade1 #bdf ,die-and-,box ,trick1 #ada ,dip1 ,bright1 for ,metal1 #bej ,dip-,plating ,process1 #cbc ,dish or ,floor ,mop1 ,endless1 #bi ,dish ,washing1 ,summer1 #cef ,dishpan1 ,sink a ,substitute for1 #aig ,disk-,armature ,motor1 #ccf ,disk-,throwing ,pistol1 #bdd ,display1 ,flying ,model ,aeroplane for1 #cfa ,display ,holder for ,coins1 #ec ,displaying ,dye ,colors1 #bdd ,displaying ,magazines1 ,holders for1 #cbj ,dissolving ,coin ,trick1 #bgb ,distance ,chart for ,wireless ,stations1 #bfi ,distance ,marker for ,printing ,photographs1 #bbf ,distilling ,apparatus for ,water1 #aab ,dog1 ,chained1 ,exerciser for1 #aag ,dogs1 ,lathe1 #cai ,door1 ,double ,latch for1 #dea ,door ,fastener1 #afc ,door ,hinges1 ,locking ,screws in1 #ajb ,door ,knobs1 ,attaching to ,locks1 #cbb ,door ,stop1 #aeg ,doorbell ,alarm1 #afj ,doorbell1 ,musical1 #cbi ,doors1 ,two ,joining1 ,catch to ,hold ,open1 #gg ,doorway1 ,fastening ,portire ,pole in1 #bbg ,dory ,rudder1 ,holder for1 #fh ,dovetail ,joint1 ,laying ,out1 #bdg ,dowel-,turning ,tool1 #bhe ,drafts1 ,window ,ventilator to ,prevent1 #bdh ,draftsmen1 ,amateur1 ,combination ,tool for1 #cbd ,drawer1 ,automatically ,closing1 #agc ,combination ,lock for1 #afi ,ordinary ,table2 ,secret ,compartment in1 #cfd ,drawer ,guide1 ,nonsticking1 #chc ,drawers1 ,several1 ,locking with ,one ,lock1 #aja ,drawing ,instruments1 ,substitutes for1 #adf ,drawing ,pen1 ,to ,start ,ink ,flowing from1 #ddf ,dressing1 ,shoe1 ,waterproof1 #cbe ,drill ,press1 ,homemade1 #dca ,homemade ,hand1 #bdb on ,ordinary ,brace1 #dbg ,drill1 ,small ,vertical1 ,how to ,make1 #dbf ,to ,prevent from ,catching as ,it ,passes through ,metal1 #bf ,drilling ,thin ,metal1 #djf ,drinking ,cup1 ,paper1 #ahh ,paper1 ,how to ,make1 #cdf ,drinking ,glasses1 ,separating1 #afd ,drinking ,tube1 #ib ,drip-,pan ,alarm1 #agh ,drip ,pan1 ,locating ,under ,refrigerator1 #cjg ,driver1 ,screweye1 #bca ,driving ,screws1 #caj ,droplight1 ,locating in ,dark1 #abc ,dropper and ,cork for ,medicine ,bottles1 #bdh ,dry and ,warm ,climates1 ,refrigerator for1 #ceg ,dry ,batteries1 ,preserving1 #aib ,renewing1 #chb ,testing1 #bff ,dry ,cell1 ,how to ,make1 #dba ,drying ,seeds1 #bhh ,drying ,small ,laundered ,articles1 #eh ,drying ,towels in ,photographer's ,dark ,room1 #cca ,dustpan1 ,long ,handle for1 #bdc ,dye ,colors1 ,displaying1 #bdd ,ear ,repair on a ,bucket1 #age ,ebony1 ,imitating on ,oak1 #aic ,edging ,flower ,beds1 #afe ,egg ,boiler1 #aij ,egg-,frying ,pan1 #chh ,egg ,separator1 ,homemade1 #aec ,eggs1 ,cracked1 ,boiling1 #cia ,lifter for ,removing from ,hot ,water #gh ,electric ,anemometer1 #cfg ,electric ,apparatus1 ,varnishing ,bases for1 #cbd ,electric ,bed ,warmer1 ,homemade1 #aed ,electric ,chime ,clock1 #ccb ,electric ,display for ,show ,window1 #eb ,electric ,fishing ,signal1 ,how to ,make1 #ih ,electric ,fixtures1 ,curved1 ,pulling ,wire through1 #agc ,electric ,flatiron1 ,flexible-,cord ,adjuster for1 #djf ,electric ,fountain1 #dja ,electric ,furnace1 ,how to ,make1 #cgc ,small1 ,how to ,make1 #bbi ,electric ,gas ,lighter1 #cgf ,electric ,heater1 ,how to ,make1 #djg ,electric ,horn1 #dji ,electric ,incubator1 #cdc ,electric ,indicator1 ,wind ,vane with1 ,how to ,build1 #cje ,electric ,lamp ,flasher1 ,how to ,make1 #cgj ,electric ,lamp ,reflector for ,target1 #aif ,electric ,light1 ,bicycle ,oil ,lamp ,changed to #gh ,electric ,light ,bracket1 ,swinging1 #bhd ,electric ,light ,bulb as ,barometer1 #bhj ,electric ,light ,globes1 ,coloring1 #dch ,electric ,light ,globes1 ,paper ,shades for1 #caf ,electric ,light ,mystery1 #afh ,electric ,lights ,controlled from ,two or ,more ,switches1 #bgf ,electric ,motor1 ,simple1 ,how to ,build1 #cei ,electric ,score ,board for ,indoor ,games1 #bgg ,electric ,shaving ,mug1 #che ,electric ,stirring-,machine1 #afe ,electric ,switch for ,exposing ,photographic ,printing-,papers1 #aha ,electric ,test for ,fixtures1 #bhh ,electric ,time ,light1 #cfb ,electric ,water ,heater1 #hi1 #bdc ,electrical ,apparatus-- ,alarm to ,designate ,filled ,storage ,battery1 #bec ,armatures for ,small ,motors1 #abd ,bed ,warmer1 ,homemade1 #aed ,bell1 ,continuously ,ringing1 ,how to ,make1 #cha ,bell-,ringing ,transformer1 ,construction of ,small1 #cdh1 #ceb ,disk-,armature ,motor1 #ccf ,doorbell ,alarm1 #afj ,door ,lock1 ,combination ,electrically ,operated1 #aaj ,dry ,cell1 ,how to ,make a1 #dba ,electric ,display for ,show ,window1 #eb ,electric ,fishing ,signal1 #ih ,electric ,stirring ,machine1 #afe ,electric ,water ,heater1 #hi ,electrotype ,stamp1 ,how to ,make an1 #dai ,galvanometer1 ,d',arsonval1 #dae ,galvanometer1 ,simple1 ,how to ,construct a1 #chi ,fire and ,burglar ,alarm1 ,how to ,make a1 #daa ,holding ,small ,armatures for ,winding1 #aah ,musical ,doorbell1 #cbi ,pocket ,direct-,current ,voltmeter1 #cig ,quickly ,made ,rheostat1 #agh ,reversing ,switch for ,small ,motors1 #cgh ,rheostat1 ,how to ,make a ,small1 #cic ,rotary ,tuning ,coil1 #cgb ,series ,motor1 ,how to ,make a ,small1 #djc ,simple ,methods of ,connecting ,call ,bells1 #cef ,small ,shocking ,machine1 #cfc ,telegraph ,sounder1 ,homemade1 #aai ,temperature ,alarm1 #cde ,variable ,condenser1 #abi ,vibrator for ,spark ,coil1 #cji ,wet ,battery1 ,homemade1 #cdj ,wire ,expansion ,meter1 #daj ,wireless ,telephone ,set1 ,construction of ,simple1 #ccg1 #cda ,electrical ,contacts1 ,cartridge ,shells ,used for1 #bhe ,electrical ,testing ,instrument for ,experimenters1 #cbh ,electrically ,ignited ,flash ,light for ,making ,photographs1 #bci ,electrically ,operated ,camera ,shutter1 #bcd ,electrically ,operated ,door ,lock1 ,combination1 #aaj ,electrodes1 ,furnace1 of ,lead ,pencils1 #dda ,electrolytic ,interrupter1 ,how to ,make1 #bda ,electroplating1 ,inlaying-,metals by1 #aga ,electroplating without a ,tank1 #bcd ,electrotype ,stamp1 ,how to ,make1 #dai ,ellipsograph1 ,homemade1 #dbi ,emboss ,stationery1 ,how to1 #ded ,embossed ,letters1 ,air ,pencil to ,make1 #bi ,emery-,cloth ,holder1 #chf ,engine1 ,homemade ,steam-,turbine1 #ahj ,engine ,pistons1 ,pipe ,caps ,used as ,castings for1 #djh ,engine1 ,thermo1 ,atmospheric1 #abj ,enlarging ,camera1 ,homemade1 #bai ,enlarging ,photographs1 #bag ,enlarging ,pictures1 #bfi ,envelope and ,stamp ,moistener1 #dca ,envelope1 ,special1 ,to ,make1 #fg ,eraser ,holder1 #age ,eraser1 ,ink1 #cie ,escapement ,wheel of ,clock1 ,repairing ,worn #gb ,exerciser for a ,chained ,dog1 #aag ,exerciser1 ,homemade1 #bii ,expansion ,meter1 ,wire1 #daj ,experiment1 ,interesting1 #cjb ,interesting ,vacuum1 #bej ,experimenters1 ,electrical ,testing ,instrument for1 #cbh ,experiments with ,camphor1 #cia ,exterior ,sliding ,fly ,screen1 #bca ,extracting a ,broken ,screw1 #acd ,extractor1 ,sliver1 #bej ,eye ,shield for ,microscope1 #aec ,fabrics1 ,setting ,colors in1 #bbc ,falling-,blocks1 ,how to ,make1 #cib ,fastener1 ,door1 #afc ,bed-,cover1 #ee ,collar1 #ef ,fastening ,loose ,table ,legs1 #bhi ,fastening ,screws in ,tile and ,brick ,walls1 #bib ,faucet1 ,water1 ,rubber ,bumper on1 #djf ,feeding-,table1 ,turn1 for ,birds1 #acg ,felt1 ,mending ,break in1 #aib ,fencing1 ,poultry1 ,stretching1 #bec ,ferris ,wheel1 ,playground1 #afa ,ferrule1 ,taper1 ,how to ,make1 #chj ,figures1 ,puzzle with1 #bhi ,file1 ,inexpensive1 #bhf ,filing ,flat ,surfaces1 #bif ,filing ,soft ,metals1 #ajb ,film-,developing ,machine1 ,adjustable1 #bjh ,film1 ,roll1 ,easy ,way to ,develop1 #dbe ,filter1 ,automatic1 #adh ,force1 ,laboratory1 #aai in a ,pump ,spout1 #ahi ,water1 #aji ,finder for ,cameras1 ,homemade ,direct-,view1 #ed ,finger ,marks1 ,removing from ,books1 #bjj ,finger ,nail ,buffer1 #cbb ,finger ,protection on ,laboratory ,vessels1 #agj ,finger-,ring ,trick1 #ef ,fire and ,burglar ,alarm1 ,how to ,make1 #daa ,fireflies1 ,theatrical ,night ,scene with ,appearance of1 #afb ,fish1 ,game1 ,attractor for1 #ig ,preventing ,loss of1 from ,covered ,baskets1 #bjh ,to ,hold ,while ,removing ,scales1 #cji ,fish ,rake1 #dbc ,fish-,scaling ,knife1 #ahb ,fish ,stringer1 #adf ,fishhooks1 ,carrier for1 #bfi ,carrying in1 ,cane ,pole1 #eh ,fishing1 ,live ,bait ,used in1 #bfa ,fishing-,rod ,joints1 ,holding ,together1 #bja ,fishing-,rod ,making and ,angling3 ,part ,i--,a ,one-,piece ,casting ,rod1 #ei ,part ,,ii--,various ,two and ,three-,piece ,rods1 #fi ,part ,,iii--,trout ,fishing with ,fly and ,bait #gc ,part ,,iv--,trout ,fishing with ,fly and ,bait #gi ,fishing ,signal1 ,electric1 ,how to ,make1 #ih ,fishing1 ,trout1 with ,fly and ,bait1 #gc1 #gi ,fitting ,large ,cork in ,small ,bottle1 #cci ,five-,pointed ,star1 #bbf ,fixtures1 ,electric ,test for1 #bhh ,gas and ,electric1 ,locating in ,dark #dcg ,flash ,light1 ,electrically ,ignited1 for ,making ,photographs1 #bci ,flash ,light ,telegraph on ,kite ,line1 #aee ,flasher1 ,electric ,lamp1 ,how to ,make1 #cgj ,sunlight1 for ,garden1 #agi ,flashing ,hook1 #bdf ,flat ,surfaces1 ,filing1 #bif ,flatiron1 ,electric1 ,flexible-,cord ,adjuster for1 #djf ,flatiron ,holder1 ,ornamental ,metal1 #aej ,floor or ,dish ,mop1 ,endless1 #bi ,floor ,polisher1 ,homemade1 #abe ,floor ,push ,button1 #add ,flour ,bin1 ,safety ,catch for1 #ded ,flower ,beds1 ,edging1 #afe ,flower ,trellis1 ,umbrella ,used as1 #afd ,flowers1 ,preserving1 in ,color and ,form1 #abg ,flutter ,ring1 ,how to ,make1 #ajj ,flying ,model ,aeroplane for ,display1 #cfa ,flymobile1 ,how to ,make1 #aci ,flypaper ,holder1 #dbc ,folding ,arms for ,clothesline ,posts1 #cid ,folding ,bookrack1 #cie ,food1 ,cooking1 in ,paper1 #afh ,food1 ,to ,keep ,ants ,away from1 #cfa ,foot ,boats1 ,how to ,make1 #aff ,footstool for ,cement ,floors1 #aai ,form1 ,stocking-,stretcher1 #aij ,fortune ,teller1 ,mystic1 #cb ,fountain ,attachment for ,ordinary ,pen1 #cbf ,fountain1 ,electric1 #dja ,fountain for ,ordinary ,pen1 #agc ,fountain-,pen ,barrels1 ,mending ,broken1 #ddb ,fountain ,pen1 ,homemade1 #id ,frame for ,printing ,post ,cards from ,negatives1 #agj ,frames1 ,small ,mitered1 ,gluing1 #aic ,freezing ,basin to ,chair1 #dca ,freezing1 ,to ,prevent ,poultry ,water from1 #cee ,frosting ,brass1 #ahe ,frosting ,glass1 #bdc ,fruit ,blossoms for ,decoration1 ,forcing1 #ab ,fruit-,jar ,opener1 #bgb ,fruit ,jars1 ,screw-,top1 ,opening1 #abe ,fruit ,presser1 #bgi ,fruit ,stemmer1 #id ,funnel1 ,automatic ,valve for1 #cag ,furnace1 ,electric1 ,how to ,make1 #cgc ,furnace ,electrodes of ,lead ,pencils1 #dda ,furnace ,pipe1 ,water-,heating ,coil in1 #bid ,furnace1 ,small ,electric1 ,how to ,make1 #bbi ,furnishings1 ,camp1 #ic ,furniture-- ,bedroom ,cabinet1 #afc ,bookrack1 #bfa ,chair ,swing1 #ih ,combination ,settee ,rocker and ,cradle1 #df ,costumer1 ,how to ,make1 #db ,double ,top for ,table1 #gh ,folding ,bookrack1 #cie ,footstool for ,cement ,floors1 #aai ,jardinire ,pedestal1 #bee ,leaded-,glass ,panels for1 #ddc ,mission1 ,joint for1 #chd ,reed--,a ,reed ,basket1 #beg ,shaving ,cabinet1 #bc ,woven-,top ,stool1 #bef ,furniture ,polish1 #ajb1 #deh for ,fine ,woods1 #baf ,fuse ,wire1 ,reducing ,amperage of1 #cbb ,galvanometer1 ,d',arsonval1 #dae ,simple1 ,how to ,construct1 #chi ,game1 ,bucket-,ball1 #bgj ,indoor ,baseball1 #bge ,played on ,ice1 #eb ,ring-,throwing1 #bhg ,indoor1 ,electric ,score ,board for1 #bgg ,garden-,bed ,scarecrow1 #cfe ,garden ,roller1 #bic ,garden1 ,sunlight ,flasher for1 #agi ,gas and ,electric ,fixtures1 ,locating in ,dark1 #dcg ,gas ,generator1 ,laboratory1 #aah ,gas ,lighter1 ,electric1 #cgf ,gas ,pipe1 ,paper1 #bfb ,gas ,stove ,top1 ,covering for1 #dbj ,gasoline ,consumption of ,automobile1 ,to ,reduce1 #dcf ,gate1 ,double-,swing1 with ,common ,hinge1 #ai ,gate ,fasteners1 #cif ,gate1 ,self-,closing1 #baa ,gauge1 ,attachment for ,pocket ,rule1 #bcc ,centering1 #bec ,homemade ,marking1 #bid ,prick-,punch ,center1 #dec ,rule1 #dei ,gear-,cutting ,machine1 #dbd ,generator1 ,gas1 ,laboratory1 #aah ,geometric ,principle ,in ,line ,division1 #cbf ,glass ,bottle1 ,cutting1 #ahf ,glass ,breaker1 #bia ,glass1 ,frosting1 #bdc ,removing ,calcium ,deposits on1 #ahi ,removing ,paint from1 #bih ,glasses1 ,drinking1 ,separating1 #afd ,trick ,bottles and1 #dfj ,glaziers' ,points1 ,substitute for1 #bic ,glider1 ,ice1 #ca ,monoplane1 ,how to ,make1 #aae ,paper1 ,that ,loops the ,loop1 #aji ,tandem ,monoplane1 #aac ,glue1 ,casein1 #bab ,glue-,spreader ,holder1 #aec ,gluing ,small ,mitered ,frames1 #aic ,go-,cart1 ,runner for1 #bhg ,gold and ,platinum1 ,cleaning1 #aia ,graduate ,holder1 #bah ,graduate1 ,homemade1 #aib ,graduates1 ,renewing ,markings on1 #caf ,graining ,tools1 ,homemade1 #bjf ,grape ,arbor ,built of ,poles1 #ab ,grapevines1 ,destroying ,caterpillars on1 #id ,grass ,rake1 #aif ,grease1 ,removing from ,paint1 #aeg ,to ,remove from ,clothing1 #ajb ,green-,corn ,holder1 #afg ,grinder1 ,kraut and ,root1 #big ,grinding a ,plane ,iron1 ,guide for1 #bgi ,grinding ,chisel ,edges1 #cbb ,grinding ,scissors1 #adh ,grindstone1 ,scraping ,surplus ,water ,off on1 #ahh ,guard1 ,pruning-,saw1 #aig ,guide1 ,cold-,chisel1 #ahi for ,grinding a ,plane ,iron1 #bgi for ,making ,buttonholes1 #bfd for ,mill ,file1 #cba ,guide ,ropes on ,bobsled1 #aee ,guides1 ,window-,shade1 #bhf ,gun1 ,pea-,shooting1 #dch ,gunstocks1 ,polishing1 #deb ,hacksaw ,frame1 ,adjustable1 #afc ,homemade1 #dbf ,hairpin1 ,fancy1 ,lock for1 #aaj ,hammer1 ,double-,claw1 for ,pulling ,nails ,straight1 #acd ,hammock1 ,to ,tie1 #bhf ,hand ,drill ,press1 ,homemade1 #bdb ,hand ,hoe1 #adg ,handbag ,lock1 #chf ,handballs1 ,inflating1 #cfe ,handle1 ,attachment for ,sickle1 #aid ,long1 for ,dustpan1 #bdc ,new ,pail-,cover1 #agg ,scraper1 #bbg ,hunting-,knife1 #agg ,handrails1 ,stairway1 ,detachable ,clamp for1 #deb ,hanger1 ,curtain1 #bgd for the ,camp1 #aja ,kitchen ,utensil1 #ajj ,hangers1 ,coat and ,trousers1 #ddb for ,barn ,tools1 #aee ,hanging ,vase1 #ajb ,hat ,hanger1 #chh ,hat ,sweatband1 ,reducing ,size of1 #acb ,head ,rest for ,chair1 #cji ,heater1 ,curling ,iron1 #abf ,electric1 ,how to ,make1 #djg ,electric ,water1 #hi ,heel ,plates1 #bej ,heliograph1 ,how to ,make1 #ahc ,hindoo ,sand ,trick1 #cjh ,hinge1 ,small ,spring1 #bia ,strap1 ,applying1 #bhj with ,wide ,swing1 #deb ,hinges1 ,door1 ,locking ,screws in1 #ajb for ,boxes1 ,homemade1 #ajj ,homemade1 #ceh ,used to ,substitute ,night ,bolt1 #ccd ,hoe1 ,hand1 #adg ,pointed ,end on1 #deh ,holder1 ,broom1 ,another1 #ii ,candle-,shade1 #bej ,cellar-,door1 #cd for ,books in a ,case1 #bdg for ,garden-,hose ,nozzle1 #beb for ,loose ,window ,glass1 #adi for ,milk ,card1 #agj for ,set of ,sadirons1 #bic for ,skates while ,sharpening1 #ed ,green-,corn1 #afg ,milk-,ticket1 #bea ,nursing-,bottle1 #bea ,paper-,bag1 #bgd ,pen and ,brush1 #bhg ,pencil1 #bij ,umbrella1 for ,display ,purposes1 #agj ,washbasin1 #bhi ,holders for ,displaying ,magazines1 #cbj ,hole1 ,boring-,clean-,edged1 #djf ,long1 ,boring1 #dbj ,home ,accounts1 ,way to ,keep1 #bhb ,hook1 ,crochet1 #cbe ,flashing1 #bdf ,key-,holder1 #adg ,hooks1 ,homemade ,snap1 #bdh ,horn ,candle ,sconce1 #bih ,horn1 ,electric1 #dji ,mechanical ,bicycle1 #aie ,hose ,attachment for ,watering ,window ,plants1 #bih ,hose ,nozzle1 #bdb ,hose-,nozzle ,handle1 #dba ,hose ,reel1 ,substitute for1 #cfi ,hot ,dish1 ,holding ,spoon on1 #dcg ,houses ,made of ,poles1 #he ,hulling ,walnuts1 #afb1 #bie ,humidity ,indicator1 ,how to ,make1 #cfj ,humidor1 ,how to ,make1 #acf ,hunting-,knife ,handles1 #agg ,hurdle1 ,how to ,make1 #ade ,hydroelectric-,power ,plant1 ,small1 #cad ,hydrometer1 ,homemade1 #def ,ice ,boat and ,catamaran1 #bg ,ice-,box ,lights1 ,automatically ,controlled1 #aid ,ice ,boxes1 ,to ,remove ,odors from1 #ajj ,ice1 ,creeper for ,shoe ,heels1 #abd ,game ,played on1 #eb ,glider1 #ca ,pushmobile ,racer for1 #dbh ,illuminating-an ,outside ,thermometer1 #abb ,illusion1 ,optical1 #cde ,imitating ,ebony on ,oak1 #aic ,incubator1 ,electric1 #cdc ,to ,double ,capacity of1 #deg ,indicator1 ,humidity1 ,how to ,make1 #cfj ,polarity1 #cif ,indoor ,games1 ,baseball ,game1 #bge ,bucket-,ball ,game1 #bgj ,electric ,score ,board for1 #bgg ,ring-,throwing ,game1 #bhg ,induction ,coils1 ,testing ,out1 #ai ,inexpensive ,file1 #bhf ,inflating ,handballs1 #cfe ,inflating ,toy ,balloons1 #afg ,ink ,bottle1 ,pen ,rack on1 #adc ,ink ,eraser1 #cie ,ink ,stains1 ,removing from ,book ,leaves1 #dah ,ink1 ,to ,start ,flowing from ,drawing-,pen1 #ddf ,inkstand1 ,mission ,style1 #cha ,tilting1 #cjj ,inkwell and ,penholder1 #bhc ,inkwell ,stopper1 #aif ,inlaying ,metals by ,electroplating1 #aga ,insect-,proof ,poultry ,roost1 #dbb ,iodine ,stains1 ,removing1 #ee ,iron ,holder ,knob1 ,substitute for1 #chh ,iron1 ,how to ,nickel or ,silverplate by ,friction1 #bgb ,ironing-,board ,holder1 #cjb ,ivory1 ,bleaching1 #age ,jardinire ,pedestal1 #bee ,jelly-,straining ,stand1 #chb ,jewelry1 ,how to ,clean1 #bhg ,jig-,saw ,blades1 #ddb ,joints1 for ,cabinet ,work1 #bea for ,mission ,furniture1 #chd for ,model ,aeroplane1 #bge ,tenoned1 ,how to ,lock1 #cci ,kettle-,handle ,support1 #di ,kettle ,handle1 ,to ,protect from ,heat1 #add ,kettles1 ,detachable ,hinged ,cover for1 #abc ,key-,holder ,hook1 #adg ,keyhole1 ,light in1 #aad ,kitchen ,utensil-- ,baking-,pan ,shoes1 ,adjustable1 #abi ,bottle-,cap ,lifter1 #aie ,broom ,holder1 #ii ,cherry ,pitter1 #cji ,cork ,puller1 #agc1 #beb ,cover for a ,bottle1 #dbj ,cover ,strainer1 #adi ,egg ,boiler #aij ,egg-,frying ,pan1 #chh ,egg ,separator1 ,homemade #aec ,fish-,scaling ,knife1 #ahb ,fruit ,jar ,opener1 #bgb ,fruit ,stemmer1 #id ,grinder1 ,kraut and ,root #big ,hanger for1 #ajj ,kettle ,handle1 ,protecting from ,heat1 #add ,kettle-,handle ,support1 #di ,kettles1 ,detachable ,hinged ,cover for1 #abc ,knife ,holder on ,frying ,pan1 #bie ,lamp-,chimney ,cleaner1 #abe ,lard and ,fruit ,presser1 #bgi ,lifter for ,removing ,eggs from ,hot ,water1 #gh ,nutcracker1 ,adjustable1 #aja ,opening ,screw-,top ,fruit ,jars1 #abe ,pail-,cover ,handle1 ,new1 #agg ,potato ,peeler1 #dbe ,scraper for1 #adg ,scrubbing ,brush1 ,corner ,cleaner ,attached to1 #ab ,skimmer for ,bottled ,milk1 #ceh ,skimming-,spoon1 #cia ,soap ,shake1 #age ,steam1 ,opening for1 in ,utensil ,cover1 #bhh ,strainer for ,milk ,pail1 #ec ,tablespoon ,end ,used as ,lemon ,squeezer1 #bbe ,vegetable ,slicer1 #bed ,kite1 ,aeroplane1 #aaa ,kite ,line1 ,cutaway for ,toy ,parachutes1 #cjh ,flash-,light ,telegraph on1 #aee ,traveler1 #bbh ,toy ,parachute ,cut-,away for1 #cgb ,kite1 ,war1 ,how to ,make1 #ajh ,knife1 ,fish-,scaling1 #ahb ,knife ,handle1 ,broken1 ,repairing1 #bbi ,knife ,holder on a ,frying ,pan1 #bie ,knife1 ,homemade ,palette1 #baa ,knife1 ,to ,make ,open ,easily1 #cdg ,knives and ,glasses1 ,trick with1 #bbg ,kraut and ,root ,grinder1 #big ,labels1 ,old1 ,to ,make ,scratch ,pads of1 #djf ,laboratory ,force ,filter1 #aai ,laboratory ,gas ,generator1 #aah ,laboratory ,still1 ,cooling ,tube for1 #ahg ,laboratory ,vessels1 ,finger ,protection on1 #agj ,laboratory1 ,wash ,bottle for ,use in1 #deh ,lamp1 ,bicycle ,oil1 ,changed to ,electric ,light #gh ,lamp ,chimney ,cleaner1 #abe ,lamp ,deception1 ,wireless-,lighted1 #bfj ,lamp ,flasher1 ,electric1 ,how to ,make1 #cgj ,landing for ,small ,boats1 #bcg ,lantern for ,camp1 #bgf ,lantern for ,spot and ,colored ,lights1 #bji ,lantern ,slide ,binding ,machine1 #bjg ,lantern ,slides1 ,advertising1 ,how to ,make1 #dag ,lard and ,fruit ,presser1 #bgi ,large ,hole in ,small ,piece of ,paper1 #cag ,latch1 ,double1 for ,door1 #dea ,lathe1 ,amateur ,mechanics' ,combination1 #ddg ,bench1 #bb ,dogs1 #cai ,filing ,small ,rods in1 #dad ,sander ,mandrel for1 #chh ,wood1 ,how to ,make1 #dcd ,laundered ,articles1 ,drying ,small1 #eh ,laundry1 ,how to ,make ,copper ,stencil for ,marking1 #bii ,lawn ,mower1 ,lighting1 for ,use at ,night1 #caj ,lawn ,sprinkler1 ,homemade1 #cff ,lawn ,sprinkling1 ,nozzle ,angle for1 #cef ,lawn ,swing1 ,anchor ,posts for1 #adh ,lawn-,tennis ,marker1 #bee ,laying ,out a ,dovetail ,joint1 #bdg ,lead ,pencils1 ,furnace ,electrodes of1 #dda ,lead ,pipe1 ,painting1 #age ,leaded-,glass ,panels for ,furniture1 #ddc ,leak in a ,canoe1 ,to ,repair1 #adi ,leather1 ,lace1 ,cutter for1 #cgf ,leather ,punch1 ,homemade1 #deb ,leather ,punch1 ,pipe ,used as1 #ach ,leather1 ,tan1 ,to ,color ,black1 #agd ,leather ,work1 ,arts-,crafts1 #dcb1 #dci ,leaves1 ,falling1 in ,nature ,scene1 #djj ,lemon ,squeezer1 ,tablespoon ,end ,used as1 #bbe ,letter ,scale1 ,how to ,make1 #cef ,lettering ,photographs1 #cbj ,letters1 ,embossed1 ,air ,pencil to ,make1 #bi ,letters for ,marking ,bags1 ,homemade1 #bed ,level of ,liquids1 in ,vessels1 ,to ,maintain ,constant1 #aed ,lifter for ,removing ,eggs from ,hot ,water1 #gh ,light1 ,bathroom1 ,to ,operate ,automatically #ef ,catching ,bugs ,attracted by1 #bfc ,electric ,time1 #cfb in a ,keyhole1 #aad ,ice-,box1 ,automatically ,controlled1 #aid ,spot and ,colored1 ,lantern for1 #bji ,lighting a ,basement ,light1 #aef ,lighting a ,lawn ,mower for ,use at ,night1 #caj ,lighting a ,room for ,making ,photographs1 #abc ,line ,division1 ,geometric ,principle in1 #cbf ,linen1 ,closet ,holders for1 #aib ,liquid ,court-,plaster1 #bdf ,liquids1 ,heavy1 ,vent for ,pouring1 #chg ,liquids in ,vessels1 ,to ,maintain ,constant ,level of1 #aed ,lock1 ,common1 ,making ,less ,pickable1 #agd ,door1 ,combination ,electrically ,operated1 #aaj for a ,drawer1 ,combination1 #afi for ,fancy ,hairpin1 #aaj ,handbag1 #chf ,window1 #cbj ,lock ,keeper1 ,broken1 ,repair for1 #bjh ,locking ,extension ,table1 ,window ,catch ,used for1 #db ,locking ,screws in ,door ,hinges1 #ajb ,locking ,several ,drawers with ,one ,lock1 #aja ,locks1 ,attaching ,door ,knobs to1 #cbb ,loom1 ,camp1 #ajg ,loose-,leaf ,pocket ,memorandum1 ,homemade1 #bhc ,loss of ,fish from ,covered ,baskets1 ,preventing1 #bjh ,machine for ,sketching ,pictures1 #f ,machine ,screws1 ,small1 ,how to ,start1 #afi ,machinery1 ,oiling ,bright ,parts of1 #bdh ,magazine ,pages1 ,clips for ,holding ,together1 #ajc ,magazines1 ,binding1 #ej ,cover for1 #cdd ,holders for ,displaying1 #cbj ,magic ,change ,card1 #acc ,magic ,string1 #afe ,magnetic-,suspension ,pendulum1 #ajd ,mailing ,tube1 ,homemade1 #cgf ,securing ,papers in1 #ahg ,mandrel1 ,sander1 for ,lathe1 #chh ,mantel ,picture ,frames ,made in ,plaster1 #bbf ,marble1 ,repairing1 #ccf ,marker1 ,lawn-,tennis1 #bee ,marking ,bags1 ,homemade ,letters for1 #bed ,marking ,gauge1 ,homemade1 #bid ,markings on ,graduates1 ,renewing1 #caf ,marks from ,basting ,threads on ,wool1 ,preventing1 #ef ,match-,box ,holder1 ,safety1 #dah ,match ,box1 ,self-,feeding1 #cce ,match ,holder1 #dei ,match ,safe to ,deliver ,one ,match at a ,time1 #bhe ,maulstick ,used as ,ruler1 #dea ,measuring ,length of ,wire ,wound on ,spool1 #cfe ,meat ,saw and ,knife1 ,combination1 #dji ,mechanical ,aid to ,singers1 #bjf ,mechanical ,bicycle ,horn1 #aie ,mechanical ,camera1 #bcc ,medicine ,bottles1 ,dropper and ,cork for1 #bdh ,time ,indicator for1 #ach ,medicine-,spoon ,holder1 #bie ,mending a ,break in ,felt1 #aib ,merry-,go-,round ,pole1 #afb ,merry-,go-,round1 ,skating1 #eg ,metal1 ,bright ,dip for1 #bej ,metal ,polish1 #fh ,metal ,rings1 ,croquet ,mallets ,protected by1 #bbe ,metal1 ,thin1 ,drilling1 #djf ,metals1 ,inlaying1 by ,electroplating1 #aga ,metals1 ,soft1 ,filing1 #ajb ,meter1 ,water1 ,homemade1 #dh ,meter1 ,wire ,expansion1 #daj ,microscope1 ,eye ,shield for1 #aec ,mildew on ,canvas1 ,preventing1 #bdg ,mile-,o-,view ,camera1 #bac ,milk and ,butter1 ,cooler for1 #dje ,milk-,bottle ,carrier1 #ajg ,milk-,bottle ,tray1 #bce ,milk1 ,bottled1 ,skimmer for1 #ceh ,milk ,card1 ,holder for1 #agj ,milk ,pail1 ,strainer for1 #ec ,milk ,stool1 #chd ,milk-,ticket ,holder1 #bea ,mill ,file1 ,guides for1 #cba ,mind-,reading ,effect with ,cards1 #bi ,mirror an ,aid in ,rowing a ,boat1 #aba ,mirror ,hinged to ,window ,casing1 #cee ,mission ,frame for an ,alarm ,clock1 #bgg ,mission ,furniture1 ,joint for1 #chd ,mission-,style ,inkstand1 #cha ,miter ,box1 ,picture-,frame1 ,homemade1 #dbh ,mixing ,sulphuric ,acid1 #bgh ,model ,aeroplane1 ,flying1 for ,display1 #cfa ,joints for1 #bge ,model ,boat1 with ,aerial ,propeller1 #bjg ,steam-,turbine #cbc ,model ,work1 ,bearings for1 #bch ,moistener1 ,envelope and ,stamp1 #dca ,stamp1 #cbj ,molding-,sawing ,block ,used on ,bench1 #djh ,moles1 ,to ,prevent from ,damaging ,growing ,seeds1 #ahb ,monorail ,sled1 ,how to ,make1 #ej ,mop1 ,endless ,dish or ,floor1 #bi ,mop ,wringer1 ,how to ,make1 #aga ,mortises1 ,guide for ,cutting1 #dbb ,mosquitoes1 ,trapping1 #adc ,motion-,picture1 ,camera1 and1 ,projector1 ,homemade3 ,part ,i1 #aih ,part ,,ii1 #bjb ,part ,,iii1 #bjd ,motion-,picture ,machine1 ,simple1 #cba ,motor1 ,disk-,armature1 #ccf ,made of ,candles1 #di ,simple ,electric1 ,how to ,build1 #cei ,small ,series1 ,how to ,make1 #djc ,water1 ,how to ,make1 #cjc ,motorboat1 ,repairing ,bruised ,sides of1 #cfi ,motors1 ,prony ,brake for ,testing ,small1 #cb ,small1 ,armatures for1 #abd ,small1 ,reversing ,switch for1 #cgh ,mouse ,trap1 #agh1 #bbi ,multiplying ,attachment for ,camera1 #bba ,musical ,doorbell1 #cbi ,muskrat ,trap1 #bab ,mysteries1 ,tricks1 ,illusions1 etc4-- ,bottle-,opening ,trick1 #bbc ,card and ,coin ,trick1 #da ,changing ,pip on a ,card1 #fg ,corks-in-a-,box ,trick1 #cce ,die-and-,box ,trick1 #ada ,dissolving-,coin ,trick1 #bgb ,electric-,light ,mystery1 #afh ,finger-,ring ,trick1 #ef ,flutter ,ring1 #ajj ,hindoo ,sand ,trick1 #cjh ,lightning-,calculation ,trick1 #aja ,magic-,change ,card1 #acc ,magic ,string1 #afe ,mysterious ,revolving ,wheel1 #aeb ,mystic ,fortune ,teller1 #cb ,optical ,illusion1 #cde ,mysteries1 ,tricks1 ,illusions1 etc4--,q ,trick1 #cfj ,ring ,trick1 #cjj ,rubber-,band-,change ,trick1 #bhd ,string-and-,ball ,trick1 #bgc ,surprise ,water ,bottle1 #bah ,swinging-,pendulum ,trick1 #bhj ,trick ,bottles and ,glasses1 #dfj ,trick of ,taking ,dollar ,bill from ,apple1 #bfc ,trick with ,knives and ,glasses1 #bbg ,tricks ,performed with ,thumbs ,tied ,together1 #bha ,mystery ,coin ,box1 #djb ,mystery1 ,trunk1 #bfg ,mystic ,fortune ,teller1 #cb ,nail1 ,finishing1 ,to ,clinch1 #cd ,name1 ,writing ,reversed on ,paper ,placed on ,forehead1 #cib ,nature ,scene1 ,falling ,leaves in1 #djj ,needle and ,thread ,tray1 ,combination1 #gb ,needle ,box for ,talking ,machines1 #bfc ,needle for ,repairing ,screens1 #bjf ,needle for ,sewing ,burlap1 #aea ,needle-,spray ,nozzle1 #dah ,negative1 ,to ,hold in ,printing ,frame1 #bda ,newspaper ,holder1 ,clothespin1 #fh ,nickel or ,silverplate ,iron by ,friction1 ,how to1 #bgb ,night ,bolt1 ,hinges ,used to ,substitute1 #ccd ,night ,croquet ,playing1 #bea ,nonsticking ,drawer ,guide1 #chc ,nozzle ,angle for ,lawn ,sprinkling1 #cef ,nozzle1 ,garden-,hose1 ,holder for1 #beb ,hose1 #bdb ,needle-,spray1 #dah ,novelty ,chain1 #aia ,nursing-,bottle ,holder1 #bea ,nutcracker1 ,adjustable1 #aja ,nuts1 ,different-,size1 ,wrench for1 #cgi ,homemade ,wing1 #ddf ,wing1 ,how to ,make1 #ahb ,oak1 ,imitating ,ebony on1 #aic ,oar ,holder1 #afh ,oarlocks1 ,rope1 #bja ,odors1 ,to ,remove from ,ice ,boxes1 #ajj ,oil ,burner for ,cook ,stove1 #ade ,oilcloth1 ,to ,prevent from ,cracking1 #ach ,oiling ,bright ,parts of ,machinery1 #bdh ,oilstone1 ,cleaning1 #bcg ,repairing ,broken1 #bdi ,old-,oak ,stain1 #bbe ,opener1 ,fruit-,jar1 #bgb ,opening for ,air at ,top of ,shade1 #big ,opening for ,steam in ,utensil ,cover1 #bhh ,operation of ,compass1 #chg ,optical ,illusion1 #cde ,pad for ,percolator1 #cgg ,paddle-,wheel ,boat1 ,how to ,build1 #aje ,pagoda1 ,chinese1 #bgh ,pail ,cover ,handle1 ,new1 #agg ,pail ,hook for ,pitcher ,pump1 #bde ,pail1 ,live-,bait1 #agh ,pails1 ,carrying ,two in ,one ,hand1 #chb ,paint ,brushes1 ,care of1 #ahi ,paint1 ,preserving in ,open ,cans1 #chb ,protecting ,brush ,handles from1 #bid ,removing from ,glass1 #bih ,removing ,grease from1 #aeg ,painted or ,frescoed ,walls1 ,to ,clean1 #ahg ,painting ,lead ,pipe1 #age ,paints and ,pastes1 ,preserving1 #dah ,palette ,knife1 ,homemade1 #baa ,pan1 ,egg-,frying1 #chh ,panels1 ,decorative ,wood1 #eh ,leaded-,glass1 for ,furniture1 #ddc ,pantograph1 ,homemade1 #adb ,paper1 ,carbon1 ,renewing1 #cd ,paper ,drinking ,cup1 #ahh ,paper ,drinking ,cup1 ,how to ,make1 #cdf ,paper ,gas ,pipe1 #bfb ,paper ,glider ,that ,loops the ,loop1 #aji ,paper1 ,large ,hole in ,small ,piece of1 #cag ,paper ,perforator1 #djj ,paper ,shades for ,electric-,light ,globes1 #caf ,paper ,smoother and ,penwiper1 #cde ,paper ,transparent1 ,to ,make1 #aa ,paper-,bag ,holder1 #bgd ,paper-,pulp ,utensils1 ,mending1 #cge ,papers1 ,addressing ,roll of1 #cfi ,papers in ,mailing ,tube1 ,securing1 #ahg ,parachute ,cut-,away for ,kite ,lines1 ,toy1 #cgb ,partitions1 ,box1 #ded ,pearl ,articles1 ,cleaning1 #acc ,pea-,shooting ,gun1 #dch ,pedestal1 ,jardinire1 #bee ,peeler1 ,potato1 #dbe ,pen and ,brush ,holder1 #bhg ,pen1 ,ordinary1 ,fountain ,attachment for1 #cbf ,ordinary1 ,fountain for1 #agc ,substitute for1 #bgj ,pen ,rack on an ,ink ,bottle1 #adc ,pencil ,compass1 ,emergency1 #cd ,pencil ,holder1 #bij ,pencil ,rack1 #acb ,pencil ,sharpener1 #bcg ,pencil ,sharpener ,stick1 #ddf ,pencil ,sharpening ,guide1 #ceh ,pencil ,stubs1 ,use for1 #ajd ,pendulum1 ,magnetic-,suspension1 #ajd ,penholder1 ,inkwell and1 #bhc ,substitute1 #beb ,penwiper1 ,paper ,smoother and1 #cde ,percolator1 ,pad for1 #cgg ,perforator1 ,paper1 #djj ,perspiration ,stains1 ,removing from ,delicate ,cloth1 #dad ,photo ,printing1 ,timing1 #bde ,photo ,vignetter1 #bch ,photograph ,prints1 ,timing1 #cga ,photograph1 ,radium1 ,how to ,make1 #agb ,photographer's ,dark ,room1 ,drying ,towels in1 #cca ,photographic ,appliances and ,processes-- ,brush ,hanger for ,dark ,room1 #aef ,camera ,support1 #cbd ,developing ,machine1 #bcf ,developing ,tray ,made of ,tin ,can1 #aba ,developing ,tray ,rocker1 #bbd ,dull ,black for ,cameras1 #afc ,easy ,way to ,develop ,roll ,film1 #dbe ,electric ,stirring ,machine1 #afe ,electrically ,operated ,camera ,shutter1 #bcd ,film-,developing ,machine1 ,adjustable1 #bjh ,frame for ,printing ,post ,cards from ,negatives1 #agj ,holding ,prints in a ,liquid-,filled ,tray1 #cc ,homemade ,enlarging ,camera1 #bai ,homemade ,motion-,picture ,camera and ,projector1 #aih1 #bjb1 #bjd ,lighting a ,room for ,making ,photographs1 #abc ,mile-,o-,view ,camera1 #bac ,multiplying ,attachment for ,camera1 #bba ,photographic ,print ,washer1 #ig ,slide-,opening ,cover for ,plate ,holder1 #ajd ,stereoscopic ,pictures with1 ,ordinary ,camera1 #cdf ,tank ,development ,methods ,used in ,tray ,development1 #dbh ,telephoto ,attachment for ,hand ,camera1 #acf ,to ,hold ,negative in ,printing ,frame1 #bda ,trimming ,photographs1 #fh ,view ,finder1 ,direct1 for ,cameras1 #ed ,washing ,photographic ,prints1 #ib1 #afh ,photographic1 ,enlarging1 and1 ,reducing1 ,copying ,stand for1 #bcb ,printing1 ,frame11 ,attached ,back for1 #dac ,printing1 ,papers11 ,electric ,switch for ,exposing1 #aha ,print ,washer1 ,simple1 #ig ,prints1 ,washing1 #ib ,tray-,rocking ,stand1 #bbh ,worktable for ,small ,quarters1 #bae ,photographs1 ,distance ,marker for ,printing1 #bbf ,electrically1 ,ignited1 ,flash ,light for ,making1 #bci ,enlarging1 #bag ,lettering1 #cbj ,lighting ,room for ,making1 #abc ,spirit1 #cea ,submarine1 #cge ,trimming1 #fh ,picture ,frame and ,triangle ,clamp1 #bcj ,picture-,frame ,corner ,joints1 #agf ,picture-,frame ,miter ,box1 ,homemade1 #dbh ,picture ,frames1 ,mantel1 ,made in ,plaster1 #bbf ,pictures1 ,enlarging1 #bfi ,machine for ,sketching1 #f ,magazine1 ,transferring1 #aec ,stereoscopic1 with ,ordinary ,camera1 #cdf ,pin ,tray1 ,brass1 #bii ,pincushion for the ,arm1 #bhh ,pip1 ,changing1 on ,card1 #fg ,pipe ,caps ,used as ,castings for ,engine ,pistons #djh ,pipe1 ,connecting to ,sheet ,metal1 #bbb ,pipe ,used as ,leather ,punch1 #ach ,pipes1 ,frozen1 ,thawing ,out1 #chg ,pistol1 ,disk-,throwing1 #bdd ,pitter1 ,cherry1 #cji ,plane ,iron1 ,guide for ,grinding1 #bgi ,plane1 ,rabbet1 ,how to ,make1 #aeb ,plane-,table ,surveying1 #a ,planing1 ,arrow ,sticks1 #cai ,rough-,grain ,boards1 #bce ,thin ,boards1 ,bench ,stop for1 #bed ,plant ,shelf for ,window1 #cbd ,planting ,seeds in ,egg ,shells1 #cjg ,plants1 ,watering at ,roots1 #bhf ,window1 ,hose ,attachment for ,watering1 #bih ,plaster1 ,mantel ,picture ,frames1 ,made in1 #bbf ,plaster of ,paris1 ,retarder of1 #aie ,plate ,hangers1 #bcc ,plates1 ,heel1 #bej ,platinum1 ,gold and1 ,cleaning1 #aia ,playground ,ferris ,wheel1 #afa ,playhouse1 ,child's1 #bfe ,plots1 ,to ,enlarge or ,reduce1 #bb ,pocket for ,inside of ,book ,cover1 #bch ,pocket ,memorandum1 ,homemade ,loose-,leaf1 #bhc ,pocket ,rule1 ,gauge ,attachment for1 #bcc ,pocket1 ,utility ,bed1 ,home or ,traveling1 #djj ,pointed ,end on ,hoe1 #deh ,poison ,bottles1 ,simple ,way to ,mark1 #abf ,polarity ,indicator1 #cif ,pole1 ,bamboo1 ,uses for1 #agc ,pole1 ,merry-,go-,round1 #afb ,poles1 ,houses ,made of1 #he ,polish1 ,furniture1 #ajb1 #deh ,furniture1 for ,fine ,woods1 #baf ,metal1 #fh ,polisher1 ,floor1 ,homemade1 #abe ,polishing ,gunstocks1 #deb ,pop-,corn ,popper1 #abe ,popgun1 ,toy1 #bdj ,porch ,swing1 ,springs on ,chains of1 #dg ,portable and ,folding ,bookcase or ,closet1 #bif ,portire ,pole1 ,fastening in ,doorway1 #bbg ,post ,cards1 ,frame for ,printing from ,negatives1 #agj ,post1 ,removable1 #bgc ,postal ,cards1 ,wood1 #bib ,potato ,peeler1 #dbe ,potted ,plants1 ,adjustable ,rod for1 #cgi ,poultry ,coop1 #bdg ,poultry ,fencing1 ,stretching1 #bec ,poultry-,food ,chopper1 #bia ,poultry ,roost1 ,insect-,proof1 #dbb ,poultry ,shade1 #baa ,poultry ,water1 ,to ,prevent from ,freezing1 #cee ,poultry ,yards1 ,automatic ,watering ,system for1 #ff ,powder1 ,bug1 #deg ,power1 ,light1 ,windmill for1 #cjg ,power ,plant1 ,small ,hydroelectric1 #cad ,power1 ,revolving ,shaft ,without1 #bgd ,power ,windmill1 #caa ,preserving ,flowers in ,color and ,form1 #abg ,preserving ,paint in ,open ,cans1 #chb ,preserving ,paints and ,pastes1 #dah ,press1 ,homemade ,cut1 #cbg ,presser1 ,lard and ,fruit1 #bgi ,pressure1 ,relieving11 on ,heated ,canned ,foods for ,opening1 #db ,prick-,punch ,center ,gauge1 #dec ,printing ,frame1 ,to ,hold ,negative in1 #bda ,prints1 ,holding ,in ,liquid-,filled ,tray1 #cc ,photographic1 ,timing1 #cga ,photographic1 ,washing1 #ib1 #afh ,profiles1 ,aid in ,sketching1 #cad ,projecting ,protractor ,readings1 #aeg ,prony ,brake for ,testing ,small ,motors1 #cb ,propeller ,wheel ,attachment1 ,hand1 for ,rowboat1 #dac ,propellers for ,hand ,sled1 #ccd ,protection1 ,finger1 on ,laboratory ,vessels1 #agj ,protector ,cap for ,chisel ,handle1 #dcj ,protractor ,readings1 ,projecting1 #aeg ,provision ,box1 ,camp1 #ie ,pruning-,saw ,guard1 #aig ,puller1 ,staple1 #aif1 #bga ,pulling ,nails ,straight1 ,double-,claw ,hammer for1 #acd ,pulling ,wire through ,curved ,electric ,fixtures1 #agc ,pulse ,beats1 ,reading1 ,with ,sun's ,rays1 #abh ,pump1 ,pitcher1 ,pail ,hook for1 #bde ,pump ,spout1 ,filter in1 #ahi ,punch1 ,homemade ,leather1 #deb ,purse1 ,puzzle1 #bcf ,push ,button1 ,floor1 #add ,pushmobile ,race1 #acj ,pushmobile ,racer for ,ice1 #dbh ,putty1 ,how to ,preserve1 #ceh ,removing ,old1 #cjj ,puzzle1 ,purse1 #bcf ,spool-and-,ball1 #ddf with ,figures1 #bhi ,q ,trick1 #cfj ,rabbet ,plane1 ,how to ,make1 #aeb ,race1 ,pushmobile1 #acj ,rack1 ,chisel1 #bdh ,clothes1 #aff ,pencil1 #acb ,radium ,photograph1 ,how to ,make1 #agb ,raft1 ,swimming1 #bjj ,rake1 ,fish1 #dbc ,grass1 #aif ,razor ,blade1 ,wafer1 ,cutter ,made of1 #bdj ,razor ,blades1 ,discarded ,wafer1 ,use for1 #abd ,reading ,date of ,worn ,coin1 #cdg ,reducing ,amperage of ,fuse ,wire1 #cbb ,reed ,furniture--,a ,reed ,basket1 #beg ,reel1 ,clothesline1 #bdi ,homemade ,clothesline1 #dbc ,hose1 ,substitute for1 #cfi ,refinishing ,chairs1 #cgf ,reflector1 ,electric ,lamp1 for ,target1 #aif ,reflector for ,viewing ,scenery from ,car ,window1 #bab ,refrigerator for ,dry and ,warm ,climates1 #ceg ,refrigerator1 ,locating ,drip ,pan under1 #cjg ,reinforcing ,chair ,bottoms1 #aia ,removable ,post1 #bgc ,removing ,basketball from ,closed-,bottom ,receptacle1 #bff ,removing ,tight-,fitting ,can ,covers1 #cia ,renewing ,dry ,batteries1 #chb ,repairing1 ,broken ,lock ,keeper1 #bjh ,broken ,ball-,clasp ,purse1 #caf ,broken ,knife ,handle1 #bbi ,coaster ,brake1 #dbb ,worn ,stop ,cock1 #dad ,broken ,oilstone1 #bdi ,broken ,tenon on ,chair ,post1 #chh ,broken ,whip1 #cbf ,rocker on ,chair1 #aif ,worn1 ,escapement ,wheel of ,clock1 #gb ,worn ,thimble1 #cbf ,resistance-,wire ,connections1 ,small1 ,welding1 #aeh ,retarder for ,plaster of ,paris1 #aie ,reversing ,switch for ,small ,motors1 #cgh ,revolving ,shaft ,without ,power1 #bgd ,revolving ,wheel1 ,mysterious1 #aeb ,rheostat1 ,quickly ,made1 #agh ,small1 ,how to ,make1 #cic ,ring1 ,flutter1 ,how to ,make1 #ajj ,ring-,throwing ,game1 #bhg ,ring ,trick1 #cjj ,rings1 ,brass1 ,turning1 #djj ,rivet ,set1 ,homemade1 #deg ,riveting1 ,soldering and1 #dj ,robe1 ,automobile1 ,how to ,make1 #abb ,rocker1 ,developing-,tray1 #bbd ,rocker on ,chair1 ,repairing1 #aif ,rod1 ,adjustable1 for ,potted ,plants1 #cgi ,rod1 ,casting1 ,one-,piece1 #ei ,rods1 ,small1 ,filing in ,lathe1 #dad ,rods1 ,various ,two and ,three-,piece1 #fi ,roll of ,papers1 ,addressing1 #cfi ,roller ,coaster1 ,homemade1 #aei ,roller1 ,garden1 #bic ,roller1 ,homemade ,towel1 #bdi ,roller ,skate on ,bicycle ,wheel1 #bja ,roller ,skating1 ,beginner's ,helper for1 #abj ,rope ,oarlocks1 #bja ,rosette1 ,tying1 in ,couch-,cover ,corner1 #caj ,rotary ,tuning ,coil1 #cgb ,rowboat1 ,hand ,propeller-,wheel ,attachment for1 #dac ,rowing a ,boat1 ,mirror an ,aid in1 #aba ,rubber-,band-,change ,trick1 #bhd ,rubber ,stamp1 ,substitute for1 #ajb ,rubber1 ,white1 on ,croquet ,arches1 #aba ,rubbing ,slats for ,washing ,board1 #bfc ,rudder1 ,dory1 ,holder for1 #fh ,rule ,gauge1 #dei ,ruler1 ,maulstick ,used as1 #dea ,ruling ,blank ,books1 #bij ,runner for ,go-,cart1 #bhg ,rust and ,corrosion1 ,preserving ,shafting from1 #bef ,rust ,stains1 ,to ,remove from ,clothing1 #agd ,sack ,holder1 #acg ,sadirons1 ,holder for ,set of1 #bic ,safety ,catch for ,flour ,bin1 #ded ,safety ,pin1 ,anti-,tangle1 #bgb ,safety ,tips on ,chair ,rockers1 #bif ,safety ,match-,box ,holder1 #dah ,sail for a ,boy's ,wagon1 #acd ,sander ,mandrel for ,lathe1 #chh ,sandpapering ,machine1 ,emergency1 #bcf ,saw and ,knife1 ,combination ,meat1 #dji ,saw ,cut1 ,starting1 #beb ,sawbuck1 ,holding ,wood in1 #agg ,scale1 ,letter1 ,how to ,make1 #cef ,scales1 ,to ,hold ,fish while ,removing1 #cji ,scarecrow1 ,garden-,bed1 #cfe ,scene1 ,theatrical ,night1 ,with ,appearance of ,fireflies1 #afb ,scenery1 ,reflector for ,viewing from ,car ,window1 #bab ,scissors1 ,grinding1 #adh ,scissors ,sharpener1 #adc ,sconce1 ,horn ,candle1 #bih ,scorching1 ,to ,prevent ,baking ,ovens from1 #bih ,score ,board1 ,electric1 for ,indoor ,games1 #bgg ,scraper1 ,handle1 #bbg ,kitchen-,utensil1 #adg ,shoe1 #bed ,scratch ,pads of ,old ,labels1 ,to ,make1 #djf ,screen and ,storm-,door ,cushion1 #dbb ,screen1 ,crystallization ,shown on1 #baf ,screen-,door ,spring1 ,homemade1 #bah ,screen1 ,fly1 ,exterior ,sliding1 #bca ,screen1 ,tacking on ,frame1 #bif ,screens1 ,needle for ,repairing1 #bjf ,screw1 ,broken1 ,extracting1 #acd ,screw1 ,small ,vise1 ,how to ,make1 #bie ,screweye ,driver1 #bca ,screws1 ,driving1 #caj in ,tile and ,brick ,walls1 ,fastening #bib ,locking1 in ,door ,hinges1 #ajb ,small ,machine1 ,how to ,start1 #afi ,scrubbing ,brush1 ,corner ,cleaner ,attachment for1 #ab ,secret ,compartment in ,ordinary ,table ,drawer1 #cfd ,seed ,receptacle for ,bird ,cages1 #adg ,seeds1 ,drying1 #bhh ,growing1 ,to ,prevent ,moles from ,damaging1 #ahb in ,egg ,shells1 ,planting1 #cjg ,self-,feeding ,match ,box1 #cce ,settee ,rocker and ,cradle1 ,combination1 #df ,setting ,colors in ,fabrics1 #bbc ,sewing-,box1 ,window-,seat1 #ahf ,sewing ,burlap1 ,needle for1 #aea ,sextant1 ,simple1 #chj ,shade and ,awning1 ,combined1 #afd ,shade1 ,opening for ,air at ,top of1 #big ,paper1 for ,electric-,light ,globes1 #caf ,poultry1 #baa ,shade ,roller1 and ,curtain-,pole ,bracket1 #cah ,attached to ,upper ,window ,sash1 #bdf ,to ,prevent from ,unwinding #dbb ,shaft ,coupling1 #cdg ,shaft1 ,revolving1 ,without ,power1 #bgd ,shafting1 ,preserving from ,rust and ,corrosion1 #bef ,sharpener1 ,pencil1 #bcg ,sharpener1 ,scissors1 #adc ,shaving ,cabinet ,mounted on ,adjustable ,pedestal1 #bc ,shaving-,mug1 ,electric1 #che ,sheet ,metal1 ,connecting ,pipe to1 #bbb ,sheet ,music1 ,preparing for ,turning1 #cgb ,shelf1 ,cupboard-,door ,spice-,box1 #ahe ,easy ,way to ,make1 #bbj ,hinged1 ,telescoping ,support for1 #deg ,wire ,mesh ,used as1 #bej ,shellac ,cement1 #ej ,shellac1 ,stick1 ,how to ,make1 #cfi ,shellac1 ,to ,clean from ,brush1 #cai ,shocking ,machine1 ,small1 #cfc ,shoe ,dressing1 ,waterproof1 #cbe ,shoe ,hanger1 #dbe ,shoe ,heels1 ,ice ,creeper for1 #abd ,shoe ,pull ,made of ,eyelet1 #bib ,shoe ,scraper1 #bed ,shoes1 ,cleaning and ,polishing1 #bc ,shoes1 ,stretching ,tight-,fitting1 #cgg ,shoe-,shining ,stand1 #bdj ,shoestring ,end1 #bia ,show-,window ,attraction1 ,novel1 #aga ,show ,window1 ,electric ,display for1 #eb ,sickle1 ,handle ,attachment for1 #aid ,signal1 ,electric ,fishing1 ,how to ,make1 #ih ,silverware1 ,cleaning ,bath for1 #cee ,singers1 ,mechanical ,aid to1 #bjf ,sink a ,substitute for ,dishpan1 #aig ,siphon1 ,acid1 #bbb ,compensating1 #cif ,starting1 #ahe ,to ,start1 #deh ,skates1 ,holder for ,while ,sharpening1 #ed ,skates ,made of ,wood1 #cj ,skating ,merry-,go-,round1 #eg ,sketching ,pictures1 ,machine for1 #f ,sketching ,profiles1 ,aid in1 #cad ,ski ,staff1 ,how to ,make1 #ea ,skiff1 ,how to ,build1 #ah ,skimmer for ,bottled ,milk1 #ceh ,skimming ,spoon1 #cia ,skis1 ,back ,thrust ,prevented on1 #baf ,homemade1 #dbj ,sled1 ,hand1 ,propellers for1 #ccd ,monorail1 ,how to ,make1 #ej ,steering1 #eg ,sleepwalker1 ,alarm for1 #big ,slicer1 ,vegetable1 #bed ,slide-,opening ,cover for ,plate ,holder1 #ajd ,sliver ,extractor1 #bej ,smoking1 ,to ,prevent ,torch ,lights from1 #bgi ,snap ,hooks1 ,homemade1 #bdh ,snowball ,maker1 #dh ,snowball ,thrower1 #dg ,snowshoes1 ,how to ,make and ,use ,them3 ,part ,i--,shapes of ,snowshoes1 #ce ,part ,,ii--,making the ,shoe1 #dc ,snowshoes1 ,shapes of1 #ce ,soap ,shake1 #age ,soft ,hat1 ,to ,keep ,crease in1 #bed ,softening ,tone of ,talking ,machine1 #cbh ,soldering ,acid1 ,brush for ,applying1 #bhc ,soldering and ,riveting1 #dj ,soldering ,small ,work1 ,burner for1 #dah ,sounder for ,wireless-,telegraph ,messages1 #chd ,sounder1 ,telegraph1 ,homemade1 #aai ,spark ,coil1 ,vibrator for1 #cji ,spice-,box ,shelf1 ,cupboard-,door1 #ahe ,spirit ,photographs1 #cea ,splice for ,round ,belts1 #ddf ,splinter1 ,to ,remove from ,flesh1 #cai ,spool and ,ball ,puzzle1 #ddf ,spool1 ,non-,rolling1 #ee ,thread1 ,non-,rolling1 #bdj ,twine1 #aia ,wire ,wound on1 ,measuring ,length of1 #cfe ,holding on ,hot ,dish1 #dcg ,skimming1 #cia ,spot and ,colored ,lights1 ,lantern for1 #bji ,spring ,hinge1 ,small1 #bia ,spring1 ,homemade ,screen-,door1 #bah ,springboard1 #bce ,springs on ,chains of ,porch ,swing1 #dg ,springs1 ,small ,coil1 ,how to ,make1 #aig ,sprinkler1 ,homemade ,lawn1 #cff ,sprocket1 ,rear ,bicycle1 ,removing1 #dac ,squaring ,wood ,stock1 #ii ,stain1 ,brown1 for ,wood1 #ahi ,old-,oak1 #bbe ,stains1 ,acid1 ,removing from ,cloth1 #aif ,iodine1 ,removing1 #ee ,rust1 ,to ,remove from ,clothing1 #agd ,vegetable1 ,removing1 #agf ,stairway ,handrails1 ,detachable ,clamp for1 #deb ,stamp1 ,electrotype1 ,how to ,make1 #dai ,stamp ,moistener1 #cbj ,stand1 ,shoe-,shining1 #bdj ,telephone1 for ,sloping ,desk1 #aab ,washtub1 #ach ,staple ,puller1 #aif1 #bga ,star1 ,five-,pointed1 #bbf ,start ,small ,machine ,screws1 ,how to1 #afi ,stationery1 ,how to ,emboss1 #ded ,steam-,engine ,cylinders1 ,small1 ,made from ,seamless ,brass ,tubing1 #cif ,steam-,turbine ,boat1 ,model1 #cbc ,steam-,turbine ,engine1 ,homemade1 #ahj ,steel1 ,cleaning of ,grease and ,stains1 #bci ,steering ,sled1 ,a1 #eg ,stemmer1 ,fruit1 #id ,stencil1 ,copper1 for ,marking ,laundry1 ,how to ,make1 #bii ,stereoscopic ,pictures with an ,ordinary ,camera1 #cdf ,stick for ,lowering ,top ,sash of ,window1 #afb ,stick ,holder for ,chopping ,block1 #aia ,stick ,shellac1 ,how to ,make1 #cfi ,still1 ,laboratory1 ,cooling ,tube for1 #ahg ,stilts1 ,adjustable1 #aa ,stirring ,machine1 ,electric1 #afe ,stirring ,stick1 #def ,stocking-,stretcher ,form1 #aij ,stone ,jars1 ,carrying1 #cji ,stool1 ,milk1 #chd ,stool1 ,woven-,top1 #bef ,stop ,cock1 ,worn1 ,repairing1 #dad ,stop1 ,curtain1 #bif ,stop1 ,door1 #aeg ,stop on ,chair ,rocker for ,baby1 #aec ,stopper1 ,inkwell1 #aif ,storage ,battery1 ,filled1 ,alarm to ,designate #bec ,stove1 ,camp1 #ig ,canoe1 #ajc ,cook1 ,oil ,burner for1 #ade ,stovepipe1 ,bushing in ,chimney ,hole1 #bca ,stove-,wood ,carrier1 #bcg ,strainer1 ,cover1 #adi ,strainer for ,milk ,pail1 #ec ,strap ,hinge1 ,applying1 #bhj ,straw ,hat1 ,to ,hold on ,head1 #eh ,strawberries1 ,clean1 ,growing1 #acc ,stretching a ,curtain without a ,frame1 #aeh ,stretching ,poultry ,fencing1 #bec ,stretching ,tight-,fitting ,shoes1 #cgg ,string and ,ball ,trick1 #bgc ,string1 ,magic1 #afe ,stringer1 ,fish1 #adf ,submarine ,photographs1 #cge ,substitute for1 a ,hose ,reel1 #cfi a ,rubber ,stamp1 #ajb ,broken ,bench-,vise ,nut1 #adc ,candles1 #bdg ,cleats on ,boards1 #cbb ,glaziers' ,points1 #bic ,iron-,holder ,knob1 #chh ,pen1 #bgj ,penholder1 #beb ,drawing ,instruments1 #adf ,suitcase1 ,carrier for1 #aad ,sulphuric ,acid1 ,mixing1 #bgh ,summer ,dish ,washing1 #cef ,sunlight ,flasher for ,garden1 #agi ,support1 ,kettle-,handle1 #di ,support1 ,telescoping1 for ,hinged ,shelf1 #deg ,supporter for ,double ,clothesline1 #bhh ,supports for ,camp-,fire ,utensils1 #cga ,surprise ,water ,bottle1 #bah ,survey1 ,camera1 ,plotting a1 #ac ,surveying1 ,camera1 #g ,surveying1 ,plane-,table1 #a ,surveyor1 ,boy1 #a1 #g1 #ac ,surveyor's ,transit1 ,how to ,make1 #bj ,sweatband1 ,hat1 ,reducing ,size of1 #acb ,sweeping ,compound1 #dcj ,swimming ,raft1 #bjj ,swimming--,springboard1 #bce ,swing1 ,chair1 #ih ,swinging-,pendulum ,trick1 #bhj ,switches1 ,electric ,lights ,controlled from ,two or ,more1 #bgf ,table1 ,double ,top for1 #gh ,table ,legs1 ,loose1 ,fastening1 #bhi ,table1 ,old1 ,use for1 #cib ,table ,top1 ,workbench ,equipment for1 #chc ,tablespoon ,end ,used as ,lemon ,squeezer1 #bbe ,tack ,puller1 ,emergency1 #bhi ,tack ,puller1 ,homemade1 #agb ,tacking a ,screen on ,frame1 #bif ,talking ,machine1 ,needle ,box for1 #bfc ,remodeling1 #aea ,softening ,tone of1 #cbh ,tan ,leather1 ,to ,color ,black1 #agd ,tank-,development ,methods ,used in ,tray ,development1 #dbh ,tannin ,stains1 ,removing from ,teacups1 #bee ,taper ,ferrule1 ,how to ,make1 #chj ,taps1 ,small1 ,making1 #aig ,target1 ,electric-,lamp ,reflector for1 #aif ,teacups1 ,removing ,tannin ,stains from1 #bee ,telegraph ,code on ,typewriter ,keys1 #cac ,telegraph1 ,flash-,light1 on ,kite ,line1 #aee ,telegraph ,sounder1 ,homemade1 #aai ,telephone ,stand for ,sloping ,desk1 #aab ,telephoto ,attachment for ,hand ,camera1 #acf ,temperature ,alarm1 #cde ,tennis ,net1 ,tightening1 #bjj ,tenon on ,chair ,post1 ,repairing ,broken1 #chh ,tenoned ,joint1 ,how to ,lock1 #cci ,tent1 ,wall ,pockets in1 #ig ,testing ,dry ,batteries1 #bff ,testing ,instrument1 ,electrical1 for ,experimenters1 #cbh ,thawing ,out ,frozen ,pipes1 #chg ,theaters1 ,child's ,seat for1 #dcg ,theatrical ,night ,scene with ,appearance of ,fireflies1 #afb ,thermo ,engine1 ,atmospheric1 #abj ,thermometer1 ,outside1 ,illuminating1 #abb ,thimble1 ,repairing ,worn1 #cbf ,thread ,spool1 ,non-,rolling1 #bdj ,threads on ,wood ,shafts1 #bia ,tie a ,hammock1 ,to1 #bhf ,tie ,rack and ,collar ,holder1 ,combination1 #cj ,tie-,pin ,holder1 #bid ,tightening a ,tennis ,net1 #bjj ,tilting ,inkstand1 #cjj ,time ,chart1 ,compass1 #cgh ,time ,indicator for ,medicine ,bottles1 #ach ,time ,light1 ,electric1 #cfb ,timing ,photo ,printing1 #bde ,timing ,photograph ,prints1 #cga ,tin ,ball1 ,cutting from ,child's ,finger1 #dcf ,tin ,can ,used for ,watering ,chickens1 #add ,toasting ,bread ,over an ,open ,fire1 #aa ,tone of ,talking ,machine1 ,softening1 #cbh ,tongue ,holder for ,boy's ,wagon1 #aic ,tongue of a ,shoe1 ,holding in ,place1 #bch ,tongues1 ,buckle1 ,replacing1 #cca ,tool for ,amateur ,draftsmen1 ,combination1 #cbd ,tool ,holders ,made of ,brass ,clips1 #dad ,tools1 ,homemade ,graining1 #bjf ,top1 ,double1 for ,table1 #gh ,torch ,lights1 ,to ,prevent from ,smoking1 #bgi ,torch1 ,small1 #cbf ,tourniquet1 ,emergency1 #bjf ,towel ,roller1 #chd ,towel ,roller ,brackets1 #bbc ,towel ,roller1 ,homemade1 #bdi ,towels1 ,drying1 in ,photographer's ,dark ,room1 #cca ,toy ,balloons1 ,inflating1 #afg ,toy ,bank1 ,homemade1 #cff ,toy ,parachute ,cut-,away for ,kite ,lines1 #cgb ,toy ,parachutes1 ,kite-,line ,cutaway for1 #cjh ,toy ,popgun1 #bdj ,transferring ,magazine ,pictures1 #aec ,transformer1 ,small ,bell-,ringing1 ,construction of1 #cdh1 #ceb ,transit1 ,surveyor's1 ,how to ,make1 #bj ,transparent ,paper1 ,to ,make1 #aa ,trap1 ,mouse1 #agh1 #bbi ,muskrat1 #bab ,traveler1 ,kite-,line1 #bbh ,tray1 ,brass ,pin1 #cib ,combination ,needle and ,thread1 #gb ,developing1 ,made of ,tin ,can1 #aba ,holding ,prints in ,liquid-,filled1 #cc ,milk-,bottle1 #bce ,tray ,development1 ,tank-,development ,methods ,used in1 #dbh ,tray-,rocking ,stand1 ,photographic1 #bbh ,trellis1 ,flower1 ,umbrella ,used as1 #afd ,trellis1 ,raising ,cucumbers on1 #dde ,trick1 ,bottle-,opening1 #bbc ,bottles and ,glasses1 #dfj ,card-and-,coin1 #da ,corks-in-a-,box1 #cce ,die-and-,box1 #ada ,dissolving-,coin1 #bgb ,finger-,ring1 #ef ,hindoo ,sand1 #cjh ,lightning-,calculation1 #aja ,taking ,dollar ,bill from ,apple1 #bfc ,q1 #cfj ,ring1 #cjj ,rubber-,band-,change1 #bhd ,string-and-,ball1 #bgc ,swinging-,pendulum1 #bhj ,trick with ,knives and ,glasses1 #bbg ,tricks ,performed with ,thumbs ,tied ,together1 #bha ,trousers ,hanger1 #cia ,trout ,fishing with ,fly and ,bait1 #gc1 #gi ,trunk ,mystery1 #bfg ,tube1 ,drinking1 #ib ,tuning ,coil1 ,rotary1 #cgb ,turning ,brass ,rings1 #djj ,twine ,ball ,holder1 ,simple1 #bci ,twine ,cutter for ,use at ,wrapping ,counter1 #ahe ,twine ,spool1 #aia ,typewriter ,keys1 ,telegraph ,code on1 #cac ,typewriting on ,card ,stock1 #deh ,umbrella ,holder for ,display ,purposes1 #agj ,umbrella ,used as ,flower ,trellis1 #afd ,upholstered ,furniture1 ,homemade ,brush for ,cleaning1 #ahh ,upholstering1 ,cleaning ,dirt from ,tufts in1 #age ,utensil ,cover1 ,opening for ,steam in1 #bhh ,utensils1 ,camp-,fire1 ,supports for1 #cga ,paper-,pulp1 ,mending1 #cge ,vacuum ,experiment1 ,interesting1 #bej ,valve1 ,automatic1 for ,funnel1 #cag ,vane1 ,wind1 #ii ,varnish1 ,removing1 #abf ,varnished ,candles ,burn ,longer1 #cba ,varnishing ,bases for ,electric ,apparatus1 #cbd ,vase1 ,hanging1 #ajb ,vaulting-,pole ,attachments1 #afd ,vaulting-,pole ,holder1 #cfa ,vegetable ,slicer1 #bed ,vegetable ,stains1 ,removing1 #agf ,vent for ,pouring ,heavy ,liquids1 #chg ,ventilator1 ,window1 to ,prevent ,drafts1 #bdh ,vessels1 ,laboratory1 ,finger ,protection on1 #agj ,vibrator for ,spark ,coil1 #cji ,vignetter1 ,photo #bch ,vise1 ,bench1 ,homemade1 #adi ,clamp ,used as1 #daj ,homemade ,bench1 #bdd ,attaching to ,bench1 #agf ,vise ,screw1 ,small1 ,how to ,make1 #bie ,vise ,used as ,caliper ,gauge1 #agb ,voltmeter1 ,pocket ,direct-,current1 #cig ,wagon1 ,boy's1 ,sail for1 #acd ,tongue ,holder for1 #aic ,wall ,pockets in ,tent1 #ig ,wall-,paper ,cleaner1 #bff1 #bgc ,walls1 ,painted or ,frescoed1 ,to ,clean1 #ahg ,tile and ,brick1 ,fastening ,screws in1 #bib ,walnuts1 ,hulling1 #afb1 #bie ,war ,kite1 ,how to ,make1 #ajh ,wash ,bottle for ,laboratory ,use1 #deh ,washbasin ,bottom1 ,to ,prevent from ,wearing ,out1 #cd ,washbasin ,holder1 #bhi ,washboard1 ,to ,prevent from ,slipping in ,tub1 #ajc ,washer1 ,simple ,photographic-,print1 #ig ,washing ,board1 ,rubbing ,slats for1 #bfc ,washing ,photographic ,prints1 #afh ,washtub ,stand1 #ach ,wastebasket1 ,wire1 ,rim of ,wrapped with ,felt1 #aeh ,waste-,paper ,basket1 #cbj ,watch ,demagnetizer1 ,how to ,make1 #aej ,watch1 ,how to ,demagnetize1 #bij ,water ,bottle1 ,surprise1 #bah ,water1 ,distilling ,apparatus for1 #aab ,water ,filter1 #aji ,water ,heater1 ,electric1 #hi1 #bdc ,water ,heating ,coil in ,furnace ,pipe1 #bid ,water ,meter1 ,homemade1 #dh ,water ,motor1 ,how to ,make1 #cjc ,water1 ,surplus1 ,scraping ,off on ,grindstone1 #ahh ,water ,wheel1 ,how to ,make1 #cja ,watering ,plants at ,roots1 #bhf ,watering ,system1 ,automatic1 for ,poultry ,yards1 #ff ,watering ,window ,plants1 ,hose ,attachment for1 #bih ,waterproof ,shoe ,dressing1 #cbe ,welding ,small ,resistance-,wire ,connections1 #aeh ,wet ,batteries1 ,protecting ,binding ,posts on from ,corrosion1 #beb ,wet ,battery1 ,homemade1 #cdj ,wheel1 ,mysterious ,revolving1 #aeb ,whetting ,block1 #cge ,whetting1 ,chisel ,holder for1 #cag ,whip1 ,repairing ,broken1 #cbf ,whirligig ,clapper1 #dec ,whistle1 #da ,whistle1 ,homemade1 #ded ,whitewash1 ,to ,make ,stick to ,surfaces ,coated1 #bcc ,wind ,vane1 #ii ,wind ,vane with ,electric ,indicator1 ,how to ,build1 #cje ,winding1 ,holding ,small ,armatures for1 #aah ,windmill for ,light ,power1 #cjg ,windmill1 ,power1 #caa ,window ,casing1 ,mirror ,hinged to1 #cee ,window ,catch ,used for ,locking ,extension ,table1 #db ,window ,glass1 ,loose1 ,holder for1 #adi ,window ,lock1 #cbj ,window1 ,plant ,shelf for1 #cbd ,window ,sash1 ,to ,prevent from ,freezing to ,sill1 #aja ,window ,sash1 ,upper1 ,shade ,roller ,attached to1 #bdf ,window-,seat ,sewing ,box1 #ahf ,window-,shade ,guides1 #bhf ,window1 ,stick for ,lowering ,top ,sash of1 #afb ,window ,ventilator to ,prevent ,drafts1 #bdh ,wing ,nut1 ,how to ,make1 #ahb ,wing ,nuts1 ,homemade1 #ddf ,winter ,sports1 ,devices for-- ,bobsled1 ,coasting1 ,four-,passenger1 #bd ,bobsled1 ,guide ,ropes on1 #aee ,bobsled1 ,inexpensive1 #di ,game ,played on ,ice1 #eb ,ice ,boat and ,catamaran1 #bg ,ice ,glider1 #ca ,monorail ,sled1 #ej ,propellers for ,hand ,sled1 #ccd ,pushmobile ,racer for ,ice1 #dbh ,skates ,made of ,wood1 #cj ,skating ,merry-,go-,round1 #eg ,ski ,staff1 #ea ,skis1 ,back ,thrust ,prevented on1 #baf ,skis1 ,homemade1 #dbj ,snowball ,maker1 #dh ,snowball ,thrower1 #dg ,snowshoes1 ,how to ,make and ,use ,them1 #ce1 #dc ,steering ,sled1 #eg ,wire ,clothespin1 #chg ,wire ,expansion ,meter1 #daj ,wire ,mesh ,used as ,shelf1 #bej ,wire1 ,pulling through ,curved ,electric ,fixtures1 #agc ,wire ,wound on ,spool1 ,measuring ,length of1 #cfe ,wireless-,lighted ,lamp ,deception1 #bfj ,wireless ,stations1 ,distance ,chart for1 #bfi ,wireless ,telegraph ,messages1 ,sounder for1 #chd ,wireless ,telephone ,set1 ,simple1 ,construction of1 #ccg1 #cda ,wood1 ,brown ,stain for1 #ahi ,wood ,clothes ,peg1 #djf ,wood1 ,holding in ,sawbuck1 #agg ,wood1 ,homemade ,countersink for1 #aed ,wood ,lathe1 ,how to ,make1 #dcd ,wood ,panels1 ,decorative1 #eh ,wood ,postal ,cards1 #bib ,wood1 ,raising ,dents in1 #cha ,wood ,scraper ,handle1 #deb ,wood ,shafts1 ,threads on1 #bia ,wood1 ,skates ,made of1 #cj ,wood ,stock1 ,squaring1 #ii ,wood1 ,to ,harden ,small ,blocks of1 #dbc ,wood ,turning1 ,artistic1 #abh ,woods1 ,fine1 ,furniture ,polish for1 #baf ,workbench1 ,back ,stop for1 #bbe ,workbench ,equipment for ,table ,top1 #chc ,worktable1 ,photographic1 for ,small ,quarters1 #bae ,wounds1 ,small1 ,application for1 #cjd ,woven-,top ,stool1 #bef ,wrench for ,different-,size ,nuts1 #cgi ,wringer1 ,mop1 ,how to ,make1 #aga ,wrist ,brace1 #add ,writing ,board for ,children1 #cbe ,writing ,name ,reversed on ,paper ,placed on ,forehead1 #cib ,illustration3 colophon ,do ,you ,know a ,boy ,who is ,waiting for this ,book8 ,illustration ,he may have the few tools and materials to be found in every household1 or he may possess his own complete chest of tools and well-equipped workshop1 but something is lacking--,he needs ideas--suggestions of things to make or do4 ,he is tired of all the things that he and his companions have been able to think of4 ,now there are hundreds of other boys scattered all over this big country who have many new and interesting ideas he has never thought of1 but how can this one boy ever get in touch with all these others8 ,in just one way--through the pages of ,book ,i ,the ,boy ,mechanic ,the ,great ,book of #gjj ,things ,for ,boys ,to ,do ,these original1 practical suggestions have been furnished by hundreds of boys who have actually built and experimented with the devices they are now telling other boys how to build4 ,in no other way could a book containing such a wide and interesting variety of contents have been prepared1 for no one author or staff of writers1 for that matter1 could have possibly gleaned such a wealth of ideas from their own observation and experience4 ,a ,few ,practical ,features3 ,a large number of the things described may be made from old cast-off articles which the average boy has at his disposal4 ,many articles involving the purchase of only a few cents worth of material will be found fully as serviceable as similar ones costing several dollars4 ,scores of handy things the family can use in the home are described4 ,finally1 this book will develop and interest the boy along mechanical lines and educate him at his play4 ,,book ,i--,,the ,,boy ,,mechanic ,represents the ,best ,accomplishments of the ,mechanical ,genius of ,young ,america for the material used in the book is a careful selection of only those articles which are new1 practical and of more than ordinary interest2 the selection having been made by mechanical experts who still have active recollections of their boyhood interests4 ,it gives complete directions for making all the things boys love to build and experiment with in the fields of electricity1 mechanics1 sports1 arts and crafts work1 magic1 etc41 such as ,electrical ,appliances--,steam and ,gas ,engines--,turbines--,motors--,wireless and ,morse ,telegraph--,self-,propelled ,vehicles--,toboggans--,ice ,boats--,canoes--,paddle ,boats--,punts--,camping ,outfits--,tents--,fishing ,tackle--,magic ,lanterns--,searchlights--,cameras--,tel escopes--,gliders1 ,kites and ,balloons--,electric ,furnaces--,lathes--,pottery ,kilns4 ,a boy would be an old man before he could make half the things described in this wonderful book4 ,it is entirely different from any other published and has ,illustration3 ,wish ,i knew what to make #gjj ,articles--#dhj ,pages--#hjj ,illustrations 7#g x #aj7 ,price #b4jj ,postpaid ,it is clearly printed on high-grade book paper and durably bound in cloth4 ,the cover is of an attractive design in four colors showing a boy building a small boat4 ,there are ten solid pages of index alone4 ,neither care nor expense have been spared to make this the greatest boys' book published1 and to enable as many boys as possible to have one1 the price has been made absolutely as low as possible4 ,it would be difficult to think of a way of investing #b4jj that would benefit a boy as much as through the purchase of one of these books4 ,,popular ,,mechanics ,,book ,,department #f ,north ,michigan ,ave4 ,,chicago